Some symbolic expressions for the white colour

Share it with your friends Like

Thanks! Share it with your friends!

Close

Some symbolic expressions for the white colour

CONTENS

अण्ज्येत अचल अधस् अर्जुन अर्जुनच्छवि अवदात अवलक्ष असित इंद्रः ईषत् ऊर्ध्वपुण्ड्र ऋक्षदेव ऋश्यक कदम्ब कपोतः कपोताभ कल्माष कापोत कृ कृष्ण कृष्णवर्ण खरु गंधः गरुडः गो गौर घन चर्मानुरण्जन चित्र जरठ तमाल दर्शन दुर् धवल धवलिमन् धावल्य धूसर धूसरिमन् ध्वांतम् निर्जल पंगुल पङ्गुल पद्म परिपण पांडु पांडुकः पांडुरिमन् पाण्डु पाण्डुक पाण्डुच्छाय पाण्डुर पाण्डुरता पाण्डुरय पाण्डुरित पाण्डुरिमन् पाण्डुरीकरण पाण्डुरीकरणकृ पीत पुंडरीकम् पुण्डरीक पुण्ड्र प्रपाण्डु बलक्ष बहल ब्रह्मदत्त मुटः रजत राम रूपम् ललाम लोहित वंशरोचना वंशलोचना विचित्र विशद वेणुमन्त वोरुखान शार शित शिथिल शिलाधातु शुक्र शुक्ल शुक्लक शुक्लरूप शुक्लिमन् शुण्ठ शुचि शुब्र शुभ्र शुभ्रता श्येत श्येन श्येनः श्रवण श्वितान श्विति श्वित्य श्वेत श्वेतरण्जन श्वेतवर्ण श्वेतिमन् सित सितकमल सितकृष्ण सितरुचि सितलोहित सितश्याम सिति सितेतर सु सेराह सेराहः स्वच्छ हंस हंसांशु हरि हरिण हरिनेत्र

अण्ज्येत — aṇjyeta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899aṇjyeta «aṇjy-eta» mfn. black and white coloured
अचल — acala Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899acala «a-cala» mf («ā») n. not moving, immovable

acala «a-cala» m. a mountain, rock

acala «a-cala» m. a bolt or pin

acala «a-cala» m. the number seven

acala «a-cala» m. N. of śiva and of the first of the nine deified persons,

called «white Balas» among the Jainas

acala «a-cala» m. of a Devarshi

acala «a-cala» mf («ā») n. («ā») f. the earth

acala «a-cala» m. one of the ten degrees which are to be ascended by a

Bodhisattva before becoming a Buddha.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

acala a. Steady, immoveable, motionless, fixed, permanent;

citranyastamivācalaṁ cāmaraṁ V. 1. 4; tapase’dhivastumacalāmacalaḥ

Ki. 6. 18; samādhau -lā buddhiḥ Bg. 2. 53; yatra sthāṇurivācalaḥ S. 7. 11

immoveable. —laḥ

(1) A mountain; (rarely) a rock.

(2) A bolt or pin (śaṁku).

(3) The number seven.

(4) N. of Śiva, of the soul, of the first of the 9 deified persons among

Jainas. —lā The earth (so called because the earth is immoveable

according to one view, or, according to Ārya Bhaṭṭa who rejects this

view, acalāḥ parvatāḥ saṁtyatra, astyarthe ac; acalatvāt svakakṣāto

bahirgamanāṁbhāvādvā). —laṁ Brahma.

— Comp.

—kanyakā, —sutā, —duhitā, —tanayā &c. N. of Pārvatī, daughter of

the Himālaya mountain.

—kīlā (ba. the earth (immoveably fixed or pinned).

—ja, —jāta a. mountain-born. (

—jā —jātā) N. of Pārvatī.

—tviṣ a. [acalā tviṭ yasya] of fixed or permanent lustre or colour.

(—m, -ṭ) a cuckoo (bahuprakṣālanenāpi mālinyānapagamāt sthirā tviṭ).

(f.) permanent colour.

—dviṣ m. [acalān dveṣṭi, dviṣ-kvip] the enemy of mountains,

epithet of Indra who clipped off their wings.

—dhṛtiḥ f. a metre of four lines of 16 short syllables each

(gītyāryā). —patiḥ, —rāṭ lord of mountains, N. of Himālaya; so -adhipaḥ, —

śreṣṭhaḥ. —saptamī N. of a book in the bhaviṣyottarapurāṇa; the 7th day

of the bright half of Aśvina.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

acala (3. a + cala) 1) adj. f. ā «unbeweglich»: yadā — acalāni calanti

ṢAḌV. BR. in Ind. St. I, 41, 20. R. 1, 44, 2. 2, 15, 42. 6, 79, 49. ŚĀK. 170.

Uebertr.: yadā sthāsyati niścalā. samādhāvacalā buddhiḥ BHAG. 2, 53. —

2) m. a) «Berg» AK. 2, 3, 1. TRIK. 3, 3, 379. H. 1027. an. 3, 623. MED. l.

59. R. 1, 6, 24. 40, 4. N. 5, 3. 12, 4. acalendra R. 2, 94, 6. 3, 33, 38. Am

Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā R. 4, 26, 15. — b) «Nagel, Bolzen» H. an. 3,

623. MED. l. 59. — c) Śiva, ŚIV. — d) «der erste der 9 weissen» Bala’s H.

698. — 3) f. acalā a) «Erde» AK. 2, 1, 2. TRIK. 3, 3, 379. H. 936. an. 3,

624. MED. l. 59. — b) Name einer der 10 Erden bei den Buddhisten; s. zu

H. 233.

acala 2) e) N. pr. eines Dichters Verz. d. Oxf. H. 123,b,12. eines

Lexicographen: -kośa UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 3, 68. — 3) a) MṚCCH. 178, 1.

— b) lies Bez. «einer der 9 Stufen, die ein» Bodhisattva «zu ersteigen hat,

bevor er» Buddha «wird», und füge DAŚABHŪMĪŚVARA 95 hinzu. — c) N.

pr. einer der Mütter im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2632. — d) N. pr. einer

Rākṣasī Lot. de la b. l. 240.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

acala 1 I 1) (General.) Acala was the son of Subala, a King of Gāndhāra.

He was Śakuni’s brother and a heroic Charioteer on the side of the

Kauravas. (M.B. Udyoga Parva, Chapter 168, Verse 1).

acala 2 II Name of a bull. Among the pārṣadas of Skanda we see the bull

named Acala. (M.B. Śalya Parva, Chapter 85, Verse 74).

acala 3 III An epithet of Mahāviṣṇu. Among the thousand names of

Mahāviṣṇu we see the name Acala also. (M.B. Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter

149, Verse 92).

acala Subrahmaṇya, who was born from Śiva’s semen which fell into the

fire, was made Commander-in-Chief (Generalissimo) by the gods to kill

Tārakāsura. A large number of warriors and mothers were assigned to

assist him. A woman named Acalā was included among those mothers.

(M.B. Śalya Parva, Chapter 40, Verse 14).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

acala a-cala.

I. adj., f. lā.

1. Immovable.

2. Steady, Pañc. 202, 19.

II. m. A mountain.

— Comp. kula-, m. a principal mountain. tuhina-, m. Himālaya. mahā-, m.

a great mountain.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

acala a. the same; m. mountain, f. ā the earth.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

acala a-cala, a. immovable; m. mountain.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

acala pu° na calaḥ .. (goṁja) iti khyāte śaṅkau . parvate, acalāḥ sāgarāḥ

grāmāḥ prāsādadhavalā gṛhāḥ dhāritaṁ ca tvayāsarvamiti

pṛthivīprārthanāmantraḥ . acalaeṣa bhavāniva rājate iti māghaḥ .

pṛthivyāṁ strī . bhūmeracalatvādikamuktaṁ si° śi° go° bhūmeḥ piṇḍaḥ

śaśāṅkajñakaviravikujejyārkinakṣatrakakṣāvṛttairvṛtto vṛtaḥ san

mṛdanilasalilavyomatejomayo’yam . nānyāghāraḥ svaśaktyaiva viyati

niyataṁ tiṣṭhatīhāsya pṛṣṭhe niṣṭhaṁ viśvaṁ ca

śaśvatsadanujamanujādityadaityaṁ samantāt . sarvataḥ

parvatārāmagrāmacaityacayaiścitaḥ . kadambakusumagranthiḥ

kesaraprakarairiva . yathoṣṇatārkānalayośca, śītatā vidhau, drutiḥ ke,

kaṭhinatvamaśmani . maruccalī bhūracalā svabhāvato yato vicitrā vata

vastuśaktayaḥ . ākṛṣṭaśaktiśca mahī tayā yat khasthaṁ guru

svābhimukhaṁ svaśaktyā . ākṛṣyate tatpatatīva bhāti same samantāt

kva? patatviyaṁ khe iti . āryabhaṭṭamate tu asyāścalatve’pi acalāḥ

parvatāḥ santyatra astyarthe’ci . acalavattvāt svakakṣāto

vahirgamanābhāvādvā acalatvam . tena ca tasyāścalatvaṁ

dṛṣṭāntavidhayoktaṁ tacca vistarato bhūgolaśabde vakṣyate .

calanaśūnye tri° tasmāttvamacalobhaveti kalasasthāpanamantraḥ .

tasmānmama gṛhe nityaṁ lakṣmi! tvamacalā bhaveti purā° .

samādhāvacalā buddhiriti, gītā, acalā bhaktirīśvare iti purā° . na calati

svabhāvāt . śive pu° tasya sthāṇutvāt tathātvam . brahmaṇi na° .

niṣkalaṁ niṣkriyaṁ śāntamiti śrutyā asya

sarvakriyāśūnyatvokteracalatvam . ātmani pu° nityaḥ sarvagataḥ

sthāṇuracalo’yaṁ sanātana iti gītā .

अधस् — adhas Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899adhas ind. (see «adhara»), below, down; in the lower region; beneath,

under; from under (with acc. gen., and abl.); also applied to the lower

region and to the pudendum muliebre ([cf. Lat. ‘infra’]).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

adhas , adhaḥ ind. [adhara-asi, adharaśabdasthāne adh ādeśaḥ P. V. 3.

39.]

(1) Below, down; patatyadho dhāma visāri sarvataḥ Śi. 1. 2; in the

lower region, to the infernal regions or hell; vyasanyadho’dhovrajati

svaryātyavyasanī mṛtaḥ Ms. 7. 53. (According to the context adhaḥ may

have the sense of the nominative, -aṁkuśaḥ &c.; ablative, adho vṛkṣāt

patati; or locative, adho gṛhe śete).

(2) Beneath, under, used like a preposition with gen.; tarūṇāṁ- S. 1.

14; rarely with abl. also; bāhitthaṁ tu tatopyadhaḥ Hemachandra; (when

repeated) lower and lower, down and down; adhodhaḥ paśyataḥ kasya

mahimā nopacīyate H. 2. 2; yātyadhodho vrajatyuccairnaraḥ svaireva

karmabhiḥ H. 2. 48; adhodho gaṁgeyaṁ padamupagatā stokaṁ Bh. 2.

10; from under, just below (with acc.); navānadho’dho bṛhataḥ

payodharān Śi. 1. 4. In comp. with nouns adhaḥ has the sense of

(a) lower, under, as -bhuvanaṁ, -lokaḥ the lower world; -vāsaḥ or

-aṁśukaṁ an under-garment; or

(b) the lower part; -kāyaḥ the lower part of the body; adhaḥkṛ

means to surpass, eclipse, overcome, vanquish, despise, scorn; tapaḥ

śarīraiḥ kaṭhinairupārjitaṁ tapasvināṁ dūramadhaścakāra sā Ku. 5. 29;

adhaḥ kṛtāśeṣāṁtaḥpureṇa K. 177; -kṛtakusumāyudhaṁ 179; Śi. 1. 35, 3.

52; -kṛtainasaḥ Śi. 16. 8 dispelled.

— Comp.

—akṣa a. situated below the axle or car. (

—kṣaṁ) adv. below the car, under the axle.

—akṣajaḥ [akṣāt iṁdriyājjāyate iti akṣajaṁ pratyakṣajñānaṁ,

tadadharaṁ grāhakatvābhāvāt hīnaṁ yatya saḥ Tv.; adhaḥkṛtaṁ akṣajaṁ

iṁdriyajñānaṁ yena Malli.] N. of Viṣṇu; other etymologies of the name

are also found:

(1) adho na kṣīyate jātu yasmāttasmādadhokṣajaḥ;

(2) dyaurakṣaṁ pṛthivī cādhastayoryasmādajāyata . madhye

vairājarūpeṇa tato ‘dhokṣaja iṣyate .. —adhas See above. —upāsanaṁ

sexual intercourse. —aṁgaṁ, —dvāraṁ-marma the anus; Pudendum

Muliebre. —karaḥ the lower part of the hand (karabha). —karaṇaṁ

excelling, defeating, degradation; K. 202; so -kriyā; sahate na

janopyadhaḥkriyāṁ Ki. 2. 47 degradation, dishonour. —khananaṁ

undermining. —gatiḥ f., —gamanaṁ —pātaḥ 1. a downward fall or motion,

descent; going downwards. 2. degradation, downfall. going to perdition or

hell; mūlānāmadhogatiḥ K. 41 (where -ti has both senses); -tiṁ āyāti Pt.

1. 150 sinks, comes down (feels dishonoured); Ms. 3. 17;

arakṣitāramattāraṁ nṛpaṁ vidyādadhogatiṁ 8. 309 destined to go to hell.

—gaṁtṛ m. one who digs downwards, a mouse. —gaṁ-ghaṁ-ṭā [adharāt

adhastādārabhya ghaṁṭeva tadākāraphalatvāt] a plant Achyranthes

Aspera (apāmārga). —caraḥ [adhaḥ khanitvā carati-ac] 1. thief. 2. one

who goes downwards. —jānu n. the lower part of the knee. (-ind.) below

the knee. —jihvikā [alpā jihvā jihvikā, adharā jihvikā] the uvula (Mar.

paḍajībha). —talaṁ the lower part or surface; śayyā-, khaṭvā-. —diś f. the

lower region, the nadir; the southern direction. —dṛṣṭi a. casting a

downward look; a posture in Yoga; karaṇānyabahiṣkṛtya

sthāṇuvanniścalātmakaḥ . ātmānaṁ hṛdaye dhyāyet

nāsāgranyastalocanaḥ .. cf. also Ku. 3. 47. (—ṣṭiḥ) a downward look. —

padaṁ [adhovṛtti padaṁ, pādasyādhaḥsthānaṁ vā] the place under the

foot, a lower place. —pātaḥ = -gati q. v. above. —puṣpī [adhomukhāni

puṣpāṇi yasyāḥ] N. of two plants avākpuṣpī (Pimpinella Anisum) and

gojihvā (Elephantopus Scaber). —prastaraḥ a seat of grass for persons in

mourning to sit upon. —bhaktaṁ [adharaṁ bhaktaṁ yasmāt] a dose of

water, medicine &c. to be taken after meals &c. (bhojanāṁte pīyamānaṁ

jalādikaṁ). —bhāgaḥ 1. the lower part (of the body); pūrvabhāgo guruḥ

puṁsāmadhobhāgastu yoṣitāṁ Suśr. 2. the lower part of any thing, the

region below, down below; -vyavasthitaṁ kiṁcitpuramālokitaṁ Pt. 1.

situated down below, See pātāla. —bhūḥ f. lower ground, land at the foot

of a hill. —mukha —vadana a. having the face downwards; -khī tiṣṭhati; —

khaiḥ patribhiḥ R. 3. 57. 2. head-long, precipitate, flying downwards. 3.

upside down, topsyturvy. (—khaḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. (—khākhī) N. of a plant

gojihvā Premna Esculenta. (—khaṁ) (nakṣatraṁ) 1. flying downwards,

having a downward motion; these nakshatras are: mūlāśleṣā kṛttikā ca

viśākhā bharaṇī tathā . maghā pūrvātrayaṁ caiva adhomukhagaṇaḥ

smṛtaḥ .. Jyothisha. 2. N. of a hell. —yaṁtraṁ a still. —raktapittaṁ

discharge of blood from the anus and urethra. —rāma a. [adhobhāge

rāmaḥ śuklaḥ, dṛṣṭitarpakatvāt tasya rāmatvaṁ] having a white colour or

white marks on the lower part of the body (said of a goat) —laṁbaḥ 1. a

plummet. 2. a perpendicular. 3. the lower world. —varcas a. strong in the

lower regions; whose lustre penetrates downwards. —vaśaḥ Pudendum

Muliebre. —vāyuḥ [adhogāmī vāyuḥ śāka. ta.] breaking wind, flatulency.

—śaya-yya a. sleeping on the ground. (—yyā) sleeping on the ground;

agnīṁdhanaṁ bhaikṣacaryāmadhaḥśayyāṁ gurorhitam . āsamāvartanāt

kuryātkṛtopanayano dvijaḥ .. Ms. 2. 108. —śiras a. = mukha. (—n.) N. of a

hell. —stha, —sthita a. situated below. —svastikaṁ the nadir.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

adhas 1) adv. P. 5, 3, 39. VOP. 7, 108. a) «unten» NIR. 2, 11. H. 1526.

adhaḥ svidāsī3dupari svidāsī3t ṚV. 10, 129, 5. 119, 11. adha iva hi

manuṣyalokaḥ ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 1, 10. (= BṚH. ĀR. UP. 3, 1, 8.) INDR. 5,

10. sa (prajāpatiḥ) striyaṁ sasṛje tāṁ sṛṣṭvādha (so dass das Weib

«unten» ist) upāsta tasmātstriyamadha upāsīta ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 2. =

BṚH. ĀR. UP. 6, 4, 2. «auf dem Erdboden»: adhaḥ śayīta ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 1,

11. M. 11, 224. vom «pudendum muliebre» TRIK. 2, 6, 21. hierher gehört

vielleicht adho ramaṇīyam beim Sch. zu P. 5, 3, 39. — b) «hinunter,

hinab»: adhaḥ paśyasva mopari ṚV. 8, 33, 19. adhaścordhvaṁ ca

prasṛtaṁ brahmaivedam MUṆḌ. UP. 2, 2, 11. vilokya ŚĀK. 32, 20.

avalokya 99, 7. adho’vekṣin PAÑCAT. I, 214. adho ‘dho paśyataḥ kasya

mahimā nopacīyate HIT. II, 2. kṣipta H. 1482. bhraṣṭa N. 20, 1.

yāvattanna vrajatyadhaḥ (von der Speise) M. 11, 153. yātyadhaḥ

PAÑCAT. II, 74. mukhātpatantyadho viśīryamāṇā daśanāḥ sahasradhā R.

2, 12, 103. «zur Hölle» TRIK. 1, 2, 1. vyasanyadho ‘dho vrajati

svaryātyavyasanī mṛtaḥ M. 7, 53. 6, 35. 37. patati hyupayannadhaḥ 11,

172. — c) «von unten her»: āgataḥ P. 5, 3, 39, Sch. — 2) praep. «unter,

unterhalb» (auf die Frage «wo» oder «wohin)»: a) mit dem acc.:

pṛthivīradho astu viśvāḥ ṚV. 7, 104, 11. wird zur Bezeichnung der «Nähe»

verdoppelt P. 8, 1, 7. adho ‘dho lokam Sch. SIDDH. K. zu P. 2, 3, 2.

lokānuparyuparyāste ‘dho ‘dho ‘dhyadhi ca mādhavaḥ VOPAD. 5, 7. te

dakṣiṇasya havirdhānasyādho ‘dho ‘kṣaṁ sarpanti ŚAT. BR. 4, 6, 9, 13.

uparyuparyevākṣamadhvaryuḥ somagrahaṁ dhārayatyadho ‘dho ‘kṣaṁ

neṣṭā surāgraham 5, 1, 2, 18. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 2, 16. 14, 2, 7. — b) mit dem

gen. VOP. 5, 23. nachf.: tayoradhaḥ M. 2, 59. ŚĀK. 14. AK. 2, 6, 2, 30. 31.

H. 589. 1226. VID. 86. 234. vorangehend: adhastayoḥ AK. 2, 6, 2, 23. H.

590. adho ‘sya yat AK. 2, 8, 2, 7. — c) mit dem abl.: vṛkṣādadhaḥ

samupaviṣṭau PAÑCAT. 115, 25. vāhitthaṁ tu tato ‘pyadhaḥ H. 1227. —

d) unbestimmt ob mit dem gen. oder abl., wegen Zusammenfallens der

Casusendungen: adhaḥ padoḥ ṚV. 10, 166, 2. ye te panthā adho divaḥ

SV. I, 2, 2, 3, 8. adhaste aśmano manyumupāsyāmasi yo guruḥ AV. 6, 42,

2. cūtatarordhaḥ Up. 10. tarornimātumicchāmyadhaḥ ŚĀK. 144. ūrdhvaṁ

nābheryāni khāni medhyāni sarvaśaḥ. yānyadhastānyamedhyāni M. 5.

132. — e) am Ende eines comp.: vāhitthādhaḥ pratimānam H. 1227.

asikādhastu cibukam 582. tadadhaḥ 611. — f) verbindet sich mit dem

regierten Worte zu einem adj. oder adverb. comp., s. adhaḥkṛṣṇājinam,

adhaspada, adhojānu. — Vgl. adhama und adhara; vielleicht steht adhas

auch mit adhi in einem etym. Zusammenhange: wenn dieses als loc. («in

der Höhe») gefasst wird, kann jenes als abl. («von der Höhe herab»)

gedeutet werden.

adhas 1) a) Z. 6 schalte ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 7, 6. PĀR. GṚHY. 1, 9, 8. vor

M. 11, 224. ein. — b) adhaḥ kṛtasyāpi tanūnapāto nādhaḥ śikhā yāti

kadācideva Spr. 591. tapaḥ śarīraiḥ kaṭhinairupārjitaṁ tapasvināṁ

dūramadhaścakāra saḥ so v. a. «übertreffen» KUMĀRAS. 5, 29. — 2) b)

jātiryātu rasātalaṁ guṇagaṇastasyāpyadho gacchatām Spr. 965. — e)

WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 300. 321.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

adhas a + dhas (cf. idam).

I. adv.

1. Underneath.

2. Low, Man. 11, 224.

3. Down, Pañc. i. d. 214; to hell, Man. 7, 53.

II. prepos. Under, with the gen., Man. 2, 59, and abl. Pañc. 115, 25.

III. doubled: adhodhas, i. e. adhas-adhas, adv.

1. Lower and lower, Man. 7, 53.

2. One below the other.

— Cf. [greek] and see adhara.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

adhas adv. below, down; adho’dhas deeper and deeper. With kṛ put low,

despise; w. pat sink down. As prep. under, below, w. acc. (also

adho’dhas), gen., abl., & —°.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

adhas adhas, ad. below, on the ground; downwards, to hell;

adho’ dhaḥ, lower and lower;

adhaḥkṛ, put below, surpass;

-pat, sink down; prp. with ac. under (motion); with ab., g., or -°,

below.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

adhas avya° adhara + asi adharaśabdasthāne adhādeśaśca . pātāle,

adhasthānamātre ca . tatrāpi arthavaśāt prathamāpañcamīsaptamyarthā

unneyāḥ . tatra prathamārthe adhoramyaṁ, pañcamyarthe adhovṛkṣāt

patati, saptamyarthe adhogṛhe śete ityādi . adhaḥ

kathañciddhṛtabhūmibhāgamiti kumā° . patatyadhodhāma visāri sarvataḥ,

iti māghaḥ .

अर्जुन — arjuna Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899arjuna mfn. (cf. «ṛjra» and «raj») white, clear (the colour of the day ; of

the dawn ; of the lightning; of the milk; of silver, &c.)

mfn. made of silver

arjuna m. the white colour

arjuna m. a peacock

arjuna m. cutaneous disease on

arjuna m. the tree Terminalia Arjuna and

arjuna m. N. of a man

arjuna m. of Indra , of the third of the Pinḍava princes (who was a son of

Kṛitavīrya who was slain by Paraśurāma)

arjuna m. of a śāskya (known as a mathematician)

arjuna m. of different other persons

arjuna m. the only son of his mother

arjuna m. a kind of serpent, (voc. «aijuni»)

arjuna m. a procuress, bawd

arjuna m. N. of Uṣā (wife of Aniruddha)

arjuna m. of the river Bāhudā or Karatoys

arjuna m. («-nyau», or «-nyas») f. du. or pl. N. of the constellation

Phalgunī

arjuna n. silver

arjuna n. gold

arjuna n. slight inflammation of the conjunctiva or white of the eye

arjuna n. a particular grass (used as a substitute for the Soma plant)

&c.

arjuna n. (= «rūpa») shape

arjuna m. pl. the descendants of Arjuna

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

arjuna a. [arj-unan ṇiluk ca Uṇ. 3. 58] (nā-nī f.).

(1) White, clear, bright, of the colour of day; ahaśca

kṛṣṇamahararjunaṁ ca Rv. 6. 9. 1; piśaṁgamauṁjīyujamarjunacchaviṁ

Śi. 1. 6.

(2) Silvery. —naḥ

(1) The white colour.

(2) A peacock.

(3) A sort of cutaneous disease.

(4) A tree (Mar. arjunasādaḍā), with useful rind.

(5) N. of the third Pāṇḍava who was a son of Kuntī by Indra and hence

called aiṁdri also. [Arjuna was so called because he was ‘white’ or ‘pure

in actions’ (pṛthivyāṁ caturaṁtāyāṁ varṇome durlabhaḥ samaḥ . karomi

karma śuddhaṁ ca tena māmarjunaṁ viduḥ). He was taught the use of

arms by Droṇa and was his favourite pupil. By his skill in arms he won

Draupadī at her Svayamvara (see Draupadī). For an involuntary

transgression he went into temporary exile and during that time he learnt

the science of arms from Paraśurāma. He married Ulūpi, a Nāga Princess,

by whom he had a son named Irāvat, and also Chitrāṅgada, daughter of

the king of Maṇipura, who bore him a son named Babhruvāhana. During

this exile he visited Dwāraka, and with the help and advice of Kṛṣṇa

succeeded in marrying Subhadra. By her he had a son named Abhimanyu.

Afterwards he obtained the bow Gandiva from the god Agni whom he

assisted in burniṇg the Khāṇḍava forest. When Dharma, his eldest

brother, lost the kingdom by gambling, and the five brothers went into

exile, he went to the Himālayas to propitiate the gods and to obtain from

them celestial weapons for use in the contemplated war against the

Kauravas. There he fought with Śiva who appeared in the disguise of a

Kirāta; but when he discovered the true character of his adversary he

worshipped him and Śiva gave him the Pāśupatāstra. Indra, Varuṇa,

Yama and Kubera also presented him with their own weapons. In the

13th year of their exile, the Pāṇḍavas entered the service of the King of

Virāta and he had to act the part of a cunuch, and music and dancing

master. In the great war with the Kauravas Arjuna took a very

distinguished part. He secured the assistance of Kṛṣṇa who acted as his

charioteer and related to him the Bhagavadgītā when on the first day of

the battle he hesitated to bend his bow against his own kinsmen. In the

course of the great struggle he slew or vanquished several redoubtable

warriors on the side of the Kauravas, such as Jayadratha, Bhīṣma, Karṇa

&c. After Yudhiṣṭhira had been installed sovereign of Hastināpura, he

resolved to perform the Aśvamedha sacrifice, and a horse was let loose

with Arjuna as its guardian. Arjuna followed it through many cities and

countries and fought with many kings. At the city of Maṇipura he had to

fight with his own son Babhruvāhana and was killed; but he was restored

to life by a charm supplied by his wife Ulūpi. He traversed the whole of

Bharata khaṇḍa and returned to Hastināpura, loaded with spoils and

tributes, and the great horse-sacrifice was then duly performed. He was

afterwards called by Kṛṣṇa to Dvārakā amid the intestine struggles of the

Yādavas and there he performed the funeral ceremonies of Vasudeva and

Kṛṣṇa. Soon after this the five Pāṇḍavas repaired to heaven having

installed Parīkṣit-the only surviving son of Abhimanyu-on the throne of

Hastināpura. Arjuna was the bravest of the Pāṇḍavas, high-minded,

generous, upright, handsome and the most prominent figure of all his

brothers. He has several appellations, such as Pārtha, Gudākeśa,

Savyasāchi, Dhananjaya, Phālguna, Kirīṭin, Jiṣṇu, Śvetavāhana, Gandivin

&c. &c.]

(6) N. of Kartavīrya, slain by Paraśurama. See kārtavīrya.

(7) N. of a country Bṛ. S. 14. 25.

(8) The only son of his mother.

(9) N. of Indra. —nī

(1) A procuress, bawd.

(2) A cow.

(3) A kind of serpent.

(4) N. of Uṣā wife of Aniruddha.

(5) N. of a river commonly called karatoyā.

(6) (nyau, —nyaḥ dual and pl.) N. of the constellation Phalgunī. —naṁ

(1) Silver.

(2) Gold.

(3) Slight inflammation of the white of the eye.

(4) Grass. —nāḥ (pl.) The descendants of Arjuna.

— Comp.

—upamaḥ the teak tree; also śākaduma and mahāpatrākhyavṛkṣa.

—kāṁḍa a. having a white stem or appendage.

—chavi a. white, of a white colour.

—dhvajaḥ ‘white-bannered’, N. of Hanūmat.

—pākī N. of a plant and its fruits.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

arjuna (von 5. arj) Uṇ. 3, 58. 1) adj. f. ī. a) «weisslich, licht, die Farbe des

Tageslichts» (als m. die Farbe in abstr.) AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 83. TRIK. 3,

3, 229. H. 1393. an. 3, 352. MED. n. 30. ahaśca kṛṣṇamahararjunaṁ

(NIR. 2, 11: = śuklam) ca ṚV. 6, 9, 1. kṛṣṇāyāḥ putro arjuno rātryā vatso

‘jāyata AV. 13, 3, 26. kṛṣṇā rūpāṇyarjunā ṚV. 10, 21, 3. vajram 3, 44, 5.

vastrāṇi 39, 2. atke (von der Milch; SV. v. l. vom Soma) 9, 107, 13.

vāramavyayam 69, 4. von Insecten AV. 2, 32, 2. 5, 23, 9. so heisst «die

Erde» 5, 84, 2. «die Morgenröthe» 1, 49, 3. NAIGH. 1, 8. na hi

rājatyayodhyeyaṁ sāsārevārjunī kṣapā R. 2, 114, 14. — b) «silbern»:

preṅkhā haritā arjunā uta AV. 4, 37, 5. — 2) m. a) «Pfau» TRIK. 3, 3, 229.

MED. n. 30. — b) «eine bes. Hautkrankheit» (nach SĀY.) ṚV. 1, 122, 5. —

c) «Terminalia Arjuna W. u. A.», ein starker Baum mit wirksamer Rinde,

AK. 2, 4, 2, 25. TRIK. 3, 3, 229. H. 1135. an. 3, 353. MED. n. 30. N.

(BOPP) 12, 3. R. 3, 39, 13. 4, 1, 12. 27, 5. 5, 95, 8. SUŚR. 1, 138, 4. 2, 13,

4. 106, 12. 113, 18. arjunadrumaḥ TRIK. 3, 3, 285. arjunapuruṣam und

arjunaśirīṣam gaṇa gavāśvādi. — d) ein Name Indra’s: ariṣṭo arjunaḥ VS.

10, 21. arjuno ha vai nāmendro yadasya guhyaṁ nāma ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2,

12. 5, 4, 3, 7. Ind. St. 1, 189. fg. WEBER, Lit. 110. 131. fg. — e) N. pr. der

3te Sohn Pāṇḍu’s, gezeugt von Indra mit Kuntī, TRIK. 2, 8, 16. 3, 3, 229.

H. 708. an. 3, 353. MED. n. 30. INDR. 1, 10. fgg. DRAUP. 3, 6. MBH. 1,

3814 (vgl. 4785. fgg.). 4, 1375. VP. 437. 459. 613. 615. fg. KATHĀS. 9, 7.

LALIT. 26. LIA. I, 638. 614. Anh. XXV. Ind. St. 1, 184. 189. fg. 206. 415.

fg. WEBER, Lit. 36. 49. 110. fg. 113. fg. 176. fg. Verz. d. B. H. No. 434.

arjunaparicaya GILD. Bibl. 179. -samāgama 166. arjunāḥ «die

Nachkommen des» A. P. 2, 4, 66, Sch. — f) N. pr. ein Sohn Krtavīrya’s

(daher Kārtavīrya zubenannt), der von Paraśurāma erschlagen wird,

TRIK. 2, 8, 9. 3, 3, 228. H. 702. an. 3, 353. MED. n. 30. MBH. 12, 1750. R.

1, 75, 23. VP. 417. HARIV. 1850. fgg. LIA. I, 715. Anh. XXVII. Ind. St. 2,

136. 142. — g) N. pr. ein Śākya und grosser Mathematiker LALIT. 139.

fgg. Auch in der spätern Zeit tritt Arjuna als Mannsname auf Z. f. die K. d.

M. I, 226. Verz. d. B. H. No. 457. 814. arjunamiśra 392. 395. 398. — h) N.

eines Landes VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 25 in Verz. d. B. H. 241. — i) «der

einzige Sohn einer Mutter» (wohl mit Anspielung auf den Eigenn. Arjuna)

H. an. 3, 353. MED. n. 30. — 3) f. -nī. a) «Kupplerin» H. an. MED. n. 31. —

b) «Kuh» AK. 2, 9, 67. TRIK. 3, 3, 229. H. 1265. an. MED. — c) «eine bes.

Schlange» AV. 2, 24, 7. — d) du. und pl. N. eines Sternbildes, sonst auch

phalgunyau genannt: maghāsu hanyante gāvo ‘rjunyoḥ paryuhyate ṚV.

10, 85, 13. Vgl. KAUŚ. 75. arjunyo vai nāmaitāstā etatparokṣamācakṣate

phalgunya iti ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2, 11. Ind. St. 1, 190. WEBER, Lit. 222. — e)

N. pr. Uṣā (vgl. u. 1, «a», am Ende, wo «die Morgenröthe» so heisst), die

Gemahlin Aniruddha’s TRIK. 3, 3, 229. H. an. 3, 353. MED. n. 31. — f) N.

eines Flusses, der sonst Bāhudā oder Karatoyā heisst, H. 1086. an. MED.

— 4) n. a) = rajata «Silber»: divastvā pātu haritaṁ madhyāttvā

pātvarjunam. bhūmyā ayasmayaṁ pātu AV. 5, 28, 9. 5 (vgl. ebend. 1:

harite trīṇi rajate trīṇyayasi trīṇi). Nach NAIGH. 3, 7 ein rūpanāman — b)

«Gold» H. 1044. — c) «eine Krankheit des Weissen im Auge» H. an. 3, 353.

MED. n. 31. SUŚR. 2, 311, 2. — d) «Gras» AK. 2, 4, 5, 33. H. 1195. an. 3,

352. MED. In dieser Bed. oxytonirt Uṇ. 3, 59. ŚĀNT. 1, 17.

arjuna 1) a) und zugleich 2) e) KATHĀS. 90, 43. — 1) a) am Ende arjunī

R. 2, 114, 14 ist nach dem Schol. = śāradī oder śuklapakṣasaṁbandhinī.

— 2) c) HARIV. 3453. v. l. für añjana HALĀY. 5, 26. — g) -deva Spr. 2216,

v. l. — h) zu streichen; vgl. ārjunāyana. — 3) b) yathā hi gaṅgā saritāṁ

variṣṭhā tathārjunīnāṁ kapilā variṣṭhā MBH. 13, 3596.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

arjuna The third of the Pāṇḍavas.

arjuna 2 II A son of Emperor, Nimi. One Arjuna, son of emperor Nimi, got

philosophical advice from a Muni named Asita (Brahmāṇḍapurāṇa,

Chapter 47).

arjuna 3 III (See Kārttavīryārjuna).

arjuna 4 IV A member of Yama’s assembly. The other members are:

Kapotaroma, Tṛṇaka, Sahadeva, Viśva, Sāśva, Kṛśāśva, Śaśabindu and

Mahīśvara. (M.B., Sabhā Parva, Chapter 8, Verse 17).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

arjuna arj-una (from a lost vb. akin to rāj).

I. adj., f. nī, White, Chr. 288, 3 = Rigv. i. 49, 3.

II. m.

1. A tree, Terminalia Arjuna, Rām. 3, 19, 13.

2. The name of the third son of Pāṇḍu, Indr. 1, 10.

III. f. nī, The dawn, Rām, 2, 114, 14.

— Cf. [greek] Lat. argentum; the base of these forms is arj + vant: cf.

also [greek] see rañj, rajata.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

arjuna f. ī silver-white. m. Arjuna, one of the Pāndavas, N. of a tree; f. du.

& pl. name of a lunar mansion.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

arjuna arj-una, a. (ī) white, bright; m. N. of a son of Pāṇḍu.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

arjuna pu° arja—unan . svanāmakhyāte 1 vṛkṣe, so’ṅgaṇānniḥsṛtaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ

karṣamāṇa ūdūkhalam . yamalābhyāṁ pravṛttābhyāmarjunābhyāṁ

nivāritaḥ . madhyānniścakrāma tayoḥ śiśuḥ karṣannudūkhalam . tattasya

karṣato baddhaṁ tiryaggatamudūkhalam . lagnaṁ tābhyāṁ

samūlābhyāmarjunābhyāñcakarṣa saḥ . tāvarjunau kṛṣyamāṇau tena

bālena vakṣasā . samūlaviṭapau bhagnau sa ca madhye jahāsa vai iti

harivaṁ° . kadambaṁsarjārjunanīpaketakī ṛtu° . 2 madhyamapāṇḍave

śuddhacaritatvānmadhyamapāṇḍavasyārjunatvam . pṛthivyāṁ

caturantāyāṁ varṇīme durlabhaḥ samaḥ . karomi karma śuddhañca tena

māmarjunaṁ viduḥ bhā° vi° pa° uttaraṁ prati tasya

svanāmavyutpattikathanam . sa ca pāṇḍoḥ kṣetre kuntyāṁ śakreṇa

janitaḥ evamuktā tataḥ śakramājuhāva yaśasvinī athājagāma devendro

janayāmāsa cārjunam . jātamātre kumāre tu vāguvācāśarīriṇī .

mahāgambhīranirghoṣā nabhonādayatīva ha . śṛṇvatāṁ sarvabhūtānāṁ

teṣāṁ cāśramavāsinām . kuntīmābhāṣya vispaṣṭamuvācedaṁ śucissitām

. kārtavīrya samaḥ kunti! śivatulyaparākramaḥ . eṣa śakra ivājayyo

yaśaste prathayiṣyati . adityā viṣṇunā prītiryathā’bhūdabhivardhitā .

tathāviṣṇusamaḥ prītiṁ vardhayiṣyati te’rjunaḥ . bhā° ā° pa° . pārthaḥ

karṇabadhāya mārgaṇagaṇān yānarjunaḥ saṁdaghe līlā° 3 haihayādhipe

kārtavīrye etassinneva kāle tu kṛtavīryasutobalī . arjuno nāma tejasvī

kṣatriyo haihayādhipaḥ . dattātreyaprasādena rājā bāhusahasravān .

cakravartī mahātejā viprāṇāmāśvamedhike . dadau sa pṛthivāṁ

saptadvīpāṁ savanaparvatām . harivaṁ° 4 karavīre, 5 mayūre,

tṛṇākhyāyāmityukteḥ 6 tṛṇe 7 dhavale . 8 śubhratāguṇavati tri° . ahaśca

kṛṣṇamahararjunaṁ ca ṛ° 6, 9, 1, arjunaṁ saureṇa tejasā śuklavarṇam

bhā° . kṛṣṇā rūpāṇyarjunā vi vo made viśvā ṛ° 10, 21, 3 he agne! tvaṁ

kṛṣṇā kṛṣṇānyarjunā arjunāni śvetavarṇāni bhā°

piśaṅgamauñjīyujamarjunacchavim māghaḥ . (ājani) iti khyāte 9

netrarogabhede ekoyaḥ śaśarudhiropamastu vinduḥ śukrastho

bhavatitadarjunaṁ vadanti mādhavaḥ . ephasyāmāturekasmin 10 putre

medi° 11 indre arjunovai indroyadasya guhyaṁ nāma śata° vrā° .

arjunasyāpatyam iñ . ārjuniḥ ābhimanyau .

अर्जुनच्छवि — arjunacchavi Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899arjunacchavi «arjuna-cchavi» mfn. of a white colour, white.
अवदात — avadāta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899avadāta «ava-dāta» mfn. ( «das»), cleansed, clean, clear

mfn. pure, blameless, excellent &c., of white splendour, dazzling

white

mfn. clear, intelligible

avadāta «ava-dāta» m. white colour

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

avadāta a. [ava-dai-kta]

(1) Beautiful; avadātakāṁtiḥ Dk. 107, 37.

(2) Clean, clear, pure, spotless, refined, purified, polished;

sarvavidyāvadātacetāḥ K. 36; so vidyāvadātaṁ mukhaṁ; śāstra-.

(3) Bright, white; āpiśaṁgāvadātayā dehaprabhayā K. 36, 65, 128,

187, 189, 43, 62, 95; rajanikarakalāvadātaṁ kulaṁ K. 233; kuṁdāvadātāḥ

kalahaṁsamālāḥ Bk. 2. 18; cf. also Bh. 2. 25; Ki. 11. 75, 3. 25; 13. 37;

Śānti. 3. 14.

(4) Virtuous, meritorious; anyasmiñ janmani na kṛtamavadātaṁ karma

K. 62.

(5) Yellow. —taḥ White or yellow colour.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

avadāta (von dā, dāyati mit ava) adj. 1) «rein» AK. 3, 4, 83. H. 1436. an.

4, 92. MED. t. 178. karuṇāvadāte (hṛdi) ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 14. PRAB. 35, 10.

DHŪRTAS. 67, 3. BHAṬṬ. 2, 18. — 2) «weiss» oder «gelb» AK. 1, 1, 4, 22.

3, 4, 83. H. 1393. an. MED. śyāmāvadāta SĀV. 5, 8. R. 5, 14, 23. Als m.

die Farbe in abstr. — 3) «angenehm» (manojña) H. an.

avadāta 4) «klar, deutlich, verständlich» SĀH. D. 124, 14. 268, 11. — Vgl.

u. 7. dā mit ava.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

avadāta a. clean, pure, white, clear.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

avadāta ava-dāta, pp. pure, white, clear: -tā, f. whiteness;

-dāna, n. heroic deed;

-dā-ra, m. breach: -ṇa, n. a. rending; bursting.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

avadāta pu° ava + dai—kta . 1 śubhre, 2 pīte ca varṇe . 3 tadvati 4

viśuddhe anyasmin janmani ca na kṛtamavadātam kāda° . 5 manojñe ca

tri° .

अवलक्ष — avalakṣa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899avalakṣa «a-valakṣa» mfn. = «balakṣa» q.v.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

avalakṣa a. (also written valakṣa) White. —kṣaḥ [avalakṣyate, ava-lakṣ-

ghañ] The white colour.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

avalakṣa = valakṣa adj. «weiss», m. «die weisse Farbe» SVĀMIN zu AK. 1,

1, 4, 22 im ŚKDR.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

avalakṣa ava-lakṣa, adj. White.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

avalakṣa pu° avalakṣyate ava + lakṣa—ghañ . 1 śvetavarṇe arśa° ādyac .

2 tadvati tri° . atolope valakṣopyubhayatra .

असित — asita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899asita «a-sita» mfn. unbound

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («sita», «white», appears to have been

formed from this word, which is probably original, and not a compound of

«a» and «sita»; cf. «asura» and «sura»), dark-coloured, black &c.

asita m. the planet Saturn

asita m. a poisonous animal (said to be a kind of mouse)

asita m. N. of the lord of darkness and magic

asita m. of a descendant of Kaśyapa (composer of , named also Devala

([]) or Asita Devala ([

asita m. N. of a man (with the patron. Vārṣagaṇa)

asita m. of a son of Bharata

asita m. of a ṛiṣi

asita m. of a mountain

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («as») m. a black snake

asita m. a Mantra (saving from snakes)

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («ā») f. a girl attending in the women’s

apartments (whose hair is not whitened by age)

asita m. the indigo plant

asita m. N. of an Apsaras 12472

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («asiknī») f. «the dark one», the night

asita m. a girl attending in the women’s apartments

asita m. N. of a wife of Daksha

asita m. N. of the river Akesines (afterwards called Candra-bhāgā) in the

Paṇjāb («asiknī») x, 75, 5.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

asita a.

(1) Unbound(Ved).

(2) [na sitaḥ śubhraḥ] Not white, black, dark-blue, dark-coloured;

asitā moharajanī Śānti. 3. 4; Y. 3. 166; -locanā, -nayanā &c. —taḥ

(1) The dark or blue colour.

(2) The dark fortnight of a lunar month.

(3) N. of the planet Saturn.

(4) A black snake.

(5) N. of the sage devala.

(6) N. of a being presiding over darkness and magic. —tā

(1) The Indigo plant.

(2) A girl attending upon the harem (whose hair is not whitened by

age); see asiknī.

(3) The river Yamunā.

(4) N. of a daughter of Vīraṇa and wife of Daksha.

(5) N. of the river A kesines in the Punjab.

— Comp.

—aṁbujaṁ, —utpalaṁ the blue lotus.

—aciṁs m. fire.

—aśman, m.

—upalaḥ a dark-blue stone; lapis lazuli.

—keśā a woman having black hair.

—keśāṁta a. having black locks of hair.

—giriḥ, —nagaḥ ‘the blue mountain’; N. of a mountain.

—grīva a. having a black neck. (

—vaḥ) fire.

—ju a. (for -jānu) having black knees.

—nayanaṁ a. black-eyed; Me. 112.

—pakṣaḥ the dark fortnight; Pt. 1. 173.

—phalaṁ the sweet cocoanut.

—bhrū a. having black eye-lids.

—mṛgaḥ the black antelope.

—yavana = kālayavana q. v.; Śi. 15. 56.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

asita (3. a + sita von si) adj. «ungebunden» ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 9, 28. 11, 6.

7, 2, 27 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 3, 9, 26. 4, 2, 4. 4, 21.

asita 1) adj. f. asitā, ved. asiknī P. 4, 1, 39, Vārtt. 1. 2. dieselbe Form

auch klass. KĀŚ. «dunkelfarbig, schwarz» (als m. «Schwärze») NIR. 9, 26.

AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 17. 1397. vasma ṚV. 4, 13, 4. (uṣasaḥ)

gūhantīrabhvamasitaṁ ruśadbhiḥ 51, 9. 1, 46, 10. tvacamasiknīm 9, 73,

5. viśa asiknīḥ («das dunkle Volk» heissen «die Geister des Dunkels») 7, 5,

3. naktaṁjātāsyoṣadhe rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca AV. 1, 23, 1. 5, 13, 8. 8, 7,

1. avyāmasiknyām 12, 2, 20. 1, 23, 3. 11, 2, 18. svasitāyatalocanā N. 12,

46. MEGH. 111. asitakeśāntā N. 16, 17. niśāsitā R. 2, 96, 19. ŚĀNTIŚ. 3,

4. anantā raśmayastasya — sitāsitāḥ karbunīlāḥ kapilāḥ pītalohitāḥ YĀJÑ.

3, 166. pakṣa «die dunkle, abnehmende Hälfte des Mondes» H. 147. — 2)

m. a) «der Planet Saturn» H. 120. HALĀY. im ŚKDR. HORĀŚ. in Z. f. d. K.

d. M. 4, 318. — b) N. pr. eines Herrschers des «Dunkels» und Zauberers:

asitasya te brahmaṇā kaśyapasya gayasya ca AV. 1, 14, 4. tāṁ

(keśavardhanīṁ) vītahavya ābharadasitasya gṛhebhyaḥ 6, 137, 1. asito

dhānvo rājetyāha tasyāsurā viśaḥ ŚĀT. BR. 13, 4, 3, 11. ĀŚV. ŚR. 10, 7. —

ein Kāśyapa, nach ṚV. ANUKR. neben Devala Verfasser der Lieder 9, 5—

24 (daher ein Asita Devala MBH. 1, 106. 2048. 2, 441. 1917 (debalaṁ

cāsitam). 2038. 3, 510. 8263. 9, 2854. BHAG. 10, 13. HARIV. 951). steht

im Geschlechte der Kāśyapa ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 14. — ein Vārṣagaṇa ŚAT. BR.

14, 9, 4, 33 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 6, 5, 3. — ein Nachkomme Ikṣvāku’s, ein Sohn

Bharata’s R. 1, 70, 27. 2, 110, 15. — Auch die Buddhisten erwähnen einen

Ṛṣi Asita LALIT. 103. 110. 246. BURN. Intr. 141. 384. SCHIEFNER,

Lebensb. 248 (18). — c) N. pr. eines Berges MBH. 3, 8364. — 3) f. asitā.

a) = asiknī «b.» (s. unten) BHARATA zu AK. 2, 6, 1, 18 im ŚKDR. — b)

«die Indigo-Pflanze» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) N. pr. einer Apsaras VYĀḌI zu

H. 183. MBH. 1, 4819. HARIV. 12472. — 4) f. asiknī. a) «die Dunkle,

Nacht» NAIGH. 1, 7. asiknīmeti ruśatīmapājan ṚV. 10, 3, 1. asiknyāṁ

yajamāno na hotā 4, 17, 15. — b) «eine weibliche Dienerin von mittleren

Jahren (noch schwarz, noch nicht grau) im Harem» AK. 2, 6, 1, 18. H.

521. MED. n. 33. — c) N. pr. eine Tochter Vīraṇa’s und Gemahlin Daksha’s

HARIV. 120. fgg. VP. 117. — d) N. pr. eines Flusses im Pendshab,

Akesines (später candrabhāgā), MED. n. 33. (bheṣajaṁ) yatsindhau

yadasiknyām ṚV. 8, 20, 25. anders betont 10, 75, 5: asiknyā marudvṛdhe

vitastayā (śṛṇuhi). VP. 183. Vgl. ROTH, Zur L. u. G. d. W. 138. fg. —

Angeblich zusammeng. aus 3. a + sita «weiss», aber dieses letztere Wort

ist für die ältere Zeit nicht zu belegen und verdankt seinen Ursprung wohl

dem missverstandenen asita, wie man auch aus asura ein sura gebildet

hat.

asita m. «eine schwarze Schlange» AV. 3, 27, 1. 5, 13, 5. 6. 6, 56, 2. 72,

1. 7, 56, 1. 10, 4, 5. 13. 12, 3, 55. vielleicht VS. 24, 37. In AV. 6, 137, 2:

keśā naḍā iva vardhantāṁ śīrṣṇaste asitāḥ pari könnte eher asitāḥ die

richtige Betonung sein.

asita TS. 7, 4, 22, 1.

asita 1) asitekṣaṇā R. 3, 52, 40. -pakṣe Spr. 1191, v. l. — 2) a) VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 17, 25. BṚH. 2, 7. 11, 18. — b) N. pr. eines alten Weisen Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 310,a,24. Sohnes des Kaśyapa 56,b,38. PAÑCAV. BR. 14,11,18.

KĀṬH. 22,11. — c) KATHĀS. 111, 93. 95. 106. — d) «ein best. zu den

Mäusen gerechnetes giftiges Thier» Verz. d. Oxf. H. 309,a,19.

asita m. N. pr. eines Schlangendämons MBH. 1, 2188.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

asita 1 I One of the Ṛṭviks of the Sarpasatra of Janamejaya.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

asita [1] a. unbound.

asita [2] (f. asitā & asiknī) a. dark-coloured, black. m. N. of a cert. myth.

being & of sev. men; f. asiknī or asiknī N. of a river.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

asita 2. as-ita, a. (ā or -iknī) dark-coloured, black; m. N.;

-pakṣa, m. dark half of a month;

-pītaka, a. (ikā dark yellow;

-aś-man, m. sapphire;

-īkṣaṇa, a. black-eyed;

-utpala, n. blue lotus.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

asita pu° sitaḥ śubhraḥ virodhe na° ta° . 1 śubhravarṇabhinne

tadviruddhe kṛṣṇavarṇe . 2 tadvati tri° . 3 kṛṣṇapakṣe pu° . 4 nīloṣadhau

antaḥpuracāriṇyāmavṛddhāyāṁ 5 preṣyāyāñca strī ṅīp

kṛṣṇavarṇaparatayā knaśca asiknītyeva . asitagirinibhaṁ syāt kajjvalaṁ

sindhupātram puṣpadantaḥ tantumavavyayannasi tam ṛ° 4, 13, 4, 5

yamunāyāṁ tasyāḥ kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt tathātvam strī sitāsite yatra saridvare

śubhe kāśī° . asyāḥ strītve’pi chandasītyukteḥ na knaḥ tena ṅībapi na . 6

devale ṛṣibhedepu° . asitodevalovyāsaḥ svayañcaiva bravīṣi me gītā .

asitamuniśca himavataḥ ekaparṇāṁ nāma sutāmupayeme yathāha hari°

18 a° . tisraḥ kanyāstu menāyāṁ janayāmāsa śailarāṭ .

aparṇāmekaparṇāñca tṛtīyāmekapāṭalām . tapaścarantyaḥ

sumahadduścaraṁ devadānavaiḥ . lokān santāpayāmāsustāstisraḥ

sthāṇujaṅgamān . āhāramekaparṇena ekaparṇā samācarat .

pāṭalāpuṣpamekañca ādadhāvekapāṭalā . ekā tatra nirāhārā tāṁ mātā

pratyaṣedhayat . umā iti niṣedhantī mātṛsnehena duḥkhitā . sā tathoktā

tadāmātrā devī duścaracāriṇī . umetyevābhavat khyātā triṣu lokeṣu

sundarī tathaiva nāmnā teneha viśrutā yogadharmiṇī . evaṁ

trisraḥkumārīrvarṇayitvā . sarvāśca brahmavādinyaḥ

sarvāścaivoddhvairetasaḥ . umā tāsāṁ variṣṭhā ca jyeṣṭhā ca varavarṇinī

. mahāyogabalopetā mahādeva mupasthitā . asitasyaikaparṇā tu

devalasya mahātmanaḥ . patnī dattā tathā brahman! yogācāryāya

dhīmate . jaijīṣavyāya tu tathā viddhi tāmekapāṭalām . ete kanye

mahābhāge yogācāryamupasthite . 7 śanoca 8 apsarobhede strī asitā ca

subāhuśca suvṛttā mṛdukā tathā . hari° va° .

इंद्रः — iṁdraḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

iṁdraḥ [iṁd-ran; iṁdatīti iṁdraḥ; idi aiśvarye Malli.]

(1) The lord of gods.

(2) The god of rain, rain; cloud.

(3) A lord or ruler (as of men &c.); first or best (of any class of

objects), always as the last member of comp.; nareṁdraḥ a lord of men i.

e. a king; so mṛgeṁdraḥ a lion; gajeṁdraḥ the lord or chief of elephants;

so yogīṁdraḥ, kapīṁdraḥ.

(4) A prince, king.

(5) The pupil of the right eye.

(6) N. of the plant kuṭaja.

(7) Night.

(8) One of the divisions of bhāratavarṣa.

(9) N. of the 26th Yoga. (10) The human or animal soul.

(11) A vegetable poison.

(12) The Yoga star in the 26th Nakshatra.

(13) Greatness. —drā The wife of Indra, Indrāṇī. [Indra, the god of the

firmament, is the Jupiter Pluvius of the Indian Āryans. In the Vedas he is

placed in the first rank among the gods; yet he is not regarded as an

uncreated being, being distinctly spoken of in various passages of the

Vedas as being born, and as having a father and a mother. He is

sometimes represented as having been produced by the gods as a

destroyer of enemies, as the son of Ekāṣṭaka, and in Rv. 10. 90. 13 he is

said to have sprung from the mouth of Purusha. He is of a ruddy or golden

colour, and can assume any form at will. He rides in a bright golden

chariot drawn by two tawny horses. His most famous weapon is the

thunderbolt which he uses with deadly effect in his warfare with the

demous of darkness, drought and inclement weather, variously called Ahi,

Vṛtra, Śambara, Namuchi &c. He storms and breaks through their castles,

and sends down fertilizing showers of rain to the great delight of his

worshippers. He is thus the lord of the atmosphere, the dispenser of rain,

and governor of the weather. He is represented as being assisted by the

Maruts or storm-gods in his warfare. Besides the thunderbolt he uses

arrows, a large hook, and a net. The Soma juice is his most favourite

food, and under its exhilarating influence he performs great achievements

(cf. Rv. 10. 119), and pleases his devout worshippers, who are said to

invite the god to drink the juice. He is their friend and even their brother;

a father, and the most fatherly of fathers; the helper of the poor, and the

deliverer and comforter of his servants. He is a wall of defence; his friend

is never slain or defeated. He richly rewards his adorers, particularly

those who bring him libations of Soma, and he is supplicated for all sorts

of temporal blessings, as cows, horses, chariots, health, intelligence,

prosperous days, long life, and victory in war. In the Vedas Indra’s wife is

Indrani, who is invoked among the goddesses.

Such is the Vedic conception of Indra. But in later mythology he falls in

the second rank. He is said to be one of the sons of Kaśyapa and

Dākṣāyaṇi or Aditi. He is inferior to the triad Brahma, Viṣṇu and Maheśa

(though in some places Viṣṇu is regarded as his younger brother, cf. R.

14. 59, 15. 40), but he is the chief of all the other gods, and is commonly

styled Sureśa, Devendra &c. As in the Vedas so in later mythology, he is

the regent of the atmosphere, and of the east quarter, and his world is

called Svarga. He sends the lightning, uses the thunderbolt and sends

down rain. He is frequently at war with Asuras, whom he constantly

dreads, and by whom he is sometimes defeated. The Indra of mythology

is famous for his incontinence and adultery, one prominent instance of

which is his seduction of Ahalya, the wife of Gautama (see Ahalyā), and

for which he is often spoken of as Ahalyā-jāra. The curse of the sage

impressed upon him a 1000 marks resembling the female organ, and he

was therefore called Sayoni; but these marks were afterwards changed

into eyes, and he is hence called Netra-yoni and Sahasrākṣa. In the

Rāmāyaṇa Indra is represented as having been defeated and carried off

to Laṅkā by Rāvaṇa’s son called Meghanāda, who for this exploit received

the title of ‘Indrajit.’ It was only at the intercession of Brahmā and the

gods that Indra was released, and this humiliation was regarded as a

punishment for his seduction of Ahalya. He is also represented as being in

constant dread of sages practising potent penances, and as sending

down nymphs to beguile their minds (see. Apsaras). In the Purāṇas he is

said to have destroyed the offspring of Diti in her womb, and to have cut

off the wings of mountains when they grew troublesome. Other stories

are also told in which Indra was once worsted by Raja, grandson of

Purūravas, owing to the curse of Durvāsas, and other accounts show that

he and Kṛṣṇa were at war with each other for the Pārijāta tree which the

latter wanted to remove from Svarga, and which he succeeded in doing in

spite of Indra’s resistance. His wife is Indrani, the daughter of the demon

Puloman, and his son is named Jayanta. He is also said to be father of

Arjuna. His epithets are numerous; mostly descriptive of his

achievements, e. g. vṛtrahan, balabhid, pākaśāsana, gotrabhid,

puraṁdara, śatakratu, jiṣṇu, namucisūdana &c. (see Ak. I. 1. 44-47). The

Heaven of Indra is Svarga; its capital, Amarāvati; his garden, Nandana;

his elephant, Airāvata; his horse, Uchchaiśravas; his bow, the rain-bow,

and his sword, Paranja].

— Comp.

—agniḥ the fire produced from the contact of clouds; -dhūmaḥ

frost, snow; -devatā the 16th lunarmansion.

—anujaḥ, —avarajaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu and of Narayaṇa.

—ariḥ an Asura or demon.

—avasānaḥ a desert.

—aśanaḥ 1. hemp (dried and chewed). —2. the shrub which bears

the seed used in jeweller’s weight, (guṁjāvṛkṣa) —āyudhaṁ Indra’s

weapon, the rainbow; iṁdrāyudhadyotitatoraṇāṁkaṁ R. 7. 4, 12. 79; K.

127. (

—dhaḥ) 1. N. of horse in Kādambarī (i. e. Kapinjala changed into a

horse). —2. a horse marked with black about the eyes. (

—dhā) a kind of leech.

—āsanaṁ 1. the throne of Indra. —2. a throne in general. —3. a

foot of five short syllables.

—ijyaḥ N. of bṛhaspati the preceptor of gods.

—īśvaraḥ one of the forms of Śiva-linga.

—utsavaḥ a festival honouring Indra.

—ṛṣabha a. having Indra as a bull, or impregnated by Indra, an

epithet of the earth.

—karman m. an epithet of Viṣṇu (performing Indra’s deeds).

—kīlaḥ 1. N. of the mountain maṁdara. —2. a rock. (

—laṁ) the banner of Indra.

—kuṁjaraḥ Indra’s elephant, Airāvata.

—kūṭaḥ N. of a mountain.

—kṛṣṭa a. ‘ploughed by Indra,’ growing exuberantly or in a wild

state. (

—ṣṭaḥ) a kind of corn produced by rain-water.

—ketuḥ Indra’s banner.

—kośaḥ —ṣaḥ, —ṣakaḥ 1. a couch, sofa. —2. a plat-form. —3. a

projection of the roof of a house. —4. a pin or bracket projecting from the

wall (nāgadaṁta). —giriḥ the maheṁdra mountain.

—guruḥ, ācāryaḥ the teacher of Indra; i. e. bṛhaspati. —gopaḥ, —

gopakaḥ [iṁdro gopo rakṣako’sya, varṣābhavatvāttasya] a kind of insect

of red or white colour; K. 100.

—caṁdanaṁ the white sandal wood.

—cāpaṁ, —dhanus n. 1. a rainbow; vidyutvaṁtaṁlalitavanitāḥ

seṁdracāpaṁ sacitrāḥ Me. 64; Śi. 7. 4. —2. the bow of Indra.

—chaṁdas n. [iṁdra iva sahasranetreṇa sahasragucchena

chādyate] a necklace consisting of 1000 strings.

—jananaṁ Indra’s birth.

—jananīya a. treating of Indra’s birth (as a work).

—jā a. Ved. born or arising from Indra.

—jālaṁ [iṁdrasya parameśvarasya jālaṁ māyeva] 1. the net of

Indra. —2. a weapon used by Arjuna; a stratagem or trick in war. —3.

deception, cheating. —4. conjur ing, jugglery, magical tricks;

svapneṁdrajālasadṛśaḥ khalu jīvalokaḥ Śānti. 2. 2; K. 105.

—jālika a. [iṁdrajāla-ṭhan] deceptive, unreal, delusive. (

—kaḥ) a juggler, conjurer.

—jit m. ‘conqueror of Indra’, N. of a son of Rāvaṇa who was killed

by Lakṣmaṇa. [Indrajit is another name of Meghanāda, a son Rāvaṇa.

When Rāvaṇa warred against Indra in his own heaven, his son

Meghanāda was with him, and fought most valiantly. During the combat,

Meghanāda, by virtue of the magical power of becoming invisible which

he had obtained from Śiva, bound Indra, and bore him off in triumph to

Lanka. Brahmā and the other gods hurried thither to obtain his release,

and gave to Meghanāda the title of Indrajit, ‘conqueror of Indra’; but the

victor refused to release his prisoner unless he were promised

immortality. Brahmā refused to grant this extravagant demand, but he

strenuously persisted, and achieved his object. In the Rāmāyaṇa he is

represented to have been decapitated by Lakṣmaṇa while he was

engaged in a sacrifice]. -haṁtṛ or vijayin m. N. of Lakṣmaṇa.

—jyeṣṭha a. Ved. led by Indra.

—tāpanaḥ the thundering of clouds.

—tūlaṁ, tūlakaṁ a flock of cotton.

—damanaḥ the son of Bāṇāsura.

—dāruḥ the tree Pinus Devadāru.

—druḥ, drumaḥ 1 the plant Terminalia Arjuna (arjuna). —2. the

plant kuṭaja. —dvīpaḥ —paṁ one of the 9 Dvīpas or divisions of the

continent (of India).

—dhvajaḥ a flag raised on the 12th day of the bright half of Bhādra.

—nakṣatraṁ Indra’s lunar mansion phalgunī. —netraṁ 1. the eye of

Indra. —2. the number one thousand.

—nīlaḥ [iṁdra iva nīlaḥ śyāmaḥ] a sapphire; R. 13. 54; 16. 69; Me.

46, 77.

—nīlakaḥ an emerald.

—patnī Indra’s wife, śacī. —parṇī, —puṣpā N. of a medicinal plant.

—parvataḥ 1. the maheṁdra mountain. —2. a blue mountain.

—putrā N. of aditi. —purogama, —puraḥsara, —śreṣṭa a. led or

preceded by Indra, having Indra at the head.

—purohitaḥ N. of bṛhaspati. (—tā) the asterism Pushya.

—prasthaṁ N. of a city on the Yamunā, the residence of the

Pāṇḍavas (identified with the modern Delhi);

iṁdraprasthagamastāvatkāri mā saṁtu cedayaḥ Śi. 2. 63.

—praharaṇaṁ Indra’s weapon, the thunderbolt.

—bheṣajaṁ dried ginger.

—makhaḥ a sacrifice in honour of Indra.

—mahaḥ 1. a festival in honour of Indra. —2. the rainy season; —

kāmukaḥ a dog.

—mādana a. animating or delighting Indra.

—medin a. Ved. whose friend or ally is Indra.

—yavaḥ, —vaṁ seed of the Kutaja tree.

—luptaḥ, —ptaṁ, —luptakaṁ 1. excessive baldness of the head. —2.

loss of beard.

—lokaḥ Indra’s world, Svarga or Paradise.

—lokeśaḥ 1. lord of the Indra’s world, i. e. Indra. —2. a guest (who,

if hospitably received, confers paradise on his host).

—vaṁśā, —vajrā N. of two metres, see Appendix.

—vallarī, —vallī N. of a plant (pārijāta) or of iṁdravāruṇī. —vastiḥ

[iṁdrasya ātmanaḥ vastiriva] the calf (of the leg).

—vātatama a. Ved. desired by Indra.

—vāyū (du) Indra and Vayu.

—vāruṇī, —vāruṇikā Colocynth, a wild bitter gourd (Mar. moṭhī

kaṁvaḍaLa). —vāh a. carrying Indra.

—vṛkṣaḥ the Devadaru tree.

—vṛddhā a kind of abscess.

—vaiḍūryaṁ a kind of precious stone.

—vrataṁ Indra’s rule of conduct; one of the duties of a king (who

is said to follow iṁdravrata when he distributes benefits as Indra pours

down rain); vārṣikāṁścaturo māsān yarthedropyabhivarṣati .

tathābhivarṣetsvaṁ rāṣṭraṁ kāmairiṁdravrataṁ caran … —śaktiḥ f.

Indrāṇī, the wife of Indra, or his energy personified.

—śatruḥ 1. an enemy or destroyer of Indra (when the accent is on

the last syllable), an epithet of prahlāda; R. 7. 35. —2. [iṁdraḥ śatruḥ

yasya] one whose enemy is Indra, an epithet of vṛtra (when the accent is

on the first syllable). (This refers to a. legend in the Śat. Br., where it is

said that Vṛtra’s father intended his son to become the destroyer of

Indra, and asked him to say iṁdraśatrurvadhasva &c., but who, through

mistake, accented the word on the first syllable, and was killed by Indra;

cf. Śik. 52:

—maṁtro hīnaḥ svarato varṇato vā mithyāprayukto na

tamarthamāha . sa vāgvajro yajamānaṁ hināsti yatheṁdraśatruḥ

svaratoparādhāt … —śalabhaḥ a kind of insect.

—saṁdhā connection or alliance with Indra.

—sārathiḥ. 1. N of Mātalī. —2. an epithet of Vāyu, driving in the

same carriage with Indra.

—sutaḥ, —sūnuḥ 1. N. of

(a) Jayanta;

(b) Arjuna;

(c) Vāli, the king of monkeys. —2. N. of the arjuna tree. —surasaḥ,

—surā a shrub the leaves of which are used in discutient applications

(nirguṁḍī). —senā Indra’s missile or host. —senānīḥ the leader of Indra’s

armies, epithet of Kārtikeya. —stut m., —stomaḥ 1. praise of Indra, N. of a

particular hymn addressed to Indra in certain ceremonies. —2. a sacrifice

in honour of Indra. —havaḥ invocation of Indra. —hastaḥ a kind of

medicament.

ईषत् — īṣat Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899īṣat mfn. (pres. p.) attacking, hurting.

īṣat ind. (gana «svar-ādi» ; for the use of «īṣat» see little, a little, slightly

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

īṣat ind. [īs-ati] Slightly, to some extent, a little; īṣat cuṁbitāni S. 1. 3;

īṣacca kurute sevāṁ Pt. 1. 141.

— Comp.

—uṣṇa a. tepid, slightly warm.

—ūna a. not quite complete, a little less than; īṣadūnārthe kalyab.

—kara a. 1. doing little. —2. easy to be accomplished; Mv. 4. (

—raṁ) very little.

—guṇa a. of little merit.

—jalaṁ shallow water, a little water.

—darśanaṁ a glance, sight, view, glimpse.

—nāda a. slightly sounding (a term applied to unaspirated soft

consonants).

—nimaya a. exchanged for a little.

—pāṁḍu a. a little white or pale, whitish. (

—ḍuḥ) a pale or light-brown colour.

—pāna a. that of which a little is drunk. (

—naṁ) a small draught.

—paruṣaḥ a mean or contemptible person.

—rakta a. pale red. (

—ktaḥ) 1. pale-red colour. —2. undistinguishable colour.

—labha, —pralaṁbha a. to be got for little.

—vivṛta a. slightly open.

—śvāsa a. slightly resounding).

—spṛṣṭa a. slightly touched (applied to the semi-vowels).

—hāsaḥ slight laughter, a smile.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

īṣat gaṇa svarādi zu P. 1, 1, 37. adv. «wenig, leicht, etwas» AK. 3, 5, 8. H.

1536. tānīṣadivopatapya ŚAT. BR. 2, 5, 2, 14. (yaḥ) īṣacca kurute sevām

PAÑCAT. I, 157. Meist am Anfange von compp. P. 2, 2, 7. NIR. 3, 18. —

stabdha SUŚR. 1, 20, 15. īṣadamlairanamlairvā 47, 4. 129, 6. 151, 6. 165,

19. 179, 19. īṣanmīlitalocana VET. 13, 7. īṣatsahāsa DEV. 4, 11.

īṣaddhāsā 7, 2. īṣatspṛṣṭa AV. PRĀT. 1, 30. P. 1, 1, 9, Sch.

sapuṣpamīṣatparṇāḍhyam R. 4, 7, 12. 15. -piṅgala Ind. St. 2, 287, 4. —

pāṇḍu AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 1393. īṣaduṣṇa 1386. īṣatpakva 399. īṣatkārya

«mit geringer Arbeit verbunden»: eṣā (guhā) lakṣmaṇavāṇānāmīṣatkāryā

vidāraṇe «diese kann durch» L. «Pfeile leicht gesprengt werden» R. 4, 54,

12. īṣatkara «leicht zu vollbringen»: tvayā saha dharmacāriṇyā

mātṛpitṛvadho mameṣatkara eva PRAB. 36, 6. 8, 15. īṣatkaraḥ kaṭo

bhavatā Sch. zu P. 3, 3, 126. 2, 3, 69. 6, 2, 139. īṣatkara «klein wenig»

TRIK. 3, 2, 8. īṣatpānaḥ somo bhavatā P. 3, 3, 128, Sch. īṣannimaya,

īṣatpramaya, īṣadvilaya P. 6, 1, 50, Vārtt., Sch. īṣallabha, īṣatpralambha

P. 7, 1, 67, Sch. īṣanmarṣa, īṣanmarṣaṇa VOP. 26, 199.

īṣadāḍhyaṁbhavaṁ bhavatā «du kannst leicht reich werden»,

īṣadāḍhyaṁkaro devadatto bhavatā D. «kann leicht durch dich reich

gemacht werden» P. 3, 3, 127, Sch. Ueber diese Art compp., wo īṣat ganz

wie su gebraucht wird, s. P. 3, 3, 126. VOP. 26, 197. fgg.

īṣat , nicht im comp.: unnatamīṣat VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 8. 32, 5. 81, 19.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

īṣat īṣat (probably ntr. of the ptcple. of the present of īkṣ, with ṣ for kṣ),

adv.

1. A little, Daśak. in Chr. 198, 18.

2. When the former part of a comp., especially when followed by a

word denoting the partic. of the fut. pass.: Easily, e. g. īṣat-kārya (vb.

kṛ), Easy to be made, Rām. 4, 54, 12 (vidāraṇe, easy to be cleft). īṣat-

kara (vb. kṛ), Easy to be performed, Prab. 36, 6.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

īṣat adv. nearly, slightly, easily, a little.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

īṣat īṣ-at, [n. pr. pt.] ad. slightly, a little, somewhat; easily (often °-);

-kara, a. easily performed;

-kārya, fp. easy to (lc.);

-pāna, a. easy to drink.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

īṣat vya (īṣaṇamiti . īṣ + at .) alpam . kiñcit . manāk . ityamaraḥ ..

(taṁ dṛṣṭvā kupitaṁ putramīṣatprasphuritādharaṁ . iti viṣṇupurāṇe ..

1 . 11 . 12 .

īṣat sahāsamamalaṁ paripūrṇacandravimbānukāri

kanakottamakāntikāntaṁ . iti mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇe, śakrādimāhātmyam ..

hṛdi tiṣṭhati yacchuddhaṁ raktamīṣat sapītakam . iti carake

sūtrasthāne saptadaśādhyāyaḥ ..)

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

īṣat avya° īṣa—ati . 1 alpe, 2 kiñcidarthe ca . īṣatsahāsamamalaṁ

paripūrṇacandravimbānukāri devīmā° īṣadīṣadanavotavidya yā

tātamātṛmudamāvivardhayan kusumā° . īṣadakṛtā prā° samā° .

īṣaduṣṇaḥ īṣatpāṇḍu . 3 sūkṣmārthe ca īṣaddhautaṁ navaṁ śuklaṁ

sadaśaṁ yanna dhāritam vaśiṣṭhaḥ . īṣat sūkṣmatantukamiti

raghunandanaḥ etadupapade dhātoḥ khal īṣatkaraḥ īṣaddamaḥ .

dṛśādestu yuc vā . īṣaddarśaḥ īṣaddarśanaḥ . etatpūrbe āḍhye upapade

khal īṣadāḍhyaṅkaraḥ īṣadāḍhyaṅkaro’pyeṣaḥ bhaṭṭiḥ īṣadāḍhyambhavam

.

ऊर्ध्वपुण्ड्र — ūrdhvapuṇḍra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ūrdhvapuṇḍra «ūrdhva-puṇḍra» n. = «-tilaka» above.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ūrdhvapuṇḍra (ū- + pu-) m. «eine auf der Stirn eines Brahmanen mit

Sandel u.s.w. senkrecht gezogene Linie» BRAHMĀṆḌA-P. im ĀHNIKAT.

ŚKDR. -puṇḍraka dass. DHŪRTAS. 70, 11.

ūrdhvapuṇḍra Verz. d. Oxf. H. 13,b,46. 248,a,26. 258,b,9. 267,b,10. 19.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

ūrdhvapuṇḍra A mark worn on the forehead with yellow ochre. This mark

should be made by earth or ochre, which should be taken from the top of

a mountain peak, banks of rivers, seashore, Śaivite temple serpent-hill or

from under a holy basil. The fruits of wearing the mark will vary according

to the colour of the ochre. Black ochre will afford peace, red soil will

procure docility, yellow soil will get prosperity, and white ochre will give

duty or righteousness. As the fruits vary according to the colour, so also

it will vary according to the finger used to put the sign. If the mark is

made with the thumb the man will become stout. If it is done with the

middle finger he will have long life. If it is done with the fourth finger

(anāmikā), he will get food and if it is made with the index finger (tarjanī)

he will get salvation. The form of the mark also could be changed. The

mark may be made in the form of a flame, the leaf of bamboo reed, a

lotus-bud, a fish, a turtle or a conch. If the mark is as large as ten

fingerbreadths it is superfine. If of nine finger-breadths, it is medium

super-fine; and if it is eight and a half fingerbreadths, it is lower

superfine. In the same way if the finger-breadth of the mark is seven, six

or five they will be super medium, medium medium and lower medium. If

it is four, three and two they will be of the low, medium low and lowest.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ūrdhvapuṇḍra m. the perpendicular line on the forehead of a Brahman.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ūrdhvapuṇḍra pu° ūrdhva ūrdhvamukhaḥ puṇḍraḥ ikṣuyaṣṭiriva .

lalāṭasthe ūrdhvamukhe puṇḍrekṣavat rekhātmake tilakabhede .

taddhāraṇe vidhiniṣedhādikaṁ nirūpyate . ūrdhapuṇḍraṁ mṛdā kṛryāt

tripuṇḍraṁ bhasmanā sadā . tilakaṁ vai dvijaḥ kuryāccandanena

yaddṛcchayā śrā° ta° pu° . ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁ dvijaḥ kuryāt kṣatriyastu

tripuṇḍrakam . ardhacandrantu vaiśyaśca vartulaṁ śudrayonijaḥ ā° ta°

brahmā° pu° . aśucirvāpya nācāro manasā pāpamācaran . śucireva

bhavennityamūrdhapuṇḍrāṅkitonaraḥ ūrdhapuṇḍradharo martyomriyate

yatra kutracit . śvapāko’pi vimānastho mama loke mahīyate iti brahmapu°

. taddhāraṇe vaidikadvijātiriktasyaivādhikāraḥ yathoktaṁ devībhāgavate

śrīnārāyaṇena ūrdhapuṇḍraṁ triśūlañca vartulaṁ caturasrakam .

ardhacandrādi vā liṅgaṁ vedaniṣṭho na dhārayet! janmanā labdhajātistu

vedapanthānamāśritaḥ . puṇḍrāntaraṁ bhramādvāpi lalāṭe naiva dhārayet

. khyātikāntyādisiddhyarthamapi viṣṇvāvagamādiṣu . sthitaṁ

puṇḍrāntaraṁ naiva ghārayedvaidikojanaḥ . ni° si° sūtasaṁ°

viṣṇvāgamāditantreṣu dīkṣitānāṁ vidhīyate .

śaṅkhacakragadāpadmairaṅkanaṁ nānyadehinām .

vedamārgaikaniṣṭhastu mohenāpyaṅkitoyadi . patatyeva na sandeha

stathā puṇḍrāntarādapi . śaṅkhacakrādyaṅkanaṁ ca gītanṛtyādikaṁ tathā

. ekajāterayaṁ gharmo naṁ jātu syāt dvijanmanaḥ . śaṅkhacakramṛdā

yastu kuryāt taptāyasena vā . sa śūdravadbahiḥ kāryaḥ

sarvasmāddvijacarmaṇaḥ yathā śmaśānajaṁ kāṣṭhamanarhaṁ

sarvakarmasu . dvijastu taptaśaṅkhādiliṅgāṅkitatanustathā . saṁbhāṣya

kauravaṁ yāti yāvadindrāścaturdaśa vṛhannā° . śivakeśavayoraṅkān

śūlacakrādikān dvijaḥ . na dhārayeta matimān vaidike vartmani sthitaḥ

tataśca tripuṇḍrādidhāraṇavidhāyakavākyaṁ vaidiketaradvijaviṣayam

śūdraviṣayañca . yadapi brāhmaṇasya taddhāraṇavidhānam agnihotraṁ

yathā nityaṁ vedasyādhyayanaṁ yathā . brāhmaṇasya tatheveha

taptamudrādidhāraṇam padmapu° . brāhmaṇaḥ kṣatriyo vaiśyaḥ śūdro vā

yadi vetaraḥ . śaṅkhacakrāṅkitatanustulasīmañjarīdharaḥ .

gopīcandanaliptāṅgodṛṣṭaścettadaghaṁ kutaḥ kāśī° . tadapi

vaidiketavavipraparam sarvasāmañjasyāt evaṁ śastrārthesthite’pi

kulācārāt tasyasarvaiḥ kartavyatā . tathaiva bhārataṭīkāyāṁ nīlakaṇṭhena

nirṇītam yathā śroṇāmeka udakaṁ gāmavājati māṁsamekaḥ piṁśati

sūnayā bhṛtam ā nimrucaḥ śakṛdeko apābharat kiṁ svit putrebhyaḥ

pitarāvupāvatuḥ śrutiḥ . asyārthaḥhe ṛbhavaḥ! bhavatāṁ madhve ekaḥ

śroṇāṁ ślakṣṇāṁ gāṁ mṛdaṁ gopīcandranādirūpāṁ tīrtha nikaṭasthāṁ

mukhyakarmabhūtāṁ prati udakaṁ jalaṁ gauṇakarma avājati

avagamayati antarbhāvitaṇyartho’jatiḥ . śrīṇāṁ gām udakena

miśrayatītyarthaḥ śroṇāṁ gāṁ raktacandanādirūpāṁ vā tathā . ekaḥ

sūnayā hiṁsayā tatkartrā ābhṛtaṁ āhṛtaṁ māṁsaṁ gorocanākhyaṁ

piṁśati pinaṣṭi udakena saha iti śeṣaḥ nimrucaḥ nitarāmastaṁ gacchato

dagdhendhanasyāgneḥ sambandhi śakṛt gomayaṁ śuṣkagomayotthaṁ

bhasmeti yāvat apābharat apāhṛtavān atrāpyudakena saheti śeṣaḥ

vyavahitāścetichandasi vyavahitenāpyupasargeṇa kriyāyāḥ sambandha .

hṛgraho rbhaśchandasīti hasyabha . etāni mantrapadāni

asaṁpūrṇārthatvāt svārthalābhāya brāhmaṇamapekṣante iṣe tvorje

tvetyādimantravat tatra yathā iṣe tveti śākhāṁ chinatti ūrje

tvetyanumārṣṭīti brāhmaṇānusārāt he śākhe tvā tvām iṣe annāya

chinadmīti ūrje paśubhyaḥ anumājrmīti vyākhyātam evamihāpi

vāsudevopaniṣadbrāhmaṇatantrapurāṇopavṛṁhaṇānusārāt

ūrdhapuṇḍrārthaṁ ślakṣṇāṁ mṛdaṁ jalena miśrayediti vyākhyeyaṁ tathā

kālāgnirudravṛhajjābālādyupaniṣadbrāhmaṇatantrapurāṇopavṛṁhaṇānusā

rāt tripuṇḍrakartuḥ nimrucaḥ śakṛdapābharaditi ca vyākhyeyam

evamitarasyāpi padasya brāhmaṇamantraliṅgādyupavṛṁhaṇe

smṛtibhyaścāṣṭakāprapā vidhivadanumeyaṁ tathāca śroṇāmiti padasya

raktāmiti vyākhyāne sauraśāktagāṇeśānāṁ raktameva pārthivaṁ dravya

puṇḍrārthe tattattantre vidhīyate vaiṣṇavānāṁ pītaṁ śaivānāṁ bhasmeti

anena tattatpuṇḍraviśeṣopalakṣitatattaddevatā bhajanenāpi

devatābhāvaṁ prāpnuvantīti vighīyate . kevalavaidikānāṁ tu śroṇāṁ

ślakṣṇāmiti vyākhyānena tritayasyāpi samuccayaḥ snātvā puṇḍraṁ mṛdā

kuryāt dhutvā caiba tu bhasmanā . devān viprān samabhyarcya

candanena samācarediti smṛtibhyaḥ atra gorocanāgrahaṇaṁ

candanādyaṣṭagandhopalakṣaṇārtham eteṣāṁ

vikalpasamuccayapakṣāṇāṁ pitṛpaitāha paraṁparākrameṇa

vyavasthāmāha kiṁ svit putrebhyaḥ pitarā vupāvaturiti putrahitārthe

yatkiñcidvrataṁ pitarau mātā pitarau pitṛpitāmahau vā upetya svīkṛtya

avatuḥ vrataṁ samyak paripālayāmāsatuḥ tadeva tasya śreyaḥ sādhanati

tyarthaḥ evaṁ sati tīrthāni yajñādayastantramārgeṇa

sūryādyanyatamopāstiḥ kevalavaidikatā ceti devatābhāvaprāptisādhanāni

ityantena . śrāddhakarmaṇi tu tripuṇḍrādau vidhiniṣedhayorvyavasthā ni°

si° uktā yathā . jape home tathā dāne svādhyāye pitṛkarmaṇi . tatsarvaṁ

naśyati kṣipramūrdhvapuṇḍrabinākṛtamiti hemādrāvukteḥ . yajñodānaṁ

japo homaḥ svādhyāyaḥ pitṛkarma ca . vṛthā bhavati viprendrā!

ūrdhvapuṇḍravinākṛtamiti vṛhannāradīyāt ūrdhvañca tilakaṁ kuryāddaive

pitnye ca karmaṇīti vṛddhaparāśarokteśca ūrdhapuṇḍradhāraṇaṁ paitre

vihitam . anye tu ūrdhvapuṇḍrodvijātīnāmagnihotrasamovidhiḥ .

śrāddhakāle ca saṁprāpte kartā bhoktā ca varjayediti vāmahaste ca ye

darbhā gṛhe raṅgabalintathā . lalāṭe tilakaṁ dṛṣṭvā nirāśāḥ pitaro gatāḥ

iti saṁgrahokteḥ ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁ tripuṇḍraṁvā candrākāramathāpi vā .

śrāddhakartā na kurvīta yāvat piṇḍānna nirvapet iti viśvaprakāśe

vacanācca na dhāryamityāhuḥ . atra kulācārādeva vyavasthā . ata eva

vṛhannāradoyeḥ ūrdhvapuṇḍrañca tulasīṁ śrāddhe necchanti kecana

ityatrṛkecanetyuktam ūrdhvapuṇḍravidhiḥ śrāddhabhoktṛparaḥ, niṣedhaḥ

kartṛparaḥ iti pṛthvīcandraḥ . yattu hemādrau devalaḥ lalāṭe puṇḍrakaṁ

vṛṣṭvā skandhe mālyaṁ tathaiva ca . nirāśā pitaro yānti dṛṣṭvā ca

vṛṣalīpatimiti . tadgandhatripuṇḍraviṣayam . prākipaṇḍadānāt

gandhādyairnālaṅkuryātsvavigraham ityāśvalāyanokteḥ puṇḍraṁ

vartulamityaparārke madanaratne ca . pṛthvīcandrastu puṇḍraṁ

tripuṇḍram ūrdhvañca tilakaṁ kuryānna kuryādvai tripuṇḍrakam . nirāśāḥ

pitaro yānti dṛṣṭvā caiva tripuṇḍrakamiti vṛddhaparāśarokteḥ .

bhoktustiryaglapo bhavatyeva . varjayettilakaṁ bhāle śrāddhakāle ca

sarvadā . ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁtripuṇḍraṁ vā dhārayettu prayatnataḥ iti

vyāsokterityāha . pṛthvīcandrodaye brāhme sahadarbheṇa hastena yaḥ

kuryāttilakaṁ budhaḥ . ācamya sa viśudhyeta darbhatyāgena caiva hi .

ऋक्षदेव — ṛkṣadeva Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975ṛkṣadeva Son of Śikhaṇḍī. Mahābhārata, Droṇa Parva, Chapter 23 refers

to his horse with white and red colour.

ऋश्यक — ṛśyaka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ṛśyaka mfn. ifc. having the colour of or looking like the white-footed

antelope

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ṛśyaka von ṛśya (caturṣvartheṣu) P. 4, 2, 80.

कदम्ब — kadamba Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kadamba m. ( iv, 82) Nauclea Cadamba (a tree with orange-coloured

fragrant blossoms) &c.

m. white mustard

m. Andropogon Serratus

m. turmeric

m. a particular mineral substance

m. a particular position of the hand

kadamba m. (in astron.) the pole of the ecliptic on

m. an arrow (cf. «kādamba»)

m. N. of a dynasty

kadamba n. a multitude, assemblage, collection, troop, herd

kadamba see under 1. «kad».

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kadamba 1) m. a) «Nauclea Cadamba Roxb.», ein Baum mit

orangefarbener duftender Blüthe, Uṇ. 4, 83. AK. 2, 4, 2, 22. TRIK. 3, 3,

281. H. 1138. an. 3, 447. MED. b. 9. MBH. 3, 14494. 13, 635. N. 12, 3.

DRAUP. 2, 1. R. 3, 79, 38. SUŚR. 1, 138, 9. 141, 14. 259, 1. 263, 1.

BHARTṚ. 1, 42. MṚCCH. 91, 17. VIKR. 124. MEGH. 26. RAGH. 15, 99. VP.

168. 571. kadambānilāḥ SĀH. D. 5, 1. Neben nīpa MBH. 3, 935. R. 5, 74,

4. MṚCCH. 86, 18. — b) «weisser Senf» (siddhārtha, sarṣapa) H. an. und

MED. — c) «Andropogon serratus Retz.» (devatāḍaka) RATNAM. im

ŚKDR. — d) «eine best. mineralische Substanz» (mākṣika) H. 1054. — 2)

f. ī N. einer Pflanze (devadālīlatā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 3) n. «Menge»

TRIK. H. an. MED. abjādikadambe ṣaṇḍam AK. 1, 2, 3, 41. — Vgl.

kadambaka.

kadamba 1) a) KIR. 5, 9. -korakanyāyāt BHĀṢĀP. 165.

yadvatkadambapuṣpagranthiḥ pracitaḥ samantataḥ kusumaiḥ.

tadvatsarvaiḥ satvairjalajaiḥ sthalajaiśca bhūgolaḥ.. ĀRYABH. SIDDH. 3,

7. «The» Kadamba «flower when full blown is invested with projecting

antherae like the erect bristles of a hedge-hog», WILSON in HINDU. Th.

II, 80, N. — e) «eine best. Stellung der Hand» Verz. d. Oxf. H. 86,a,30.

202,a,4. — f) «der Pol der Ekliptik» Schol. zu SŪRYAS. 5, 1. — 3) gopa-

GĪT. 2, 4. phena- 11, 25. kadambānāṁ kadambeṣu KĀŚĪKH. 32, 94 bei

AUFRECHT, HALĀY. Ind. rolamba- «Bienenschwarm» Spr. 2668.

kadamba 1) f) GOLĀDHY. 8, 42. fgg.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kadamba kadamba,

I. m. A tree, Nauclea cadamba (its flower, when fullblown, is covered

with projecting anthers), Rām. 5, 74, 4; Kir. 5, 9.

II. n. Plenty, Śāk. 87, 15 (Prākṛ.).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kadamba m. the Kadamba tree (has orange-coloured fragrant blossoms).

m. multitude, group.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kadamba kadamba, -ka -ka, m. a tree bearing orange-coloured blossoms;

n. multitude, plenty; swarm.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kadamba pu° kada—karaṇe amvac . darśanena virahivaiklavyasādhane

(kadama) vṛkṣe amaraḥ . ekadvāre catuścakraṁ vanamālāvimūṣitam .

kadambakusumākāraṁ lakṣmīnārāyaṇaṁ viduḥ śālagrāmalakṣaṇe purā° .

kadamvamukulasthūlairabhivṛṣṭāṁ prajāśrubhiḥ raghuḥ kadambamukale

dvaṣṭiḥ samāropitā udbhaṭaḥ . kadambomadhuraḥ śītaḥ kaṣāyo lavaṇo

guruḥ . saroviṣṭambhakṛdrūkṣaḥ kaphastanyānilapradaḥ māvapra°

tadguṇā uktāḥ . tasyabhedāstatraiva . nīpomahākadambaḥ syāt dhārā

kadamba ityapi . dvitīyo’lpaprasāraśca vṛttapuṣpaḥ kadambakaḥ .

hāridrasturajovalaḥ . dhūlīkadambakoṁdhārākadambaḥ ṣaṭpadapriyaḥ .

vṛttapuṣpaḥ keśarāḍhyaḥ prāvṛṣeṇyaḥ kadambakaḥ . nīpo

mahākadambo’pi tathā bahuphalomataḥ iti bharataḥ . atra prāvṛṣeṇya

ityuktirgauḍādideśābhiṣrāyeṇa mathurādaucaitre’pi

tatpuṣpāṇādāmasmābhiḥpratyakṣatī bahuśo dṛṣṭatvāt ata eva yaḥ

kaumāraharaḥ sa eva hi varastā eva caitrakṣapāste

conmīlitamālatīsurabhayaḥ prauḍhāḥ kadambānilā kāvyapra° caitramāse

tatpuṣpavarṇanamupapadyate . etena kadambapadaṁ

kelikadambaparamiti sā° da° rāmacaraṇavyākhyānaṁ

mathurādideśānabhigamanasūcakam . tena deśabhedāttasya

vasantaprāvṛḍubhayabhavatvamiti jyāyaḥ . kavibhistu varghākāle eva

tadvarṇanaṁ kriyate yathā māghe raivatakaparvatavarṇane .

varṣartuvarṇanamadhikṛtya vihagāḥ kadambasurabhāviha gāḥ

kalathantyanukṣaṇamanekalayam . bhramayannupaiti

muhurabbhramayaṁ pavanaśca dhūtanavanīpavanaḥ . varṣāvarṇane ca

tatnaiba anavanī navanīpavanīrabhiḥ tasya ca prāvṛṇyātvādevaḥ kadamba

śūraṇaṁ tathaityādinā hariśayane bhojananiṣedhaḥ . iti tvatsamparkāt

pulakitami° prauḍhapuṣpaiḥ kadambaiḥ meghadra° āṣāḍha madhikṛtyaiva

tadgranthapraṇayanāt . iti tasya prāveṇyatvamapi . kadambavṛkṣaśca

meruviṣkambhaparvatarūpamandaramya

viśeṣacihnavṛkṣaviṣkambhaśailāḥ khalu mandaro’sya sugandhaśailo

vipulaḥ supārśvaḥ . teṣu kramāt santi ca ketuvṛkṣāḥ

kadambajambūvaṭapippalakākhyāḥ . si° śi° . asya sumeroḥ .

कपोतः — kapotaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

kapotaḥ [ko vāyuḥ pota iva yasya Tv.]

(1) A dove, pigeon.

(2) A bird in general.

(3) A particular position of the hands.

(4) The grey colour of a pigeon.

— Comp.

—aṁghriḥ f. a sort of perfume.

—aṁjanaṁ antimony.

—ariḥ a hawk, falcon.

—ābha a. of the colour of a pigeon. (

—bhaḥ) a pale or dirty white colour.

—caraṇā a sort of perfume.

—pālikā,—pālī f. an aviary, a pigeon-house, dove-cot.

—rājaḥ the king of pigeons.

—varṇī small cardamoms.

—vāṇā a kind of perfume.

—sāraṁ antimony.

—hastaḥ a mode of folding the hands in supplication, fear &c.;

kapotahastakaṁ kṛtvā S. 6.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

kapotaḥ puṁ, (ko vāyuḥ potaḥ naurivāsya . yadvā kavṛ varṇe + kaverotac

paśca . uṇāṁ . 1 . 63 . iti otac + vasya paśca .) gṛhakapotaḥ . pāyarā iti

bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . kalaravaḥ 2 pārāvataḥ 3 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 5 . 14 ..

pārāpataḥ 4 chedyaḥ 5 raktalocanaḥ 6 . iti rabhasaḥ .. gṛhakukkuṭaḥ 7 .

yathā —

mārjārarakṣite duḥkhaṁ yādṛśaṁ gṛhakukkuṭe . iti prayogāt iti

sārasundarī .. (yathā, rāmāyaṇe . 5 . 91 . 4 .

śrūyate hi kapotena śatruḥ śaraṇamāgataḥ .

arcitaśca yathānyāyaṁ svaiśca māṁsairnimantritaḥ ..) vanakapotaḥ .

ghughu iti bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . citrakaṇṭhaḥ 2 . iti medinī .. kokadevaḥ 3

dhūsaraḥ 4 dhūmralocanaḥ 5 dahanaḥ 6 agnisahāyaḥ 7 bhīṣaṇaḥ 8

gṛhanāśanaḥ 9 . tanmāṁsaguṇāḥ . vīryabalavṛddhikāritvam . svādutvam .

kaphapittāsranāśitvañca . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. madhuratvam . śītatvam .

kaṣāyatvam . vātapittanāśitvam . sārṣapatailabharjanena viruddhatvañca

. iti rājavallabhaḥ .. (asya guṇāntaraṁ yathā —

pārāvato guruḥ snigdho raktapittānilāpahaḥ .

saṁgrāhī śītalastajjñaiḥ kathito vīryavardhanaḥ .. iti bhāvaprakāśaḥ ..

kapoto vṛṁhaṇo balyo vātapittavināśanaḥ .

tarpaṇaḥ śukrajanano hito nṝṇā rucidaḥ .. iti hārītaḥ .. kapotaviśeṣasya

guṇāḥ .. yathā —

guruḥ salavaṇaḥ kāṇakapotaḥ sarvadoṣakṛt .. iti vābhaṭaḥ ..

kaṣāyamadhurāḥ śītā raktapittanivarhaṇāḥ .

vipāke madhurāścaiva kapotā gṛhavāsinaḥ .. 1 ..

tebhyo laghutarāḥ kiñcit kapotā vanavāsinaḥ .

śītāḥ saṁgrāhiṇaścaiva svalpaṁ mṛdutarāśca te .. 2 .. iti carakaḥ ..

sarvadoṣaharasteṣāṁ bhedāśī maladūṣakaḥ .

kaṣāyasvādulavaṇo guruḥ kāṇakapotakaḥ .. iti suśrutaḥ ..)

कपोताभ — kapotābha Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kapotābha mfn. pigeon-coloured, lead-grey

kapotābha m. a pale or dirty white colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kapotābha (ka- + ābhā) adj. = kapotavarṇa H. 1394. SUŚR. 2, 278, 6.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kapotābha pu° kapotasyābhevābhā’sya . 1 kapotavarṇe hema° tasya

nānāvarṇatve’pi kapotāñjanādau kṛṣṇavarṇo gṛhyate kvacit

karvuravarṇo’pi tadidaṁ bhasma kapotakarvuramiti kumāraprayogāt

karvuravarṇasya kṛṣṇādhikyāt kapātavarṇatvam . suśrutokte 2

mūṣikabhede . pūrbamuktāḥ śukraviṣā mūṣikā ye samāsataḥ .

nāmalakṣaṇabhaiṣajyairaṣṭādaśa nibodha tān ivyupakramya lālana ityādīn

sūṣikaśca kapotāmastathaivāṣṭādaśa smṛtāḥ iti vibhyajya aruṇenānilaṁ

kruddhovātajān kurute gadān . mahākṛṣṇen pittañca śvetena kaphameva

ca . mahatā kapilenāsṛk kvapotena catuṣṭayam . mavanti caiṣā ṭaṁśeṣu

granthimaṇḍalakarṇikāḥ . piḍakopacayāścogrāḥ śothaśca bhṛśadāruṇaḥ

ityuktam . rūpacatuṣṭayaṁ vātapittakapharaktajavikārarūpam .

कल्माष — kalmāṣa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kalmāṣa mf («ī») n. ( 4-1, 40 g. «gaurādi» variegated, spotted, speckled

with black

mf («ī») n. black

kalmāṣa m. a variegated colour (partly black, partly white)

kalmāṣa m. a Rakshas

kalmāṣa m. a species of fragrant rice

kalmāṣa m. N. of a Nāga

kalmāṣa m. a form of Agni

kalmāṣa m. N. of an attendant on the Sun (identified with Yama)

kalmāṣa m. a kind of deer

kalmāṣa m. N. of śākya-muni in a former birth

kalmāṣa mf («ī») n. («ī») f. the speckled cow (of Jamad-agni, granting all

desires)

kalmāṣa m. N. of a river (the Yamunā)

kalmāṣa n. a stain

kalmāṣa n. N. of a Sāman.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kalmāṣa a. (ṣī f.)

(1) Variegated, spotted.

(2) Black and white. —ṣaḥ

(1) The variegated colour.

(2) A mixture of black and white.

(3) A demon, goblin.

(4) The black colour.

(5) A form of Agni.

(6) A kind of fragrant rice. —ṣī N. of the river Yamunā

(2) The spotted cow of Jamadagni. —ṣaṁ Stain.

— Comp.

—kaṁṭhaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—pādaḥ N. of a king (saudāsa).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kalmāṣa 1) adj. f. kalmāṣī P. 4, 1, 40, Sch. gaṇa gaurādi zu 41. «bunt,

gesprenkelt» (als m. «die Farbe selbst») AK. 1, 1, 4, 26. H. 1398. an. 3,

732. VS. 24, 7. 29, 58. 59. TS. 5, 6, 22, 1. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 4, 9. ŚAT. BR. 6, 3,

1, 32. KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 2, 5. purastādagneḥ kalmāṣaṁ daṇḍaṁ nihatya

KAUŚ. 10. kāṇḍa 86. tittirikalmāṣāḥ (aśvāḥ) MBH. 2, 1043. 1824. 2083. 3,

4015. kalmāṣagoyuga 13, 4389. -kuṇḍalāḥ (nāgāḥ) 1, 798. dhenuṁ

kalmāṣīm VIŚV. 2, 20. «schwarz» H. an. MED. sh. 33. «schwarz-weiss»

MED. — 2) m. a) «ein» Rakshas H. an. MED.; vgl. u. kalmāṣatā und

kalmāṣapāda. — b) «eine wohlriechende Reisart» (gandhaśāli) RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR. — c) N. pr. eines Nāga: kalmāṣaśavalau MBH. 1, 1552. — d) «eine

Form des Feuers» HARIV. 10465. — e) N. pr. eines Dieners der Sonne, der

mit Jama identificirt wird, VYĀḌI zu H. 103. — f) Śākyamuni in einer

früheren Geburt VYĀḌI zu H. 233. — 3) f. kalmāṣī a) «eine gesprenkelte

Kuh»: (śālām) citrāṁ puṣpopahāreṇa kalmāṣīmiva suprabhām R. 5, 13,

16. abhitaḥ so ‘tha kalmāṣīṁ gaṅgākūle paribhraman MBH. 1, 6360. — b)

N. pr. eines Flusses MBH. 2, 2575. — 4) n. «Fleck» ŚAT. BR. 6, 3, 1, 31. —

Vgl. akalmāṣa.

kalmāṣa 1) = kṛṣṇapāṇḍura HALĀY. 4, 51. = citra 56. — 5) n. N. eines

Sāman Ind. St.3,242,b. — Vgl. kulmāṣa.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kalmāṣa kalmāṣa (cf. the last),

I. adj., f. ṣī, Of a mixed or variegated colour, spotted, MBh. 2, 1043; Rām.

1, 52, 20.

II. m. The name of a Nāga, MBh. 1, 1552.

III. f. ṣī,

1. A cow of variegated colour, Rām. 5, 13, 16.

2. The name of a river, MBh. 2, 2575.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kalmāṣa f. ī black spotted. m. N. of a serpent demon; f. kalmāṣī a spotted

cow; n. spot, stain.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kalmāṣa kalmāṣa, a. (ī) having black spots (-tā, f. abst. N.); m. N. of a

Nāga; n. spot.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kalmāṣa pu° kalayati kala—kvip kal māṣayati hinasti anyavarṇam

svabhāsā cu° maṣa—hiṁsāyām ac karma° . 1 citravarṇe 2 tadvati tri°

amaraḥ aśvāṁstittirikalmāṣān bhā° ā° 9 a° . tittirivaccitravarṇān

ityarthaḥ . kalmāṣā āgnimārutāḥ yaju° 24, 7 . kalmāṣāḥ karvurāstrayaḥ

paśavaḥ āgnimārutāḥ ṣaṣṭhe yape vedadī° kalamāṣa aindrāgnyaḥ yaja°

29, 58 . mārutaḥ kal māṣa āgneyaḥ kṛṣṇa yaju° 29, 59 . 3 kṛṣṇavarṇe 4

kṛṣṇapāṇḍaravarṇe pu° 5 tadvati tri° . 6 rākṣase ca puṁstrī striyāṁ

jātitvāt ṅīṣ medi° . varṇavācitve gaurā° pāṭhāt striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 7

gandhaśālau pu° rājani° . 8 agnibhede bhāratam . agnīnāṁ vāsudevena

saṁsaktānāṁ mahāmṛdhe! . te jātavedasaḥ sarve kalmāṣaḥ

kusumastathā . dūhanaḥ śoṣaṇaścaiva tapanaśca mahālayaḥ harivaṁ°

180 a° . 9 nāgabhede nīlānīlau tathānāgau kalmāṣaśavalau tathā bhā° ā°

35 nāganāmoktau . 10 kṛṣṇavinda, cite ca . kalmāṣamityeke āśva° gṛ° 4,

9, 5 . kalmāṣo nāma kṛṣṇavinducitaḥ nārā° .

कापोत — kāpota Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kāpota mf («ī») n. (fr. «kapota» , belonging to or coming from a pigeon

mf («ī») n. of the colour of a pigeon, of a dull white colour, grey

kāpota m. natron, fossil alkali

kāpota m. antimony, a collyrium or application for the eyes

kāpota mf («ī») n. («ī») f. a kind of plant

kāpota n. a flock of pigeons on

kāpota n. antimony

kāpota n. N. of two Sāmans

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kāpota a. (tī f.) [kapota-aṇ] Grey, of a dirty white colour. —taṁ

(1) A flock of pigeons.

(2) Antimony.

(3) Natron.

(4) Fossil. —taḥ The grey colour.

— Comp.

—aṁjanaṁ antimony applied to the eyes as collyrium.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kāpota (von kapota) P. 4, 3, 135, Sch. 154, Sch. 1) adj. f. ī a) «der Taube

eigenthümlich»: kāpotīṁ vṛttimāsthitaḥ MBH. 3, 15408. BHĀG. P. 9, 18,

25. — b) «von der Farbe der Taube, grau» (als m. «die graue Farbe») H.

1394. — 2) m. «Natrum» AK. 2, 9, 109. H. 945. MED. t. 104 (lies: kāpoto

rucake). — 3) f. ī N. einer Pflanze SUŚR. 2, 173, 12. Vgl. kṛṣṇakāpotī,

śveta-. — 4) n. a) «Taubenschwarm» P. 4, 2, 44, Sch. AK. 2, 5, 43. MED.

— b) «Spiessglas» H. 1051. MED. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. kapota.

kāpota 1) b) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 56. 34, 2. 54, 22. — 4) c) vasurociṣaḥ

kāpotam N. eines Sāman Ind. St.3,233,b.

kāpota 1) a) «von der Taube kommend»: rasa «Taubenbrühe» ebend.

4,87,b.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

kāpota A sage. Citrāṅgadā, the daughter of Kakutstha and Urvaśī, was

his wife. She had two sons named Tumburu and Suvarcas. Kāpota

received much wealth from Kubera and gave it to his sons. Once Kāpota

cursed Tārāvatī, the queen of Candraśekhara, that she would bring forth

two sons with monkey-faces. (Kālikā Purāṇa, Chapter 56).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kāpota kāpota, i. e. kapota + a,

I. adj., f. tī, peculiar to pigeons, MBh. 3, 15408.

II. f. tī, The name of a plant, Suśr. 2, 173, 12.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kāpota f. ī peculiar to or coming from a pigeon; pigeon-coloured, grey.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kāpota kāpota, a. (ī) peculiar to pigeons.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kāpota na° kapotānāṁ samūhaḥ aṇ . 1 kapotasamūhe kapotasyedam .

anudāttādeḥ pā° añ . 2 kapotasambandhini tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . atithivratī

kriyāvāṁśca kāpotīṁ vṛttimāsthitaḥ bhā° va° 259 a° . kāpotīṁ

dṛttiṁsvalpasaṁgraharūpām nīlakaṇṭhaḥ stuvan vṛttiṁsa kāpotī duhitrā

sa yayau purāt bhāga° 9, 18, 15, kāpotī muñchavṛttim śrīdharaḥ .

kapotasya yathā uñchavṛttitvamalpasaṁgrahatvañca tathā

kapotalubdhakīyaśabde 1670 pṛ° darśitam . kāpotavarṇo’styasya arśa° ac

. 3 sauvīrāñjane 4 rucake (sarñikākṣāre) na° medi° . 5 kapotābhavarṇe

pu° 6 tadvati tri° hema° . 7 oṣadhibhede strī gau° ṅīṣ .

tallakṣmasthānamuktaṁ suśrute kauśikīṁ saritaṁ tīrtvā sañjayantyāstu

pūrvataḥ . kṣitipradeśovalmīkairācitoyojanatrayam . vijñeyā tatra kāpotī

śvetā valmīkamūrdhasu suśru° . oṣadhilakṣaṇādikathane .

कृ — kṛ Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṛ «to treat by force», commit a rape, violate (a female)

kṛ Ved. (I) cl.2.P. 2. sg. «karṣi» du. «kṛthas» pl. «kṛtha»; ā. 2. sg. «kṛṣe»;

impf. 2. and 3. sg. «akar», 3. sg. rarely «akat» ( iii, xi); «mithyā k-«, he

pronounces wrongly ; «kaikeyīm anu rājānaṁ kāraya», treat or deal with

Kaikeyī as the king does Desid. «cikīrṣati» (aor. 2. sg. «acikīrṣīs» iii), ep.

also «-te», to wish to make or do, intend to do, design, intend, begin,

strive after &c.; to wish to sacrifice or worship Intens. 3. pl. «karikrati»

(pr. p. «karikrat» see , to do repeatedly ; Class. «carkarti» or «carikarti» or

«carīkarti» ([ 7-4, 92 «carkarīti» or «carikarīti» or «carīkarīti» or «cekrīyate»

([ib. ; ([cf. Hib. ‘caraim’, «I perform, execute»; ‘ceard’, «an art, trade,

business, function»; ‘sucridh’, «easy»; Old Germ. ‘karawan’, «to prepare»;

Mod. Germ. ‘gar’, «prepared (as food)»; Lat. ‘creo’, ‘ceremonia’;

[characters].])

kṛ cl.3.P. p. «cakrat» (Pot. 2. sg. «cakriyās»; aor. 1. sg. «akārṣam» [ vii, 7,

1] or «akāriṣam» [ iv, 39, 6]), to make mention of, praise, speak highly of

(gen.) Intens. (1. sg. «carkarmi», 1. pl. «carkirāma», 3. pl. «carkiran»;

Impv. 2. sg. «carkṛtāt» and «carkṛdhi»; aor. 3. sg. ā. «carkṛṣe») id. (cf.

«kāru, kīri, kīrti».)

kṛ to injure, &c. see 2. «kṝ».

kṛ P. «-karoti», to make straight

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṛ I. 5 U. (kṛṇoti-kṛṇute) To hurt, injure, kill. —II. 8 U. (karoti-kurute,

cakāra-cakre, akārṣīt-akṛta, kartuṁ, kariṣyati-te, kṛta)

(1) To do (in general); tāta kiṁkaravāṇyahaṁ.

(2) To make; gaṇikāmavarodhamakarot Dk; nṛpeṇa cakre

yuvarājaśabdabhāk R. 3. 35; yuvarājaḥ kṛtaḥ &c.

(3) To manufacture, shape, prepare; kuṁbhakāro ghaṭaṁ karoti;

kaṭaṁ karoti &c.

(4) To build, create; gṛhaṁ kuru; sabhāṁ kuru madarthe bhoḥ

(5) To produce, cause, engender; ratimubhayaprārthanā kurute S. 2.

1.

(6) To form, arrange; aṁjaliṁ karoti; kapotahastakaṁ kṛtvā.

(7) To write, compose; cakāra sumanoharaṁ śāstraṁ Pt. 1.

(8) To perform, be engaged in; pūjāṁ karoti.

(9) To tell, narrate; iti bahuvidhāḥ kathāḥ kurvan &c. (10) To carry

out, execute, obey; evaṁ kriyate yuṣmadādeśaḥ Mal. 1; or kariṣyāmi

vacastava or śāsanaṁ me kuruṣva &c.

(11) To bring about, accomplish, effect; satsaṁgatiḥ kathaya kiṁ na

karoti pusāṁ Bh. 2. 23. —12. To throw or let out, discharge, emit;

mūtraṁ kṛ to discharge urine, make water; so purīṣaṁ kṛ to void

excrement.

(13) To assume, put on, take; strīrūpaṁ kṛtvā; nānārūpāṇi kurvāṇaḥ

Y. 3. 162.

(14) To send forth, utter; mānuṣīṁ giraṁ kṛtvā, kalaravaṁ kṛtvā &c.

(15) To place or put on (with loc.); kaṁṭhe hāramakaret K. 212;

pāṇimurasi kṛtvā &c.

(16) To entrust (with some duty), appoint; adhyakṣān

vividhānkuryāttatra tatra vipaścitaḥ Ms. 7. 81.

(17) To cook (as food) as in kṛtānnaṁ.

(18) To think, regard, consider; dṛṣṭistṛṇīkṛtajagattrayasattvasārā U.

6. 19.

(19) To take (as in the hand); kuru kare gurumekamayoghanaṁ N. 4.

59. (20) To make a sound, as in khātkṛtya, phūtkṛtya bhuṁkte; so

vaṣaṭakṛ, svāhākṛ &c.

(21) To pass, spend (time); varṣāṇi daśa cakruḥ spent; kṣaṇaṁ kuru

wait a moment.

(22) To direct towards, turn the attention to, resolve on; (with loc. or

dat.); nādharme kurute manaḥ Ms. 12. 118; nagaragamanāya matiṁ na

karoti S. 2.

(23) To do a thing for another (either for his advantage or injury;

prāptāgninirvāpaṇagarvamaṁbu ratnāṁkurajyotiṣi kiṁ karoti Vikr. 1. 18;

yadanena kṛtaṁ mayi, asau kiṁ me kariṣyati &c.

(24) To use, employ, make use of; kiṁ tayā kriyate dhenvā Pt. 1.

(25) To divide, break into parts (with adverbs ending in dhā); dvidhā

kṛ to divide into two parts; śatadhā kṛ, sahasradhā kṛ &c.

(26) To cause to become subject to, reduce completely to (a

particular condition, with adverbs ending in sāt); ātmasāt kṛ to subject or

appropriate to oneself; R. 8. 2; bhasmasāt kṛ to reduce to ashes.

(27) To appropriate, secure for oneself.

(28) To help, give aid.

(29) To make liable. (30) To violate or outrage (as a girl).

(31) To begin.

(32) To order.

(33) To free from.

(34) To proceed with, put in practice.

(35) To worship, sacrifice.

(36) To make like, consider equal to, cf. tṛṇīkṛ (said to be Atm. only in

the last 10 senses). This root is often used with nouns, adjectives, and

indeclinables to form verbs from them, somewhat like the English affixes

‘en’ or ‘(i) fy’, in the sense of ‘making a person or thing to be what it

previously is not’; e. g. kṛṣṇīkṛ to make that which is not already black,

black, i. e. blacken; so śvetīkṛ to whiten; ghanīkṛ to solidify; viralīkṛ to

rarefy &c. &c. Sometimes these formations take place in other senses

also; e. g. kroḍīkṛ ‘to clasp to the bosom’, embrace bhasmīkṛ to reduce to

ashes; pravaṇīkṛ to incline, bend; tṛṇīkṛ to value as little as straw;

maṁdīkṛ to slacken, make slow; so śūlākṛ to roast on the end of pointed

lances; sukhākṛ to please; samayākṛ to spend time &c. N. B. This root by

itself admits of either Pada; but it is Atm. generally with prepositions in

the following senses:

(1) doing injury to;

(2) censure, blame;

(3) serving;

(4) outraging, acting violently or rashly;

(5) preparing, changing the condition of, turning into;

(6) reciting.

(7) employing, using; see P. 1. 3. 32 and «Student’s Guide to Sanskrit

Composition» Par. 338. Note. The root kṛ is of the most frequent

application in Sanskrit literature, and its senses are variously modified, or

almost infinitely extended, according to the noun with which the root is

connected; e. g. padaṁ kṛ to set foot (fig. also); āśrame padaṁ kariṣyasi

S. 4. 19; krameṇa kṛtaṁ mama vapuṣi navayauvanena padaṁ K. 141;

manasā kṛ to think of, meditate; manasi kṛ to think; dṛṣṭvā

manasyevamakarot K. 136; or to resolve or determine; sakhyaṁ, maitrīṁ

kṛ to form friendship with; astrāṇi kṛ to practise the use of weapons;

daṁḍaṁ kṛ to inflict punishment; hṛdaye kṛ to pay heed to; kālaṁ kṛ to

die; matiṁ duddhiṁ-kṛ to think of, intend, mean; udakaṁ kṛ to offer

libations of water to the Manes; ciraṁ kṛ to delay; darduraṁ kṛ to play on

the lute; nakhāni kṛ to clean the nails; kanyāṁ kṛ to outrage or violate a

maiden; vinā kṛ to separate from, to be abandoned by, as in madanena

vinākṛtā ratiḥ Ku. 4. 21; madhye kṛ to place in the middle, to have

reference to; madhyekṛtya sthitaṁ krathakaiśikān M. 5. 2; vaśe kṛ to win

over, place in subjection, subdue; camatkṛ to cause surprise; make an

exhibition or a show; satkṛ to honour, treat with respect; tiryakkṛ to place

aside. —Caus. (kārayati-te) To cause to do, perform, make, execute &c.;

ājñāṁ kāraya rakṣebhiḥ Bk. 8. 84; bhṛtyaṁ bhṛtyena vā kaṭaṁ kārayati

Sk. —Desid. (cikīrṣīti -te) To wish to do &c.; Śi. 14. 41.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kṛ 1. kṛ (originally skṛ; cf. ava-, upa-, pari-, sam-, abhi-sam-, upa-sam-,

prati-sam-, and kośaskṛt), ii. 8, Par., Ātm., karomi (in epic poetry also

kurmi, MBh. 3, 10943); ved. ii. 5, kṛṇomi; ii. 2, e. g. karṣi; i. 1, karasi.

1. To make, Chr. 293, 3 = Rigv. i. 88, 3 (kṛṇavante, ved. conjunct.);

Pañc. i. d. 436; Man. 2, 154; Rām. 1, 1, 59.

2. To do, Rām. 1, 9, 10.

3. To perform, Chr. 293, 4 = Rigv. i. 88, 4 (kṛṇvantaḥ); Man. 1, 55

(one’s natural functions); Rām. 3, 53, 11 (an order); 1, 2, 2 (to show

respect); Pañc. 82, 14 (to show pride).

4. To tell, Rām. 1, 2, 34.

5. To compose, Rām. 1, 3, 38.

6. To appoint, Man. 7, 78; 9, 127.

7. To sacrifice, Man. 3, 210.

8. To act for or against a person; with the gen. of the person, MBh. 3,

2160; with the loc., Rām. 2, 64, 61.

9. To assume, Man. 7, 10.

10. To prepare, MBh. 13, 2794; to cook, Man. 9, 219.

11. To cultivate, Yājñ. 2, 158; to till, Man. 10, 114.

12. With nouns designing sounds, speech, To utter, MBh. 3, 11718.

13. With nouns designing time, To pass, MBh. 15, 6; to wait, 1. 2294;

with ciram, To delay, Hiḍ. 4, 13.

14. With nouns denoting mind, To give one’s heart to, Man. 12, 118;

to resolve, Chr. 11, 11; Rām. 1, 9, 55.

15. With astrāṇi, To practise, MBh. 3, 11824; with udakam or salilam,

To make the oblation of water to a deceased one, Man. 5. 188; Rām. 1,

44, 49; with kanyām, To contaminate, Man. 8, 367; with kāryam, To put

up with, Pañc. iv. 28; with daṇḍam, To inflict a punishment, Lass. 14, 14;

with dārān, To give a wife in marriage, Rām. 1, 77, 26; with nāma, To

give a name, Man. 5, 70; with paścāt, To surpass, Ragh. 17, 18; with

punar, To undo, Man. 8, 154; with bhaṅgam, To break, Pañc. 8, 17; with

bhiyam, To fear, Rām. 1, 22, 14 Gorr.; with vasuṁdharām, To wander

over, Rām. 4, 46, 14; with vahis, To exclude, Man. 2, 103; to expel; with

vinā, To deprive, Nal. 13, 25; with śramam, To apply diligence, Man. 2,

168; with sneham, To think of the love, Rām. 1, 21, 14.

16. With the instr., To do with, kiṁ kariṣyati saṁsargaiḥ, Of what use

will be conjunction, Cāṇ. 106, in Monatsb. d. Berl. Ak. d. Wiss., 1864,

413; To use, Man. 10, 91; with manasā, To mind, MBh. 1, 7051; with

hṛdayena, To love, Mṛcch. 73, 7.

17. To be of use, with gen., Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 2436.

18. With the loc., To put on, MBh. 1, 1883; with manasi; To mind,

Rām. 2, 64, 8; with hṛdaye, To mind, Cāṇ. 92, in Monatsber. d. Berl. Ak.

d. Wiss. 1864, 413; with hṛdi, To remember, Rājat. 5, 313; with vaśe, To

subdue, Man. 2, 100.

19. With the infin., To begin, Rām. 2, 6, 10. — Ptcple. of the pf. pass.

kṛta,

I. very often as former part of comp. words, and as n.

1. Well done, MBh. 1, 1615.

2. Well, Rām. 3, 3, 16.

3. Away with, with instr., or saha and instr., Mṛcch. 108, 5.

II. n.

1. Doing, Man. 7, 197.

2. A benefit, Pañc. i. d. 427.

3. The name of one of the dice, MBh. 4, 1578.

4. The name of the first age of the world, Man. 1, 69.

III. m. A proper name, MBh. 13, 4356.

IV. Instr. kṛtena, and loc. kṛte, On account of, Rām. 1, 76, 6; 1, 45, 45.

— Comp. akṛta see separately. duṣkṛta, i. e. dus-,

I. adj. 1. wicked. Man. 11, 229. 2. unreasonable, MBh. 2, 1400.

II. n. sin, Man. 3, 191. brahmāñjalikṛta, i. e. brahman-añjali-kṛta, adj., an

anomalous comp., having made scriptural homage, Man. 2, 70. viśva-,

adj. made by Viśvakarman (?), Chr. 38, 12. saha-, adj. assisted, Bhāṣāp.

65. su-,

I. adj. 1. done well. 2. treated with kindness. 3. virtuous, pious. 4.

fortunate. II. n. 1. a virtuous act, Man. 3, 37. 2. kindness. 3. virtue. 4.

fortune. svayam-, adj. 1. self-formed. 2. Done by, to, or for one’s self.

hāhā-, adj. filled with the uproar of a battle, Chr. 32, 25. — Ptcple. of the

fut. pass., kartavya, n. A work, Rām. 1, 34, 32. Comp. tad-, n. suitable

action, Rājat. 6, 269. kārya and kṛtya see separately. — Causal, kāraya,

1. To cause to be performed, Man. 2, 30; to cause to be cultivated,

Yājñ. 2, 158; to cause to be put, Man. 8, 251; to cause to be treated,

Rām. 2, 58, 16.

2. To order to make, Man. 7, 16; to order to prepare, Pañc. 129, 9; to

order to practise, Man. 8, 410.

3. To make, Hit. d. 71. kārita, Caused, Man. 4, 118. kāritā vṛddhiḥ, An

exacted interest, caused by risk, Man. 8, 153. kārayitavya,

1. To be caused to perform, Rām. 2, 14, 16.

2. To be procured, Pañc. 24, 21. — Desiderative, cikīrṣa (in epic poetry

Ātm., Nal. 3, 14),

1. To desire to do, Rām. 2, 35, 11; to desire to perform, Man. 11, 192.

2. To desire to establish, Rājat. 5, 461. cikīrṣita,

1. Desired to be performed, Man. 4, 254.

2. n. Intention, Man. 7, 202. — kṛ, combined and compounded: With

the adv. agnisāt agni + sāt, To burn, Rājat. 5, 226.

— With aṅga, which becomes aṅgī aṅgī,

1. To put up with, Pañc. i. d. 192; to submit, Rājat. 5, 177.

2. To subdue, Amar. 52.

3. To take to heart, Pañc. 236, 4.

4. To promise, Bhartṛ. 2, 69.

— With the prepos. ati ati, ati- kṛta, Excessive, MBh. 3, 10064; n. Excess,

Rām. 5, 25, 21.

— With the noun adhara, which becomes adharī adharī, To overcome,

Śāk. d. 16, v. r.

— With the prep. adhi adhi,

1. To put at the head, Bhāg. P. 1, 9, 37.

2. To appoint, Yājñ. 2, 30.

3. Pass. To get entitled, Bhāg. P. 5, 10, 16.

4. With loc., To be at the head, to inspect, MBh. 4, 241. adhikṛta,

Best, Pañc. iii. d. 67. Comp. dharma-, m. a judge, Pañc. 41, 16. —

Absolutive, adhikṛtya, Referring to, Śāk. 4, 5.

— With anu anu,

1. To do afterward, Amar. 50.

2. To back, Pañc. iii. d. 270.

3. To imitate, Man. 2, 199.

4. To repay, with the acc., Bhāg. P. 3, 14, 20.

5. To bring in harmony, Bhāg. P. 7, 7, 36. Caus. To cause to imitate,

Bhāg. P. 4, 29, 17.

— With apa apa,

1. To remove, MBh. 3, 10492.

2. To injure, Rām. 4, 16, 19; with the gen. of the person, Rām. 2, 38,

5; with the acc., MBh. 3, 14835. apakṛta, n. Injury, Pañc. i. d. 317.

— With abhi abhi, To make (nivāsam, to settle), Sund. 2, 26. Desider.

raṇam, To desire to fight, MBh. 4, 1660.

— With the noun abhyantara, which becomes abhyantarī abhyantarī,

1. To initiate, Rām. 6, 40, 14.

2. To make intimate, Pañc. i. d. 290.

— With alam alam, To adorn, Rām. 1, 73, 19.

— With abhyalam abhi-alam, To adorn, Rām. 3, 53, 36.

— With upālam upa-alam, To adorn, Pañc. 159, 19.

— With samalam sam-alam,

1. To adorn, MBh, 1, 4941.

2. To violate, with gen., Man. 8, 16.

— With svalam su-alam, To adorn beautifully, Chr. 60, 35.

— With the prep. ava ava, the initial is kept in niravaskṛta, i. e. nis-, Pure,

MBh. 12, 13201.

— With the prep. ā ā, Caus.

1. To ask, Rām. 2, 13, 2.

2. To call, Pañc. 24, 13; ākāraṇīya, To be called.

3. To produce, Vedāntas. in Chr. 215, 6. Desider. To desire to

perform, Daśak. in Chr. 200, 24.

— With the prepositions apā apa-ā, To remove, MBh. 1, 5680. ṛṇam, To

pay, Man. 6, 35.

— With upā upa-ā,

1. To bring near, MBh. 3, 3098.

2. To deliver, Nal. 25, 16.

3. To grant, MBh. 3, 15965.

4. To gain, MBh. 3, 10278.

5. To describe, Bhāg. P. 3, 6, 35.

6. To perform a preparation for a sacred work, Man. 4, 95. an-upākṛta,

adj. Not hallowed by holy texts, Man. 5, 7.

— With samupā sam-upa-ā, To satisfy(?), MBh. 1, 7765.

— With nirā nis-ā,

1. To remove, Rām. 5, 13, 31.

2. To disown, Chr. 8, 27; MBh. 13, 4753.

3. To disapprove, Vedāntas. in Chr. 215, 17.

4. To undo, MBh. 1, 7666.

— With vyā vi-ā, To explain, Rām. 5, 56, 5. a-vyākṛta, adj. Undivided,

Bhāg. P. 3, 11, 37.

— With the noun ākula, which becomes ākulī ākulī, To trouble, Pañc. v. d.

25; Rām. 4, 41, 29.

— With the adv. ātmasāt ātmasāt, i. e. ātman + sāt,

1. To put in one’s self, Yājñ. 3, 54; cf. Man. 6, 25.

2. To subdue, Bhartṛ. 3, 34.

— With the adv. āvis āvis, To make manifest, Sāh. D. 15, 20; to show, 60,

17. āviṣkṛta, Publicly known, Man. 11, 226. an-āviṣkṛta, adj. Not public, ib.

— With the noun āharaṇa, which becomes āharaṇī āharaṇī, To make a

present, Ragh. 7, 29.

— With the noun unmanas, which becomes unmanī unmanī, To agitate,

Prab. 62, 3.

— With the prep. upa upa,

1. To confer, Man. 2, 149.

2. To offer, Man. 2, 245.

3. To serve, Pañc. i. d. 95; with the gen. of the person, Pañc. i. d. 398.

4. To confer a benefit, Man. 8, 394; with the gen. of the person, Rām.

4, 38, 47.

5. To honour, Rājat. 5, 311.

6. To set out on, with the dat., Rām. 1, 37, 5 Schl. (Gorr. v. r.). The

initial is kept in upaskṛta,

1. Possessed of, having, Bhāg. P. 1, 11, 28.

2. Prepared, MBh. 1, 778.

3. Adorned, Bhartṛ. 2, 12.

4. Benefitted, MBh. 13, 5893. Comp. an-upaskṛta, adj. 1. uncultivated,

MBh. 13, 3335. 2. not ornamented, Man. 5, 112. 3. untainted, Man. 3,

257. 4. blameless, Man. 7, 98. nirupaskṛta, i. e. nis-, adj. 1.

unaccomplished, MBh. 12, 9768. 2. plain, 12, 9079.

— With the prepositions pratyupa prati-upa, To repay, Pañc. i. d. 95 v. r.

— With the noun upahāra, which becomes upahārī upahārī, To offer, with

gen., Kathās. 10, 141.

— With the noun uras, which becomes urī urī, To promise, to offer, Ragh.

15, 70.

— With the noun uṣna, which becomes uṣṇī uṣṇī, To warm, Mṛcch. 50, 1.

— With ūrī ūrī, To grant, Hit. iii. d. 96.

— With the numeral eka, which becomes ekī ekī, To join, Rām. 5, 13, 58.

— With the noun auṣadha, which becomes auṣadhī auṣadhī, To change

into a medicine, Mṛcch. 121, 13.

— With the noun kad-arth + a, which becomes kadarthī kadarthī, To

contemn, MBh. 3, 11381.

— With the noun kapila, which becomes kapilī kapilī, To make tawny,

MBh. 3, 16351.

— With the noun karada, which becomes karadī karadī, To make tributary,

MBh. 1, 4462.

— With the noun kara, which becomes karī karī, To offer as tribute,

Kathās. 19, 114.

— With the noun kaluṣa, which becomes kaluṣī kaluṣī, To trouble, Rām. 3,

22, 14; 5, 57, 5.

— With the noun kaṣāya, which becomes kaṣāyī kaṣāyī, To redden, Rām.

6, 33, 17.

— With kāt kāt, an old abl. sing. of kim, To contemn, Bhāg. P. 5, 7, 11.

— With the noun kuṇḍala, which becomes kuṇḍalī kuṇḍalī in kuṇḍalīkṛta,

adj.

1. Ring-streaked, Nal. 14, 3.

2. Moving circularly, Suśr. 2, 523, 16.

— With the comp. kṛta-artha, which becomes kṛtārthī kṛtārthī, To satisfy,

Lass. 83, 13.

— With the noun kṛśa, becoming kṛśī kṛśī, To make poor, Mṛcch. 19, 13.

— With the noun koṣṭhaka, which becomes koṣṭhakī koṣṭhakī, To

surround, MBh. 14, 2230.

— With the noun khaṇḍa, which becomes khaṇḍī khaṇḍī, To cut to pieces,

Pañc. 262, 16.

— With the noun khala, which becomes khalī khalī, To abuse, Mṛcch. 33,

24.

— With the noun khila, becoming khilī khilī,

1. To lay waste, Ragh. 11, 14.

2. To deprive of any strength, Mārk. P. 9, 8.

— With gaṇḍūṣa, becoming gaṇḍūṣī gaṇḍūṣī, to use as water for rinsing

the mouth, Bhāg. P. 9, 15, 3.

— With goṣpada, becoming goṣpadī goṣpadī, To change into a pool, Rām.

5, 31, 62.

— With grāsa, becoming grāsī grāsī, To devour, Kathās. 9, 57.

— With cakra, becoming cakrī cakrī, To make circular, Kumāras. 3, 70.

— With caṇḍa, becoming caṇḍī caṇḍī, To provoke, Mālav. 44, 5.

— With camat camat, Caus. To cause to be surprised, Kathās. 25, 225.

— With citta, becoming cittī cittī, To make something the object of

thinking, Bhāg. P. 4, 1, 28.

— With citra, becoming citrī citrī, To change into a picture, Śāk. d. 148.

— With cihna, becoming cihnī cihnī, To mark, MBh. 13, 826.

— With cūrṇa, becoming cūrṇī cūrṇī, To crush, Rām. 5, 54, 7.

— With jaṭila, becoming jaṭilī jaṭilī, To interweave, Pañc. 223, 2.

— With jaṭhara, becoming jaṭharī jaṭharī, To shut in one’s self, Bhāg. P. 3,

9, 20.

— With jaḍa, becoming jaḍī jaḍī,

1. To stiffen, Rām. 6, 6, 1.

2. To benumb, Rām. 5, 33, 5.

3. To make stupid, Bhāg. P. 6, 3, 25.

— With jarjara, becoming jarjarī jarjarī, To beat to pieces, Rām. 6, 83, 54.

— With tanu, becoming tanū tanū, To diminish, to abandon, Ragh. 6, 80.

— With tāmra, becoming tāmrī tāmrī, To redden, MBh. 7, 8458.

— With the adv. tiras tiras,

1. To remove, Bhāg. P. 3, 2, 18.

2. To cover, Man. 4, 49.

3. To surpass, Pañc. 118, 13.

4. To conquer, Hit. iii. d. 8.

5. To contemn, Bhāg. P. 1, 18, 48. a-tiraskrita, adj. Greatest, Pañc. 7,

10.

— With the noun tīrtha, which becomes tīrthī tīrthī, To hallow, Bhāg. P. 1,

13, 9.

— With tuccha, becoming tucchī tucchī, To despise, Bhāg. P. 5, 10, 25.

— With tṛṇa, becoming tṛṇī tṛṇī, To value like a grass-blade, MBh. 1, 7062.

— With the pron. tvam tvam (see yuṣmad), To thou somebody, as an

insult, Yājñ. 3, 292.

— With the noun dakṣiṇa, which becomes dakṣiṇī dakṣiṇī, To walk around

somebody keeping the right side towards him, Bhāg. P. 3, 24, 41.

— With dāsa, becoming dāsī dāsī, To enslave somebody, Kathās. 22, 84.

To subdue, Chr. 94, 30.

— With divasa, becoming divasī divasī, To turn into day, Mṛcch. 59, 5.

— With dīrgha, becoming dīrghī dīrghī.

1. To extend, Kumāras. 3, 26.

2. To carry far, Megh. 32.

— With duḥka, becoming duḥkhā duḥkhā, To afflict, Śiś. 2, 11.

— With dūra, becoming dūrī dūrī,

1. To remove, Prab.

2. To surpass, Śāk. d. 16.

— With dṛḍha, becoming dṛḍhī driḍhī, To fasten, Prab. 43, 14.

— With dvi-guṇa, becoming dviguṇī dviguṇī, To double, Śiś. 1, 63.

— With the adv. dvijātisāt dvi-jāti + sāt, To offer to Brāhmaṇas, Rājat. 5,

120.

— With the interj. dhik dhik,

1. To reproach, MBh. 12, 1422.

2. To show contempt, Rām. 4, 9, 8.

— With the noun dhvaja, becoming dhvajī dhvajī, To use as a means of

protection, Hit. ii. d. 95.

— With nagna, becoming nagnī nagnī, To make somebody a naked

mendicant, Bhartṛ. 1, 64.

— With namas namas, namas-kṛ,

1. To salute, Man. 11, 110.

2. To adore, MBh. 3, 2160; with dat. and acc.

— With nava, becoming navī navī, To renew, Ragh. 16, 38.

2. To refresh, Śāk. 62, 12.

— With the prep. ni ni, nikṛta,

1. Humbled, Rām. 1, 56, 22.

2. Dejected, Nal. 14, 15.

3. Base, Rām. 5, 23, 6; n. Mortification, Bhartṛ. 2, 30, v. r. nikartavya

in tair asmākam nikartavyam, We must be treated ill by them, MBh. 3,

1406.

— With vini vi-ni,

1. To injure, MBh. 3, 14036.

2. To defraud, Man. 9, 213.

— With the noun nimitta, becoming nimittī nimittī,

1. To point out as cause, Rājat. 3, 89.

2. To use as means, Daśak. in Chr. 184, 14.

— With nis-dhana, becoming nirdhanī nirdhanī, To make poor, Daśak. in

Chr. 194, 7.

— With the prep. nis nis,

1. To remove, Dev. 1, 31.

2. To prepare, Chr. 294, 1 = Rigv. i. 92, 1. niṣkrita, n. Expiation, Bhāg.

P. 1, 19, 2. a-niṣkṛta, adj. Not expiated, Man. 11, 53.

— With the noun nis-pattra, which becomes niṣpattrā niṣpattrā, To

wound, e. g. a deer, with an arrow in such a manner that its feathered

part juts out on the other side, Daśak. 196, 1.

— With nis-spand + a, becoming niṣpandī niṣpandī, To render motionless,

Mṛcch. 85, 1.

— With nyak nyak, acc. sing. n. of nyañc, To insult, Rājat. 5, 436.

— With nyāsa, becoming nyāsī To deliver in trust, Rājat. 5, 182.

— With pañcan-śikhā, becoming pañcaśikhī pañcaśikhī, To make

somebody an ascetic, Bhartṛ. 1, 64.

— With pañcan, becoming pañcī pañcī, To make fivefold, so as to contain

the five elements, Vedāntas. in Chr. 206, 19.

— With the adv. parasāt para + sāt, To give in marriage, Böhtl. Ind. Spr.

931.

— With parāñc-mukha, becoming parāṅmukhī parāṅmukhī, To put to

flight, MBh. 6, 5500.

— With the prep. pari pari, To surround, MBh. 13, 5044. The initial s

changed to ṣ is preserved in pariṣkṛta.

1. Adorned, Rām. 3, 11, 4.

2. Prepared; su-par°, Well prepared, 4, 437; kāla-par°, Seasonable,

Rām. 5, 25, 35.

— With the noun parunha, becoming paruṣī paruṣī,

1. To soil.

2. To use roughly.

— With the compound noun para-upakaraṇa, becoming paropakaraṇī

paropakaraṇī, To make somebody the instrument of another, Hit. ii. d. 23.

— With parvata, becoming parvatī parvatī, To exalt, Bhartṛ. 2, 71.

— With pavitra, becoming pavitrī pavitrī, To purify.

— With paśu, becoming paśū paśū,

1. To change into a beast.

2. To destine for immolation.

— With pātra, becoming pātrī pātrī,

1. To make something an object worthy of (e. g. interest), Megh. 48.

2. To honour, Śāk. d. 116.

— With the adv. puras puras, puras-kṛ,

1. To place in front, Rājat. 5, 327.

2. To lead, Chr. 20, 24.

3. To appoint, MBh. 4, 242.

4. To show, Rājat. 5, 328.

5. To regard, Rām. 5, 90, 30.

6. To prefer, Kathās. 29, 105.

7. To honour, Śāk. 18, 18.

8. To use as pretext, Daśak. in Chr. 189, 2. puraskṛta,

1. Attended by.

2. Provided with.

— With the noun pulaka, becoming pulakī pulakī, pulakī-kṛ10ta, Having the

hairs of the body erect, Bhāg. P. 3, 15, 25.

— With the imitative sound pūt pūt, To blow, Pañc. 93, 4.

— With peśī peśī, and peṣī peṣī, To cut to pieces, Rām. 2, 105, 33 Gorr.

— With the prep. pra pra,

1. To make, Man. 8, 239.

2. To cause, Pañc. i. d. 276; with infin., Chr. 296, 8 = Rigv. i. 112, 8.

3. To do, Pañc. 4, 37.

4. To perform. MBh. 3, 12142.

5. To appoint, Man. 7, 60.

6. With kanyām, To pollute, Man. 8, 370; with dārān, To marry, MBh.

1, 1844; with buddhim, To resolve, Nal. 3, 25; with manas, To apply one’s

heart to, Man. 7, 12. prakṛta,

1. Accomplished, Kathās. 4, 1.

2. Mentioned, Yājñ. 1, 243.

— With vipra vi-pra, To injure, Rām. 3, 1, 20.

— With saṁpra sam-pra, To make, Rām. 6, 82, 182; to perform, MBh. 1,

2387.

— With the noun prakaṭa, which becomes prakaṭī prakaṭī, To make

manifest, Bhartṛ. 2, 64.

— With praguna which becomes pranuṇī praguṇī, To put up, Pañc. 157,

23; to array, 218, 7; to lay (as traps), 114, 6.

— With the prep. prati prati,

1. To repay, Rām. 3, 38, 22; with the person in the gen., Rām. 3, 65,

14; in the dat., MBh. 1, 840; loc., MBh. 13, 4764.

2. To resist, with the acc. of an object, MBh. 1, 5656; gen. of a

person, Rām. 6, 33, 34.

3. To cure, MBh. 1, 4027.

4. To repair, Man. 9, 285. pratikṛta, n.

1. Requital, Rām. 6, 91, 10.

2. Resistance, Ragh. 12, 94. Comp. kṛta-pratikṛta, n. 1. assault and

resistance, MBh. 4, 351. 2. requital for an assault, Rām. 6, 91, 10.

Desider. To desire to repay, MBh. 3, 1282.

— With the noun prativacana, which becomes prativacanī prativacanī, To

answer, Śāk. d. 85.

— With pradakṣiṇa, which becomes pradakṣiṇī pradakṣiṇī, To walk round

some one, keeping the right side towards him, Śāk. p. 51, 17.

— With pramāṇa, becoming pramāṇī pramāṇī,

1. To mete out to, Bhartṛ. 2, 90.

2. To obey, Śāk. 78, 19.

3. To prove.

— With the adv. prādus prādus, To make visible, to show, Chr. 34, 12.

agnim, To kindle, Man. 4, 104.

— With the imitative sound phut phut, or phūt phūt, To boil, to show

indignation, to foam, Pañc. 237, 14.

— With the noun bhasman, becoming bhasmī bhasmī, To reduce to ashes.

— With manda, becoming mandī mandī, To diminish, Śāk. 5, 13.

— With malina, becoming malinī malinī, To soil. malinī-karaṇīya, n. An

action which causes defilement, Mān. 11, 125.

— With mekhalā, which becomes mekhalī mekhalī, To put on the

sacrificial string, MBh. 13, 973.

— With rakta-paṭa (vb. rañj), becoming raktapaṭī raktapaṭī, To change

into one who wears a red cloth, i. e. into an ascetic, Pañc. iv. d. 36.

— With rikta, ptcple. pf. pass. of ric, becoming riktī riktī, To steal, Pañc.

89, 2.

— With lakṣa, becoming lakṣī lakṣī, To aim at, Śāk. 104, 21.

— With vandī, becoming vandī vandī, To take prisoner, Vikr. d. 3.

— With vaśa, becoming vaśī vaśī, To subdue, Pañc, 13, 3.

— With vaśe vaśe, loc. of vaśa, To subdue, Rām. 3, 55, 7.

— With vaṣaṭ vaṣaṭ, To accompany with the exclamation raṣaṭ, Man. 2,

106.

— With the prep. vi vi,

1. To change, MBh. 13, 1513; Man. 1, 76.

2. To disfigure, Man. 9, 288.

3. To blind, MBh. 3, 8881.

4. To develop, Man. 1, 75.

5. To create, MBh. 14, 1487.

6. To adorn, MBh. 1, 1429.

7. To move to and fro, Rām. 3, 74, 18.

8. To destroy, MBh. 3, 1150.

9. To become alienated, Man. 9, 15.

10. To infest each other, MBh. 1, 7670. Caus. To cause to change, Hit.

75, 11.

— With the noun vikaca, becoming vikacī vikacī, To open, Bhartṛ. 2, 65.

— With vi-nigaḍa, becoming vinigaḍī vinigaḍī, To unfetter, Daśak. in Chr.

198, 8.

— With vi-manas, becoming vimanī vi- manī in vimanī-kṛta,

1. Sad.

2. Offended.

3. Altered in mind.

— With vi-varṇa-maṇi, becoming vivarṇamaṇī vivarṇamaṇī, To make

jewels discoloured, Śāk. d. 61.

— With vi-rajas, becoming virajī virajī in virajī-kṛta,

1. Freed from dust.

2. Freed from passion.

— With viṣaya, becoming viṣayī viṣayī, To make something the object of

thought, Vedāntas. in Chr. 215, 23.

— With vyākula, becoming vyākulī vyākulī, To trouble, Pañc. 63, 8.

— With śithila, becoming śithilī śithilī. To make languid, Ṛt. 6, 24.

— With śīrṣan-avaśeṣa, becoming śīrṣāvaśeṣī śīrṣāvaśeṣī, To leave only

the head undestroyed, Bhartṛ. 2, 27.

— With śūnya, becoming śūnyī śūnyī, To make empty, to leave, Pañc. 23,

18.

— With saṁkrama, becoming saṁkramī saṁkramī, To use as means,

Daśak. in Chr. 196, 17 (by means of her).

— With sajja, becoming sajjī sajjī, To prepare, Pañc. 62, 25.

— With sat sat, acc. n. s. of sant, ptcple. pres. of as,

1. To adorn. Man. 3, 96.

2. To welcome, to receive hospitably, Rām. 3, 53, 25.

3. To honour, Pañc. 26, 21. satkṛta,

1. Done rightly.

2. Worshipped.

3. Respected.

4. Welcomed. n.

1. Virtue.

2. Hospitality.

3. Food, Man. 3, 264.

— Comp. a-satkṛta, adj. wicked, Nal. 24, 31. su-, n. Excellent hospitality,

Chr. 59, 18.

— With sa-nātha, becoming sanāthī sanāthī, To make possessed of a

protector, Śāk. 28, 14.

— With sa-patra, which becomes sapatrā sapatrā, To wound, e. g. a deer,

with an arrow in such a manner that the feathered part enters in its body,

Daśak. 196, 1.

— With the prep. sam sam, becoming saṁkṛ, and, by keeping the initial s,

saṁskṛ,

1. To unite, Mṛcch. 137, 20.

2. To prepare, Rām. 3, 53, 5.

3. To hallow; a-saṁskṛta, Not hallowed, Man. 5, 56.

4. To hallow by the investment of the sacrificial cord, to invest, Ragh.

15, 31; Man. 8, 412; a-saṁskṛta, Not invested, Man. 2, 39; to hallow by

giving in marriage, Man. 9, 173; a-saṁskṛta, Unmarried, Pañc. iii. d. 218;

to hallow by solemn obsequies, MBh. 13, 7777.

5. To adorn, Śiś. 9, 25. — Causal,

1. To cause to perform, MBh. 1, 4379.

2. To cause to be invested, MBh. 2, 1594.

3. To cause to be solemnly buried, MBh. 1, 4936

4. To make, MBh. 4, 2281.

— With abhisam abhi-sam, abhisaṁskṛ, To hallow, MBh. 3, 8224.

— With upasam upa-sam, upasaṁskṛ,

1. To prepare, MBh. 1, 7203.

2. To adorn, Suśr. 2, 76, 9.

— With pratisam prati-sam, pratisaṁskṛ,

1. To repair, Man. 9, 279.

2. To unite, Suśr. 2, 77, 2.

— With the noun sam-ṛddha (vb. ṛdh), becoming samṛddhī samṛddhī, To

make wealthy, Daśak. in Chr. 194, 2.

— With sāci, becoming sācī sācī, To turn aside, Mālav. d. 73.

— With sāra, becoming sārī sārī, To make hard, Śāk. d. 54.

— With su-gupta, becoming sunuptī suguptī, To guard well, Pañc. 208, 21.

— With sthira, becoming sthirī sthirī, To strengthen, Śāk. 53, 23.

— With sphīta, becoming sphītī sphītī, To augment, Rām. 2, 65, 26.

— With sva, becoming svī svī,

1. To appropriate, Daśak. in Chr. 186, 4.

2. To win, 180, 19.

3. To assent to, Rājat. 5, 436. svīkṛta,

1. Agreed.

2. Promised.

— Cf. Lat. creare with the causal kārayāmi, whose first a originally was

also short, as may be inferred from the comparison of the kindred

languages.

kṛ 2. kṛ; see 2. kṛ10.

kṛ 1. kṛ10, i. 6, kira, Par.

1. To pour out, Amar. 11.

2. To cast, MBh. 14, 1898.

3. To cover, Rām. 5, 42, 10. kīrṇa,

1. Scattered, Rām. 5, 16, 17.

2. Dishevelled, Daśak. in Chr. 179, 15.

3. Covered, Pañc. i. d. 239.

— With the prepositions vyati vi-ati, To scatter, MBh. 4, 830.

— With anu anu, To cover, MBh. 1, 4340.

— With apa apa, which forms also apaskira, Ātm. To rake (as a bird for

pleasure), Uttararāmac. p. 31, 1.

— With abhi abhi, To cover, MBh. 13, 2655.

— With ava ava,

1. To diffuse, Man. 6, 48.

2. To cast off, MBh. 2, 2289.

3. To leave, MBh. 1, 3057.

4. To cover, Rām. 2, 43, 13. Ātm. and reflect. pass.,

1. To spread, MBh. 3, 12306.

2. To vanish, Bhāg. P. 7, 15, 19.

— With anvava anu-ava, To scatter about, Yājñ. 1, 230. Caus. To cause to

be scattered about, MBh. 13, 4291 (read kārayet).

— With abhyava abhi-ava, To cover, Rām. 2, 33, 19.

— With paryava pari-ava, To cover round about, MBh. 3, 13596.

— With samava sam-ava, To cover, Bhāg. P. 8, 18, 10.

— With ā ā, ākīrṇa,

1. Crowded, Arj. 6, 7.

2. Frequented, Man. 6, 51.

3. Confused, Rājat. 5, 321.

— With apā apa-ā, To repudiate, MBh. 1, 2851.

— With avā ava-ā, To cover, Rām. 2, 42, 14 Gorr. (Schl. v.r.).

— With vyā vi-ā, vyākīrṇa, Dishevelled, Pañc. i. d. 207.

— With samā sam-ā, To cover, Rām. 1, 6, 24.

— With ud ud,

1. To throw up, Rām. 6, 90, 26.

2. To dig up, MBh. 1, 5813.

3. To engrave, Vikr. d. 43.

— With samud sam-ud, To pierce, Ragh. 1, 4.

— With upa upa, To cover, MBh. 3, 11886.

— With vini vi-ni,

1. To cast down, Rām. 6, 8, 19.

2. To leave, Kumāras. 4, 6.

3. vinikīrṇa, Crowded, Rām. 4, 41, 33.

— With saṁni sam-ni, saṁnikirṇa, Stretehed out, Megh. 87.

— With parā parā, To leave, Rām. 4, 1369.

— With pari pari,

1. To surround, MBh. 4, 585.

2. To deliver, Ragh. 18. 32.

— With pra pra, To scatter, Rām. 2, 76, 15.

2. To spring up, Rām. 1, 9, 19.

3. Pass. (anom. kīryet, with the termination of the Par.), To vanish,

MBh. 3, 14767. prakīrṇa,

1. Dishevelled, MBh. 3, 11755.

2. Squandered, Lass. 74, 17.

3. Public, MBh. 13, 6735.

— With vipra vi-pra, viprakīrṇa,

1. Scattered, Rām. 5, 14, 53.

2. Dishevelled, MBh. 3, 401.

3. Extended, MBh. 3, 730.

— With pratis pratis, instead of prati prati, To injure (cf. 2. kṛ10), Śiś. 1,

47.

— With vi vi,

1. To scatter, Hit. 9, 14.

2. To cover, Man. 3, 234.

3. To blame, Rām. 2, 12, 73. vikīrṇa,

1. Dishevelled, Kumāras. 4, 4.

2. Split, Rām. 3, 34, 25.

— With pravi pra-vi, To scatter, MBh. 4, 298.

— With sam sam,

1. To mix, MBh. 13, 6232.

2. To confound, MBh. 3, 13736. saṁkīrṇa,

1. Crowded, MBh. 1, 7675.

2. Mixed, Man. 1, 116.

3. Impure, Yājñ. 3, 310.

— Cf. kal, śakṛt; and Lat. cribrum, cerno, procerus; [greek]

kṛ † 2. kṛ10, also kṛ kṛ, ii. 5 and 9, Par., Ātm. To injure, to kill.

— Cf. 1. kṛ10 with pratis.

kṛ † 3. kṛ10, i. 10, Ātm. To know (? v. r.).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kṛ [1] (skṛ), kṛṇoti kṛṇute karoti kurute (karati & karti), pp. kṛta (q.v.)

make, do, cause or produce anything in or on one’s self or others; absol.

act, work; bring or help to (dat.); get or procure for (gen.), M. for one’s

self; make or begin something (acc., esp. kim) with something (instr.);

make something (acc.) of something (instr. or abl.); make (into), render

2 acc. or acc. & adj. or adv. in ī ū — With the acc. of an abstr. kṛ answers

to a verb of kindred mng, e.g. w. praveśam = enter, w. maraṇam die, w.

rājyam reign; esp. in the periphr. perf., e.g. vidāṁ cakāra he knew. We

often use a more special verb, e.g. perform or offer (yajñam), prepare or

till (kṣetram), fix (samayam), wait (kṣaṇam), utter (vācam or śabdam),

exert (vīryam), show, betray, feel (kṛpām bhāvam sneham), enjoy

(sukham), marry (dārān), violate, dishonour (kanyām) etc.; put, set in or

on (pāṇau skandhe), take to (hṛdi); ponder, deliberate (cetasi manasi

hṛdaye), turn, direct (manas, w. loc.), call, name (nāmnā) etc. Note also

dvidhā kṛ divide into two, bhasmasāt° reduce to ashes, tṛṇavat° value like

straw. For other phrases cf. the corr. adj. or adv. C. kārayati kṛṇoti kṛṇute

karoti kurute (karati & karti), pp. kṛta (q.v.) make, do, cause or produce

anything in or on one’s self or others; absol. act, work; bring or help to

(dat.); get or procure for (gen.), M. for one’s self; make or begin

something (acc., esp. kim) with something (instr.); make something

(acc.) of something (instr. or abl.); make (into), render 2 acc. or acc. &

adj. or adv. in ī ū — With the acc. of an abstr. kṛ answers to a verb of

kindred mng, e.g. w. praveśam = enter, w. maraṇam die, w. rājyam

reign; esp. in the periphr. perf., e.g. vidāṁ cakāra he knew. We often use

a more special verb, e.g. perform or offer (yajñam), prepare or till

(kṣetram), fix (samayam), wait (kṣaṇam), utter (vācam or śabdam),

exert (vīryam), show, betray, feel (kṛpām bhāvam sneham), enjoy

(sukham), marry (dārān), violate, dishonour (kanyām) etc.; put, set in or

on (pāṇau skandhe), take to (hṛdi); ponder, deliberate (cetasi manasi

hṛdaye), turn, direct (manas, w. loc.), call, name (nāmnā) etc. Note also

dvidhā kṛ divide into two, bhasmasāt° reduce to ashes, tṛṇavat° value like

straw. For other phrases cf. the corr. adj. or adv. C. kārayate cause to act

or do (2 acc. or acc. of th. & instr. of pers.), have something put in (loc.),

also = S. D. cikīrṣati te wish to act or do. I. karikrati (3 pl.) do repeatedly.

adhi put before or over, place at the head, appoint to (loc.); make a

thing the chief matter or main point; be entitled to (A. w. loc., M. w. acc.

or inf.).

anu do afterwards, imitate, equal (acc. or gen.).

apa put off, remove; injure, offend, do wrong (acc., loc. or gen.).

abhi do in behalf of (acc.); effect, make.

ā bring or call near; bring about, perform, prepare; serve a god (gen.),

sacrifice. C. call near; ask for (2 acc.).

apā keep off, remove, pay (a debt); reject, desist.

udā expel, select.

upā bring near, fetch; grant, present; acquire, get; invite, prepare,

undertake, begin (r.).

nirā separate, select; push, away, keep off, reject, destroy; refuse,

contradict.

vyā divide, separate from (instr.), analyse, explain.

samā bring together, collect, unite; make ready, prepare. is ( =

nis) arrange, make ready, prepare.

upa bring near, impart, grant, offer, render a service (gen. or loc. of

pers.); further, support; w. skṛ M. prepare, cultivate (land), adorn.

enchase; think of, care for (acc. or *gen.); deform, corrupt.

pratyupa return a service. tiras put aside, remove, cover, conceal; cut

out, supplant, surpass; contemn, despise, blame, abuse.

ni bring down, humiliate.

vini wrong, injure, offend.

nis bring forth from (abl.); drive away (also w. skṛ), dispel, exclude;

accomplish, arrange, settle, prepare, bring together; restore, requite.

pari prepare (food); w. skṛ make ready, fit out, adorn. puras put

before or at the head, place in front, introduce, appoint to (loc.); show,

betray.

pra perform, effect, cause, make, render (2 acc.); take, marry;

appoint to (loc.); undo, destroy, kill; violate, deflower; M. induce, move,

cause to do; direct or turn (manasṁ buddhim) upon (dat. loc.). resolve;

gain, acquire, effect; put before, mention. pipra hurt, wrong, injure,

disappoint (Caus. the same*).

prati do against, return, repay, revenge (acc. of th., gen., dat., loc. of

pers.); counteract, withstand (act. of th. and gen. of pers.); restore,

requite, repay. D. wish to requite or revenge (acc. of th., acc. or loc. of

pers.).

vi make different, change, alter, divide. detail, specify; deform, spoil,

destroy; develop, produce; M. (P.) become different, alter, become

hostile, unkind, or faithless (w. gen. or loc.); contend, fight.

sam (kṛ & skṛ) put together, join, compose, prepare, arrange;

consecrate, invest, initiate, marry; refine, embellish, adorn.

abhisam (skṛ) arrange, perform. M. render (2 acc.); consecrate,

dedicate.

upasam (skṛ) prepare, adorn.

pratisam restore, repair. — Cf. adhikṛta adhikṛtya upaskṛta nikṛta

pariśkṇta puraskṇta puraskṇtya prakṇta vikṇta saṁskṇta.

kṛ [2] I.-st. carkṛ (3 sgl. M. carkṛṣe w. act. & pass. mg.) commemorate,

mention, extol (gen.).

kṛ [3] (skṛ), kirati kirate, pp. kīrṇa pour out, cast forth, scatter, strew,

cover, fill. —

anu scatter, strew; cover, fill.

abhi sprinkle, cover, fill.

ava pour down, scatter, spread, spend (semen); cast off, reject;

sprinkle, bestrew, cover, fill.

samava bestrew, cover entirely.

ā scatter or bestow abundantly, cover over, fill.

samā scatter over, cover.

ud whirl up (dust); excavate, engrave.

upa scatter or throw down, besprinkle, bestrew.

vini scatter, disperse; throw away, abandon.

pari scatter or strew about, surround.

pra scatter forth, throw down; spring forth, issue, rise.

vi throw asunder or about, cast, hurl, scatter, disperse, dissolve, split,

rend.

sam pour out, bestow richly, cover, fill; mix together, confound. — Cf.

avakīrna ākīrṇa utkīrṇa prakīrṇa vikīrṇa viprakīrṇa vyākīrṇa saṁkīrṇa.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kṛ 1. KṚ (skṛ after upa, pari, sam), VIII. karo strong, kuru weak; V. + I.

kara, II. kar, V. kṛṇo; make, do; fashion, build; perform, fulfil; produce;

execute; effect; conclude (friendship), display, show, exercise; prepare,

cook; compose; cultivate; make anything out of (in., ab.); do anything to

or for (g., lc.); make any one anything 2 ac.; do violence to (ac.); perform

the usual action with (ac.); used thus with great latitude, e. g. udakaṁkṛ,

offer the usual oblation of water (allied with this is the use of kri in the

periphr. pf. with an abst. N. in ā); utter, pronounce, use; describe; fix,

determine; pass (time); await (a moment); procure for (g., lc.); assume

(shape, voice: Ā,); place or in, direct to (in., lc.), turn, the mind or

thoughts, give the heart (manas, buddhim, matim, bhāvam) to, resolve

on (d., lc., inf. or oratio racta with iti); appoint to (lc.); commission; act,

fare; sacrifice; do anything with, make use of (in. and kim?); avail, be of

use (with kim?); with adverbs in ī (e. g. atithī-), ū (e. g. mṛdū-), make

turn into; with -sāt, reduce to, turn into;

vaśe kṛ, subdue;

-hṛdi —, take to heart, remember;

hṛdayena-, love;

evaṁ kṛtvā, for this reason;

tathā-, yathā+uktam-, do so, consent; cs. kāraya, cause to make (2

ac.), cause to be made by (in.); cause to be prepared; cause to be made

(2) ac.); cause to be placed in (lc.); cause to be performed; cause to be

cultivated; — to be put or buried; order to make, — to prepare, — to

practise: often = simple verb; des. cikīṣa, wish to do, — perform, —

establish; intend; strive after.

ati, transgress.

adhi, place the head of, appoit to (lc.); put forward, make a subject of

discussion: pp. entrusted with, appointed to (lc., -°); concerned in (lc.).

anu, imitate (ac.); equal, rival (ac., g.), equal (ac.) in (in.). apu, take

away, remove; injure (ac., g., lc.); cs. id.

pra-ti+pa, take vengeance on (g.).

abhi, do, make; des. wish to do, undertake. aram, prepare; serve,

satisfy (d.). alam, prepare, produce; adorn (Ā. adorn oneself); do

violence to (g.).

abhi-, upa-, adorn, sam-alam, id.; violate.

ava, direct downwards. ā, bring hither; produce; appropriate (g.); cs.

call; ask for (2 ac.); des. intend to perform.

apa+ā, remove, drive away, dispel, counteract, repel; give up, desist

from; pay.

upa+ā, bring near, fetch; deliver; grant; prepare for a sacred rite;

consecrate.

ni+ā, keep back.

nir-ā, set apart; put away, remove; drive away; reject, repel; deny.

vi+ā, separate, distinguish; explain.

sam-ā, unite, keep together.

upa, confer; offer, present; serve, do a service to, oblige (g., lc.); Ā.

cherish.

upa-skṛ, prepare, compose; equip, adorn; care for (ac.): pp. furnished

with (in.).

prati+upa, repay; do a service in return.

ni, bring down, humble, overcome: pp. humbled; dejected; mortified.

vi-ni, mortify; injure; defraud.

nis, remove; prepare; deck out; cure; expiate.

pari-ṣkṛ, prepare; adorn, deck, furnish with (in.). puras, place in front;

show, display; appoint to (lc.); choose, prefer; honour; gd. -kṛtya,

regarding, about, on account of (ac.): pp. accompanied by, furnished with

(-°): -m, ad. accompanied with (-°).

pra, do; fashion, make; perform; show, cause; make into (2 ac.);

marry (a wife, a girl); violate, pollute (a girl); appoint to (lc.); put

forward; make the subject of discussion;

buddhim or manas-, apply one’s heart to, make up one’s mind to (d.,

lc.), resolve: pp. begun; accomplished; mentioned, under discussion; in

question; cs. cause to prepare.

vi-pra, injure; harass; obstruct.

prati, make (ac.) out of (ac.) in opposition; repay (good and evil) with

ac. of thing and d., g., lc. of person; resist; make good, repair; pay; des.

wish to take revenge on (ac., lc.) for (ac.).

vi, make different, change, alter; compare; disfigure, destroy,

mutilate; develop; be hostile to (g., lc.); become unfaithful to (lc.); Ā, ps.

be changed or modified; become alienated or disloyal: pp. changed,

altered, qualified; mutilated, deformed, disfigured; unnatural, repulsive:

cs. cause to change one’s sentiments.

pra-vi (for vi-pra): pp. sinned.

sam (generally -skṛ), put together, unite; accumulate; prepare; invest

(with the sacred thread); hallow (a girl at a wedding or the dead with

sacred fires); adorn, polish, form grammatically: pp. saṁ skṛta, hallowed,

invested; adorned, polished, elaborate, refined, Sanskrit.

prati-sam, repair.

kṛ 2. KṚ, pt. cakrat, intv. car-kṛ, remember, mention with praise (g.).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

kṛ ña kṛtau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvāṁ-ubhaṁ-sakaṁaniṭ .) ña, karati

karate . ayaṁ kaiścit na manyate . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

kṛ ña na vadhe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (svāṁ—ubhaṁ—sakaṁ— aniṭ .) ña

na, kṛṇoti kṛṇute . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

kṛ ña da ḍu kṛtau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (tanāṁ—ubhaṁ —sakaṁ—aniṭ .)

ña da, karoti kurute . ḍu, kṛtrimam . asmādguṇī makāro’pyaguṇī vā

vaktavya iti vararuciḥ .. tena kiṁ karomi kathaṁ kurmi kvānu gacchāmi

mādhava ! . duryodhanavihīnantu śūnyaṁ sarvamidaṁ jagat .. iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kṛ kṛtau bhvā° ubha° saka° aniṭ kavikalpa° . karati te akārṣīt akṛta .

cakāra . bhauvādikasyāsyāpāṇinīyatā

kṛ kṛtau tanā° ubha° saka° aniṭ . karoti kurute kuryāt . karotu kuru akarot

akārṣīt akṛta . cakāra kartā kariṣyatite kriyāt kṛṣīṣṭa . karmaṇi kriyate

akāriakāriṣātāmkārayiṣātām . kāraka kartā kārī kurvan kurṣvāṇaḥ cakrivān

cakrāṇaḥ . ḍu—kṛtrimaḥ kṛtaḥ kṛtavān karaṇaṁ kṛtiḥ kriyā kṛtyā kṛtvā

prakṛtya . kṛtyaṁ kāryaḥ kartavyaḥ karaṇīyaḥ . ṇici kārayati te

acīkarattasani cikīrṣati te yaṅi cekriyate yaṅ luki cari(rī)karīti cari(rī) karti

carkarīti carkarti

kṛño hetutācchīlyānulomyeṣu pā° eṣu dyotyeṣu karoteṣṭaḥ syāt . ataḥ

kūkamīti saḥ . yaśaskarī vidyā . śrāddhakaraḥ vacanakaraḥ si° kau0

divāvibhāniśāprabhābhāskārāntānantādibahunāndīkimlipilibibalibhaktikartṛ

citrakṣetrasaṁkhyājaṅghābāhvaharyattaddhanuraruṣṣu pā° .

eṣu kṛñaṣṭaḥ syāt . ahetvādāvapi . divākaraḥ vibhākaraḥ niśākaraḥ

kaskāditvāsaḥ . bhāskaraḥ bahukaraḥ bahuśabdasya vaipulyārthe

saṁkhyāpekṣayā pṛthaggrahaṇam lipilibiśabdau paryāyau . saṁkhyā—

ekakaraḥ . dvikaraḥ . kaskāditvātsaḥ . ahaskaraḥ . nityam

samāme’nuttarapadasthasyeti ṣatvam . dhanuṣkaraḥ . aruṣkaraḥ .

kiṁyattadbahuṣu kṛño’jvidhānamiti vārtikam kiṅkarā . tatkarā . hetvādau

ṭambādhitvā paratvādac . puṁyoge ṅīp . kiṅkarī . karmaṇi bhṛtau pā0

karmaśabde upapade karoteṣṭaḥ syāt bhṛtau . karmakaro bhṛtakaḥ .

karmakāro’nyaḥ si° kau0

na śabdaślokakalahagāthāvairacāṭusūtramantrapadeṣu pā° .

eṣu kuñaṣṭo na . hetvādiṣu prāptaḥ pratipidhyate . śabdakāra ityādi .

stambaśakṛtorin pā° vrīhivatsayoriti vaktavyam vārti° . strambakarivrīhiḥ .

śakṛtkarirṣvatsaḥ . vīhivatsayo kim stambhakāraḥ . śakṛtkāraḥ . si° kau0

sukarmapāpamantrapuṇyeṣu kṛñaḥ pā° sau karmādiṣu ca kṛñaḥ

kvipsyāt . trividho’tra niyama iti kāśikā . sakṛt karmakṛt pāpakṛt mantrakṛt

puṇyakṛt . kvibeveti niyamātkarma kṛtavāni tiniṣṭhā na . kṛña eveti

niyamānmantramadhītavānmantrādhyāyaḥ atra na kvip . bhūta eveti

niyamāt mantraṅkaroti kariṣyati veti vivakṣāyānna kvip . svādiṣveveti

niyamābhāvādanyasminnapyupapade kvip . śāstrakṛt . bhāṣyakṛt . si°

kau0

adhi + adhikāre ārambhe saka° adhikaroti adhikṛtya

anu + sadṛśīkaraṇe anukaroti . śailādhipasyānucakāra lakṣmīm

apa + apakāre aniṣṭācaraṇe apakaroti ripau sāntvamapakriyā māghaḥ

apa + ā nivārakhe saka° . apākaroti . ayaṁ praśnaḥ

prādhānyenāvākriyate vṛ° u° bhā0

ā + ākāre avayavasaṁsthāne ākṛtiḥ ākāraḥ

ud + ā + utkālane saka° udākaroti utkālayati yājñakalakyaḥ svameva

brahmacāriṇamuvācaitāḥ saumyodaja somaśravāḥ! iti tāhodācakāra vṛ°

u° . tāgāḥ ha udācakāra utkālitavānācāryagṛham bhā° .

upa + upakāre saka° upakaroti upakṛtaṁ bahu tatra kimucyate sā°

da° . saṁskāre saka° suṭ ca . upaskaroti

upa + ā + ārambhe upākaroti upākṛtya śrāvaṇyāṁ proṣṭha pardyā vā

upākṛtya yathāvidhi manuḥ paśvādisaṁskāre ca upākarmaśabde udā° .

dur—duṣṭācaraṇe duṣkṛtaṁ duṣkṛtiḥ .

ni + parābhave saka° nikaroti (parābhavati) nīkaraḥ

nis + nira + śuddhau aka° niṣkaroti niṣkṛtiḥ (śuddhiḥ)

nir ā + nivāraṇe saka° nirākaroti nirākariṣṇū vardhiṣṇū vartiṣṇū

paritoraṇam bhaṭṭiḥ! nirākariṣṇorvṛjinādṛte’pi raghuḥ

parā + nirākaraṇe saka° . parākaroti

pari + pariṣkāre satoguṇāntarādhāne bhūṣaṇe ca saka° suṭ ca

pariṣkaroti

pra + prastāve saka° prakaroti prakṛtya . ārambhe ca prakṛta

japavidhīnāmāsyamudraśmidantam māghaḥ .

prati + pratikāre atiṣṭanivāraṇe pratikūlācaraṇe ca saka° pratikaroti

pratīkāraḥ pratikriyā .

vi + vibhāge vikaroti sa tredhātmānaṁ vyakuruta chā° u° . vyakuruta

vyabhajad bhā° . vikāre (atyathāsthitasya vastuno’nyathābhāke) aka° ā°

vāyurvikurute si° kau° .

vi + ā + prakāśane vyākaroti anena jīvenātmanānupraviśya nāmarūpe

vyakaravāṇi śrutiḥ . vyākhyāne vyākṛtam

pāṇinyādyuktaśabdasādhutvādhāyakasaṁskārabhede ca śikṣā

kalpovyākaraṇaṁ niruktaṁ chandasāṁ citiḥ vedāṅgoktau

vyākriyāvyañjanīyā vā jātiḥ kāpīha sā dhutā bhartṛ hariḥ .

vi + pra + upadrave saka° viprakaroti tasmin viprakṛtāḥ kāle kumā° .

kamaparamavaśaṁ na viprakuryuḥ kumā° .

sam + saṁskāre satoguṇāntarādhāne saka° suṭ ca . saṁskaroti

pātram .

sam + pari upa + bhūṣaṇe arthe suṭ . saṁskaroti pariṣkaroti

upaskaroti alaṅkarotītyarthaḥ . tatpūrvakāḥ samavāye’rtheca aka° suṭ

saṁskaroti upaskaroti pariskaroti saṁghībhavatītyarthaḥ upa +

satoguṇāntarādhāne vikāre ākāṅkṣitavākyasya pūraṇe ca suṭ . upaskṛtaṁ

bhuṅktevikṛtaṁ bhuṅkte . upaskṛtaṁ brūte vākyamadhyāhṛtya brūte si°

kau0

atha matabhedena kṛño’rthonirūpyate tatra vaiyākaraṇāḥ tasya

yatnārthakatānirākaraṇena vyāpārārthakatāmāhuḥ yathā vai° bhū° sāre

vyāpārobhāvanā saivotpādanā saiva ca kriyā . kṛño’karmakatāpatterna hi

yatno’rtha iṣyate mū° . pacati pākamutpādayati pākānukūlā bhāvanā

tādṛśyutpādanetyādiviraṇādvivriyamāṇasyāpi tadvācakateti bhāvaḥ .

vyāpārapadaṁ phūkārādīnāmayatnānāmapi phūtkāratvādirūpeṇa

vācyatāṁ dhvanathitumuktam . ataeva

pacatītyatrāghaḥsantāpanatvaphūtkāratvacūllyuparidhāraṇatvayatnatvādi

bhirbodhaḥ sarvasiddhaḥ . nacaibameṣāṁ śakyatāvacchedakatve

gauravāpattyā kṛtitvameva tadavacchedakaṁ vācyam ratho gacchati

jānātītyādau ca vyāpāratvādiprakārakabodholakṣaṇayeti naiyāyikarītiḥ

sādhvī, śakyatāvacchedakatvasyāpi lakṣyatāvacchedakatvavadguruṇi

sambhavāt tayorvaiṣamye vījābhāvāt . naca pacati pākaṁ karotīti

yatnārthakarotinā vivaraṇādyatnaevākhyātārtha iti vācyam .

rathogamanaṁ karoti vījādinā aṅkuraḥ kṛta iti darśanāt

kṛñoyatnārthakatāyā asidveḥ . kiñca bhāvanāyā avācyatve ghaṭaṁ

bhāvayatī yatreva ghaṭobhavatītyatrāpi dvitīyā syāt nacātra ghaṭasya

kartṛtvena tatsaṁjñayā karmāsaṁjñāyātādhānna dvitīyeti vācyam

anugatakartṛtvasya tvanmate durvacatvena ghaṭasyākartṛtvāt .

kṛtyāśrayatvasya kārakacakraprayoktṛtvasya vā ghaṭādāvabhāvāt .

dhātvarthānukūnavyāpārāśrayatvasya ca kārakamātrātivyāpakatvāt . api

ca bhāvanāyā avācyatve dhātūnā sakarmakatvākarmakatvavibhāga

ucchinnaḥ syāt . svārthaphalavyadhikaraṇavyāpāravācitvaṁ

svārthavyāpāravyadhikaraṇaphalavācakatvaṁ vā sakarmakatvaṁ

bhāniyivācyatvamantareṇāsambhavi . anyatamatvaṁ tattvamiti cenna

ekasyaivārthabhedenākarmakatvasakarmakatvadarśanāt

tadetadabhisandhāyāha kṛña iti . ayaṁ bhāvaḥ vyāpārāvācyatvapakṣe

phalamātra marthaiti phalitam . tathā ca karotītyādau

yatnapratītestanmātraṁ vācyamabhyupeyam . tathā ca yatī

prayatnaitivat phalasthānīyayatnavācakatvāviśeṣādakarmakatāpattiḥ

uktarītyā durvāreti . tathā ca nahi yatnaḥ ityatra phalasthānīyatveneti

śeṣaḥ kṛñaḥ iti dhātumātropalakṣaṇaṁ sarveṣāmapyakarmakatā

sakarmakatā vā na syāditi bhāvaḥ . atha vā vyāpārobhāvanā ityardhena

vyāpārasya bācyatvaṁ prasādhya phalāṁśasyāpi tatsādhayan

naiyāyikābhyupagata jānātikṛñādeḥ kevalajñānayatnādikriyāṇātravācitvaṁ

dūṣayati kuñaḥ iti . ayaṁ bhāvaḥ phalāṁśasyāvācyatve vyāpāraeva

dhātvarthaḥ syāt . tathā ca

svārthaphalavyadhikaraṇavyāpāravācitvādirūpasakarmakatvocchedāpattiḥ

. naca kṛñādau sakarmakatvavyavahārobhāktaiti naiyāyikoktaṁ yuktam

vyavahārasya bhāktatve’pi karmaṇi lakārāsambhavāt . na hi tīre

gaṅgāpadasya bhāktatve’pi tena snānādikāryaṁ kartuṁ śakyam . evañca

nahi yatna ityatra yatnamātramityarthaḥ . ataevāha .

kintūtpādanamevātaḥ karmavatsyāt yagādyapi . karmakartaryanyathā tu

na bhavet taddṛśeriva mū° utpādanam utpatirūpaphalasahitaṁ

yatnādikṛñarthaityarthaḥ . phalasya vācyatve yuktyantaramāha ataityādi .

yataḥ kṛñoyatnamātrārthoneṣyate ataḥ karmavat syāditi padena

karmavatkarmaṇā tulyakriyaḥ iti(pā0)sūtraṁ lakṣyate . avamarthaḥ

yataevāsyotpādanārthakatā ataḥ pacyate odanaḥ ṇayanevetivat kriyate

ghaṭaḥ svayameveti yagādayo’pyupapadyante . anyathā yatnasya

karmaniṣṭhatvābhāvāttanna syāt dṛśivat . yathā dṛśyate ghaṭaḥ

svayameveti na, darśanasya ghaṭāvṛttitvāttathā yatnasthāpīti, tathā

prayogāmupapatteriti . naiyāyikāstu vyāpārārthakatānirākaraṇena

yatnārthakatāmāhuḥ thathā śabdacintāmaṇau ākhyātasya

yatnavācakatvādacetane rathogacchatītyādau cākhyāte vyāpāralakṣaṇā

tathāhyākhyātasya pacatītyādau yatnovācyaḥ pacati pākaṁ

karotītyādiyatnārthakakarotinā sarvākhyātavivaraṇādvṛddhavyavahārādiva

bādhakaṁ vinā vivarāṇādapi vyutpatteḥ . dvandvādisamāsasya vigraheṇa

vivaraṇādapi vigrahārthe na śaktigrahaḥ anyalabhyatvāt kiṁkarītīti

yatnapraśne pacatītyuttarasya yatnārthatvaṁ vinānupapatterityācāryāḥ .

atra vadanti—ākhyātasya karoteśca na yatnārthakatvaṁ rathogacchati

jānāti yatate nidrātītyatra

dhātvarthānukūlayatnābhāve’pyākhyātapadaprayogāt gamanaṁ karotīti

karotinā tatrākhyātavivaraṇācca atra vyāpārasya karotyarthatve cetane’pi

tathā . na ca tatrākhyātakarotyorgauṇatvaṁ mukhye bādhakābhāvāt .

ataeva praśnottarayorna yatnārthatvaṁ kintu kriyāvācakatvameva kṛñaḥ,

tena kiṁ karotīti kriyāmātrapraśne pacati gacchatīti

kriyāviśeṣeṇottaramapi samañjasambhavati . tataḥ parogranthaḥ

kartṛśabde 1717 darśitodṛśyaḥ . tatparastunanu prakṛtestadarthatve’pi

pratyayasya na tadarthatvaṁ doṣaḥ ekodvaubahavaḥeṣiṣatītyatreva

tatsambhavāt . yattu tatra dvitīyasaṁkhyecchādikalpanāvadihāpi

dvitīyayatnakalpanamiti tanna dvitīyayatnecchādā vicchāyatnā’bhāvāt .

vastutastu pratyekasāmarthyāvadhṛtau sambhede

ubhayopasthiterāvaśyekatvena kasyāpyananvaye’pyadoṣāt pākāya yateta

pākaṁ kuryādityatra kṛtyarthakākhyāte’pi tathaivānvayāditi cet na eko

dvau bahava ityatra nāmārthasya

vibhaktyupanītasaṁkhyānvayāvagamāyogyatvāt

laḍāderyatnasāmarthyānavadhāraṇāt liṅaḥ pacetetyatra kṛtau

sāmarthyāvadhāraṇācca . athāyatnārthakadhātuparākhyātasya

yatnārthatvaṁ tena yatata iti nānanvayaḥ acetane cākhyātaprayogo

gauṇaeva . na ca vṛttyantareṇāpi prayogasambhave śaktikalpanā yuktā .

yadvā’nukūlayatne pravṛttaṁ padaṁ tadekadeśe’nukūlamātre pravartate

viśuddhimātraṁ puraskṛtya vrāhmaṇe śrotriyapadavat . acetane tu

madhyamottama puruṣau na bhavataeva

upapadayoryuṣmadasmadoścetanārthatvāt . bhavatu vā gauṇa eva

lokasyāparyanuyojyatvāditi cet na acetane ākhyātasya mukhyatve

bādhakābhāvena gauṇa tvābhāvāt tasmādākhyātamyānukūlatvena

vyāpāro vācyaḥ iti māṭṭāḥ . tena

cetanācetanayordhātvarthānukūlavyāpārasya

sattvādākhyātaprayogomukhyaeva . pathi śramaśayāne’pi pacatīti syāt

śramaśāntidvārā śayanasya pākānukūlavyāpāratvāt tava

yatnaviśeṣasyevānukūlavyāpāraviśeṣasya vācyatvāt anyathā

yatnavācyatve’pi taṇḍulānukūlayatnavati pacatīti syāt evamacetane’pi

karotinākhyātavivaraṇāt karotyartho’pi vyāpāraviśeṣaḥ . kathantarhi

caitraḥpacatītyatra pākānukūlatāpratītiḥ ākṣepāditi cenna ākhyātārthena

vyāpāreṇa saṁkhyayā vā yatnānapekṣaṇāt tayoḥ prayatnaṁ vināpi

sattvāt nāpi kartrā, dravyamātrasya kartṛtvāt yatnavataśca kartṛtve

ākhyātena tadabhidhāne yatnasyāpyabhidhānāt . nāpi

dhātvarthamātreṇa, tasya yatnaṁ vināpi sattvāt nāpi yatnodhātvarthaḥ

kriyāyāstatphalasya vā dhātuvācyatvāt anyathā pāka ityatrāpi

yatnānubhavaprasaṅgā diti cet na dhātvarthaviśeṣeṇa pākādinā

yatnākṣepāt tasya yatnaṁ vinānupapatteḥ . atha pacatītyatra

pākayatnavāniti vivaraṇāt yatnārthateti cet tarhi kartrarthatāpi syāt na hi

pākayatnaityeva vivaraṇaṁ pacatītyasya, tatpāryavivaraṇantat

taccākṣepeṇāpi nirvahatīti cet tulyaṁ yatne’pi kathantarhi rathogacchati,

vidyate vyometi bhāvanānubhavaiti cet na kathañcit,

bhāvanāyādhātvarthānvayāyogyatvena tvayāpi tatra

gauṇatvābhyupagamāditi . ucyate . caitraḥ pacatītyatra

pākānukūlayatnānubhavāvādyatna evākhyātārtholāghavāt natvanukūlo

vyāpāraḥ yatnatvāpekṣayā vyāpāratvasyopādhitvena gurutvāt nacācetana

ākhyātārthe musyatvārthamanuguṇovyāpāra evākhyātavācyaḥ

mukhyatvasambhave tyāgāyogāditi vācyaṁ śaktigrāhakeṇa laghuni śakti

paricchedāt acetane prayogasya ghṛttyantareṇāpi sambhavāt .

mukhyatvārthaṁ śaktikalpane ca vṛttyantarocchedaḥ . etana

vyāpāravācakasyākhyātasya

yatnasādhyārtharūpapacyādidhātūpasandhānena

vyāpāraviśeṣayatnopasthāpanamiti nirastaṁ lāghavena yatnasyaiva

śakyatvāt nanu yatnonākhyātārthaḥ pākatvena pākasya

yatnasādhyatvānumityā yatnalābhādityuktamiti cenna caitro yatnaṁ

katītyataḥ pākānukūlavartamānayatnavān pratīyate . naca pākasya

vartamānayatnena vyāptirasti atītānāgatayorvyabhicārāt . na ca

dhātvarthenānumite yatne ākhyātena vartamānatānvayaḥ sambhavati

yatnasyāpadārthatvāt svārthavyāpārasya

vartamānatvabodhanenākhyātasya paryavasitatvācca . atha caitraḥ

pākānukūlavartamānavyāpāravāniti śābdabodhānantaraṁ caitraḥ

pākānukūlavartamānayatnavān cetanatve sati

pākānukūlavartamānavyāpāravattvāt maitravat . anumānaṁ vinā ca

pākayatne vartamānatābhānamākhyātasya yatne śaktibhramāditi cenna

yatnābhāvakāle’pi tajjanya vyāpārasya vartamānatayā vyabhicārāt kiñca .

vyāpārasya vācyatvaṁ talliṅgakañca vartamānayatnānumānamiti kalpa

nādvayamapekṣya yatna vācyatve lāghavāt . nacācetane ākhyā tasya

vyāpāravācakatvābadhāraṇādeva kalpaneti yuktaṁ gauṇatayā

śaktibhrameṇa vā tatrākhyātādvyāpārāvagamopa patteḥ .

yatnavigamadaśāyāṁ tajjanyavyāpārakāle pacatī tyatra

vartamānavyāpārābhidhānamākhyātena lakṣaṇayā . yathā

rathogacchatītyatra, ato’nyalabhyatvānna tadanurodhena vyāpāre śaktiḥ .

anyathā tavāpi yatnakāle pacatīti nasyāt tasmānna laḍākhyātaṁ

yatnāvācakaṁ ākhyātatvāt liṅākhyātavat tarkaścokta eva . etena

phalānukūlovyāpā rodhātvarthaḥ ākhyātavācyā saṁkhyaiva tena caitraḥ

pacati ratho gacchatītyatra caitrarathayordhātvarthānukūlavyāpāravattva

pratīte rmukhya eva prayogaḥ . pacatītyatra yatnalābhodhārtvenā kṣepāt

vikḷttyanakūlavyāpārasya yatnaṁ vinānupapatte riti gurumatamapāstaṁ

pacatītyatra pākānukūlayatnavartamāna

tvasyākṣepādalābhenākhyātārthatvāt . ratnakoṣakṛtastu dhātvartho

vyāpāraḥ ākhyātārtha utpādanā sā cotpādakatā saiva bhāvanā

pacatītyādāvākhyātasya pākamutpādayatīti vivaraṇāt

dhātvarthotpādakatā ca cetanācetanayoriti sarvatrākhyātaprayogo

mukhyaeva . yatate jānātītyādāvapi yatnaṁ jñānamutpādayatītyarthāt

natu vyāpāro yatnovākhyātārthaḥ yatata ityādau mukhyatve sati

gauṇatvasyānyāyyatvāt ākhyātārthavivaraṇakarotyartho’pyutpādakataiva

pākaṁ karotītyādau karotītyasyotpādayatīti vivaraṇāt ghaṭaṁ

karotītyādau kṛñartha utpattireva gamyate . ataeva kiṁ karotītiṁ

sāmānyotpādanāprāśne pacatīti pākotpādanāviśeṣeṇottaramātramapi

samañjasam . caitra utpādayatītyatra dhātvartha evotpādanā

caitreṇānveti ākhyātārthotpādanā tvananvitaiva utpatterutpattyabhāvāt .

vastutastūtpādayatītyatra dhātvartha evotpādanā

ato’nutpādanārthadhātūttaravartina ākhyātasyānanyalabhyatayotpādanā

vācyā tanmatañca śabdaci° dūṣitaṁ vistarabhayānnoddhṛtam . evaṁ

darśiteṣu mateṣu yuktāyuktatvaṁ sughībhirbhāvyam . tataḥ svārthe—ṇic

kārayati karotītyarthaḥ . daśa varṣasahasrāṇi rāmo rājyamakārayadityādi

rāmā0

kṛ badhe svādi ubha° saka° seṭ . kṛṇoti kṛṇute akārṣīt akṛta . cakāra .

asya na suṭ suḍvidhau tānādikasyaiva grahaṇāt .

कृष्ण — kṛṣṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. black, dark, dark-blue (opposed to «śveta, śukla,

rohita», and «aruṇa») &c.

mf («ā») n. wicked, evil

kṛṣṇa m. (with or without «pakṣa») the dark half of the lunar month from

full to new moon

kṛṣṇa m. the fourth or Kali-yuga

kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. («kṛṣṇas») m. black (the colour) or dark-blue (which is

often confounded with black by the Hindūs)

kṛṣṇa m. the antelope

kṛṣṇa m. a kind of animal feeding on carrion («kṛṣṇa»)

kṛṣṇa m. the Indian cuckoo or Kokila (cf.

kṛṣṇa m. a crow

kṛṣṇa m. Carissa Carandas

kṛṣṇa m. N. of one of the poets of the (descended from Aṅgiras)

kṛṣṇa m. (a son of Devakī and pupil of Ghora āṅgirasa)

kṛṣṇa m. N. of a celebrated Avatār of the god Viṣṇu, or sometimes

identified with Viṣṇu himself ([ v, 2563; xiv, 1589 ff. 2359 &c.]) as

distinct from his ten Avatārs or incarnations (in the earlier legends he

appears as a great hero and teacher [; in the more recent he is deified,

and is often represented as a young and amorous shepherd with flowing

hair and a flute in his hand; the following are a few particulars of his birth

and history as related in 3304 ff. and in the Purāṇas &c.: Vasu-deva, who

was a descendant of Yadu and Yayāti, had two wives, Rohiṇī and Devakī;

the latter had eight sons of whom the eighth was Kṛiṣṇa; Kaṁsa, king of

Mathurā and cousin of Devakī, was informed by a prediction that one of

these sons would kill him; he therefore kept Vasu-deva and his wife in

confinement, and slew their first six children; the seventh was Balarāma

who was saved by being abstracted from the womb of Devakī and

transferred to that of Rohiṇī; the eighth was Kṛiṣṇa who was born with

black skin and a peculiar mark on his breast; his father Vasu-deva

managed to escape from Mathurā with the child, and favoured by the

gods found a herdsman named Nanda whose wife Yaśo-dā had just been

delivered of a son which Vasu-deva conveyed to Devakī after substituting

his own in its place. Nanda with his wife Yaśo-dā took the infant Kṛiṣṇa

and settled first in Gokula or Vraja, and afterwards in Vṛindāvana, where

Kṛiṣṇa and Bala-rāma grew up together, roaming in the woods and joining

in the sports of the herdsmen’s sons; Kṛiṣṇa as a youth contested the

sovereignty of Indra, and was victorious over that god, who descended

from heaven to praise Kṛiṣṇa, and made him lord over the cattle [ 3787

ff.; 7456 ff. ; Kṛiṣṇa is described as sporting constantly with the Gopīs or

shepherdesses [ 4078 ff.; 8301 ff. of whom a thousand became his

wives, though only eight are specified, Rādhā being the favourite [ 6694

ff.; 9177 ff. ; Kṛiṣṇa built and fortified a city called Dvārakā in Gujarāt,

and thither transported the inhabitants of Mathurā after killing Kaṁsa;

Kṛiṣṇa had various wives besides the Gopīs, and by Rukmiṇī had a son

Pradyumna who is usually identified with Kāma-deva; with Jains, Kṛiṣṇa is

one of the nine black Vasu-devas; with Buddhists he is the chief of the

black demons, who are the enemies of Buddha and the white demons)

kṛṣṇa m. N. of an attendant in Skanda’s retinue

kṛṣṇa m. of an Asura 12936 on

kṛṣṇa m. of a king of the Nāgas

kṛṣṇa m. of Arjuna (the most renowned of the Pāṇḍu princes, so named

apparently from his colour as a child)

kṛṣṇa m. of Vyāsa 11089

kṛṣṇa m. of Hārita see «-hārita»

kṛṣṇa m. of a son of śuka by Pīvarī (teacher of the Yoga) 980 ff.

kṛṣṇa m. of a pupil of Bharad-vāja

kṛṣṇa m. of Havir-dhāna 83

kṛṣṇa m. of a son of Arjuna 1892

kṛṣṇa m. of an adopted son of A-samaṇjas, 2039

kṛṣṇa m. of a chief of the Andhras

kṛṣṇa m. of the author of a on the

kṛṣṇa m. of a poet

kṛṣṇa m. of the author of a on the Dayā-bhāga

kṛṣṇa m. of the son of Keśavārka and grandson of Jayāditya

kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Tāna-bhaṭṭa and uncle of Raṅga-nātha

kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Dāmodara and uncle of Malhaṇa

kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Prabhūjika and uncle of Vidyā-dhara

kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Madana

kṛṣṇa m. of the grammarian Rāma-candra

kṛṣṇa m. of the son of Vāruṇendra and father of Lakṣmaṇa

kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Hīra-bhaṭṭa (author of the called Carakabhāṣya,

and of the work Sāhitya-sudhā-samudra)

kṛṣṇa m. N. of a hell

kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. («au») m. du. Kṛiṣṇa and Arjuna

kṛṣṇa m. pl. N. of the śūdras in śālmala-dvīpa

kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. («ā») f. a kind of leech

kṛṣṇa m. a kind of venomous insect

kṛṣṇa m. N. of several plants (Piper longum ; the Indigo plant ; a grape ;

a Punar-navā with dark blossoms ; Gmelina arborea ; Nigella indica ;

Sinapis ramosa ; Vernonia anthelminthica ; = «kākolī» ; a sort of Sārivā

kṛṣṇa m. a kind of perfume (= «parpaṭī»)

kṛṣṇa m. N. of Draupadī

kṛṣṇa m. of Durgā

kṛṣṇa m. of one of the seven tongues of fire

kṛṣṇa m. of one of the mothers in Skanda’s retinue

kṛṣṇa m. of a Yoginī

kṛṣṇa m. (with or without «gaṅgā») N. of the river Kistna

kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. («ī») f. night

kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. («am») n. blackness, darkness, i, 123, 1 and 9

kṛṣṇa m. the black part of the eye

kṛṣṇa m. the black spots in the moon

kṛṣṇa m. a kind of demon or spirit of darkness

kṛṣṇa m. black pepper

kṛṣṇa m. black Agallochum

kṛṣṇa m. iron

kṛṣṇa m. lead

kṛṣṇa m. antimony

kṛṣṇa m. blue vitriol

kṛṣṇa m. ([cf. «kārṣṇa», &c.; cf. also Russ. ‘cernyi’, «black.»])

kṛṣṇa Nom. P. «-ṣṇati», to behave or act like Kṛiṣṇa

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṛṣṇa a. [kṛṣ-nak]

(1) Black, dark, dark-blue.

(2) Wicked, evil. —ṣṇaḥ

(1) The black colour.

(2) The black antelope.

(3) A crow.

(4) The (Indian) cuckoo.

(5) The dark half of a lunar month (from full to new moon).

(6) The Kali age.

(7) Viṣṇu in his eighth incarnation, born as the son of Vasudeva and

Devakī. [Kṛṣṇa is the most celebrated hero of Indian mythology and the

most popular of all the deities. Though the real son of Vasudeva and

Devakī and thus a cousin of Kamsa, he was, for all practical purposes, the

son of Nanda and Yaśodā by whom he was brought up and in whose

house he spent his childhood. It was here that his divine character began

to be gradually discovered, when he easily crushed the most redoubtable

demons, such as Baka, Pūtanā &c., that were sent to kill him by Kamsa,

and performed many other feats of surprising strength. The chief

companions of his youth were the Gopis or wives of the cowherds of

Gokula, among whom Rādhā was his special favourite; (cf. Jayadeva’s

Gitagovinda). He killed Kamsa, Naraka, Keśin, Ariṣṭa and a host of other

powerful demons. He was a particular friend of Arjuna, to whom he acted

as charioteer in the great war, and his staunch support of the cause of

the Pāṇḍavas was the main cause of the overthrow of the Kauravas. On

several critical occasions, it was Kṛṣṇa’s assistance and inventive mind

that stood the Pāṇḍavas in good stead. After the general destruction of

the Yādavas at Prabhāsa, he was killed unintentionally by a hunter named

Jaras who shot him with an arrow mistaking him at a distance for a deer.

He had more than 16000 wives, but Rukmiṇi and Satyabhāma, (as also

Rādhā) were his favourites. He is said to have been of dark-blue or

cloud-like colour; cf. bahiriva malinataraṁ tava kṛṣṇa manopi bhaviṣyati

nūna Gīt. 8. His son was Pradyumna].

(8) N. of Vyāsa, the reputed author of the Mahābhārata.

(9) N. of Arjuna. (10) Aloe wood.

(11) The Supreme spirit.

(12) Black pepper.

(13) Iron. —ṣṇā

(1) N. of Draupadī, wife of the Pāṇḍavas; Ki. 1. 26.

(2) N. of a river in the Deccan that joins the sea at Masulipattam.

(3) A kind of poisonous insect.

(4) N. of several plants.

(5) A grape.

(6) A kind of perfume.

(7) An epithet of Durgā.

(8) One of the 7 tongues of fire. —ṣṇī A dark night. —ṣṇaṁ

(1) Blackness, darkness (moral also).

(2) Iron.

(3) Antimony.

(4) The black part of the eye.

(5) Black pepper.

(6) Lead.

(7) An inauspicious act.

(8) Money acquired by gambling.

— Comp.

—aguru n. a kind of sandal-wood.

—acalaḥ an epithet of the mountain Raivataka.

—ajinaṁ the skin of the black antelope.

—adhvan, —arcis m. an epithet of fire; cf. kṛṣṇavartman. —ayas n.,

—ayasaṁ, —āmiṣaṁ iron, crude or black iron.

—aṣṭamī, janmāṣṭamī the 8th day of the dark half of Śrāvaṇa when

Kṛṣṇa was born; also called gokulāṣṭamī. —āvāsaḥ the holy fig-tree.

—udaraḥ a kind of snake.

—kaṁdaṁ a red lotus.

—karman a. of black deeds, criminal, wicked, depraved, guilty,

sinful.

—kākaḥ a raven.

—kāyaḥ a buffalo.

—kāṣṭhaṁ a kind of sandal-wood, agallochum.

—kohalaḥ a gambler.

—gaṁgā the river kṛṣṇaveṇī. —gati fire: āyodhate kṛṣṇagatiṁ

sahāyaṁ R. 6. 42.

—garbhāḥ (f. pl.) 1. the pregnant wives of the demon Kṛṣṇa. —2.

waters in the interiors of the clouds.

—godhā a kind of poisonous insect.

—grīvaḥ N. of Śiva.

—caṁcukaḥ a kind of pea.

—caṁdraḥ N. of Vasndeva.

—cara a. what formerly belonged to Kṛṣṇa.

—cūrṇaṁ rust of iron.

—tāmraṁ a kind of sandal wood.

—tāraḥ 1. a species of antelope. —2. an antelope (in general).

—dehaḥ a bee.

—dhanaṁ money got by foul means.

—dvaipāyanaḥ N. of Vyāsa: tamahamarāgamakṛṣṇa

kṛṣṇadvaipāyanaṁ vaṁde Ve. 1. 4.

—pakṣaḥ the dark half of a lunar month. —2. an epithet of Arjuna.

—padī a female with black feet.

—paviḥ an epithet of Agni.

—piṁgala a. dark-brown. (

—lā) N. of Durgā.

—mṛgaḥ the black antelope; śṛṁge kṛṣṇamṛgasya vāmanayanaṁ

kaṁḍūyamānāṁ mṛgīṁ S. 6. 16.

—mukhaḥ, —vaktraḥ, —vadanaḥ the blackfaced monkey.

—yajurvedaḥ the Taittirīya or black Yajurveda.

—yāmaḥ an epithet of Agni.

—raktaḥ dark-red colour.

—rūpya= -cara q. v.

—lavaṇaṁ 1. a kind of black salt. —2. a factitious salt.

—lohaḥ the loadstone.

—varṇaḥ 1. black colour. —2. N. of Rahu. —3. a Śūdra.

—vartman m. 1. fire; R. 11. 42; Ms. 2. 94. —2. N. of Rāhu. —3. a

low man, profligate, black-guard.

—viṣāṇā Ved. the horns of the black antelope.

—veṇī N. of a river.

—śakuniḥ a crow.

—śāraḥ, —sāraḥ, —sāraṁgaḥ the spotted antelope; kṛṣṇasāre

dadaccakṣustvayi cādhijyakārmuke S. 1. 6, V. 4. 31.

—śṛṁgaḥ a buffalo.

—sakhaḥ, —sārathiḥ an epithet of Arjuna. (

—khī) cummin seed.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kṛṣṇa 1) adj. f. ā oxyt. Uṇ. 3, 4. ŚĀNT. 1, 12. «schwarz, dunkel» (Gegens.

śveta, śukla; rohita, aruṇa) AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. TRIK. 3, 3, 123. H. 1397. 17.

an. 2, 136. MED. ṇ. 8. nabhaḥ ṚV. 8, 85, 14. tamaḥ AV. 5, 3, 11. rātriḥ

13, 3, 26. rajaḥ ṚV. 1, 35, 2. 4. 9. ema 58, 4. tvak 130, 8. 9, 41, 1.

abhvam 1, 140, 5. 92, 5. lomāni ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 2. śakuna 14, 1, 1, 31.

ṚV. 10, 16, 6. AV. 7, 64, 1. Kuh ŚAT. BR. 2, 2, 4, 15. 9, 2, 3, 30. Pferd

LĀṬY. 3, 1. Kleid ŚAT. BR. 5, 2, 5, 17. Schuhe KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 4, 21.

anyadrocate kṛṣṇamanyat ṚV. 3, 55, 11. (oṣadhe) rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca

AV. 1, 23, 1. 8, 7, 1. ṚV. 8, 41, 10. 82, 13. VS. 24, 1. 10. 40. AV. 5, 23, 4.

TS. 5, 2, 4, 2. 3, 1, 4. 4, 9, 3. kṛṣṇā asedhadapa sadmano jāḥ ṚV. 6, 47,

21. 8, 62, 18. yasyāṁ kṛṣṇamaruṇaṁ ca saṁhite ahorātre vihite

bhūmyāmadhi AV. 12, 1, 52. kṛṣṇaṁ ca varṇamaruṇaṁ ca saṁ dhuḥ ṚV.

1, 73, 7. KĀTY. ŚR. 7, 3, 23. puruṣaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ piṅgākṣaḥ ŚAT. BR. 11, 6, 1,

7. 13. (ṛtvik) anatikṛṣṇo ‘natiśvetaḥ (Sch.: = nātibālo nātivṛddhaḥ) LĀṬY.

in Ind. St. 1, 51. lohitakṛṣṇavarṇā (v. l. lohitaśuklakṛṣṇā) ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4,

5. tila SUŚR. 1, 377, 13. asau sukṛṣṇo vihagaḥ kokilaḥ R. 2, 52, 2. VET. 4,

8. H. 49. kṛṣṇanetra «schwarzäugig», ein Beiw. Śiva’s MBH. 14, 200.

kṛṣṇavāsa 13,882. kṛṣṇavāsas R. 2, 69, 14. kṛṣṇa mit und ohne pakṣa

«die dunkle Monatshälfte, die Zeit vom Vollmond bis zum Neumond» AK.

1, 1, 3, 12. M. 1, 66. 6, 20. 11, 216. YĀJÑ. 3, 324. BHAG. 8, 25. SUŚR. 1,

19, 6. kṛṣṇacaturdaśī «der 14te Tag der dunklen Monatshälfte» TRIK. 1, 1,

107. KATHĀS. 25, 180. VET. 3, 15. «schwarz» in moralischem Sinne so v.

a. «böse» (s. kṛṣṇakarman). kṛṣṇīkaroti, kṛṣṇībhavati, kṛṣṇīsyāt VOP. 7,

82. — 2) m. a) «die schwarze Farbe» AK. TRIK. H. H. an. — b) parox. «die

schwarze Antilope» (in einigen Veda — Stellen ist ein anderes,

aasfressendes Thier gemeint): kṛṣṇo mṛgasaṁyoge (ādyudātto bhavati)

VS. PRĀT. 2, 25. ŚĀNT. 1, 12. ākhare kṛṣṇā iṣirā anartiṣuḥ ṚV. 10, 94, 5.

VS. 2, 1. 24, 36. TS. 5, 2, 6, 5. 6, 1, 3, 1. śune kroṣṭre mā śarīrāṇi

kartamaliklavebhyo gṛdhrebhyo ye ca kṛṣṇā (die Betonung wird wohl zu

ändern sein) aviṣyavaḥ AV. 11, 2, 2. ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 1. 3, 2, 1, 28.

BHĀG. P. 3, 10, 20. 8, 2, 20. Vgl. kṛṣṇamṛga, kṛṣṇaviṣāṇā, kṛṣṇājina. — c)

«Krähe» H. an. MED. — d) «der indische Kuckuck» H. an. VIŚVA im ŚKDR.

Vgl. R. 2, 52, 2. — e) N. eines Strauchs, «Carissa Carandas Lin.»

(karamardaka), ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — f) «die dunkle Monatshälfte» (s. u.

1.) am Ende. — g) «das vierte» Juga (kali) H. an. — h) N. pr. oxyt. oder

parox. ŚĀNT. 2, 13. parox. ṚV. 8, 74, 3. 4 (nach der ANUKR. ein

Āñgirasa). KAUṢ. BR. 30, 9 in Ind. St. 1, 190. 3, 214 (Kāṇva und

Āñgirasa). kṛṣṇo devakīputraḥ ein Schüler des ghora āṅgirasaḥ CHĀND.

UP. 3, 17, 6. Der im MBH. verherrlichte Held und treue Bundesgenosse

der Pāṇḍava, der Yādava Kṛṣṇa, ist gleichfalls ein Sohn der Devakī von

Vasudeva. Er verbringt seine Jugend, um den Nachstellungen Kaṁsa’s zu

entgehen, beim Hirten Nanda und dessen Frau Yaśodā und gilt für deren

Sohn. Hieraus hat man schliessen wollen, dass Kṛṣṇa in der älteren Sage

der wirkliche Sohn des Kuhhirten und seiner Frau gewesen sei, wogegen

aber zu bemerken ist, dass eine spätere Anknüpfung an die in einer

älteren Schrift auftretende Devakī Kṛṣṇa keinen besondern Glanz

verliehen hätte, und dass hierdurch die natürliche Verbindung mit dem in

der CHĀND. UP. erwähnten Lehrer Kṛṣṇa ohne Noth zerrissen würde.

Kṛṣṇa ist in der älteren Sage ein vergötterter Held und Lehrer (vgl. die

BHAGAVADGĪTĀ), in der jüngeren tritt neben dem siegreichen Helden

auch der dem Liebesgenuss überaus ergebene junge Hirt hervor. Schon

im MBH. wird Kṛṣṇa als Gottheit betrachtet und mit Viṣṇu identificirt, so

z. B. 14, 1589. 1591. kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdo ṇaśca nirvṛttivācakaḥ.

viṣṇustadbhāvayogācca kṛṣṇo bhavati sāttvataḥ.. 5, 2563. HARIV. 2359.

fgg. Vgl. hierüber LIA. I, 488. Seine Geburt wird erzählt HARIV. 3304. fgg.

VP. 502. fgg. hat Tausende von Frauen, unter denen acht besonders

hervorgehoben werden, HARIV. 6694. fgg. 9177. fgg. VP. 427. fg. 573. fg.

578. 590. seine Liebesspiele mit den Hirtinnen HARIV. 4078. fgg. 8301.

fgg. VP. 531. GĪT. sein Kampf mit Indra HARIV. 3787. fgg. 7456. fgg. VP.

522. fgg. 584. fgg. Indra von Kṛṣṇa besiegt, weiht seinen Nebenbuhler

zum König der Kühe: ahaṁ kilendro devānāṁ tvaṁ gavāmindratāṁ

gataḥ.. govinda iti lokāstvāṁ stoṣyanti bhuvi śāśvatam. mamopari

yathendrastvaṁ sthāpito gobhirīśvaraḥ.. upendra iti kṛṣṇa tvāṁ gāsyanti

divi devatāḥ. HARIV. 4004. fgg. Kṛṣṇa ist der Vater Pradjumna’s oder des

Liebesgottes; dieser heisst daher: kṛṣṇaja 9322. kṛṣṇanandana 9331.

kṛṣṇasūnu 9324. WEBER hat die Ansicht ausgesprochen, dass eine

Bekanntschaft mit Christus und dem Christenthum stark auf die

Entwickelung der Sage von Kṛṣṇa eingewirkt habe, eine Ansicht, die an

LASSEN einen entschiedenen Gegner gefunden hat. Ind. St. 1, 400. 2,

398. fgg. 409. fg. ZdmG.VI, 92. fgg. LIA. II, 1106. fgg. Die Lexicographen

führen kṛṣṇa als Beinamen von viṣṇu auf, AK. 1, 1, 1, 13. TRIK. 1, 1, 31.

3, 3, 123. H. 215. H. an. MED. Im System der Jaina ist Kṛṣṇa einer der

neun «schwarzen» Vāsudeva H. 697. Bei den Buddhisten erscheint Kṛṣṇa

als Haupt der «schwarzen» Dämonen, welche als Gegner von Buddha und

der «weissen» Dämonen auftreten, LALIT. 147. 287. 289. 325. Einen

andern Charakter trägt Kṛṣṇa ebend. 127. 166. — Den Namen Kṛṣṇa

führen ferner: ein König der Nāga MBH. 2, 360. BURN. Intr. 269. — ein

Asura HARIV. 12936. SĀY. zu ṚV. 1, 101, 1. — Arjuna, der Sohn Pāṇḍu’s,

H. an. MED. kṛṣṇa ityeva daśamaṁ nāma cakre pitā mama.

kṛṣṇāvadātasya sataḥ priyatvādbālakasya vai.. MBH. 4, 1389. Der du.

kṛṣṇau bezeichnet den Gott Kṛṣṇa und Arjuna 1, 8287. 3, 8279. — Vyāsa

TRIK. 3, 3, 123. H. an. MED. MBH. 1, 60. dvaipāyanena kṛṣṇena (vgl.

kṛṣṇadvaiyāyana) 2, 2573. yo vyasya vedāṁścaturo bhagavānṛṣiḥ. loke

vyāsatvamāpede kārṣṇyātkṛṣṇatvameva ca.. 1, 4236. HARIV. 11089. —

Kṛṣṇa Hārīta Ind. St. 1, 391, N. — ein Sohn Śuka’s von der Pīvarī, ein

Lehrer des Joga, HARIV. 980. fg. — ein Schüler Bharadvāja’s KATHĀS. 7,

15. — Kṛṣṇa Dāśārha LIA. I, Anh. XXVIII. — ein Sohn Havirdhāna’s HARIV.

83. VP. 106. BHĀG. P. 4, 24, 8. — ein Sohn Arjuna’s HARIV. 1892. — ein

Adoptivsohn von Asamañjas 2039. — ein Fürst der Andhra VP. 472. —

verschiedene Autoren, namentlich Scholiasten COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II,

452. fg. Verz. d. B. H. No. 109 u.s.w. — śrīkṛṣṇa ebend. No. 739 u.s.w. —

i) Name einer Hölle VP. 207. 209. — 3) f. kṛṣṇā a) (sc. śatapadī) «ein

best. giftiges Insect» SUŚR. 2, 290, 3. — b) N. verschiedener Pflanzen:

«Piper longum Lin.» AK. 2, 4, 3, 15. TRIK. 3, 3, 124. H. 421. H. an. MED.

HĀR. 261 (masc.); «die Indigopflanze; der Weinstock mit dunklen

Trauben» H. an. MED. = nīlapunarnavā; gambhārī; kṛṣṇajīraka;

sārivāviśeṣa; rājasarṣapa RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = somarājī; kākolī JAṬĀDH.

im ŚKDR. — SUŚR. 1, 162, 16. 2, 88, 1. 206, 5. 222, 12. 322, 12. 439, 19.

504, 5. 506, 7. kṛṣṇāvījam 330, 16. — c) «ein best. Parfum» (s. parpaṭī)

BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. — d) ein Bein. der Draupadi TRIK. 2, 8, 18. 3, 3,

124. H. 710. H. an. MED. MBH. 3, 10. DRAUP. 3, 5. ARJ. 3, 1. LIA. I, 641.

fg. — e) ein Bein. der Durgā H. ś. 47. MBH. 4, 184. Vgl. kālī. — f) N. einer

der sieben Zungen des Feuers H. 1099, Sch. Vgl. kālī. — g) N. pr. eines

Flusses, = kṛṣṇasamudbhavā, kṛṣṇagaṅgā, kṛṣṇaveṇyā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

VP. 184. kṛṣṇā gaṅgā MBH. 13, 4888. Vgl. LIA. I, 167 und kṛṣṇagaṅgā. —

4) f. kṛṣṇī «die Nacht»: riṇakti kṛṣṇīraruṣāya panthām ṚV. 7, 71, 1. — 5) n.

a) «Schwärze, Dunkelheit»: śukrā kṛṣṇādajaniṣṭa ṚV. 1, 123, 9. 1. 10,

127, 7. — b) «das Schwarze im Auge» ŚAT. BR. 10, 5, 2, 7. 12, 8, 2, 26.

13, 4, 2, 3. 14, 5, 2, 3. SUŚR. 1, 10, 18. 2, 303, 13. 311, 12. — c)

«Dunkelwesen» (von Dämonen): pañcāśatkṛṣṇā ni vapaḥ sahasrā ṚV. 4,

16, 13. — d) «schwarzer Pfeffer» AK. 2, 9, 36. TRIK. H. 419. H. an. MED.

— e) «schwarzes Aloeholz» RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — f) «Eisen» TRIK. H. an.

MED. — g) «Blei» H. ś. 159. — h) «Spiessglanz» H. 1051. — i) «blauer

Vitriol» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. kārṣṇa, kārṣṇāyana, kārṣṇi, kārṣṇya.

kṛṣṇa 2) h) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2559. — 3)

f) HALĀY. 1, 68. — g) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 10,a, N. 1. 16,b,16. 102,a, No. 158.

-revāsaṁgama 65,b,42. HALL 75. — h) N. pr. einer der Mütter im Gefolge

Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2640. — 5) b) «das Schwarze im Monde» TBR. 1, 2, 1, 2.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

kṛṣṇa (ŚRĪ KṚṢṆA). Born in the Yādava dynasty as the son of Vasudeva

and Devakī, Śrī Kṛṣṇa was the ninth of the ten incarnations of Mahāviṣṇu.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kṛṣṇa kṛṣṇa, i. e. kṛṣ + na (the origin of the signification is dubious).

I. adj., f. ṇā.

1. Black, or dark blue, Rām. 3, 55, 5.

2. With or without pakṣa, m. The dark half of a month, from the full

moon to that of the new moon, Man. 1, 66; 6, 20.

II. m.

1. kṛṣṇa, The most celebrated incarnation of Viṣṇu, MBh. 14, 1589.

2. The black antelope, Bhāg. P. 3, 10, 20.

III. f. ṇā.

1. A name of Durgā, MBh. 4, 184.

2. The name of several plants, Suśr. 1, 162, 16.

— Comp. ati-, adj. very black, Pañc. 104, 15.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kṛṣṇa a. black, dark. —m. (±pakṣa) the dark half month, the black

antelope (mostly kṛṣṇa); N. of an ancient hero and teacher, later as the

god Kṛṣṇa identified with Viṣṇu; du. kṛṣṇau = Kṛṣṇa and Arjuna. f. kṛṣṇā

a. black kind of leech. N. of sev. plants, E. of Durgā and Draupadī; f. kṛṣṇī

night. n. blackness, darkness.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kṛṣṇa kṛṣ-ṇa, n. black; dark; w. pakṣa, dark half of the month (from full

new moon); m. (kṛṣṇa) black antelope; N. of a god (incarnation of Viṣṇu):

du. Kṛṣṇa and Arjuna;

ā, f. kind of leech; N. of several plants; ep. of Draupadī, and of Durgā;

n. blackness, darkness.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kṛṣṇa pu° kṛṣa—nak . bhagavato’vatārabhede vāsudeve 1 devakīnandane .

kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdaḥ ṇaśca nirvṛtivācakaḥ . tayoraikyaṁ paraṁ

brahma kṛṣṇaityabhidhīyate ityukte 2 parabrahmaṇi, 3 vedavyāse, 4

arjune madhyamapāṇḍave ca . kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt 5 kokile, viśvaḥ 6 kāke,

medi° karamardake (karamacā) 7 vṛkṣe, śabdara° 8 nīle, varṇe 9 tadvati

tri° amaraḥ 10 kālāguruṇi rājani° . 11 aśubhakarmaṇi ca na° . kṛṣṇakarmā

amaraḥ 12 draupadyāṁ, 13 nīlīvṛkṣe, 14 pippalyāṁ, 15 drākṣāyāṁ, strī

medi° 16 nīlapunarnavāyām, 17 kṛṣṇajīrake, 18 gāmmāryā 19 kaṭukāyām,

20 sāvirābhede 21 rājasarṣape, rājani° 22 parpaṭyāṁ, bhāvapra° . 23

kākolyāṁ, 24 somarājyāñca strī ṭāp jaṭā° kṛṣṇavarṇatvācca tāsāṁ

tathātvam 25 dhanamede na° kṛṣṇadhanaśabdī vivṛtiḥ . 26 nīlāñjane, 27

lauhe, 28 marice ca pu° jaṭādharaḥ . tatra bhagavadavatāraviśeṣaḥ atha

bhādrapade māsi kṛṣṇāṣṭamyāṁ kalau yuge . aṣṭāviṁśatime jātaḥ

kṛṣṇo’sau devakīsutaḥ brahmapu° . vasudevadevakyau ca kaśyapāditī .

tau ca varuṇasya goharaṇāt brahmaṇaḥ śāpena gopālatvamāpatuḥ .

yathāha harivaṁ° 56 a° ityambupatinā prokto varuṇenāhamacyuta! .

gavāṁ kāraṇatattvajñaḥ kaśyape śāpamutsṛjam . yenāṁśena hṛtā gāvaḥ

kaśyapena mahātmanā . sa tenāṁśena jagatīṁ gatvā gopatvameṣyati .

yā ca sā surabhirnāma aditiśca surāraṇī . ubhe te tasya vai bhārye saha

tenaiva yāsyataḥ . tābhyāṁ saha sa gopatve kaśyapo bhuvi raṁsyate .

tadasya kaśyapasyāṁśastejasā kaśyapopamaḥ vasudeva iti khyāto goṣu

tiṣṭhati bhūtale . girirgovardhano nāma mathurāyāstvadūrataḥ . tatrāsau

goṣvabhirataḥ kaṁsasya karadāyakaḥ . tasyabhāryādvayañcaiva aditiḥ

surabhistathā . devakī rohiṇī caiva vasudevasya dhīmataḥ . tatrāvatara

lokānāṁ bhavāya madhusūdana! . jayāśīrvacanaistvete vardhayanti

divaukasaḥ . ātmānamātmanā hi tvamavatārya mahītale . devakīṁ

rohiṇīñcaiva garbhābhyāṁ paritoṣaya . tatratvaṁ śiśurevādau

gopālakṛtalakṣaṇaḥ . vardhayasva mahābāho! purā traivikrame yathā ..

chādayitvātmanātmānaṁ māyayā goparūpayā . gopakanyāsahasrāṇi

ramayaṁścara medinīm . gāśca te rakṣitā viṣṇo! vanāni paridhāvataḥ .

vanamālāparikṣiptaṁ dhanyā drakṣyanti te vapuḥ . viṣṇo!

padmapalāśākṣa! gopālavasatiṅgate . bāle tvayi mahābāho . loko

bālatvameṣyati . tvadbhaktāḥ puṇḍarīkākṣa! tava cittavaśānugāḥ . goṣu

gopā bhaviṣyanti sahāyāḥ satatantava . vane cārayato gāstu goṣṭheṣu

paridhāvataḥ . majjato yamunāyāntu ratimāpsyanti te bhṛśam . jīvitaṁ

vasudevasya bhaviṣyati sujīvitam . yastvayā tāta ityuktaḥ sa putra iti

vakṣyati . atha vā kasyaṁ putratvaṁ gacchethāḥ kaśyapādṛte . kā vā

dhārayituṁ śaktā viṣṇo! tvāmaditiṁ vinā . yogenātmasamutthena

gacchatva vijayāya vai iti viṣṇuṁ prati brahmoktiḥ . tābhyāṁ

tasyotpattikathā ca tatra 60 a° yathā yadarthaṁ sapta te garbhāḥ

kaṁsena vinipātitāḥ . tantu garbhaṁ prayatnena rarakṣustasya rakṣiṇaḥ .

sa tatra garbhavasatau vasatyātmecchayā hariḥ . samadhatta yaśodā’pi

garbhaṁ tadahareva tu . viṣṇoḥ śarīrajāṁ nidrāṁ viṣṇornirdeśakāriṇīm

garbhakāle tvasaṁpūrṇe aṣṭame māsi te striyau . devakī ca yaśodā ca

suṣuvāte samaṁ tadā . yāmeva rajanīṁ viṣṇurjajñe vṛṣṇikulaṁ prabhuḥ .

tāmeva rajanīṁ kanyā yaśodāto vyajāyata . nandagopasya bhāryaikā

vasudevasya cāparā . tulyakālaṁ hi garbhiṇyau yaśodā devakī tathā .

devakyajanayadviṣṇuṁ yaśodā tāntu kanyakām . muhūrte’bhijite prāpte

sārdharātre vibhūṣite . sāgarāḥ samakampanta celuśca dharaṇīdharāḥ .

jajvaluścāgnayaḥ śāntā jāyamāne janārdane . śivāḥ saṁpravavurvātāḥ

praśāntamabhavadrajaḥ . jyotīṁṣi vyatyakāśanta jāyamāne janārdane .

abhijinnāma nakṣatraṁ jayantī nāma śarvarī . muhūrto vijayo nāma yatra

jāto janārdanaḥ . avyaktaḥ śāśvataḥ kṛṣṇo harirnārāyaṇaḥ prabhuḥ .

jāyate bhagavāṁstatra nayanairmohayan jagat . tato’natidūre

vasudevastu taṁ rātrau jātaṁ puttramadhokṣajam . śrīvatsalakṣaṇaṁ

dṛṣṭvā yutaṁ divyaiśca lakṣaṇaiḥ . uvāca vasudevastaṁ rūpaṁ saṁhara

vai prabho! . bhīto’haṁ deva! kaṁsasya tasmādevaṁ vadāmyaham .

mama puttrā hatāstena tava jyeṣṭhā’mbujekṣaṇa! . vaiśampāyana upāca

. vasudevavacaḥ śrutvā rūpaṁ saṁharadacyutaḥ . anujñāpya pitṛtvena

nandagopagṛhaṁ naya . vasudevastu saṁgṛhya dārakaṁ kṣiprameva ca .

yaśodāyā gṛhaṁ rātrau viveśa sutavatsalaḥ . yaśodāyāstvavijñātastatra

nikṣipya dārakam . gṛhītvā dārikāṁ tāñca devakīśayane nyasat . parivarte

kṛte tābhyāṁ garbhābhyāṁ bhayaviklavaḥ . vasudevaḥ kṛtārtho vai

nirjagāma niveśanāt . yathā rūpeṇa tasyāvirbhāvastathā rūpaṁ bhāga°

103 a° vaṇṇitam

devakyāṁ devarūpiṇyāṁ viṣṇuḥ sarvaguhāśayaḥ . āvirāsīdyathā

prācyāṁ diśīnduriva puṣkalaḥ . tamadbhutaṁ bālakamambujekṣaṇaṁ

caturbhujaṁ śaṅkhagadādyudāyudham .

śrīvatsalakṣmaṁgalaśobhikaustubhaṁ pītāmbaraṁ

sāndrapayodasaubhagam . mahārghavaidūryakirīṭakuṇḍalatviṣā

pariṣvaktasahasrakuntalam .

uhṛāmakāñcyaṅgadakaṅkaṇādibhirvirocamānaṁ vasudeva aikṣata .

savismayītphullavilocano hariṁ sutaṁ vilokyānakadundubhistadā .

kṛṣṇāvatārotsavasambhramo’spṛśanmudā dvijebhyo’yutamāplutogavām .

ityāvirbhārva varṇayitvā

janma te mayyasau pāpomā vidyānmadhusūdana! . samudvije

bhavaddhetoḥ kaṁsādahamadhīradhīḥ . upasaṁhara viśvātma

nnadorūpamalaukikam . śaṅkhacakragadāpadmaśriyā juṣṭaṁ caturbhujam

. viśvaṁ yadetat svatanau niśānte yathāvakāśaṁ puruṣaḥ paro bhavān .

vibharti, so’yaṁ mama garbhajo’bhū daho nṛlokasya viḍambanaṁ tat .

itthaṁ devakyāḥ prārthane tāṁ sāntvayitvā tasya prākṛtarūpadhāraṇaṁ

tatraivoktaṁ yathā ityuktvā tāṁ haristūṣṇṇīṁ bhagavānātmamāyayā .

pitroḥ saṁpaśyatoreva babhūva prākṛtaḥ śiśuḥ . evañca

caturbhujarūpeṇotpattāvapi prākṛtarūpatvoktyā tasmādanantaraṁ

dvibhujatvamiti vaiṣṇavā manyante . gītāyāntu tenaiva rūpeṇa

caturbhujena sahasrabāho! bhava viśvamūrte! iti bhāratayuddhakāle

tasya caturbhujatvakīrtanāt caturbhujatva mevāsīt

śaṅkhacakrādyāyudhaśūnyatvena prākṛtatvamiti tu yuktamutpaśyāmaḥ .

tasyedānīṁ janmasamayonirūpyate prāguktabrahmapu° kalau

jātatvābhidhānāt kaliyugaevāsya prādurbhāvaḥ . yadi ca

ekaikamanvantare bahavaḥ kalayaḥ sambhavanti tathāpi

vartamānavaivasvatamanvantare aṣṭāviṁśatime mahāyuge yaḥ

kalistatraivābhirmūtaḥ . tatrāpi jyotirnibandhe uccasthāḥ

śaśibhaumacāndriśanayo lagnaṁ vṛṣolābhago jīvaḥ siṁhatulāliṣu

kramavaśāt pūṣośanorāhavaḥ . naiśīthaḥ samayā’ṣṭamī budhadinaṁ

bāhmarkṣamatra kṣaṇe śrīkṛṣṇābhidhamambujekṣaṇamabhūdāviḥ paraṁ

brahma tat grahāṇāṁ viśeṣarāśyavasthānakāle tasyāvirbhāvokteḥ

tādṛśasamayasya ca kaleḥ 647 varṣeṣu gataṣu sambhavaḥ kalau tataḥ

pūrvaṁ tādṛśasamayāsambhavāt . rājataraṁṅgiṇyāṁ ca śateṣu ṣaṭsu

sārdheṣu tryadhikeṣu ca bhūtale . kalergateṣu varṣāṇāma bhayan

kurupāṇḍavāḥ ityanena kaleḥ 653 varṣeṣu gateṣu tatsamakālīnayoḥ

kurupāṇḍavayorutpattiruktā atastasyāpi tatkālotpattikatvam .

tadavatāracaritaṁ ca harivaṁ° 42 a° varṇitaṁ yathā

aparaḥ keśavasyāyaṁ prādurbhāvo mahātmanaḥ . vikhyāto māthure

kalpe sarvalokahitāya vai . yatra śālvañca maindañca kaṁsaṁ

dvividameva ca . ariṣṭaṁ vṛṣabhaṁ keśiṁ pūtanāṁ daityadārikām .

nāgaṁ kubalayāpīḍaṁ cānūraṁ muṣṭikaṁ tathā .

daityānmānuṣadehasthān sūdayāmāma vīryavān . chinnaṁ

bāhusahasrañca vāṇasyādbhutakarmaṇaḥ . narakaśca hataḥ saṅkhye

yavanaśca sahābalaḥ . hṛtāni ca mahīpānāṁ sarvaratnāni tejasā .

durāccārāśca nihatāḥ pārthivā ye mahītale . tasya ca kṛṣṇanāmatā

gargeṇa tathā nāmakaraṇāt yathāha bhāga° 10 . 8 . 9 āsan

vaṇṇāstrayohyasya grahṇato’nuyugaṁ tanūḥ . śukloraktastathā’pīta

idānīṁ kṛṣṇatāṁ gataḥ iti apītaḥ śyāma ityarthaḥ bhāga° 11 a°

yugāvatāre dvāpare śyāmamūrtitvokteḥ yathā kṛte śuklaścaturbāhurjaṭilo

balkalāmbaraḥ . kṛṣṇājinopavītākṣān bibhraddaṇḍakamaṇḍalū . tretāyāṁ

raktavarṇo’sau caturbāhustrimekhalaḥ . hiraṇyakeśastrayyātmā

sruksruvādyu palakṣaṇaḥ . dvāpare bhagavān śyāmaḥ pītavāsā

nijāyudhaḥ . śrīvatsādibhiraṅkaiśca lakṣaṇairupalakṣitaḥ .

nānātantravidhānena kalāvapi yathā śṛṇu . kṛṣṇavarṇaṁ tviṣā’kṛṣṇaṁ

sāṅgopāṅgāstrapārṣadaḥ . yajñai saṁkīrtanaprāyairyajantīha

sumedhasaḥ . asya tannāmanirbacanaṁ ca bhā° u° 69 a°

kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdoṇaśca nirvṛtivācakaḥ . viṣṇustadbhāvayogācca

kṛṣṇobhavati sātvataḥ kalpabhede’pi vaivasvatamanoraṣṭāviṁśatime yuge

yuge tasyābhi bhāṁvaḥ ataeva chā° u° kalpabhedādiprāyeṇaiva

taddhaitat ghora āṅgirasaḥ kṛṣṇāya devakīputrāyoktvovāca ityuktam .

vastutastasya bhagavadavatārāt bhinnatvameva tasya

ghorāṅgirasaśiṣyatvokteḥ . parameśvarasya tathātvāsambhavāt .

atastannāmni 29 aparasninneva kṛṣṇaśabdasya vṛttiḥ . kṛṣṇeti maṅgalaṁ

nāma yasya vāci pravartate . masmībhavanti rājendra!

mahāpātakakoṭayaḥ purā° . arjunasya tannāmanirvacanaṁ bhā° vi° 44 a°

. kṛṣṇa ityeva daśamaṁ nāma cakre pitā mama . kṛṣṇāvadātasya sataḥ

priyatvāt bālakasya ca . vyāsasya kārṣṇyāttathātvam yovyasya

vedāṁścaturastapasā bhagavānṛṣiḥ . loke vyāsatvamāpade kārṣṇyāt

kṛṣṇatvameva ca bhā° ā° 105 a° . kṛṣṇasyedam aṇ kārṣṇa

tatsambandhini tri° kārṣṇaṁ vedamimaṁ vidvān śrāvayitvārthamaśnute

bhā° ā° 1 a° ukte . apatye tu iñ . kārṣṇi tadapatye puṁstrī .

candrahrāsakaraprathamādipañcadaśakalākriyārūpe

pratipadādidarśāntātmakapañcadaśatithyātmake 30 kālabhede

ardhamāse candravṛddhikaraḥ śuklaḥ kṛṣṇaścandrakṣayātmakaḥ ti° ta°

ṣaṭtri° . indukalākṣayaprakāraḥ induśabde 611 pṛ° uktaḥ . tadupalakṣite

31 pitṛyāne śuklakṛṣṇe gatī hyete jagatāṁ śāśvate mate . ekayā

yātyanāvṛttimanyayā vartate punaḥ gītā . pitṛyāne ca yathā

kṛṣṇapakṣasaṁbandhastathā ātivāhikaśabde 651 pṛ° darśitam .

dhūmorātristathā kṛṣṇaḥ ṣaṇmāsā dakṣiṇāyanam gītā .

kṛṣṇapakṣābhimānini pitṛyānasthe karmiṇāmativāhake īśvaraniyojite 32

devabhede ātivāhikaśabda vivṛtiḥ . 33 dyūtādyupārjite dhane na°

kṛṣṇadhanaśabde arthaśabde ca vivṛtiḥ . kṛṣṇasya bhāvaḥ ṣyañ . kārṣṇya

tadbhāve na° kārṣṇyāt kṛṣṇatvameva ca bhā° ā° 105 a° . imanic .

kṛṣṇiman tadbhāve pu° kṛṣṇimānaṁ dadhānena . tal, kṛṣṇatā strī, tva

kṛṣṇala, na0, kṛṣṇavarṇe . kṛṣṇā’pi śuddheradhikaṁ vidhātṛbhiḥ māvaḥ .

abhivṛṣya marucchasyān kṛṣṇameghastirodadhe raghuḥ . 34

netragate’śabhede akṣiśabde vivṛtiḥ . 35 kṛṣṇasāramṛge puṁstrī° eṇaḥ

kṛṣṇaḥ sa kīrtitaḥ chando° pa° . kṛṣṇājinam

कृष्णवर्ण — kṛṣṇavarṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṛṣṇavarṇa «kṛṣṇa-varṇa» mfn. of a black colour, dark-blue

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kṛṣṇavarṇa (kṛṣṇa + varṇa) adj. «von schwarzer Farbe, schwarz» H. 1238.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kṛṣṇavarṇa a. black-coloured.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kṛṣṇavarṇa kṛṣṇa-varṇa, a. black-coloured;

-vartman, m. fire (black-tracked): (a) -vāla, a. black-tailed;

-śakti, m. N.;

-sarpa, m. kind of black snake;

-sāra, a. chiefly black, spotted black and white; m. spotted antelope;

(a) -sāraṅga, a.; m. f.; id..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kṛṣṇavarṇa pu° kṛṣṇo varṇo’sya . 1 rāhau grahe . rāhoḥ chāyārūpatvena

tamorūpatyāt tathātvāropāt tathātvam kṛṣṇaḥ aśuddhī varṇaḥ . 2 śūdre

pu° . karma° . kāle varṇe pu° kṛṣṇavarṇavati tri° . kṛṣṇavarṇaṁ

tvipā’kṛṣṇam bhāgava° 11 ska° .

खरु — kharu Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kharu mfn. white

mfn. foolish, idiotic

mfn. harsh, cruel

mfn. desirous of improper or prohibited things

kharu m. a tooth

mfn. a horse

mfn. pride

mfn. love or Kāma (the god of love)

mfn. N. of śiva

kharu f. ( 4-1, 44 a girl who chooses her own husband

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kharu a. [khan-ku raścāṁtādeśaḥ]

(1) White.

(2) Foolish, stupid.

(3) Cruel.

(4) Desirous of prohibited things. —ruḥ

(1) A horse.

(2) A tooth.

(3) Pride.

(4) Cupid, the god of love.

(5) Śiva.

(6) Likeness for prohibited things.

(7) The white colour. —ruḥ f. A girl who chooses her own husband

(patiṁvarā kanyā Sk.).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kharu 1) adj. f. kharu P. 4, 1, 44, Vārtt. VOP. 4, 16. a) «weiss» TRIK. 3, 3,

343. H. an. 2, 408. MED. r. 21. 22. — b) «einfältig.» — c) «grausam»

(krūra) Uṇ. 1, 36. = tīkṣṇa UṆĀDIVṚ. im SAṁKṢIPTAS. ŚKDR. — d) «nur

nach verbotenen Dingen trachtend» H. 859. — 2) m. a) «Zahn» TRIK. 2, 6,

29. 3, 3, 343. H. an. MED. — b) «Pferd» Uṇ. TRIK. 3, 3, 343. H. an. MED.

— c) «Hochmuth» TRIK. H. an. MED. — d) «Liebe» oder «der Liebesgott»

Uṇ. — e) ein Bein. Śiva’s TRIK. H. ś. 41. H. an. MED. — 3) f. kharu «ein

Mädchen, welches sich selbst den Gatten sucht», SIDDH.K.33,a,2.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kharu pu° khana—ku raścāntādeśaḥ . 1 śive 2 darpe, 3 aśve, 4 datte,

medi° 5 kāmadeve uṇā° . 6 śvetavarṇe 7 śvetavarṇavati, 8

niṣiddhaikarucau, hema° . 9 nirbodhe, 10 krūre tri° uṇā° vṛ° 11 patiṁ

varāyāṁ kanyāyāṁ strī . hema° guṇavācitve’pi paryudāsānna ṅīṣ . 12

tīkṣṇe tri° saṁkṣiptasāraḥ .

गंधः — gaṁdhaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

gaṁdhaḥ [gaṁdh-pacādyac]

(1) Smell, odour; gaṁdhamāghrāya corvyāḥ Me. 21; apaghnaṁto

duritaṁ havyagaṁdhaiḥ S. 4. 7; R. 12. 27. (gaṁdha is changed to gaṁdhi

when as the last member of a Bah. comp. it is preceded by ud, pūti, su,

surabhi, or when the compound implies comparison; sugāṁdhi,

surabhigaṁdhi, kamalagaṁdhi mukhaṁ; śāliniryāsagaṁdhibhiḥ R. 1. 38;

āhuti- 1. 53; also when gaṁdha is used in the sense of ‘a little’).

(2) Smell considered as one of the 24 properties or guṇas of the

Vaiśeṣikas; it is a property characteristic of pṛthivī or earth which is

defined as gaṁdhavatī pṛthvī T. S.

(3) The mere smell of anything, a little, a very small quantity;

ghṛtagaṁdhi bhojanaṁ Sk.

(4) A perfume, any fragrant substance; eṣā mayā sevitā

gaṁdhayuktiḥ Mk. 8; Y. 1. 231; Mu. 1. 4.

(5) Sulphur.

(6) Pounded sandal wood.

(7) Connection, relationship.

(8) A neighbour.

(9) Pride, arrogance; as in āttagaṁdha humbled or mortified. (10) An

epithet of Śiva. —dhaṁ

(1) Smell.

(2) Black aloewood.

— Comp.

—adhikaṁ a kind of perfume.

—apakarṣaṇaṁ removing smells.

—aṁbu n. fragrant water.

—amlā the wild lemon tree.

—aśman m. sulphur.

—aṣṭakaṁ a mixture of 8 fragrant substances offered to deities,

varying in kind according to the nature of the deity to whom they are

offered.

—ākhuḥ the musk-rat.

—ājīvaḥ a vendor of perfumes.

—āḍhya a. rich in odour, very fragrant; srajaścottamagaṁdhāḍhyāḥ

Mb. (

—ḍhyaḥ) the orange tree. (

—ḍhyaṁ) sandal-wood.

—iṁdriyaṁ the organ of smell.

—ibhaḥ, —gajaḥ, dvipaḥ, —hastin m. ‘the scentelephant’, an

elephant of the best kind; (yasya gaṁdhaṁ samāghrāya na tiṣṭhaṁti

pratidvipāḥ . sa vai gaṁdhagajo nāma nṛpatorvījayāvahaḥ ..); Mu. 2. 6;

śamayati gajānanyāngaṁdhadvipaḥ kalabho’pi san V. 5. 18; R. 6. 7; 17.

70; Ki. 17. 17.

—uttamā spirituous liquor.

—udaṁ scented water.

—upajīvin m. one who lives by perfumes, a perfumer.

—otuḥ (forming gaṁdhotu or gaṁdhautu) the civet-cat.

—kārikā 1. a female servant whose business is to prepare

perfumes. —2. a female artisan living in the house of another, but not

altogether subject to another’s control.

—kālikā, —kālī f. N. of Satyavatī, mother of Vyāsa.

—kāṣṭhaṁ aloewood.

—kuṭī a kind of perfume.

—kelikā, —celikā musk.

—ga a. 1. taking a scent, smelling. —2. redolent.

—gajaḥ see gaṁdhebha. —guṇa a. having the property of odour.

—ghrāṇaṁ the smelling of any odour.

—jalaṁ fragrant water.

—jñā the nose.

—tūryaṁ a musical instrument of a loud sound used in battle (as a

drum or trumpet).

—tailaṁ a fragrant oil, a kind of oil prepared with fragrant

substances.

—dāru n. aloe-wood.

—dravyaṁ a fragrant substance.

—dhārin a. bearing fragrance. (—m.) an epithet of Śiva.

—dhūliḥ f. musk.

—nakulaḥ the muskrat.

—nālikā, —nālī the nose.

—nilayā a kind of jasmine.

—paḥ N. of a class of manes.

—patrā, —palāśī a species of zedoary.

—palāśikā turmeric.

—pālin m. an epithet of Śiva.

—pāṣāṇaḥ sulphur.

—piśācikā the smoke of burnt fragrant resin (so called from its dark

colour or cloudy nature, or perhaps from its attracting demons by

fragrance).

—puṣpaḥ 1. the Vetasa plant. —2. the Ketaka plant. (

—ṣpaṁ) 1. a fragrant flower. —2. flowers and sandal offered to

deities at the time of worship.

—puṣpā an indigo plant.

—pūtanā a kind of imp or goblin.

—phalī 1. the Priyangu creeper. —2. a bud of the Champaka tree.

—baṁdhuḥ the mango tree.

—mātṛ f. the earth.

—mādana a. intoxicating with fragrance. (

—naḥ) 1. a large black bee. —2. sulphur. —3. an epithet of Rāvaṇa.

(

—naḥ —naṁ) N. of a particular mountain to the east of Meru,

renowned for its fragrant forests. (

—naṁ) the forest on this mountain.

—mādanī spirituous liquor.

—madinī lac.

—mārjāraḥ the civet-cat.

—mukhā, —mūṣikaḥ —mūṣī f. the musk rat.

—mṛgaḥ 1. the civet cat. —2. the muskdeer.

—maithunaḥ a bull.

—modanaḥ sulphur.

—mohinī a bud of the Champaka tree.

—yuktiḥ f. preparation of perfumes.

—rasaḥ myrrh. -aṁgakaḥ turpentine.

—rājaḥ a kind of jasmine. (

—jaṁ) 1. a sort of perfume. —2. sandal-wood.

—latā the Priyangu creeper.

—lolupā 1. a bee. —2. a fly or gnat.

—vahaḥ the wind; rātriṁdivaṁ gaṁdhavahaḥ prayāti S. 5. 4;

digdakṣiṇā gaṁdhavahaṁ mukhena Ku. 3. 25.

—vahā the nose.

—vāhaḥ 1. the wind; Bv. 1. 104. —2. the musk-deer.

—vāhī the nose.

—vihvalaḥ wheat.

—vṛkṣakaḥ —vṛkṣaḥ the Śala tree.

—vyākulaṁ a kind of fragrant berry (kakkola. —śuṁḍinī the musk-

rat.

—śekharaḥ musk.

—sāraḥ 1. sandal —2. a kind of jasmine.

—sukhī sūyī the musk shrew.

—somaṁ the white water-lily.

—hārikā a female servant whose business is to prepare perfumes;

cf gaṁdhakārikā.

गरुडः — garuḍaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

garuḍaḥ [garudbhyāṁ ḍayate, ḍī-ḍa pṛṣo- talopaḥ; gṝ-uḍac Uṇ. 4. 166.]

(1) N. of the king of birds. [He is a son of Kaśyapa by his wife Vinata.

He is the chief of the feathered race, an implacable enemy of serpents,

and elder brother of Aruṇa. In a dispute between his mother and Kadru,

her rival, about the colour of uccaiḥśravas Kadrū defeated Vinata, and, in

accordance with the conditions of the wager, made her her slave. Garuḍa

brought down the heavenly beverage (Amṛta) to purchase her freedom,

not, however, without a hard struggle with Indra for the same. Vinatā

was then released; but the Amṛta was taken away by Indra from the

serpents. Garuḍa is represented as the vehicle of Viṣṇu, and as having a

white face, an aquiline nose, red wings and a golden body].

(2) A building shaped like Garuḍa.

(3) N. of a particular military array.

— Comp.

—agrajaḥ an epithet of Aruṇa, the charioteer of the sun.

—aṁkaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu.

—aṁkitaṁ, —aśman m.

—uttīrṇaṁ an emerald.

—dhvajaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu.

—vyūhaḥ a particular military array.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

garuḍaḥ puṁ, (garudbhyāṁ pakṣābhyāṁ ḍayate uḍḍayate . iti garut + ḍī

+ ḍaḥ . pṛṣodarāt talope sādhuḥ . yadvā, gira uḍac . uṇāṁ 4 . 155 . iti

uḍac .) svanāmakhyātapakṣī . tatparyāyaḥ . garutmān 2 tārkṣyaḥ 3

vainateyaḥ 4 khageśvaraḥ 5 nāgāntakaḥ 6 viṣṇu rathaḥ 7 suparṇaḥ 8

pannagāśanaḥ 9 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 2 . 32 .. mahāvīraḥ 10 pakṣisiṁhaḥ 11

uragāśanaḥ 12 . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. śālmalī 13 harivāhanaḥ 14 amṛtāharaṇaḥ

15 nāgāśanaḥ 16 . iti hārāvalī .. śālmalisthaḥ 17 khagendraḥ 18

bhujagāntakaḥ 19 tarasvī 20 tārkṣyanāyakaḥ 21 . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. * ..

tasyotpattikāraṇaṁ yathā —

yajataḥ puttrakāmasya kaśyapasya prajāpateḥ .

sāhāyyamṛṣayo devā gandharvāśca daduḥ kila ..

tatredhmānayane śakro niyuktaḥ kaśyapena ha .

munayo vālikhilyāśca ye cānye devatāgaṇāḥ ..

śakrastu vīryasadṛśamiṣmabhāraṁ giriprabham .

samutkṣipyānayāmāsa nātikṛcchrādiva prabhuḥ ..

athāpaśyadṛṣīn hrasvānaṅguṣṭhodaravarṣmaṇaḥ .

palāśavṛntikāmekāṁ sahitān vahataḥ pathi ..

tān sarvān vismayāviṣṭo vīryonmattaḥ purandaraḥ .

avahasyābhyayācchīghraṁ laṅghayitvāvamanya ca ..

te’tha roṣasamāviṣṭāḥ subhṛśaṁ jātamanyavaḥ .

ārebhire mahat karma tadā śatrubhayaṅkaram ..

kāmavīryaḥ kāmagamo devarājabhayapradaḥ .

indro’nyo sarvadevānāṁ bhavediti yatavratāḥ ..

tadbuddhvā bhṛśasantapto devarājaḥ śatakratuḥ .

jagāma śaraṇaṁ tatra kaśyapaṁ śaṁsitavratam ..

tacchrutvā devarājasya kaśyapo’tha prajāpatiḥ .

bālikhilyānupāgamya karmasiddhimapṛcchata ..

atha te taṁ mahātmānaṁ pratyūcuḥ satyavādinaḥ .

tān kaśyapa uvācedaṁ sāntvapūrbaṁ prajāpatiḥ .. tasya

pakṣīndratvakāraṇaṁ yathā —

ayamindrastribhuvane niyogāt brahmaṇaḥ kṛtaḥ indrārthañca

bhavanto’pi yatnavantastapodhanāḥ ..

na mithyā brahmaṇo vākyaṁ kartumarhatha sattamāḥ .

bhavatāṁ hi na mithyāyaṁ saṁkalpo vai cikīrṣitaḥ ..

bhavatveṣa patattrīṇāmindro’tibalasatvavān .

prasādaḥ kriyatāmasya devarājasya yācataḥ ..

bālikhilyā ūcuḥ .

apatyārthaṁ samārambho bhavataścāyamīpsitaḥ .

tathā caivaṁ vidhatsvātra yathāśreyo’nupaśyasi ..

etasminneva kāle tu devī dākṣāyaṇī śubhā .

vinatā nāma kalyāṇī puttrakāmā yaśasvinī ..

tapastaptā vrataparā snātā puṁsavane śuciḥ .

upacakrāma bhartāraṁ tāmuvācātha kaśyapaḥ ..

ārambhaḥ saphalo devi ! bhavitāyaṁ tavepsitaḥ .

janayiṣyasi puttrau dvau vīrau tribhuvaneśvarau ..

tapasā bālikhilyānāṁ mama saṅkalpajau tathā .

etau sarvapatattrīṇāmindratvaṁ kārayiṣyataḥ ..

vinatā cāpi siddhārthā babhūva muditā tathā .

janayāmāsa puttrau dvāvaruṇaṁ garuḍaṁ tathā ..

vikalāṅgo’ruṇastatra bhāskarasya puraḥsaraḥ .

patattrīṇāntu garuḍa indratvenābhyaṣicyata .. * .. tasya

janmakālīnarūpaṁ yathā —

etasminnantare cāpi garuḍaḥ kāla āgate .

vinā mātrā mahātejā vidāryāṇḍamajāyata ..

mahāsatvabalopetaḥ sarvā vidyotayandiśaḥ .

kāmarūpī kāmagamaḥ kāmabīryo vihaṅgamaḥ ..

agnirāśirivodbhāsan samiddho’tibhayaṅkaraḥ .

vidyudvispaṣṭapiṅgākṣo yugāntāgnisamaprabhaḥ ..

pravṛddhaḥ sahasā pakṣī mahākāyo nabho gataḥ .

ghoro ghorasvano raudro vahniraurva ivāparaḥ .. * .. tasya

viṣṇuvāhanatve kāraṇaṁ yathā —

apītvā cāmṛtaṁ pakṣī parigṛhyāśu niḥsṛtaḥ .

agacchadapariśrānta āvāryārkaprabhāṁ khagaḥ ..

viṣṇunā tu tadākāśe vainateyaḥ sameyivān .

tasya nārāyaṇastuṣṭastenālaulyena karmaṇā ..

tamuvācāvyayo devo varado’smīti khecaram .

sa vavre tava tiṣṭheyamuparītyantarīkṣagaḥ ..

uvāca cainaṁ bhūyo’pi nārāyaṇamidaṁ vacaḥ .

ajaraścāmaraścāsyāmamṛtena vināpyaham .

evamastviti taṁ viṣṇuruvāca vinatāsutam ..

pratigṛhya varau tau tu garuḍo viṣṇumabravīt .

bhavate’pi varaṁ dadmi vṛṇotu bhagavānapi ..

taṁ vavre vāhanaṁ kṛṣṇo garutmantaṁ mahābalam .

dhvajañca cakre bhagavānupari sthāsyatīti tam .. iti mahābhārate . 1 .

31-33 . adhyāyeṣu .. (vyūhaviśeṣaḥ . yathā, manuḥ . 7 . 187 .

varāhamakarābhyāṁ vā sūcyā vā garuḍena vā ..

sūkṣmamukhapaścādbhāgaḥ pṛthumadhyo varāhavyūhaḥ . eṣa

evapṛthutaramadhyo garuḍavyūhaḥ . iti kullūkabhaṭṭaḥ ..)

गो — go Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899go «gaus» (acc. «gām» instr. «gavā» dat. «gave», gen. abl. «gos» loc.

«gavi»; du. «gāvā» [Ved.], «gāvau»; pl. nom. «gāvas» acc. «gās» [rarely

«gāvas» ii] instr. «gobhis» dat. abl. «gobhyas», gen. «gavām» [once at the

end of a Pāda at the end of Pādas only cf. «gonām» loc. «goṣu») m. an ox

f. a cow, (pl.) cattle, kine, herd of cattle &c. (in comp. before vowels [cf.

«gav, gava», qq. vv.; cf. also «gavām, gavi, gāṁ» ss.vv.; «gavāṁ vrata» N.

of a Sāman; «gavāṁ tīrtha» see «go t-; goṣu-gam», to set out for a battle

[to conquer cows] ; «anything coming from or belonging to an ox or cow»,

milk (generally pl.), flesh (only pl. ; «fat» ( x, 27, 22 ; = «go-ṣṭoma» (q.v.)

(see also «go-āyus»); (pl.) «the herds of the sky», the stars ; (m. [also f.

rays of light (regarded as the herds of the sky, for which Indra fights with

Vṛitra) 2943 &c.; m. the sign Taurus xl f. ; the sun (cf. «-putra») ; the

moon ; a kind of medicinal plant («ṛṣabha») ; a singer, praiser (fr. «gai») ;

«a goer», horse (fr. 1. «gā») on ; N. of two ṛiṣis of the (with the patr.

āṅgirasa [ xvi] and Māyūka); N. of a man (who with Pushkara is said to

be the «balādhyakṣa» of the sons and grandsons of Varuṇa) (cf. ; m. or f.

(?) the sun’s ray called Suṣumṇa ; water f. pl., xi, 7, 50); an organ of

sense ; the eye 70; a billion ; mf. the sky ; the thunderbolt on ; the hairs

of the body ; f. an offering in the shape of a cow (= «dhenu» q.v.) ; a

region of the sky ; ( i, 1) the earth (as the milk-cow of kings) &c.;

(hence) the number «nine» ; = «go-vīthī» on ; a mother (cf. ; ( i, 11)

speech, Sarasvatī (goddess of speech) ; voice, note (fr. «gai») ; N. of

Gaurī ; of the wife [or of a daughter-in-law of śuka (a daughter of the

manes called Sukālas) 986 ; N. of a daughter of Kakut-stha and wife of

Yayāti ; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘bos’; Old Germ. ‘chuo’; Mod. Germ. ‘Kuh’;

Eng. ‘cow’; Lett. ‘gohw’; cf. also [characters]; Goth. ‘gavi’ and Mod.

Germ. ‘Gau’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

go m. f. (Nom. gauḥ) [gacchatyanena, gam karaṇe ḍo Tv.]

(1) Cattle, kine (pl.).

(2) Anything coming from a cow; such as milk, flesh, leather &c.

(3) The stars.

(4) The sky.

(5) The thunder-bolt of Indra.

(6) A ray of light.

(7) A diamond.

(8) Heaven.

(9) An arrow. —f.

(1) A cow; jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvī R. 2. 3; kṣīriṇyaḥ saṁtu gāvaḥ

Mk. 10. 60.

(2) The earth; dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya R. 1. 26; gāmāttasārāṁ

raghurapyavekṣya 5. 26, 11. 36; Bg. 15. 13; seko’nugṛhṇātu gāṁ Mu. 3.

2; Me. 30.

(3) Speech, words; raghorudārāmapi gāṁ niśamya R. 5. 12, 2. 59; Ki.

4. 20.

(4) The goddess of speech, Sarasvatī.

(5) A mother.

(6) A quarter of the compass.

(7) Water (pl.).

(8) The eye.

(9) A region of the sky. —m.

(1) A bull, an ox; asaṁjātakiṇaskaṁdhaḥ sukhaṁ svapiti gaurgaḍiḥ K.

P. 10; Ms. 4. 72; cf. jaradgava.

(2) The hair of the body.

(3) An organ of sense.

(4) The sign Taurus of the zodiac.

(5) The sun.

(6) The number ‘nine’ (in math.).

(7) The moon.

(8) A singer.

(9) A billion. (10) A cowsacrifice.

(11) A house.

— Comp.

—kaṁṭakaḥ, —kaṁ 1. a road or spot trodden down by oxen and

thus made impassable. —2. the cow’s hoof. —3. the print of a cow’s hoof.

—karṇa a. having cow’s ears. (

—rṇaḥ) 1. a cow’s ear. —2. a mule. —3. a snake. —4. a span (from

the tip of the thumb to that of the ring-finger). —5. N. of a place of

pilgrimage in the south, sacred to Śiva; śritagokarṇaniketamīśvaraṁ R. 8.

33. —6. a kind of deer. —7. a kind of arrow.

—kirāṭā-kirāṭikā the Sārikā bird.

—kilaḥ, —kīlaḥ 1. a plough. —2. a pestle.

—kulaṁ 1. a herd of kine; vṛṣṭivyākulagokulāvanarasāduddhṛtya

govardhanaṁ Gīt. 4; gākulasya tṛṣārtasya Mb. —2. a cow-house. —3. N. of

a village (where Kṛṣṇa was brought up).

—kulika a. 1. one who does not help a cow in the mud. —2.

squint-eyed.

—kulodbhavā an epithet of Durgā.

—kṛtaṁ cow-dung.

—kṣīraṁ cow’s milk.

—kṣuraṁ —rakaṁ a cow’s-hoof.

—khā a nail.

—gṛṣṭiḥ a young cow which has had only one calf.

—goyugaṁ a pair of oxen.

—goṣṭhaṁ a cow-pen, cattle-shed.

—graṁthiḥ 1. dried cowdung. —2. a cow-house.

—grahaḥ capture of cattle.

—grāsaḥ the ceremony of offering a morsel (of grass) to a cow

when performing an expiatory rite.

—ghātaḥ, —ghātakaḥ, —ghātin m. a cow-killer.

—ghṛtaṁ 1. rain-water. —2. clarified butter coming from a cow.

—ghna a. 1. destructive to cows. —2. one who has killed a cow. —

3. one for whom a cow is killed, a guest.

—caṁdanaṁ a kind of sandal-wood.

—cara a. 1. grazed over by cattle. —2. frequenting, dwelling,

resorting to, haunting; pitṛsadmagocaraḥ Ku. 5. 77. —3. within the scope,

power, or range of; avāṅmanasagocaraṁ R. 10. 15; so buddhi-, dṛṣṭi-,

śravaṇa- &c. —4. moving on earth. —5. accessible to, attainable. —6.

circulating, having a particular meaning, prevalent. (

—raḥ) 1. the range of cattle, pasturage; upāratāḥ

paścimarātrigocarāt Ki. 4. 10. —2.

(a) a district, department, province, sphere.

(b) an abode, dwelling-place. —3. range of the organs of sense, an

object of sense; śravaṇagocare tiṣṭha be within ear-shot; nayanagocaraṁ

yā to become visible. —4. scope, range, in general; harturyāti na gocaraṁ

Bh. 2. 16. —5. (fig.) grip, hold, power, influence, control; kaḥ kālasya na

gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt. 1. 146; gocarībhūtamakṣṇoḥ U. 6. 26; Māl. 5. 24;

api nāma manāgavatīrṇo’si ratiramaṇabāṇagocaraṁ Māl. 1. —6. horizon.

—7. the range of the planets from the Lagna or from each other. (gocarīkṛ

to place within the range (of sight), make current.). —carman n. 1. a

cow’s hide. —2. a particular measuse of surface thus defined by Vasiṣṭha:

—daśahastena vaṁśena daśavaṁśān samaṁtataḥ . paṁca cābhyadhikān

dadyādetadgocarma cocyate … -vasanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. —cārakaḥ

cowherd. —cāraṇaṁ the tending or feeding of cows. —ja a. born in the

earth (rice &c). —jaraḥ an old ox or bull. —jalaṁ the urine of a bull or

cow. —jāgarikaṁ auspiciousness, happiness. (—kaḥ) a preparer of food,

baker. —jāta a born in the heaven (gods). —tallajaḥ an excellent bull or

cow. —tīrthaṁ a cowhouse. —traṁ [gāṁ bhūrmi trāyate trai-ka] 1. a

cowpen. —2. a stable in general. —3. a family, race, lineage; gotreṇa

māṭharo’smi Sk.; so kauśikagotrāḥ, vasiṣṭhagotrāḥ &c.; Ms. 3. 109, 9.

141. —4. a name, appellation; jagāda gotraskhalite ca kā na taṁ N. 1. 30;

S. 6. 4; see -skhalita below; madgotrāṁkaṁ viracitapadaṁ

geyamudgātukāmā Me. 86. —5. a multitude. —6. increase. —7. a forest.

—8. a field. —9. a road. —10. possessions, wealth. —11. an umbrella, a

parasol. —12. knowledge of futurity. —13. a genus, class, species. —14. a

caste, tribe, caste according to families. (—traḥ) a mountain. (—trā) 1. a

multitude of cows. —2. the earth. -kartṛ, —kārin m. the founder of a

family. -kīlā the earth. -ja a. born in the same family, gentile, a relation;

Y. 2. 135. -paṭaḥ a genealogical table, pedigree. -pravaraḥ the oldest

member or founder of a family. -bhida m. an epithet of Indra; hṛdi kṣato

gotrabhidapyamarṣaṇaḥ R. 3. 53, 6. 73; Ku. 2. 52. -skhalanaṁ, -skhalitaṁ

blundering or mistaking in calling (one) by his name, calling by a wrong

name; smarasi smara mekhalāguṇairuta gātraskhaliteṣu baṁdhanaṁ Ku.

4. 8. —da a. giving cows. (—daḥ) brain. (—dā) N. of the river Godāvarī. —

datra a. Ved. giving cows. (—traḥ) an epithet of Indra. (—traṁ) a crown

(protecting the head). —daṁta a. armed with a coat of mail. (—taṁ) 1.

yellow orpiment. —2. a white fossil substance. —dānaṁ 1. the gift of a

cow. —2. the ceremony of tonsure or cutting the hair; athāsya

godānavidheranaṁtaraṁ R. 3. 33; (see Mallinātha’s explanation of the

word); kṛtagodānamaṁgalāḥ U. 1; (Ram. explains the word differently).

—3. the part of the head close to the right ear. —dāya a. intending to give

cows. —dāraṇaṁ 1. a plough. —2. a spade, hoe. —dāvarī N. of a river in

the south. —duh m., —duhaḥ ‘cow-milker’ a cowherd. —dohaḥ 1. the

milking of cows. —2. the milk of cows. —3. the time of milking cows. —

dohanaṁ 1. the time of milking cows. —2. the milking of cows. —dohanī a

milk-pail. —dravaḥ the urine of a bull or cow. —dhanaṁ 1. a herd or

multitude of cows, cattle. —2. possession of cows. (—naḥ) a broadpointed

arrow. —dharaḥ a mountain. —dharmaḥ the law of cattle, rules relating to

cattle. —dhuptaḥ, —dhūptaḥ 1. wheat. —2. the orange. -cūrṇaṁ wheat-

flour; -saṁbhavaṁ a sour paste. —dhūliḥ ‘dust of the cows,’ the time of

sunset or evening twilight (so called because cows, which generally

return home at about sunset, raise up clouds of dust by their treading on

the earth). —dhenuḥ a milch-cow with a calf. —dhraḥ a mountain. —

naṁdā an epithet of the wife of Śiva. —naṁdī the female of the Sārasa

bird. —nardaḥ 1. the (Indian) crane. —2. an epithet of Śiva (bellowing like

a bull). —3. N. of a country. —nardīyaḥ an epithet of Patanjali, author of

the Mahābhāṣya. —nasaḥ, —nāsaḥ 1. a kind of snake. —2. a kind of gem.

—nasā the mouth of a cow. —nāthaḥ 1. a bull. —2. an owner of land. —3. a

herdsman. —4. an owner of kine. —nāyaḥ a cowherd. —nāsā the

projecting snout of a cow or ox. —nāsaṁ a kind of gem. —niṣyaṁdaḥ

cow’s urine. —paḥ 1. a cowherd (considered as belonging to a mixed

tribe); gopaveśasya viṣṇoḥ Me. 15. —2. the chief of a cowpen. —3. the

superintendent of a village. —4. a king. —5. a protector, guardian. -anasī

the wood of a thatch. -āṭavikā a cowherd. -kanyā 1. the daughter of a

cowherd. —2. a nymph of Vṛndāvana. -adhyakṣaḥ, -iṁdraḥ, -īśaḥ the chief

of herdsmen, an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dalaḥ the betel-nut tree. -bhadraṁ the

fibrous root of a water-lily. -rasaḥ gum myrrh -vadhūḥ f. a cowherd’s wife.

-vadhūṭī a young cowherdess, a young wife of a cowherd;

gopavadhūṭīdukūlacaurāya Bhāṣā P. 1. (—pakaḥ) 1. the superintendent of

a district. —2. myrrh. (—pikā) 1. a cowherdess. —2. protectress. (—pī) a

cowherd’s wife (especially applied to the cowherdesses of Vṛndāvana, the

companions of Kṛṣṇa in his juvenile sports). —2. a milk-maid. —3. a

protectress. —4. Nature, elementary nature. —patiḥ 1. an owner of cows.

—2. a bull. —3. a leader, chief. —4. the sun. —5. Indra. —6. N. of Kṛṣṇa —7.

N. of Śiva. —8. N. of Varuṇa. —9. a king. —paśuḥ a sacrificial cow. —pāḥ

m. Ved. 1. a herdsman. —2. protector, or guardian. 1. —pānasī a curved

beam which supports a thatch. —pālaḥ 1. a cowherd. —2. a king. —3. an

epithet of Śiva. —4. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dhānī a cow-pen, cow-shed, —

pālakaḥ 1. a cowherd. —2. a king. —3. an epithet of Śiva; also of Kṛṣṇa.

—pāliḥ an epithet of Śiva. —pālikā, —pālī the wife of a cowherd. —pittaṁ

bile of cows, ox-bile (from which the yellow pigment gorocanā is

prepared; Pt. 1. 94.). —pītaḥ a species of wagtail. —pīthaḥ protec tion.

(—thaṁ) a holy place, a place of pilgrimage. —pucchaṁ a cow’s tail. (—

cchaḥ) 1. a sort of monkey. —2. a sort of necklace consisting of two or

four or thirty-four strings. —puṭikaṁ the head of Śiva’s bull —putraḥ 1. a

young bull. —2. an epithet of Karṇa. —puraṁ 1. a town-gate; Māl. 9. 1. —

2. a principal gate; Ki. 5. 5. —3. the ornamental gate-way of a temple. —

purīṣaṁ cowdung. —prakāḍaṁ an excellent cow or bull. —pracāraḥ

pasture-ground, pasturage for cattle; Y. 2. 166. —prata(tā)raḥ 1. a ford

for cattle. —2. a place of pilgrimage on the Sarayū. —praveśaḥ the time

when cows return home, sunset or evening-twilight. —phaṇā 1. a

bandage hollowed out so as to fit the chin or nose &c. —2. a sling. —bālaḥ

the hair of cows. —bhuj m. a king. —bhṛt m. a mountain. —makṣikā a

gadfly. —magha a. granting cattle or cows. —maṁḍalaṁ 1. the globe. —2.

a multitude of cows. —mataṁ = gavyūti q, v. —matallikā a tractable cow,

an excellent cow. —mathaḥ a cowherd. —mahiṣadā N. of one of the Mātṛs

attending on kārtikeya. —māṁsaṁ beef. —māyu 1. a kind of frog. —2. a

jackal anuhuṁkurute ghanadhvaniṁ na hi gomāyurutāni kesarī Śi. 16. 25.

—3. bile of a cow. —4. N. of a Gandharva. —mukhaḥ, —mukhaṁ

[gormukhamiva mukhamasya] a kind of musical instrument; Bg. 1. 13.

(—khaḥ) 1. a crocodile, shark. —2. a hole of a particular shape in a wall

made by thieves. (—khaṁ) 1. a house built unevenly. —2. spreading

unguents, smearing. (—khaṁ, —khī) a cloth-bag of the shape of a gnomon

containing a rosary, the beads of which are counted by the hand thrust

inside. (—khī) the chasm in the Himālaya mountains through which the

Ganges flows. —mūḍha a. stupid as a bull. —mūtraṁ cow’s urine. —

mūtrikā 1. an artificial verse, the second of which repeats nearly all the

syllables of the first (Malli. thus defines it: —vaṁrṇānāmekarūpatvaṁ

yadyekāṁtaramardhayoḥ gomūtriketi tatprāhurduṣkaraṁ tadvido viduḥ ..

see Śi. 19. 46). —2. a form of calculation. —mṛgaḥ a kind of ox (gavaya).

—medaḥ a gem brought from the Himālaya and Indus, described as of

four different colours: —white, paleyellow, red, and dark-blue. —medakaḥ

1. see gomeda. —2. a kind of poison (kākola). —3. smearing the body with

unguents. —medhaḥ, —yajñaḥ a cowsacrifice. —yānaṁ a carriage drawn

by oxen. —yukta a. drawn by oxen. —yutaṁ a cattle-station. —rakṣaḥ 1. a

cowherd. —2. keeping or tending cattle. —3. the orange. —4. an epithet of

Śiva. -jaṁbū f. wheat. —raṁkuḥ 1. a water-fowl. —2. a prisoner. —3. a

naked man, a mendicant wandering about without clothes. —4. a chanter.

—ravaṁ saffron. —rasaḥ cow’s milk. —2. curds. —3. buttermilk. —4. the

flavour of a sentence, ko raso gorasaṁ vinā Udb. -jaṁ buttermilk. —rājaḥ

an excellent bull. —rāṭikā, —rāṭī the Sārikā bird. —rutaṁ a measure of

distance equal to two Krośas. —rūpaṁ the form of a cow. (—paḥ) N. of

Śiva. —rocaṁ yellow orpiment. —rocanā a bright yellow pigment prepared

from the urine or bile of a cow, or found in the head of a cow. —lavaṇaṁ

a measure of salt given to a cow. —lāṁgu (gū) laḥ a kind of monkey with

a dark body, red cheeks. and a tail like that of a cow; Mal. 9. 30. —lokaḥ a

part of heaven, cowworld. —lomī a prostitute. —vatsaḥ a calf. -ādin m. a

wolf. —vardhanaḥ a celebrated hill in vṛṁdāvana the country about

Mathurā. (This hill was lifted up and supported by Kṛṣṇa upon one finger

for seven days to shelter the cowherds from a storm of rain sent by Indra

to test Kṛṣṇa’s divinity.’) -dharaḥ, -dhārin m. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. —vaśā a

barren cow. —vāṭaṁ, —vāsaḥ a cow-pen. —vāsana a. covered with an

ox-hide. —vikartaḥ, —vikrartṛ m. 1. the killer of a cow. —2. a husbandman.

—vitataḥ a horse-sacrifice having many cows. —viṁdaḥ 1. a cowkeeper, a

chief herdsman. —2. N. of Kṛṣṇa. —3. Bṛnaspati. -dvādaśī the twelfth day

in the light half of the month of phalguna. —viṣ f., —viṣṭhā cowdung. —

visargaḥ day-break (when cows are let loose to graze in forests). —vīthiḥ

f. N. of that portion of the moon’s path which contains the asterisms

bhādrapadā, revatī and aśvinī, or according to some, hasta, citrā and

svātī. —vīryaṁ the price received for milk. —vṛṁdaṁ a drove of cattle. —

vṛṁdārakaḥ an excellent bull or cow. —vṛṣaḥ, —vṛṣabhaḥ an excellent bull.

-dhvajaḥ an epithet of Śiva. —vaidyaḥ a quack doctor. —vrajaḥ 1. a cow-

pen. —2. a herd of cows. —3. a place where cattle graze. —vrata, —vratin

a. one who imitates a cow in frugality. —śakṛt n. cowdung. —śataṁ a

present of a hundred cows to a Brāhmaṇa. —śālaṁ, —lā a cow-stall. —

śīrṣaḥ, —rṣaṁ a kind of sandal. —ṣaḍgavaṁ three pairs of kine. —ṣan, —ṣā

a. Ved. acquiring or bestowing cows. —ṣā (sā) tiḥ 1. acquiring cattle. —2.

giving cattle. —ṣṭomaḥ a kind of sacrificelasting for one day. —saṁkhyaḥ a

cowherd. —sadṛkṣaḥ a species of ox (gavaya). —sargaḥ the time at which

cows are usually let loose, day-break; see govisarga. —savaḥ a kind of

cow-sacrifice (not performed in the Kali age). —sahasraṁ a kind of

present (mahādāna). (—srī) N. of two holidays on the fifteenth day of the

dark half of kārtika and jyeṣṭha. —sūtrikā a rope fastened at both ends

having separate halters for each ox or cow. —stanaḥ 1. the udder of a

cow. —2. a cluster of blossoms, nosegay &c. —3. a pearl-necklace of four

strings. —stanā, —nī a bunch of grapes. —sthānaṁ, —kaṁ a cow-pen. —

svāmin m. 1. an owner of cows. —2. a religious mendicant. —3. an

honorary title affixed to proper names; (e. g. vopadevagosvāmin). —hatyā

cow-slaughter. —hallaṁ (sometimes written hannaṁ) cowdung. —hita a.

cherishing or protecting kine. (—taḥ) N. of Viṣṇu.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

go m. f. SIDDH.K.251,a,5 v. u. gaus, gām, gavā, gave, gos, gavi; gāvau;

gāvas, gās und bisweilen auch gāvas (TBR. 3, 1, 2, 12. TAITT. UP. 1, 4,

2. MBH. 4, 1506. R. 2, 32, 38), gobhis, gobhyas, gavām und gonām

(dieses nur am Ende eines Pāda im Veda P. 7, 1, 57; gavām am Pāda-

Ende ṚV. 4, 1, 19), goṣu P. 6, 1, 93. 7, 1, 90. VOP. 3, 68. 69. Verhalten

des o vor Vocalen im comp. P. 6, 1, 122. fgg. VOP. 2, 18. Am Ende eines

comp. zu gu (vgl. 1. gu) geschwächt. 1) «Rind, Stier, Kuh»; pl. «Rinder,

Kühe, Rinderheerden» (f. P. 1, 2, 73, Sch.) AK. 2, 9, 60. 66. 3, 4, 3, 26.

25, 167. TRIK. 3, 3, 59. H. 1257. 1265. an. 1, 6. MED. g. 1. HĀR. 79. Uṇ.

2, 66, Sch. gavāṁ gotram ṚV. 2, 23, 18. sākaṁ gāvaḥ suvate pacyate

yavaḥ 1, 135, 8. yadi no gāṁ haṁsi yadyaśvaṁ yadi pūruṣam AV. 1, 16,

4. sthirau gāvau bhavatām ṚV. 3, 53, 7. 5, 27, 1. aśvāvati prathamo goṣu

gacchati 1, 83, 1. 8, 60, 5. puruṣo ‘jo ‘viko gauraśva iti pañca paśavaḥ

ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 9, 23, 4. ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 3, 13. 3, 1, 2, 13. 4, 5, 5, 10. 14, 1, 1,

32. gāva ukṣaṇaḥ ṚV. 1, 168, 2. VS. 21, 20. AV. 3, 11, 8. gāvo dhenavaḥ

ṚV. 1, 173, 1. 6, 45, 28. 10, 95, 6. VS. 21, 19. sarve te goṣu jīvinaḥ R. 1,

9, 61. gavāṁ ca yānaṁ pṛṣṭhena M. 4, 72. anargheyā mahārāja dvijā

varṇeṣu cottamāḥ. gāvaśca MBH. 13, 2689. fgg. kaliścaiva vṛṣo bhūtvā

gavām N. 7, 6. paṅke gauriva sīdati M. 4, 191. 8, 21. HIT. Pr. 23.

gaurandhā M. 3, 141. yathā gaurgavi cāphalā 2, 158. gohiraṇya n. sg.

«Kühe und Gold» MBH. 2, 1833. gobrāhmaṇa n. sg. «eine Kuh und ein

Brahman» 13, 3350. HARIV. 3157. fg. M. 5, 95. 11, 79.

hastigo’śvoṣṭradamaka 3, 162. gavāmayaḥ (MBH. 3, 8176. 13, 5177.

7128) und gavāmayanam (MBH. 3, 8080) N. einer Festfeier; s. u. ayana

und ZdmG.IX, LXXII. gavāṁ medhaḥ (vgl. gomedha) MBH. 13, 5378.

gavāṁ vratam N. eines Sāman Ind. St. 3, 215. gavāṁ tīrtham BHĀG. P. 3,

1, 22; Vgl. gotīrtha. Eine grosse Anzahl von Zusammensetzungen mit go

verlieren mit der Zeit ihre ursprüngliche enge, auf das «Rind» oder, die

«Kuh» bezügliche Bedeutung und nehmen eine allgemeine an; so z. B.

gaviṣ, gaviṣa, gaviṣṭi, gaveṣ, gaveṣaṇa, gavy, gup, gocara, gotra, gopā,

gopītha, gopīthya, goyuga, goṣṭha, ṣaṅgava u. s. w. — 2) m. «das

Sternbild des Stiers» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 39 (38), 7. 40 (39), 3. BṚH. 11, 4.

17, 2. 18, 1. L. JĀT. 13, 1. — 3) «was vom Rinde» oder «von der Kuh

kommt» (s. NIR. 2, 5), namentlich: a) «Milch», meist pl.: gobhiḥ śrīṇīta

matsaram ṚV. 9, 46, 4. 71, 5. gobhiraktam 4, 27, 5. gorna seke 1, 181, 8.

33, 10. 151, 8. 153, 4. 2, 30, 7. — b) «Fleisch»: agnervarma pari

gobhirvyayasva ṚV. 10, 16, 7. — c) «Haut, Rindsleder, daraus

geschnittene Riemen u.s.w.»: aṁśuṁ duhanto adhyāsate gavi ṚV. 10, 94,

9. gobhiḥ saṁnaddho asi 6, 47, 26. 75, 11. 8, 48, 5.

asmadryakśuśucānasya yamyā āśurna raśmiṁ tuvyojasaṁ goḥ 4, 22, 8.

tvamāyasaṁ prati vartayo gordivo aśmānam «du schleudertest aus dem

Riemen (funda) das eherne Geschoss» 1, 121. 9. — d) «Sehne»: vṛkṣe

vṛkṣe niyatā mīmayadgauḥ ṚV. 10, 27, 22. AV. 1, 2, 3. — 4) go, abgekürzt

für goṣṭoma (s. d.), heisst ein Opfertag im Abhiplava: jyotirgaurāyuriti

trīṇyahāni gaurāyurjyotiri trīṇi AIT. BR. 4, 15. ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 3.

goāyuṣī 12, 1, 2, 2. KĀTY. ŚR. 23, 1, 26. ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 1. 11, 1. LĀṬY. 4, 7,

1. MAŚ. 2, 9. 3, 1 in Verz. d. B. H. 72. go = gomedhayajña BHĀNUD. bei

einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. m. = kratubheda Uṇ., Sch. — 5) pl. «die Heerde

am Himmel, die Gestirne»: tā vāṁ vāstūnyuśmasi gamadhyai yatra gāvo

bhūriśṛṅgā ayāsaḥ ṚV. 1, 154, 6. vi raśmibhiḥ sasṛje sūryo gāḥ «mit ihren

Strahlen hat die Sonne die Gestirne verscheucht» 7, 36, 1. — 6) «Himmel»

NAIGH. 1, 4. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 87. H. an. masc. TRIK. MED. (lies: svarga

st. sarga). m. f. Uṇ., Sch. Diese Bed. wurde. wenn sie nur sonst

nachzuweisen wäre, recht gut passen zur folgenden Stelle: indraḥ

pṛthivyai varṣīyāngostu mātrā na vidyate VS. 23, 48. — 7) «die Sonne»

NIR. 2, 6. 14. masc. Uṇ., Sch. BHĀNUD. bei einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. Vgl.

goputra. — 8) m. «der Mond» VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — 9) pl. «die Lichtstrahlen

(die Rinderheerde des Himmels», um welche Indra mit Vṛtra kämpft)

NAIGH. 1, 5. NIR. 2, 6. 14, 25. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 99. H. an. masc. TRIK.

MED. m. = kiraṇa, m. f. = raśmi Uṇ., Sch. gobhirbhāsayase mahīm MBH.

3, 182. tvamevaikastapase jātavedo nānyastaptā vidyate goṣu deva 1,

8414. gavāṁ sūryo guruḥ smṛtaḥ HARIV. 2943. tejomayairgobhirivodito

‘rkaḥ (dīptimavāpa) R. 1, 7, 18. 4, 40, 64. BHĀG. P. 2, 6, 21. gogaṇaiḥ 4,

16, 14. sg. «der Strahl» Suṣumṇa NIR. 2, 6. — 10) «Donnerkeil» AK. H. an.

SĀY. zu ṚV. 5, 30, 7. masc. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 11)

«Weltgegend» AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. — 12) «die milchende

Kuh der Fürsten, die Erde» NAIGH. 1, 1. AK. H. 936. H. an. fem. TRIK.

MED. Uṇ., Sch. nādharmaścarito loke sadyaḥ phalati gauriva M. 4, 172.

khaṁ saṁniveśayetkheṣu ceṣṭanasparśane ‘nilam. paktidṛṣṭyoḥ paraṁ

tejaḥ snehe ‘po gāṁ ca mūrtiṣu.. 12. 120. imāṁ sāgarāpāṅgīṁ gām MBH.

1, 2468. 3, 1281. 15828. taṁ janāḥ kathayantīha yāvadbhavati gauriyam

13, 3168. BHAG. 15, 13. R. 1, 41, 18. 44, 19. MṚCCH. 173, 17. MEGH. 31.

(rājā) dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya śasyāya maghavā divam RAGH. 1, 26; vgl.

payodharībhūtacatuḥsamudrāṁ jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvīm 2, 3 und

kasmāddadhāra gorūpaṁ dharitrī bahurūpiṇī. yāṁ dudoha pṛthustatra ko

vatso dohanaṁ ca kim.. BHĀG. P. 4, 17, 3. — 1, 10, 3. 4, 17, 7. Vgl. auch

dhenu. — 13) «Wasser» AK. H. an. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. f. pl. TRIK. MED. m. n.

(also gu) BHĀNUD. im ŚKDR. gaviṣṭho gāṁ gatastadā BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 36.

— 14) «Pfeil» AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 15) «Auge» AK.

H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 16) «das Haar auf dem Körper»,

m. f. Uṇ., Sch. m. n. (also gu) BHĀNUD. Vgl. 2. godāna. — 17) f. «Mutter»

EKĀKṢARAK. im ŚKDR. Vgl. prajāpatirditiścaiva gāvo viśvasya mātaraḥ

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 47, 68. — 18) m. «eine best. Arzeneipflanze» (ṛṣabha)

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 19) «Rede, die Göttin der Rede» (Sarasvatī) NAIGH.

1, 11. NIR. 6, 2. AK. H. 241. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch.

janmaprabhṛti matyāṁ te vedmi gāṁ brahmavādinīm MBH. 1, 72.

tasyārdhyamāsanaṁ caiva gāṁ cāvedya 3, 16696. yo ‘satsevī vṛthācāro

ca śrotā suhṛdāṁ satām. parānvṛṇīte svāndveṣṭi taṁ gaustyajati

bhārata.. 5, 4149. tatheti gāmuktavate RAGH. 2, 59. raghorudārāmapi

gāṁ niśamya 5, 12. Diese und die folgende Bed. hat man wohl in Folge

der Herleitung von gā «singen» angenommen. — 20) «Lobsänger» NAIGH.

3, 16. — 21) «Gänger, Ross» (von gam oder gā «gehen») SĀY. zu ṚV. 1,

121, 9. 4, 22, 8. — 22) «Billion»: yadā daśabhirakṣitairyajate ‘tha

gaurbhavati (akṣita = «100,000 Millionen») PAÑCAV. BR. 17, 14. — 23) N.

pr. a) m. eines Ṛṣi: gorāṅgirasasya sāma LĀṬY. 6, 11, 3. Ind. St. 3, 215.

(vāruṇaśca tathā mantrī) putrapautraiḥ parivṛto gonāmnā puṣkareṇa ca

MBH. 2, 381. — b) f. der Gemahlin Śuka’s, einer Tochter der Manen

Sukāla HARIV. 986. der Schwiegertochter Śuka’s BHĀG. P. 9, 21, 25. einer

Tochter Kakutstha’s und Gemahlin Yayāti’s HARIV. 1601.

go 4) WEBER, Nax. 2, 282. — 9) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 1. Spr. 2842 (zugleich

«Kuh»). BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 13) f. pl. BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 15) Spr.

2842. «Sinnesorgan» überh. BHĀG. P. 7, 5, 30. — 19) Spr. 2373 (zugleich

«Kuh»). — 23) a) gorāṅgirasasya sāma PAÑCAV. BR. 16, 7, 7.

gormāyūkasya Ind. St. 3, 459. Zu MBH. 2, 381 vgl. R. 7, 23, 28; nach dem

Comm. sind Go und Pushkara balādhyakṣau der Söhne und Enkel

Varuṇa’s. — b) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,43. — 24) Bez. «der Zahl neun»

WEBER, JYOT. 101. Nax. 2, 382.

go 24) (Nachträge) SŪRYAS. 1, 42. 2, 36. 3, 44. wegen «der neun Erden.»

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

go (gau) (GAU) A wife of sage Pulastya. Vaiśravaṇa was born of her.

The son left his father and went to Brahmā. (Śloka 12, Chapter 274, Vana

Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

go go,

I. m.

1. A bull; f. A cow, Man. 3, 141; pl. Bulls and cows, cattle, Man. 4, 72.

2. m. pl. Rays of light, Rājat. 5, 1.

II. f. The earth, Rām. 1, 41, 18.

III. m. and f. Water, Bhāg. P. 1, 10, 36.

IV. f. Speech, Ragh. 5, 12.

V. The deity of speech, MBh. 5, 4149.

VI. m. The name of a Ṛṣi, MBh. 2, 381.

VII. f. A proper name, Bhāg. P. 9, 21, 25.

— Cf. [greek] Lat. bos, ceva; OHG. ko; AS. cū; probably also [greek]

Goth. gavi, gauja.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

go m. bull, ox, ox-hide, leather, sinew; pl. cattle, herds, the stars or rays

of light (as the herds of the sky); pieces of flesh, cow-milk (also sgl.). —f.

cow, the earth (as the milch cow of kings); speech and Sarasvati, the

goddess of speech.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

go go, ox, bull; cow’s milk (gnly. pl.); ox-hide; thong: pl. host of heaven,

stars; rays; f. cow; earth; speech.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

go puṁstrī gacchatyanena gama—karaṇe ḍo . 1 svanāmakhyāte

paśubhede vṛṣasya yānasādhanatvāt strīgavyāśca dānadvārā

svargagatisādhanatvācca tathātvam . gatisādhanatayā tasya

tathārthatvayogena yaugikatve’pi yogarūḍhatvam . etena darṣaṇakṛtā

vyutpattilabhyasya mukhyārthatve gauḥ śete ityatrāpi lakṣaṇā syāt

gamerḍoḥ iti vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi prayogāt iti

yaduktaṁ tat grāmādikameva gamerḍoḥ ityūṇādipratyayasya

kartṛvācakatvāniyamāt tābhyāmanyatroṇādayaḥ pā° sūtre ūṇādīnāṁ

apādānasaṁpradānabhinnārthatvaniyamāt atra

karaṇārthakaḍopratyayena vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi

gatisādhanasvarūpayogyavācakatvāt phalopadhāyakatvaniyame

yānāsanaśayanādīnāmapi gatiśayanādivigamakāle

tacchabdavācyatānupapatteḥ . gamyate jñāyate anena karaṇe, śīghraṁ

gacchati kartari vā ḍo . 2 raśmau kiraṇe tasya śīghra gāmitvāt

cākṣuṣajñānahetutvācca tathātvam sūryādikiraṇa saṁparkaṁ vinā

cākṣuṣajñānāsambhavāt raśmerjñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . 3 vajre 4

hīrake tasyāpi kaṭhinadravye’pi gatimattvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 5

svarge karmibhi rgamyamānatvāt tasya tathātvam medi° . 6 candre

viśvaḥ karmibhistallokagamanāttasya tathātvam 7 sūrye 8 gomedhayajñe

bhānudīkṣitaḥ . sūryasya śīghragatikatvāt arcirādiṣvadhiṣṭhātṛtayā

ātivāhikatvāt tathātvam . saṁvatsarādādityamādityāccandramasam chā°

u° . ātivāhikaśabde 651 pṛ° dṛśyam 9 ṛṣabhanāmauṣadhe rājani° . tasya

gonāmakatvāt tathātvam . karaṇe ḍo . 10 betre strī tasya

cākṣuṣajñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . kartari ḍo . 11 vāṇe strī tasya

śīghragtikatvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 12 diśi strī diśāṁ palāyanakāle

gamyamānatvāttayātvam . 13 vāci strī tasyāḥ jñānahetutvāt tathātvam .

ādhāreḍo . 14 bhuvi strī tasyāḥ gamanādhāratvāt tathātvam 15 jale ca

strība° va° kecit tasya nimnagatitvāt 16 paśumātre amaraḥ 17 mātari 18

lomani bhānudīkṣitaḥ . 19 vṛṣarāśau 20 navasaṁkhyāyām

gorbhūmernavakhaṇḍātmakatvāt ākāśe sadāgatimadgrahāṇāṁ

navatvādvā tatsaṁkhyāsāmyāt tathātvam . 21 pulastyabhāryāyāṁ

gavijātaśabde 2566 pṛ° dṛśyam . jñānahetutvāt 22 indriye gocaraḥ .

padāntasthitasyopasarjanasya samā° hrasvaḥ śītaguḥ sahasraguḥ . asya

uttarapadasthatve tatpuruṣe ṣac samā° . puṁsi paramagavaḥ striyāṁ

ṣittvāt ṅīṣ dugdhagavī goḥ purīṣaṁ mayaṭ . gomaya (govara) khyāte

padārthe na° gaurvidyate’sya mini gomin . matup . gomat goviśiṣṭe

gosvāmini ca tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . goḥsthāne goṣṭhac gogoṣṭha gosthāne na°

gomāṁsaguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomāṁsaṁ tu guru snigdhaṁ

pittaśleṣmavivardhanam . vṛṁhaṇaṁ vātahṛt balyamapathyaṁ

pīnasapraṇut . goridaṁ yat āntoyi pratyaye pā° avādeśaḥ . gavya

godugdhādau bhāvapra° tadguṇādyuktaṁ yathā gavyaṁ dugdhaṁ

viśeṣeṇa madhuraṁ rasapākayoḥ . śītalaṁ stanyapṛt snigdhaṁ

vātapittāsranāśanam . doṣadhātubalasrotaḥkiñcitkledakaraṁ guru .

jarāsamastarogāṇāṁ śāntikṛt sevināṁ sadā . kṣīravargaśabde 2377 pṛ°

vivṛtiḥ . gavyadadhiguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā gavyaṁ davi viśeṣeṇa

svādvamlañca rucipradam . pabitraṁ dīpanaṁ hṛdyaṁ puṣṭikṛt

pavanāpaham . uktaṁ dadhnāmaśeṣāṇāṁ madhye gavyaṁ guṇādhikam

tannavanītaguṇāḥ tatroktā yathā navanītaṁ kṣitaṁ gavyaṁ vṛṣyaṁ

varṇabalāgnikṛt . saṁgrāhi vātapittāsṛkkṣayārśo’rditakāsahṛt . taddhitaṁ

vālake vṛddhe viśeṣādamṛtaṁ śiśoḥ tadghṛtaguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā

gavyaṁ ghṛtaṁ viśeṣeṇa cakṣuṣyaṁ vṛṣyamagnikṛt . svādupākakaraṁ

śītaṁ vātapittakaphāpaham . medhālāvaṇyakāntyojastejovṛddhikaraṁ

param . alakṣmīpāparakṣoghnaṁ vayasaḥ sthāpakaṁ guru . balyaṁ

pavitramāyuṣyaṁ sumaṅgalyaṁ rasāyanam . sugandhaṁ rocanaṁ cāru

sarvājyeṣu guṇādhikam . tanmūtraguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomūtraṁ

kaṭu tīkṣṇoṣṇaṁ kṣāraṁ tiktaṁ kaṣāyakam . laghvagnidīpanaṁ medhyaṁ

pittakṛtkaphavātahṛt . śūlagulmodarānāha kaṇḍvakṣimukharogajit .

kilāsagadavātāmavastiruk kuṣṭhanāśanam . kāsaśvāsāpahaṁ

śothakāmalāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṇḍūkilāsagadaśūlamukhākṣirogān

gulmātisāramarudāmayamūtrarodhān . kāsaṁ sakuṣṭhajaṭhara

krimipāṇḍurogān gomutramekamapi pītamapākaroti . sarveṣvapi ca

mūtreṣu gomūtraṁ guṇato’dhikam . ato’viśeṣāt kathane mūtraṁ

gomūtramucyate . plīhodaraśvāsa kāsaśothavarcāgrahāpaham .

śūlagulmarujānāhakāmaṁlāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṣāyaṁ tiktatīkṣṇañca

pūraṇāt karṇaśūlanut . tatra saurabhyām paṅke gauriva sīdati bhā° vi°

191 . yathā gaurgavi cāphalā manuḥ goghnavat vihitaḥ kalpaḥ prā° ta°

viśvā° . vāci pannagagavīgumpheṣu cājāgarīt malli°

preyodūtapataṅgapuṅgavagabīhaiyaṅgavīnaṁ rasāt naiṣa° netrādiṣu

gomadhyamadhye! mṛgagodhare! he sahasragobhūṣaṇakiṅkarāṇām .

nādena gobhṛcchikhareṣu mattā nṛtyanti gokarṇaśarīrabhakṣāḥ cauraḥ .

gāmāttasārāṁ raghurapyavekṣya raghuḥ kṣiptāvarodhāṅganamutpathena

gām māghaḥ . hitādau yat . gavya gauhitaudau bhuvi padānte

gośabdasya atipare pararūpaṁ go’graṁ prakṛtivadbhāvaśca go agraṁ

acipare vā avaṅa gavāgram . aśvaśabde pare gavāśvādi° dvandva

ekavadbhāvaḥ . gavāśvam .

गौर — gaura Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899gaura mf («ī») n. (in comp. or ifc. g. «kaḍārādi») white, yellowish,

reddish, pale red v &c.

mf («ī») n. shining, brilliant, clean, beautiful

gaura m. white, yellowish (the colour)

gaura m. a kind of buffalo (Bos Gaurus, often classed with the Gavaya)

&c.

gaura m. white mustard (the seed of which is used as a weight, = 3

Rāja-sarshapas)

gaura m. Grislea tomentosa («dhava»)

gaura m. a species of rice

gaura m. the moon

gaura m. the planet Jupiter

gaura m. N. of the Nāga śeṣa

gaura m. of Caitanya (cf. «-candra»)

gaura m. of a Yoga teacher (son of śuka and Pīvarī) 981

gaura pl. N. of a family (cf. «-rātreya»)

gaura n. white mustard

gaura n. N. of a potherb

gaura n. saffron (cf. «kanaka-«)

gaura n. the filament of a lotus

gaura n. gold

gaura n. orpiment

gaura mf («ī») n. («ā») f. = «rī» (cf. «gaulā»)

gaura mf («ī») n. («ī») f. the female of the Bos Gaurus («Vāc or voice of

the middle region of the air», i, 164, 41 according to

gaura n. = «gaurikā»

gaura n. the earth

gaura n. red chalk

gaura n. a yellow pigment or dye («go-rocanā», «orpiment»

gaura n. turmeric («rajanī»)

gaura n. N. of several other plants («priyaṁgu, maṇjiṣṭhā, śveta-dūrvā,

mallikā, tulasī, suvarṇa-kadalī, ākāśa-māṁsī»)

gaura n. N. of several metres (one of 4 x 12 syllables; another of 4 x 13

syllables; another of 4 x 26 long syllables)

gaura n. (in music) a kind of measure

gaura n. () N. of a Rāgiṇī

gaura n. «brilliant Goddess», śiva’s wife Pārvatī Pariś.

gaura n. N. of Varuṇa’s wife

gaura n. of a Vidyā-devī, iii, 231, 48

gaura n. of śākya-muni’s mother

gaura n. of the wife of Vi-rajas and mother of Su-dhāman

gaura n. of several other women

gaura n. of several rivers (one originally the wife of Prasena-jit or

Yuvanāśva, changed by his curse into the river Bāhu-dā ([cf. Lat.

‘gilvus’?])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

gaura a. (rā or rī f.)

(1) White; kailāsagauraṁ vṛṣamārurukṣoḥ R. 2. 35;

dviradadaśanacchedagaurasya tasya Me. 59, 52; Rs. 1. 6.

(2) Yellowish, pale-red; gorocanākṣepanitāṁtagaure Ku. 7. 17; R. 6.

65; gaurāṁgi garvaṁ na kadāpi kuryāḥ R. G.

(3) Reddish.

(4) Shining, brilliant.

(5) Pure, clean, beautiful. —raḥ 1 The white colour.

(2) The yellowish colour.

(3) The reddish colour.

(4) White mustard.

(5) The moon.

(6) A kind of buffalo.

(7) A kind of deer.

(8) The planet Jupiter.

(9) N. of Chaitanya. —raṁ

(1) The filament of a lotus.

(2) Saffron.

(3) Gold.

— Comp.

—aṁgaḥ N. of

(1) Viṣṇu.

(2) Kṛṣṇa. —āsyaḥ a kind of black monkey, with a white face. —kharaḥ

a wild monkey. —sarṣapaḥ white mustard (considered as a kind of

weight).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

gaura ved., gaura klass. Uṇ. 2, 29. ŚĀNT. 1, 4. 1) adj. f. ī (auch klass.) P.

4, 1, 41. «weisslich, gelblich, röthlich» (als m. «die weissliche Farbe

u.s.w.») NIR. 11, 39. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 24. 3, 4, 25, 191. H. 1393. 1394. an.

2, 413. MED. r. 27. kann im comp. seinem subst. vorgehen oder

nachfolgen gaṇa kaḍārādi zu P. 2, 2, 38. gaurasya yaḥ payasaḥ

pītimānaśe ṚV. 10, 100, 2. gauralalāma TS. 5, 6, 16, 1. mṛṇāla- VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 4, 31. 58, 36. SUŚR. 1, 106, 17. bhūmi 135, 1. sirā 356, 1.

(acalam) gauraṁ tuṣāraiḥ MEGH. 53. 60. tuṣāragaura ṚT. l, 6.

kailāśagauraṁ vṛṣam RAGH. 2, 35. MBH. 6, 445. -dukūla GĪT. 11, 26.

gaurīṁ kanakavarṇābhāmiṣṭāmantaḥpureśvarīm R. 5, 14, 30.

jāmbūnadaśuddhagaura DRAUP. 7, 7. MBH. 4, 2301. fg. nārī 8, 2050. —

payodhara BHARTṚ. 1, 9. taruṇādityasadṛśaiḥ śaṇagauraiśca vānaraiḥ

MBH. 3, 16350. taruṇādityagauraiḥ śaragauraiśca vānaraiḥ R. 4, 39, 14.

11. raśmayo yasya (candrasya) gaurāḥ MṚCCH. 26, 1. rocanā- RAGH. 6,

65. GĪT. 11, 12. CAURAP. 1. «glänzend, rein, schön», = ujjvala TRIK. 3, 3,

346. = viśuddha H. an. MED. = viśada H. an. -kānti CAURAP. 1 (nach

dem Sch.: = manohara). — 2) m. a) «eine Büffelart, Bos Gaurus», häufig

neben dem gavaya genannt. AIT. BR. 3, 34. ŚAT. BR. 1, 2, 3, 9. ṚV. 4,

21, 8. gauro na tṛṣitaḥ piva 1, 16, 5. 4, 58, 2. 5, 78, 2. 7, 69, 6. 98, 1. 8,

4, 3. 45, 24. 76, 1. 10, 51, 6. gauramāraṇyamanu te diśāmi VS. 13, 48.

24, 28. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 16, 3, 14. BHĀG. P. 3, 10, 21. 8, 2, 20. Vgl.

gauramṛga. — b) «weisser Senf» MED. n. nach H. an. m. «das Korn», als

«Gewicht» = 3 rājasarṣapa YĀJÑ. 1, 362. Hier eig. adj. mit Ergänzung von

sarṣapa aus dem vorhergehenden rājasarṣaya; vgl. gaurasarṣapa. — c)

«Grislea tomentosa Roxb.» (dhava) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) «der Mond» H.

an. MED.; vgl. Ind. St. 2, 262. 286. — e) «der Planet Jupiter» H. ś. 13; vgl.

Ind. St. 2, 287. — f) N. pr. eines Joga- Lehrers, eines Sohnes des Śuka von

der Pīvarī, HARIV. 981. — g) Bein. des Heiligen Caitanya

ANANTASAṁHITĀ im ŚKDR. — 3) f. gaurā = gaurī f. DVIRŪPAK. im

ŚKDR. — 4) f. ī «die Kuh des Bos Gaurus»: somo gaurī adhi śritaḥ (P. 1, 1,

19, Sch.) ṚV. 9, 12, 3. madhvaḥ pibanti gauryaḥ. yā indreṇa

sayāvarīrvṛṣṇā madanti 1, 84, 10. yathā ha tyadvasavo gauryaṁ citpadi

ṣitāmamuñcata 4, 12, 6. gaurīrmimāya (AV.: gaurinmimāya) salilāni

takṣatī 1, 164, 41. Auf der letzten Stelle beruht die Deutung des Wortes

als Vāc «des mittleren Gebietes» NAIGH. 1, 11. NIR. 11, 40. — b)

«Gelbwurz», = rajanī H. an. MED. RATNAM. 58. SUŚR. 1, 59, 11. 2, 39,

11. 101, 8. = piṅgā (wofür ŚKDR. dāruharidrā substituirt) MED. Auch N.

einer Menge anderer Pflanzen: = priyaṁgu H. an. MED. = mañjiṣṭhā,

śvetadūrvā, mallikā. tulasī, suvarṇakadalī, ākāsamāṁsī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

— c) «ein best. gelbes Pigment» (s. gorocanā) H. an. MED. — d) «ein noch

nicht menstruirtes (achtjähriges) Mädchen» AK. 2, 6, 1, 8. TRIK. 3, 3,

346. H. 510. H. an. MED. GṚHYASAṁGR. 2, 28. 29. — e) «die Erde» H. an.

MED. — f) N. pr. der Tocher des Himālaya u. Gemahlin Śiva’s AK. 1, 1, 1,

32. TRIK. H. 203. H. an. MED. MEGH. 51. 61. gaurī yatra vitastātvaṁ yātā

(vgl. u. «k») RĀJA-TAR. 1, 29. — g) N. pr. der Gemahlin Varuṇa’s H. an.

MED. MBH. 5, 3968. 13, 6751. 7637. — h) N. pr. der Mutter Śākyamuni’s

(s. māyā) TRIK. 1, 1, 14. — i) N. pr. einer der 16 Vidyādevī H. 240. — k)

N. pr. der Gemahlin Prasenajit’s (oder Yuvanāśva’s), welche durch einen

Fluch ihres Gatten in den Fluss Bāhudā (vgl. u. f) verwandelt wurde,

HARIV. 710. 1716. VP. 362, N. 18. 448, N. 9. — N. pr. der Gemahlin des

Virajas und der Mutter Sudhāman’s 82, N. 2. — l) N. pr. eines Flusses

(vgl. u. «f») und k) H. an. MED. MBH. 6, 333. VP. 183. LIA. I, Anh.

XXXVIII. Vgl. gaurīgaṅgā ebend. 55. — m) N. pr. einer Rāgiṇī, der

Gemahlin des Rāga Mālava (vgl. gauḍa 2, «a»): ārāmamadhyato kumārikā

(zwei Kürzen fehlen) śāradendumukhalakṣmīḥ. rāḍīdāḍimavījaṁ (rāḍī!)

dadhatī kīrānane gaurī.. SAṁGĪTADĀM. im ŚKDR. Hierher viell. zu ziehen:

gaurī vidyātha gāndhārī keśinī mitrasāhvayā. sāvitryā saha sarvāstāḥ

pārvatyā yānti pṛṣṭhataḥ.. MBH. 3, 14562. HARIV. 12036. 12041. Vgl.

auch u. gāndhāra. — n) N. verschiedener Metra: a) metrical

sequenceCOLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 160 (VII, 10). — b) metrical sequence

ebend. 161 (VIII, 4). — g) 4 Mal 26 Längen ebend. 164 (XXI, 3). — 5) n.

a) «weisser Senf» H. an. m. nach MED. — b) «die Staubfäden der

Lotusblume» H. an. MED. — c) «Safran» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Diese Bed. hat

nach VIŚVA beim Sch. zu CAURAP. 10 kanakagaura n.:

kanakagaurakṛtāṅgarāga KAURAP. 10. — d) «Gold» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

gaura 1) ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. Ind. St. 8, 273. ŚIŚ. 11, 14. — 4) Z. 1 füge a)

nach ī hinzu. — b) VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 66. «Nacht»

AUFRECHT. — d) vgl. Spr. 282. — f) Ind. St.5,194.9,58. 106. 108. Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 25,a,34. 58,a,10. 71,b,30. 77,b,37. auch mit der Sarasvatī

identificirt WILSON, Sel. Works 2, 190. — k) N. pr. verschiedener Frauen

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 141,a,21. 321,b, No. 763. 364,b, No. 68. — n) d) metrical

sequenceInd. St. 8, 385. — Vgl. mahāgaurī.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

gaura(m) A mountain in the Kuśa island. (Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 12,

Verse 4).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

gaura gaura,

I. adj., f. rī, White, yellow, pale red, Megh. 53; Rām. 5, 14, 30.

II. m.

1. A kind of buffalo, Bos gaurus, Bhāg. P. 3, 10. 21.

2. White mustard, as a measure, Yājñ. 1, 362.

III. f. rī,

1. Turmeric, Suśr. 1, 59, 11.

2. A young girl prior to menstruation, Pañc. iii. d. 213.

3. The wife of Śiva, Megh. 51.

4. The wife of Varuṇa, MBh. 5, 3968.

5. The name of a river, MBh. 6, 333.

IV. n. Saffron, Caur. 10.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

gaura f. ī white, yellowish, reddish; brilliant, beautiful. m. = gauramṛga or

= gaurasarṣapa, N. of a teacher; f. ī a female buffalo, a young girl before

puberty, E. of the wife of Śiva, N. of sev. women.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

gaura gaura, a. (ī) whitish, yellowish, reddish; m. kind of buffalo; white

mustard (a grain of it = a measure);

-mukha, m. N.;

-mṛga, m. kind of buffalo.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

gaura pu° guṅ—gatau ra ni° vṛddhiḥ gura—ghañ prajñādyaṇ vā . 1 candre

2 śvetasarṣape medi° 3 dhavavṛkṣe rājani° 4 pītavarṇe 5 śvetavarṇe 6

aruṇavarṇe ca pu° 7 tadviśiṣṭe tri° striyāṁ gaurā° ṅīṣ . 8 śrīcaitanyadeve

mahāprabhau anantamahitā . 9 padmakeśare na° medi° 10 svarṇe 11

kuṅkume ca na° rājani° . tatra śvetavarṇayukte kailāsagauraṁ

vṛṣamārurukṣoḥ raghuḥ pītavarṇādye gorocanopanitānta gaure kumā°

aruṇavarṇādye kīrṇaiḥ piṣṭātakoghaiḥ kṛta divasamukhaiḥ

kuṅkumakṣodagauraḥ ratnāva° taruṇādityagauraiśca śaragauraiśca

vānaraiḥ rāmā° ki° 301 sa° . nitāntagauryo hṛtakuṅkameṣvalam kirā° 12

parimāṇamede yathoktaṁ yājña° jālasūryamarīcisthaṁ trasareṇurajaḥ

smṛtam . te ‘ṣṭau likṣā ca tāstisro rājasarṣapa ucyate . gaurastu te trayaḥ

ṣaṭ ca yavomadhyastu te trayaḥ iti . 13 mṛgabhede pu° strī gaurajo

mahiṣaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ śūkaro gavayo ruruḥ . dviśaphāḥ paśavaśceme

aviruṣṭraśca sattama! . kharo’śvo’śvataro gauraḥ śarabhaścamarī tathā .

ete caikaśaphāḥ kṣattaḥ! bhāga° 3 . 10 . 22 . a° . mahoragāśca bhayato

vidravanti sagaurakṛṣṇāḥ śarabhāścamaryaḥ bhāga° 8 . 2 . 16 a° . 14

viśuddhe tri° medi° . kaḍārā° karmadhāraye’sya vā pūrvanipātaḥ

gaurapaṭaḥ paṭagauraḥ .

घन — ghana Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ghana mf («ā») n. («han») a striker, killer, destroyer

mf («ā») n. compact, solid, material, hard, firm, dense, i, 8, 3 («ghanā»

for «-nam ā») &c.

mf («ā») n. coarse, gross

mf («ā») n. viscid, thick, inspissated

mf («ā») n. full of (in comp.), densely filled with (in comp.)

mf («ā») n. uninterrupted

mf («ā») n. dark (cf. «-śyāma»)

mf («ā») n. deep (as sound; colour) xliii, 19

mf («ā») n. complete, all

mf («ā») n. auspicious, fortunate

ghana m. (= [characters]) slaying

ghana m. an iron club, mace, weapon shaped like a hammer, i, 33, 4; 36,

16; 63, 5; ix, 97, 16

ghana m. any compact mass or substance (generally ifc.) xiv &c. (said

of the foetus in the 2nd month

ghana ifc. mere, nothing but (e.g. «vijṇāna-ghana», «nothing but

intuition» xiv) 5 viii f. (cf. «ambu-, ayo-«)

mf («ā») n. a collection, multitude, mass, quantity

mf («ā») n. vulgar people

mf («ā») n. a cloud &c. (ifc. f. «ā» 2660)

mf («ā») n. talc

mf («ā») n. the bulbous root of Cyperus Hexastachys communis

mf («ā») n. a peculiar form of a temple

mf («ā») n. a particular method of reciting the and Yajur-veda (cf.

p.409)

mf («ā») n. the cube (of a number), solid body (in geom.)

mf («ā») n. phlegm («kapha»)

mf («ā») n. the body

mf («ā») n. extension, diffusion

ghana n. any brazen or metallic instrument or plate which is struck

(cymbal, bell, gong, &c.) 8688

ghana n. iron

ghana n. tin

ghana n. a mode of dancing (neither quick nor slow)

ghana n. darkness

ghana mf («ā») n. («am») ind. closely iii 9

ghana n. («dhvan», to sound) deep

ghana n. very much

ghana mf («ā») n. («ā») f. N. of a stringed instrument

ghana n. Glycine debilis

ghana n. a kind of creeper

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ghana a. [han mūrtau ap ghanadeśaśca Tv].

(1) Compact, firm, hard, solid: saṁjāta śca ghanāghanaḥ Mal. 9. 39;

nāsā ghanāsthikā Y. 3. 89; R. 11. 18.

(2) Thick, close, dense; ghanāviralabhāvaḥ U. 2. 27; R. 8. 91; Amaru.

57.

(3) Thick-set, full, fully developed (as breasts); ghaṭayati ghasune

kucayugagagane mṛgamadarucirūṣite Gīt. 7; agurucatuṣkraṁ bhavati gurū

dvau ghanakucayugme śaśivadanā’sau Śrut. 8; Bh. 1. 8; Amaru. 28.

(4) Deep (as sound); Mal. 2. 12; Mu. 1. 21.

(5) Uninterrupted, permanent.

(6) Impenetrable.

(7) Great, excessive, violent.

(8) Complete.

(9) Auspicious, fortunate. (10) Coarse, gross.

(11) Engrossed by, full or replete with; Māl. 1. 32; nirvṛti- U. 6. 11. —

naḥ A cloud; ghanodayaḥ prāk tadanataraṁ payaḥ S. 7. 30;

ghanarucirakalāpo niḥsapatno’sya jātaḥ V. 4. 10.

(2) An iron club, a mace.

(3) The body.

(4) The cube of a number (in math.).

(5) Extension, diffusion.

(6) A collection, multitude, quantity, mass, assemblage.

(7) Talc

(8) Phlegm.

(9) Any compact mass or substance. (10) Hardness, firmness.

(11) A particular manner of reciting Vedic texts; thus the padas

namaḥ rudrebhyaḥ ye repeated in this manner would stand thus: —namo

rudrebhyo rudrebhyo namo namo rudrebhyo ye ye rudrebhyo namo namo

rudrebhyo ye. —naṁ

(1) A cymbal, a bell, a gong.

(2) Iron.

(3) Tin.

(4) Skin, rind, bark.

(5) A mode of dancing.

— Comp.

—atyayaḥ, —aṁtaḥ ‘disappearance of the clouds’, the season

succeeding the rains, autumn; (śarad); R. 3. 37.

—ajñānī N. of Durgā.

—aṁbu n. rain.

—ākaraḥ the rainy season.

—āgamaḥ, —udayaḥ ‘the approach of clouds’, the rainy season;

ghanāgamaḥ kāmijanapriyaḥ priye Rs. 2. 1.

—āmayaḥ the date-tree.

—āśrayaḥ the atmosphere, firmament.

—uttamaḥ the face.

—upalaḥ hail.

—oghaḥ gathering of clouds.

—kaphaḥ hail.

—kālaḥ the rainy season.

—garjitaṁ 1. thunder, peal or thundering noise of clouds, roar of

thunder. —2. a deep loud roar.

—golakaḥ alloy of gold and silver.

—ghataḥ the cube of a cube.

—jaṁbāla, thick mire.

—jvālā lightning.

—tālaḥ a kind of bird (sāraṁga). —tolaḥ the Chataka bird.

—dhātuḥ lymph.

—dhvani a. roaring. (

—niḥ) 1. a deep or low tone. —2. the muttering of thunder clouds;

Śi. 16. 25.

—nābhiḥ smoke (being supposed to be a principal ingredient in

clouds; Me. 5).

—nīhāraḥ thick hoar-frost or mist.

—padaṁ the cube root.

—padavī ‘the path of clouds’, firmament, sky;

krāmadbhirghanapadavīmanekasaṁkhyaiḥ Ki. 5. 34.

—pāṣaṁḍaḥ a peacock.

—phalaṁ (in geom.) the solid or cubical contents of a body or of an

excavation.

—mūlaṁ cube root (in math.).

—rasaḥ 1. a thick juice. —2. extract, decoction. —3. camphor. —4.

water (m. or n.).

—varaṁ the face.

—vargaḥ the square of a cube, the sixth power (in math.).

—vartman n. the sky; ghanavartma sahasradheva kurvan Ki. 5. 17.

—vallikā, —vallī lightning.

—vātaḥ a thick oppressive breeze or air.

—vīthiḥ the sky.

—śabdaḥ thunder, peal of thunder.

—vāsaḥ a kind of pumpkin gourd.

—vāhanaḥ 1. Śiva. —2. Indra.

—śyāma a. ‘dark like a cloud’, deep-black, dark. (

—maḥ) an epithet

(1) of Rāma,

(2) of Kṛṣṇa. —samayaḥ the rainy season. —sāraḥ 1. camphor;

ghanasāranīhārahāra &c. Dk.

(1) (mentioned among white substances). —2. mercury. —3. water.

—svanaḥ, —śabdaḥ, —svaḥ the roaring of clouds. —hastasaṁkhyā the

contents of an excavation or of a solid (in math).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ghana (von han) I) subj. 1) adj. subst. «der welcher erschlägt,

Zermalmer»: vṛtrāṇām ṚV. 3, 49, 1. 4, 38, 1. 1, 4, 8. 8, 85, 12. — 2) m.

«Knüttel, Keule» AV. 10, 4, 9. vadhīrhi dasyuṁ dhaninaṁ ghanena ṚV. 1,

33, 4. ā vajraṁ ghanā dadīmahi 8, 3. 36, 16. 63, 5. 9, 97, 16. «eine

hammerähnliche Waffe» AK. 2, 8, 2, 59. H. 785. an. 2, 262. MED. n. 3.

Vgl. ayoghana. — II) obj. 1) adj. f. ā («fest zusammengeschlagen

u.s.w.»), = mūrta, nirantara, sāndra, dṛḍha AK. 3, 2, 15. 3, 4, 18, 113. H.

1447. H. an. MED. = pūrṇa, saṁpuṭa ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. a) «compact»:

kavalikā SUŚR. 1, 16, 8. «fest, hart»: granthi 257, 17. śopha 2, 44, 19.

vraṇa 2, 7. piṇḍa 1, 322, 7. nāsā ghanāsthikā YĀJÑ. 3, 89. śilāghane

tāḍakorasi RAGH. 11, 18. stanau BHARTṚ. 1, 17. CAURAP. 40. ŚRUT. 8.

GĪT. 7, 24. jaghana, ūru 10, 6. CAURAP. 15. AMAR. 28. PRAB. 101, 16.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 3. aṅguli 67, 43. «fest», von Speisen SUŚR. 1, 241,

15. «zäh, dick», von Flüssigkeiten und dergl. srāva 84, 9. 2, 363, 5. doṣa

345, 15. ghanayāṅgaṁ mṛdālipat KATHĀS. 24, 93. trapsyaṁ dadhi

ghanetarat AK. 2, 9, 51. ghanaṁ ghanapaṭalam BHARTṚ. 1, 43. udadhi,

vāta (Gegens. tanu) H. 1359. «dicht», von einem Gewebe SUŚR. 1, 29, 8.

2, 197, 14. vana PAÑCAT. III, 188. 141, 16 (wo sughana für saghana zu

lesen ist). vṛkṣaiḥ VET. 6, 8. von Zähnen VARĀH. BṚH. S. 67, 52.

atighanatarapatracchanna PAÑCAT. 148, 5. pulaka AMAR. 57. dhārā

PAÑCAT. 93, 2. dhūma MBH. 14, 1738. andhakāra R. 6, 19, 60. MṚCCH.

7, 11. PAÑCAT. 129, 18 (comparat.). timira I, 189. ŚIŚ. 4, 67. niśītha

AMAR. 69. «dick, voll von Etwas», am Ende eines comp.:

jaladhārāghainarghanaiḥ MBH. 1, 5374. tamoghanāyāṁ niśi 13, 4047. hṛdi

śokaghane RAGH. 8, 90. «häufig auf einander folgend, ununterbrochen»:

gāṇḍīvasphuragurughanāsphālanakrūrapāṇi (vgl.

anavataradhanurjyāsphālana ŚĀK. 37) PAÑCAT. III, 237. — b) «dunkel»,

von Farben: ghanaruc «eine dunkle Hautfarbe habend» BHĀG. P. 4, 5, 3;

vgl. ghanaśyāma. — c) «tief», von Tönen: gaurhambhāravaghanasvanā

MBH. 1, 6680. paraśorjarjaraśabdo neṣṭaḥ snigdho ghanaśca hitaḥ

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 42 (43), 19. ghanam — dhvananti RĀJA-TAR. 5, 377. — d)

«zusammengefasst. ganz, all»: dhanam «das ganze Vermögen» UPAK. 24

(KATHĀS. 4, 26 eine ganz andere Lesart). ghanamapaśyataḥ (pāpasya)

«des Bösen, der nichts merkte» KATHĀS. 4, 53. — 2) m. a) «eine

compacte Masse, Klumpen u.s.w.»: saindhavaghana ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 3,

13. supuṣpite patraghane nilānaḥ R. 5, 16, 55. saṁdhyābhra- 6, 35, 12.

MBH. 3, 11555. keśa- HARIV. 4298. vom «Fötus im zweiten Monat» (vgl.

SUŚR. 1, 322, 7) NIR. 14, 6. VARĀH. L. JĀT. 3, 4 (nach dem Sch. n.).

rasa-, prajñāna-, vijñāna-, prajñā-, jīva- «ganz, nichts als» rasa, «ganz

Erkennen» u.s.w. ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 3, 13. 5, 4, 12. MĀṆḌ. UP. 5. PRAŚNOP.

5, 5. BHĀG. P. 8, 3, 12. 9, 8, 23. Vgl. ambughana, ayoghana. Nach den

Lexicographen: = mūrtiguṇa, dārḍhya, vistāra, saṁgha, ogha AK. 3, 4,

18, 113. H. an. MED. — b) «Wolke» AK. 1, 1, 2, 9. 3, 4, 18, 113. TRIK. 3,

3, 237. H. 164. H. an. MED. MBH. 1, 5374. 12, 12405 (unterschieden von

jīmūta, ghanāghana, megha, balāhaka). DAŚ. 1, 15. R. 3, 61, 8. 4, 27, 23.

SUŚR. 1, 113, 19. MEGH. 20. 104. ŚĀK. 109. prativātaṁ na hi ghanaḥ

kadācidupasarpati PAÑCAT. III, 22. HIT. 34, 21. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 93. 6,

11. 21, 20. ghanacchannadṛṣṭirghanacchannamarkaṁ yathā niṣprabhaṁ

manyate VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 36. Am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā

HARIV. 2660. — c) «Talk» (wie auch andere Synonyme von «Wolke»; vgl.

abhra, abhraka und H. 1051) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) «die knollige Wurzel

von Cyperus hexastachyus communis Nees.» (wie alle Synonyme von

«Wolke»; vgl. AK. 2, 4, 25. H. 1193) TRIK. 3, 3, 237. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 2,

421, 11. 431, 16. 485, 13. 515, 1. — e) «Phlegma, Schleim» (s. kapha)

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) «Körper» H. 564. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) «Kubus»

COLEBR. Alg. 10. 11. trighana = 3 x 3 x 3 = 27 VARĀH. L. JĀT. 1, 21. 13,

2. — h) «eine Art den» Veda «zu schreiben» COLEBR. Misc. Ess. I, 21.

Verz. d. B. H. No. 368. — 3) f. ghanā N. zweier Pflanzen: a) = māṣaparṇī.

— b) = rudrajaṭā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) n. a) «Schlaginstrument» AK. 1,

1, 7, 4. TRIK. 3, 3, 237. H. 286. H. an. MED. HARIV. 8688. — b) «Eisen»

H. 1037. — c) «Zinn» H. ś. 160. — d) = tvaca RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Eher «die

aromatische Rinde der Laurus Cassia» als «Rinde, Haut» überh., wie

WILSON annimmt. — e) «das gemässigte Tempo beim Tanz» AK. 1, 1, 7,

9. H. 292. H. an. MED. — III) nom. act. m. «das Erschlagen»: śreṣṭho

ghane vṛtrāṇāṁ sanaye dhanānām ṚV. 6, 26, 8.

ghana II) 1) a) sūtra «fest» Spr. 4000. viveka «derb, kräftig» 2971 (Conj.).

utsāhaika- (vīrahṛdaya) KATHĀS. 83, 39. Z. 13 lies 129, 8; Z. 14 lies

jaladhārāghanairghanaiḥ. — 2) a) mahābhra- R. 7, 6, 61. vom «Fötus»

WASSILJEW 236. — f) HALĀY. 2, 355. — g) yugānāṁ trighano (d. i.

«siebenundzwanzig» Juga) gataḥ SŪRYAS. 1, 22. 46. 70. — h) vgl. Ind. St.

3, 269.

ghana I) 2) «Hammer» Spr. (II) 4074. — II) 2) a) und b) pl. von Menschen

so v. a. «Pack» und zugleich «Wolken» Spr. (II) 6919. — h) Ind. Antiq.

1874, S. 133.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

ghana ghana, i. e. han + a,

I. adj., f. nā,

1. Firm, hard, Bhartṛ. 1, 17.

2. Without interstices, Suśr. 1, 29, 8.

3. Uninterrupted, Pañc. iii. d. 237.

4. Dense, Pañc. iii. d. 188; 129, 8.

5. As latter part of a compound adj., sometimes Full, Ragh. 8, 90.

6. Dusk, Bhāg. P. 4, 5, 3.

7. Deep (as a sound), MBh. 1, 6680; Rājat. 5, 377.

8. Whole, Upak. 24.

II. m.

1. A solid mass, substance, Vedāntas. in Chr. 211, 9.

2. A heap, Rām. 5, 16, 55.

3. A cloud, Megh. 20.

— Comp. sa-, adj. dense, Pañc. 141, 16. stamba-, m. 1. a small hoe for

weeding. 2. A sickle. 3. A basket for the heads of wild rice.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ghana a. slaying, striking; compact, solid, firm, tight (n. adv.); dark, deep

(sound); uninterrupted, whole, entire; full of (—°). m. slaughter, slayer;

mace, club, hammer; compact mass, cloud; nothing but (—°).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

ghana ghan-a, a. striking; slaying; firm, hard; dense, solid, thick;

uninterrupted; dark, murky; deep (tone); whole; -°, full of: -m, ad.

closely, firmly; m. slaying; slayer; club, hammer; lump, solid mass; -°,

nothing but, pure (cognition); cloud: pl. rabble.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ghana pu° hana—mūrtau ap ghanādeśaśca . 1 meghe 2 mustake 3

samūhe 4 dārdye 5 vistāre ca 6 lauhamudgare medi° 7 śarīre 8 kaphe 9

abhrake rājani° . samatrighātaśca ghanaḥ pradiṣṭaḥ iti 10 sīlāvatyukte

samāddhatrayabadhe . 11 niviḍe sāndre tri° amaraḥ 12 vṛḍhe tri° medi° .

13 pūrṇe 14 saspuṭe tri° śabdara° . 15 karatālādikāṁsyavādyamede 16

madhyama nṛtye ca na° amaraḥ . 17 lauhe na° hemaca° 18 tvace na°

rājani° . tatra meghasyotpattibhedādikaṁ purāṇamarvasve

brahmāṇḍapu° uktaṁ yathā sūryaḥ kiraṇajālena vāyuyuktena sarvataḥ .

jagato jalamāṭatte kṛtsnasya dvijasattamāḥ! . ādityabhūtaṁ bhūtebhyaḥ

somaṁ saṁkramate jalam . nāḍībhirvāyuyuktābhirlokādhāraḥ pravartate .

yat somāccyavate sūkṣmaṁ tadabbhreṣvavatiṣṭhate .

meghāvāvvabhivātena visṛjanti jalaṁ bhuvi . evaṁ prakaraṇenaiva patate

cāsakṛjjalam . na nāśamudakasyāsti tadeva parivartate .

mandhāraṇārthaṁ bhūtānāṁ māyaiṣā viṣṇunirmitā . anayā māyayā

vyāptaṁ trailokyaṁ sacarācaram . viśraśo lokakṛddevaḥ sahabhrāṁśuḥ

prajāpatiḥ . dhātā kṛtsnasya lokasya prabhaviṣṇurdivākaraḥ .

sārvalaukikamambhoya ttat somo nabhasorasaḥ . evaṁ bhūtaṁ jagat

sarvametattathyaṁ prakīrtitam . sūryāduṣṇaṁ nisravati somācchītaṁ

pravartate . śītoṣṇavīryau dvāvetau yuktyā pālayato jagat .

somāmṛtodbhavā gaṅgā pavitrā vimalodakā . bhadrāsomapurogāśca

mahānadyo dvijottamāḥ! . sarvabhūtaśarīreṣu yāstvāpo’pasṛtābhuvi . teṣu

sandahyamāmeṣu jaṅgamasthāvareṣu ca . pūryante sarvabhūtebhyo

niṣkrāmantīha sarvaśaḥ . tena cābbhrāṇi jāyante sthānamabbhramayaṁ

smṛtam . tejo’rkaḥ sarvabhūtebhya ādatte raśmibhirjalam .

samudrādvāyusaṁyogādraśmayaḥ pravahantyapaḥ . tatastvṛtugate kāle

parivṛtto divākaraḥ . niyacchatyapomeghebhyaḥ śuklakṛṣṇairgabhastibhiḥ

. abbhrasthāḥ prapatantyāpo vāyunā samudīritāḥ . sarvabhūtahitārthāya

rasyabhūtāḥ samantataḥ . tato varṣati ṣaṇmāsān sarvabhūta vivṛddhaye .

vāyavyaṁ stanitañcaiva vidyudagnisamudbharvā . mehanācca

miherdhātormeghatvaṁ vyañjayantyuta . na bhraśyanti

yataścāpastadabhraṁ kavayo viduḥ . meghānāṁ punarutpattau trividhā

yonirucyate . agnijā brahmajā caiva pakṣajā ca pṛthagvidhāḥ . tridhā

ghanāḥ samākhyātāsteṣāṁ vakṣyāmi sambhavam . āgneyāḥ sūkṣmajāḥ

proktāsteṣāṁ dhūmāt pravartanam . śītadurdinavātā ye svaguṇāste

vyavasthitāḥ . mahipāśca varāhāśca mattamātaṅgarūpiṇaḥ . bhūtvā

dharaṇi mabhyetya ramanti vicaranti ca . jīmūtā nāma te meghā ye

tebhyo vījasambhavāḥ . vidyadguṇavihīnāśca jaladhārāvalamvinaḥ . sakā

meghā mahākāyā āvahasya vaśānugāḥ . krośamātrācca varṣanti

krośārdhādapi vā punaḥ . parvatāgra nitatveṣu varṣanti gahvareṣu ca .

valākāgarbhadāścaiva vālākā garbhadhāriṇaḥ . brahmajāścaiva ye meghā

brahmaniśvāsasambhavāḥ . te ha vidyudgaṇāpetāḥ stanayitnupriyasvanāḥ

. teṣu śabdapraṇādena bhūmeḥsvāṅgaruhodbhavaiḥ .

vāyuvāhyābhiṣikteṣu vāyuryauvanamaśnute . teṣviya prāvṛḍāsaktā

bhūtānāṁ jīvitodbhavā . jīmūtā nāma te meghā ye tebhyo jīvasambhavāḥ

. dvitīyaṁ pravahaṁ vāyuṁ meghāste tu samāśritāḥ . ito yojanamātrācca

sārdhārdhādapi vā ca te . vṛṣṭidharmo dvadhā teṣāṁ dhārā»sāraḥ

prakīrtitaḥ . puṣkarāvartakā nāma ye mevāḥ pakṣamambhatāḥ .

saṁyogādvāyunocchinnāḥ parvatānāṁ mahaujasām . kāmagānāṁ ca

lokānāṁ sarvepāṁ śitamicchatām . puskarā nāma te meghā vṛhatto

ḥsamatsarāḥ . puṣkarāvartakāstena kāraṇeneha śabditāḥ .

nānārūpadharāṁścaiva mahāghorasvanāśca ye . kalpāntavṛṣṭeḥ sraṣṭāraḥ

saṁvartāgnerniyāmakāḥ . varṣanti te yugānteṣu tutīyāste prakīrtitāḥ .

anekarūpasaṁsthānāḥ pūrayanto mahītalam . vāyuṁ parivahaṁ te syuḥ

śritāḥ kalpāntasādhakāḥ . yo’ṇḍasya ca vibhinnasya prākṛtasyābhavattadā

. yasmāt brahmā samutpannaścaturvaktraḥ svayambhuvaḥ .

tasyaivāṇḍakapālāni sarvameghāḥ pravartitāḥ . teṣāmāpyāyanaṁ dhūmaḥ

sarveṣāmaviśeṣataḥ . teṣāṁ śreṣṭhastu parjanya ścattvāraścaiva

diggajāḥ . gajānāṁ parvatānāñca meghānāṁ bhogibhiḥ saha .

kulamekaṁ pṛthak bhūtaṁ yonistvekaṁ jalaṁ smṛtam . parjanyo

diggajāścaiva hemante śītasambhavāḥ . tuṣāravṛṣṭiṁ varṣanti himaṁ

sasyavivṛddhaye . vāyuviśeṣakṛtaeva ghanabhedo bhā° śā° 330 a° darśito

yathā prerayatyabhrasaṁghātān dhūmajāṁścoṣmajāṁśca yaḥ .

prathamaḥ prathame mārge pravaho nāma yo’nilaḥ . ambare

snehamabhyetya taḍidbhyaścotamadyutiḥ . āvaho nāma saṁbhāti

dvitīyaḥ śvasanonadan . udayaṁ jyotiṣāṁ śaśvat somādonāṁ karoti yaḥ .

antardeheṣu codānaṁ yaṁ vadanti manīṣiṇaḥ . yaścaturbhyaḥ

samudrebhyo vāyurdhārayate jalam . uddhṛtyādadate cāpo

jīmūtebhyo’mbare’nilaḥ . yo’dbhiḥ saṁyojya jīmūtān parjanyāya

prayacchati . udvaho nāma vaṁhiṣṭha stṛtīyaḥ sa sadāgatiḥ .

samuhyamānā bahudhā yena nītāḥ pṛthagghanāḥ .

varṣamokṣakṛtārambhāste bhavanti ghanāghanāḥ . saṁhatā yena

cāviddhā bhavanti nadatā nadāḥ . rakṣaṇārthāya sambhūtāḥ

meghatvamupayānti ca . yo’sau vahati bhūtānāṁ vimānāni vihāyasā .

caturthaḥ saṁvaho nāma vāyuḥ sa girimardanaḥ . yena vegavatā rugaṇā

rūkṣeṇārujatā nagān . vāyunā sahitā meghā ste bhavanti valāhakāḥ .

ṣṭāruṇotpātasañcāro nabhasaḥ stanayitnumān . pañcamaḥ sa mahāvego

vivaho nāma mārutaḥ . yasmin pāriplavā divyā vahantyāpovihāyasā .

puṇyañcākāśagaṅgāyā stoyaṁ viṣṭabhya tiṣṭhati .

samatrighātaścetyāderayamayaḥ samasaṁkhyānāṁ trayāṇāṁ ghātaḥ

yadyapyatra samayordvayorghātena vargarūpeṇa tanmūlasya samatvaṁ

nāsti tathāpi samaśabdena sadṛśaghātadvithātatvena samatvaṁ todhyaṁ

yathā 1 ghanaḥ? . dvābhyo dvayorguṇane 4 catvāraḥ teṣāṁ dvābhyāṁ

guṇane 8 . evaṁ trayāṇāṁ tribhirguṇane 9 nava teṣāṁ

punastribhirguṇane 27 . evaṁ krameṇa vāradvayaṁ

samasamadvighātarūpavargaguṇanāt ghanarūpatvaṁ jāyate

tatraikādīnāṁ daśaparyuntānāṁ ghanasaṁkhyāḥ suvodhāya pradarśyante

yathā 1 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . 8 . 9 . 10 1 . 8 . 27 . 64 . 125 . 216 . 343 .

512 729 . 1000 asya prakārāntaraṁ sthāpyoghanotyasyetyādi līlāvatyāṁ

dṛśyaṁ vistarabhayānnoktam . jaṭāmuktāṁ viparyasya

ghanamāhurmanīṣiṇaḥ ityukte 19 vedapāṭhabhede ṛgvedaśabde 1409 . 11

. 12 pṛ° vivṛtiḥ tatra sāndre pracaṇḍaghanagarjitapratirutānukārī (ravaḥ)

muhuḥ veṇī° . jaghanena ghanena sā lauhodghanaghanaskandhāḥ bhaṭṭiḥ

. lauhamudgare pratijaghāna ghanairiva muṣṭibhiḥ kirā° . meghe

prāvṛṣamiva ghanakeśajālām kāda° . rajanītimirāvaguṇṭhite puramārge

ghanaśabdavihvalāḥ kumā° asambhavadghanarasā śatālīpariṣevitā

udbhaṭaḥ . ghanaśyamaḥ . mūrtau—kāṭhinthe dvāraṁ

tamoghanaprakhyam bhaṭṭiḥ . tamasoghano mūrtiḥ kāṭhinyam tena

mūrtimattamaḥsamam jayama° .

चर्मानुरण्जन — carmānuraṇjana Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899carmānuraṇjana n. «skin-colouring», white cinnabar
चित्र — citra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899citra mf («ā») n. conspicuous, excellent, distinguished

mf («ā») n. bright, clear, bright-coloured

mf («ā») n. clear (a sound)

mf («ā») n. variegated, spotted, speckled (with instr. or in comp.)

mf («ā») n. agitated (as the sea, opposed to «sama»)

mf («ā») n. various, different, manifold &c.

citra mf («ā») n. (execution) having different varieties (of tortures)

mf («ā») n. strange, wonderful

mf («ā») n. containing the word «citra»

citra mf («ā») n. («am») ind. so as to be bright

mf («ā») n. in different ways

citra mf («ā») n. (to execute) with different tortures

citra mf («ā») n. («as») m. variety of colour

mf («ā») n. Plumbago zeylanica

mf («ā») n. Ricinus communis

mf («ā») n. Jonesia Aśoka

mf («ā») n. a form of Yama

mf («ā») n. N. of a king («citra»)

mf («ā») n. of a Jābāla-gṛihapati (with the patr. Gauśrāyaṇi),

mf («ā») n. of a king (with the patr. Gāṅgyāyani)

mf («ā») n. of a son of Dhritarāṣṭra

mf («ā») n. of a Draviḍa king, Padma P.v, 20, 1 (v.l. «-trākṣa»)

mf («ā») n. of a Gandharva

citra f. pl. the asterism Citrā

citra mf («ā») n. («am») n. anything bright or coloured which strikes the

eyes

citra f. a brilliant ornament, ornament

citra f. a bright or extraordinary appearance, wonder, ii &c.

citra f. (with «yadi» [ iii, 9/10] or «yad» [ 9062 fut. [ 3-3, 150 f. ])

strange, curious (e.g. «citraṁ badhiro vyākaraṇam adhyeṣyate» «it would

be strange if a deaf man should learn grammar»

citra f. strange! 15652

citra f. the ether, sky

citra f. a spot

citra f. a sectarial mark on the forehead

citra f. = «kuṣṭha»

citra f. a picture, sketch, delineation 4532 («sa-» mfn. = «-ga») &c. (ifc.

f. «ā» 64)

citra f. variety of colour

citra f. a forest («vana» for «dhana»?) of variegated appearance on

citra f. various modes of writing or arranging verses in the shape of

mathematical or other fanciful figures (syllables which occur repeatedly

being left out or words being represented in a shortened form)

citra f. punning in the form of question and answer, facetious

conversation, riddle, iv, 14/v

citra f. cf. a- and, «su-citra, dānu-, vi-»

citra f. «caitra».

citra «-traka, -traṭa», &c. see 4. «cit».

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

citra a. [citr-bhāve ac; ci-ṣṭran vā Uṇ. 4. 163]

(1) Bright, clear.

(2) Variegated, spotted, diversified.

(3) Amusing, interesting, agreeable; Māl. 1. 4.

(4) Various, different, manifold; Pt. 1. 136; Ms. 9. 248; Y. 1. 288.

(5) Surprising, wonderful, strange; kimatra citraṁ R. 5. 33; S. 2. 15.

(6) Perceptible, visible.

(7) Conspicuous, excellent, dstinguished.

(8) Rough, agitated (as the sea, opp. sama).

(9) Clear, loud, perceptible (as a sound). —traḥ

(1) The variegated colour.

(2) A form of Yama.

(3) The Aśoka tree.

(4) = citragupta q. v. below. —traṁ

(1) A picture, painting, delineation; citre niveśya parikalpitasattvayogā

S. 2. 9; punarapi citrīkṛtā kāṁtā S. 6. 20, 13, 21 &c.

(2) A brilliant ornament or ornament.

(3) An extraordinary appearance, wonder.

(4) A sectarial mark on the forehead.

(5) Heaven, sky.

(6) A spot.

(7) The white or spotted leprosy.

(8) (In Rhet.) The last of the three main divisions of Kavya (poetry).

(It is of two kinds śabdacitra and artha-vācyacitra, and the poetical

charm lies mainly in the use of figures of speech dependent on the sound

or sense of words. Mammaṭa thus defines it: —śabdacitraṁ

vācyacitramavyaṁgyaṁ tvavaraṁ smṛtaṁ K. P. 1. As an instance of

śabdacitra may be cited the following verse from R. G.

mitrātriputranetrāya trayīśātravaśatrave . gotrārigotrajaitrāya gotrātre te

namo namaḥ …

(9) Anything bright which strikes the eye. (10) Playing upon words,

punning, using conundrums, riddles &c. —traṁ ind. Oh!, how strange!,

what a wonder! citraṁ badhiro nāma vyākaraṇamadhyeṣyate Sk.

— Comp.

—akṣī, —netrā, —locanā a kind of bird commonly called Sārikā.

—aṁga a. striped, having a spotted body. (

—gaḥ) 1. a kind of snake. —2. N. of Arjuna. (

—gaṁ) 1. vermilion. —2. yellow orpiment.

—aṁgada a. decked with brilliant bracelets. (

—dā) N. of a wife of Arjuna and mother of Babhruvāhana.

—aṁgadasūḥ f. an epithet of Satvavatī, mother of Vyāsa.

—annaṁ rice dressed with coloured condiments; Y. 1. 304.

—apūpaḥ a kind of cake.

—arpita a. committed to a picture, painted. -āraṁbha a. painted;

R. 2. 31; Ku. 3. 42.

—ākṛtiḥ f. a painted resemblance, portrait.

—āyasaṁ steel.

—āraṁbhaḥ a painted scene, outline of a picture; V. 1. 4. v. l.

—uktiḥ f. 1. agreeable or eloquent discourse; jayaṁti te

paṁcamanādamitracitroktisaṁdarbhavibhūṣaṇeṣu Vikr. 1. 10. —2. a voice

from heaven. —3. a surprising tale.

—odanaḥ boiled rice coloured with turmeric &c.

—kaṁṭhaḥ a pigeon.

—kathālāpaḥ telling agreeable or charming stories.

—kaṁbalaḥ 1. painted cloth used as an elephant’s housing. —2. a

variegated carpet.

—kara. 1. a painter. —2. an actor.

—karman n. 1. an extraordinary act. —2. ornamenting, decorating.

—3. a picture; Mu. 2. 4. —4. magic. (—m.). 1. a magician, one who works

wonders. —2. a painter. -vid m. 1. a painter. —2. a magician.

—kāyaḥ 1. a tiger in general. —2. a leopard or panther.

—kāraḥ 1. a painter. —2. N. of a mixed tribe; (sthapaterapi

gāṁdhikyāṁ citrakāro vyajāyata Parāśara).

—kūṭaḥ N. of a hill and district near Prayāga; R. 12. 15, 13. 47, U.

1.

—kṛt a. astonishing, surprising. (—m) a painter.

—kolaḥ a kind of lizard.

—kriyā painting.

—kṣatra a. Ved. having manifold power, or one whose wealth is

visible.

—ga, —gata a. 1. painted, drawn in a picture. —2. coloured,

variegated.

—gaṁdhaṁ yellow orpiment.

—guptaḥ one of the beings in Yama’s world recording the vices and

virtues of mankind; Mu. 1. 20.

—gṛhaṁ a painted room.

—jalpaḥ a random or incoherent talk, talk on various subjects.

—taṁḍuṁla a medicinal plant said to possess anthelmintic virtues.

—tvac m. the Bhūrja tree.

—daṁḍakaḥ the cotton-plant.

—nyasta a. painted, drawn in a picture; Ku. 2. 24.

—pakṣaḥ the francoline partridge.

—paṭaḥ, —ṭṭaḥ 1. a painting, a picture. —2. a coloured or chequered

cloth.

—pada a. 1. divided into various parts. —2. full of graceful

expressions.

—pādā the bird called Sārikā.

—picchakaḥ a peacock.

—puṁkhaḥ a kind of arrow.

—pṛṣṭhaḥ a sparrow.

—pratikṛtiḥ f. representation in colours, a painting, picture.

—phalakaṁ a tablet for painting, a pictureboard.

—barhaḥ a peacock.

—bhānu a. of a variegated colour, shining with light. (

—nuḥ) 1. fire. —2. the sun; (citrabhānurvibhātīti dine ravau rātrau

vahnau K. P. 2 given as an instance of one of the modes of aṁjana). —3.

N. of Bhairava. —4. the Arka plant. —5. Śiva. —6. an epithet of the Aśvins.

—7. the first year of the first cycle of Jupiter.

—bhūta a. painted.

—maṁḍalaḥ a kind of snake.

—mṛgaḥ the spotted antelope.

—mekhalaḥ a peacock.

—yodhin a. fighting in a wonderful manner. (—m.) an epithet of

Arjuna.

—rathaḥ 1. the sun. —2. N. of a king of the Gandharvas, one of the

sixteen sons of Kaśyapa by his wife Muni; atra

munestanayaścitrasenādīnāṁ paṁcadaśānāṁ bhrātṝṇāmadhiko guṇaiḥ

ṣoḍaśaścitraratho nāma samutpannaḥ K. 136; V. 1.

—likhanaṁ painting.

—likhita a. 1. painted. —2. dumb, motionless (as in a picture).

—lekha a. of beautiful outlines, highly arched; rucistava kalāvatī

ruciracitralekhe bhruvau Gīt. 10. (

—khā) 1. a portrait, picture. —2. N. of a friend and companion of

Uṣā, daughter of Bāṇa. [When Uṣā related to her her dream, she

suggested the idea of taking the portraits of all young princes in the

neighbourhood; and on Uṣā’s recognising Aniruddha, Chitralekha, by

means of her magical power, conveyed him to her palace].

—lekhakaḥ a painter.

—lekhanikā a painter’s brush.

—vadālaḥ the sheat-fish.

—vanaṁ N. of a forest near the Gaṇḍakī.

—vājaḥ a cock.

—vicitra a. 1. variously coloured, variegated. —2. multiform.

—vidyā the art of painting.

—śālā a painter’s studio.

—śikhaṁḍin m. an epithet of the seven sages: marīci, aṁgiras,

atri, pulastya, pulaha, kratu and vasiṣṭha. -jaḥ an epithet of Bṛhaspati.

—śiras m.,

—śīrṣakaḥ a kind of venomous insect.

—śrīḥ great or wonderful beauty.

—saṁstha a. painted.

—hastaḥ a particular position of the hands in fighting.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

citra (von 4. cit) Uṇ. 4, 165. 1) adj. f. ā a) «augenfällig; sichtbar,

ausgezeichnet»: ūti ṚV. 2, 17, 8. 4, 32, 5. 5, 40, 3. abhiṣṭi 1, 119, 8. 8, 3,

2. sa ciketa sahīyasāgniścitreṇa karmaṇā 39, 5. varūtha 56, 3. grābha 70,

1. vakṣatha 10, 115, 1. vasu 9, 19, 1. rādhas 1, 22, 7. 44, 1 u.s.w. draviṇa

2, 23, 15. 10, 36, 13. uṣo vājaṁ hi vaṁsva yaścitro mānuṣe jane 1, 48,

11. 4, 22, 10. 36, 9. sa citra citraṁ citayantamasme citrakṣatra

citratamaṁ vayodhām. candraṁ rayiṁ gṛṇate yuvasva 6, 6, 7. citraṁ

ketuṁ kṛṇute cekitānā 1, 93, 15. 94, 5. 113, 1. ā citra citriṇīṣvā. citraṁ

kṛṇoṣyūtaye 4, 32, 2. — b) «hell, licht; hellfarbig»: uṣasaḥ ṚV. 7, 75, 3. 6,

60, 2. agni 1, 71, 1. 4, 7, 1. jyotis 5, 63, 4. sūro na citraḥ 9, 86, 34. sa

citreṇa cikite bhāsā 2, 3, 5. ā yaḥ svārṇa bhānunā citro vibhātyarciṣā 8, 4.

raśmi 9, 100, 8. nakṣatra TBR. 3, 1, 2, 1. Indra ṚV. 1, 142, 4. 2, 13, 13

u.s.w. die Marut 1, 165, 13. 8, 7, 7. abhra 5, 63, 3. ratha 3, 2, 15. aśvā 1,

30, 21. 10, 75, 7. vastra 1, 134, 4. rūpa 5, 52, 11. — c)

«verschiedenfarbig, bunt, scheckig» AK. 1, 1, 4, 26. TRIK. 3, 3, 347. H.

1398. an. 2, 418. MED. r. 34. srajaḥ N. 4, 8. puṣpavatīṁ citrāṁ

vanamālām R. 5, 4, 2. MṚCCH. 92, 7. In Verb. mit einem instr. oder nach

einem im instr. zu fassenden Worte im comp.: sauvarṇastvaṁ mṛgo

bhūtvā citro rajatavindubhiḥ R. 3, 44, 16. kāñcanacitrakārmuka 8, 25.

vaidūryamaṇicitre — aṅgade 6, 112, 88. ratnacitra (ratha) VARĀH. BṚH. S.

42 (43), 6. mukuṭāṅgadacitrāṅgī R. 1, 45, 41. — d) «bewegt» (vom

Meere), Gegens. sama R. 3, 39, 12. — e) «hell, vernehmlich» (von Tönen):

vācaṁ parjanyaścitrāṁ vadati tviṣīmatīm ṚV. 5, 63, 6. arka 6, 66, 9. 10,

112, 9. pavamāno ajījanaddivaścitraṁ na tanyatum 9, 61, 16. — f)

«mannichfaltig, verschieden, allerlei»: vanarājayaḥ R. 6, 15, 6. kathāḥ

MBH. 1, 3. R. 1, 3, 10. -bhāṣya MBH. 5, 1240. vadhopāyaiḥ M. 9, 248.

YĀJÑ. 1, 287. ARJ. 7, 14. SUŚR. 1, 237, 17. 241, 14. 2, 93, 6. PAÑCAT. I,

196. 429. BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 12. 13. 3, 19, 6. adv.: citraṁ saṁkrīḍamānāstāḥ

krīḍanairvividhaiḥ R. 1, 9, 14. vajracitrapariṣkṛte (aṅgade) R. 6, 112, 88.

— g) «wunderbar» MED.; vgl. 4,b. — h) «das Wort» citra «enthaltend»:

citre gāyati ŚAT. BR. 7, 4, 1, 24. KĀTY. ŚR.17, 4, 4. — 2) m. a) «Buntheit»

BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR. — b) N. verschied. Pflanzen: a) «Plumbago zeylanica

Lin.» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. MED. l. 11. — b) «Ricinus communis.» — g)

«Jonesia Asoka» (aśoka) «Roxb.» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) «eine Form des»

Jama TITHYĀDIT. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Königs (parox.) ṚV. 8, 21,

18. eines Gāñgyāyani Ind. St. 1, 395. Gauśrāyaṇi ebend. eines Sohnes des

Dhṛtarāṣṭra MBH. 1, 2730. 4543. 7, 5594. eines Königs von Draviḍa

PADMA-P. in Verz. d. B. H. No. 457. — 3) f. ā a) «Spica virginis», in der

alten Reihe das 12te, in der neuen das 14te Mondhaus, COLEBR. Misc.

Ess. II, 337. 425. 463. 481. Ind. St. 1, 99. TRIK. 3, 3, 347. H. 112. H. an.

MED. AV. 19, 7, 3. TS. 2, 4, 6, 1. citrā nakṣatraṁ mitro devatā 4, 4, 10, 2.

TBR. 1, 1, 2, 5. ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2, 13. 17. KAUŚ. 75. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 7, 4.

MBH. 5, 4842. 6, 79. 13, 3268. 4261. HARIV. 4257. R. 3, 23, 11. 5, 18, 14.

RAGH. 1, 46. LALIT. 117. pl. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 58. citrāsvātī gaṇa

rājadantādi zu P. 2, 2, 31. — b) «eine Schlangenart» H. an. MED. — c) N.

verschied. Pflanzen: a) «Anthericum tuberosum Roxb.» oder «Salvinia

cucullata Roxb.» = mūṣikaparṇī AK. 2, 4, 3, 6. = ākhuparṇī H. an. MED. —

b) «Cucumis maderaspatanus» AK. 2, 4, 5, 22. H. an. MED. «Koloquinthe»

RATNAM. 15. — g) = dantī H. an. MED. RATNAM. 34. — d) «Ricinus

communis» RATNAM. 3. — e) «Myrobalanenbaum» (āmalakī) RATNAM.

90. — z) = mṛgervāru. — h) gaṇḍadūrvā. — J) «Rubia Munjista»

(mañjiṣṭhā) «Roxb.» RĀJAN. — SUŚR. 1, 144, 14. 2, 21, 15. 23, 2,

wahrscheinlich in der Bed. greek — d) N. verschiedener Metra: a) «eine

Art» Mātrāsamaka («4 Mal 16 Moren») COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 155 (2, 4).

86. — b) metrical sequence ebend. 161 (X, 11). — g) metrical sequence

ebend. 162 (XI, 3); hier bei COLEBR. citra. — e) «Schein, Täuschung»

(māyā) MED. — f) N. pr. = citrāyāṁ jātā P. 4, 3, 34, Vārtt. 1. a) einer

Apsaras H. an. — b) einer Schwester Kṛṣṇa’s und Gemahlin Arjuna’s, =

subhadrā TRIK. H. an. MED. HARIV. 1952. — g) einer Tochter Gada’s (v.

l. Kṛṣṇa’s) HARIV. 9194. — d) eines Flusses MED. — 4) n.

SIDDH.K.249,b,2. a) «eine helle, glänzende» oder «farbige Erscheinung;

ein in die Augen fallender Gegenstand», daher auch «funkelndes

Geschmeide, Schmuck»: ā revatī rodasī citramasthāt ṚV. 3, 61, 6.

kadasya citraṁ cikite 4, 23, 2. sarvāṇi hi citrāṇyagniḥ (hierher oder zu b)

ŚAT. BR.6,1,3,20.7,4,1,24. na yāsu citraṁ dadṛśe na yakṣam ṚV. 7, 61, 5.

ā vaścitramā vo vratamā vo ‘haṁ samitiṁ dade 10, 166, 4.

nakṣatravihitāsau (der Himmel) citravihiteyam (die Erde) TS. 2, 5, 2, 5.

citrāṇyaṅgairnakṣatrāṇi rūpeṇa (prīṇāmi) VS. 25, 9. PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9.

dakṣiṇāvatāmidimāni citrā dakṣiṇāvatāṁ divi sūryāsaḥ ṚV. 1, 125, 6.

uṣastaccitramā bharāsmabhyam. yena tokaṁ ca tanayaṁ ca dhāmahe

«bring uns den Schmuck, dass wir Kind und Enkel besitzen» 92, 13. sā

hīyaṁ (rātriḥ) saṁgṛhyeva citrāṇi vasati die «Sterne» als «Edelsteine»

gedacht ŚAT. BR. 2, 3, 4, 22. citraṁ paścātsyātprajā vai citraṁ citraṁ

hyasya prajā bhavati 13, 8, 1, 13; nach dem Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 21, 3, 23

und ṢAḌV. BR. 2, 10 soll es hier = anekaprakāraṁ vanam

«verschiedenfarbiges» oder — «gestaltetes Gehölz» sein. — b) «eine

ungewöhnliche Erscheinung, Wunder» AK. 1, 1, 7, 19. 3, 4, 25, 180. H.

303. H. an. MED. citraṁ vā abhūma ya iyataḥ sapatnānabadhiṣma ŚAT.

BR. 2, 1, 2, 17. taccitramiva me pratibhāti ŚĀK. 110, 17. BHARTṚ. 3, 39.

PAÑCAT. 256, 12. ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 21. BHĀG. P. 5, 1, 36. vākyamapratirūpaṁ

hi na citraṁ strīṣu R. 3,51, 32. BHĀG. P. 1, 19, 20. kimatra citraṁ yadi…

ŚĀK. 35, 21. naitaccitraṁ yadayam .. 48. KATHĀS. 18, 359. fg.

naitaccitraṁ — tvayi — yat HARIV. 9062. citraṁ badhiro nāma

vyākaraṇamadhyeṣyate «es wäre ein Wunder, wenn» P. 3, 3, 151, Sch.

citraṁ drakṣyati nāmāndhaḥ kṛṣṇaṁ paśyedyadīśvaram VOP. 25, 15; vgl.

14 und P. 3, 3, 150. fg. yādavā iti citraṁ naḥ śaktāḥ sthātuṁ raṇe «es

wäre ein Wunder, wenn die J. vermöchten» HARIV. 15652. kṣipto ‘pi

nāpataccitram «o Wunder!» KATHĀS. 5, 86. citraṁ kathaṁ tvayā jñātā sā

saṁjñā 7, 73. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 85 (mitten in den Satz eingeschoben). 4,

586. — c) «Luftraum, Himmel» H. an. — d) «Fleck»: yathaiva sadṛśo rūpe

mātāpitrorhi jāyate. vyāghraścitraiḥ MBH. 13, 2605. — e) «Sectenzeichen

auf der Stirn» TRIK. H. 653. H. an. MED. lalitavanitāḥ — sacitrāḥ MEGH.

65. — f) «weisser Aussatz» H. 466, falsche Lesart für śvitra; vgl. übrigens

carmacitraka. — g) «Bild, Gemälde; Malerei» AK. 3, 4, 25, 180. H. 922. H.

an. MED. paṭe citramivārpitam MBH. 13, 7692. citre ‘pi cālikhatyaśvān

SĀV. 2, 13. citre niveśya ŚĀK. 42. 141. 89, 2. citrairivārpitam (vgl.

citrārpita) «gemalt» MBH. 13, 2660. citraṁ yathāśrayamṛte SĀṁKHYAK.

41. ye ca citraṁ bhajanti vai «und die sich mit der Malerei abgeben» R.

GORR. 2, 90, 23. sacitra «bemalt» HARIV. 4532. — h) «Buntheit» AK. 1, 1,

4, 26. TRIK. H. 1398. H. an. MED. — i) Bez. «verschiedener Arten,

künstliche Verse u.s.w. in Form von allerlei Figuren durch

Nichtwiederholung wiederkehrender Silben oder Wörter in abgekürzter

Weise künstlich für das Auge darzustellen»: padmādyākārahetutve

varṇānāṁ citramucyate SĀH. D. 645; vgl. HAEB. Anth. 291. fgg., wo

verschiedene solcher Figuren mitgetheilt werden. — k) «ein Wortspiel in

Form von Frage und Antwort»: praśnottarāntarābhinnamuttaraṁ

citramucyate KUVALAJ. 145, «b», mit dem Beispiele: ke dārapoṣaṇaratāḥ

(dāra = kṣetra, als Antwort gilt kedāra-) ke kheṭāḥ (khe’ṭāḥ) kiṁ calaṁ

vayaḥ («Vögel» und «Alter»). — Vgl. acitra, dānu-, vi-, su-, caitra.

citra 1) f) -ratāni Verz. d. Oxf. H. 215,b,29. citrā yogāḥ unter den 64 Kalā

217,a,4. 216,a,11. -vadha «eine qualificirte Todesstrafe» DAŚAK. in BENF.

Chr. 193, 4. citramenaṁ ghātayiṣyasi «unter verschiedenen Martern» 198,

3. — g) namo ‘stu citraprabhāvāya dhanāya tasmai Spr. 4777. — 2) d)

Gārgyāyaṇi Verz. d. Oxf. H. 276,a,30. — 3) a) TS. 7, 4, 8, 2. PAÑCAV. BR.

5, 9, 1. SŪRYAS. 8, 21. 9, 12. — d) vgl. Ind. St. 8, 315. fg. — f) e) eines

Felsens BHĀG. P. 12, 8, 17. — 4) f) vgl. citrakuṣṭha. — g) (tām) citre

likhitvā KATHĀS. 51, 126. -rodanāntardhāna Verz. d. Oxf. H. 322,b,4. fg.

— i) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 208,a,5 v. u. — k) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 211,b,9. — i) k)

«Wort- und Lautspiel»: keciccitrākhyaṁ tṛtīyaṁ kāvyabhedamicchanti

tadāhuḥ. śabdacitraṁ vācyacitramavyaṅgyaṁ tvavaraṁ smṛtam SĀH. D.

116, 19. fg. śabdacitra, arthacitra, ubhayacitra PRATĀPAR. 12,b. 13,a.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

citra 1 I A son of Dhṛtarāṣṭra killed in war by Bhīmasona. (M.B. Droṇa

Parva, Chapter 136, Verse 20).

citra 2 II A gajarāja (king elephant) with whom Subrahmaṇya, as a child,

used to play. (M.B. Vana Parva, Chapter 225, Verse 23).

citra 3 III A hero who fought on the Kaurava side against the Pāṇḍavas.

He was killed by Prativindhya. (M.B. Karṇa Parva, Chapter 14, Verse 32).

citra 4 IV A hero from the Cedi Kingdom who fought on the Pāṇḍava side

against the Kauravas. Karṇa killed him. (M.B. Karṇa Parva, Chapter 56,

Verse 46).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

citra 1. cit + ra,

I. adj.

1. Visible (ved.).

2. Clear, shining, Chr. 293, 2 = Rigv. i. 88, 2.

3. Variegated, Chr. 2, 21.

4. Spotted, Rām. 3, 48, 12.

5. Various, Man. 9, 248.

6. Fluctuating, Rām. 3, 52, 15.

7. Wonderful, Rām. 3, 35, 4.

8. Surprised, Rājat. 5, 2.

9. Uncommon, rigorous, Daśak. in Chr. 193, 4; adv. in a rigorous

manner, ib. 198, 3.

II. f. trā, The name of a lunar mansion, Spica virginis, Rām. 3, 23, 11.

III. n.

1. A surprising appearance, Śāk. 110, 17; wonder, Rām. 3, 51, 26.

2. A spot, MBh. 13, 2605.

3. A picture, MBh. 13, 7692.

4. Painting, Rām. 2, 90, 23 Gorr.

— Comp. vi-,

I. adj. 1. variegated, spotted. 2. painted. 3. handsome. 4. surprising.

II. n. 1. variegated (the colour). 2. surprise. 3. speech implying

apparently the reverse of the intended object. sa-, adj. 1. painted, Hariv.

4532. 2. containing pictures, Megh. 65.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

citra a. conspicuous, visible, bright, clear, loud, variegated, manifold,

various, excellent, extraordinary, strange, wonderful. f. ā N. of a lunar

mansion. n. anything bright or shining, esp. jewel, ornament, picture;

extraordinary appearance, wonder (often as exclamation).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

citra cit-ra, a. manifest, visible, distinguished, clear, bright; distinct,

audible (sound); variegated, speckled, dappled; various, manifold;

qualified with torture (punishment); wonderful; n. bright-coloured object,

glittering ornament; jewel; picture; surpring phenomenon, wonder.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

citra t ka kṣaṇikekṣaṇe . lekhye’dbhute . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ ..

(adantacurāṁ-paraṁ-sakaṁ-seṭ .) kṣaṇikekṣaṇaṁ kadāciddarśanam .

citrayati citrāpayati rāhuṁ lokaḥ kadācit paśyatītyarthaḥ . citrayati

pratimāṁ lokaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

citra kṣaṇike—lekhye adbhute ca ada° cu° ubha° saka° seṭ . citrayati te

acicitrat ta . citritaḥ citraḥ .

citra na° citra—bhāve ac ci—ṣṭran vā . 1 tilake . 2 ālekhye 3 adbhute 4

karvūravarṇe 5 tadyukte tri° medi° . 6 ākāśe 7 kuṣṭhabhede hema° . 8

yamabhede pu° vṛkodarāya citrāya yamatarpaṇamantraḥ . 9

eraṇḍaṁvṛkṣe 10 aśokavṛkṣe 11 citrakavṛkṣe rājani° 12 citragupte

citraguptaśabde dṛśyam 13 śabdālaṅkārabhede na° alaṅkāraśabde 390

pṛ° dṛśyam . citrasaṁjñamīritaṁ pramāṇikāpadadvayam vṛ° ra° ukte 15

ṣoḍaśākṣarapādake chandobhede . nisargacitrojjvalasūkṣmapakṣmaṇā

citraṁ cakāra padamardhapulāyitena ruciracitratanūruhaśālibhiḥ iti ca

māghaḥ .

जरठ — jaraṭha Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899jaraṭha mfn. old (śāntiś. iv, 17)

mfn. bent, drooping

mfn. for «jaṭhara», hard, solid

mfn. harsh, cruel

mfn. strong, violent xi f.

mfn. yellowish (old leaves’ colour)

jaraṭha m. old age

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

jaraṭha a. [jṝ bā -aṭha]

(1) Hard, solid.

(2) Old, aged; ayamatijaraṭhāḥ prakāmagurvīḥ

pariṇatadikkarikāstaṭīrbibharti Śi. 4. 29 (where jaraṭha means ‘hard’

also).

(3) Decayed, decrepit, infirm.

(4) Bent, bowed down, drooping.

(5) Pale, yellowish-white.

(6) Full-grown, ripe, matured; jaraṭhakamala Śi. 11. 14.

(7) Hard-hearted, cruel. —ṭhaḥ

(1) N. of Paṇdu, father of the five Pāṇḍavas.

(2) Old age.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

jaraṭha (wie eben) Uṇ. 1, 100, Sch. 1) adj. a) «hinfällig, alt, bejahrt» H.

an. 3, 175. BHĀG. P. 6, 1, 25. 9, 6, 41. RĀJA-TAR. 2, 170. ati- SĀY. zu

ṚV. 1, 125, 1. — b) «hart» H. 1387. H. an. = karkaśa und kaṭhina MED. ṭh.

13. — c) «gelblich» (die Farbe der «alten» Blätter) MED. — 2) m. «Alter»

VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — Vgl. jaṭhara.

jaraṭha 1) a) Spr. 808. BHĀG. P. 11, 23, 25. — b) fehlerhaft für jaṭhara

SĀH. D. 103, 22. Spr. 814, v. l. (Th. 2, S. 330). VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu

UṆĀDIS. 1, 102. — c) VIŚVA a. a. O.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

jaraṭha jaraṭha (vb. jṛ10), adj. Old, Bhāg. P. 6, 1, 25.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

jaraṭha a. old, aged; hard, solid, strong.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

jaraṭha tri° jṝ—bā° aṭha . 1 karkaśe kaṭhine 2 pāṇḍunṛpe pu° medi° . 3

jīrṇe tri° hema° 4 jarāyāṁ viśvaḥ . nīrandhrāstanumālikhantu

jaraṭhacchedānalagranthayaḥ sā° da° . ayamati jaraṭhāḥ prakāmagurvīḥ

māghaḥ . 5 pariṇate ca . jaraṭhakamalakandacchedagaurairmayūkhaiḥ

māghaḥ .

तमाल — tamāla Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899tamāla m. «dark-barked (but white-blossomed)» Xanthochymus Pictorius

12837 &c.

m. a sort of black Khadira tree

m. Crataeva Roxburghii

m. tobacco, Sikṣāp.

m. sectarial mark on the forehead (made with the juice of the Tamāla

fruit)

m. a sword

tamāla m. n. (g. «ardharcādi») the bark of the bamboo

tamāla n. = «-patra»

tamāla n. Crataeva Roxburghii

tamāla n. = «tāmra-vallī»

tamāla &c.,

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

tamāla Uṇ. 1, 117. m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31. AK. 3, 6, 4, 33. 1)

m. N. eines Baumes mit überaus «dunkler Rinde, Xanthochymus pictorius

Roxb.» (die Blüthe ist weisslich) AK. 2, 4, 2, 48. TRIK. 3,3, 395. H. 1146.

an. 3, 653. MED. l. 96. MBH. 1, 7585. 3, 935. 11574. 13, 6369. HARIV.

12837. R. 3, 21, 14. 18. 39, 22. -phalabhakṣiṇaḥ 4, 37, 28. SUŚR. 1, 145,

7. 2, 485, 13. RAGH. 13, 15. 49. PAÑCAT. 80, 5. BHĀG. P. 1, 9, 33. 4, 6,

14. 8, 2, 11. haragalagaralatamālasamaprabha (sattva) PAÑCAT. 63, 7.

tamālanīla BHĀG. P. 3, 13, 32. tamālabhāsurabhīṣaṇe — naktaṁcarīmukhe

KATHĀS. 25, 238. khacaddantāvalīḍhatamālaṁ mṛtyorivānanam 26, 142.

tamālālinīlaiḥ — abdanāgaiḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 24, 17.

tamāladalanīlatamaṁ tamisram GĪT. 11, 12. BURN. Intr. 178.

piṣṭatamālavarṇakanibha MṚCCH. 91, 10. Nach den Lexicographen auch

N. anderer Pflanzen: = varuṇa TRIK. H. an. MED. = kṛṣṇakhadira

ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — 2) m. n. «Bambusrinde» BHAR. zu AK. 3, 6, 4, 33.

ŚKDR. — 3) n. = pattraka = tamālapattra RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) m.

«Sectenzeichen auf der Stirn» (wohl daher, weil hierzu unter Anderm auch

der Saft der «Tamāla-Frucht» verwendet wurde) TRIK. H. an. MED. — 5)

m. «Schwert» TRIK. MED. — 6) f. ī N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) =

tāmravallī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. NIGH. PR. — b) «Phyllanthus emblica» NIGH.

PR. — c) = varuṇa RĀJAN. — Das Wort steht mit tamas in etym.

Zusammenhange. — Vgl. khatamāla.

tamāla Sp. 254, Z. 6 ist das Beispiel KATHĀS. 26, 142 zu streichen; vgl.

unter 1. lih mit ava am Ende.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

tamāla tamāla, i. e. tam + a + āla, m. The name of a dark-coloured tree,

Xanthochymus pictorius Roxb., Rām. 3, 21, 14.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

tamāla m. N. of a tree.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

tamāla tam-āla, m. N. of a dark-coloured tree: -pattra, n. leaf of the

Tamāla tree.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

tamāla pu° tama—kālan . svanāmakhyāte vṛkṣabhede amaraḥ . tamālo

madhuro balyo vṛṣyaśca śiśiro guruḥ .

kaphapittatṛṣādāhaśramaśrāntiharaśca saḥ rājani° . tatpatrākṛtitvāt 2

tilake 3 khaḍgabhede 4 varuṇavṛkṣe ca medi° . 5 kṛṣṇakhadire śabdaca° 6

vaṁśatvaci bharataḥ . 7 patrake (tejapāta) rājani° .

yattattālatamālaśālasaralavyālolavallīlatā gaṅgāstavaḥ

anantatānekatamālatālam tenopamīyeta tamālanīlam māghaḥ .

ekākinyapi yāmi satvaramataḥ srotastamālā kulam sā° da° . tamāladale

tu paryuṣitatvadoṣo nāsti yathoktaṁ ā° ta° yoginītantre vilvapatraṁ ca

māghyañca tamālāmalakīdalam . kahlāraṁ tulasī caiva padmakaṁ

munipuṣpakam . etat paryuṣitaṁ na syāt yaccānyat kalikātmakam .

svārthe ka . tamālaka tatrārthe vaṁśatvaci ca tamālavṛkṣe pu° na°

śabdaratnā° .

दर्शन — darśana Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899darśana mf («ī») n. showing.

darśana ifc. seeing, looking at (see «tulya-, deva-, sama-«.)

mf («ī») n. «knowing», see «dharma-»

mf («ī») n. exhibiting, teaching

darśana n. seeing, observing, looking, noticing, observation, perception

&c.

darśana n. ocular perception

darśana n. the eye-sight, vi, 17

darśana n. inspection, examination 1, 328 5460

darśana n. visiting

darśana n. audience, meeting (with gen. ; instr. with or without «saha» ;

in comp. )

darśana n. experiencing

darśana n. foreseeing

darśana n. contemplating

darśana n. apprehension, judgement &c.

darśana n. opinion

darśana n. intention (cf. «pāpa-«)

darśana n. view, doctrine, philosophical system (6 in number, viz.

[Pūrva-] Mīmāṁsā by by ; Nyāya by Gotama by Kaṇāda Sāṁkhya by ;

Yoga by &c.

darśana n. the eye

darśana n. the becoming visible or known, presence

darśana n. iv &c.

darśana n. appearance (before the judge)

darśana n. the being mentioned (in any authoritative text) śr. i, xxvi

darśana n. a vision, dream 1285

darśana ifc. appearance, aspect, semblance ( ii, 3; xii, 18 and 44)

mf («ī») n. colour

mf («ī») n. showing (cf. «danta-«)

mf («ī») n. a sacrifice

darśana mf («ī») n. = «dharma»

darśana mf («ī») n. («ī») f. Durgā 10238

mf («ī») n. N. of an insect

darśana mf («ī») n. cf. «a-, su-«.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

darśana a. [dṛś-lyuṭ]

(1) Seeing, looking at, (at the end of comp.); deva-, dharma-, &c.

(2) Showing, exhibiting.

(3) Demonstrating, teaching. —naṁ

(1) Looking at, seeing, observing; R. 3. 41.

(2) Knowing, understanding, perceiving, foreseeing; R. 8. 72.

(3) Sight, vision; ciṁtājaḍaṁ darśanaṁ S. 4. 5.

(4) The eye.

(5) Inspection, examination.

(6) Showing, displaying, exhibition.

(7) Becoming visible.

(8) Visiting, paying a visit, a visit; devadarśanaṁ.

(9) (Hence) Going into the presence of, audience; mārīcaste

darśanaṁ vitarati S. 7; rājadarśanaṁ me kāraya &c. (10) Colour, aspect,

appearance, semblance; Bg. 11. 10; R. 3. 57.

(11) Appearance, producing (in court); Ms. 8. 158, 160.

(12) A vision, dream.

(13) Discernment, understanding, intellect.

(14) Judgment, apprehension.

(15) Religious knowledge.

(16) A doctrine or theory prescribed in a system.

(17) A system of philosophy; as in sarvadarśanasaṁgraha.

(18) A mirror.

(19) Virtue, moral merit. (20) Opinion.

(21) Intention.

(22) Demonstration.

(23) A sacrifice.

— Comp.

—īpsu a. anxious to see.

—ujjvalā the great white jasmine.

—pathaḥ the range of sight or vision, horizon; mama

darśanapathamavatīrṇaḥ S. 3 ‘crossed my sight’.

—pratibhūḥ, —prātibhāvyaṁ a bail or surety for appearance.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

darśana (von darś) 1) adj. «sehend, blickend» P. 5, 2, 6. Am Ende eines

comp.: tulya-, sama- s. u. dd. Ww. deva- «die Götter sehend» so v. a.

«besuchend, mit ihnen verkehrend», Beiw. Nārada’s MBH. 13, 3203. 3254.

BHĀG. P. 2, 8, 1 (BURN.: «doue de la vue divine).» maithilīdarśanīnām (v.

l. -darśinīnām) — aṅganānām «hinschauend nach» RAGH. 11, 93. dharma-

«sehend, kennend» MBH. 13, 3254. bhāgavatadharma- BHĀG. P. 5, 4, 11

(BURN.: «lehrend).» Mit caus. Bed. «zeigend, angebend, lehrend»:

hetubhirmokṣadarśanaiḥ MBH. 1, 583 (vgl. mokṣadarśibhiḥ 522).

(śāstram) parokṣārthasya darśanam (v. l. darśakam) HIT. Pr. 9. darśanī

als Beiw. der Durgā HARIV. 10238 viell. «Wegweiserin, Führerin» (vgl.

darśayitar). — 2) n. proparox. a) «das Sehen, Erblicken, Wahrnehmen;

das Sichtbarwerden oder -sein, zum-Vorschein Kommen»: paśuṁ na

naṣṭamiva darśanāya viṣṇāpvaṁ dadathurviśvakāya ṚV. 1, 116, 23.

darśanena śravaṇena matyā vijñānenedaṁ sarvaṁ viditam ŚAT. BR. 14,

5, 4, 5. dūrācchravaṇāni darśanāni cāsya bhavanti «Wahrnehmungen

durch das Auge» SUŚR. 2, 158, 10. yantreṇotpīḍito doṣo nihanyādāśu

darśanam «Sehkraft» 343, 4. etacchrutvā vacastasya pratyakṣamiva

darśanam MBH. 13, 961. adya taṁ draṣṭumicchāvaḥ putraṁ

paścimadarśanam DAŚ. 2, 25. na tvekaḥ ko ‘pi

tāvatkṛtakanakapurīdarśano labhyate sma «der die goldene Stadt gesehen

hätte» KATHĀS. 24, 232. durlabhadarśanā «die man schwer zu Gesicht

bekommt» R. 1, 17, 23. darśanenaiva bhavatīnām (obj.) puraskṛto ‘smi

ŚĀK. 18, 18. mṛgasya (subj.) prathamadarśanadine HIT. 20, 18.

pravṛttāvupalabdhāyāṁ tasyāḥ saṁpātidarśanāt «durch das Erblicken,

das Zusammentreffen mit» S. RAGH. 12, 60. tapasvidarśanocite pradeśe

«zum Empfange der Einsiedler» ŚĀK. 61, 13. RĀJA-TAR. 6, 43.

samājotsava- «das Sehen, Besuchen von Gesellschaften und Festen»

YĀJÑ. 1, 84. puṇya- «das Besuchen heiliger Orte» ŚKDR. yayuḥ

svāmikumārasya darśane dakṣiṇāpatham «zu sehen» so v. a. «zu

verehren» KATHĀS. 3, 8. — duḥsvapna- ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 5, 5. R. 5, 27, 8.

MĀRK. P. 31, 22. ā nakṣatradarśanāt ĀŚV. GṚHY. 3, 7. ārkadarśanāt M. 2,

101. ārtavadarśane 4, 40. abhradarśane 104. ā pūyadarśanāt SUŚR. 1,

15, 9. vyādhi- 82, 14. sirāṇāṁ darśanaṁ lalāṭe 118, 3. aniṣṭadarśanaṁ

jātam HIT. 9, 7. bhāryādarśane «wenn die Frau sichtbar ist, in Gegenwart

der Frau» YĀJÑ. 1, 131. vikreturdarśanāt «dadurch, dass der Verkäufer

zum Vorschein kommt, offenbar wird» 2, 170.

nityādityadarśanodakasecanena dūṣiteyaṁ bhūmiḥ «durch das beständige

Sichtbarsein, Daraufscheinen der Sonne» MṚCCH. 47, 5. brahma- MBH.

13, 4104. BHĀG. P. 1, 2, 24. 3, 33. ko ‘yaṁ mama darśane sthitaḥ MBH.

4, 235. tatsarvathā dūre pariharaṇīyamasya darśanam PRAB. 46, 6.

DHŪRTAS. 70, 13. saṁprāpto darśanaṁ me R. 1, 47, 22. punarna

darśanamupaiti puruṣasya SĀṁKHYAK. 61. darśanamāyāti VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 3, 12. yadā vrajeddarśanamastameti vā 9, 36. āhūta iva me śīghraṁ

darśanaṁ yāti cetasi BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 34. dehi sundari darśanaṁ mama

«zeige dich mir» GĪT. 3, 9. tato ‘ntaḥ prabhuṇā tena skandena mama

darśanam. dattam KATHĀS. 7, 9. anyedyuratha bhūpena sa

bahirdattadarśanaḥ RĀJA-TAR. 4, 63. mārīcaste darśanaṁ vitarati

«gewährt dir seinen Anblick, ist bereit dich zu empfangen» ŚĀK. 108, 18.

dakṣiṇādhipatinā saha darśanaṁ saṁjātam «fand eine Zusammenkunft

statt» VET. 35, 11. 28, 15. tasya rājakumārasya padmāvatyā (ohne

saha!) darśanaṁ saṁjātam 10, 20. pratyahaṁ darśanaṁ karoti «sieht

ihn, besucht ihn jeden Tag» 2, 8. tataḥ saṁdhivigrahakeṇa sahānusarai

rājño darśanaṁ kāritam «wurde eine Zusammenkunft mit — veranstaltet»

20, 6. «das Erscheinen vor Gericht»: yo yasya

pratibhūstiṣṭheddarśanāyeha mānavaḥ M. 8, 158. darśanaprātibhāvya

160. -pratibhū YĀJÑ. 2, 54. 53. rājā rahasi dūṣyaṁ hi

darśanāyopamantrayet KĀM. NĪTIS. 6, 11. «das Vorkommen» (in einem

System oder Buch), «das Erwahntsein», namentl. in kanonischen Büchern:

tathā hi darśanam VEDĀNTASŪTRA 1, 25. KĀTY. ŚR. 1, 1, 8. 19. 2, 9. 15.

svādhyāyadarśanāt 26, 7, 58. LĀṬY. 6, 1, 4. 11. 14. 9, 6, 19.

śāstradarśanāt «nach der Art, wie in den Ś. davon gesprochen wird, den

heiligen Vorschriften gemäss» MBH. 14, 2700; vgl. śāstrato dṛṣṭvā R. 1,

13, 7. śāstradṛṣṭamāha MĀLAV. 9, 13. — «das Besehen, Besichtigen, in-

Augenschein-Nehmen»: balānāṁ darśanaṁ kṛtvā YĀJÑ. 1, 328. HARIV.

5460. «das Sehen» so v. a. «Erfahren, Theilhaftwerden»: apunarbhava-

BHĀG. P. 1, 8, 25. «das Sehen im Geiste, Voraussehen»: vācyadarśanāt

RAGH. 8, 71. «das Beschauen mit dem Geiste, Prüfen, Untersuchen»:

kārya- M. 8, 9. 23. «das Auffassen einer Sache, Urtheilen»: na hi

svābhiprāyeṇa me darśanam ŚĀK. 34, 8. «das Einsehen, Erkennen,

Verstehen, Einsicht, Erkenntniss, Verständniss»:

atīndriyeṣvapyupapannadarśano babhūva bhāveṣu RAGH. 3, 41.

samyagdarśanasaṁpannaḥ karmabhirna nibadhyate. darśanena vihīnastu

saṁsāraṁ pratipadyate M. 6, 74. tattvajñānārtha- BHAG. 13, 11.

yogenātmadarśanam YĀJÑ. 1, 8. ayuktibuddhirguṇadoṣadarśane R. 3, 37,

23. na hi buddhiguṇenaiva suhṛdāmarthadarśanam MĀLAV. 64.

parārthanyāyavādeṣu kāṇo ‘pyamlānadarśanaḥ VID. 65. alpa- adj. «wenig

Einsicht habend» HIḌ. 1, 45. «das Einsehen» so v. a. «Anerkennen»:

pravṛttiṣvaghadarśanam YĀJÑ. 3, 158. vedaprāmāṇya- MĀRK. P. 15, 43.

«Ansicht, Meinung»: mantripariṣado ‘pyetadeva darśanam MĀLAV. 70, 7.

vidyāścatasra evaitā iti no gurudarśanam KĀM. NĪTIS. 2, 6. «Absicht»:

saśarīro divaṁ yāyāmiti me darśanam R. 1, 58, 18. pāpadarśanā «Böses

beabsichtigend» R. GORR. 2, 9, 38; vgl. pāpadarśinī R. Schl. 2, 35, 25. 73,

5. R. GORR. 2, 6, 13. 8, 37. Nach den Lexicogrr. darśana = īkṣaṇa AK. 3,

3, 31. H. 577. = upalabdhi TRIK. 3, 3, 243. H. an. 3, 382. MED. n. 73. =

buddhi H. an. MED. — b) am Ende eines adj. comp. (f. ā) «Aussehen,

Schein»: divyakānana- N. 12, 44. vimānopama- MBH. 7, 6440. caṇḍāla- R.

1, 58, 16. 4, 2, 8. anartho ‘rthadarśanaḥ MBH. 10, 554. saumya- M. 2, 47.

anekādbhuta- BHAG. 11, 10. adbhuta- KATHĀS. 14, 76. cāru- MBH. 3,

2707. R. 5, 14, 65. cārusarvāṅga- N. 12, 18. valgu- AK. 3, 4, 33. unmatta-

N. 2, 3. ugra- SUND. 2, 24. vikṛta- HIḌ. 3, 3. rudra- R. 2, 31, 29. ghora- 1,

1, 54. HIḌ. 2, 5. bhīma- RAGH. 3, 57. Viell. hierher zu ziehen darśana =

varṇa «Farbe» TRIK. — c) «Erscheinung im Schlafe, Traumgesicht», =

svapna H. an. MED. dadarśa darśane rājā devaṁ nārāyaṇam HARIV.

1285. — d) «Anschauungsweise, Lehre, Doctrin», = śāstra TRIK. H. an.

MED. vratānāṁ dhāraṇaṁ tulyaṁ darśanaṁ na samaṁ tayoḥ

(yogasāṁkhyayoḥ) MBH. 12, 11045. fg. yenaivāsau (bhagavān) na

tuṣyeta manye taddarśanaṁ khilam BHĀG. P. 1, 5, 8. nānādarśanaiḥ 8,

14, 10. PRAB. 61, 11. sugata- 52, 14. naiyāyika- 85, 8. «sechs

philosophische Systeme» (s. u. tarka, tārkika) VET. 29,7. KULĀRṆAVAT.

in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 91,a,1. — e) = dharma H. an. MED. «virtue, moral

merite» WILS. — f) «Auge» TRIK. H. 575. H. an. MED. kupitasya

munestasya lalāṭātsvedavindavaḥ.

apatandarśanādevamadhastāttīkṣṇavarcasaḥ.. SUŚR. 2, 296, 4.

cintājaḍaṁ darśanam ŚĀK. 81. paśyāmi yogāñjanaśuddhadarśanaḥ

PRAB. 53, 9. — g) «Spiegel» (vgl. ādarśa) TRIK. H. an. MED. MEGH. 59, v.

l. für darpaṇa. — h) «Opfer» AJAYAP. im ŚKDR. — i) (vom caus.) «das

Zeigen» DHŪRTAS. 87, 3; vgl. danta-. — 3) f. ī «ein best. Insect»

(tailakīṭa) NIGH. PR. — Vgl. a-, tulya-, sama-, su-.

darśana 2) a) sādhūnāṁ darśanam so v. a. «das Zusammenkommen mit

Guten» Spr. 5220.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

darśana darśana, i. e. dṛś + ana,

I. adj.

1. Looking on, Ragh. 11, 93, v. r.

2. Knowing, MBh. 13, 3254.

3. Teaching, MBh. 1, 583.

II. n.

1. Seeing, Suśr. 2, 158, 10. āditya-, Exposure to the sun, Mṛcch. 47, 5.

2. Sight, MBh. 13, 961; Śāk. 18, 18; a vision, Rām. 5, 27, 8; a dream,

Hariv. 1285.

3. Adoration, Kathās. 3, 8.

4. Appearance, Man. 2, 101; with the vbs. i and yā, To become visible,

Bhāg. P. 1, 6, 34; with dā, To show one’s self, Gīt. 3, 9.

5. Review, Yājñ. 1, 328; inspection, Man. 8, 9.

6. Knowledge, Man. 6, 74.

7. Opinion, Kām. Nītis. 2, 6.

8. Precept, MBh. 14, 2700.

9. Doctrine, Bhāg. P. 1, 5, 8.

10. A philosophical system, Lass. 29, 7.

11. Intention, Rām. 1, 58, 18.

12. An eye, Śāk. d. 81.

13. A mirror, Megh. 59, v. r.

14. Showing, Lass. 87, 3.

15. Producing, Yājñ. 2, 170.

16. abl. darśanāt, From, Ragh. 12, 60.

III. f. nī, Epithet of Durgā, Hariv. 10238.

— Comp. a-,

I. n. 1. not seeing, Rām. 5, 53, 6. 2. neglect, Man. 10, 43. 3.

disappearance, Rām. 3, 50, 11; with gam, to disappear, Pañc. 137, 21;

with nī, to cause to disappear, Rām. 5, 22, 2.

II. adj. invisible, Arj. 8, 28. acchidra-, i. e. a-chidra-, adj., f. nā, faultless,

MBh. 6, 384. adbhuta-, adj. wonderfully handsome, Nal. 12, 6. an-ati-. n.

not seeing too often, Daśak. in Chr. 180, 5. ātmadarśana, i. e. ātman-, n.

seeing one’s self, Yājñ. 3, 157. tulya-, adj. indifferent, Bhāg. P. 1, 5, 24.

dāra-, n. interview with a woman, Cāṇ. 22, in Berl. Monatsb. dus-, adj. 1.

difficult to be seen, Bhāg. P. 3, 13, 34. 2. disgusting, Suśr. 1, 260, 1.

dūra-, adj. hardly to be seen, Bhāg. P. 1, 11, 8. pāra-, adj. seeing the

opposite bank or shore, Bhāg. P. 9, 4, 58. puṇya-, adj. f. nā, of beautiful

aspect, beautiful. bhāla-, n. red lead. su-,

I. adj. handsome.

II. m. 1. The discus of Viṣṇu. 2. a vulture. 3. Mount Meru.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

darśana f. ī (—°) = darśaka; n. seeing, looking, observing; sight, view,

vision; appearance, (also in court), occurrence; apparition, dream; visit,

meeting with (gen., instr. ±saha or —°); trying, examining,

understanding; judgment, opinion, knowledge, doctrine; showing, eye.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

darśana darśana, a. (ī) -°, seeing, looking at; knowing; showing,

teaching; n. 1. with active meaning: seeing, looking at, beholding; sight

of meeting with, visiting, attendance at (-° or g.); adoration (of g.);

eyesight; review of (g.); inspection, investigation of (-°); foreseeing (-°);

perception, understanding, insight; recognition of (-°); opinion, intention;

doctrine, philosophical system; 2. with ps. meaning: becoming or being

visible, appearance, mention (esp. in a standard work); apparition, vision;

3. with cs. meaning: showing; with concrete meaning: showing; with

concrete meaning: eye; it is often -° a. having a — appearance, looking —;

-ṁ dā, show oneself.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

darśana na° dṛśa—bhāvakaraṇādau lyuṭ . 1 netre 2 svapne 3 buddhau 4

dharme 5 darpaṇe 6 śāstre medini° 7 ijyāyām ajayapā° 8 varṇe trikāṇḍa°

9 nibhālane jaṭādha° . dṛśyate yathārthatayā jñāyate padārthonena

karaṇe lyuṭ . adhyātmāvedake 10 śāstrabhede tāni ca

nāstikavauddhajainavaiṣṇavāstikādimatabhedena nānāvidhāni . tāni ca

sarvadarśanasaṁgrahe tattanmatapradarśanāvasare darśitāni .

tatrāstikadarśanāni ṣaṭ tatra gautamena nyāyadarśanaṁ, kaṇādena

vaiśeṣikaṁ, kapilena sāṅkhyaṁ, patañjalinā yogadarśanaṁ, jaimininā

pūrvamīmāṁsāvyāsena vedāntadarśanam praṇītam . tacca

vedāntadarśanaṁ vyāsapraṇītamekamapi bahubhirvidvadbhiḥ

dvaitādvaitaviśiṣṭādvaitaśuddhādvaitaprabhedena nānāvidhaṁ yathā

buddhasyaikasyopadeśakatve’pi vineyānāṁ buddhivaicitryāt

svasvabuddhyanumāripadārthakalpanayā yogācāramā dhyamikādibhedā

upaja tāḥ . evaṁ vedāntasyāpi ṣaḍdarśanāni me’ṅgāni pādau kukṣiḥ

karau śiraḥ . teṣu bhedantu yaḥ kuryānmadaṅgacchedako hi saḥ .

etānyeva kulasyāpi ṣaḍa ṅgāni bhavanti hi . tasmānmadātmakaṁ

kaulamahaṁ kaulātmakaḥ piye! tantraśāstram . padārthabhedadarśane

phalabhedo yathā

nanda uvāca . yeṣāñca darśane! puṇyaṁ pāpañca yasya darśane .

tatsarvaṁ vada sarveśa! śretuṁ kautūhalaṁ hi me . śrī bhagavān uvāca .

subrāhmaṇānāṁ tīrthānāṁ vaiṣṇavānāñca darśane . devatāpratimādarśāt

tīrthasvāyī bhavennaraḥ . sūryasya darśane bhaktyā satīnāṁ darśane

tathā . sannyāsināṁ yatī nāñca tathaiva brahmacāriṇām . bhaktyā

gavāñca vahnīnāṁ gurūṇāñca viśeṣataḥ . gajendrāṇāñca siṁhānāṁ

śvetāśvānāṁ tathaiva ca . śūkānāñca pikānāñca khañjanānāṁ tathaitra

ca . haṁsānāñca mayūrāṇāṁ cāsānāṁ śaṅkhapakṣiṇām .

vatsaprayuktadhenūnāmaśvatthānāṁ tathaiva ca . patiputravatīmāñca

narāṇāṁ tīrthayāyinām . pradīpānāṁ suvarṇānāṁ maṇīnāñca viśeṣataḥ .

muktānāṁ hīrakāṇāñca māṇikyānāṁ mahāśaya! . tulasīśuklapuṣpāṇāṁ

darśanaṁ pāpanāśanam . phalāni śukladhānyāni ghṛtaṁ dadhi madhūni

ca . pūrṇakumbhañca lājāṁśca rājendraṁ darpaṇaṁ jalam . mālāñca

śuklapuṣpāṇāṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . gorocanāñca karpūraṁ

rajatañca sarovaram . puṣpodyānaṁ puṣpitañca dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ

labhennaraḥ . devāśritaṁ devadhaṭaṁ sugandhipavanaṁ tathā .

śaṅkhañca dundubhiṁ dṛṣṭvā sadyaḥ puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ .

śuklapakṣasya candrasya pīyūṣaṁ candanaṁ tathā . kastūrīṁ kuṅkumaṁ

dṛṣṭvā nanda . puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . patākāmakṣayavaṭa taruṁ

devotthitaṁ śubham . devālayaṁ devakhātaṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ

labhennaraḥ . śuktiṁ prabālaṁ rajataṁ sphāṭikaṁ kuśamlakabh .

gaṅgāmṛdaṁ kuśaṁ tāmraṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . purāṇa

pustakaṁ śuddhaṁ savījaṁ viṣṇuyantrakam . snigdhadūrvākṣataṁ

ratnaṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ . tapasvinaṁ siddhamantraṁ

samudraṁ kṛṣṇamārakam . yajñaṁ mahotsavaṁ dṛṣṭvā supuṇyaṁ

labhate naraḥ . gobhūtraṁ gemayaṁ dugdhaṁ godhūliṁ goṣṭha

gospadam . pakvaśasyānvitaṁ kṣetraṁ dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ labhennaraḥ .

rucirāṁ padminīṁ śyāmāṁ nyagrovaparimaṇḍalām . suveśikāṁ

suvasanāṁ divyabhūṣaṇabhūṣitām . veśyāṁ kṣemaṅkarīṁ gandhaṁ

sadūrvākṣatataṇḍulam . siddhānnaṁ paramānnañca dṛṣṭvā puṇyaṁ

labheddhruvam . kārtikyāṁ pūrṇimāyāñca ṇadhikāpratimāṁ śubhām .

saṁpūjya dṛṣṭvā natvā ca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . hiṅgulāyāṁ

tathāṣṭamyāmiṣe māsi site śubhe . śrīdurgāpra tamāṁ dṛṣṭvā karoti

janmakhaṇḍanam . śivarātrau ca kāśyāñca viśvanāthasya darśanam .

kṛtvopavāsaṁ pūjāñca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . janmāṣṭamīdine bhakto

dṛṣṭvā māṁ vindhyamādhayam . praṇamya pūjāṁ kṛtvā ca karoti

janmakhaṇḍanam upovya vrajabhūmau . ca bhāṇḍīre mālatīvane .

saṁpūjya rādhāṁ māṁ caiva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . pauṣe māsi

śuklarātrau yatra tatra sthale naraḥ . padmāyāḥ pratimāṁ dṛṣṭvā karoti

janmakhaṇḍanam . saptajanma bhavettasya putraḥ pautro dhaneśvaraḥ .

upoṣyaikādaśīṁ srātvā prabhāte dvādaśīdine . dvaṣṭvā

kāśyāmannapūrṇākaroti janmakhaṇḍanam . dattvā viṣṇupade piṇḍaṁ

viṣṇuṁ yaśca vilokayet . pitṝṇāṁ svātmanaścaiva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam

. prayāge muṇḍanaṁ kṛtvā yaśca pitṝn pratarvayet . upovya naimipāraṇye

karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . ṣṭapoṣapra puṣkare snātvā kiṁ vā

vadarikāśrame . saṁpūjya dṛṣṭvā māmeva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam .

siddhāṁ kṛtvā ca vadarīṁ bhuṅkte vadarikāśrame . dṛṣṭvā matpratiṣāṁ

nanda! karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . dolāyamānaṁ govindaṁ dṛṣṭvā

vṛndāvane ca mām . dṛṣṭvā sapūjya natvā ca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam .

bhādre dṛṣṭvā ca mañcasthaṁ māmeva madhusūdanam . saṁpūjya natvā

bhaktaśca karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . rathasthañca jagannāthaṁ yo

drakṣyati kalau naraḥ . saṁpūjya bhaktyā natvā ca karoti

janmakhaṇḍanam . uttarāyaṇasaṁkrāntyāṁ prayāge snānamācaret .

saṁpūjya dṛṣṭvā māmeva karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . kārtikyāṁ

pūrṇimāyāñca dṛṣṭvā matpratimāṁ śubhām . upoṣya pūjāṁ kṛtvā ca

karoti janmakhaṇḍanam . candrabhāgāsamīpe ca mādhyāñca māṁ namet

śanaiḥ . rādhayā saha māṁ dṛṣṭvā karoti janmanaḥ kṣayam . rāmeśvaraṁ

setubandhe āṣāḍhapūrṇimādine . upoṣya dṛṣṭvā saṁpūjya karoti

janmanaḥ kṣayam . dīnanāthaṁ dinakaraṁ lolārke cottarāyaṇe . upoṣya

dṛṣṭvā maṁpūjya karoti janmanaḥ kṣayam . ṛṣikoṣṭhe suvasane kalaviṅke

sugahvare . visyandake rājakoṣṭhe nandake puṣpabhadrake .

pārvatīpratimāṁ dṛṣṭvā kārtikeyaṁ gaṇeśvaram . nandinaṁ śaṅkaraṁ

dṛṣṭvā karoti janmanaḥ kṣayam . trikūṭe maṇibhadre ca

paścimodadhisannidhau . samupoṣya dadhi prāśya māṁ dṛṣṭvā

muktimāpnuyāt brahma° ve° janma° kha° . śakunabhedadarśane

phalabhedaḥ śakunaśabde dṛśyam .

दुर् — dur Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dur f. (only «duras» acc. nom., and «duras». pl.) = «dvār», a door (cf. 2.

«dura»).

dur in comp. for «dus» (p.488), denoting «bad» or «difficult» &c.;

«duriṣṭha», (superl.) very bad or difficult or wicked; n. great crime or

wickedness

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dur ind. (A prefix substituted for dus before words beginning with vowels

or soft consonants in the sense of ‘bad’, ‘hard or difficult to do a certain

thing’; for compounds with dus as first member see dus s. v.).

— Comp.

—akṣa a. 1. weak-eyed. —2. evil-eyed. (

—kṣaḥ) 1. a loaded or false die. —2. dishonest gambling.

—atikrama a. 1. difficult to be overcome or conquered,

unconquerable; sbabhāvo duratikramaḥ ‘nature cannot be changed’;

svajātirduratikramā Pt. 1. —2. insurmountable. —3. inevitable. (

—maḥ) an epithet of Viṣṇu.

—atyaya a. 1. difficult to be overcome; R. 11. 88. —2. hard to be

attained or fathomed.

—adṛṣṭaṁ illluck, misfortune.

—adhiga, —adhigama a. 1. hard to reach or attain, unattainable; Pt.

1. 330. —2. insurmountable. —3. hard to be studied or understood; Ki. 5.

18.

—adhiṣṭhita a. badly performed, managed, or executed. (

—taṁ) improper stay at a place.

—adhīta a. badly learnt or read.

—adhyaya a. 1. difficult of attainment. —2. hard to be studied.

—adhyavasāyaḥ a foolish undertaking.

—adhvaḥ a bad road.

—aṁta a. 1. whose end is difficult to be reached, endless, infinite;

saṁkarṣaṇāya sūkṣmāya duraṁtāyāṁtakāya ca Bhāg. —2. ending ill or in

misery, unhappy; aho duraṁtā balavadvirodhitā Ki. 1. 23; nṛtyati

yuvatijanena samaṁ sakhi virahijanasya duraṁte (vasaṁte) Gīt. 1. —3.

hard to be understood or known. —4. insurmountable.

—aṁtaka a. = duraṁta q. v. (

—kaḥ) an epithet of Śiva.

—anvaya a. 1. difficult to be passed along. —2. hard to be carried

out or followed. —3. difficult to be attained or understood. (

—yaḥ) 1. a wrong conclusion, one wrongly inferred from given

premisses. —2. (in gram.) a false agreement.

—abhigraha a. difficult to be caught.

—abhimānin a. vain-glorious, disagreeably proud.

—avagama a. incomprehensible.

—avagraha a. 1. difficult to be restrained or subjugated. —2.

disagreeable.

—avabodha a. unintelligible.

—avastha a. ill off, badly or poorly circumstanced.

—avasthā a wretched or miserable state.

—vāpa a. difficult to be gained or fulfilled; S. 1.

—avekṣitaṁ an improper look.

—ākṛti a. ugly, misshaped.

—ākraṁda a. crying bitterly or miserably; Pt. 4. 29.

—ākrama a. 1. invincible, unconquerable. —2. difficult to be passed,

—ākramaṇaṁ 1. unfair attack. —2. difficult approach.

—āgamaḥ improper or illegal acquisition.

—āgrahaḥ foolish obstinacy, headstrongness, pertinacity.

—ācara a. 1. hard to be performed. —2. incurable (as a disease).

—ācāra a. 1. ill-conducted, badly behaved. —2. following bad

practices, wicked, depraved; Bg. 9. 30. (

—raḥ) bad practice, ill-conduct, wickedness.

—ātmatā vileness, baseness, wickedness.

—ātman a. evil-natured, low, wicked, vile, base, mean; Pt. 1. 39.

(—m.) a rascal, villain, scoundrel.

—ādhara a. difficult to be withstood or overpowered, riresistible,

—ādharṣa a. 1. hard to be approached or assailed, unassailable. —

2. not to be attacked with impunity.

(3) haughty. (—rṣaḥ) white mustard. —ādhāraḥ an epithet of Śiva. —

ādhī a Ved. malignant, thinking ill of —ānama a. difficult to bend or draw;

R. 11. 38. —āpa a. 1. difficult to be obtained; śriyā durāpaḥ kathamīpsito

bhavet S. 3. 14; R. 1. 72; 6. 62. —2. difficult to be approached; Pt. 1. 67.

—3. hard to be overcome. —ābādha a. hard to be molested. (—dhaḥ) N. of

Śiva. —ārādhya a. difficult to be propitiated, hard to be won over or

conciliated; Pt. 1. 38. —āruha a. difficult to be mounted. (—haḥ) 1. the

Bilva tree. —2. the cocoa-nut tree. —3. the date tree. —āroha a. difficult of

ascent. (—haḥ) 1. the cocoa-nut tree. —2. the palm tree. —3. the date

tree. —ālāpaḥ 1. a curse, imprecation. —2. foul or abusive language. —

āloka a. 1. difficult to be seen or perceived. —2. painfully bright, dazzling;

durālokaḥ sa samare nidāghāṁvararatnavat K. P. 10. (—kaḥ) dazzling

splendour. —āvāra a 1. difficult to be covered. —2. difficult to be

restrained, shut in, kept back or stopped. —āśaya a. 1. evil-minded,

wicked, malicious. —2. having a bad place of rest. —āśā 1. a bad or

wicked desire. —2. hoping against hope. —āsada a. 1. difficult to be

approached or overtaken, unassailable, unconquerable; R. 3. 66, 8. 4; Mv.

2. 5, 4. 15. —2. difficult to be found or met with. —3. unequalled,

unparalleled. —4. hard to be borne, insupportable. (—daḥ) an epithet of

Śiva. —ita a. 1. difficult.

(2) sinful. (—taṁ) 1. a bad course, evil, sin; daridrāṇāṁ dainyaṁ

duritamatha durvāsanahṛdāṁ drutaṁ dūrīkurvana G. L. 2; R. 8. 2; Amaru.

2; Mv. 3. 43. —2. a difficulty, danger. —3. a calamity, evil; U. 4. 3. —itiḥ f.

Ved. 1. a bad course. —2. difficulty. —iṣṭaṁ 1. a curse, imprecation. —2. a

spell or sacrificial rite performed to injure another person. —īśaḥ a bad

lord or master. —īṣaṇā, —eṣaṇā 1. a curse, an imprecation. —2. an evil

eye. —ukta a. harshly uttered; Pt. 1. 89. —uktaṁ, —uktiḥ f. offensive

speech, reproach, abuse, censure. —uccheda a. difficult to be destroyed.

—uttara a. unanswerable. —udāhara a. difficult to be pronounced or

composed; anujjhitārthasaṁbaṁdhaḥ prabaṁdho durudāharaḥ Śi. 2. 73.

—udvaha a. burdensome, unbearable. —ūha a. abstruse. —eva a. Ved. 1.

having evil ways. —2. irresistible, unassailable. (—vaḥ) a wicked person.

—oṣas a. Ved. slow, lazy. —ga a. 1. difficult of access, inaccessible,

impervious, impassable. —2. unattainable. —3. incomprehensible. (—gaḥ,

—gaṁ) 1. a difficult or narrow passage through a wood or over a stream,

mountain &c., a defile, narrow pass. —2. a citadel, fortress, castle. —3.

rough ground. —4. difficulty, adversity, calamity, distress, danger;

nistārayati durgācca Ms. 3. 98, 11. 43; Bg. 18. 58. (—gaḥ) 1. bdellium. —

2. the Supreme Being. —3. N. of an Asura slain by Durgā (thus receiving

her name from him). -adhyakṣaḥ, -patiḥ, -pālaḥ the commandant or

governor of a castle. -karman n. fortification. -kāraka a. making difficult.

(—kaḥ) the birch tree. -ghnī N. of Durgā. -taraṇī an epithet of Sāvitrī. —

mārgaḥ a defile, gorge. -laṁghanaṁ surmounting difficulties. (—naḥ) a

camel. -saṁcaraḥ 1. a difficult passage as to a fort &c., a bridge &c. over

a defile. -vyasanaṁ a defect or weak point in a fortress. (—rgā) an

epithet of Pārvatī, wife of Śiva. —gata a. 1. unfortunate, in bad

circumstances; Bk, 18. 10. —2. indigent, poor. —3. distressed, in trouble.

—gatatā illluck, poverty, misery; Pt. 1. 265. —gatiḥ f. 1. misfortune,

poverty, want, trouble, indigence; Bg. 6. 40. —2. a difficult situation or

path. —3. hell. —gaṁdha a. ill-smelling. (—dhaḥ) 1. bad odour, stink. —2.

any ill-smelling substance. —3. an onion. —4. the mango tree. (—dhaṁ)

sochal salt. —gaṁdhi, —gaṁdhin a. ill-smelling. —gama a. 1. impassable,

inaccessible, impervious; kāminīkāyakāṁtāre kucaparvatadurgame Bh. 1.

86; Śi. 12. 49. —2. unattainable, difficult of attainment. —3. hard to be

understood. —gāḍha, —gādha, —gāhya a. difficult to be fathomed or

investigated, unfathomable. —graha a. 1. difficult to be gained or

accomplished. —2. difficult to be conquered or subjugated; R. 17. 52. —3.

hard to be understood. (—haḥ) a cramp, spasm. —ghaṭa a. 1. difficult. —2.

impossible. —ghaṇa a. closely packed together, very compact. —ghoṣaḥ 1.

a harsh cry. —2. a bear. —jana a. 1. wicked, bad, vile. —2. slanderous,

malicious, mischievous; U. 1. 6. (—naḥ) a bad or wicked person, a

malicious or mischievous man, villain; durjanaḥ priyavādī ca

naitadviśvāsakāraṇaṁ Chāṇ. 24, 25; śāmyetpratyapakāreṇa nopakāreṇa

durjanaḥ Ku. 2. 40. (durjanāyate Den. A. to become wicked; Pt. 1. 5.). —

jaya a. invincible. (—yaḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. —jara a. 1. ever youthful. —2. hard

(as food), indigestible. —3. difficult to be enjoyed. —jāta a. 1. unhappy,

wretched. —2. badtempered, bad, wicked. —3. false, not genuine. (—taṁ)

1. a misfortune, calamity, difficulty; tvaṁ tāvaddurjāte

metyaṁtasāhāyyakāriṇī bhava M. 3; durjātabaṁdhuḥ R. 13. 72 ‘a friend in

need or adversity.’ —2. impropriety. —jāti a. 1. bad-natured, vile, wicked;

Amaru. 96. —2. outcast. (—tiḥ f.) misfortune, ill-condition. —jñāna, —jñeya

a. difficult to be known, incomprebensible. (—yaḥ) N. of Śiva. —ṇayaḥ, —

nayaḥ, —nītiḥ 1. bad conduct. —2. impropriety. —3. injustice. —ṇāman, —

nāman a. having a bad name. —ṇīta a. 1. ill-behaved. —2. impolitic. —3.

forward. (—taṁ) misconduct. —dama, —damana, —damya a. difficult to be

subdued, untamable, indomitable. —darśa a. 1. difficult to be seen. —2.

dazzling; Bg. 11. 52. —darśana a. ugly, ill-looking; Māl. 2. 8. —daśā a

misfortune, calamity. —dāṁta a. 1. hard to be tamed or subdued,

untamable; Śi. 12. 22. —2. intractable, proud, insolent; durdāṁtānāṁ

damanavidhayaḥ kṣatriyeṣvāyataṁte Mv. 3. 34. (—taḥ) 1. a calf. —2. a

strife, quarrel. —3. N. of Śiva. —dina a. cloudy, rainy. (—naṁ) 1. a bad day

in general. —2. a rainy or cloudy day, stormy or rainy weather;

unnamatyakāladurdinaṁ Mk. 5; Ku. 6. 43; Mv. 4. 57. —3. a shower (of

any. thing); R. 4. 41, 82, 5. 47; U. 5. 5. —4. thick darkness. (durdināyate

Den. A to become cloudy.) —divasaḥ a dark or rainy day; Pt. 1. 173. —

durūṭaḥ an unbeliever. —dṛśa a. disagreeable to the sight, disgusting. —

dṛṣṭa a. ill-judged or seen, wrongly decided. —daivaṁ ill-luck, misfortune.

—dyūta an unfair game. —drumaḥ onion. —dhara a. 1. irresistible, difficult

to be stopped. —2. difficult to be borne or suffered; durdhareṇa

madanena sādyate Ghaṭ. 11; Ms. 7. 28. —3. difficult to be accomplished.

(—raḥ) quicksilver. —dharṣa a. 1. inviolable, unassailable. —2.

inaccessible; H. Pr. 5. —3. fearful, dreadful. —4. haughty. —dhī a. stupid,

silly. —nāmakaḥ piles. —nāman m. f. a cockle. (—n.) piles. —nigraha a.

irrepressible, unruly; mano durnigrahaṁ calaṁ Bg. 6. 35. —nimita a.

carelessly put or placed on the ground; pade pade durnimite galaṁtī R. 7.

10. —nimittaṁ 1. a badomen; R. 14. 50. —2. a bad pretext. —nivāra, —

nivārya a. difficult to be checked or warded off, irresistible, invincible. —

nītaṁ misconduct, bad policy, demerit, misbehaviour; Pt. 2. 20; H. 1. 39.

—2. ill-luck. —nītiḥ f. mal-administration; Bv. 4. 36. —bala a. 1. weak,

feeble. —2. enfeebled, spiritless; U. 1. 24. —3. thin, lean, emaciated; U. 3.

—4. small, scanty, little; R. 5. 12. —bāla a. baldheaded. —2. void of

prepuce. —3. having crooked hair. —buddhi a. 1. silly, foolish, stupid. —2.

perverse, evilminded, wicked; Bg. 1. 23. —bodha a. unintelligible,

unfathomable, inscrutable; nisargadurbodhamabodhaviklavāḥ kva

bhūpatīnāṁ caritaṁ kva jaṁtavaḥ Ki. 1. 6. —bhaga a. 1. unfortunate,

unlucky; Pt. 1. 415. —2. not possessed of good features, ill-looking. —

bhagā 1. a wife disliked by her husband. —2. an ill-tempered woman, a

shrew. —bhara a. insupportable, burdensome. —bhāgya a. unfortunate,

unlucky. (—gyaṁ) ill-luck. —bhāvanā 1. an evil thought. —2. a bad

tendency. —bhikṣaṁ 1. scarcity of provisions, dearth, famine; Y. 2. 147;

Ms. 8. 22; H. 1. 73; Pt. 2. —2. want in general. —bhida, —bheda, —bhedya

a. firm. —bhṛtyaḥ a bad servant. —bhrātṛ m. a bad brother. —mati a. 1.

silly, stupid, foolish, ignorant. —2. wicked, evilminded; Ms. 11. 30. —mada

a. drunken, ferocious, maddened, infatuated. —manas a. troubled in mind,

discouraged, disspirited, sad, melancholy. [durmanāyate Den. A. to be

troubled in mind, be sad, meditate sorrowfully, to be disconsolate,

become vexed or fretted; Māl. 3]. —manuṣyaḥ a bad or wicked man. —

maṁtraḥ, —maṁtritaṁ, —maṁtraṇā evil advice, bad counsel; Pt. 1. 169.

—maraṁ a hard or difficult death. —maraṇaṁ violent or unnatural death.

—marṣa a. 1. unbearable. —2. obstinate, hostile. —marṣaṇaḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

—maryāda a. immodest, wicked. —mallikā, —mallī a minor drama,

comedy, farce; S. D. 553. —mitraḥ 1. a bad friend. —2. an enemy. —

mukha a. 1. having a bad face, hideous, ugly; Bh. 1. 90. —2. foul-

mouthed, abusive, scurrilous; Bh. 2. 69. (—khaḥ) 1. a horse. —2. N. of

Śiva. —mūlya a. highly priced, dear. —medhas a. silly, foolish, dull-headed,

dull; Pt. 1. (—m.) a dunce, dull-headed man, blockhead; graṁthānadhītya

vyākartumiti durmedhaso’pyalaṁ Śi. 2. 26. —yaśas n. ill-repute,

dishonour. —yogaḥ 1. a bad or clumsy contrivance. —2. a bad

combination. —yodha, —yodhana a. invincible, unconquerable. (—naḥ) the

eldest of the 101 sons of Dhṛtarāṣṭra and Gāndhārī [From his early years

he conceived a deep hatred for his cousins the Pāṇḍavas, but particularly

Bhīma, and made every effort he could to compass their destruction.

When his father proposed to make Yudhiṣṭhira heirapparent, Duryodhana

did not like the idea, as his father was the reigning sovereign, and

prevailed upon his blind father to send the Pāṇḍavas away into exile.

Vāraṇavata was fixed upon as their abode, and under pretext of

constructing a palatial building for their residence, Duryodhana caused a

palace to be built mostly of lac, resin and other combustible materials,

thereby hoping to see them alldestroyed when they should enter it. But

the Pāṇḍavas were forewarned and they safely escaped. They then lived

at Indraprastha, and Yudhiṣṭhira performed the Rājasūya sacrifice with

great pomp and splendour. This event further excited the anger and

jealousy of Duryodhana who was already vexed to find that his plot for

burning them up had signally failed, and he induced his father to invite

the Pāṇḍavas to Hastināpura to play with dice (of which Yudhiṣṭhira was

particularly fond). In that gambling-match, Duryodhana, who was ably

assisted by his maternal uncle Śakuni, won from Yudhiṣṭhira everything

that he staked, till the infatuated gambler staked himself, his brothers,

and Draupadī herself, all of whom shared the same fate. Yudhiṣṭhira, as a

condition of the wager, was forced to go to the forest with his wife and

brothers, and to remain there for twelve years and to pass one additional

year incognito. But even this period, long as it was, expired, and after

their return from exile both the Pāṇḍavas and Kauravas made great

preparations for the inevitable struggle and the great Bhāratī war

commenced. It lasted for eighteen days during which all the Kauravas,

with most of their allies, were slain. It was on the last day of the war

that Bhīma fought a duel with Duryodhana and smashed his thigh with his

club.]. —yoni a. of a low birth. —lakṣya a. difficult to be seen or perceived,

hardly visible. —labha a. 1. difficult to be attained, or accomplished; R. 1.

67, 17. 70; Ku. 4. 40, 5. 46, 61. —2. difficult to be found or met with,

scarce, rare; śuddhāṁtadurlabhaṁ S. 1. 16. —3. best, excellent, eminent.

—4. dear, beloved. —5. costly. —lalita a. 1. spoilt by fondling, fondled too

much, hard to please; hā madaṁkadurlalita Ve. 4; V. 2. 8; Māl. 9. —2.

(hence) wayward, naughty, illbred, unruly; spṛhayāmi khalu

durlalitāyāsmai S. 7 (—taṁ) waywardness, rudeness. —lekhyaṁ a forged

document. —vaca a. 1. difficult to be described, indescribable. —2. not to

be talked about. —3. speaking improperly, abusing. (—caṁ) abuse,

censure, foul language. —vacas n. abuse, censure. —varṇa a. bad-

coloured. (—rṇaṁ) 1. silver. —2. a kind of leprosy. —vasa a. difficult to be

resided in. —vasatiḥ f. painful residence; R. 8. 94. —vaha a. heavy,

difficult to be borne; U. 2. 10; Ku. 1. 11. —vāc a. speaking ill. (—f.) 1. evil

words, abuse. —2. inelegant language or speech. —vācya a. 1. difficult to

be spoken or uttered. —2. abusive, scurrilous. —3. harsh, cruel (as

words). (—cyaṁ) 1. censure, abuse. —2. scandal, ill-repute. —vādaḥ

slander, defamation, calumny. —vāra, —vāraṇa a. irresistible, unbearable;

R. 14. 87; Ku. 2. 21. —vāsanā 1. evil propensity, wicked desire; Bv. 1. 86.

—2. a chimera. —vāsas a. 1. ill-dressed. —2. naked. (—m.) N. of a very

irascible saint or Ṛṣi, son of Atri and Anasūyā. (He was very hard to

please, and he cursed many a male and female to suffer misery and

degradation. His anger, like that of Jamadagni, has become almost

proverbial). —vāhitaṁ a heavy burden. —vigāha, —vigāhya a. difficult to be

penetrated or fathomed, unfathomable. —viciṁtya inconceivable,

inscrutable —vidagdha 1. unskilled, raw, foolish, stupid, silly. —2. wholly

ignorant. —3. foolishly puffed up, elated, vainly proud;

vṛthāśastragrahaṇadurvidagdha Ve. 3; jñānalavadurvidagdhaṁ brahmāpi

naraṁ na raṁjayati Bh. 2. 3. —vidya a. uneducated. —vidha a. 1. mean,

base, low. —2. wicked, vile. —3. poor, indigent; vidadhāte

rucigarvadurvidhaṁ N. 2. 23. —4. stupid, foolish, silly. —vinayaḥ

misconduct, imprudence. —vinīta a. 1.

(a) badly educated, ill-mannered, ill-behaved, wicked; śāsitari

durvinītānāṁ S. 1. 25.

(b) rude, naughty, mischievous. —2. stubborn, obstinate. (—taḥ) 1.

a restive or untrained horse. —2. a wayward person, reprobate. —vipāka

a. producing bad fruit; U. 1. 46. (—kaḥ) 1. bad result or consequence; U.

1. 40; Mv. 6. 7. —2. evil consequences of acts done either in this or in a

former birth. —vibhāvya a. inconceivable. —vilasitaṁ a wayward act,

rudeness, naughtiness. —vilāsaḥ a bad or evil turn of fate; U. 1. —viṣa a.

illnatured, malignant. (—ṣaḥ) N. of Śiva. —viṣaha a. unbearable,

intolerable, irresistible. (—haḥ) N. of Śiva —vṛtta a. 1. vile, wicked, ill-

behaved. —2. roguish. (—ttaṁ) misconduct, illbehaviour. —vṛttiḥ f. 1.

misconduct. —2. misery, want, distress. —3. fraud —vṛṣṭiḥ f. insufficient

rain, drought. —veda a. difficult to be known or ascertained. —vyasanaṁ a

fond pursuit or resolve; Mu. 3. —vyavahāraḥ a wrong judgment in law. —

vrata a. not conforming to rules, disobedient. —hutaṁ a badly offered

sacrifice. —hṛd a. wicked-hearted, ill-disposed, inimical. (—m.) an enemy.

—hṛdaya a. evil-minded, evil-intentioned, wicked. —hṛṣīka a. having

defective organs of sense.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dur (= dvār) f. nur im acc. pl. duras (ein Mal duras) und an einer Stelle im

nom. pl. erhaiten; «Thür»: duro ghṛtānyakṣaran ṚV. 1, 188, 5. vi duro

mānuṣīrdeva āvaḥ 5, 45, 1. vrajasya 6, 62, 11. adreḥ 7, 79, 4. rāyaḥ 1, 68,

10 (5). avannavantārupa no duraścara 7, 46, 2. 1, 113, 4. 121, 4. 3, 21,

21. duro na vājaṁ śrutyā apā vṛdhi 2, 2, 7. Am Ende eines comp. dura in

śatadura n. «ein mit hundert Thüren versehener» oder «verschlossener

Ort»: atraye śatadureṣu gātuvid ṚV. 1, 51, 3. anarvā yacchatadurasya

vedo ghnaṁ chiśnadevāṁ abhi varpasā bhūt 10, 99, 3.

dur euphonische Veränderung von 2. duṣ am Anfange von compp. vor

Vocalen und tönenden Consonanten. Wenn durasy hierher gehören sollte,

dann wäre diese Form aus einem irregeleiteten Sprachgefühl entstanden.

dur auch ṚV. 4, 4, 6.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dur [1] f. door (only duras & duras).

dur [2] (°—) = dus.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dur dur, f. door.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

dur(s) avya° du—ruk suk vā . 1 duṣṭe 2 nindāyāṁ 3 niṣedhe 4 duḥkhe ca

puruṣottamaḥ 5 īṣadarthe 6 kṛcchrārthe 7 kṛśe 8 asampattau 9 saṅkaṭe

ca gaṇara° durjīvanaḥ durbalaḥ durdinam suduroradhikaraṇe pā°

duṣkṛtam . kriyāyoge’syopasargatā upasargaśabde 1335 pṛ° dṛśyam .

dur strī dṝ—kvip . dvāre durodyūtānyakṣaram ṛ° 1 . 188 . 5 yā duraḥ

yajñagṛhadvāraḥ bhā° duro mānuṣī deva ā ca ṛ05 . 45 . 1

mānuṣīrmanuṣya sambandhinīrduraḥ dvāraḥ bhā0

धवल — dhavala Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dhavala mf («ā») n. (fr. 2. «dhāv»? cf. white, dazzling white &c.

mf («ā») n. handsome, beautiful

dhavala m. white (the colour)

dhavala m. a kind of dove

dhavala m. an old or excellent bull

dhavala m. a kind of camphor

dhavala m. Anogeissus Latifolia

dhavala m. (in music) N. of a Rāga

dhavala m. N. of a man

dhavala m. of one of the elephants of the quarters

dhavala m. of a dog

dhavala m. («ā» and «ī») f. a white cow

dhavala mf («ā») n. («ī») f. white hair (as a kind of disease)

dhavala m. N. of a river

dhavala n. white pepper

dhavala n. a kind of metre (= «-lāṅka»)

dhavala n. N. of a town

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dhavala a. [dhavaṁ kaṁpaṁ lāti lā-ka; Tv.]

(1) White; dhavalātapatra, dhavalagṛhaṁ, dhavalavastraṁ &c.

(2) Handsome.

(3) Clear, pure. —laḥ

(1) The white colour.

(2) An excellent bull.

(3) China camphor (cīnakarpūra).

(4) N. of a tree (dhava). —laṁ Whitepepper. —lā A woman with a

white complexion. —lī A white cow; (dhavalā also).

— Comp.

—utpalaṁ the white water-lily (said to open at moonrise).

—giriḥ N. of the highest peak of the Himālaya mountain.

—gṛhaṁ a house whitened with chunam, a palace.

—pakṣaḥ 1. a goose. —2. the bright half of a lunar month.

—mṛttikā chalk.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dhavala UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 108. 1) adj. f. ā a) «glänzend weiss» AK.

1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 14, 85. TRIK. 3, 3, 396. H. 1393. an. 3, 656. MED. l. 99.

sudhāśaṅkha- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 27,c,15. vasudhā kandaladhavalā

BHARTṚ. 1, 43. kapāla 3, 61. ātapatra PAÑCAT. I, 48. mṛṇālanāladhavalā

52, 8. BHĀG. P. 1, 17, 2. 11, 2. 5, 25, 5. gokṣīradhārā- H. 57.

jarādhavalakarṇa KATHĀS. 25, 15. harmyāgre — jyotsnayā dhavale 21, 6.

PRAB. 73, 7. apāṅga RĀJA-TAR. 1, 208. 6, 302. sarṣapa AK. 2, 9, 18. —

gṛha, -veśman «ein weiss angestrichenes Haus, eine fürstliche Wohnung,

Palast» (vgl. saudha) PAÑCAT. 128, 18. 24. VET. 19, 13. CAURAP. 18.

Statt dhavalāgṛhe VET. 17, 3 ist wohl dhavale gṛhe zu lesen. dhavalīkṛta

CAUBAP. 23. Hängt wohl mit dhāv «abreiben, reinigen» zusammen. — b)

«hübsch», = sundara TRIK. H. an. MED. = sindura VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. a.

a. O. — 2) m. a) «die weisse Farbe» AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. H. 1393. — b) «ein

alter Stier», = mahokṣa H. an. = vṛṣaśreṣṭha MED. = śaṇṭha TRIK. — c)

«eine Art Kampfer» (cīnakarpūra). — d) = dhava «Grislea tomentosa

Roxb.» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e) N. pr. eines Diggaja R. 5, 3, 13. — f) N.

eines Rāga, nach BHARATA des 8ten Sohnes des Hindolarāga, ŚKDR.

nach dem SAṁGĪTAŚĀSTRA. — 3) f. «eine weisse Kuh», dhavalā AK. 2, 9,

68. TRIK. H. 1266, Sch. MED. dhavalī H. an. — 4) f. ī a) «eine best.

Krankheit» oder viell. einfach «das Weisswerden der Haare»: —

vyādhivārddhakyahantā Verz. d. B. H. No. 1001. — b) N. pr. eines Flusses

LIA. I, 49. 56, N. 1. — 5) n. a) «weisser Pfeffer» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) =

dhavalāṅka «ein best. Metrum (4 Mal 18 Kürzen + 1 Länge») COLEBR.

Misc. Ess. II, 163 (XIV, 12). — Vgl. udayadhavala.

dhavala 1) a) Z. 9 VET. 17, 3 die neuere Ausg. (13, 17) richtig dhavale

gṛhe. — 2) g) N. pr. eines Mannes KATHĀS. 80, 7. WILSON, Sel. Works 2,

201 wohl fehlerhaft für devala. — 5) c) N. pr. einer Stadt KATHĀS. 56,

141.

dhavala 1) -gṛha nach BÜHLER zu PAÑCAT. ed. Bomb. II & III, 27, 13 the

upper story of a house, called so because it is painted white.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

dhavala dhav + ala (cf. 2. dhāv), adj., f. lā.

1. Dazzling white, Kathās. 25, 15.

— Comp. ati-, adj. very white, Daśak. in Chr. 199, 6.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dhavala (f. ā & ī) white; abstr. -tā f., -tva n.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dhavala dhava-la, a. dazzling white; m. N.; n. N. of a city: -giri, m.

Dolaghir, N. of a mountain (White Mountain);

-gṛha, n. upper storey (so called because painted white);

-tā, f., -tva, n. whiteness;

-pakṣa, m. (white-winged) goose: -vihaṁgama, m. swan;

-mu-kha, m. N..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

dhavala pu° dhāva—vṛṣā° kala bā° hrasvaḥ dhavaṁ kampaṁ lāti lāka vā .

dhavalaḥ 1 sindūre 2 site . 3 mahokṣe cātha dhavalī 4 saurabhyāṁ

samudāhṛtā viśvaḥ . saurabhyāmeva gaurā° ṅīṣ . śvetabarṇayukte tri°

amaraḥ atrārthe striyāṁ ṭāp . nītā yena niśā śaśāṅkadhavalā ujjalada° . 5

nirmale tri° trikā° . kriyate dhavalaḥ khalūccakairdhavalaireva

sitetarairadhaḥ māghaḥ . 6 cavavṛkṣe 7 cīnakarpūre strī . 8 śvetamarice

na° rājani° . 9 rāgabhede sa ca bharatamate hindolarāgasya aṣṭamaḥ

putraḥ saṅgītaśāstraṇ . 10 svagabhede dhavalaḥ pāṇḍuruddiṣṭo

raktapittaharo himaḥ . rase pāke ca madhuraḥ saṁgrāhī vātaśāntikṛt

bhāvapra° . 11 chandobhede tallakṣaṇaṁ yathā dvijavara!

gaṇayugasanagaṇana gaṇayugalakaṁ vimalabalayamapi ca kalaya

sakalajanasukham . phaṇipativaramaṇitamamalasiṁha hitaṁ

vimalakavisuhṛdiva lalitamiti bhuvi viditam .

धवलिमन् — dhavaliman Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dhavaliman m. white colour, whiteness

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dhavaliman m.

(1) Whiteness, white colour.

(2) Paleness; iyaṁ bhūtirnāṁge priyavirahajanmā dhavalimā Subhāṣ.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dhavaliman (wie eben) m. «die weisse Farbe» ŚIŚ. 4, 65.

dhavaliman KUVALAJ. 35,b.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

dhavaliman dhavaliman, i. e. dhavala + iman, m. White (the colour), Śiś.

4, 65.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dhavaliman m. whiteness, white colour.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dhavaliman dhaval-i-man, m. whiteness; brilliance; pureness.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

dhavaliman pu° dhavalasya bhāvaḥ imanic . śvetatve adhigavadhavali

śūlapāṇerabhikhyām māghaḥ .

धावल्य — dhāvalya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dhāvalya n. (fr. «dhavala») whiteness

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dhāvalya (von dhavala) n. «die weisse Farbe» Schol. zu ŚIŚ. 4, 65. keśa-

KULL. zu M. 6, 2.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dhāvalya n. the white colour.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dhāvalya dhāval-ya, n. whiteness.

धूसर — dhūsara Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dhūsara mf («ā») n. ( «dhvaṁs», or «dhvas»; cf. «dhvasira») dust-

coloured, grey &c. («-tva», n.

dhūsara m. grey (the colour)

dhūsara m. an ass

dhūsara m. an oilman

dhūsara m. a pigeon

dhūsara m. a partic. plant (sweet vetch

dhūsara mf («ā») n. («ā») f. a kind of shrub

dhūsara mf («ā») n. («ī») f. N. of a Kiṁ-narī.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dhūsara a. [dhū-sara kicca na ṣatvam Tv.] Of a dusty, greyish, or

dusky-white colour, grey; śaśī divasadhūsaraḥ Bh. 2. 56; Ku. 4. 4, 46; R.

5. 42; 16. 17; Śi. 17. 41. —raḥ

(1) The grey colour.

(2) A donkey.

(3) A camel.

(4) A pigeon.

(5) An oilman.

(6) Anything of a grey colour.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dhūsara (von dhvas; vgl. dhvasira) UṆĀDIS. 3, 73. P. 8, 3, 59, Vārtt. 1. 1)

adj. f. ā («bestaubt) staubfarbig, grau» AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 1393. an. 3,

566. MED. r. 171. SUŚR. 2, 335, 20. śaśī divasadhūsaraḥ BHARTṚ. 2, 46.

rajo- RAGH. 5, 42. 16, 17. KUMĀRAS. 4, 4. 46. 5, 55. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 53,

13. 44. Ind. St. 2, 258. -kṣāmavapus KATHĀS. 2, 51. dhūsarāṅga 14, 39.

21, 40. 73. RĀJA-TAR. 2, 88. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 15, 9, 6. 19, 3, 2.

fälschlich dhūṣara HIT. 81, 15. atidhūsara H. 1327. pari- RAGH. 11, 60.

dūrādhva- KATHĀS. 2, 33. nom. abstr. dhūṣaratva n. DHŪRTAS. 72, 11.

AUFRECHT betont das Wort auf der letzten Silbe; das Suffix heisst aber

saran und ist in diesem Falle kit, so dass der Ton auf die erste Silbe zu

setzen wäre, wenn nicht eben aus dem Vorangehendem auch noch cit zu

ergänzen ist. Im Vārtt. zu P. 8,3, 59 wird das Suffix sarak genannt (also

mit nicht mehr wirkendem na), wonach das Wort zu paroxytoniren wäre.

— 2) m. a) «Esel» H. an. MED. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) «Kameel.» — c)

«Taube» RĀJAN. — d) «Oelmüller» H. 917. — 3) f. ā N. einer kleinen

Staude, = pāṇḍuraphalī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. VĀRAH. BṚH. S. 76, 6. — 4) f. ī

N. pr. einer Kiṁnarī MED. — Vgl. uṣṭradhūsarapucchikā, welches wohl

richtiger zerlegt worden wäre in uṣṭra — dhū- + puccha.

dhūsara 1) Spr. 3520. KATHĀS. 53, 2. 65, 162 (kapila-). 66, 8. 86, 58.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

dhūsara dhūsara, i. e. dhvaṁs + ara,

I. adj., f. rā, Gray (like dust), Ragh. 5, 42.

II. f. rā, A small shrub, Varāh. Bṛh. S. 76, 6.

— Comp. krama-, adj. having become by degrees gray (like dust), Ragh.

16, 17.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dhūsara a. dust-coloured, grey.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dhūsara dhūs-ara, a. [dhvas] dust-coloured, grey (-tva, n. abst. N.): -ka,

m. N. of a jackal.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

dhūsara puṁstrī dhū—sara kicca na ṣatvam . 1 gardabhe 2 uṣṭre 3 kapote

rājani° striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 4 tailakāre pu° hema° dhūsa—rak . 5 īṣatpāṇḍuvarṇe

kṛṣṇaśvetavarṇe śuklapītavarṇe ca pu° 6 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . klāntaṁ

rajodhūsaraketusainyam utkrāntavarṇakramadhūsarāṇām raghuḥ .

kiraṇaparikṣayadhūsarapradoprām . lalāṭikācandanadhūsarālakā kumā° .

7 pāṇḍuraphalīkṣupe strī rājaniḥ ṭāp . 8 kinnarībhede strī medi° gaurā° ṅīṣ

.

धूसरिमन् — dhūsariman Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dhūsariman m. grey or dusty-white (the colour)

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dhūsariman m. grey colour.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dhūsariman dhūsar-i-man, m. dust-colour.

ध्वांतम् — dhvāṁtam Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

dhvāṁtam Darkness; dhvāṁtaṁ nīlanicolacāru sudṛśāṁ

pratyaṁgamāliṁgati Gīt. 11; N. 19. 42; Śi. 4. 62.

— Comp.

—unmeṣaḥ, —vittaḥ a fire-fly.

—śātravaḥ, —arātiḥ 1. the sun. —2. the moon. —3. fire. —4. the

white colour.

निर्जल — nirjala Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nirjala «nir-jala» mf («ā») n. waterless, dry (m. or n. a dry country,

desert, waste

mf («ā») n. not mixed with water (as buttermilk)

nirjala «nir-jala» mf («ā») n. «-la-toyadābha» mfn. of the colour of a

waterless cloud i.e. white, fair

nirjala «nir-jala» mf («ā») n. «-lanmināya» Nom. ā. «-yate», to be like a

fish without water, Bhsm.

nirjala «nir-jala» mf («ā») n. «-lākādaśī» f. the 11th day in the light half of

the month Jyaiṣṭha (on which even the drinking of water is forbidden)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

nirjala (nis + jala) adj. f. ā «kein Wasser habend, wasserlos»; subst. «eine

wasserlose Gegend» H. 953. deśa R. 2, 80, 12. vasudhā VARĀH. BṚH. S.

53, 108. sthāna RĀJA-TAR. 1, 126. pathin 4, 287. koṣaṁ ca janayedrājā

nirjalebhyo yathā jalam MBH. 12, 4739. «nicht mit Wasser versetzt», von

Buttermilch AK. 2, 9, 53.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

nirjala a. waterless, s. such a land.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

nirjala tri° nirgataṁ jalaṁ yasmāt prā° ba° . jalaśūnye deśe koṣañca

janayedrājā nirjalebhyo yathā jalam bhā° śā° 130 a° .

पंगुल — paṁgula Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

paṁgula a. Lame, crippled. —laḥ A horse of silvery-white colour.

पङ्गुल — paṅgula Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899paṅgula mfn. id.

paṅgula n. (?) lameness

paṅgula m. a horse of a glassy or silvery white colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

paṅgula (von paṅgu) 1) adj. = paṅgu H. ś. 104. Ungenan (wie auch das

vorangehende khañja) in der Bed. des abstr. SUŚR. 1, 360, 12. 2, 43, 15.

— 2) m. «ein Pferd von der Farbe des weissen Glases» H. 1243.

paṅgula vgl. pāṅgulya.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

paṅgula paṅgu + la,

1. adj. Lame.

2. Lameness, Suśr. 1, 360, 12.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

paṅgula pu° sitakādhābhahayabhede hema° .

पद्म — padma Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899padma m. n. (2. or 3. «pad»?) a lotus (esp. the flower of the lotus-plant

Nelumbium Speciosum which closes towards evening; often confounded

with the water-lily or Nymphaea Alba) &c. (ifc. f. «ā»)

m. the form or figure of a lotus (a N. given by the Tāntrikas to the 6

divisions of the upper part of the body called Cakras q.v.)

m. a partic. mark or mole on the human body

m. red or coloured marks on the face or trunk of an elephant

m. a partic. part of a column or pillar

m. a kind of temple

m. an army arrayed in the form of a lotus

m. a partic. posture of the body in religious meditation, Vedānt. (cf.

«padmāsana»)

m. a kind of coitus

m. one of the 9 treasures of Kubera (also personified)

m. one of the 8 treasures connected with the magical art called

Padminī &c.

m. a partic. high number (1000 millions or billions) &c.

m. a partic. constellation

m. N. of a partic. cold hell

m. a partic. fragrant substance (v.l. «-maka»)

m. the root of Nelumbium Speciosum

m. a species of bdellium

m. lead

padma m. a species of plant

padma m. an elephant

padma m. a species of serpent

padma m. N. of Rāma (son of Daśa-ratha)

padma m. of two serpent-demons &c.

padma m. of one of the attendants of Skanda

padma m. of a mythical Buddha 136 n. 1.

padma m. (with Jainas) N. of the 9th Cakra-vartin in Bhārata and of one

of the 9 white Balas

padma m. N. of a king

padma m. of a prince of Kaśmīra (founder of Padma-pura and of a

temple; see «padma-svāmin»)

padma m. of another man

padma m. of a Brāhman

padma m. of a mythical elephant (cf. «mahā-padma»)

padma m. of a monkey

padma m. of a mountain

padma m. a species of plant (Clerodendrum Siphorantus or Hibiscus

Mutabilis

padma m. cloves

padma m. the flower of Carthamus Tinctoria

padma m. N. of the mother of Muni-suvrata (the 20th Arhat of the

present Avasarpiṇī)

padma m. of a female serpent-demon (= the goddess Manasā, wife of

the sage Jarat-kāru; cf. «padma-priyā»)

padma m. of a daughter of king Bṛihadratha and wife of Kalki

padma mfn. lotus-hued, being of the colour of a lotus

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

padma a. [pad-man] Lotus-hued. —dmaṁ

(1) A lotus (m. also in this sense); padmapatrasthitaṁ toyaṁ dhatte

muktāphalaśriyaṁ.

(2) A lotus-like ornament.

(3) The form or figure of a lotus.

(4) The root of a lotus.

(5) The coloured marks on the trunk and face of an elephant.

(6) An army arrayed in the form of a lotus.

(7) A particular high number (one thousand billions).

(8) Lead.

(9) N. given by the Tāntrikas to the six divisions of the upper part of

the body called Chakras. (10) A mark or mole on the human body.

(11) A spot.

(12) N. of a particular part of a column. —dmaḥ A kind of temple.

(2) An elephant.

(3) A species of serpent.

(4) An epithet of Rāma.

(5) One of the nine treasures of Kubera, see navanidhi.

(6) A kind of coitus or mode of sexual enjoyment. —dmā

(1) N. of Lakṣmī, the goddess of fortune, and wife of Viṣṇu; (taṁ)

padmā padmātapatreṇabheje sāmrājyadīkṣitaṁ R. 4. 5.

(2) Cloves.

— Comp.

—akṣa a. lotuseyed. (

—kṣaḥ) an epithet of Viṣṇu or the sun. (

—kṣaṁ) the seed of a lotus.

—aṁtaraṁ —raḥ a lotus-leaf.

—ākaraḥ 1. a large tank or pond abounding in lotuses. —2. a pond

or pool of water in general. —3. a lotus-pool. —4. an assemblage of

lotuses; Bh. 2. 73.

—ālayaḥ an epithet of Brahman, the creator. (

—yā) 1. an epithet of Lakṣmī. —2. cloves.

—āsanaṁ 1. a lotus-seat; Ku. 7. 86. —2. a particular posture in

religious meditation; ūrumūle vāmapādaṁ punastu dakṣiṇaṁ padaṁ .

vāmorau sthāpayitvā tu padmāsanamiti smṛtaṁ .. (—naḥ) 1. an epithet of

Brahman, the creator. —2. of Śiva. —3. of the, sun.

—āhvaṁ cloves.

—udbhavaḥ an epithet of Brahman.

—kara, —hasta a. holding a lotus. (

—raḥ, —staḥ) 1. an epithet of Viṣṇu. —2. a lotus-like hand. —3. N.

of the sun. (

—rā, —stā) N. of Lakṣmī.

—karṇikā 1. the pericarp of a lotus. —2. the central part of an army

arrayed in the form of a lotus.

—kalikā a lotus-bud, an unblown lotus.

—kāṣṭhaṁ a fragrant wood used in medicine.

—keśaraḥ —raṁ the filament of a lotus.

—kośaḥ, —koṣaḥ 1. the calyx of a lotus. —2. a position of the

fingers resembling the calyx of a lotus.

—khaṁḍaṁ, —ṣaṁḍaṁ a multitude of lotuses.

—gaṁdha, gaṁdhi a. lotus-scented, or as fragrant as or smelling

like a lotus. (

—dhaṁ, —gaṁdhi n.) = padmakāṣṭha q. v.

—garbhaḥ 1. an epithet of Brahman. —2. of Viṣṇu. —3. of Śiva. —4.

the sun. —5. the inside or middle of a lotus.

—guṇā, —gṛhā 1. an epithet of Lakṣmī, the goddess of wealth. —2.

cloves.

—jaḥ, —jāta, —bhavaḥ, —bhūḥ, —yoniḥ, saṁbhavaḥ epithets of

Brahman, the lotusborn god.

—taṁtuḥ the fibrous stalk of a lotus.

—nābhaḥ, —bhiḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu.

—nālaṁ a lotus-stalk.

—nidhiḥ a treasure of the value of a Padma.

—pāṇiḥ 1. an epithet of Brahman. —2. N. of Buddha. —3. N. of the

sun. —4. of Viṣṇu.

—puṣpaḥ the Karṇikāra plant.

—baṁdhaḥ a kind of artificial composition in which the words are

arranged in the form of a lotus-flower; see K. P. 9 ad. loc.

—baṁdhuḥ 1. the sun. —2. a bee.

—bījaṁ the seed of a lotus.

—bhāsaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—mālinī the goddess of wealth.

—rāgaḥ, —gaṁ a ruby; R. 13. 53; 17. 23; Ku. 3. 53.

—rūpā an epithet of the goddess of wealth.

—rekhā a figure on the palm of the hand (of the form of a lotus-

flower) which indicates the acquisition of great wealth.

—lāṁchanaḥ 1. an epithet of Brahman. —2. Kubera. —3. the sun.

—4. a king. (

—nā) 1. an epithet of Lakṣmī1, the goddess of wealth. —2. or of

Sarasvatī, the goddess of learning. —3. N. of Tārā.

—vāsā an epithet of Lakṣmī.

—samāsanaḥ an epithet of Brahman.

—snuṣā 1. an epithet of Gaṅgā. —2. of Lakṣmī. —3. of Durgā.

—hāsaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

padma UṆĀDIS. 1, 139. m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31. TRIK. 3, 5,

11. 1) m. n. «Wasserrose, Nelumbium speciosum», aber nicht die Pflanze

selbst, sondern nur «die einzelne Blume» (die sich gegen Abend

schliesst), AK.1,2,3,38. TRIK.1,2,36.3,3,299. H. 1160. an.2,328. MED. m.

18. HALĀY.3,58.5,72. SIDDH. K. 251,a,4. babhau varṣāmbuviklinnaṁ

padmamāgalitaṁ yathā MBH. 1, 5412. 12, 6779. fg. bhagavannābhyāṁ

padmaḥ samutthitaḥ 3, 15820. 13, 4555. padmabodhanamudyantaṁ

paśya sūryam R. 2, 89, 2 (97, 2 GORR.). Spr. 835. 928. tvaṁ padma iva

vātena saṁnataḥ priyadarśanā R. GORR. 2, 8, 40. bhruvormadhye

sahajaḥ pipluruttamaḥ. padmasaṁkāśaḥ N. 17, 5. SUŚR. 1, 41, 9. 103,

12. 223, 14. RAGH. 3, 17. padmātapatra 4, 5. -reṇu ŚĀK. 171. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 19, 5. 45, 87. 59, 9. KATHĀS. 32, 56. 40, 103. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 110.

SĀH. D. 21, 5. -locanā INDR. 2, 31. -nibhekṣaṇa N. 12, 21.

lohitapadmanetra MBH. 5, 1815. mukha- gaṇa vyāghrādi zu P. 2, 1, 56,

Sch. phullapadmānanaśrī VID. 285. caraṇau -tāmrau ŚĀK. 69.

bhavatpādapadmarajaḥpavitrīkṛtatanu PAÑCAT. 191, 14.

salalitanartitavāmapādapadmā SĀH. D. 56, 8. Spr. 691. sapadmāṁ

padminīmiva MBH. 6, 4613. R. 5, 18, 6 (lies sapadmāmiva). 4, 44, 86. 87.

HARIV. 13147. RAGH. 13, 51. KATHĀS. 21, 10. sapadmayā — śriyā R.

GORR. 2, 13, 8. śrīrapadmeva (so v. a. «ohne Schmuck») 3, 40, 19.

MṚCCH. 82, 20. bhraṣṭapadmāmiva śriyam R. 6, 10, 19. Vgl. nīla-. — 2)

«die Form —, die Figur einer Wasserrose»: padmasvastikasaṁsthitaiḥ

(gṛhameghaiḥ) R. 5, 10, 4. MĀRK. P. 50, 92; vgl. MEGH. 78. Der

Oberkörper des Menschen wird von den Tāntrika in 6 Padma oder Cakra

eingetheilt; s. u. cakra 4. — 3) Bez. «bestimmter Male auf dem

menschlichen Körper»: daśapadmavān (rāmaḥ) R. 5, 32, 11. «rothe

Flecken auf der Haut des Elephanten», m. n. TRIK. 3, 3, 299. MED. n. H.

1229.H. an. HALĀY. 2, 64. Vgl. padmaka, padmin. — 4) Bez. «eines

bestimmten Theils einer Säule»: stambhaṁ vibhajya navadhā vahanaṁ

bhāgo ghaṭo ‘sya bhāgo ‘nyaḥ. padmaṁ tathottaroṣṭhaṁ kuryādbhāgena

bhāgena.. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 52, 29. — 5) m. Bez. «einer best. Tempelform»

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 55, 17. padmaḥ padmākṛtiḥ 23. — 6) «ein in der Form

einer Wasserrose aufgestelltes Heer», m. n. TRIK. 3, 3, 299. MED. m. H.

an. yataśca bhayamāśaṅkettato vistārayedbalam. padmena caiva

vyūhena niviśeta sadā svayam.. M. 7, 188. paścārghe tasya padmasya

garbhavyūhaḥ sudurbhidaḥ. śūcīpadmasya garbhastho gūḍho vyūḍhaḥ

kṛtaḥ punaḥ.. MBH. 7, 3110. — 7) Bez. «einer bestimmten Stellung des

Körpers bei religiösen Vertiefungen» (vgl. padmāsana):

karacaraṇādisaṁsthānaviśeṣalakṣaṇāni padmasvastikādīni āsanāni

VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 130. — 8) m. Bez. «einer best. Art des coitus»:

hastābhyāṁ ca samāliṅgya nārī padmāsanopari. ramedgāḍhaṁ

samākṛṣya bandho ‘yaṁ padmasaṁjñakaḥ.. RATIMAÑJARĪ im ŚKDR. —

9) «eine der Schätze des» Kuvera, m. AK.1,1,1,67. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 184,a,5

v. u. H. 193. H. an. m. n. TRIK.1,1,79.3,3,299. MED. nidhipravaramukhyai

ca śaṅkhapadmau dhaneśvarau. sarvānnidhīnpragṛhyātha upāstāṁ vai

dhaneśvaram.. MBH. 2, 418. yuktaśca śaṅkhapadmābhyāṁ

nidhīnāmadhipaḥ prabhuḥ HARIV. 2467. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 30 (zugleich N. pr.

eines Nāga). atha tasya svapne padmanidhiḥ kṣapaṇakarūpī

saṁdarśanaṁ gatvā provāca PAÑCAT. 235, 10. 11. śaṅkhapadmau nidhī

citre (AUFRECHT vermuthet citrau) dṛṣṭvā duṣṭairvimucyata iti purāṇam

UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 139. Was soll aber sein padmaḥ

syānnidhiśaṅkhayoḥ, da padma doch nicht = śaṅkha ist? m. «einer der 8

Schätze, die zur Zauberkunst» Padmini «in Beziehung stehen», MĀRK. P.

68, 5. 8. — 10) «eine best. grosse Zahl», m. n. TRIK. 3, 3, 299. MED. m.

H. an. «1000 Billionen» R. 6, 4, 58. ayutaṁ prayutaṁ caiva padmaṁ

kharvamathārbudam. śaṅkhaṁ caiva mahāpadmam u. s. w. MBH. 2,

2143. koṭīsahasrāyutapadmasaṁkhyāḥ SUŚR. 2, 534, 8. MBH. 1, 3121. 3,

10514. 7, 2089. 13, 5212. 5216. 5222. R. 6, 2, 20. MĀRK. P. 47, 3. Vgl.

SCHIEFNER im Bull. de l’Acad. Imp. des sc. V, 300. — 11) N. «einer best.

Constellation» (= kamala) VARĀH. BṚH. 12, 14; vgl. BHAṬṬOTPALA zu

LAGHUJ. 10, 5. — 12) N. einer kalten Hölle bei den Buddhisten BURN.

Intr. 201. — 13) m. «eine best. Pflanze» HALĀY. 5, 26. m. n. =

padmakāṣṭha «eine best. wohlriechende Pflanze» DHAR. im ŚKDR. «die

Wurzel von Nelumbium speciosum» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. «eine Art Bdellion»,

s. u. guggulu. «einen best. wohlriechenden Stoff» bezeichnet das Wort in

der folg. Stelle: tuṅgapadmavimiśreṇa candanena MBH. 1, 4954; vgl.

padmaka neben tuṅga 12, 9346. — 14) m. n. «Blei» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

15) m. «Elephant» COLEBR. und LOIS. zu AK. 2, 8, 2, 3; vgl. padmin und

weiter unten unter 23. — 16) m. «eine Schlangenart» SUŚR. 2, 265, 8. —

17) m. N. pr. eines Nāga («Schlangendämons») TRIK. 1, 2, 6. H. an. MED.

MBH. 2, 360. 12, 13803. R. 5, 78, 9. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 30 (hier zugleich

«einer der Schätze des» Kuvera). dvau ca padmau MBH. 1, 1555. 5, 3629.

N. pr. eines Nāgarāja VYUTP. 84. — 18) m. N. pr. eines Wesens im

Gefolge des Skanda MBH. 9, 2558. — 19) m. N. pr. des 9ten Cakravartin in

Bhārata (bei den Gaina) H. 693. — 20) m. N. pr. eines der 9 weissen Bala

(bei den Jaina H. 698. — 21) m. Bein. Rāma’s, des Sohnes des Daśaratha

von der Kauśalyā, DHAR. im ŚKDR. ŚATR. 9, 94. — 22) N. pr. eines

Fürsten MBH. 2, 332. von Kāśmira RĀJA-TAR. 4, 678. gründet Padmapura

und errichtet einen Padmasvāmin 694. N. pr. eines Mannes RĀJA-TAR. 7,

1508. eines Brahmanen LALIT. 226. — 23) N. pr. eines mythischen

Elephanten R. GORR. 1, 6, 26; vgl. mahāpadma. — 24) N. pr. eines Affen

R. 6, 3, 19. — 25) m. N. pr. eines Berges VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 5. — 26) f.

padmā a) «die Lotusfarbige» (vgl. MBH. 13, 509), Bein. der Śrī, der Göttin

des Glückes und Gemahlin Viṣṇu’s, AK. 1, 1, 1, 22. H. 220. MED. HALĀY.

1, 31. M. 7, 11. MBH. 2, 2294. 4, 186. 12, 8353. 13, 507. 14, 1489. R. 1,

45, 43. 2, 70, 12. 79, 15. R. GORR. 2, 86, 19. RAGH. 4, 5. Vgl. padmaśrī.

— b) N. zweier Pflanzen: «Clerodendrum Siphonanthus R. Br.» AK. 2, 4, 3,

8. MED. RATNAM. 37. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. SUŚR. 1, 377, 15. 2, 439, 5.

«Hibiscus mutabilis Lin.» AK. 2, 4, 5, 11. MED. — c) «Gewürznelken»

ŚKDR. nach AK. 2, 6, 3, 27, wo es heisst, dass die Synonyme von śrī

Namen der «Gewürznelken» seien. — d) «die Blüthe von Carthamus

tinctorius Lin.» RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — e) N. pr. der Mutter des

Munisuvrata, des 20ten Arhant’s der gegenwärtigen Avasarpiṇī, H. 40. —

f) N. pr. eines weiblichen Schlangendämons MED. (wo -pannagīṣu zu

lesen ist), = manasā ŚKDR. WILS.; vgl. padmapriyā. — g) N. pr. einer

Tochter des Königs Bṛhadratha und Gemahlin Kalki’s KALKI-P. 10 im

ŚKDR. — 27) adj. «lotusfarbig»: trayo ‘syai varṇāḥ śuklaḥ padmaḥ suvarṇa

iti ṢAḌV. BR. 4, 7.

padma 1) m. Spr. 2591. LA. (II) 91, 15. — 3) «Mal —, Fleck von best.

Gestalt»: masāragalvarkanibhaiścitraiḥ padmairalaṁkṛtaḥ (mṛgaḥ) R. 3,

48, 12. — 9) personificirt R. 7, 15, 16. 34. — 23) R. 7, 31, 36. — Vgl.

mahā-.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

padma 1 I A serpent born to sage Kaśyapa of his wife Kadrū. (Śloka 10,

Chapter 35, Ādi Parva).

padma 2 II A King. This King shines in the court of Yama. (Śloka 39,

Chapter 10, Sabhā Parva).

padma 3 III A soldier of Subrahmaṇya. (Chapter 45, Śalya Parva).

padma 4 IV A nidhi (treasure). This nidhi belongs to Kubera. (Śloka 39,

Chapter 10, Sabhā Parva). Śaṅkhanidhi, Padmanidhi and a Puṣpakavimāna

were presented to Kubera by Brahmā. (Uttara Rāmāyaṇa).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

padma padma (curtailed pad + mant),

I. m. and n.

1. A lotus flower, MBh. 1, 5412.

2. Ornament, Rām. 6, 10, 19.

3. Moles or marks on the body, 5, 32, 11.

4. A spot, 3, 48, 12.

5. Coloured marks on the face and trunk of an elephant.

6. A lotus-like form of array, Man. 7, 188.

7. A particular sitting posture when absorbed in meditation, Vedāntas.

in Chr. 217, 17.

8. One of Kuvera’s treasures, MBh. 2, 418.

9. A large number, 1000 billions, 2, 2143.

10. A certain fragrant plant.

II. m.

1. A kind of snake, Suśr. 2, 265, 8.

2. The name of a Nāga.

3. A proper name.

III. f. mā,

1. A name of Śrī, Man. 7, 11.

2. The name of two plants, Clerodendrum siphonanthus, and Hibiscus

mutabilis.

3. A proper name.

— Comp. abhi-, adj. 1. adorned with lotus-like spots. 2. beautiful in every

part of the body, Johns. Sel. 46, 74. bhrātṛ-padma-vana, n. a group of

lotus-like brothers. mahā-,

I. m. 1. one of the Nāgas. 2. one of Kuvera’s treasures. 3. a Kiṁnara, or

attendant on Kuvera. 4. a large number, one hundred thousand millions,

MBh. 2, 2143. 5. the name of a lake, Rājat. 5, 68; 103.

II. n. the white lotus. sa-, adj. provided with lotus flowers, Rām. 3, 52,

39.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

padma m. n. lotus, esp. the flower (which closes at evening), fig. an army

arrayed in the form of a lotus or a cert. posture of the body in religious

meditation; one of the treasures of Kubera, a cert. high number (1000

billions).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

padma pad-ma, m. n. lotus flower (which closes at night: nelumbium

speciosum); lotus-shaped array; kind of sitting posture during religious

absorption; one of the nine treasures of Kubera; 1000 billions; N. of a

Nāga N.;

ā, f. the Lotus-coloured, ep. of the goddess of fortune, Śrī.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

padma na° pada—man . 1 kamale 2 gajamukhādisthe vindasamudāye

kamalākāreṇa sainyāderabhiniveśanarūpe 3 vyūhabhede 4 nidhibhede

arvudamabja miti padmaparyāyābjanāmnoktāyāṁ 5

daśārvudasaṁkhyāyāṁ 6 tatsaṁkhyāteṣu 7 puṣkaramūle 8 sīsake dhātau

9 śarorasthe nāḍīcakrabhede ca medi° 10 padmakāṣṭhoṣadhau dharaṇiḥ .

dehasthapadmāni ca cakratvena prasiddhāni tāni ca cakraśabde 2808 pṛ°

darśitāni . kamale pu° na° amare sthitaṁ tatrāsya

puṁstvamaprayuktadoṣayuktamityālaṅkārikāḥ . 11 dāśarathau

12nāgabhede pu° dharaṇiḥ . 13 jinacakravartibhede pu° hema° 14

rativandhabhede pu° hastābhyāñca samāliṅgya nārī padmāsanopari .

ramedugāḍhaṁ samākṛṣya bandho’yaṁ padmasaṁjñakaḥ ratima° .

परिपण — paripaṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899paripaṇa «pari-paṇa» m. n. ( «paṇ») = «nīvī» (capital, stock ?)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

paripaṇa (von 1. paṇ mit pari oder pari + paṇa) n. = nīvī AK. 2, 9, 80. 3,

4, 27, 214. H. 869 (m.). an. 2, 529. MED. v. 15. HALĀY. 5, 38. Wird durch

«Kapital» erklärt; vgl. jedoch u. nīvī 2.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

paripaṇa pari-paṇa, n. playing for (-°);

-pat-ana, n. flying about, hovering;

-pantha-ka, m. (obstructor of one’s path), adversary, enemy;

-pantha-ya, den. P. oppose, resist (ac.);

-panthin, a. besetting one’s path; m. waylayer, opponent, enemy;

-panthī-bhū, become the adversary of, oppose (g.);

-pava-na, n. cleansing (of grain), winnowing flail;

-paśavya, a. relating to the sacrificial animal;

-pāka, m. becoming fully cooked; digestion; ripening; maturity;

perfection; consequence, effect; fulness, fulfilment (of time): -tas, ab. in

consequence of;

-pācana, a. cooking fully; maturing;

-pācayitṛ, a. id.;

-pāṭala, a. very pale-red;

-pāṭi, f. succession;

-pāṭha, m. complete enumeration: in. (know) completely;

-pāṇa, n. hiding-place;

-pāṇḍiman, m. extreme whiteness;

-pāṇḍu, a. very white or pale: -ra, a. very white;

-pārśva, a. being at the side, close at hand: -vartin, a. remaining at

one’s side, standing beside (g.);

-pā-laka, a. protecting; maintaining;

-pālana, n. protection; maintenance; nurture: ā, f. protection, nurture,

ī-ya, fp. to be guarded; — maintained;

-pālya, fp. to be protected; — maintained or observed;

-piṅgī-kṛ, colour deep red-brown;

-piñja, a. full of (in.);

-piñj-ara, a. brownish-red, orange-coloured;

-pi-pālayiṣā, f. desire to maintain;

-pīḍana, n. squeezing out; injuring, prejudicing (-°);

puṣṭa-tā, f. being nourished by, feeding on (-°);

-pūti, f. complete purification;

-pūra-ka, a. fulfilling; bestowing abundance;

-pūr-aṇa, n. filling; completion;

-pūrin, a. bestowing abundantly;

-pūrṇa, pp. (1. pṛ) filled with (-°);

-pūrṇendu, m. full moon;

-pūrti, f. becoming full of (-°); completion;

-pelava, a. very delicate, tiny;

-pothaka,a. furthering, confirming;

-poṣaṇīya, fp. to be cherished;

-praśna, m. enquiry, after (-°);

-prāpti, fp. obtainment;

-prepsu, des. a. wishing to reach or obtain, seeking after, desiring

(ac.);

-plavā, a. running to and fro; m. fluctuation;

-pluta, pp. (plu) overwhelmed; bathed (in tears: -°).

पांडु — pāṁḍu Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

pāṁḍu a. Pale-white, whitish, pale, yellowish; vikalakaraṇaḥ

pāṁḍucchāyaḥ śucā paridurbalaḥ U. 3. 22. —ḍuḥ

(1) The pale-white or yellowish-white colour.

(2) Jaundice.

(3) A white elephant.

(4) N. of the father of the Pāṇḍavas. [He was begotten by Vyāsa on

Ambālika, one of the widows of Vichitravīrya. He was called Pāṇḍu,

because he was born pale (pāṁḍu) by reason of his mother having

become quite pale with fear when in private with the sage Vyāsa;

(yasmātpāṁḍutvamāpannā virūpaṁ prekṣya mamiha . tasmādeva sutaste

vai pāṁḍureva bhaviṣyati Mb.). He was prevented by a curse from having

progeny himself; so he allowed his first wife Kuntī to make use of a

charm she had acquired from Durvāsas for the birth of sons. She gave

birth to Yudhiṣṭhira, Bhīma and Arjuna; and Mādri, his other wife, by the

use of the same charm, gave birth to Nakula and Sahadeva. One day

Pandu forgot the curse under which he was labouring, and made bold to

embrace Mādri, but he fell immediately dead in her arms.]

— Comp.

—āmayaḥ jaundice.

—kaṁbalaḥ 1. a white blanket. —2. a warm upper garment. —3. the

housing of a royal elephant.

—kaṁbalin m. 1. a carriage covered with a woollen blanket. —2.

the housings of a royal elephant.

—putraḥ a son of Pāṇḍu, any one of the five Pāṇḍavas.

—pṛṣṭha a. ‘white-backed’, having no auspicious marks on the

body, one from whom nothing great is to be expected.

—bhūmaḥ a region full of chalky soil.

—mṛttikā 1. white or pale soil. —2. the opal.

—mṛd f. chalk.

—rāgaḥ whiteness, pallor.

—rogaḥ jaundice.

—lekhaḥ a sketch made with chalk; a rough draft or sketch made

on the ground, board &c.: pāṁḍulekhena phalake bhumau vā prathamaṁ

likhaṁt . nyūnādhikaṁ tu saṁśodhya paścātpatre niveśayet .. Vyāsa.

—śarkarā light-coloured gravel (pramehabheda) —śarmilā an

epithet of Draupadī.

—sopākaḥ N. of a mixed tribe;

cāṁḍālātpāṁḍusopākastvaksāravyavahāravān Ms. 10. 37.

पांडुकः — pāṁḍukaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

pāṁḍukaḥ

(1) The yellowish-white colour.

(2) Jaundice.

(3) N. of Paṇḍu.

पांडुरिमन् — pāṁḍuriman Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

pāṁḍuriman m. Paleness, white or pale colour.

पाण्डु — pāṇḍu Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍu mfn. («paṇḍ»?) yellowish white, white, pale &c.

mfn. jaundiced

pāṇḍu m. jaundice

pāṇḍu m. pale or yellowish white colour

pāṇḍu m. a white elephant

pāṇḍu m. Trichosanthes Dioeca

pāṇḍu m. a species of shrub

pāṇḍu m. N. of a son of Vyāsa by the wife of Vicitra-vīrya and brother of

Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Vidura (he was father of the five Pāṇḍavas) &c.

pāṇḍu m. of a son of Janam-ejaya and brother of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra

pāṇḍu m. of a son of Dhātri by āyatī (v.l. «prāṇa»)

pāṇḍu m. of an attendant of śiva

pāṇḍu m. of a Nāgarāja

pāṇḍu pl. of a people in Madhya-deśa (v.l. «pāṇḍya» and «-ḍva»)

pāṇḍu f. Glycine Debilis

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṇḍu UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 38. 1) adj. (f. gleichfalls pāṇḍu P. 4, 1, 44,

Vārtt., Sch. VOP. 4, 16) «weisslich gelb, weiss, bleich» AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 3,

4, 13, 53. TRIK. 3, 3, 113. H. 1393. an. 2, 122. MED. ḍ. 18. HALĀY. 4, 47.

yathā pāṇḍvāvikam ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 3, 10. kṛśā pāṇḍuśca lakṣyase MBH.

4, 519. SUŚR. 1, 61, 10. 85, 20. 121, 11. 12. -vṛkṣapraroha 135, 8. 158,

13. -gātratā 263, 17. pāṇḍvavabhāsa 2, 2, 8. śaśāṅkaḥ

kāminīgaṇḍapāṇḍuḥ MṚCCH. 25, 24. kṣaumam — indupāṇḍu ŚĀK. 80.

pāṇḍudukūla LALIT. ed. Calc. 332, 13 u.s.w. pattra ŚĀK. 18. 110. -varṇā

(damayantī) N. 2, 3. mukhena rodhrapāṇḍunā RAGH. 3, 2. -mukhī

KATHĀS. 28, 2. bhasma- 25, 81. jarā- 31, 40. -sikata ŚĀK. 56. MEGH. 18.

24. 30. āpāṇḍupītikā mṛt VARĀH. BṚH. S. 53, 20.

āpāṇḍubhasmoṣṭrakharānurūpā (śilā) 111. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. Vgl. pāṇḍara,

pāṇḍura. — 2) m. a) «Gelbsucht» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. Verz. d. B. H. 278;

vgl. pāṇḍuroga. — b) N. zweier Pflanzen: «Trichosanthes dioeca Roxb.»

(paṭola) und = pāṇḍuraphalī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) «ein weisser

Elephant» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Fürsten, eines Sohnes des

Vyāsa von der Frau des Vicitravīrya und Bruders des Dhṛtarāṣṭra und des

Vidura, TRIK. 2, 8, 13. 3, 3, 113. H. an. MED. AV. PARIŚ. in Verz. d. B. H.

91. MBH. 1, 95. 2213. 2441. 2721. 3808. 4291 (Ursprung des Namens).

15, 851. HARIV. 1932. 3010. 4055. KATHĀS. 21, 20. fgg. VP. 437. 459.

BHĀG. P. 9, 22, 24. — e) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Janamejaya und Bruders

des Dhṛtarāṣṭra MBH. 1, 3745. LIA. I, Anh. XXIV. — f) N. pr. eines Sohnes

des Dhātar von der Āyati VP. 82, N. 1; nach anderen Autoritäten heisst

dieser Sohn Prāṇa. — g) N. pr. eines Dieners des Śiva VYĀḌI zu H. 210. —

h) N. pr. eines Nāgarāga VYUTP. 85. — i) N. pr. eines Volkes in

Madhyadeśa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 3 (v. l. pāṇḍya und pāṇḍva). — 3) f. =

māṣaparṇī «Glycine debilis Ait.» ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. pari-.

pāṇḍu 2) i) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 338,b,33. 339,b,46.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

pāṇḍu 1 I Father of the Pāṇḍavas.

pāṇḍu 2 II The second son of. Janamejaya. (Chapter 94, Ādi Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pāṇḍu pāṇḍu,

I. adj. Pale, white, yellowish white, Śāk. d. 80.

II. m. The name of a sovereign, father of Yudhiṣṭhira, and the other four

Pāṇḍavas.

— Comp. puṣpa-, m. a kind of snake. vi-, adj. pale, Śic. 9, 3.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pāṇḍu a. whitish yellow, white, pale (abstr. -tā f., -tva n.), N. of an

ancient king.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pāṇḍu pāṇḍ-u, a. (f. id.) yellowish white, whitish, pale; m. N. of a

sovereign of ancient Delhi, a son of Vyāsa and brother of Dhṛtarāṣṭra;

-cchāya, a. white-coloured;

-tā, f. yellowish white colour, paleness;

-nanda-na, m. son of Pāṇḍu;

-pattra, n. yellow (= withered) leaf;

-putra, m. son of Pāṇḍu;

-bhūma, m. pale-coloured (chalky) soil.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

pāṇḍu raḥ puṁ, (pāṇḍurasyāstīti . pāṇḍu + nagapāṁśupāṇḍubhyaśca . 5 .

2 . 107 . ityasya sūtrasya vārtikoktyā raḥ .) śvetapītamiśritavarṇaḥ .

tadbati, tri . ityamaraḥ . 1 . 5 . 17 .. (yathā, bhāgavate . 8 . 8 . 3 .

tata uccaiḥśravā nāma hayo’bhūccandrapāṇḍuraḥ .

tasmin baliḥ spṛhāñcakrenendra īśvaraśikṣayā ..) kāmalārogaḥ . iti

śabdaratnāvalī .. śvitraroge, klī . iti halāyudhaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pāṇḍu pu° paḍi—ku ni° dīrghaḥ . sitapītasamāyuktaḥ pāṇḍuvarvaṇaḥ

prakīrtitaḥ 1 subhūtyukte pāṇḍustu pītabhāgārdhaḥ ketakīdhūlisannibhaḥ

ityukte ca 2 varṇamede 3 tadvati tri° . striyāmudantaguṇavacanatve’pi na

ṅīp pāṇḍuśabdaparyudāsāt . 4 sitavarṇe śabdaratnā° 5 tadvati tri°

sāntanuputravicitravīryasya kṣetre vyāsenotpādite 6 nṛpabhede 7

nāgabhede 8 śvetagaje 9 rogabhede ca śabdara° . 10 pāṇḍuraphalīkṣupe

11 paṭole ca rājani° . 12 deśabhede pu° pāṇḍunṛpotpattikathā bhā° ā°

106 a° tannāmatākāraṇañca uktaṁ yathā tatastenaiva vidhinā

maharṣistāmavindata . ambālikāmathābhyāgādṛṣiṁ dṛṣṭvā ca sāpi tam .

vivarṇā pāṇḍusaṅkāśā samapadyata mārata! ityupakrame yasmāt

pāṇḍutvamāpannā virūpaṁ prekṣya māmiha . taṇādeṣa sutaste vai

pāṇḍureva bhaviṣyati . nāma tasya tadeveha bhaviṣyadi śubhānane .

tasya digvijayādikathā taduttarādhyāyeṣu dṛśyā . pāṇḍurogabhede

nidānādikaṁ bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā pāṇḍurogāḥ smṛtāḥ pañca

vātapittakaphaistrayaḥ . caturthaḥ sannipātena pañcamo

bhakṣaṇānmṛdaḥ pañcamo bhakṣaṇāt mṛda iti nanu mṛttikāpi

dūṣitavātādidoṣadvāreṇaiva pāṇḍurogaṁ janayatoti mṛdbhakṣaṇajaḥ

pāṇḍurogodoṣajādabhinna eva kathaṁ pañcama iti ucyate

aparakāraṇakupitā vātādayo’nyānapi rogān karvanti . mṛttikābhakṣṇāt

kupitāstu vātādayo viśeṣataḥ pāṇḍurogameva janayantyeveti viśeṣāt

cikitsāviśeṣācca pañcamaḥ carakeṇoktaḥ .

taccikitsāparakāraṇakupitadoṣajanitapāṇḍurogacikitsā bhavatīti suśrutena

mṛttikājaḥ pṛthak na paṭhitaḥ . atha viprakṛṣṭanidānapūrvikāṁ

samprāptimāha vyavāyamamlaṁ lavaṇāni madyaṁ mṛdaṁ

divāsvapnamatīva tīkṣṇam . niṣevamāṇasya vidūṣya raktaṁ doṣāstvacaṁ

pāṇḍuratāṁ nayanti tīkṣṇaṁ rājikādi . atha pūrvarūpamāha

tvaksphoṭaniṣṭhīvanagātrasādamṛdbhakṣaṇaprekṣaṇakūṭaśothāḥ .

viṇmūtraṣītatvamathāvipāko bhaviṣyatastasya puraḥsarāṇi

prekṣaṇakūṭaśothaḥ iti akṣigolakaśothaḥ . atha vātikasya pāṇḍurogasya

lakṣaṇamāha tvaṅmūtranayanādīnāṁ rūkṣakṛṣṇāruṇāmatā .

vātapāṇḍvāmaye kampastodāmāhabhramādayaḥ . kṛṣṇāruṇāmatā

pāṇḍutvaṁ nātikrāmati . ataeva suśrute sarveṣu caiteṣvapi pāṇḍubhāvo

yato’dhiko’taḥ khalu pāṇḍurogaḥ iti . bhramādaya ityādiśabdāt

medaśūlādayaḥ . atha ṣaittikasya lakṣaṇamāha

pītatvaṅnakhaviṇbhūtradāhatṛṣṇājvarānvitaḥ . bhinnaviṭko’tipītābhaḥ

pittapāṇḍvāmaye naraḥ . bhinnaviṭkaḥ sadravamalaḥ . atha ślaiṣmikasya

lakṣaṇamāha kaphaprasekaḥ śvayathuḥ tandrālasyātigauravaiḥ .

pāṇḍurogī kaphāt śuklaistvaṅmūtranayanānanaiḥ . atropalakṣaṇe tṛtīyā .

sānnipātikasya lakṣaṇamāha sarvānnasevinaḥ sarve duṣṭā

doṣāstridoṣajam . tridoṣaliṅgaṁ kurvanti pāṇḍurogaṁ suduḥsaham . atha

mṛjjasya samprāptimāha mṛttikādanaśīlasya kupyatyanyatamo malaḥ .

kamāyā mārutaṁ, pitta mūṣarā, madhurā kapham .

kopayenmṛdrasādīṁśca raukṣyādbhuktañca rūkṣayet .

pūrayatyavipakvaiśca srotāṁsi niruṇaddhyapi . indriyāṇāṁ balaṁ hatvā

tejo vīryaujasī tathā . pāṇḍurogaṁ karotyāśu samavarṇāgnināśanam .

srotāṁsi śirāmukhāni . tejo dīptiḥ ojaḥ sarvadhāturasaḥ . atha mṛjjasya

lakṣaṇamāha mṛdbhakṣaṇādbhavetpāṇḍu standrālasyanipīḍitaḥ .

sakāsaśvāsaśūlārtaḥ sadā’ruci samanvitaḥ . śūnākṣikūṭagaṇḍabhrūḥ

śūnapānnābhimehanaḥ . kṛmikoṣṭho’tisāryeta malaṁ sāsṛkkaphānvitam .

krimikoṣṭhaḥ udarābhyantarasthakṛmirbhavedityanena sambadhyate

atisāryeta malamiti karmakartṛ tatkarmavat mantavyam . tasmin

karmaṇyarthe’tra yakpratyayaḥ . athāsādhyasya lakṣaṇamāha

jvarārocakahṛllāsaccharditṛṣṇāklamānvitaḥ . pāṇḍurogī

tribhirdoṣaistyājyaḥ kṣīṇo hatendriyaḥ . pāṇḍurogaścirotpannaḥ

kharībhūto na sidhyati . kālaprakarṣāt śūnāṅgo yo vā pītāni paśyati

kharībhūtaḥ atirūkṣitaḥ sarvadhātuḥ baddhālpaviṭ saharitaṁ sakaphaṁ

yo’tisāryate . pītasvedātidigdhāṅgaḥ chardimūrchātṛṣānvitaḥ .

pāṇḍudantanakho yastu pāṇḍunetraśca yo bhavet . pāṇḍusaṅghātadarśī

ca pāṇḍurogī vinaśyati . pāṇḍusaṅghātadarśīṁ pībavarṇasya rāśiṁ

paśyati . anteṣu śūnaṁ parihīnamadhyaṁ mlānaṁ tathānteṣu ca

madhyaśūnam . gude mukhe śephasi muṣkayośca śūnaṁ

pratāmyantamasaṁjñakalpam . urabhre nihate caiva pāṇḍurogaḥ

prajāyate śātā° meṣabadhakarmaṇobipāka stadroga uktaḥ . 1 3

māṣaparṇyām (māṣāṇī) strī rājani° . pāṇḍorapatyam orañ pā° añ .

pāṇḍava pāṇḍorapatye yudhiṣṭhirādau . pāṇḍoḥ janapadabhedasya rājā

pāṇḍorḍyan vārti° ḍyan . pāṇḍudeśanṛpe raghu4 . 9 2 . svārthe ka

pāṇḍuka tatrārthe tataḥ astyarthe ini pāṇḍukin tadrogayute tri° .

saṁjñāyāṁ kan . pāṇḍuka dhānābhede suśrutaḥ . tatra pṛṣo°

dīrghamadhyaḥ pāṇḍūka tatrārthe paṅgukaśabde 2 49 2 pṛ°

suśrutavākyaṁ dṛśyam . pāṇḍukasya vṛddhiḥ kṣīrikāvṛddhyā

bhavatotyuktaṁ vṛṁ° sa° 29 a° .

पाण्डुक — pāṇḍuka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍuka mfn. = «pāṇḍu»

pāṇḍuka m. a pale or yellowish-white colour

pāṇḍuka m. jaundice

pāṇḍuka m. a species of rice (cf. «-ḍūka»)

pāṇḍuka m. (with Jainas) N. of one of the 9 treasures

pāṇḍuka m. N. of a son of Janam-ejaya and brother of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra

pāṇḍuka n. N. of a forest

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṇḍuka (von pāṇḍu) 1) adj. = pāṇḍu HALĀY. 4, 47, v. l. — 2) m. a)

«Gelbsucht» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.; vgl. pāṇḍukin. — b) «eine best.

Reisgattung» SUŚR. 1, 73, 4. 195, 6; vgl. pāṇḍūka. — c) N. pr. = pāṇḍu

2,d. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — d) N. eines der 9 Schätze bei den Jaina H. 193,

Sch. — 3) n. N. pr. eines Waldes ŚATR. 8, 34.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pāṇḍuka pāṇḍu + ka, m. The jaundice.

पाण्डुच्छाय — pāṇḍucchāya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍucchāya «pāṇḍu-cchāya» mfn. white-coloured
पाण्डुर — pāṇḍura Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍura mf («ā») n. whitish, white, pale, yellow &c.

pāṇḍura m. a form of jaundice

pāṇḍura m. Anogeissus Latifolia

pāṇḍura m. an Andropogon with white flowers

pāṇḍura m. N. of one of the attendants of Skanda

pāṇḍura mf («ā») n. («ā») f. Glycine Debilis

pāṇḍura m. of a Buddhist deity (cf. «pāṇḍarā»)

pāṇḍura n. the white leprosy, vitiligo

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṇḍura (von pāṇḍu) KĀŚ. und SIDDH. K. zu P. 5, 2, 107. 1) adj. f. ā

«weisslich, weiss, bleich» AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 23. H. 1393. an. 3, 577. MED. r.

183. HALĀY. 4, 47. 52. SUŚR. 1, 286, 9. 2, 168, 17. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 33,

2. 53, 7. -nakha 67, 3. kaca H. 571. HALĀY. 2, 377. candra- BHĀG. P. 8, 8,

3. mukhena śarapāṇḍunā RAGH. 14, 26. kṛśa- KATHĀS. 27, 34. 32, 155.

ātapatra, chattra R. 2, 2, 5. 98, 26. gṛha 57, 22. Spr. 91.

pāṇḍurāruṇavarṇāni srotāṁsi DAŚ. 1, 18. chavi ŚĀK. 58. ā- VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 35, 4. 53, 106. kapota 87, 13. āpāṇḍurībhūtamukhacchavi KUMĀRAS. 3,

33. Vgl. pāṇḍara. — 2) m. a) «eine Form der Gelbsucht» (kāmalāroga)

ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — b) «eine best. Pflanze», = maruvaka H. an. MED. —

c) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge des Skanda MBH. 9, 2575. — 3) f. ā =

māṣaparṇī «Glycine debilis Ait.» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) n. «der weisse

Aussatz» H. 466. HALĀY. 2, 449.

pāṇḍura 1) KATHĀS. 71, 2. — 5) f. ā N. pr. einer buddh. Göttin, = tārā

WILSON, Sel. Works 2, 36. pāṇḍarā (sic) Gattin Amitābha’s (während

Tārā die Gattin Amoghasiddha’s genannt wird) 12.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

pāṇḍura A soldier of Subrahmaṇya. (Śloka 73, Chapter 45, Śalya Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pāṇḍura pāṇḍu + ra,

I. adj., f. rā, Of a yellowish white colour, white, pale, Bhāg. P. 8, 8, 8.

II. m. a proper name.

— Comp. ā-, adj. a little pale, Amar. 89. vi-, adj. pale.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pāṇḍura a. whitish, pale.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pāṇḍura pāṇḍu-ra, a. whitish, white, pale: -tā, f. white colour;

-ya, den. P. colour whitish yellow;

i-ta, pp. coloured yellowish white;

i-man, m. pale colour;

ī-kṛ, colour yellowish white.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pāṇḍura pu° pāṇḍurvarṇo’syāsti ra . 1 śvetapītamiśrite varṇe amaraḥ 2

tadvati tri° . paḍi—ura pṛṣo° vṛddhiḥ . 3 śvetavarṇe 4 tadvati ca halā° . 5

kāmalākhye roge 6 śvitraroge na° śabdaratnā° . 7 māṣaparṇyāṁ strī ṭāp

rājani° .

पाण्डुरता — pāṇḍuratā Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍuratā «pāṇḍura-tā» f. white colour, whiteness

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṇḍuratā (von pāṇḍura) f. «die weisse Farbe» RĀJA-TAR. 4, 198.

PAÑCAT. 253, 2.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pāṇḍuratā pāṇḍura + tā, f. White colour, Pañc. 253, 2.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pāṇḍuratā f. -riman m. abstr. to prec.

पाण्डुरय — pāṇḍuraya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍuraya Nom. P. «yati», to colour white, Vāsav.
पाण्डुरित — pāṇḍurita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍurita «pāṇḍurita» mfn. white-coloured

mfn. Balar.

पाण्डुरिमन् — pāṇḍuriman Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍuriman m. white colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṇḍuriman (von pāṇḍura) m. «eine bleiche Farbe» NAIṢ 22, 54.

पाण्डुरीकरण — pāṇḍurīkaraṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍurīkaraṇa «pāṇḍurī-karaṇa» n. colouring white
पाण्डुरीकरणकृ — pāṇḍurīkaraṇakṛ Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍurīkaraṇakṛ «pāṇḍurī-karaṇa-kṛ» to colour white
पीत — pīta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pīta mfn. (1. «pā») drunk, sucked, sipped, quaffed, imbibed &c. &c.

pīta ifc. having drunk, soaked, steeped, saturated, filled with (also with

instr.) (cf. g. «āhitāgny-ādi»)

pīta n. drinking

pīta mf («ā») n. (possibly fr. 2. «pi» or «pyai», the colour of butter ind oil

being yellowish) yellow (the colour of the Vaiśyas, white being that of the

Brāhmans, red that of the Kshatriyas, and black that of the śūdras) &c.

pīta m. yellow colour

pīta m. a yellow gem, topaz

pīta m. a yellow pigment prepared from the urine of kine

pīta m. N. of sev. plants (Alangium Hexapetalum, Carthamus Tinctorius,

Trophis Aspera)

pīta m. of the Vaiśyas in śālmala-dvipa

pīta mf («ā») n. («ā») f. N. of sev. plants (Curcuma Longa and Aromatica,

a species of Dalbergia Sissoo, a species of Musa, Aconitum Ferox,

Panicuni Italicum = «mahā-jyotihmatī»)

pīta m. a kind of yellow pigment (= «go-rocanā»)

pīta m. a mystical N. of the letter «ṣ»

pīta n. a yellow substance

pīta n. gold

pīta n. yellow orpiment

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pīta a. [pā-karmaṇi kta]

(1) Drunk, quaffed; vanāya pītapratibaddhavatsāṁ (gāṁ musoca) R.

2. 1.

(2) Steeped, soaked in, filled or saturated with

(3) Absorbed, drunk up, evaporated; Ku. 4. 44.

(4) Watered, sprinkled with water; pātuṁ na prayama vyavasyati

jalaṁ yaṣma svapīteṣu yā S. 4 8

(5) Yellow; vidyutprabhāracitapītapaṭottarīyaḥ Mk. 5. 2. —taḥ

(1) Yellow colour.

(2) Topaz.

(3) Safflower.

(4) A yellow pigment prepared from cow’s urine. —taṁ

(1) Gold.

(2) Yellow orpiment.

— Comp.

—abdhiḥ an epithet of Agastya.

—aṁbaraḥ 1. an epithet of Viṣṇu; iti nigaditaḥ prītaḥ pītāṁbaropi

tathākarot Gīt. 12. —2. an actor. —3 a religious mendicant wearing yellow

garments.

—aruṇa a. yellowish-red. (

—ṇaḥ) the middle of day-break.

—aśman m. topaz.

—kadalī a species of banana (svarṇakadalī). —kaṁdaṁ the carrot.

—kāveraṁ 1. saffron. —2. brass.

—kāṣṭhaṁ yellow sanders.

—gadhaṁ yellow sandal.

—caṁdanaṁ 1. a species of sandal-wood. —2. saffron. —3.

turmeric.

—caṁpakaḥ a lamp.

—tuṁḍaḥ a Kāraṇḍava bird.

—dāru n. a kind of pine or Sarala tree.

—dugdhā 1. a milch cow. —2. a cow whose milk has been pledged.

—3. a cow tied up to be milked.

—druḥ the Sarala tree.

—nīla a. green. (

—laḥ) the green colour.

—pādā a kind of bird (Mar. mainā). —puṣpaḥ N. of several plants,

caṁpaka, karṇikāra &c.

—maṇiḥ a topaz.

—mākṣikaṁ a kind of mineral substance

—mūlakaṁ the carrot.

—yūthī yellow jasmine.

—rakta a. yellowish-red, orange-coloured. (

—ktaṁ) a kind of yellow gem, the topaz.

—rāgaḥ 1. the yellow colour. —2. wax. —3. the fibres of a lotus.

—lohaṁ brass.

—vālukā turmeric.

—vāsas m. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa.

—sāraḥ 1. the topaz. —2. the sandal tree. (

—raṁ) yellow sandal-wood.

—sāri n. antimony.

—skaṁdhaḥ a hog.

—sphaṭikaḥ the topaz.

—harita a. yellowishgreen.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pīta (partic. praet. pass. von 1. pā) «getrunken»: jīvapītasarga adj.

«dessen Strahlen (Güsse) von Lebendigen getrunken sind» ṚV. 7, 149, 2.

Belege aus der späteren Literatur für diese und andere Bedd. s. u. pā.

pīta 1) adj. f. ā «gelb» AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. H. 1394. an. 2, 178. MED. t. 34.

HALĀY. 4, 50. BALA beim Schol. zu NAIṢ 8, 98. VYUTP. 48. ĀŚV. GṚHY.

2, 8. CHĀND. UP. 8, 6, 1. SUŚR. 1, 45, 3. 61, 9. pītāvabhāsa 84, 6. 259, 6.

262, 15. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 21. 29, 22. Die Farbe der Vaiśya, wie weiss

die der Brahmanen, roth die der Krieger und schwarz die der Śūdra, 3, 19;

vgl. MBH. 12, 6934. MUIR, Sanskrit Texts I, 191. — AK. 2, 4, 2, 52. 56.

HALĀY. 2, 50. MĀRK. P. 109, 65. -kauṣeya Citat beim Schol. zu ŚĀK. 6, 5.

-cchavivarṇa VYUTP. 205. -māñjiṣṭha R. 2, 94, 5. āpītasūryaṁ nabhaḥ

MṚCCH. 84, 8. — 2) m. a) «Topas» RATNAM. bei WILS. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

— b) «ein gelbes aus Kuhurin verfertigtes Pigment» RATNAM. bei WILS. —

c) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: «Alangium hexapetalum» (aṅkoṭha);

«Safflor, Carthamus tinctorius; Trophis aspera» (śākhoṭa) RĀJAN. — 3) f.

ā a) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: «Gelbwurz», = haridrā AK. 2, 9, 41. H.

418. H. an. MED. RATNAM. 58. = dāruharidrā, mahājyotiṣmatī,

kapilaśiṁśapā, priyaṅgu RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = ativiṣā ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. —

b) «eine Art gelbes Pigment» (gorocanā) RĀJAN. — c) mystische Bez.

«des Buchstabens» ṣa Ind. St. 2, 316. — 4) n. a) «Gold» BALA a. a. O.

NAIṢ 8, 98. — b) «Auripigment» RĀJAN.

pīta Z. 2 lies 1, 149, 2.

pīta s. u. 2. pī.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pīta pīta, adj., f. tā, Of a yellow colour, Rām. 2, 94, 5.

— Comp. ā-, adj. yellowish, Rām. 2, 76, 4.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pīta [1] -> pā2.

pīta [2] a. yellow; abstr. tā f.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pīta 2. pīta, a. yellow: -tā, f. yellowness; yellow colour.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pīta tri° pā—karmaṇi kta . 1 pānakarmaṇi bhāve kta . 2 pāne na° pivati

varṇāntaraṁ pā—ūṇā° kartari kta . 3 varṇabhede pu° 4 tadvati tri°

amaraḥ . 5 haritāle na° medi° . pītaṁ pānamastyasya ac . 6 pānakartari

tri° vanāya pīta pratibaddhavatsām raghuḥ . kāvye

varṇanīyapītavarṇadravyāṇi kavikalpalatāyāmuktāni yathā pītāni brahma 1

jīve 2 ndra 3 garuḍe 4 śvaradṛ 5 gjaṭāḥ 6 . gaurī 7 dvāpara 8 gomūtra 9

madhu 10 vīrarasā 11 rajaḥ 12 . haridrā 13 rocanā 14 rīti 15 gandhake 16

dīpa 17 campake 18 . kiñjalka 19 valkale 20 śāli 21 haritāla 22 manaḥśilāḥ

23 . karṇikāvaṁ 24 cakravāka 25 vānarau 26 śārikāmukham 27 .

keśavāṁśuka 28 maṇḍūka 29 sarāga 30 kanakādayaḥ 31 .

पुंडरीकम् — puṁḍarīkam Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

puṁḍarīkam

(1) A lotus-flower, especially a white lotus: U. 6. 12, 29; Māl. 9. 14.

(2) A white parasol.

(3) A medicine, drug. —kaḥ

(1) The white colour.

(2) N. of the elephant presiding over the south-east direction: R. 18.

8.

(3) A tiger.

(4) A kind of serpent.

(5) A species of rice.

(6) A kind of leprosy.

(7) A fever in an elephant.

(8) A kind of mango tree.

(9) A pitcher, water-pot. (10) Fire

(11) A (se ctarial) mark on the fore-head.

— Comp.

—akṣaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu; R. 18. 8.

—plavaḥ a kind of bird.

—muvī a kind of leech.

पुण्डरीक — puṇḍarīka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899puṇḍarīka n. ( «puṇ» [?]; cf. a lotus-flower (esp. a white lotus; ifc.

expressive of beauty cf. g. «vyāghrādi») &c.&c. (it is sacred to śikhin, one

of the Buddhas 515)

n. a white umbrella

n. a kind of drug

puṇḍarīka n. (m. or n. ?) a mark on the forehead

n. N. of a Tīrtha

puṇḍarīka m. a kind of sacrifice

puṇḍarīka m. a species of rice

puṇḍarīka m. a kind of fragrant mango

puṇḍarīka m. Artemisia Indica

puṇḍarīka m. a variety of the sugar-cane

puṇḍarīka m. a tiger

puṇḍarīka m. a kind of bird

puṇḍarīka m. a kind of serpent

puṇḍarīka m. a kind of leprosy

puṇḍarīka m. fever in an elephant

puṇḍarīka m. white (the colour)

puṇḍarīka m. N. of a Nāga

puṇḍarīka m. of the elephant of the south-east quarter

puṇḍarīka m. of an ancient king

puṇḍarīka m. of a son of Nabha or Nabhas

puṇḍarīka m. of a Brāhman renowned for filial piety, and afterwards

worshipped as the god Viṭhobl 263

puṇḍarīka m. (with Jainas) of a Gaṇa-dhara

puṇḍarīka m. of a hermit (son of Sveta-ketu and Lakshmi)

puṇḍarīka m. of a poet

puṇḍarīka m. of a mountain

puṇḍarīka m. of a daughter of Vasiṣṭha (wife of Prāṇa or Pāṇḍu)

puṇḍarīka m. of a river in Krauṇca-dvipa

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

puṇḍarīka (puṇḍarīka UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 4, 20.) 1) n. a) «Lotusblüthe»,

insbes. «eine weisse», AK. 1, 2, 3, 40. TRIK. 3, 3, 32. H. 1162. an. 4, 20.

MED. k. 199. HALĀY. 3, 58. ŚĀŚVATA bei UJJVAL. VYUTP. 142. ṚV. 10,

142, 8. TBR. 1, 8, 2, 1. ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 5, 6. fgg. 14, 5, 3, 10. 9, 3, 14.

nakṣatrāṇāmavakāśena puṇḍarīkaṁ jāyate PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9, 6. tasya

yathā kapyāsaṁ puṇḍarīkamevamakṣiṇī CHĀND. UP. 1, 6, 7. MBH. 1,

6592. 7283. 5, 2564. 13, 4896. 5244. HIḌ. 1, 32. HARIV. 8996. 12669.

SUŚR. 1, 141, 21. -palāśākṣa R. 2, 87, 3 (95, 3 GORR.). puṇḍarīkātapatra

adj. RAGH. 4, 17. MĀLAV. 65. BRAHMAP. in LA. 53, 3. Inschr. in Journ. of

the Am. Or. S. 7, 25, Śl. 6. śreyaḥśriyaḥ puṇḍarīkam ŚATR. 1, 6. RAGH.

18, 7 (am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā). als Bild des menschlichen Herzens

AV. 10, 8, 43. CHĀND. UP. 8, 1, 1. SUŚR. 1, 248, 4. puṇḍarīkeṇa sadṛśaṁ

hṛdayaṁ syādadhomukham 329, 9. in comp. mit dem verglichenen

Gegenstande als Ausdruck der «Schönheit» gaṇa vyāghrādi zu P. 2, 1, 56.

— b) «ein weisser Sonnenschirm» TRIK. H. an. MED. ŚĀŚVATA a. a. O.

(es ist sitacchattre st. sitapattre zu lesen). — c) «ein best. Heilmittel» H.

an. MED. ŚĀŚVATA. — d) (könnte auch m. sein) «Stirnzeichen» (tilaka

Randglosse): śivaśriyaḥ ŚATR. 1, 6; vgl. puṇḍra, puṇḍhra. — e) N. pr.

eines heiligen Badeplatzes MBH. 3, 6053. — 2) m. a) «ein best. Opfer»:

aśvamedho rājasūyaḥ puṇḍarīko ‘tha gosavaḥ. etairapi mahāyajñairiṣṭaṁ

te MBH. 3, 1133. 5091. 6053. 5, 4008. 4090. 7, 2293. 9, 2888. 13, 1732. —

b) «eine Art Reis» SUŚR. 1, 195, 6. «eine wohlriechende Mango-Art» H.

an. MED. «Artemisia indica» (damanaka) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. «eine Art

Zuckerrohr» (koṣakāra; vgl. puṇḍra) TRIK. H. an. MED. WILSON giebt

diese Bed. nach BHAR. zu AK. und übersetzt koṣakāra durch

«Seidenraupe», fügt aber ein Fragezeichen hinzu. — c) «Tiger» AK. 3, 4, 1,

11. TRIK. H. 1285. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 71. ŚĀŚVATA. — d) «eine Art

Schlange», = rājilāhi H. an. N. pr. eines Schlangendämons MBH. 5, 3629.

VP. 149, N. 16. — e) «eine Art Aussatz» SUŚR. 1, 268, 1. saśvetaṁ

raktaparyantaṁ puṇḍarīkadalopamam. sotsedhaṁ ca sarāgaṁ ca

puṇḍarīkaṁ pracakṣate.. MĀDHAVAK. im ŚKDR. — f) «Fieber beim

Elephanten» H. an. — g) «Krug.» — h) «die weisse Farbe»

ANEKĀRTHAKOṢA im ŚKDR. — i) N. pr. des Weltelephanten im Südosten

AK. 1, 1, 2, 5. TRIK. H. 170. H. an. MED. HĀR. 148. HALĀY. 1, 104.

ŚĀŚVATA. RAGH. 18, 7. — k) N. pr. eines alten Königs MBH. 2, 325. eines

Sohnes des Nabha (Nabhas) HARIV. 824. RAGH. 18, 7. VP. 386. BHĀG. P.

9, 12, 1. N. pr. eines Gaṇadhara bei den Jaina H. an. ŚATR. 1, 6. fgg. 499.

14, 186. N. pr. eines Einsiedlers, eines Sohnes des Śvetaketu von der

Lakṣmī, KĀD. in ZdmG.7, 584. SĀH. D. 79, 18. — l) N. pr. eines Berges

ŚATR. 1, 332. 5, 254. 293. -śiroratna 1, 6. — 3) f. ā N. pr. einer Apsaras

VYĀḌI zu H. 113. MBH. 1, 4819. 4, 259. HARIV. 12471. 14164 (wo -kā su-

zu lesen ist). R. 2, 91, 45 (100, 46 GORR.). N. pr. einer Tochter

Vasiṣṭha’s und Gemahlin Prāṇa’s (Pāṇḍu’s) VP. 82, N. 1. 84, N. 8. — Vgl.

puruṣa-, pauṇḍarīka.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

puṇḍarīka 1 I A King born of the race of Śrī Rāma. He was the son of

Niṣadha and father of Kṣemadhanvā. (9th Skandha, Bhāgavata).

puṇḍarīka 2 II One of the Aṣṭadiggajas (elephants guarding the eight

zones). (See under Aṣṭadiggajas).

puṇḍarīka 3 III A brahmin who lived during the period of Nārada. Nārada

once held a scholarly conversation with him on virtue. He saw Mahāviṣṇu

in person and attained sāyujya (intimate union with a deity). (Chapter

124, Anuśāsana Parva).

puṇḍarīka 4 IV A great yajña. (Śloka 100, Chapter 5, Sabhā Parva).

puṇḍarīka 5 V A holy place situated on the border of Kurukṣetra. One

who bathes in a sacred pond there would get the benefit of doing a

Puṇḍarīkayajña. (Śloka 83, Chapter 83, Vana Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

puṇḍarīka puṇḍarīka,

I. n.

1. The white lotus flower.

2. A lotus in general, Rām. 2, 95, 3 Gorr.

II. m.

1. A kind of sacrifice, MBh. 3, 1133.

2. A kind of rice.

3. A kind of leprosy.

4. The elephant of the south-east quarter, Ragh. 18, 7.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

puṇḍarīka n. a lotus-flower, esp. a white one (poss. -vant); m. a man’s

name, f. ā a woman’s name.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

puṇḍarīka puṇḍarīka, n. (white) lotus flower (also as an emblem of the

human heart); m. N. of the elephant of the south-eastern quarter;

-mukhī, f. kind of leeach;

-akṣa, m. Lotus-eyed, ep. of Viṣṇu or Kṛṣṇa.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

puṇḍarīka na° puḍi—īka ni° . 1 śvetapadme 2 agnikīṇasthe 3 diggaje pu° 4

vyāghre puṁstrī° amaraḥ striyāṁ jātitvāt ṅīṣ . 5 śvetapattre 6 bheṣaje ca

na° . 7 āmre 8 rājilasarpe 9 hastijvare pu° hemaca° . 10 damanakavṛkṣe

rājani° . 11 kamaṇḍalau 12 śvetavarṇe anekārthakoṣaḥ 13 śvetavarṇavati

tri° 14 kuṣṭhabhede pu° . saśvetaṁ raktaparyantaṁ puṇḍarīkadalopamam

. sotsedhañca sarāgañca puṇḍarokaṁ pracakṣate mādhavakaraḥ . 15

koṣakārabhede pu° medi° .

पुण्ड्र — puṇḍra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899puṇḍra m. N. of a son of the Daitya Bali (ancestor of the Puṇḍras)

puṇḍra m. (pl.)of a people and their country (the modern Bengal and

Behar) &c.

m. of a son of Vasu-deva

m. sugar-cane (or a red variety of it)

m. Gaertnera Racemosa

m. Ficus Infectoria

m. Clerodendrum Phlomoides

m. a white lotus-flower

m. a worm

puṇḍra m. or n. a mark or line made on the forehead with ashes or

colouring substances to distinguish Vaiṣṇavas fr. śaivas &c., a sectarian

mark 66; 67 (cf. «ūrdhva-p-, tri-p-«)

puṇḍra n. N. of a mythical city between the mountains Hima-vat and

Hemakūṭa

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

puṇḍra 1) m. «eine Art Zuckerrohr» AK. 2, 4, 5, 29. H. 1194. H. an. 2, 439.

MED. r. 60. puṇḍrekṣu RĀGA-TAR. 4, 500. — 2) m. pl. N. pr. eines Volkes

und des von ihm bewohnten Landes («das Land des Zuckerrohrs»; vgl.

gauḍa), das heutige Bengalen und Bihār, TRIK. 2, 1, 7. H. an. MED. LIA.

I, 140. fg. 271. 556. fg. AIT. BR. 7, 18. MBH. 1, 4221. 4453. 2, 584. 1096.

1872. 6, 358 (VP. 190). 8, 236. 14, 832. R. 4, 41, 18. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5,

70. 9, 15. 10, 14. 16, 3. VP. 176. MĀRK. P. 57, 45.

sūtairmāgadhapuṇḍraiśca gīyamānaḥ HARIV. 15851. Der Name des

Landes wird auf einen gleichnamigen Sohn Bali’s zurückgeführt MBH. 1,

4219. 8, 875. HARIV. 1685. VP. 444. BHĀG. P. 9, 23, 4. Vielleicht ist auch

MBH. 1, 228 puṇḍraḥ st. pundraḥ zu lesen. Nach dem VĀYU-P. (s. VP.

231, N. 4) N. einer mythischen, zwischen Himavant und Hemakūta

gelegenen Stadt. — 3) m. «Gaertnera racemosa» (atimuktaka, vāsantī) H.

an. MED. — 4) m. = puṇḍarīka «weissblühender Lotus» H. an. MED. — 5)

m. «ein best. Baum», = hrasvaplakṣa RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 6) «Mal,

Sectenzeichen» (= tilaka nach ŚKDR. soll tilaka in H. an. N. eines Baumes

sein, citra, lalāma) AK. 3, 4, 23, 145. HALĀY. 5, 69. m. H. 653. H. an.

MED. n. HALĀY. 2, 386. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 20, 1, 34. 38. Vgl. tri-,

ūrdhva- (auch PADMA-P. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 14,b,17). Vgl. puṇḍhra. — 7)

m. «Wurm» H. an. MED. — 8) m. N. pr. eines Daitja H. an. MED. oxyt.

UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 2, 13. — Vgl. catuḥpuṇḍra, pauṇḍra, pauṇḍraka,

pauṇḍrika.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

puṇḍra 1 I An ancient King in Bhārata. (Śloka 224, Chapter 1, Ādi Parva).

puṇḍra 2 II An ancient region of Bhārata. The region comprised then the

present district of Mālada, certain portions on the east coast of river Kosī

and certain portions of Dinājpur. King Pāṇḍu conquered Puṇḍra. (Chapter

112, Ādi Parva). The people of Puṇḍra came to the Rājasūya of

Yudhiṣṭhira with presents. The Pauṇḍrakavāsudeva mentioned in the

Bhāgavata was the King of Puṇḍra. Karṇa and Arjuna conquered this

country at different times. (Chapter 52, Sabhā Parva; Chapter 8, Karṇa

Parva; Chapter 82, Āśvamedhika Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

puṇḍra puṇḍra, m.

1. pl. The name of a people and their country, the greater part of

Bengal and part of Behar.

2. A kind of sugar-cane.

3. (and n.), A mark or line made on the forehead with sandal.

— Comp. tri-, n. three horizontal marks made across the forehead,

especially by the followers of Śiva.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

puṇḍra m. N. of an ancient hero; pl. N. of a people.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

puṇḍra puṇḍra, m. pl. N. of the people of the modern Bengal and Behar;

n. sectarian mark;

-ka, m. pl. id.;

-vardhana, n. N. of a town;

-ikṣin, m. sugar-cane.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

puṇḍra pu° puḍi—bhedane rak . (puṁḍiyā) 1 ikṣubhede amaraḥ .

ikṣuśabde dṛśyam ūrdhvapuṇḍrakādau ikṣubhedatulyākāratayā prayogaḥ 2

detyabhede 3 atimuktake 4 citrake 5 kṛmau 6 puṇḍarīke 7 deśabhede pu°

medi° . sa ca deśaḥ vṛ° 14 a° udayagiribhadra

gauḍakapauṇḍotkalakāśimekhalāsvaṣṭhāḥ pūrvasyāmuktaḥ . tena tasya

prāksthatvāt nagarāntatve dvipadavṛddhiḥ pauṇḍranāgara tatra bhave tri°

puṇḍraḥ kaliṅgaśca tathā bāle ca kṣatramucyate harivaṁ° 318 a°

so’bhijano’sya tasya rājā vā aṇ . pauṇḍra pitrādikrameṇa taddeśavāsini

tannṛpe ca . bahutve tasya luk . sūtairmāgadhapuṇḍraiśca

gīyamānastatastataḥ harivaṁ° 311 a° . 8 tilakavṛkṣe hemaca° . 9

hrasvaplakṣe rājani° . svārghe ka . puṇḍraka mādhavīlatāyām amaraḥ .

ikṣubhedādau ca .

प्रपाण्डु — prapāṇḍu Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899prapāṇḍu «pra-pāṇḍu» or «-ḍura» mfn. very white, of a dazzling white

colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

prapāṇḍu (1. pra + pā-) adj. «sehr weiss, blendend weiss» SUŚR. 2, 310,

18.

बलक्ष — balakṣa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899balakṣa mf («ī») n. (also written «valakṣa») white &c.

balakṣa m. white (the colour)

balakṣa m. (with «pakṣa») the light half of a month

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

balakṣa a. [balaṁ kṣāyatyasmāt kṣai-ka] White;

dviradadataṁbalakṣamalakṣyata sphuritabhṛṁgamṛgacchavi ketakaṁ Śi.

6. 34. —kṣaḥ The white colour.

— Comp.

—guḥ (for go ‘a ray’) the moon;

yathānatyarjunābjanmasadṛkṣāṁko balakṣaguḥ Kāv. 1. 45 (given as an

instance of the prasāda quality of the Gauḍīyas).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

balakṣa (auch ba-) adj. f. ī «weiss» AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. H. 1393. HALĀY. 4, 17.

TBR. 3, 8, 23, 3. TS. 2, 1, 2, 2. 5, 6, 12, 1. KĀṬH. 12, 13. 27, 2. kṛṣṇa-

PAÑKAV. BR. 17, 1, 14. LĀṬY. 8, 6, 15, 16. KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 4, 17. ŚIŚ. 6,

34. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 386. H. an. 3, 182. — Vgl. palakṣa.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

balakṣa f. balakṣī white.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

balakṣa balakṣa, a. (ī) white: -gu, m. (white-rayed), moon.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

balakṣa pu° balaṁ kṣāyatyasmāt kṣai—ka . 1 śuklavarṇe . 2 tadvati tri° .

amaraḥ . antyasthavādirayamiti svāmī .

बहल — bahala Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899bahala mfn. thick, dense, compact, firm, solid

mfn. bushy, shaggy (as a tail)

mfn. wide, extensive

mfn. deep, intense (as a colour)

mfn. harsh (as a tone)

mfn. manifold, copious, abundant (ibc. = in a high degree; ifc. = filled

with, chiefly consisting of). (often v.l. «bahula»)

bahala m. a kind of sugar-cane

bahala m. Anethum Sowa

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

bahala a. [baṁh —kalac nalopaśca]

(1) Very much, copious, abundant, plentiful, manifold, great, strong;

U. 1. 38; 3. 23; Śi. 9. 8; Bv. 4. 27.

(2) Thick, dense.

(3) Shaggy (as a tail); bahalottuṁgalāṁgūla Mal. 3.

(4) Hard, firm, compact.

(5) Harsh (as a sound). —laḥ A kind of sugar-cane. —lā Large

cardamoms.

— Comp.

—gaṁdhaḥ a kind of sandal.

—tvacaḥ the white flowering lodhra.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

bahala (von bah) 1) adj. «dicht, dick» (von einem Stoffe, einer flüssigen

Masse) H. 1447. SUŚR. 1, 45, 4. 64, 11. 343, 5. 2, 310, 15. tuṣāravarṣa

RĀJA-TAR. 4, 367. nṛpabahalamāṁsamastiṣkapaṅkaprāgbhāra PRAB. 5,

7. -phenilabudbudaughaiḥ 55, 5. -rudhiratoyāḥ 87, 11.

samastāśāstamberamakarṇatālāsphālanabahalatarapavanasaṁpāta 2, 7.

vahalānurāgakuruvinda so v. a. «dunkelroth» ŚIŚ. 9, 8. «derb» von einem

Tone PRAB. 85, 3. «breit, umfänglich» SUŚR. 1, 54, 17. 2, 201, 16. aśru-

so v. a. «von Thränen erfüllt» DAŚAK. 128, 13. «mannichfach, vielfach»:

parivādavahaladoṣa MṚCCH. 55, 23. kliṣṭabahalakleśa KATHĀS. 36, 73.

adv.: bahalodyatavipramattavīvāhavidhi (?) 34, 255. In allen aus PRAB.

angeführten Stellen hat die v.l. bahula. — 2) m. «eine Art Zuckerrohr.» —

3) f. ā a) «Anethum Sowa Roxb.» (śatapuṣpā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b)

«grosse Kardamomen» (sthūlailā) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR.

bahala vgl. bāhalya weiter unten.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

bahala a. thick, dense, wide, large, intense; filled with, consisting mostly

in (—°).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

bahala bah-ala, a. thick, dense; bushy, shaggy (tail); wide, extensive;

deep (colour, tone); manifold, copious, abundant; -°, filled with, chiefly

consisting in; °-, ad. greatly: -tā, f. thickness.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

bahala tri° bahi—kalac nalopaśca 1 pracure 2 bahuśabdārthe ca .

ब्रह्मदत्त — brahmadatta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899brahmadatta «brahma-datta» mfn. given by Brahma

mfn. given by Brahmā

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. N. of various men (cf. «naḍādi»)

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of a man with the patr. Caikitāneya

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of a king (pl. his descendants)

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of a prince of the Paṇcālas in Kāmpilya

&c.

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of a king of the Sālvas

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of a prince in Vārānasī

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of a prince in śrāvastī

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. (cf. 420, I) of a prince in Campā

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of a prince in Kusuma-pura

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of the 12th Cakra-vartin in Bhārata

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of a Brāhman

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of a merchant

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of the father of Kṛiṣṇa-datta

brahmadatta «brahma-datta» m. of sev. authors

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

brahmadatta (brahman + datta) 1) adj. a) «von» Brahman «gegeben»:

iṣavaḥ R. 3, 18, 38. -varaḥ skandaḥ MBH. 3, 14619. -varaṁ saraḥ 13,

7282. — b) «durch das» Brahman «gegeben»: mṛttike brahmadattāsi

kāśyapenābhimantritā TAITT. ĀR. 10, 1, 8. — 2) m. oxyt. N. pr. eines

Mannes gaṇa naḍādi zu P. 4, 1, 99. Caikitāneya ŚAT. BR. 14, 4, 1, 26.

eines Fürsten MBH. 2, 331. pl. «seine Nachkommen» 334. N. pr. eines

Fürsten der Pañkāla in Kāmpilya R. 1, 34, 45. fg. (35, 44 GORR.). MBH.

12, 5136 fgg. 8603. HARIV. 981. 1039. fgg. 1252. fgg. VP. 452. BHĀG. P.

9, 21, 25. P. 2, 3, 9, Sch. der Śālva HARIV. 15387. fgg. in Vārāṇasī BURN.

Intr. 140. SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 235(5). KATHĀS. 3, 27. 19, 54. in Campā

SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 235(5). in Śrāvastī ebend. 234 (4). in Kusumapura

HIOUEN-THSANG 1, 244. — LALIT. ed. Calc. 199, 10. N. pr. des 12ten

Cakravartin in Bhārata H. 694. N. pr. eines Brahmanen HARIV. 7994. fgg.

PAÑCAT. 264, 22. KATHĀS. 33, 37. eines Kaufmanns 28, 115. — Vgl.

brāhmadattāyana.

brahmadatta 2) ein Fürst in Vārāṇasī KATHĀS. 114, 20.

brahmadatta 2) fährt zur Hölle HEM. YOGAŚ. 2, 27.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

brahmadatta 1 I A famous king of Kāṁpilyapura.

brahmadatta 2 II Another King who ruled over Kāṁpilya. This King was

the son of the hermit Cūli and his wife Somadā, a Gandharva woman

whose mother was Ūrmilā. When he was ruling Kāṁpilya, Kuśanābha was

the King of Kānyakubja. One hundred beautiful daughters were born to

the King Kuśanābha. One day while they were playing in the jungle

Vāyubhagavān (wind-god) saw them and grew lustful. But they did not

yield to his request. So he got angry and cursed them and they became

hump-backed. The King was very sorry. He presented his hundred

hunch-backed daughters to King Brahmadatta, who, by his divine power

straightened their backs. When they regained their former form they

became the wives of Brahmadatta. This story occurs in Vālmīki

Rāmāyaṇa, Bālakāṇḍa, Sargas 32 & 33.

brahmadatta 3 III Mention is made in Mahābhārata, Bhaviṣya Parva,

Chapter 104, about another Brahmadatta. He was the King of Sālva.

Though he had two wives he had no children. Finally by the grace of Śiva

two children were born to them. They were called Haṁsa and Ḍibhaka.

(For further information see Ḍibhaka).

brahmadatta 4 IV A king who ruled over the country of Kāśi. One night

he saw two swans flying in the air. They were of golden colour. There

were a number of swans around them. They seemed like two lightnings in

the midst of white clouds. Brahmadatta wished to see them again. His

desire increased to such an extent that he had desire for nothing else. He

consulted his ministers and made a lake. Every creature which seemed

beautiful to him was brought to that place. Hearing this those two swans

also came there. By and by he tamed them and asked them how they got

the golden colour. The swans said thus: «Oh King! you might have heard

of the famous mountain Mandara, which is the field of games of the

Devas (gods). At the time of the churning of the milk sea when this

mountain was used as churn-drill, Amṛtaṁ (celestial nectar of

immortality) touched this mountain. So the flowers, fruits and roots in the

vicinity of this mountain got the power of removing death, wrinkles etc.

Candracūḍa also will come to this mountain occasionally to play on the

top of it and so it became more glorious than the mount Kailāsa. One day

while Mahādeva was playing in those gardens he had to leave on an

urgent matter concerning Gods. So he left Pārvatī there and went away.

Devī began to walk about in those gardens with pangs of separation.

Spring season came. The Gaṇas (servants of Śiva) and the maids of

Pārvatī attended on her. One day Maṇipuṣpeśvara, a Gaṇa, hankered

after Candralekhā, daughter of Jayā. She had been engaged in fanning

Pārvatī. Both were young and their figures suited each other. Candralekhā

reciprocated his love. Understanding this Piṅgeśvara and Guheśvara, two

gaṇas looked at each other and smiled. Seeing this Devī looked round

with anger to see what caused them to smile. They squinted their eyes

and showed Manipuṣpe vara and Candralekhā to Devī. Because of

separation she had been much worried, weary and sad. So all these

affairs made her angry. She said: «It is good that you behave like this

when I am in this plight ! The two are making love. Seeing that, you are

laughing. May these two dotards be born on the earth and become

husband and wife there. Let you two who laughed before me without

humility also be born on the earth, first as poor Brāhmaṇas, and then as

Brahmarakṣas (demon friends), outcasts, robbers, dogs with tails cut off

and finally as various kind of birds.» Thus she cursed the four of gaṇas.

Then a gaṇa named Dhūrjaṭa said to Pārvatī: «Devī, this is unfortunate.

They have not commited any severe crime.» Devī got angry at him and

cursed him too: «May you also be born on the earth as a human being.»

After this Jaya the loved maid of Pārvatī requested her for absolution

from curse, for all. The Devī said that all of them would get absolution at

the place of penance of Brahmā and other gods and would return here. Of

these, Candralekhā and her husband and Dhūrjaṭa would be happy on the

earth. The two others would lead a miserable life on the earth.»

(Kathāsaritsāgara, Padmāvatīlaṁbaka, Taraṅga 1).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

brahmadatta a. given by Brahman; a man’s name.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

bra(vra)hmadatta ikṣākuvaṁśye nṛpabhede 2 ta° . 2 hiraṇyagarbheṇa

datte tri° 4 ta° . 3 viprāya datte tri° . 4 śukadevasya kanyāyāṁ

kṛtvīsamākhyāyāṁ aṇuhasya putrabhede pu° tatkathā harivaṁ° 11 a°

dṛśyā .

मुटः — muṭaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

muṭaḥ 1. a tree bearing large blossoms. —2. the sun. —3. a rogue. (—

ṭaṁ) a large free market or fair. —mūla a. 1. rootless (as a tree). —2.

baseless, unfounded (as a statement, charge &c.). —3. eradicated. —

megha a. cloudless. —medha a. without understanding, stupid; foolish,

dull. —moha a. free from illusion. (—haḥ) an epithet of Śiva. —yatna a.

inactive, lazy, dull. —yaṁtraṇa a. 1. unrestrained, unobstructed,

uncontrolled, unrestricted. —2. unruly, self-willed, independent. (—ṇaṁ)

1. squeezing out. —2. absence of restraint, independence. —yaśaska a.

without fame, discreditable, inglorious. —yukti f. 1. disunion. —2. absence

of connection or government. —3. unfitness, impropriety. —yuktika a. 1.

disjoined, unconnected. —2. illogical, unmeaning. —3. unfit, improper. —

yūtha a. separated from the herd, strayed from the flock (as an

elephant). —yūṣa = niryāsa, —yogakṣema a. free from care. —rakta a.

(nīrakta) colourless, faded. —raja, —rajaska a. (nīraja, nīrajaska) 1. free

from dust. —2. devoid of passion or darkness. (—jaḥ) an epithet of Śiva.

—rajas (nīrajas) a. see nīraja. (—f.) a woman not menstruating. -tamasā

absence of passion or darkness. —rata (nīrata) a. not attached to,

indifferent. —raṁdhra a. (nīraṁdhra) 1. without holes or interstices, very

close or contiguous, thickly situated; U. 2. 23. —2. thick, dense. —3.

coarse, gross. —rava a. (nīrava) not making any noise, noiseless. R. 8.

58. —rasa a. (nīrasa) 1. tasteless, unsavoury, flavourless. —2. (fig.)

insipid, without any poetic charm; nīrasānāṁ padyānāṁ S. D. 1. —3.

sapless, without juice, withered or dried up; S. Til. 9. —4. vain, useless,

fruitless; alabdhaphalanīrasān mama vidhāya tasmin jane V. 2. 11. —5.

disagreeable. —6. cruel, merciless. (—saḥ) the pomegranate. —rasana a.

(nīrasana) having no girdle (rasanā); Ki. 5. 11. —ruc a. (nīruc) without

lustre, faded, dim. —ruj, —ruja a. (nīruj, nīruja) free from sickness,

healthy, sound; nīrujasya kimauṣadhaiḥ H. 1. —rūpa a. (nīrūpa) formless,

shapeless. (—paḥ) 1. air, wind. —2. a god. (—paṁ) ether. —roga a.

(nīrogaṁ) free from sickness or disease, healthy, sound; Pt. 1. 118. —

lakṣaṇa a. 1. having no auspicious marks, ill-featured. —2.

undistinguished. —3. unimportant, insignificant. —4. unspotted. —5. having

a white back. —lajja a. shameless, impudent. —liṁga a. having no

distinguishing or characteristic marks. —lipta a. 1. unanointed. —2.

undefiled, unsullied. —3. indifferent to. (—ptaḥ) 1. N. of Kṛṣṇa. —2. a sage.

—lepa a. 1. unsmeared, unanointed; Ms. 5. 112. —2. stainless, sinless.

(—paḥ) a sage. —lobha a. free from desire or avarice, unavaricious. —

loman a. devoid of hair, hairless. —vaṁśa a. without posterity, childless.

—vacana a. 1. not speaking, silent. —2. unobjectionable, blameless; (for

other senses see the word separately). —vaṇa, —vana a. 1. being out of a

wood. —2. free from woods. —3. bare, open. —vara=nirdaraṁ q. v. —vasu

a. destitute of wealth, poor. —vācya a. 1. not fit to be said. —2.

blameless, unobjectionable. —vāta a. free or sheltered from wind, calm,

still; R. 15. 66. (—taḥ) a place sheltered from or not exposed to wind;

nirvāte vyajanaṁ H. 2. 165. —vānara a. free from monkeys. —vāyasa a.

free from crows. —vārya a. 1. irresistible. —2. acting fearlessly or boldly.

—vikalpa, —vikalpaka a. 1. not admitting an alternative. —2. being without

determination or resolution. —3. not capable of mutual relation. —4.

conditioned. —5. undeliberative. —6. recognizing no such distinction as

that of subject and object, or of the knower and the known; as applied to

samādhi or contemplation, it is ‘an exclusive concentration upon the one

entity without distinct and separate consciousness of the knower, the

known, and the knowing, and without even self-consciousness’;

nirvikalpakaḥ jñatṛjñānādivikalpamedalayāpekṣaḥ; nocaccetaḥ praviśa

sahasā nirvikalpesamādhau Bh. 3. 61; Ve. 1. 23. —7. (in phil.) not arising

from the relation of the qualifier and the qualified,

(viśeṣaṇaviśeṣyasaṁbaṁdhānavagāhi pratyakṣaṁ jñānaṁ) said of

knowledge not derived from the senses, as ghaṭatva. (—lpaṁ) ind.

without hesitation or wavering. —vikāra a. 1. unchanged, unchangeable,

immutable. —2. not disposed; M. 5. 14. —3. disinterested; Rs. 2. 28. (—

raḥ) the Supreme deity. —vikāsa a. unblown. —vighna a. uninterrupted,

unobstructed, free from impediments. (—ghnaṁ) absence of impediment.

—vicāra a. not reflecting, thoughtless, inconsiderate; re re svairiṇi

nirvicārakavite māsmatprakāśībhava Chandr. 1. 2. (—raṁ) ind.

thoughtlessly, unhesitatingly. —vicikitsa a. free from doubt or reflection.

—viceṣṭa a. motionless, insensible. —vitarka a. unreflecting. —vinoda a.

without amusement, void of pastime, diversion or solace; Me. 86. —

viṁdhyā N. of a river in the Vindhya hills; Me. 28. —vimarśa a. void of

reflection, thoughtless. —vivara a. 1. having no opening or cavity. —2.

without interstices or interval, close, compact; Śi. 9. 44. —vivāda a. 1. not

contending or disagreeing. —2. undisputed, not contradicted or disputed,

universally acknowledged. —viveka a. indiscreet, void of judgment,

wanting in discrimination, foolish. —viśaṁka a. fearless, undaunted,

confident; Ms. 7. 176; Pt. 1. 85. —viśeṣa a. 1. showing or making no

difference, undiscriminating, without distinction; nirviśeṣā vayaṁ tvayi

Mb., nirviśeṣo viśeṣaḥ Bh. 3. 50 ‘a difference without distinction’. —2.

having no difference, same, like, not differing from (oft. in comp.);

nirviśeṣākṛti ‘having the same form’; pravātanīlotpalanirviśeṣaṁ Ku. 1.

46; sa nirviśeṣapratipattirāsīt R. 14. 22. —3. indiscriminate, promiscuous.

(—ṣaḥ) absence of difference. (nirviśaṣaṁ and nirviśeṣeṇa are used

adverbially in the sense of ‘without difference’, ‘equally’,

‘indiscriminately’; svagṛhanirviśeṣamatra sthīyatāṁ H. 1; R. 5. 6.). —

viśeṣaṇa a. without attributes. —viṣa a. poisonless (as a snake); nirviṣā

ḍuṁḍubhāḥ smṛtāḥ. —viṣaya a. 1. expelled or driven away from one’s

home, residence or proper place; manonirviṣayārthakāmayā Ku. 5. 38, R.

9. 32. —2. having no scope or sphere of action; kiṁca evaṁ kāvyaṁ

praviralaviṣayaṁ nirviṣayaṁ vā syāt S. D. 1. —3. not attached to sensual

objects, (as mind). —viṣāṇa a. destitute of horns. —vihāra a. having no

pleasure. —vīja, —bīja a. 1. seedless. —2. impotent. —3. causeless. —vīra

a. 1. deprived of heroes; nirvīramurvītalaṁ P. R. 1. 31. —2. cowardly. —

vīrā a woman whose husband and children are dead. —vīrya a. powerless,

feeble, unmanly, impotent; nirvīryaṁ guruśāpabhāṣitavaśāt kiṁ me

tavevāyudhaṁ Ve. 3. 34. —vṛkṣa a. treeless. —vṛṣa a. deprived of bulls.

—vega a. not moving, quiet, calm. —vetana a. honorary, unsalaried. —

veda a. not acknowleding the Vedas, an atheist, infidel. —veṣṭanaṁ a

weaver’s shuttle. —vaira a. free from enmity, amicable, peaceable. (—

raṁ) absence of enmity. —vyaṁjana a. 1. straight-forward. —2. without

condiment. (—ne ind.) plainly, in a straight-forward or honest manner. —

vyatha a. 1. free from pain. —2. quiet, calm. —vyapekṣa a. indifferent to,

regardless of; R. 13. 25; 14. 39. —vyalīka a. 1. not hurting or offending.

—2. without pain. —3. pleased, doing anything willingly. —4. sincere,

genuine, undissembling. —vyāghra a. not haunted or infested by tigers.

—vyāja a. 1. candid, upright, honest, plain. —2. without fraud, true,

genuine. —3. got by heroism or daring deeds (not by fraud or cowardly

conduct); Māl. 5. 12. —4. not hypocritical; Bh. 2. 82. (—jaṁ ind.) plainly,

honestly, candidly; Amaru. 79. —vyāpāra a. 1. without employment or

business, free from occupation; R. 15. 56. —2. motionless; U. 6. —vraṇa

a. 1. unhurt, without wounds. —2. without rents. —vrata a. not observing

vows. —himaṁ cessation of winter. —heti a. weaponless. —hetu a.

causeless, having no cause or reason. —hnīka a. 1. shameless, impudent.

—2. bold, daring.

रजत — rajata Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899rajata mfn. (cf. 2. «ṛjra») whitish, silver-coloured, silvery («-taṁ

hiraṇyam», «whitish gold» i.e. silver)

mfn. silver, made of silver

rajata n. (m. g. «ardharcodi») silver &c. &c.

rajata n. (only gold

rajata n. a pearl ornament

rajata n. ivory

rajata n. blood

rajata n. an asterism

rajata n. N. of a mountain and of a lake.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

rajata a. [raṁj atac nalopaḥ Uṇ. 3. 111]

(1) Silvery, made of silver.

(2) Whitish. —taṁ

(1) Silver; śuktau rajatamidamiti jñānaṁ bhramaḥ; Ki. 5. 41; N. 22.

52.

(2) Gold.

(3) A pearl-ornament or necklace.

(4) Blood.

(5) Ivory.

(6) An asterism, a constellation.

(7) A monntain.

— Comp.

—adriḥ N. of Kailāsa.

—kūṭaḥ N. of a peak of the Malaya mountain.

—dyutiḥ N. of Hanumat.

—prasthaḥ N. of Kailāsa.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

rajata (von raj = 5. arj wie arjuna und rajas) UṆĀDIS. 3, 111. 1) adj.

«weisslich, silberfarbig» (AK. 3, 4, 14, 82. H. an. 3, 287. MED. t. 143);

«silbern»: ṛjramukṣaṇyāyane rajataṁ harayāṇe. rathaṁ yuktamasanāma

suṣāmaṇi ṚV. 8, 25, 22. (puram) rajatāmantarikṣamakurvata AIT. BR. 1,

23. VS. 23, 37. rajataṁ hiraṇyam «weissliches Gold» d. h. «Silber» TS. 1,

5, 1, 2. ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 4, 7. 13, 4, 2, 10. 14, 1, 3, 14. KĀṬH. 10, 4.

suvarṇarajatau rukmau ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 3, 11. TBR. 1, 5, 10, 1. 7. 8, 9, 1.

pātra 2, 2, 9, 7. 3, 9, 6, 5. niṣka PAÑCAV. BR. 17, 1, 14. ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 3, 15.

CHĀṆD. UP. 3, 19, 1. — 2) m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31. zu

belegen nur das n. a) «Silber» AK. 2, 9, 97. H. 1043. H. an. MED. HALĀY.

2, 17. 5, 5. AV. 5, 28, 1. 13, 4, 51. AIT. BR. 7, 12. KĀTY. ŚR. 10, 2, 37.

26, 2. 20. KAUŚ. 16. CHĀND. UP. 4, 17, 7. ṢAḌV. BR. 6, 6. M. 8, 321. 11,

57. 167. R. 1, 53, 11. suvarṇarajataiḥ 2,32,14. 94,5. SUŚR.1,5,2. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 64,1. KIR.5,41. NAIṢ 22,52. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 282,a,28. — b) «Gold»

H. 1045. AK. 3, 4, 14, 82 soll KṢĪRASVĀMIN nach AUFRECHT hemni st.

hāre lesen. — c) «Perlenschmuck» AK. 3, 4, 14, 82.H. an. MED. HALĀY. 5,

5. — d) «Blut.» — e) «Elfenbein.» — f) «ein best. Berg» (als neutr.! vgl.

rajatakūṭa u.s.w.). — g) «ein best. See» (als neutr.!) H. an. — h)

«Sternbild» ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — Vgl. mahā-.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

rajata rajata (cf. arjuna, rañj, and rāj),

I. adj. White.

II. n.

1. White, the colour.

2. Silver, Kir. 5, 41; Rājat. 5, 482.

3. Gold.

4. Ivory.

5. Blood.

6. A necklace.

7. The name of the mountain Kailāsa.

8. An asterism.

— Comp. mahā-, n. gold.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

rajata a. whitish, silver-coloured, silvery; n. silver.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

rajata raj-ata, a. [raj = arj] silvery. whitish (V.); made of silver (V.); n.

silver: -kūṭa, N. of a peak in the Malaya range;

-daṁṣṭra, m. N. of a fairy;

-parvata, m. mountain of silver (sp. an artificial one as a gift for

Brāhmans);

-pātrā, n. silver vessel;

-bhājana, n. id.;

-maya, a. (ī) made of silver;

-acala, -adri, m. silver mountain, ep. of Kailāsa.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

rajata ranja—atac nalopaḥ . 1 rūpye amaraḥ . 2 gaje 3 dante 4 rudhire 5

hāre 6 śaile 7 svarṇe 8 dhavale ca hemaca° . 9 śuklaguṇavati tri° .

rūpyadhātorutpattyādi bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā tripurasya badhārthāya

nirnimiṣairvilocanaiḥ . nirīkṣayāmāsa śivaḥ krodhena paripūritaḥ .

agnistatkālamapatattasyaikasmādvilocanāt . tatorudraḥ

samabhavadvaiśvānara iva jvalan . dvitīyādapatannetrādaśruvindustu

vāmakāt . tasmādrajatamutpannamuktakarmasu yojayet . kṛtrimañca

bhavettaddhi vaṅgādirasayogataḥ . rūpyantu rajataṁ tārañcandrakānti

sitaprabham . guru snigdhaṁ mṛdu śvetaṁ dāhe chede ghanaṁ kṣamam

. varṇāḍhyaṁ candravat svacchaṁ rūpyaṁ navaguṇaṁ śubham .

kaṭhinaṁ kṛtrimaṁ rūkṣaṁ raktaṁ pītadalaṁ laghu .

dāhacchedaghanairnaṣṭaṁ kapyaṁ duṣṭaṁ prakīrtitam . tāraṁ śarīrasya

karoti tāpaṁ śataṁ ghanaṁ yacchati śukranāśam . vīryaṁ balaṁ hanti

tanośca puṣṭiṁ mahāgadān śoṣayati hyaśuddham . sthānāntare tatraiva

tasya śodhanavidhiḥ pattalīkṛtapattrāṇi tārasyāgnau pratāpavet .

niṣiñcettaptataptāni taile takre ca kāñjike . gomūtre ca kulatthānāṁ

kaṣāyeca tridhā tridhā . evaṁ rajatapattrāṇāṁ viśuddhiḥ samprajāyate .

athāśuddhasya rūpyasya doṣamāha rūpya tvaśuddhaṁ prakaroti tāpaṁ

vibandhakaṁ vīryabalakṣayañca . dehasya puṣṭiṁ harate tanoti

roṣāṁstataḥ śodhanamasya kuryāt . atha rūpyamāraṇavidhiḥ bhāgaikaṁ

tālakaṁ madyaṁ yāmamamlena kenacit . tena bhāgatrayaṁ tārapattrāṇi

parilepayet . dhṛtvā mūṣāḥ puṭe ruddhvā puṭet triṁśadvanopalaiḥ .

samuddhṛtya punastālaṁ dattvā ruddhvā puṭe pacet . evaṁ

caturdaśapuṭaistārambhasma prajāyate . athānya prakāraḥ snuhīkṣīreṇa

saṁpiṣṭaṁ mākṣikaṁ tena lepayet . tālakasya prakāreṇa tārapattrasya

buddhimān . puṭeccaturdaśa puṭaistārambhasma prajāyate . evaṁ

māritasya rūpyasya guṇaḥ raupyaṁ śītaṁ kaṣāyañca svādu pākarasaṁ

saram . vayasaḥ sthāpanaṁ snigdhaṁ lekhanaṁ vātapittajit .

pramehādikarogāṁśca nāśayatyacirād dhruvam .

राम — rāma Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899rāma mf («ā») n. (prob. «causing rest», and in most meanings fr. «ram»)

dark, dark-coloured, black (cf. «rātri») («rāmaḥ śakuniḥ». a black bird,

crow

mf («ā») n. white (?)

mf («ā») n. pleasing, pleasant, charming, lovely, beautiful &c.

rāma m. a kind of deer

rāma m. a horse

rāma m. a lover

rāma m. pleasure, joy, delight

rāma m. N. of Varuṇa.

rāma m. N. of various mythical personages (in Veda two Rāmas are

mentioned with the patr. Mārgaveya and Aupatasvini; another Rāmas

with the patr. Jāmadagnya [cf. below] is the supposed author of ; in later

times three Rāmas are celebrated, viz. 1. Paraśu-rāma [q.v.], who forms

the 6th Avatāra of Viṣṇu and is sometimes called Jāmadagnya, as son of

the sage Jamad-agni by Reṇukā, and sometimes Bhārgava, as descended

from Bhṛigu; 2. Rāma-candra [see below]; 3. Bala-rāma [q.v.], «the

strong Rāma», also called Halāyudha and regarded as elder brother of

Kṛiṣṇa [ 112] accord. to Jainas a Rāma is enumerated among the 9 white

Balas; and in a Rāmas is mentioned among the 7 ṛiṣis of the 8th Manv-

antara) &c &c. N. of a king of Malla-pura

rāma m. of a king of śṛiṅga-vera and patron of Nāgeśa

rāma m. of various authors and teachers (also with «ācārya, upādhyāya,

kavi, cakra-vartin, jyotir-vid, jyau-» «tiṣaka, tarka-vāg-īśa, dīkṣita, daiva-

jṇa, paṇḍita, bhaṭṭa, bhaṭṭācārya, vājapeyin, śarman, śāstrin, saṁyamin,

sūri» &c.)

rāma m. N. of the number «three» (on account of the 3 Rāmas)

(«rāmasya iṣuḥ», a kind of cane = «rāmakaṇḍa»

rāma pl. N. of a people

rāma mf («ā») n. («ā») f. a beautiful woman, any young and charming

woman, mistress, wife, any woman &c. (for comp. see p.878)

mf («ā») n. a dark woman i.e. a woman of low origin

mf («ā») n. N. of various plants (Jonesia Asoka; Aloe Perfoliata; Asa

Foetida &c.) vermilion

mf («ā») n. red earth

mf («ā») n. a kind of pigment (= «gorocanā»)

mf («ā») n. a river

mf («ā») n. a kind of metre

rāma mf («ā») n. (in music) a kind of measure

mf («ā») n. N. of an Apsaras

mf («ā») n. of a daughter of Kumbhāṇḍa

mf («ā») n. of the mother of the ninth Arhat of the present Ava-sarpiṇī

rāma mf («ā») n. («ī») f. darkness, night

rāma n. id.

rāma n. the leaf of Laurus Cassia

rāma n. Chenopodium Album

rāma n. = «kuṣṭha»

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

rāma a. [ram kartari ghañ ṇa vā]

(1) Pleasing, delighting, rejoicing.

(2) Beautiful, lovely, charming.

(3) Obscure; dark-coloured, black.

(4) White. —maḥ 1 N. of three celebrated personages;

(a) Paraśurāma, son of Jamadagni;

(b) Balarāma, son of Vasudeva and brother of Kṛṣṇa, q. q. v. v.;

(c) Rāmachandra or Sītārāma, son of Daśaratha and Kausalyā and

the hero of the Rāmayaṇa; (the word is thus derived in Purāṇas: —

rāśabdo viśvavacano maścāpīśvaravācakaḥ . viśvādhīneśvaro yo hi tena

rāmaḥ prakīrtitaḥ ..). [When quite a boy, he with his brother was taken

by Viśvāmitra, with the permission of Daśaratha, to his hermitage to

protect his sacrifices from the demons that obstructed them. Rāma killed

them all with perfect ease, and received from the sage several

miraculous missiles as a reward. He then accompanied Viśvāmitra to the

capital of Janaka where he married Sītā having performed the wonderful

feat of bending Siva’s bow, and then returned to Ayodhya. Daśaratha,

seeing that Rāma was growing fitter and fitter to rule the kingdom,

resolved to install him as heir-apparent. But, on the eve of the day of

coronation, his favourite wife Kaikeyi, at the instigation of her wicked

nurse Manthara, asked him to fulfil the two boons he had formerly

promised to her, by one of which she demanded the exile of Rāma for

fourteen years and by the other the installation of her own son Bharata

as Yuvarāja. The king was terribly shocked, and tried his best to dissuade

her from her wicked demands, but was at last obliged to yield. The dutiful

son immediately prepared to go into exile accompanied by his beautiful

young wife Sītā and his devoted brother Lakṣmaṇa. The period of his exile

was eventful, and the two brothers killed several powerful demons and at

last roused the jealousy of Rāvaṇa himself. The wicked demon resolved

to try Rāma by carring off his beauteous wife for whom he had conceived

an ardent passion, and accomplished his purpose being assisted by

Mārīcha. After several fruitless inquiries as to her whereabouts, Hanumat

ascertained that she was in Laṅkā and persuaded Rāma to invade the

island and kill the ravisher. The monkeys built a bridge across the ocean

over which Rāma with his numerous troops passed, conquered Lanka,

and killed Rāvaṇa along with his whole host of demons. Rāma, attended

by his wife and friends in battle, triumphantly returned to Ayodhyā where

he was crowned king by Vasiṣṭha. He reigned long and righteously and

was succeeded by his son Kuśa. Rāma is said to be the seventh

incarnation of Viṣṇu; cf. Jayadeva: —vitarasi dikṣu raṇe dikpatikamanīyaṁ

daśamukhamaulibaliṁ ramaṇīyaṁ . keśava dhṛtaraghupatirūpa jaya

jagadīśa hare Gīt.

(1)].

(2) A kind of deer.

(3) N. of Aruṇa.

(4) A lover.

(5) A horse. —maṁ

(1) Darkness.

(2) Leprosy (kuṣṭhaṁ).

(3) A tamāla leaf.

— Comp.

—anujaḥ N. of a celebrated reformer, founder of a Vedāntic sect

and author of several works. He was a Vaiṣṇava.

—ayanaṁ (ṇaṁ) 1. the adventures of Rāma. —2. N. of a celebrated

epic by Vālmīki which contains about 24000 verses in seven Kāṇḍas or

books.

—īśvaraḥ N. of a sacred place of pilgrimage.

—giriḥ N. of a mountain; (cakre) snigdhacchāyāttaruṣu vasatiṁ

rāmagiryāśrameṣu Me. 1.

—cadraḥ, —bhadraḥ N. of Rāma, son of Daśaratha.

—janman n. the birth or birth-day of Rāma.

—dūtaḥ 1. N. of Hanumat. —2. a monkey. (

—tī) a kind of basil.

—navamī the ninth day in the bright half of Chaitra, the anniversary

of the birth of Rāma.

—pūgaḥ a kind of betel-nut tree.

—vallabhaḥ the birchtree.

—sakhaḥ N. of Sugrīva.

—setuḥ ‘the bridge of Rāma’, a bridge of sand between the Indian

peninsula and Ceylon now called Adam’s bridge.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

rāma (wohl desselben Ursprungs wie rātrī) 1) adj. (f. ā) «dunkelfarbig,

schwarz» NIR. 12, 13. AK. 3, 4, 23, 143. H. 1397. an. 2, 334. MED. m. 26.

fg. HALĀY. 4, 49. rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca AV. 1, 23, 1. Schaf 12, 2, 19.

nāsya rāma (= ramaṇīyaḥ putraḥ Comm.) ucchiṣṭaṁ pibet TAITT. ĀR. 5,

8, 13. rāmā «eine Dunkle» d. i. «ein Weib gemeiner Herkunft»: nāgniṁ

citvā rāmāmupeyāt TS. 5, 6, 8, 3. TAITT. ĀR. 5, 8, 13. Schol. zu KĀTY.

ŚR. 18, 6, 27. Auch die Bedeutung 2. rāma 2) «c)» greek wäre indessen

hier möglich. Nach AK. H. an. und MED. auch «weiss.» — 2) m. a) «eine

Hirschart» AK. 2, 5, 11. TRIK. 3, 3, 302. H. an. MED. — b) «Pferd» MED. —

c) N. pr. eines Mannes ṚV. 10, 93, 14. mit dem patron. Mārgaveya AIT.

BR. 7, 27. 34. Aupatasvini ŚAT. BR. 4, 6, 1, 7. Jāmadagnya, Verfassers

von ṚV. 10, 110. Im Epos und später erscheinen «drei» Rāma (daher

rāma als Bez. «der Zahl drei» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 8, 20), von denen die

beiden ersten für Incarnationen Viṣṇu’s gelten: a) mit dem patron.

Jāmadagnya oder Bhārgava, ein Sohn der Reṇukā, auch paraśurāma

genannt, TRIK. 3, 3, 302. H. 848. H. an. MED. (wo raiṇukeye st.

vaiṇukeye zu lesen ist). rāmaḥ śastrabhṛtāmaham (vgl. HARIV. 5869)

sagt Kṛṣṇa BHAG. 10, 31. MBH. 1, 272. 2612. 3, 8658. 8, 1584. 12, 1715.

fgg. 12948. HARIV. 2313. fgg. 5869. fg. rāmarāmavivāda R. 1, 3, 11 (5

GORR.). 74, 22. fg. 76, 1. R. GORR. 1, 77, 23. 37. RAGH. 11, 68. — b) mit

dem patron. Rāghava oder Dāśarathi TRIK. 2, 8, 3. 3, 3, 302. H. 703. H.

an. MED. MBH. 3, 11197. 15933. 12, 12949. HARIV. 822. 2324. fgg. 3065.

fgg. 5871. 7373. R. 1, 1, 10. 17. 20. rāmarāmavivāda 3, 11 (5 GORR.).

ramayatyeva sa guṇairudāraistairimāḥ prajāḥ. yasmādato rāma iti

nāmaitattasya viśrutam.. R. GORR. 1, 1, 22. 6, 102. RAGH. 11, 68.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 58, 30. VP. 384. BHĀG. P. 9, 10. fgg. Spr. 2630. rāmo

hemamṛgaṁ ma rvetti 2631. ramante yogino ‘nante satyānande

cidātmani. iti rāmapadenāsau paraṁ brahmābhidhīyate.. WEBER,

RĀMAT. UP. 286. — g) = Balarāma, Halāyudha, ein älterer Bruder Kṛṣṇa’s

AK. 1, 1, 1, 18. 3, 4, 23, 143. H. 224. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 29. BHĀG. P.

1, 11, 17. 10, 1, 8. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 268. 281. 284. 289. erscheint bei

den Jaina unter den 9 «weissen» (s. oben u. 1) Bala’s H. 698. — Rāma

unter den sieben Weisen eines Manu HARIV. 453. MĀRK. P. 80, 4. Rāma

ist ein auch später häufig vorkommender Name: so heisst z. B. ein Sohn

Tārāvaloka’s und einer Mādrī und Zwillingsbruder Lakṣmaṇa’s KATHĀS.

113, 32. verschiedene Lehrer, Autoren u.s.w. BURN. Intr. 567 (neben

bhadanta-). COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II,49. Verz. d. B. H. No. 109. 833. Ind.

St.8,389. HALL 84. 119. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 126,b, No. 220. 129,b, No. 234.

148,a,9. 151,b, No. 321. fgg. 335,b, No. 788. 341,b, N. 358,a, No. 853.

386,a, No. 505. ein Fürst von Mallapura 148,b,15. 18. von Śṛñgavera 165,

«a», 7. 178, «a», 16. — RĀJA-TAR. 8, 785. KṢITĪŚ. 10, 7. fgg. — d) Bein.

Varuṇa’s MED. — e) pl. N. pr. eines Volkes VP. 177. — 3) f. ā a) «ein Weib

niedriger Herkunft»; s. u. 1). — b) = hiṅgu «Asa foetida» H. an. MED. =

hiṅgula «Mennig» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 4) f. ī «Dunkel, Nacht»: uṣā na

rāmīraruṇairaporṇute ṚV. 2, 34, 11. — 5) n. a) «Dunkel»: agnī

ruśadbhirvarṇairabhi rāmamasthāt ṚV. 10, 3, 3. — b) = vāstuka

(«Chenopodium album») und kuṣṭha (in welcher Bed.?) H. an. MED. =

tamālapattra RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. adho-, paraśu-, bala-, bhadanta-,

maṇi-, manasā-.

rāma (von ram) 1) nom. act. «Lust, Freude»: svakuṭumba- adj. BHĀG. P.

7, 6, 14. — 2) oxyt. nom. ag. gaṇa jvalādi zu P. 3, 1, 140. a) adj. (f. a)

«erfreuend, entzückend, lieblich, reizend» AK. 3, 4, 23, 143. H. an. 2, 334.

MED. m. 26. fg. rāmasya lokarāmasya R. 1, 19, 20. bhāvena rāmā MBH.

1, 1812. R. 2, 44, 24. KATHĀS. 65, 27. mṛgī MĀRK. P. 65, 22.

rāmādrāmaṁ jagadabhūdrāme rājyaṁ praśāsati «lieblicher als lieblich»

MBH. 7, 2246. BHAṬṬ. 10, 2. NALOD. 1, 5. — b) m. «Liebhaber» VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 19, 5. — c) f. ā a) «eine Schöne, ein junges reizendes Weib,

Geliebte, Frau» AK. 2, 6, 1, 4. TRIK. 2, 6, 1. H. 505. H. an. MED. HALĀY.

2, 326. KAṬHOP. 1, 25. MBH. 1, 3039. R. 5, 11, 20. RAGH. 5, 49. 12, 23.

16, 15. VIKR. 114. Spr. 24. 691. 1456. 2629. 2651. 4817. 4931. 5274.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 19, 5. GĪT. 1, 44. KATHĀS. 18, 12. 56, 425. RĀJA-TAR.

1, 370. arundhatī satīnāṁ tu rāmāsu ca tilottamā Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,36.

BHĀG. P.3,23,40. 44.4,26,14. 28,59. PAÑCAR.2,3,32.4,5. 48. DHŪRTAS.

87,15. — b) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = śvetakaṇṭakārī, gṛhakanyā,

ārāmaśītalā, aśoka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) «ein best. Pigment»

(gorocanā) RĀJAN. — d) «Röthel, rubrica» ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — e)

«Fluss» MED. auch in H. an. ist wohl hiṅgu nadīstriyoḥ zu lesen. — z) «ein

best. Metrum»: metrical sequenceJourn. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 514. — h) N.

pr. einer Apsaras VYĀḌI beim Schol. zu H. 183. einer Tochter

Kumbhāṇḍa’s HARIV. 9973. 11026. fg. der Mutter des 9ten Arhant’s der

gegenwärtigen Avasarpiṇī H. 39. — Vgl. su-.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

rāma (ŚRĪ RĀMA). The seventh incarnation of Mahāviṣṇu, a very

powerful king of the solar dynasty.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

rāma rāma, i. e. ram + a,

I. adj.

1. Beautiful.

2. Black.

3. White.

II. m.

1. A proper name, particularly the hero of the Rāmāyaṇa.

2. A name of Varuṇa.

3. A horse.

4. A sort of deer.

III. f. mā, A beautiful female, Vikr. d. 114; Amar. 58.

— Comp. paraśu-, m. the first of the three renowned Rāmas, the son of

Jamadagni, Prab. 5, 5 (cf. Chr. 16, 17). bala-, m. the third Rāma, the

half-brother of Kṛṣṇa, MBh. 1, 7912. Cf. rāma-candra.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

rāma rām-a, a. dark-coloured, black (V.); pleasing, delightful, charming,

lovely; m. N.: in. V. two Rāmas are mentioned (w. the pat. Mārgaveya

and Aupatasvini) and in E. three are distinguished: (a) Rāma

Jāmadagnya or Bhārgava = Paraśu-rāma; (b) Bala-rāma or Halāyudha

(elder brother of Kṛṣṇa); (c) Rāma Rāghava or Dāśarathi = Rāmacandra

or Sītā-rāma (hero of the Rāmāyaṇa); freequent N. in later C.; n. [causing

to rest: ram] darkness (RV.1).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

rāma pu° rama—kartari ghañ ṇa vā . 1 paraśurāme 2

daśarathajyeṣṭhaputre śrīrāme 3 balarāme ca bhārgavo rāghavo

gopastrayo rāmāḥ pakīrtitā vahnipu° . rāmaśabdaniruktiḥ rāpabdā

viśvavacano maścāpīśvaravācakaḥ . viśvānādhīśvaro yo hi tena rāmaḥ

prakortita brahmava° ja° kha° 110 a° . 4 manohare 5 site 6 asite ca tri°

medi° . 7 vāstūkaśāke 8 kuṣṭhe (kuḍa) na° medi° 9 tamālapatre na°

rājani° .

रूपम् — rūpam Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

rūpam [rūp-ka bhāve ac vā]

(1) Form, figure, appearance; virūpaṁ rūpavaṁtaṁ vā pumānityeva

bhuṁjate Pt. 1. 143; so surūpa, kurūpa.

(2) Form or the quality of colour (one of the 24 guṇas of the

Vaiśeṣikas); cakṣurtātragrāhyajātimān guṇo rūpaṁ Tarka K; (it is of six

kinds: —śukla, kṛṣṇa, pīta, rakta, harita, kapila, or of seven, if citra be

added).

(3) Any visible object or thing.

(4) A handsome form or figure, beautiful form, beauty, elegance,

grace; mānupīṣu kathaṁ vā syādasya rūpasya saṁbhavaḥ S. 1. 26; vidyā

nāma narasya rūpamadhikaṁ Bh. 2. 20; rūpaṁ jarā haṁti &c.

(5) Natural state or condition, nature, property, characteristic,

essence.

(6) Mode, manner.

(7) A sign, feature.

(8) Kind, sort, species

(9) An image, a reflected image. (10) Similitude, resemblance.

(11) Specimen, type, pattern.

(12) An inflected form, the form of a noun or a verb derived from

inflection (declension or conjugation).

(13) The number one, an arithmetical unit.

(14) An integer.

(15) A drama, play, see rūpaka.

(16) Acquiring familiarity with any book by learning it by heart or by

frequent recitation.

(17) Cattle.

(18) A sound, a word.

(19) A known quantity. (20) A beast.

(21) A verse.

(22) A name.

(23) The white colour. (rūpa is frequently used at the end of comp. in

the sense of ‘formed or composed of,’ ‘consisting of,’ ‘in the form of,’

‘namely;’ ‘having the appearance or colour of,’ taporūpaṁ dhanaṁ;

dharmarūpaḥ sakhā &c.).

— Comp.

—adhibodhaḥ the perception of form or colour of any object by the

senses.

—abhigrāhita a. caught in the act, caught red-handed.

—asraḥ Cupid.

—ājīvā a harlot, prostitute, courtezan.

—āśrayaḥ an exceedingly beautiful person.

—iṁdriyaṁ the organ which perceives form and colour, the eye.

—uccayaḥ a collection of lovely forms; S. 2. 9.

—kāraḥ, —kṛt m. a sculptor.

—grahaḥ the eye.

—jña a. perceiving forms, distinguishing visible objects.

—tattvaṁ inherent property, essence.

—dhara a. of the form of, disguised as; jugopa

gorūpadharāmivormīm R. 2. 3.

—dhārin a. 1. having a form or shape. —2. possessed of beauty,

lovely. (—m.) an actor.

—nāśanaḥ an owl.

—bhāgānubaṁdhaḥ the addition of a fraction to a unit.

—lāvaṇyaṁ exquisiteness of form, elegance.

—viparyayaḥ disfigurement, morbid change of bodily form.

—śālin a. beautiful.

—saṁpad, —saṁpattiḥ f. perfection or excellence of form, richness

of beauty, superb beauty; udapādi cāsyā rūpasaṁpadā

āvirbhūtavismayasya tasya manasi K.

ललाम — lalāma Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899lalāma mf («ī») n. having a mark or spot on the forehead, marked with

paint &c. (as cattle)

mf («ī») n. having any mark or sign

mf («ī») n. beautiful, charming

mf («ī») n. eminent, best of its kind (f. «ā»)

lalāma m. n. ornament, decoration, embellishment &c.

lalāma mf («ī») n. («ī») f. N. of a female demon

lalāma m. a kind of ornament for the ears

lalāma n. (only a coloured mark on the forehead of a horse or bull

lalāma n. a sectarial mark

lalāma n. any mark or sign or token

lalāma n. a line, row

lalāma n. a flag, banner

lalāma n. a tail

lalāma n. a horse

lalāma n. = «prabhāva».

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

lalāma a. (mī f.)

(1) Beautiful, lovely, charming.

(2) Having a mark on the forehead marked with a blaze. —maṁ

(1) An ornament for the forehead, an ornament or decoration in

general; (m. also in this sense); ahaṁ tu tāmāśramalalāmabhūtāṁ

śakuṁtalāmadhikṛtya bravīmi S. 2; Śi. 4. 28.

(2) Anything the best of its kind.

(3) A mark on the forehead.

(4) A sign, symbol, mark in general.

(5) A banner, flag.

(9) A row, series, line.

(7) A tail.

(8) A mane.

(9) Eminence, dignity, beauty. (10) A horn. —maḥ A horse.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

lalāma 1) adj. (f. lalāmī) «mit einer Blässe (Stirnfleck) versehen», vom

Vieh. AV. 15, 1, 1. TS. 2, 1, 3, 1. 4, 1. 7, 3, 17, 1. KĀTY. ŚR. 20, 1, 33.

lalāmairharibhiḥ MBH. 7, 962. dhūmra- TS. 2, 1, 10, 1. kṛṣṇa- KĀṬH. 13,

5. Ueberh. «mit einem (hellen) Fleck versehen»:

kṛṣṇāṁllalāmāṁścāmarān śuklāṁścānyāñchaśiprabhān (es ist der

«Schweif», nicht das «Thier» selbst gemeint) MBH. 2, 1861. tamas 12,

13192 (= cintāmaṇiratnavadbhāvarūpa NĪLAK.). — 2) m. n. «Schmuck

(Stirnschmuck), Zierde»: sudarśanaṁ vai devatānāṁ lalāmam MBH. 5,

1882. HARIV. 16065. BHĀG. P. 3, 14, 49. 22, 18. 5, 3, 3. 6, 6. unbestimmt

ob lalāma oder lalāman: jagrāha prathamaṁ rāmo lalāmapratimaṁ (la- =

dhvaja NĪLAK.) halam HARIV. 5037. āśramalalāmabhūtā ŚĀK. 25, 4.

KATHĀS. 101, 61. DAŚAK. 68, 2. BHĀG. P. 3, 16, 9. 5, 16, 16. ŚIŚ. 4, 28.

Vgl. u. 4). — 3) f. ī a) Bez. einer Unholdin AV. 1, 18, 1. — b) «ein best.

Ohrenschmuck» ŚABDAM. im ŚKDR. — 4) n. «Blässe, Stirnfleck» AK. 3, 4,

23, 145 (aśvabhūṣāḥ aśvalalāṭe ‘nyavarṇacihnam, gavādīnāṁ lalāṭacitram

d. i. -cihnam BHAR. nach ŚKDR.). «Mal, Sectenzeichen» (puṇḍra) AK. H.

an. 3, 406. MED. m. 51. HALĀY. 5, 69. «Zeichen» (cihna, lakṣman,

lāñchana) H. an. MED. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 184,b,7. «Banner, Flagge» (dhvaja,

ketu, patākā) AK. H. an. MED. VYUTP. 159. «Schmuck» (bhūṣā) H. an.

MED. HALĀY. VYUTP. «eine Zierde unter seines Gleichen, der Beste in

seiner Art» (pradhāna, prādhānya) AK. H. an. MED. = prabhāva H. an.

MED. HALĀY. = ramya H. an. MED. «Schweif» AK. H. an. MED. HALĀY.

«Horn; Pferd» H. an. MED. HALĀY. — Vgl. lālāmika.

lalāma 1) ṚV. 1, 100, 16.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

lalāma A division among horses. The white patch on the forehead of a

horse is also called Lalāma and so horses with lalāma are called Lalāmas.

(Śloka 13, Chapter 13, Droṇa Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

lalāma lalāma (akin to lal),

I. n., also lalāman lalāman,

1. A mark.

2. A flag.

3. An ornament, Śāk. 25, 4.

4. A mane.

5. A tail.

6. A line.

7. Majesty, dignity.

8. Chief, principal, Daśak. in Chr. 184, 18.

II. f. mī, An ornament worn in the ear.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

lalāma f. -mī having a blaze or star (cattle); s. ornament, decoration; f. ī

N. of a female demon.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

lalāma lalāma, a. (ī) having a forehead mark; m. n. ornament, decoration:

-n, n. id. (C.).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

lalāma [n] klī, lalāmam . yathāha rudraḥ .

pradhānadhvajaśṛṅgeṣu puṇḍrabāladhilakṣmasu .

bhūṣāvājiprabhāveṣu lalāmaṁ syāt lalāma ca .. (pradhāne . yathā,

raghuḥ . 5 . 64 .

tatra svayaṁvarasamāhṛtarājalokaṁ kanyālalāma kamanīyamajasya

lipsoḥ .. puruṣaḥ . iti raghuṭīkāyāṁ mallināthadhṛtayādavaḥ . 5 . 64 ..)

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

lalāma na° lala—ac tamamati ama—aṇ . 1 pradhāne, 2 dhvaje 3 śṛṅge 4

bāladhau 5 cihne 6 bhūṣāyāṁ 7 ramye 8 tilake 9 ghoṭake 10 prabhāve ca

medi° . nāntatvamapyasya rudraḥ .

लोहित — lohita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899lohita mf («ā» or «lohinī») n. (cf. «rohita») red, red-coloured, reddish &c.

&c.

mf («ā» or «lohinī») n. made of copper, copper, metal

lohita m. red (the colour), redness

lohita m. a partic. disease of the eyelids, SarṅgS.

lohita m. a kind of precious stone

lohita m. a species of rice

lohita m. a sort of bean or lentil

lohita m. Dioscorea Purpurea

lohita m. Cyprinus Rohita

lohita m. a sort of deer

lohita m. a snake, serpent

lohita m. the planet Mars

lohita m. N. of a serpent-demon

lohita m. of a man (pl. his descendants) (cf.

lohita m. of a country

lohita m. of a river (the Brahma-putra)

lohita m. of a sea

lohita m. of a lake

lohita m. (pl.) of a class of gods under the 12th Manu

lohita mf («ā» or «lohinī») n. («ā») f. N. of one of the 7 tongues of Agni

lohita m. Mimosa Pudica

lohita m. a Punar-navā with red flowers

lohita mf («ā» or «lohinī») n. («lohinī») f. a woman with a red-coloured

skin or red with anger

lohita n. any red substance

lohita n. (also m. g. «ardharcādi»; ifc. f. «ā»), blood &c. &c. («-taṁ» «kṛ»,

to shed blood)

lohita n. ruby

lohita n. red sanders

lohita n. a kind of sandal-wood

lohita n. a kind of Agallochum

lohita n. an imperfect form of rainbow

lohita n. a battle, fight

lohita Nom. P. «-tati», to be or become red

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

lohita a. (lohitā or lohinī f.) [ruh-itac rasya laḥ Tv.]

(1) Red, redcoloured; srastāṁsāvatimātralohitatalau bāhū

ghaṭotkṣepaṇāt S. 1. 30; Ku. 3. 29;

muhuścalatpallavalohinībhiruccaiḥśikhābhiḥ śikhinovalīḍhāḥ Ki. 16. 53.

(2) Copper, made of copper. —taḥ

(1) The red colour.

(2) The planet Mars.

(3) A serpent.

(4) A kind of deer.

(5) N. of the river Brahmaputra.

(6) A kind of rice. —tā N. of one of the seven tongues of fire. —taṁ

(1) Copper.

(2) Blood; Ms. 8. 284.

(3) Saffron.

(4) Battle.

(5) Red sanders.

(6) A kind of sandal.

(7) An imperfect form of a rainbow.

(8) A kind of agallochum.

— Comp.

—akṣaḥ 1. a red die. —2. a kind of snake. —3. the (Indian) cuckoo.

—4. an epithet of Viṣṇu. (

—kṣaṁ) 1. the armpit, thigh-joint; hip.

—aṁgaḥ 1. the kāṁpilla tree. —2. the planet Mars.

—ayas n. copper.

—arman n. a red swelling in the whites of the eyes.

—aśokaḥ a variety of Asoka (having red flowers).

—aśvaḥ fire.

—ānanaḥ an ichneumon.

—ārdra a. dripping with blood.

—īkṣaṇa a. redeyed.

—uda a. having red or bloodred water.

—kalmāṣa a. red-spotted.

—kṛṣṇa a. dark-red.

—kṣayaḥ loss of blood.

—grīvaḥ an epithet of Agni.

—caṁdanaṁ saffron.

—puṣpakaḥ the granate tree.

—mṛttikā red chalk.

—śatapatraṁ a red lotus-flower.

—śavala a. dappled with red.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

lohita (= älterem rohita) UṆĀDIS. 3, 94. 1) adj. f. lohitā (SUŚR. 1, 135, 1)

und lohinī VOP. 4, 27. a) «röthlich, roth» AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. TRIK. 3, 3, 180.

H. 1395. an. 3, 290. fg. (wo wohl varṇabhede st. balabhede zu lesen ist,

welches WILSON durch «a form of array» wiedergiebt). MED. t. 148.

HALĀY. 4, 48. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. AV. 6, 127, 1. 14, 2, 48. 15, 1, 7. 8.

niryāsa TS. 2, 5, 1, 4. lohinī AV. 7, 74, 1. 10, 2, 11. tvac 13, 3, 21. tanū

54. mṛttikā AIT. BR. 3, 34. ŚAT. BR. 3, 5, 4, 23. 14, 5, 2, 3. KIR. 16, 53. —

ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 1, 2. 5, 4, 1. 6, 6, 2, 11. -piṇḍa 14, 6, 11, 3. -rasa 13, 4, 4,

10. -sūtra KAUŚ. 85. aja 19. 35. 39. aśvattha 48. lohitoṣṇīṣa ĀŚV. ŚR. 9,

7, 4. GṚHY. 2, 9, 7. roman ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 24. -pāṁsu GOBH. 4, 2, 7.

ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. M. 5, 6. ghanāḥ MBH. 3, 14269. lohitāditya R. 3, 49, 4.

HARIV. 12794. bhūmi SUŚR. 1, 135, 1. lākṣā ṚT. 1, 5. VARĀH. BṚH. S.

21, 15. 65, 2. Ind. St. 8, 273. karman BHĀG. P.4,29,27.5,19,19. Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 175,b, No. 398. bhāskaraḥ sarvalohitaḥ R. 4, 60, 17. ati-

KUMĀRAS. 3, 29. ŚĀK. 119. atimātra- 29. mṛdu- MAITRJUP. 6, 30. — b)

«kupfern, metallen»: pātra KAUŚ. 29. svadhiti AV. 6, 141, 2. GOBH. 3, 6,

6. — 2) m. a) «eine best. Krankheit der Augenlider» ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 7,

87. — b) «ein best. Edelstein» (nicht «Rubin») Spr. 2693. — c) «eine

Reisart» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. SUŚR. 1, 228, 10. — d) «Linsen» ŚABDAC. im

ŚKDR. — e) «Dioscorea purpurea» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) «ein best. Fisch,

Cyprinus Rohita Ham.» — g) «eine best. Hirschart» TRIK. ŚABDAR. im

ŚKDR. — h) «Schlange» DHAR. im ŚKDR. — i) «der Planet Mars» H. an.

MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 8. Ind. St. 2, 261. — k) N. pr. a)

eines Nāga MBH. 2, 360. — b) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern unter dem

12ten Manu VP. 268. = surāntara DHAR. im ŚKDR. — g) eines Mannes P.

4, 1, 18. -smṛti MAŚK. Coll. I, 19. pl. «seine Nachkommen» PRAVARĀDHY.

in Verz. d. B. H. 57, 11. HARIV. 1465 (st. lohitā yāmadūtāśca liest die

neuere Ausg. lohitāyanapūtāśca, 1771 lesen beide Ausgg. lauhityāḥ). —

d) «eines Flusses» (der Brahmaputra) H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. MBH.

13, 7647. — e) eines Meeres: lohitasyodadheḥ kanyā krūrā lohitabhojanā

MBH. 3, 14366. 14494. raktajalaṁ ghoraṁ lohitaṁ nāma sāgaram. gatvā

R. 4, 40, 39; vgl. lohitodo varuṇālayaḥ MBH. 3, 14269. — z) eines Sees:

lohite (lohito die neuere Ausg.) hrade HARIV. 9791; vgl. 9145 und LIA. I,

155, N. — h) eines Landes MBH. 2, 1025. — 3) f. lohitā a) Bez. einer der

sieben Zungen des Agni GṚHYASAṁGR. 1, 14. — b) Bez. zweier Pflanzen:

= varāhakrāntā und raktapunarnavā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) f. lohinī «eine

Frau von röthlicher Hautfarbe» HALĀY. 4, 53. JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. — 5) n.

a) «Kupfer, Metall» AV. 11, 3, 7. — b) «Blut» (auch m. nach gaṇa

ardharcādi zu P.2,4,31. SIDDH. K. 251,a,2 v. u.). AK.2,6,2,15. H. 621. H.

an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. AV.9,7,17. 10,9,18. 11,5,25. VS. 39,9. 10.

TS.2,1,7,2.4,1,1. yo lohitaṁ karavat «wer Blut vergiesst» 6, 10, 2. TBR. 3,

2, 9, 2. AIT. BR. 2, 14. lohitaṁ duhīta ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 2, 1. 14, 6, 2, 13.

KAUŚ. 11. 13. 36. CHĀND. UP. 6, 5, 2. M. 4, 56. 8, 284. MBH. 3, 14366. R.

4, 44, 65. 5, 14, 18. SUŚR. 1, 121, 13. BHĀG. P. 3, 26, 59. 67. VET. in LA.

(III) 4, 7. salohitā diśaścāsan so v. a. «blutroth gefärbt» MBH. 3, 11399. —

c) «Schlacht» H. an. — d) «Safran; rother Sandel»; = gośīrṣa («eine Art

Sandelholz») H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. = pattaṅga, haricandana und

tṛṇakuṅkuma RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e) «eine best. unvollkommene Form

eines Regenbogens» TRIK. — Vgl. a-, ā- (auch ṚT. 1, 21), kṛṣṇa-,

dhūmra-, nīla- (adj. auch R. 2, 96, 30), bṛhallohita, vi-, su-, lohitya,

lauhitya.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

lohita 1 (rohita) I (ROHITA) Son of Hariścandra. (For details see under

HARIŚCANDRA).

lohita 2 II A king of ancient India. This king was conquered by Arjuna.

(Śloka 17, Chapter 27, Vana Parva).

lohita 3 III A serpent. This serpent is a member of the court of Varuṇa.

(Śloka 8, Chapter 9, Sabhā Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

lohita lohita (= lohita, q. cf.),

I. adj., f. tā, or inī, Red, Śāk. d. 29.

II. m.

1. Red, the colour.

2. The planet Mars.

3. A sort of deer.

4. A snake.

5. A form of array.

6. A sort of fish, Cyprinus rohita.

7. (m. ?). A kind of mineral, Pañc. i. d. 89.

III. n.

1. Blood, Man. 4, 56.

2. War, battle.

3. Red sanders.

4. Saffron.

— Comp. dhūmra-, adj. of a grey-red colour, MBh. 13, 753. nīla-,

I. adj. blue-red, purple, of a purple colour, Śāk. d. 194.

II. m. the name of one of the great periods called Kalpas.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

lohita (f. -tā & lohinī) reddish, red, coppery, metallic. — m. a cert.

precious stone, (*a kind of fish*). N. of a serpent-demon etc.; n. copper,

metal i.g., blood, *saffron.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

lohita loh-ita [later form of rohita], a. (C. ā; V., C. inī) reddish, red; made

of copper or metal (V., rare); m. a kind of gem (not ruby; very rare);

planet Mars; n. red substance (V., rare); copper, metal (AV.1); blood

(ord. mg.): -ṁ kṛ, shed blood (V.).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

lohita na° ruha itac rasya laḥ . 1 kuṅkume 2 raktacandana 3

raktagośīrṣakabhede medi° . 4 pattaṅge 5 haricandane śabdaca° . 6

tṛṇakuṅkume 7 rudhire ca rājani° 8 yuddhe hemaca° . 9 nadabhede 10

mardane 11 raktavarṇe ca pu° medi° . 12 raktatāyuta tri° . 13 mṛgabhede

14 rohitamatsye 15 sarpe 16 devabhede bharataḥ . 17 masūre śabdaca°

18 raktālau 19 raktaśālau rājani° . 20 vanabhede 21 sarovarabhede

brahmaputraśabde dṛśyam . sarvatra jātau striyāṁ ṅīṣ . varṇe tu strītve

ṅīp tasya naḥ . lohinī lāhitavarṇayutastriyām . ruha—inan rasya laḥ .

rohaṇakartari striyāṁ ṭāp .

वंशरोचना — vaṁśarocanā Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vaṁśarocanā «vaṁśa-rocanā» f. an earthy concretion of a milk white

colour formed in the hollow of a bamboo and called bamboo-manna (also

«-locana»

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vaṁśarocanā f. «Tabaschir» AK. 2, 9, 110. H. 1154. VYUTP. 135.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

vaṁśarocanā strī, (rocate iti . ruca + nandyāditvāt lyuḥ . ṭāp . vaṁśasya

rocanā .) svanāmakhyātavaṁśaparvasthitaśvetavarṇauṣadhaviśeṣaḥ .

vaṁśalocana iti bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . tvakkṣīrā 2 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 9 . 109

.. vaṁśalocanā 3 . iti bharataḥ .. tugākṣīrī 4 śubhā 5 vāṁśī 6 vaṁśajā 7 .

iti ratnamālā .. kṣīrikā 8 . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. tugā 9 tvakkṣīrī 10 śubhrā

11 vaṁśakṣīrī 12 vaiṇavī 13 tvaksārā 14 karmarī 15 śvetā 16

vaṁśakarpūrarocanā 17 tuṅgā 18 rocanikā 19 piṅgā 20 vaṁśaśarkarā 21 .

asyā guṇāḥ . rūkṣatvam . kaṣāyatvam . madhuratvam . himatvam .

raktaśuddhikāritvam . tāpapittodrekaharatvañca . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. api

ca .

vaṁśajā vṛṁhaṇī vṛṣyā balyā svādbī ca śītalā .

tṛṣṇākāsajvaraśvāsakṣayapittāsrakāmalāḥ .

haret kuṣṭhaṁ vraṇaṁ pāṇḍuṁ kaṣāyā vātakṛcchrajit .. iti

bhāvaprakāśaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

vaṁśaro(lo)canā strī vaṁśeṣu rocate ruca—lyu vā rasya laḥ .

vaṁśaparvasthite śvetavarṇe karpūrākāre dravye . (vaṁśalocana) .

vaṁśajā vṛṁhaṇī vṛṣyā balyā svādvī ca śītalā .

tṛṣṇākāsajvaraśvāsakṣayapittāsrakāmalāḥ . haret kuṣṭhaṁ praṇaṁ

pāṇḍuṁ kaṣāyavātakṛcchrajit bhāvapra° .

वंशलोचना — vaṁśalocanā Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vaṁśalocanā «vaṁśa-locanā» f. an earthy concretion of a milk white

colour formed in the hollow of a bamboo and called bamboo-manna (also

«-locana»

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vaṁśalocanā f. dass. ŚABDAR. bei WILSON.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

vaṁśalocanā strī, (vaṁśarocanā . rasya laḥ .) vaṁśarocanā . iti

hemacandraḥ .. asyā guṇāḥ .

kaṣāyamadhurā rūkṣā vātaghnī vaṁśalocanā .

tugākṣīrī kṣayaśvāsakāsaghnī madhurā himā .. iti rājavallabhaḥ ..

विचित्र — vicitra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vicitra «vi-citra» see s.v.

vicitra «vi-citra» mf («ā») n. variegated, many-coloured, motley, brilliant

&c.

mf («ā») n. manifold, various, diverse &c.

mf («ā») n. strange, wonderful, surprising &c.

mf («ā») n. charming, lovely, beautiful

mf («ā») n. amusing, entertaining (as a story)

mf («ā») n. painted, coloured

vicitra «vi-citra» mf («ā») n. («am») ind. manifoldly, variously

mf («ā») n. charmingly

vicitra «vi-citra» m. the Aśoka tree

vicitra «vi-citra» m. N. of a king

vicitra «vi-citra» m. of a son of Manu Raucya or Deva-sāvarṇi

vicitra «vi-citra» m. of a heron

vicitra «vi-citra» mf («ā») n. («ā») f. a white deer

vicitra «vi-citra» m. colocynth

vicitra «vi-citra» m. (in music) a partic. Mūrchanā

vicitra «vi-citra» m. N. of a river

vicitra «vi-citra» n. variegated colour, party-colour

vicitra «vi-citra» n. wonder, surprise

vicitra «vi-citra» n. a figure of speech (implying apparently the reverse of

the meaning intended)

vicitra «vi-citra» n. «-katha» m. «one whose stories are amusing», N. of a

man

vicitra «vi-citra» n. «-caritra» mfn. behaving in a wonderful manner

vicitra «vi-citra» n. «-cīnāṁśuka» n. variegated China cloth, shot or

watered China silk

vicitra «vi-citra» n. «-tā» f. «-tva» n. variegation, variety, wonderfulness

vicitra «vi-citra» n. «-deha» mfn. having a painted body

vicitra «vi-citra» n. elegantly formed

vicitra «vi-citra» m. a cloud

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-paśu» m. N. of a poet

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-bhūṣaṇa» m. N. of a Kiṁ-nara

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-mālyābharaṇa» mfn. having variegated garlands and

ornaments

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-mauliśrī-cūḍa» m. N. of a prince

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-rūpa» mfn. having various forms, various, diverse

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-varṣin» mfn. raining here and there (not

everywhere)

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-vākya-paṭutā» f. great eloquence

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-vāgurocchrāya-maya» mf («ī») n. filled with various

outspread nets

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-vīrya» m. «of marvellous heroism», N. of a

celebrated king of the lunar race (the son of śāṁtanu by his wife Satya-

vatī, and so half-brother of Bhīṣma; when he died childless, his mother

requested Vyāsa, whom she had borne before her marriage to the sage

Parāśara, to raise up issue to Vicitra-vīrya; so Vyāsa married the two

widows of his half-brother, Ambikā and Ambālikā, and by them became

the father of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu; cf. 375; 376)

vicitra «vi-citra» m. («-sū» f. «mother of Vicitra-vīrya», N. of Satya-vatī

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-siṁha» m. N. of a man

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-trāṅga» m. «having variegated limbs or a spotted

body», a peacock

vicitra «vi-citra» m. a tiger

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-trāpīḍa» m. N. of a Vidyā-dhara

vicitra «vi-citra» m. «-trālaṁkāra-svara» m. N. of a serpent-demon

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

vicitra a.

(1) Diversified, variegated, spotted, speckled; Mu. 1. 4.

(2) Various, varied.

(3) Painted.

(4) Beautiful, lovely; kvacidvicitraṁ jalayaṁtramaṁdiraṁ Rs. 1. 2.

(5) Wonderful, surprising, strange; hatavidhilasitānāṁ hī vicitro

vipākaḥ Śi. 11. 64. —trā A white deer. —traṁ

(1) Variegated colour.

(2) Surprise.

— Comp.

—aṁga a. having a spotted body. (

—gaḥ) 1. a peacock. —2. tiger.

—deha a. having a lovely body. (

—haḥ) a cloud.

—rūpa a. diverse.

—vīryaḥ N. of a king of the lunar race. [He was a son of Śantanu by

his wife Satyavatī and so half-brother of Bhishma. When he died childless,

his mother called Vyāsa (her own son before her marriage), and

requested him to raise up issue to Vichitravīrya in accordance with the

practice of Niyoga. He complied with the request, and begot on Ambikā

and Ambālika, the two widows of his brother, two sons Dhṛtarāṣṭra and

Pāṇḍu respectively].

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vicitra (2. vi + citra) 1) adj. (f. ā) Accent eines mit vi- anlautenden

comp., dessen zweites Glied ein adj. ist, gaṇa vispaṣṭādi zu P. 6, 2, 24. a)

«vielfarbig, bunt, schillernd»: -mālyābharaṇaiḥ MBH. 3, 2114. —

veṣābharaṇāḥ R. 1, 9, 22. 2, 39, 17. -vālukajala 55, 31. 91, 21.

rukmavinduvicitrābhyāṁ carmabhyām 100, 21. 3, 49, 3. 61, 11. Spr. 2207.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 39. 12, 11. 24, 14. 43, 57. 64, 1. 2. Ind. St. 2, 258.

278. BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 12. 2, 1, 36. 3, 23, 14. — b) «verschiedlich,

mannichfaltig, verschiedenartig»: surāpānasya niṣkṛtiḥ M. 11, 98.

vicitrāyudhapāṇayaḥ MBH. 3, 12092. vanāni 16743. vicitrārthapada

(ākhyāna) R. 1, 4, 28 (3, 72 GORR.). 2, 95, 3. 7, 20,12. Spr. 731. 1253

(II). saṁsāra 1623 (II). RĀJA-TAR. 2, 113. Spr. 3276. 3359. 4990. BHĀG.

P. 1, 7, 17. 3, 1, 37. 7, 24. 18, 19. 22, 20. 26, 5. 4, 14, 21. 7, 1, 10. SĀH.

D. 100. NĪLAK. 114. vicitrādhyāya Verz. d. Oxf. H. 325,a,31. vicitram adv.:

upakūjitā BHĀG. P. 5, 2, 4. vicitravikṛtānanāḥ KATHĀS. 46, 201.

vicitrakṛtrimāṇi PAÑCAR. 2, 1, 24. nānāvicitrakṛtamaṇḍana CAURAP. 19.

— c) «seltsam, absonderlich, wunderbar»: atyadbhutamidaṁ tvadya

vicitramābhāti me MBH. 3, 12029. vastuśaktayaḥ Spr. 238 (II). 1019.

kimatra vicitram GĪT.8,8. KATHĀS. 49,241. RĀJA-TAR.5,261. SĀH. D.

722. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 250,a,40. vicitrā hi sūtrasya kṛtiḥ pāṇineḥ KĀŚ. zu P.

1, 2, 35. n. «eine Gattung des Paradoxon»: vicitraṁ yatnaścedviparītaḥ

phalecchayā KUVALAJ. 107,b. z. B. namanti santastrailokyādapi labdhuṁ

samunnatim ebend. PRATĀPAR. 91,b,3. — d) («durch Abwechselung)

reizend, prächtig, schön»: gṛhāṇi R. 1, 6, 26. jalayantramandira ṚT. 1, 2.

kṣapāḥ Spr. 1039 (II). śayyā 1391. brahmasabhā PAÑCAR. 1, 10, 94.

kathā so v. a. «unterhaltend, amüsant» KATHĀS. 18, 68. 40, 115. 63, 5.

69, 185. HIT. 8, 18. 26, 22. -vākyapaṭutā so v. a. «Beredsamkeit» Spr.

4713. arthavacca vicitraṁ ca na śakyaṁ bahu bhāṣitum 2766. karṇe

kalaṁ kimapi rauti śanairvicitram 1884. vicitraṁ gāyanti R. 3, 79, 12. — 2)

m. N. pr. a) eines Fürsten MBH. 1, 2697. — b) eines Sohnes des Manu

Raucya (Devasāvarṇi) HARIV. 489. MĀRK. P. 94, 31. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 31.

— c) eines Reihers HIT. 120, 10. — 3) f. ā «Koloquinthe» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

— 4) n. SIDDH.K.249,b,1. — Vgl. vaicitrya.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

vicitra A Kṣatriya King. It is mentioned in Mahābhārata, Ādi Parva,

Chapter 67, Stanza 61, that this King was born from a portion of the

asura Krodhavaśa.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

vicitra a. variegated, many-coloured; various, manifold, different;

extraordinary, strange, wonderful beautiful, surprising, amusing. Abstr. —

tā f.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

vicitra vi-citra, a. variegated, many-coloured, brilliant; various, manifold,

diverse; strange, wonderful; (varied), charming, lovely, beautiful;

entertaining (story): -m, ad.;

-katha, m. (telling interesting tales), N.;

-tā, f. variety; strangeness;

-mālya+ābhar-aṇa, a. having variegated garlands and ornaments;

-vākya-paṭu-tā, f. great eloquence;

-vāgura+uccrāya-maya, a. (ī) filled with various outspread nets;

-vīrya, m. (of marvellous heroism), N. of a son of Śaṁtanu and

Satyavatī (after his death, Vyāsa begat Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Pāṇḍu, and Vidura

with his widow);

-siṁha, m. N.;

-āpīḍa, m. N. of a fairy.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

vicitra na° viśeṣeṇa citram . 1 karvūravarṇe . 2 tadvati tri° śabdaca° 3

āścarye tri° . 4 mṛgervārau strī rājani° . 5 arthālaṅkārabhede na°

alaṅkāraśabde 403 pṛ° dṛśyam . saṁjñāyāṁ kan . bhurjapatravṛkṣe pu°

rājani° .

विशद — viśada Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899viśada «vi-śada» mf («ā») n. (prob. fr. 1. «śad») «conspicuous», bright,

brilliant, shining, splendid, beautiful, white, spotless, pure (lit. and fig.;

«am» ind.) &c.

mf («ā») n. calm, easy, cheerful (as the mind, the eye, a smile)

mf («ā») n. clear, evident, manifest, intelligible (compar. «-tara»)

mf («ā») n. tender, soft (to the touch; as food, wind, odour)

viśada «vi-śada» mf («ā») n. (ifc.) skilled or dexterous in, fit for

mf («ā») n. endowed with

viśada «vi-śada» m. white (the colour)

viśada «vi-śada» m. N. of a king (the son of Jayad-ratha)

viśada «vi-śada» n. yellowish sulphurate of iron

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-tā» f. clearness, distinctness (v.l.)

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-nara-karankāya» (ā. «-yate»), to resemble a white

human skull

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-prajṇa» mfn. of clear understanding, keen-witted,

sagacious

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-prabha» mfn. of pure effulgence, shedding pure light

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-dātman» mfn. pure-hearted

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-dānana» mfn. (ifc.) one whose face is radiant with

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

viśada a.

(1) Clear, pure, pellucid, clean, spotless; yogatidrātaviśadaiḥ

pāvanairavalokanaiḥ R. 10. 14, 19. 39; 8. 3 praṇayaviśadā dṛṣṭiṁ vaktre

dadāti na śaṁki tā Ratn. 3. 9. Ki. 5. 12.

(2) White, of a pure, white colour; nirdhautahāragulikāviśadaṁ

himāṁbhaḥ R. 5. 70; Ku. 1. 44. 6. 25, Śi. 9. 26, Ki. 4. 23.

(3) Bright, shining, beautiful; Ku. 3. 33; Śi. 8. 70.

(4) Clear, evident, manifest.

(5) Calm, free from anxiety, at ease: jāto mamāyaṁ viśadaḥ

prakamaṁ (aṁtarātmā) S. 4. 21, V. 3. —daḥ The white colour. (viśadīkṛ)

8. U. ‘to explain make clear, illustrate’).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

viśada 1) adj. (f. ā) a) «klar, hell, blank, heiter, rein»; = śukla, pāṇḍura,

śuci u.s.w. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. TRIK. 3, 3, 211. H. 1392. 1436. an. 3, 339.

MED. d. 39. HALĀY. 1, 132. acchasphaṭika- (ambhas) MEGH. 52.

nirdhautahāraguṭikā- (himāmbhas) RAGH. 5, 70. śīdhu Spr. 3322. madya

SUŚR. 2, 477, 3. Oel 1, 182, 3. Urin 2, 82, 15. vīrya 1, 148, 9. vyoman

RĀJA-TAR. 3, 375. prabhā ŚIŚ. 9, 26. RAGH. 4, 18. 9, 38. candrapādāḥ

MEGH. 71. candrikā RAGH. 19, 39. daśanāṁśavaḥ KUMĀRAS. 6, 25. —

hāramayūkha BHĀG. P. 3, 28, 25. himācala KIR. 5, 12. śṛṅgocchrāyaiḥ

kumudaviśadaiḥ MEGH. 59. sphaṭika- (nagendra) 63. vapus GĪT. 1, 12.

kadamba 2, 8. kaca AK. 2, 6, 2, 49. H. 570. śastra BHĀG. P. 8, 10, 14.

Auge SUŚR. 2, 141, 17. kumudaviśadāni prekṣitāni MEGH. 41.

prītiviśadairnetraiḥ RAGH. 17, 35. viśvāsaviśadāṁ dṛśam RĀJA-TAR. 8,

1279. Mund SUŚR. 2, 235, 6. prasādaviśadānana RĀJA-TAR. 3, 25.

adhara KUMĀRAS. 3, 33. oṣṭhastāmbūladyutiviśadaḥ ŚIŚ. 8, 70. smita

KUMĀRAS. 1, 45. BHĀG. P. 4, 16, 9. dantāvabhāsaviśadasmitavaktrakānti

ṚT. 3, 18. svarūpaṁ brahmacaryaṁ ca MBH. 4, 186. antarātman ŚĀK. 97.

āśaya BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 45. 4, 20, 10. hṛtpadma KAIVALJOP. bei MUIR, ST.

4, 304. hṛdaya Spr. 4568. cetas 2071. viśadātman 2680. 4232. yaśas

KATHĀS. 22, 36. BHĀG. P. 1, 18, 11. kīrti 8, 21, 4. RĀJA-TAR. 8, 1152.

anuvṛtti BHĀG. P. 3, 4, 12. nṛpaśrī RĀJA-TAR. 4, 373. -prajña 5, 79.

vijñāna SARVADARŚANAS. 29, 18. svarūpāvabhāsa 47, 18. phalapaṅkti

MĀRK. P. 43, 39. nijadīrghavaṁśaviśadapreṅkhatpatākākṛti Inschr. in

Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 506, Śl. 22. «rein, lauter», von einem Menschen

KĀM. NĪTIS. 12, 34. — b) «klar, deutlich, verständlich»; = vyakta TRIK. H.

an. MED. HALĀY. 4, 67. viśadapaṭuravaiḥ PAÑCAR. 3, 9, 14. ucchūsita

RAGH. 8, 3. niḥśvāsa (suviśada) MṚCCH. 48, 22. śāstra HARIV. 15701

(viṣada die ältere, viśada die neuere Ausg.). vivekaviśadā kathā RĀJA-

TAR. 2, 113. bhāratavyākhyā Verz. d. Oxf. H.2,a, No. 14. fg. 161,b,35

(su-). 257,b,31 (-tara). — c) «weich anzufühlen» MBH. 12, 6856. 14, 1416.

von Speisen im Gegens. zu khara PAT. zu P. 7, 3, 69. Schol. zu P. 2, 1, 35.

4, 2, 16. H. 921, Schol. SUŚR. 1, 246, 21. der Südwind 76, 14. von einem

Geruch MBH. 12, 6848. 14, 1409. — d) «geschickt zu Etwas

(geschmeidig)»: nṛtyaprayogaviśadau caraṇau MṚCCH. 9, 19. — e) am

Ende eines comp. «behaftet mit»: kāsaśvāsādiduḥkha- SARVADARŚANAS.

101, 1. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Fürsten, eines Sohnes des Jayadratha, BHĀG.

P. 9, 21, 23. — Vgl. vaiśadya.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

viśada A King who was the son of Jayadratha and father of King Senajit.

(Bhāgavata, Skandha 9).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

viśada viśada,

I. adj.

1. Of a white colour, Megh. 41; Śiś. 9, 26; Kir. 5, 12.

2. Clear, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 3322.

3. Pure, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 2680; spotless, Śāk. d. 97.

4. Evident.

5. Beautiful.

II. m. White, the colour.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

viśada a. clear, pure, distinct, intelligible; tender, soft; dexterous, fit for

(—°). Abstr. -tā f.

वेणुमन्त — veṇumanta Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975veṇumanta A mountain very famous in the Purāṇas. This mountain is

white in colour. It is said that this mountain is on a par with the mountain

Mandara in the Northern region. (M.B. Sabhā Parva, Dākṣiṇātyapāṭha,

Chapter 33).

वोरुखान — vorukhāna Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vorukhāna m. a horse (described as one of a pale red colour)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vorukhāna m. «ein Pferd von blassrother Farbe» H. 1240. wohl nach einem

Lande, vielleicht Hyrkanien, benannt.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

vorukhāna vorukhāna, m. A horse described as of red and white colour.

शार — śāra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śāra mf («ā») n. (in most meanings also written «sāra»; of doubtful

derivation) variegated in colour, of different colours (as dark hair mixed

with grey), motley, spotted, speckled 2

mf («ā») n. yellow

śāra m. variegating or a variegated colour, (esp.) a mixture of blue and

yellow, green

śāra m. (also «śāraka») a kind of die or a piece used at chess or at

backgammon

śāra m. air, wind

śāra m. hurting, injuring (fr. «śṝ»)

śāra mf («ā») n. («ī») f. a chessman &c. (see m.)

śāra m. a kind of bird (= «śāri»)

śāra m. Kuśa grass

śāra n. a variegated colour

śāra Vṛiddhi form of «śara», in comp.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śāra a. [śār-ac śṝ-ghañ vā]

(1) Variegated, speckled, mottled, spotted.

(2) Yellow. —raḥ

(1) A variegated colour.

(2) Green colour.

(3) Air, wind.

(4) A piece used at chess, a chessman; kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake

trīḍati praṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39.

(5) Injuring, hurting

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śāra P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2 (vgl. P. 6, 1, 159). m. f. (ī) TRIK. 3, 5, 19. 1) adj.

«bunt, scheckig» P. 3, 3, 21. Vārtt. 2. AK. 3, 4, 25, 168. H. an. 2, 461.

MED. r. 90. HALĀY. 4, 56. palita- DAŚAK. 60, 5. Vgl. kṛṣṇa- und sāra. —

2) m. a) «ein beim Würfelspiel gebrauchter Stein, — Figur» H. 487.H. an.

MED. kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ Spr. 2294.

pramādadatta- DAŚAK. 70, 4. — b) «Wind» P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2. AK. H. an.

MED. — c) nom. act. von śar, = hiṁsana ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. —

3) f. ī a) = 2) a) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. (sārī). — b) Kuśa-«Gras»

ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śāra śāra,

I. adj.

1. Variegated (in colour), Daśak. in Chr. 180, 1 (of hair, mixed with

greyand white).

2. Yellow.

II. m.

1. Hurting (vb. śṛ10).

2. A mixture of blue and yellow, a green.

3. Variegating.

4. Air, wind (cf. sāra).

5. A piece or man at chess, backgammon, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 24 (cf.

sāra).

III. f. rī.

1. An arrow (vb. śṛ10, cf. śara), Chr. 297, 16 = Rigv. i. 112, 16.

2. Kuśa grass.

— Comp. kṛṣṇa-, adj. blue-black, Megh. 48, read -śāra (Sch.).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śāra f. ā mottled, spotted; m. a stone or piece used at sev. games (also

f. ī).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śāra śāra, a. variegated, speckled, spotted; m. piece or figure used on a

draught-board: ī, f. id.; a bird.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

śāra t ka daurbalye . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ . (adanta curā°-para°-aka°-seṭ

.) aśaśārat . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śāra daurvalye ada° cu° uma° saka° seṭ . śārayati—te aśaśārat ta .

śāra na° śāra—ac, śṛ—ghañ vā . 1 karvūravarṇe 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ 3

vāyau pu° amaraḥ 4 akṣopakaraṇe medi° .

शित — śita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śita mfn. (for 2. see p.1071, col.2) satisfied, regaled

śita mfn. (for 1. and 4. see under «śi» and «śo») w.r. for «sita», «bright-

coloured, white.»

śita m. N. of a son of Viśvāmitra

śita mfn. (for 1. &c. see p.1069, col.3) whetted, sharp &c. &c.

mfn. thin, slender, weak, feeble

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śita p. p. [śo-kta]

(1) Sharpened, whetted.

(2) Thin, emaciated.

(3) Wasted, declined.

(4) Weak, feeble,

— Comp.

—agraḥ a thorn.

—dhāra a. sharp-edged.

—śūkaḥ 1. barley. —2. wheat.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śita partic. s. u. 1. śā.

śita partic. s. u. 2. śā und vgl. somaśita.

śita m. N. pr. eines Sohnes des Viśvāmitra MBH. 13, 253.

śita adj. «weiss», subst. f. «Zucker» u. s. w. fehlerhaft für sita. Die

Aehnlichkeit von śiti kann zu dieser Schreibung Veranlassung gegeben

haben; sita ist durch falsche Etymologie aus asita gebildet worden, wie

sura aus asura.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śita a. whetted, sharp, thin.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śita śita, pp. of 1. 2. śā;

a, incorr. for sita, white: -tā, f. sharpness;

-dhāra, a. keen-edged;

-śara-śata, n. pl. hundreds of sharp arrows.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śita tri° śo—kta . 1 durbale 2 śākite ca medi° 3 kṛśe viśvaḥ

शिथिल — śithila Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śithila mf («ā») n. (collateral form of prec.) loose, slack, lax, relaxed,

untied, flaccid, not rigid or compact &c. &c.

mf («ā») n. soft, pliant, supple

mf («ā») n. unsteady, tremulous

mf («ā») n. languid, inert, unenergetic, weak, feeble &c.

mf («ā») n. careless in (loc.)

mf («ā») n. indistinct (as sound)

mf («ā») n. not rigidly observed

mf («ā») n. loosely retained or possessed, abandoned, shaken off

śithila mf («ā») n. («am») ind. loosely, not firmly

śithila mf («ā») n. («ī») f. a kind of tawny-coloured ant (said to be a

variety of the white ant)

śithila n. a loose fastening, looseness, laxity, slowness

śithila n. a partic. separation of the terms or members of a logical series

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śithila a. [ślath-kilac pṛṣo- Uṇ. 1. 53]

(1) Loose, loosened, slackened, relaxed.

(2) Untied, unfastened; S. 2. 6.

(2) Severed, fallen from the stalk; arkasyopari śithilaṁ cyutamiva

navamallikākusumaṁ S. 2. 8.

(3) Languid, enfeebled, unnerved.

(4) Weak, feeble; aśithilapariraṁbha U. 1. 24, 27 ‘fast or close

embrace’.

(5) Flaccid, flabby.

(6) Dissolved.

(7) Decayed.

(8) Ineffective, futile, vain.

(9) Inattentive, careless; Pt. 4. 116. (10) Loosely done, not strictly or

rigidly performed.

(11) Cast off, abandoned. —laṁ

(1) Laxity, looseness.

(2) Slowness. śithi līkṛ means 1. to loosen, unfasten, untie. —2. to

relax, slacken. —3. to weaken, impair, enfeeble.

(4) to give up, abandon; R. 2. 41. śithilībhū 1. to be slackened or

relaxed. —2. to fall off from; Mk. 1. 13).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śithila UṆĀDIS. 1, 54 (vielleicht ist hier śithira zu schreiben). adj. (f. ā)

dass. TRIK. 3, 1, 8. H. 491. HALĀY. 4, 92. tantu KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 1, 6. TS. 7,

1, 5, 4. nirvīryaḥ śithilo yātayāmā «schlaff» 8, 1. KĀṬH. 11, 1. 36, 5. 7.

rāṣṭra «aus den Fugen gehend» 37, 12. chandas PAÑCAV. BR. 17, 1, 12.

TS. 6, 5, 10, 3. indro vai śithila ivāpratiṣṭhita āsīt 7, 3, 7, 1. a- WEBER,

Nax. 2, 303. ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 1, 11. 2, 1, 1, 9. —

navasaṁropaṇaśithilastaruḥ Spr. (II) 90. navamallikākusuma ŚĀK. 41.

vāsas MEGH. 69. VIKR. 115. RĀJA-TAR.4,434. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 139,a, No.

276. bandha SUŚR. 1, 66, 13. ŚĀK. 39. aśithilaparirambha UTTARAR. 11,

12 (15, 16). ṛtuparyāyaśithilaiḥ — mayūrāṅgaruhaiḥ («Pfauenfedern»)

HARIV. 3832. yantra SUŚR. 1, 26, 1. GOLĀDHY. GOLAB. 2. -candanatilaka

DAŚAK. 91, 7. -bhuja Spr. (II) 622. KUVALAJ. 125,a. SĀH. D. 67,13.

vṛṣaṇau PAÑCAT. II, 143. śithilāvayava BHĀG. P. 4, 28, 15. kukṣi SUŚR. 1,

368, 3. gātra MṚCCH. 48, 24. deśaḥ ko nu jalāvasekaśithilaḥ «locker» 47,

1. «schlaff, schlotternd, welk» von lebenden Wesen R. 3, 2, 17. -prāya

(siṁha) Spr. (II) 2027. sainya KATHĀS. 51, 170. gokarṇaśithilaścaran

«unstät wie ein Kuhohr» MBH. 2, 2324. «geschmeidig»: paurayoṣitaḥ Spr.

3276. śārdūlaśithilaścaran «wie ein Tiger» MBH. 4, 345. -samādhi «schlaff,

schwach» MĀLAV. 23. -bandhubhayatrapā KATHĀS. 30, 143.

kuryurvālapriyatvaṁ śithilam Spr. 2656. bāṣpaṁ kuru sthiratayā

śithilānubandham ŚĀK. 90, v. l. sarvā naḥ śithilāḥ kriyāḥ BHĀG. P. 10, 46,

21. prāṇāḥ R. 4, 58, 18. jīvita ad MEGH. 112. vāc «schwach, zitternd»

MBH. 13, 270. R. 6, 85, 7. manas «unstät» MBH. 3, 1320. mit einem loc.

«lässig in»: kriyāsu R. GORR. 2, 76, 32. śithilam adv. «nicht fest»: tasthau

bhuvi RAGH. 15, 96. — Vgl. pra-, śaithilya.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śithila śithila (cf. ślath), adj.

1. Loose, Vikr. d. 115; Pañc. ii. d. 143; loosened, Megh. 69.

2. Flaccid, faded, Śāk. d. 41.

3. Feeble, languid, Bhartṛ. 2, 22.

4. Ineffective.

5. Relaxed, dissolved, Daśak. in Chr. 199, 5.

6. Not very careful, Pañc. ii. d. 82.

7. Not rigidly observed.

8. Loosely retained.

9. Abandoned, Ragh. 2, 41 (°lī kṛ, To abandon).

— Comp. a-, adj. tight, close, Utt. Rāmac. 15, 16.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śithila a. loose, flaccid, languid, trembling, feeble.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śithila śithila, a. loose, slackened, unfastened, drooping; supple; unstable,

tremulous; languid, feeble; careless in (lc.): -m, ad. tottering (stand): (a)

-tā, f. slackness: -ṁ gam or vraj, be neglected.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śithila tri° ślatha—kilac pṛṣo° . 1 ślathe 2 adṛḍhe saṁyogabhede 3 mande

ca śithilasaṁyogaśca pracayaḥ . pracayaḥ śithilākhyo yaḥ saṁyogastena

janyate bhāṣā° bhūyo’vayavāvacchedetrāvayavāntarasaṁyoginyavayave

vartamānaḥ saṁyogaḥ pracayaḥ iti dīnakarī yathā tūlakādau .

शिलाधातु — śilādhātu Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śilādhātu «śilā-dhātu» m. «rock-mineral», chalk

m. yellow ochre

m. red chalk

m. a white fossil substance

m. an aluminous earth of a white or yellowish colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śilādhātu m. «weisse Kreide» TRIK. 2, 3, 6. «eine best. gelbe mineralische

Substanz» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — R. 2, 96, 2 (105, 2 GORR.). 5, 32, 37.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śilādhātu pu° śilāyā dhātuścaramadhāturiva śubhratvāt . 1 śvetopale

(khaḍī) trikā° . 2 pītavarṇe gairikabhede ca rājani° .

शुक्र — śukra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śukra mf («ā») n. (fr. 1. «śuc» cf. «śukla») bright, resplendent

mf («ā») n. clear, pure

mf («ā») n. light-coloured, white

mf («ā») n. pure, spotless

śukra m. N. of Agni or fire

śukra m. of a month (Jyeṣṭha = May-June, personified as the guardian of

Kubera’s treasure)

śukra m. the planet Venus or its regent (regarded as the son of Bhṛigu

and preceptor of the Daityas) &c.

śukra m. clear or pure Soma

śukra m. (with or scil, «graha») a partic. Graha or receptacle for Soma

śukra m. a partic. astrol. Yoga

śukra m. a N. of the Vyāhṛitis («bhūr, bhuvaḥ, svar»)

śukra m. a kind of plant (= «citraka»)

śukra m. N. of a Marutvat

śukra m. of a son of Vasiṣṭha

śukra m. of the third Manu

śukra m. of one of the seven sages under Manu Bhautya

śukra m. of a son of Bhava

śukra m. of a son of Havir-dhāna (cf. «śukla»)

śukra m. (with Jainas) of a partic. Kalpa (q.v.)

śukra n. brightness, clearness, light

śukra n. (also pl.)any clear liquid (as water, Soma &c.)

śukra n. juice, the essence of anything (also pl.)

śukra n. semen virile, seed of animals (male and female), sperm &c. &c.

śukra n. a morbid affection of the iris (change of colour &c. accompanied

by imperfect vision; cf. «śukla»)

śukra n. a good action

śukra n. gold, wealth

śukra n. N. of a Sāman

śukra n. of a Vedic metre

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śukra a. [śuc-raka ni- kutvam] Ved.

(1) Bright, radiant, shining.

(2) White, pure. —kraḥ

(1) The planet Venus.

(2) N. of the preceptor of the Asuras, who, by means of his magical

charm, restored to life the demons killed in battle; see kaca, devayānī,

and yayāti.

(3) The month of Jyeṣṭha.

(4) N. of Agni or fire.

(5) N. of the plant Chitraka. —kraṁ

(1) Semen virile; pumān puṁso’dhika śukre strī bhavatyadhike striyāḥ

Ms. 3. 49, 5. 63.

(2) The essence of anything.

(3) Male and female energy.

(4) Ved. Water.

— Comp.

—aṁgaḥ a peacock.

—kara a. spermatic. (

—raḥ) the marrow of the bones.

—bhuj f. a pea-hen.

—bhūḥ m. the marrow of the bones.

—varaḥ, —vāsaraḥ Friday

—śiṣyaḥ a demon.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śukra (von 1. śuc) UṆĀDIS. 2, 28 (parox.). 1) adj. (f. ā) = śukla KĀŚ. zu

P. 8, 2, 18. a) «klar, licht, hell»; von Sonne, Feuer u.s.w. ṚV. 3, 1, 5. 8.

vidyutaḥ 14. 6, 16, 34. śocis 1, 45, 4. arcis 3, 6, 3. bhānu 7, 4, 1. 66, 16.

ketavaḥ AV. 13, 2, 1. atka ṚV. 1, 95, 7. varṇa 3, 34, 5. vāsas 7, 77, 2.

śukrā kṛṣṇādajaniṣṭa (uṣāḥ) 1, 123, 9. svar 2, 2, 7. 4, 51, 9. ŚAT. BR. 4,

3, 1, 26. PAÑCAV. BR. 15, 5, 9. Gold ṚV. 2, 33, 9. 8, 54, 11. arṇas 5, 45,

10. 6, 6, 4. 58, 1. VS. 19, 89. TBR. 1, 1, 7, 2. MBH. 1, 8419. fg. — b) «klar,

lauter»; m. «der lautere» Soma ṚV. 1, 84, 4. somāḥ śukrāḥ gavāśiraḥ 137,

1. ayaṁ śukro ayāmi te 2, 41, 2. 3. 7, 64, 5. śukramandhaḥ 4, 27, 5. śukrā

āśiraṁ yācante 8, 2, 10. VĀLAKH. 4, 10. AV. 6, 53, 1. VS. 8, 57.

somapītha ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 1, 1. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 15, 15, 13. ŚAT. BR. 1, 6, 3,

7. 4, 2, 1, 29. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 5, 19. 11, 3. 14, 2. — c) «hellfarbig, weisslich,

weiss»: pṛśnyāḥ śukra ūdhani ṚV. 2, 34, 2. dhūma 6, 2, 6. payas 1, 160,

3. 9, 19, 5. upastir 62, 28. anaḍvāhau 10, 85, 10. AV. 8, 7, 1. svaravaḥ 12,

1, 13. śukraḥ piṅgākṣo hotā syāt ŚĀÑKH. BR. 25, 10. — d) übertr. «hell,

rein, fleckenlos»: vacas ṚV. 2, 9, 4. devī manīṣā 7, 34, 1. PAÑCAV. BR. 1,

2, 9. āhuti ŚAT. BR. 11, 6, 2, 6. — 2) m. a) «Feuer» AK. 1, 1, 1, 51. TRIK.

3, 3, 375. H. 1098. an. 2, 463. MED. r. 93. — b) N. «eines Sommermonats»

P. 4, 4, 128, Vārtt. 2, Schol. AK. 1, 1, 3, 16. TRIK. H. 154. H. an. MED.

HALĀY. 1, 114. VS. 7, 30. śukraśca śuciśca graiṣmāvṛtū 14, 6. 22, 31.

ŚAT. BR. 4, 3, 1, 15. MBH. 1, 5883. R. 7, 15, 16 (personif. als Schatzhüter

Kubera’s). SUŚR. 1, 19, 9. VP. 225. — c) «der Planet Venus» (personif. als

Sohn Bhṛgu’s und Lehrer der Asura) AK. 1, 1, 2, 26. TRIK. 1, 1, 92. 3, 3,

375. H. 119. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 48. HARIV. 4258. 12794. 14076. R. 2,

100, 38. KUMĀRAS. 3, 43. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 21. 5, 61. 9, 18. 14. 23. 28.

BṚH. 2, 4. LAGHUJ. 1, 8. 2, 11. VP. 239. MĀRK. P. 52, 11. Verz. d. B. H.

146, «a» (16). Verz. d. Oxf. H. 41, «a», 16. 69, «b», 1. 2. 86, «b», 43. 330,

«a», 5. 23. 339, «b», 7. Verz. d. Cambr. H. 34. fg. PAÑCAT. 50, 20. Schol.

zu KĀTY. ŚR. 345, 2. 348, 4 v. u. asurāṇāmupādhyāyaḥ MBH. 1, 2544.

2606. 12, 2231. 13, 4146. 4687. HARIV. 12200. 12808. fgg. 14234. fgg.

KĀM. NĪTIS. 14, 63. BHĀG. P. 9, 14, 6. PAÑCAR. 1, 1, 66. PAÑCAT. Pr. 2.

Verz. d. B. H. No. 897. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 25, «a», 38. 83,a,29. DAŚAK.

186,11. HALL 18. — d) «der» Śukragraha (auch mit Beisatz von graha) VS.

7, 13. 13, 56. ŚAT. BR. 4, 2, 1, 1. 5, 4, 4, 20. 3, 3, 2, 7. -pātra 4, 3, 1, 26.

3, 17. śukrāgra 5, 9, 4, 6. 13. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 2, 9. 6, 11. Vgl. 1) «b»). — e)

N. eines Joga (viṣkambhādi) KOṢṬHĪPR. im ŚKDR. — f) N. pr. ein Sohn

Bhava’s VP. 1, 8, 11. ein Marutvant HARIV. 11546. ein Sohn Vasiṣṭha’s

(vgl. śukta) 492. VP. 83. der 3te Manu HARIV. 424. einer der 7 Weisen

unter Manu Bhautja MĀRK. P. 100, 31. ein Sohn Havirdhāna’s (vgl. śukla)

VP. 1, 14, 2. — 3) n. a) «Helle, Klarheit, Licht»; auch pl. ṚV. 1, 135, 2. 140,

11. 3, 8, 9. vajraṁ śukrairabhīvṛtam 44, 5. VS. 40, 8. TBR. 1, 5, 1, 1.

KAṬHOP. 5, 8. MAITRJUP. 6, 24. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 2. dhātaiva khalu

bhūtānāṁ sukhaduḥkhe priyāpriye. dadhāti sarvamīśānaḥ

purastācchukramuccaran.. MBH. 3, 1138. fg. 5, 917. 2751. 1737. fgg. R.

ed. Bomb. 3, 43, 33. — b) «Klares» so v. a. «klare Flüssigkeit, Wasser»,

Soma NAIGH. 1, 12. VS. 19, 5. śukraṁ tvā śukra ā dhunomi 8, 48. pra

vāyave bharata cāru śukram ṚV. 5, 43, 3. 4. — c) «Saft, Seim»: trayyai

vidyāyai AIT. BR. 5, 32. ŚAT. BR. 11, 5, 8, 4. 12, 4, 2, 10. 7, 1, 6. ŚĀÑKH.

ŚR. 4, 8, 2. — d) «Same» AK.2,6,2,13.3,4,31,236. TRIK.3,3,375. H. 619.

629. H. an. MED. HALĀY.3,16.5,67. SIDDH. K. 249,b,3. 4.

ṚV.4,3,10.6,66,1. MUṆḌ. UP.3,2,1. śukrātireke pumānbhavati NIR. 14, 6.

M. 3, 49. svapne siktvā śukram 2, 181. nirasya śukram 5, 63. 135. YĀJÑ.

3, 93. MBH. 1, 2383. svānna 2434. 8410. 3, 14306. 14311. R. 2, 108, 11

(116, 20 GORR.). SUŚR. 1, 44, 2. 12. 48, 11. 126, 20. -sthāna 270, 19.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 14. fgg. 96. 69, 14. 76, 1. BṚH. 2, 11. LAGHUJ.2, 18

(-sāra). VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 54. einer der sieben Elementarstoffe

WISE 54. — e) «eine best. Augenkrankheit: ein weisser Fleck im dunkeln

Theile des Auges» TRIK. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 2, 311, 13. fgg. 329, 3. fgg.

ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 7, 90. — f) N. eines Sāman Ind. St. 3, 240,a. KĀTY. ŚR.

26, 3, 1. LĀṬY. 1, 6, 24. — g) allegorischer N. eines Metrums ṚV. PRĀT.

17, 4. — Vgl. ati-, kṣīra-, tri-, niḥ-, prati-, mūtra-, rakta-, śuddha-,

vātaśukratva, śaukra fgg.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

śukra (ŚUKRĀCĀRYA) I. Preceptor of the Asuras.

śukra 2 II A son of Vasiṣṭha. Seven sons were born to Vasiṣṭha by his

wife Ūrjjā; they were, Rajas, Gotra, Ūrddhvabāhu, Savana, Anagha,

Sutapas and Śukra. All these seven persons were the Saptarṣis of the

third Manvantaram (Viṣṇu Purāṇa, Part 1, Chapter 10).

śukra 3 III A king who belonged to the dynasty of Emperor Pṛthu. Two

sons, Antardhāna and Vādī were born to Pṛthu. Antardhāna had a son

named Havirdhāna by wife Śikhaṇḍinī. Havirdhāna married Dhiṣaṇā who

was born in Agnikula. Six sons were born to them. They were,

Prācīnabarhis, Śukra, Gaya, Kṛṣṇa, Vraja and Ajina. (Viṣṇu Purāṇa, Part 1,

Chapter 14).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śukra śukra, i. e. 2. śuc + ra,

I. adj.

1. Resplendent, Chr. 288, 14 = Rigv. i. 48, 14.

2. Pure, Windischmaun, Sankara, 68.

II. m.

1. A name of Agni.

2. The planet Venus, Pañc. pr. d. 3.

3. The month Jyeṣṭhā (May — June), Hiḍ. 1, 10.

III. n.

1. Semen virile, Vedāntas. in Chr. 207, 13; MBh. 1, 2434; male and

female strength, Man. 3, 49.

2. A morbid affection of the iris.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śukra a. clear, bright, pure, white. — m. fire or the god of fire, the planet

Venus, a cert. cup of Soma (±graha), N. of sev. men. n. brightness,

purity; water, Soma, juice i.g., semen virile.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śukra śuk-ra, a. [śuc] bright, resplendent (V., rare in E.); clear, pure (V.);

white (V.); pure, spotless (V.); m. fire, Agni (C.); a summer month (V.,

C.); planet Venus (persanified as son of Bhṛgu and teacher of the

Asuras); pure Soma (V.); n. brightness, light (sts. pl.; V., E.); clear liquid,

water, Soma (V.); juice (Br., S.; sts. pl.); semen virile (V. rare, C.): (a) —

danta, m. (white tooth), N.; (a) -vat, a. containing pure juice (V.);

containing the word sukra (Br.); (a) -var-ṇa, a. brilliant-coloured, bright

(RV.);

-vā-ra, m. day of Venus, Friday; (a) -vāsas, a. bright-robed (dawn;

RV.1); (a) -śocis, a. bright-rayed (Agni; V.); (a) -sadman, a. having a

bright dwelling-place (dawn; RV.1).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śukra na° śuca—rak ni° kutvam . 1 majjajāte 2 caramadhātau amaraḥ . 3

netrarogabhede 2844 pṛ° dṛśyam . 5 daityagurau grahabhede amaraḥ . 6

agnau 7 citrakavṛkṣe 8 jyaiṣṭhamāse amaraḥ viṣkambhādiṣu yogeṣa

madhye 9 caturviṁśe yoge ca pu° jyo° ta° .

dhātubhedaśukrasyotpattikāraṇasvarūpādikaṁ bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā

rasādraktaṁ tato māṁsaṁ māṁsānmedaḥ prajāyate . medaso’sthi tato

majjā majjñaḥ śukrasya sambhavaḥ . tataḥ sthūlo bhāgo raso māsenaṁ

puṁsāṁ śukraṁ strīṇāñcārtavaṁ śukrañca bhavati . uktañca suśrute

evaṁ māsena rasaḥ śukro bhavati strīṇāñceti . cakārāt strīṇāmapi śukraṁ

bhavati . ataevoktaṁ suśrute yoṣito’pi snavatyeva śukraṁ puṁsaḥ

samāgame . tatra garbhasya kiñcittu karotīti na cintyate . gabhasya

śuddhasya vikṛtasya tu garmasya kāraṇaṁ tadapi bhavati . yata uktam

yadā nāryāvupeyātāṁ vṛṣasyantyau kathañcana . muñcantyo

śukramanyo’nyamanasthi tatra jāyate iti . etena strīṇāṁ saptamo

dhāturārtavaṁ śukramaṣṭama iti bodhitam āśayādhikyavat . strīṇāṁ

garbhopayogi syādārtavaṁ sarvasammatam . tāsāmapi bale varṇaṁ

śukraṁ puṣṭiṁ karoti hi . evaṁ rasa eva kedārakulyānyāyena sarvān

dhātūn pūravan māsena navadaṇḍottareṇa śukramārtavaṁ ca bhavatīti

siddhāntaḥ . evaṁ sati sādraktamiti saṅgatameva . tato māṁsantato

raktotpatteranantaraṁ māṁsaṁ jāyate rasādevetyarthaḥ .

māṁsānmedaḥ prajāyata iti . māṁsādanantaraṁ medaḥ prajāyate

rasādevetyarthaḥ . medaso’sthi jāyate rasādevetyarthaḥ . evaṁ tato

majjā agre śuddhaṁ śukraṁ sambhavatītyarthaḥ . rasaḥ śarīre tridhā

sañcarati . tathā coktam rasaḥ śarīre śabdārcirjalasantānavat tridhā .

sañcaratyanurūpo’yaṁ nityameva hi dehinām . asyāyamabhiprāyaḥ .

puruṣāstīkṣṇāgnayo madhyamāgnayo mandāgnayaśca bhavanti . tatra

tīkṣṇāgnīnāṁ sa rasaḥ śabdasantānavat śīghraṁ sañcarati .

madhyamāgnīnāmarciḥsantānavanmaghyavegena carati mandāgnīnāṁ

jalasantānavanmandaṁ carati . tena māsena rasaḥ śukraṁ bhavatīti

yaduktam tanmadhyavagena carati . mandāgnīnāṁ

jalamantānavanmanda carati . tena māsena rasaḥ śukraṁ bhavatīti

raduktaṁ tanmadhyamāgnīnadhikṛtyoktam . dīptāgnīnāntu rasaḥ

kiñcinthnena māsena śukraṁ bhavati . mandāgneḥ kiñcida° kena

māseneni siddhāntaḥ . tarhi vājīkaraṇānāmoṣadhīnāṁ kiṁ

prayojanamityāha vājīkariṇya āṣadhyaḥ svaprabhāvaguṇocchrayāt .

virecavanti tāḥ śukraṁ virekidravyavannṛṇām . vājīkariṇyaḥ yābhiḥ

oṣadhībhiḥ puruṣaḥ śukrādhikyāt stroṣu vājivat sāmaryaṁ prāpnoti tāḥ

vājīkariṇyaḥ svaprabhāvaguṇocchrayāt . tatra kāścidīṣadhyaḥ

svaprabhāvādhikyāt, kāścit svaguṇādhikyāt, kāścit

svaprabhāvaguṇādhikyāt . tatra

saṅkalpapādalepaviśiṣṭakāntāsparśādayaḥ svaprabhāvādhikyāt śukraṁ

virecayanti . ghṛtakṣīrādayaḥ svaguṇādhikyāt . snigdhatvādhikyāt

māṣādayaḥ svaprabhāvasnigdhatvādiguṇādhikyāt . vājīkaraṇya iti

bahuvacanamādyārthānuvartanam . balyaṁ vṛṁhaṇaṁ jīvanīyagaṇādayaḥ

tadvadbāddhavyāḥ . virecayanti svaprabhāvaguṇāvikyāt śīghramevaṁ

rasādyutpādanapūrvakaṁ śukraṁ janayitvā pravartayanti . yata āha

dugdhaṁ māṣāśca bhallātaphalamajjāmalāni ca . janakāni nigadyante

recanāni ca retasaḥ . nanu vālānāṁ kathaṁ śustaṁ na dṛśyate ityata āha

bālānāṁ śukramastyeva kintu saukṣmyānna dṛśyate . puṣpāṇāṁ mukule

gandho yathā sannapi nāpyate . teṣāṁ yadeva tāruṇye

puṣṭatvādvyaktimeti hi . kusumānāṁ praphullānāṁ gandhaḥ

prādurbhavedyathā . romarājyādayaḥ puṁsāṁ nārīṇāmapi yauvane .

jāyate’tra ca yo bhedo jñeyo vyākhyānataḥ sa ca . vyākhyānaṁ yathā

puṁsāṁ ronorājīśmaśruprabhṛtayaḥ nārīṇāntu

rīmarājīstanastanyārtavaprabhṛtayaḥ . nanu, annaraso vṛddhasya

dhātuvṛddhiṁ kathaṁ na karotītyāha vārdhake vardhamānena vāyunā

rasaśoṣaṇāt . na tathā dhātuvṛddhiḥ syāttatastatrānilaṁ jayet . atha

śukrasya svarūpamāha śukraṁ saumyaṁ sitaṁ snigdhaṁ balapuṣṭikaraṁ

smṛtam . garbhavījaṁ vapuḥsāro jīvasyāśraya uttamaḥ . jīvasyāśraya

uttama ityāha jīvī vasati sarvasmin dehe tatra viśeṣataḥ . vīrye rakte

male yasmin kṣīṇe yāti kṣayaṁ kṣaṇāt . atha garbhasañjananaśukrasya

lakṣaṇamāha sphaṭikābhaṁ dravaṁ snigdhaṁ madhuraṁ madhugandhi

ca . śukramicchanti kecittu tailakṣīranibhañca tat . atha śukrasya

sthānamāha yathā payasi sarpistu gūḍhaścekṣau raso yathā . evaṁ hi

sakale kāye śukraṁ tiṣṭhati dehinām . atra sarpirdṛṣṭānto

bahuśukre’lpamathanena sarpiḥśukrayorlābhāt . ikṣurasadṛṣṭāntastu

svalpaśukre puṁsi atipīḍanenekṣurasaśukrayorlābhāt . atha śukrasya

kṣaraṇamārgamāha dvyaṅgule dakṣiṇe pārśve vastidvārasya cāpyadhaḥ .

mūtrasrotapathe śukraṁ puruṣasya pravartate . vṛddhavāgbhaṭo’pyāha

saptamī śukradharā dvyaṅgule dakṣiṇe pārśve vastidvārasya

cāpyadhomūtramārgamāśritā sakalaśarīravyāpinī śukraṁ pravartayatīti .

saptamī kalā . atha śukrakṣaraṇakāraṇamāha kṛtsnadehasthitaṁ śukraṁ

prasannamanasastathā . strīṣu vyāyacchataścāpi harṣāttat

sampravartate . strīsuratarūpaṁ vyāyāmaṁ kurvataḥ . anyacca śukraṁ

kāmena kāminyā darśanāt sparśanādapi . śabdasaṁśravaṇātu dhyānāt

saṁyīgācca pravartate . daityaguroḥ śukranāmakāraṇaṁ kāśīkha° 17 a°

uktaṁ yathā nandinā’pahṛte śukre gilite ca viṣādinā ityupakrame tena

śabdena mahatā śukraḥ śambhūdare sthitaḥ . chidrānveṣī bhraman so’tha

viniketo yathāniśam . sapta lokān sapātālān rudradehe vilokayan .

brahmanārāyaṇendrāṇāṁ sādityāpsarasāṁ tathā . bhuvanāni vicitrāṇi

yuddhañca pramathāsuram . savarṣāṇāṁ śataṁ kukṣau bhavasya parito

bhraman . tataḥ sa dadṛśe randhraṁ śucerandhraṁ khalo yathā .

śāmbhavenātha yogena śukrarūpeṇa bhārgavaḥ . caskanda ca sanāmāpi

tato devena bhāṣitaḥ . jaṭharānnirgate śukre devo’pi mumudetarām .

mūyaḥ śreyo bhaved yanme na sthito jaṭhare dvijaḥ . śukravanniḥsṛto

yasmāttasmāttvaṁ bhṛguvandana . karmaṇānena śukro’pi mama putro’si

gamyatām . śukragrahasvarūpādi vṛhajjātake grahayonyadhyāye ukta

dṛśyam . tatkakṣādimānaṁ khagolaśabde 2425 pṛ° dṛśyam .

शुक्ल — śukla Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śukla mf («ā») n. (later form of «śukra», for which it is sometimes w.r.)

bright, light (with «pakṣa» = «śukla-p-» q.v.) &c.

mf («ā») n. white, whitish &c. &c.

mf («ā») n. pure, spotless, unsullied &c.

śukla m. the bright half of a lunar month or any day in it &c.

śukla m. the month Vaiśākha ()

śukla m. white (the colour)

śukla m. mucus, saliva («śuklaṁ-kṛ», to spit at)

śukla m. ricinus or white

śukla m. Mimusops Hexandra

śukla m. the 37th (or 3rd) year of Jupiter’s cycle of 60 years

śukla m. the 24th of the astronomical

śukla m. N. of śiva

śukla m. of Viṣṇu

śukla m. of a son of Havir-dhāna (cf. «śukra»)

śukla m. of a Muni

śukla m. of a king

śukla m. of a mountain

śukla mf («ā») n. («ā») f. a white cow

śukla m. white or candied sugar

śukla m. Euphorbia Antiquorum

śukla m. = «kākOlī» and «vidārī»

śukla m. N. of Sarasvatī

śukla m. of a daughter of Siṁha-hanu

śukla m. of a river

śukla n. brightness, light

śukla n. a white spot, white substance, anything white

śukla n. the white of the eye

śukla n. a disease of the cornea or white part of the eye (opacity,

albugo; cf. «śukra»)

śukla n. silver

śukla n. fresh butter

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śukla a. [śuc-luk kutvam] White, pure, bright; as in śuklāpāṁga q. v. —

klaḥ

(1) A white colour.

(2) The bright or light half of a lunar month.

(3) N. of Śiva. —klaṁ

(1) Silver.

(2) A disease of the white part of the eye.

(3) Fresh butter.

(4) Sour gruel

— Comp.

—aṁgaḥ, —apāṁgaḥ a peacock (having white corners of the eye);

śuklāpāṁgaiḥ sajalanayanaiḥ svāgatīkṛtya kekāḥ Me. 22.

—ablaṁ a kind of sorrel.

—arman n. a kind of disease of the eyes.

—upalā candied sugar.

—kaṁṭhakaḥ a kind of gallinule.

—karman a pure in conduct, virtuous.

—kaṣṭhaṁ white leprosy.

—dhātuḥ chalk.

—pakṣaḥ the bright half of a month.

—maṁḍalaṁ the corner of the eye.

—vastra a. dressed in white.

—vāyasaḥ a crane.

—vṛttiḥ f. 1. a pure mode of life. —2. the maintenance derived by a

Brāhmaṇa from other Brāhmaṇas.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śukla (aus śukra) KĀŚ. zu P. 8, 2, 18. parox. UṆĀDIS. 2, 28. ŚĀNT. 1, 13.

1) adj. (f. ā) a) «licht, hell»: pakṣa «die lichte Hälfte eines Monats, die

Zeit des zunehmenden Mondes»: pakṣo dvividhaḥ śuklaḥ kṛṣṇaśca tau

māsaḥ SUŚR. 1, 19, 6. KĀTY. ŚR. 15, 1, 18. M. 1, 66. 4, 98. śukle

daśottare pakṣe MBH. 3, 17126. Spr. 5074. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 32. BHĀG.

P. 3, 11, 10. — b) «weiss, weisslich» AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. H. 1392. an. 2, 513.

MED. l. 52. HALĀY. 5, 22. 74. AIT. BR. 1, 29. śuklaṁ vai retaḥ śuklā vapā

2, 14. ŚAT. BR. 2, 2, 4, 15. loman 1, 1, 4, 1. 6, 3, 41. aja 6, 2, 2, 6. aśva

7, 3, 2, 14. 16 (auch a-). sikatāḥ 1, 36. -rūpa 6, 2, 2, 13. 14, 7, 1, 20.

CHĀND. UP. 1, 6, 5. 6, 4, 1. -vatsā ŚAT. BR. 9, 2, 3, 30. KĀTY. ŚR. 15, 3,

36. Reis TS. 2, 3, 1, 3. KĀṬH. 11, 3. Kleid, Zeug LĀṬY. 8, 6, 13. M. 4, 35.

9, 70. MBH. 1, 723. 5330. R. GORR. 2, 100, 61. Spr. 2702. SUŚR. 1, 106,

17. KATHĀS. 4, 9. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 223, No. 543. BHĀG. P. 6, 19, 3. —

dhvajapatākin Śiva MBH. 12, 10364. bāstika R. 2, 77, 2.

prāsādapaṅktayaḥ 4, 33, 9. -mālya 2, 91, 33. AK. 2, 4, 2, 61. tilāḥ

WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 270. 278. marica SUŚR. 2, 326, 2. Wunde 12, 7. 14.

bhūmi 1, 135, 7. śiroruhāḥ R. 2, 45, 27. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 77, 1. RĀJA-

TAR. 3, 365. śiras Spr. 4965. Śiva MBH. 12, 10359. yajūṁṣi ŚAT. BR. 14,

9, 4, 33. yājuṣāmnāya Ind. St. 10, 436. neun «weisse» Bala bei den Jaina

H. 697. — R. 2, 91, 68. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 23. 11, 8. 20. 28. 30, 11. 33, 14.

H. 49. — c) «rein, lauter»: -deha MBH. 3, 13449. tanū BHĀG. P. 5, 3, 20.

śuklābhijātīya MBH. 12, 1196. -vṛtta 14, 2713. karman Spr. (II) 4905.

BHĀG. P. 4, 29, 27. fg. -lohitakṛṣṇavarṇena karmaṇā 5, 19, 19. dhana 11,

17, 50. von Personen MBH. 5, 3417. Spr. (II) 1836. prajātanti BHĀG. P. 1,

12, 16. karma- 5, 18, 35. — 2) m. a) (sc. pakṣa) «die lichte Hälfte eines

Monats» AK. 1, 1, 3, 12. aṣṭamyāṁ navamyāṁ vā phālgunīśuklasya KĀTY.

ŚR. 20, 1, 2. 23, 4, 4. 24, 7, 1. ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 4, 6. WEBER, JYOT. 26. 54.

M. 4, 96. 6, 20. 11, 216. YĀJÑ.3, 193. 324. BHAG. 8, 24. MBH. 1, 1292.

3244. 3, 5068. 14401. 16638. HARIV. 7882. SŪRYAS. 10, 4. 9. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 21, 5. 9. 25, 1. KATHĀS. 26, 4. RĀJA-TAR. 5, 412. 6, 292. BHĀG.

P. 5, 20, 12. 7, 14, 21. 15, 54. 8, 16, 48. — b) «der Monat» Vaiśākha

(Comm.) BHĀG. P. 7, 14, 21. — c) «die weisse Farbe, Weisse»: ghaṭasya

śuklaḥ P. 2, 2, 11, Sch. -kṛṣṇau gaṇa dadhipayaādi zu P. 2, 4, 14. — d)

«Auswurf, Schleim, Rotz»: ye brāhmaṇaṁ pratyaṣṭhīvanye vāsmiṁ

chuklamīṣire AV. 5, 19, 3. yatra śuklo na kriyate abalana balīyasa «wo

man sich nicht vom Schwächeren muss anspeien lassen» 3, 39, 3. — e)

«Ricinus» AUSH. 86. «weisser Ricinus» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) N. «des 3ten

Jahres im 60jährigen Jupitercyclus» VARĀH. BṚH. S.8,29. Verz. d. Oxf. H.

331,b, No. 782. — g) N. eines Joga H. an. MED. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu

UṆĀDIS. 2, 28. — h) ein N. Viṣṇu’s («der Lautere») BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 16. 35.

51. 22, 19. 23, 23. 24, 1. 5, 10, 17. — i) N. pr. eines Sohnes des

Havirdhāna (vgl. śukra) HARIV. 83. BHĀG. P. 4, 24, 8. eines Muni Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 78,b,13. eines Fürsten TĀRAN. 3. 265. — k) N. pr. eines Berges

BHĀG. P. 5, 20, 21. — l) fehlerhaft für śukra «Venus» Verz. d. B. H. 136.a

(115). — 3) f. ā a) «Sandzucker» ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) N.

verschiedener Pflanzen: = kākolī, vidārī, snuhī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) ein

N. der Sarasvatī TRIK. 1, 1, 27. — d) N. pr. einer Tochter Siṁhahanu’s

LIA. 2, Anh. II. — e) N. pr. eines Flusses BHĀG. P. 5, 20, 22. — 4) n. a)

«Helle, Licht» MAITRJUP. 6, 35. — b) «weisse Farbe, weisser Fleck» u. s.

w.: parā śuklāni pātaya AV. 1, 23, 2. triḥ- «drei weisse Streifen habend»

KAUŚ. 29. — c) «das Weisse im Auge» ŚAT. BR. 10, 5, 2, 7. 12, 2, 4, 15.

14, 5, 2, 3. kṛṣṇaviśālaśuklaṁ nayanam R. 5, 28, 13. SUŚR. 2, 303, 15.

310. 8. 17. = śuklabhāga z. B. 2, 310, 13. — d) «eine best. Krankheit des

Weissen im Auge» (vgl. śukra) JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. — e) «Silber» H. an.

MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. — f) «frische Butter» ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — g)

fehlerhaft für śukta «saurer Reisschleim u.s.w.» H. 415. VARĀH. BṚH. S.

77, 2. BHAGAVADBHAKTIVILĀSA im ŚKDR. Suppl. — Vgl. kṣīra-, jīva-,

pañca-, pāka-, bhīma-, mahā-, śaṁkara-, śaukla, śauklya.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

śukla A warrior who fought on the side of the Pāṇḍavas. He was a native

of Pāñcāla country. Mahābhārata, Karṇa Parva, Chapter 56, Verse 45,

mentions that he was slain by Karṇa during the Bhārata battle.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śukla śukla, i. e. 2. śuc + la,

I. adj. White, Pañc. i.d. 39; bright, i. d. 104; Man. 1, 66 (with pakṣa, the

fortnight of the month in which the moon increases).

II. m.

1. White (the colour).

2. One of the astronomical yogas.

3. The light half of the month from new to full moon. Bhag. 8, 24;

Rājat. 5, 412.

III. f. lā, A name of Sarasvatī.

IV. n.

1. Silver.

2. Fresh butter.

3. A disease of the cornea.

— Comp. pañcaśukla, i. e. pañcan-, m. a certain poisonous insect, Suśr. 2,

288, 7. mahā-śuklā, f. Sarasvatī.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śukla a. = śukra; m. (±pakṣa) = śuklapakṣa, spawl, phlegm, snot; n.

brightness, light; the white part of the eye.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śukla śuk-la, a. [later form of sukra] bright, light (w. pakṣa, m. bright

fortnight in which the moon increases; C.); white (ord. mg.; V., C.); pure

(C.); m. bright fortnight (sc. pakṣa; (C.); n. white colour (V.); white of

the eye (Br., C.): -dant, a. white-toothed (Br., P.);

-pakṣa, m. bright fortnight (in which the moon increase);

-bhāsvara, a. shining brightly;

-vastra, a. white-robed.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śukla na° śuca—lak kutvam . 1 rajate medi° . 2 navanīte śabdaca° . 3

akṣirogabhede cakṣūrogaśabde 2844 pṛ° dṛśyam . 4 śvetavarṇe 5

śvetavarṇayute tri° amaraḥ . 6 śuddhe ca tri° . 7 viṣkambhādiṣu

yogabhede medi° . 9 śvetairaṇḍe rājani° 10 śuklapakṣe jyo° ta° . tatra

pakṣāvubhau māse śuklakṛṣṇau krameṇa hi . candravṛddhikaraḥ śuklaḥ

kṛṣṇaścandrakṣayātmakaḥ ṣaṭtriṁśanmatam . śuklavarṇapadārthāstu

kavikalpalatāthāṁ katicit uktā yathā sudhāṁśūccaiḥśravāḥ śambhuḥ

kīrtirjyotsnā śaradghanāḥ . prāsādasaudhatagaramandāradruhibhādrayaḥ

. sūryendukāntakarpū karambhā rajataṁ halī .

nirmokabhasmahiṇḍīracandanaṁ karakā himam .

hārorṇanābhastantvasthi svargaṅgebharadābhrakam . śeṣāhiḥ śarkarā

dugdhaṁ dadhi gaṅgā sudhā jalam .

mṛṇālasikatāhaṁsavakakairavacāmaram . rambhāgarbhaṁ puṇḍarīkaṁ

ketakīśaṅkhanirjharāḥ . lodhrasiṁha dhvajacchatraṁ cūrṇaśuktikapardakā

. muktākusumanakṣatradantapuṇyośanoguṇāḥ .

kailāsakāsakārpāmahāsavāsavakuñjarāḥ . nāradaḥ pāradaḥ

kundakhaṭikāsphaṭikādayaḥ .

शुक्लक — śuklaka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śuklaka mfn. white

śuklaka m. a white colour

śuklaka m. the light fortnight

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śuklaka a. White. —kaḥ

(1) White colour.

(2) The bright half of a lunar month.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śuklaka m. = śukla «die lichte Hälfte eines Monats» TITHYĀDIT. im ŚKDR.

शुक्लरूप — śuklarūpa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śuklarūpa «śukla-rūpa» mfn. white-coloured

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śuklarūpa a. white-coloured.

शुक्लिमन् — śukliman Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śukliman m. whiteness, white colour

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śukliman m. Whiteness.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śukliman m. nom. abstr. von śukla P. 5, 1, 123, Schol.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śukliman m. whiteness, brightness.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śukliman śukl-i-man, m. whiteness, white colour.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śukliman pu° śuklasya bhāvaḥ imanic . śvetavarṇe .

शुण्ठ — śuṇṭha Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śuṇṭha mf («ā») n. (applied to a bull or cow) (accord. to either «white

coloured» or «of small stature» or = «āveṣṭita-karṇa»)

mf («ā») n. a kind of grass (v.l.)

mf («ā») n. a piece of flesh or meat

śuṇṭha mf («ā») n. («ī») f. see next.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śuṇṭha adj. nach Comm. «weissfarbig» TS. 1, 8, 17, 1. 5, 6, 16, 1. KĀṬH.

13. 5. 15, 9. KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 11, 29.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śuṇṭha a. white or small (bull or cow).

शुचि — śuci Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śuci mfn. (f. nom. pl. «śucyas» shining, glowing, gleaming, radiant,

bright &c. &c.

mfn. brilliantly white, white

mfn. clear, clean, pure (lit. and fig.), holy, unsullied, undefiled,

innocent, honest, virtuous &c. &c.

mfn. pure (in a ceremonial sense) &c.

śuci mfn. (ifc.) one who has acquitted himself of or discharged (a duty

see «rahaḥ-ś-«)

śuci m. purification, purity, honesty, virtue

śuci m. fire

śuci m. N. of a partic. fire (a son of Agni Abhimānin and Svāhā or a son

of Antardhāna and Sikhaṇḍinī and brother of the fires Pavamāna and

Pavaka)

śuci m. oblation to fire at the first feeding of an infant

śuci m. a partic. hot month (accord. to some = āṣāḍha or Jyeṣṭha,

accord. to others «the hot season in general») &c.

śuci m. the sun ()

śuci m. the moon

śuci m. the planet Venus or its regent (cf. «śukra»)

śuci m. a ray of light

śuci m. wind

śuci m. sexual love (= «śṛṅgāra»)

śuci m. a Brāhman

śuci m. a faithful minister, true friend

śuci m. the condition of a religious student

śuci m. a fever that attacks pigs

śuci m. judicial acquittal

śuci m. white (the colour)

śuci m. a partic. plant (= «citraka»)

śuci m. N. of śiva

śuci m. of a son of Bhṛigu

śuci m. of a son of Gada

śuci m. of a son of the third Manu

śuci m. of Indra in the 14th Manv-antara

śuci m. of one of the 7 sages in the 14th Manv-antara

śuci m. of a Sārthavāha

śuci m. of a son of śata-dyumna

śuci m. of a son of śuddha (the son of Anenas)

śuci m. of a son of Andhaka

śuci m. of a son of Vipra

śuci m. of a son of Artha-pati

śuci m. (also «ī») f. N. of a daughter of Tāmrā and wife of Kaśyapa,

(regarded as the parent of water-fowl)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śuci a. [śac-ki]

(1) Clean, pure, clear; sakalahaṁsaguṇaṁ śuci mānasaṁ Ki. 5. 13.

(2) White; Ki. 18. 15.

(3) Bright, resplendent; prabhavati śucirbibodugrāhe maṇirna mṛdāṁ

cayaḥ U. 2. 4.

(4) Virtuous, pious, holy, undefiled, unsullied, atha tu vetsi

śucivratamātmanaḥ S. 5. 27; pathaḥ śucerdarśayitāra īśvarāḥ R. 3. 46 Ki.

5. 13.

(5) Purified, cleansed hallowed; R. 1. 81; Ms. 4. 71.

(6) Honest, upright, faithful, true, guileless; sabhāyāṁ vakti sāmarṣaḥ

sāvaṣṭraṁbho naraḥ śuciḥ Pt. 1. 200.

(7) Correct, accurate. —ciḥ

(1) The white colour.

(2) Purity, purification.

(3) Innocence, virtue, goodness, uprightness.

(4) Correctness, accuracy

(5) The condition of a religious student.

(6) A pureman.

(7) A Brāhmaṇa

(8) The hot season; upayaryā vidadha. nnavamallikāḥ śucirasau

cirasaurabha saṁpadaḥ Śi. 6. 22, 1. 58; R. 3. 3; Ku. 5. 20.

(9) The months of Jyeṣṭha and Aṣāḍha. (10) A faithful or true friend.

(11) The sun

(12) The moon.

(13) Fire.

(14) The sentiment of love (śṛṁgāra).

(15) The planet Venus.

(16) The Chitraka tree.

(17) Acquittal.

(18) An oblation made to fire at the first feeding of an infant.

(19) N. of Śiva. (20) The Arka plant.

— Comp.

—drumaḥ the sacred fig-tree.

—praṇī a. sipping water.

—maṇiḥ 1. a crystal. —2. a jewel worn on the head.

—mallikā a kind of jasmine (Arabian)

—rocis m. the moon.

—vrata a. holy, virtuous.

—smita a. having sweet or pleasant smile; Ku. 5. 20, R. 8. 49.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śuci (wie eben) UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 4, 119. 1) adj. (f. śuci; śucī M. 8,

77) = śveta, dhavala, sita u.s.w. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 5, 29. H. 1392. an.

2, 60. MED. c. 11. HALĀY. 5, 22. = medhya, śuddha AK. 3, 4, 5, 29. H.

1436. H. an.MED. HALĀY. 1, 132. = anupahata H. an. MED. aśuci und

aśuci P. 6, 2, 161. a) «strahlend, glühend; blank» (häufig neben pāvaka):

bhāmāsaḥ ṚV. 6, 6, 3. 4. hiraṇya 4, 10, 6. Agni 1, 140, 1. 141, 4. 3, 2, 15.

7, 3, 9. bes. Bez. desselben im Ritus (vgl. u. 2) b) TBR. 1, 1, 5, 10. asau

vā ādityo ‘gniḥ śuciḥ 6, 2. AIT. BR. 7, 7. ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 1, 25. 3, 13, 4. ŚAT.

BR. 12, 4, 4, 5. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 10, 9. 25, 4, 34. MAITRJUP. 6, 34. Ushas

ṚV. 1, 134, 4. Sonne 1, 160, 1. BHĀG. P. 9, 24, 31. Götter überh. ṚV. 2, 1,

13. 27, 9. 3, 62, 5. 7, 2, 2. 56, 12. 57, 5. 8, 29, 5. Rosse u. s. w.

derselben 1, 181, 2. 10, 85, 12. «glänzend weiss»: saudhotsaṅga Spr.

3322. harmyapṛṣṭha (II) 93. — b) «lauter, klar» (vom Soma so v. a.

śukra); «rein» ṚV. 1, 30, 2. 7, 90, 1. 2. VĀLAKH. 4, 10. bheṣajā ṚV. 2, 33,

13. Wasser 35, 3. 7, 49, 2. 3. 95, 2. ghṛta 9, 67, 12. pada 7, 41, 6.

udidābhyaḥ śucirā pūta emi 10, 17, 10. śucayaḥ śucimupa yanti lokam AV.

4, 34, 2. CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9, 10. maṇi UTTARAR. 27, 8 (35, 18). salila

R. 2, 48, 8. vasana GOBH 2, 8, 2. 10. mṛdvāri- Spr. 5206. — c) übertr.

«klar, lauter, rein; tadellos, unschuldig, ehrlich, redlich»: mati ṚV. 6, 8, 1.

8, 3, 3. śucirapaḥ sūyavasā upa kṣeti 2, 27, 13. stoma 7, 93, 1. 10, 29, 1.

yo vā rakṣāḥ śucirasmītyāha 7, 104, 16. 8, 13, 19. carita MBH. 3, 1878.

AK. 1, 1, 7, 26. karman KĀM. NĪTIS. 11, 43. upacāra MBH. 3, 2928. R. 3,

1, 22 (a-). vrata ŚĀK. 123. pathaḥ śuceḥ RAGH. 3, 46. -vaṁśa RĀJA-TAR.

8, 2338. Personen KAṬHOP. 3, 8. M. 7, 31. 38. 60. 62. fgg. 8, 77. sa

jñeyaḥ śapathe śuciḥ 115. 9, 188. 335. MBH. 3, 2446. R. 1, 1, 14. 7, 2. 2,

36, 18. 39, 14. 3, 53, 12. 74, 10. dūta SUŚR. 1, 106, 17. yo ‘rthe śucirhi sa

śucirna mṛdvāriśuciḥ śuciḥ Spr. 5206. fg. jānīyāt. — ṛṇe śucim (II) 954.

1828. 2013. 4280. 4921. BRAHMA-P. in LA. (III) 48, 15. BHĀG. P. 3, 30,

35. PAÑCAT. 191, 13. upadhā- Spr. 5338. a- KAṬHOP. 3, 7. M. 4, 71. R. 1,

7, 14. śuci m. = amātyo ‘tyupadhaḥ, upadhāśuddhamantrin,

śuddhamantrin AK. 3, 4, 5, 29. H. an. MED. — d) «rein» in rituellem Sinne:

vāyu M. 1, 76. deśa CHĀND. UP. 8, 15. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2, 1, 9. 3, 2, 2. M. 2,

222. 3, 206. BHAG. 6, 11. āyatana KĀTY. ŚR. 25, 4, 34. bhūmi M. 5, 68.

pradeśa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 85, 8. śādvalāni 88, 20. VS. PRĀT. 1, 21.

kṣetrāgāra VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 7. māṁsa M. 5, 131. dhana Spr. 2797, v.

l. nityamāsyaṁ śuci strīṇāṁ śakuniḥ phalapātane. prasrave ca

śucirvatsaḥ śvā mṛgagrahaṇe śuciḥ.. (II) 968. (I) 2996. fgg. PRAB. 59,

14. śruta Spr. 5075. BHĀG. P. 2, 10, 10. Personen VS. PRĀT. 8, 32. M. 2,

51. 107. 109. 115. 176. 3, 258. 4, 35. 5, 62. 8, 87. HARIV. 8439. R. 1, 46,

5. 2, 56, 26. 4, 10, 24. RAGH. 1, 81. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 46, 15. 55, 8. BHĀG.

P. 8, 4, 15. a- M. 4, 71. 127. 142. fg. 5, 75. fg. 79. 81. 84. 86. dhvani M. 4,

124. gandha RAGH. 12, 30. — e) am Ende eines comp. «rein von» so v. a.

«der sich einer Sache entledigt hat»: rahaḥ- KATHĀS. 101, 358. — 2) m.

a) = śuddhi UJJVAL. «Lauterkeit, Reinheit, Ehrlichkeit»: dvijaḥ śucivinā

Spr. 2614. — b) «Feuer» AK. 1, 1, 1, 52. 3, 4, 5, 29. TRIK. 1, 1, 67. 3, 3,

79. H. 1099. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 62. Bez. «eines best. Feuers» (vgl. u.

1) «a»), eines Sohnes des Agni Abhimānin und der Svāhā, VP. 84. MĀRK.

P. 52, 28. 99, 69. BHĀG. P. 4, 1, 59. 24, 4 (ein Sohn Antardhāna’s von der

Śikhaṇḍinī). — c) «ein best. Sommermonat» P. 4, 4, 128, Vārtt. 2, Schol.

(oxyt.). AK. 3, 4, 5, 29. = āṣāḍha 1, 1, 3, 16. H. 154. H. an. MED. HALĀY.

1, 114. = jyeṣṭha MED. śukraśca śuciśca graiṣmāvṛtū VS. 14, 6. 7, 30.

WEBER, Nax. 2, 351. 353. MBH. 1, 5883. VP. 225. ṚT. 1, 2. 3. RAGH. 3, 3.

KUMĀRAS. 5, 20. Spr. 3186. RĀJA-TAR. 5, 447. BHĀG. P. 4, 25, 44.

«Sommer» (diese Bed. kann an den meisten der eben angegebenen

Stellen angenommen werden) TRIK. 3, 3, 79. H. an. MED. — d) «die

Sonne» H. 97. MAITRJUP. 6, 36 (nach dem Comm.). ŚĀMBA-P. im ŚKDR.

— e) «der Mond» ŚABDĀRTH. bei WILSON. — f) «der Planet Venus» ebend.

— g) «Lichtstrahl» H. 99. — h) «Wind» H. ś. 170. — i) «Geschlechtsliebe»

AK. 1, 1, 7, 17. H. an. MED. — k) «ein Brahmane» ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei

WILSON. — l) «the condition of the religious student» ebend. — m) ein N.

Śiva’s ebend. — n) N. pr. a) eines Sohnes des Bhṛgu MBH. 13, 4145. — b)

eines Sohnes des Gada HARIV. 9193. — g) eines Sohnes des 3ten Manu

HARIV. 424. — d) des Indra im 14ten Manvantara VP. 269. MĀRK. P. 100,

30. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 35. — e) eines der sieben Weisen im 14ten

Manvantara HARIV. 491. VP. 269. MĀRK. P. 100, 31. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 35.

— z) eines Sārthavāha MBH. 3, 2526. — h) eines Sohnes des Śatadyumna

VP. 390. BHĀG. P. 9, 13, 22. — j) eines Sohnes des Śuddha, Sohnes des

Anenas, BHĀG. P. 9, 17, 11. — i) eines Sohnes des Andhaka VP. 435.

BHĀG. P. 9, 24, 18. — c) eines Sohnes des Vipra VP. 465. BHĀG. P. 9, 22,

46. — l) eines Sohnes des Arthapati HALL in der Einl. zu VĀSAVAD. 12. —

3) f. N. pr. einer Tochter Kaśyapa’s von der Tāmrā und Urmutter der

Wasservögel HARIV. 222. fg. VP. 148. fg. — Vgl. śauca.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

śuci 1 I A deva (god) who was born in Agnivaṁśa. This Śuci was the son

of Agnideva who was the eldest son of Brahmā, and his wife Svāhā. Śuci

had two brothers by name Pāvaka and Pavamāna. These brothers had

fortyfive sons. They are also known as «Agnis». Thus there are on the

whole fortynine Agnis, including the father, three sons and their fortyfive

children. (Viṣṇu Purāṇa, Part 1, Chapter 10).

śuci 2 II Cākṣuṣa was a son of Manu. Ten sons were born to Manu by his

wife, Naḍvalā. They were, Kuru, Puru, Śatadyumna, Tapasvī, Satyavān,

Śuci, Agniṣṭoma, Atirātra, Sudyumna and Abhimanyu. (Viṣṇu Purāṇa, Part

1, Chapter 13).

śuci 3 III There is a passage in Chapter 19 of Agni Purāṇa which says

that Kaśyapa Prajāpati had six daughters by his wife Tāmrā, who were,

Kākā, Śyenī, Bhāsī, Gṛddhrikā, Śuci and Grīvā and that different classes of

birds took their source from them.

śuci 4 IV A King of the Solar dynasty. From Bhāgavata, 9th Skandha we

learn that he was the son of Śakradyumna and the father of Vanadvāja.

śuci 5 V In Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Chapter 8, Verse 14, there is a

reference to a King Śuci who worships Yama, the son of Sūrya, in Yama’s

assembly.

śuci 6 VI The leader of a band of merchants. It was he who met and

comforted Damayantī who lost her way in the forest after Nala left her.

(Vana Parva, Chapter 64, Verse 127).

śuci 7 VII One of the sons of Viśvāmitra. (M.B. Anuśāsana Parva,

Chapter 4, Verse 54).

śuci 7i VIII A son of Bhṛgu Maharṣi. (Mahābhārata, Anuśāsana Parva,

Chapter 55, Verse 128).

śuci 1x IX A Maharṣi born in the family of Aṅgiras. By a curse of

Vasiṣṭha, this Maharṣi was born as a mortal, as the son of King Vijitāśva.

(Bhāgavata, 4th Skandha).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śuci 2. śuc + i,

I. adj.

1. White, resplendent, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 3322.

2. Clear (as a jewel), Utt. Rāmac. 35, 18.

3. Gentle (cf. śuci-smita, s. v. smi).

4. Clean, Bhartṛ. 2, 17; purified.

5. Pure, Man. 1, 76; pious.

6. Exempt from passion.

7. Honest, upright, Rām. 3, 53, 12; Pañc. 191, 13.

8. Free from fault, Pañc. i. d. 215.

II. m.

1. White (the colour).

2. Purity, virtue, correctness.

3. Purification by ablution.

4. Judicial acquittal.

5. A faithful and tried minister.

6. The month Jyeṣṭha (May -June), and Āṣāḍha (June — July), i. e. the

hot season, Ragh. 3, 3; Rājat. 5, 477; Hiḍ. 1, 10.

7. The sun.

8. The moon.

9. Fire.

10. The planet Venus.

11. Śiva.

12. A Brāhmaṇa.

13. Oblation to fire at the first feeding of an infant.

— Comp. a-, adj. impure, Hit. ii. d. 24. upadhā-, adj. free from deceit, Hit.

iii. d. 16.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śuci a. flaming, beaming (lit. & fig.); light, bright, clear, pure; holy,

virtuous, honest. m. purity, honesty, fire or a cert. fire, a cert. month in

summer & summer i.g., the sun, a man’s name.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śuci śuc-i, a. (f. id., i in pl. y-aḥ) bright, radiant (V.); shining white (C.);

clear, pure (V., C.); pure, undefiled, guileless, honest, upright (V., C.);

ritually pure (S., C.): -°, rid of (C., rare); m. purity, uprightness (C., very

rare); fire (P.); a summer month, hot season (V., C.); N..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śuci pu° śuca—ki . 1 vahnau 2 citrakavṛkṣe 3 āṣāḍhamāse 4 śṛṅgārarase

amaraḥ . 5 jyaiṣṭhamāse medi° 6 śuddhācaraṇe 7 grīṣme 8 ṛtau 9

śuddhamantriṇi medi° . 10 agnibhede pāvakaḥ pavamānaśca śuciragniśca

te trayaḥ . nimathyaḥ pavamānaḥ syāt vaidyutaḥ pāvakaḥ smṛtaḥ .

yaścāgnau tapate sūryaḥ śuciragnistvasau smṛtaḥ kūrmapu° 12 a° . 11

śvetavarṇe 12 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . śucitvañca śaucaṁ śuddhatā

vaidikakarmārhatvaprayojakaḥ saṁskāraviśeṣaḥ . śucistatkālajīvī karma

kuryāt śrutau śaucasya karmāṅgatvaṁ, sa ca snānādijanyaḥ puṇyabhedo

vā . 13 mūrye ca tapanastāpanaścaiva śuciḥ saptāśvavāhanaḥ

sūryastavaḥ . 14 arkavṛkṣe 15 kāśyapatnyāstāmrāyāḥ kanyābhede strī

ṣaṭsutāśca mahā sattvāstāmrāyāḥ parikīrtitāḥ . śukī śyenī ca bhāse ca

sugrīvī śucigṛdhrike garuḍapu° 6 a° . 16 śuddhe 17 anupahate tri° medi° .

शुब्र — śubra Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

śubra a. [śubha-rak]

(1) Shining, bright, radiant.

(2) White; paśyati pittopahataḥ śaśiśubraṁ śaṁkhapapi pītaṁ K. P.

10; R. 2. 69. —braḥ

(1) The white colour.

(2) Sandal (said to be n). —braṁ

(1) Silver.

(2) Talc.

(3) Rock-salt.

(4) Green vitriol.

— Comp.

—aṁśuḥ, —karaḥ 1. the moon. —2. camphor.

—datin n. the elephant presiding over the north-west quarter.

—raśimaḥ the moon.

शुभ्र — śubhra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śubhra mf («ā») n. radiant, shining, beautiful, splendid &c. &c.

mf («ā») n. clear, spotless (as fame)

mf («ā») n. bright-coloured, white &c.

śubhra m. white (the colour)

śubhra m. sandal

śubhra m. heaven

śubhra m. N. of a man g. «kurv-ādi»

śubhra m. of the husband of Vikuṇṭhā and father of Vaikuṇṭha

śubhra m. of a poet

śubhra pl. N. of a people

śubhra n. (only silver

śubhra n. talc

śubhra n. green vitriol

śubhra n. rock or fossil salt

śubhra n. the root of Andropogon Muricatus.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śubhra (von 3. śubh) UṆĀDIS. 2, 13. 1) adj. (f. ā) a) «schmuck, schön;

klar»; = uddīpta, dīpta AK. 3, 4, 25, 194. H. an. 2, 464. MED. r. 93 harī

ṚV. 1, 35, 3. 2, 11, 3. 8, 15, 5. grāvan 3, 33, 1. yuvan 9, 14, 5. marya 96,

20. śiśavaḥ 7, 56, 16. die Aśvin 68, 1. die Marut 1, 19, 5. 167, 4. 2, 36, 2.

Ushas 1, 57, 3. 7, 75, 6. Agni 3, 26, 2. — 7, 39, 3. 95, 6. śuṣma 2, 11, 4. 7,

56, 8. āpaḥ 5, 41, 12. KAUŚ. 103. andhas ṚV. 9, 62, 5. 107, 24. AV. 11, 1,

17. puruṣa MUṆḌ. UP. 2, 1, 2. ratha MBH. 3, 3031. āsana R. GORR. 1, 3,

68. ābharaṇa R. SCHL. 2, 78, 5. MĀRK. P. 82, 25. guṇāḥ «glänzende

Vorzüge» Spr. (II) 3809. — b) «weiss, hellfarbig» AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 25,

194. H. 1393. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 4, 47. KĀM. NĪTIS. 14, 32. Spr. 4925.

kuthāḥ R. GORR. 2, 72, 20. asthi VET. in LA. (III) 4, 7. triṇayanavṛṣa

MEGH. 53. giri KATHĀS. 50, 169. candana WEBER, KṚSAṆAJ. 291.

ātapatra RĀJA-TAR. 5, 482. BHĀG. P. 3, 15, 38. gṛha M. 7, 76. R. 4, 40,

40. sadman Spr. 3003. catuḥśālāni R. 2, 91, 32. guṇāḥ «Fäden» Spr. (II)

3809. Perlen VARĀH. BṚH. S. 81, 5. akṣarāṇi, -dhātu Schol. zu NAIṢ 22,

54. mṛd (mṛdā st. sadā zu lesen) PADMA-P. 3, 4. sudhāśubhraṁ sadma

Spr. 3268. bhūti- «wie Asche» KATHĀS. 25, 231. hima- 30, 31. karpūra-

75, 104. śaraśubhra (so ist wohl zu lesen st. śaracchubhra) R. GORR. 1,

45, 19. yaśas «weiss, rein» RAGH. 2, 69. KATHĀS. 25, 225. — 2) m. a)

«Sandel» ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) N. pr. a) eines Mannes P. 4, 1, 123.

gaṇa kurvādi zu 151. Gatte der Vikuṇṭhā und Vater Vaikuṇṭha’s BHĀG. P.

8, 5, 4. — b) pl. eines Volkes MĀRK. P. 58, 12. — 3) f. ā «crystal; Bambu

manna; the Ganges» WILSON nach RĀJAN. — 4) n. a) «Talk» H. an. MED.

— b) «Silber» H. ś. 161. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) «Eisenvitriol» RĀJAN. a. a.

O. — Vgl. candra-, tanū-, mahā-, śaubhrāyaṇa, śaubhreya, śaubhrya.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śubhra śubh + ra,

I. adj.

1. White, Megh. 53; Lass. 4, 17.

2. Shining, bright, Chr. 291, 3 = Rigv. i. 85, 3; Pañc. i. d. 252.

II. m.

1. White (the colour).

2. Sandal, Padmap. 3, 4.

III. f. rā.

1. The Ganges.

2. Crystal.

3. Bambu manna.

IV. n.

1. Silver.

2. Talc.

— Comp. mahā-, n. silver.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śubhra a. beautiful, shining, white, pure, clear (also of sounds).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śubhra śubh-ra, a. V., C.: radiant, splendid, beautiful, handsome; C.:

clear, spotless (fame); white (rare): -tā, f., -tva, n. whiteness;

-danta, a. (ī) having white teeth;

-bhānu, m. moon.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śubhra na° śubha—rak . 1 abhrake medi° 2 raupye 3 kāsīse 4

śubhralavaṇe rājani° . 6 candane śabdaca° . 6 śvetavarṇe pu° 7 tadvati

tri° amaraḥ .

शुभ्रता — śubhratā Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śubhratā «śubhra-tā» f.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śubhratā (von śubhra) f. «die weisse Farbe, das Weiss»: rājahaṁsasya

Spr. (II) 2101. kuvastratā śubhratayā virājate 2713. Verz. d. Oxf. H.

117,b,7.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śubhratā f. -tva n. white colour.

श्येत — śyeta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śyeta mf («śyenī», or «śyetā») n. (prob. connected with «śveta» q.v.)

reddish white, white

śyeta m. white (the colour)

śyeta mf («śyenī», or «śyetā») n. («śyenī») f. a white cow (see

«śyaineya»)

śyeta m. a woman with a lily-white complexion (= «kumuda-pattrābhā»)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śyeta a. (tā or nā f.) White. —taḥ The white colour.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śyeta UṆĀDIS. 3, 93 (parox.). adj. (f. śyenī ŚĀNT. 2, 20. P. 4, 1, 39; nach

dem Schol. auch śyetā) «röthlich weiss (weiss» AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. H. 1392.

nach den Comm. = śveta, śubhra, rakta, āraktaḥ śvetaḥ, ālohitaḥ

śvetaḥ): Agni ṚV. 1, 71, 4. 7, 4, 3. Rosse 5, 33, 8. enī, śyenī, kṛṣṇā, rohiṇī

AV. 6, 83, 1. 18, 4, 33. VS. 24, 3. die Farbe der auf oder untergehenden

Sonne ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 1, 7. KĀṬH. 15, 4. der Aśvin ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 4, 1. 2,

8. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 15, 14, 23. KĀṬH. 13, 4. KĀTY. ŚR. 15, 3, 23. haṁsaśyenī

KIR. 5, 31. kumudaśyenī P. 6, 2, 2, Schol. śyenī = kumudapattrābhā

HALĀY. 4, 53. — śyenī s. auch unter śyena.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śyeta śyeta (probably from śvi in śvit, cf. śveta and Zend. śpi in śpi +

tama, śpi + ti),

I. adj., f. tā and śyenī, White, Kir. 5, 31.

II. m. White (the colour).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śyeta f. śyenī reddish-white.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śyeta śyeta, a. (enī) reddish white.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śyeta pu° śyai—itac . 1 śullabarṇe 2 tadvati tri° striyāṁ ṅīp tamya naśca .

śyenī .

श्येन — śyena Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śyena m. a hawk, falcon, eagle, any bird of prey (esp. the eagle that

brings down Soma to man) &c. &c.

m. firewood laid in the shape of an eagle

m. a kind of array (in battle)

m. a partic. part of the sacrificial victim

m. a partic. Ekāha

m. a horse

m. N. of a ṛiṣi (having the patr. āgneya and author of

śyena m. (with or without «indraśya») N. of a Sāman

śyena mfn. eagle-like

m. coming from an eagle (as «eagle’s flesh»), Kṛiṣṇaj. (prob. w.r. for

«śyaina»).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śyena UṆĀDIS. 2, 46. 1) m. a) «der grösste und stärkste Raubvogel:

Adler»; auch «Falke» oder «Habicht» NAIGH. 5, 5. NIR. 4, 24. 11, 1. AK. 2,

5, 15. TRIK. 3, 3, 266. H. 1334. an. 2, 288. MED. n. 21. HALĀY. 2, 98.

śyeno na bhīto ataro rajāṁsi ṚV. 1, 32, 14. 33, 2. 118, 11. 163, 1. śyenāṁ

iva dhrajato antarikṣe 165, 2. 2, 42, 2. 4, 6, 10. 5, 44, 11. 45, 9. 7, 56, 3.

63, 5. 8, 20, 10. śyeno gṛdhrāṇām 9, 96, 6. 10, 99, 8. 127, 5. TS. 2, 4, 7,

1. śyeno vayasāṁ patiṣṭhaḥ 5, 4, 11, 1. VS. 9, 9. 19, 10. AV. 3, 3, 4.

yathā śyenātpatatriṇaḥ saṁvijante 5, 21, 6. 7, 41, 2. 11, 9, 9. holt den

Soma ṚV. 1, 93, 6. 3, 43, 7. 4, 18, 13. 26, 5. 27, 3. 6, 20, 6. 46, 13. 8, 71,

9. 9, 68, 6. 77, 2. 10, 11, 4. VS. 6, 32. ŚAT. BR. 12, 7, 1, 6. Gespann der

Aśvin ṚV. 1, 118, 4 (daher = aśva NAIGH. 1, 14). Agni heisst divaḥ

śyenaḥ ṚV. 7, 15, 4. — ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 1, 19. PAÑCAV. BR. 1, 5, 3. 19. 13,

10, 13. vayasāṁ vīryatamaḥ KĀṬH. 37, 14. kṣepiṣṭhaḥ ṢAḌV. BR. 3, 8. M.

11, 135. MBH. 1, 2621. 2383. fgg. 5991. 3, 15692. 12, 9943 (śyenāścā-

mit der ed. Bomb. zu lesen). HARIV. 223. R. GORR. 2, 46, 5. 3, 20, 19.

SUŚR. 1, 24, 8. 202, 13. KAP. 4, 5. Spr. 3326. (II) 2852. 4965. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 43, 62. 46, 69. 79, 24. 86, 38. 88, 1. 11. 94, 5. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 81.

MĀRK. P. 104, 8. BHĀG. P. 3, 10, 23. 5, 23, 3. 6, 6, 27. 7, 8, 28. 8, 10, 10.

Verz. d. B. H. No. 897. H. 48. PAÑCAT. 188, 15. — b) N. eines Ekāha

ṢAḌV. BR. 3, 8. KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 3, 1. 5, 30. MAŚ. 3, 7 in Verz. d. B. H. 72.

śyenājirau ĀŚV. GṚHY. 9, 7 1. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 22, 4. — c) Bez. «einer

best. Schlachtordnung» MBH. 6, 3062. KĀM. NĪTIS. 18, 48. 19, 44. — d) N.

pr. eines Mannes mit dem patron. Āgneya, Liedverfassers von ṚV. 10,

188. — MBH. 2, 293. — 2) f. ī «die Urmutter der Adler, Falken u.s.w.»

MBH. 1, 2620. fg. 2633. HARIV. 222. fg. R. 3, 20, 18. fg. 33. fg. VP. 148.

MĀRK. P. 104, 8. — 3) n. a) «Brust» KAUŚ. 45; vgl. 4) «a»). — b) N. eines

Sāman Ind. St. 3, 240,b. PAÑCAV. BR. 13, 10, 12. LĀṬY. 6, 2, 8. — 4) adj.

a) etwa «adlergestaltig»: śyenamasya vakṣaḥ kṛṇutāt TBR. 3, 6, 6, 2.

śyenaṁ vakṣa udgātuḥ AIT. BR. 7, 1. ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 9, 3; vgl. AV. 9, 7, 5.

«vom Adler» oder «Falken kommend»: māṁsa WEBER, KRṢNAJ. 221;

vielleicht fehlerhaft für śyaina. — b) = śyeta TRIK. H. an. MED. — Vgl.

kṣipra-, divaḥśyenī und śyenī unter śyeta.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

śyena 1 I A class of birds. A daughter named «Śyenī» was born to

Kaśyapa Prajāpati by his wife Tāmrā. Śyenas were the sons of Śyenī.

(M.B. Ādi Parva, Chapter 66, Verse 56).

śyena 2 II An ancient sage. Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva Chapter 7, Verse

11, describes him as shining in Indra’s assembly.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śyena śyena (akin to the last),

I. m.

1. White (the colour).

2. A hawk, Pañc. 188, 15.

II. f. nī. A female hawk.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śyena m. eagle, falcon, hawk; a form of military array, N. of a man; f.

śyenī the mythol. mother of eagles etc.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śyena śyena, m. eagle (that brings down Soma to man; V.); falcon, hawk;

kind of ekāha (S.); kind of battle-array (C.); a. eaglelike (breast; Br., S.):

-jīvin, m. falconer; (a) -patvan, a. flying with eagles (car; RV.1);

-avapātam, ad. swooping down like an eagle or hawk.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śyena puṁstrī° śyai—inan . 1 pakṣibhede (vāja) amaraḥ . 2 pāṇḍuravarṇe

ca 3 tadvati tri° medi° . tatkhagasya śubhāgubhasūcanaṁ yathā

pradakṣiṇīkṛtya naraṁ vrajanto yātrāsu vāmega gatāḥ praveśe . śyenāḥ

praśastāḥ prakṛtasvarāste śāntāḥ pradīptā vittatasvastaste . śyeno

nṛṇāṁ dakṣiṇavāmapṛṣṭhabhāgeṣu bhāgyaiḥ sthitimādadhāti . tiṣṭhan

purastānmṛtaye kaṇeti yuddhe jayaṁ channarathadhvajasthaḥ iti

vasantarājaḥ . śyenenābhicaran yajeta śrutivihite 2 yāgabhede

abhicāraśabde dṛśyam .

श्येनः — śyenaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

śyenaḥ [śyai-inan]

(1) The white colour.

(2) Whiteness.

(3) A hawk, falcon.

(4) Violence.

(5) Ved. A horse.

— Comp.

—avapātaḥ the swoop of a hawk; Māl. 8. 8.

—karaṇaṁ, —karaṇikā 1. burning on a separate funeral pile. —2. a

hawk-like, i. e. rash and desperate, act.

—cit, —jīvin m. a falconer.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

śyenaḥ puṁ, (śyai ṅa gatau + śyāstyāhṛñavibhya inac . uṇā° 2 . 46 . iti

inac .) pāṇḍuravarṇaḥ . iti medinī .. pakṣiviśeṣaḥ . sañcālaḥ iti vāj iti ca

bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . śaśādanaḥ 2 patrī 3 . ityamaraḥ .. kapotāriḥ 4

patadbhīruḥ 5 . iti śabdaratnāvalī . ghātipakṣī 6 grāhakaḥ 7 mārakaḥ 8 . iti

jaṭādharaḥ .. śaśādaḥ 9 kravyādaḥ 10 krūraḥ 11 vegī 12 khagāntakaḥ 13

karagaḥ 14 nīlapicchaḥ 15 lambakarṇaḥ 16 raṇapriyaḥ 17 raṇapakṣī 18

picchavāṇaḥ 19 sthūlanīlaḥ 20 bhayaṅkaraḥ 21 . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ ..

śaśaghātakaḥ 22 . iti bhāvaprakāśaḥ .. asya māṁsaguṇāḥ prasahaśabde

draṣṭavyāḥ .. * .. tasya śubhāśubhasūcakatvaṁ yathā —

pradakṣiṇīkṛtya naraṁ vrajanto yātrāsu vāmena gatāḥ praveśe .

śyenāḥ praśastāḥ prakṛtasvarāste śāntāḥ pradīptā vitatasvarāste ..

śyeno nṛṇāṁ dakṣiṇavāmapṛṣṭhabhāgeṣu bhāgyaiḥ sthitimādadhāti .

tiṣṭhan purastānmṛtaye karoti yuddhe jayaṁ channarathadhvajasthaḥ

.. iti vasantarājaśākune aṣṭamavargaḥ ..

श्रवण — śravaṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śravaṇa n. the act of hearing (also «that which is heard» = «śruti» q.v.;

«iti śravaṇāt», «because it is so heard or revealed» i.e. «according to a

Vedic text») &c.

n. acquiring knowledge by hearing, learning, study (cf. «a-śravaṇāt»)

śravaṇa n. (in phil.) the determining by means of the six signs the true

doctrine of the Vedānta (in regard to the only really existing Being)

n. fame, reputation

n. wealth

śravaṇa m. (rarely n.) the ear &c.

śravaṇa m. (= «śramaṇa») a Buddhist or Jain monk (cf. «śrāvaka»)

śravaṇa m. the hypotenuse of a triangle or the diagonal of a tetragon &c.

śravaṇa mfn. (fr. 2. «śru»; for 1. «śravaṇa» see p.1096; cf. «sravaṇa»)

limping, lame

śravaṇa m. N. of the 20th (or 23rd) Nakshatra (presided over by Viṣṇu,

and containing the three stars, [characters] and [characters] Aquilae,

supposed to represent three footsteps; cf. «tri-vikrama») &c.

śravaṇa m. a sort of disease (= «śroṇa»)

śravaṇa m. N. of a son of Naraka

śravaṇa m. (with «bhaṭṭa») N. of a teacher

śravaṇa n. = «śravaṇā-karman»

śravaṇa m. a kind of plant used for colouring white

śravaṇa n. = «śrapaṇa»

śravaṇa w.r. for «sravaṇa».

śravaṇa &c. see 1. «śrava», p.1096, col.3.

śravaṇa &c. see p.1097, col.2.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śravaṇa (von 1. śru) 1) m. (seltener n.) «Ohr» AK. 2, 6, 2, 45. TRIK. 3, 3,

139. H. 574. an. 3, 227 (śravaṇaṁ st. śrāvaṇaṁ zu lesen). MED. ṇ. 79.

HALĀY. 2, 361. MAITRJUP. 6, 22. Spr. (II) 4992. MBH. 12, 7397. R. 2, 91,

27 (n.). R. GORR. 2, 100, 24. 3, 50, 17. 52, 30. 5, 14, 19. SUŚR. 1, 125, 8.

126, 4. 2, 363, 3. GṚHYAS. 2, 98. ad ŚĀK. 54. Schol. zu 8. VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 28, 9. 51, 8. KATHĀS. 13, 160. 48, 38. CAURAP. 6. MĀRK. P. 34, 71.

82, 17. BHĀG. P. 2, 2, 37. 7, 9, 40 (n.). 9, 2, 7. 11, 23. — 2) m. (wie alle

Wörter für «Ohr) Hypotenuse, Diagonale eines Tetragons u.s.w.»

COLEBR. Alg. 59. GOLĀDHY. TRIPRAŚN. 48. — 3) n. «das Hören» TRIK. H.

an. MED. ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 4, 5. 7, 3, 6. PĀR. GṚHY. 3, 10. CHĀND. UP. 8,

12, 4. M. 8, 74. MBH. 1, 865. 2, 277. 7, 2128. HARIV. 12243. R. 2, 102 in

der Unterschr. R. GORR. 1, 3, 38. 4, 140. 71, 19. 4, 17, 20. 58, 3. 7, 20, 6.

dūrācchravaṇāni darśanāni cāsya bhavanti SUŚR.1,158,11. ŚĀK. 15,15. fg.

59. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 90,8. Spr. 2871. BHĀG.

P.1,2,17.8,35.2,4,3.7,15.3,7,14. 16,6.9,3,34. 10,6,3. 41,16. Verz. d. Oxf.

H. 85,b,13. 225,a,20. PAÑCAT. 188,10. SARVADARŚANAS.4,6. 76,6. 8.

157,9. 22. -subhaga «angenehm zu hören» MEGH. 11. -paruṣa 62.

ugraśravaṇadarśana adj. MBH. 3, 15856. dūra- «weithörig» PAÑCAR. 1, 1,

50. ṇico ‘śravaṇaṁ chāndasam so v. a. «das Fehlen des Causalsuffixes»

ŚAṁK. zu BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 102. «das Hören» so v. a. «das Lernen, Lesen»:

śuśrūṣā śravaṇaṁ caiva grahaṇaṁ dhāraṇaṁ tathā. ūho ‘poho

‘rthavijñānaṁ tattvajñānaṁ ca dhīguṇāḥ.. KĀM. NĪTIS. 4, 22 = H. 310. fg.

-manananididhyāsanasamādhyanuṣṭhāna VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 113.

fg. NĪLAK. 26. Schol. zu KAP. 1, 60. SARVADARŚANAS. 46, 13. 58, 12.

fgg. 85, 4. 103, 20. 124, 22. 139, 10. 159, 5. aśravaṇāt «weil man es nicht

lernt, weil es nicht gelehrt wird» LĀṬY. 10, 11, 5. — 4) n. «Leumund, guter

Ruf» ĀŚV. ŚR. 1, 10, 8. NIR. 11, 33. — Vgl. kuru-, pitṛ-, vi-.

śravaṇa (von 2. śru) 1) adj. a) «lahm» KĀTY. ŚR. 23, 4, 16. — b) «leck»

GOBH. 3, 2, 43. — 2) m. a) N. «des 20ten» «21ten, 22ten») Nakshatra, das

unter der Figur von drei Fusstapfen gedacht wird, H. 113. an. 3, 227.

MED. ṇ. 79. AV. 19, 7, 4. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 335, 1. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 3, 5, 2.

ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 20. PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 10. 14. WEBER, JYOT. 95. YĀJÑ. 1,

142. MBH. 6, 81.85. 13, 3279. 4265. 14, 1213. R. 5, 55, 1. VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 6, 7. 11. 7, 2. 11 (v. l. n.). 9, 3. 33 10, 1. 15. 11, 60. 15, 20. 30. 23, 6.

32, 16. 43, 38. 47, 6. 55, 31. 81, 20. 97, 16. 98, 11. MĀRK. P. 33, 14.

BHĀG. P. 4, 12, 48. 7, 14, 20 (pl.). 23. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 230. fg. fem. ā

MED. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 98, 15 (v. l. masc.). BHĀG. P. 5, 23, 6 (ed. Bomb.

masc.). MĀRK. P. 58, 41. — b) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Naraka BHĀG. P.

10, 59, 12. — 3) f. ā a) N. eines Nakshatra, s. u. 2) «a»). — b) «die

Vollmondsnacht im Monat» Śrāvaṇa P. 4, 2, 5. 23. GOBH. 3, 3, 11. ŚĀÑKH.

ŚR. 3, 14, 2. -cintā Verz. d. Cambr. K. 64. -karman «die an diesem Tage

übliche Ceremonie» ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2, 1, 1. GOBH. 3, 7, 1. 4, 8, 1. PĀR.

GṚHY. 2, 14. Verz. d. B. H. No. 206. — c) (neben Śraviṣṭhā) N. pr. einer

Tochter Citraka’s HARIV. 1921. 2089. Rājādhideva’s 2034. — 4) n. =

śravaṇākarman (s. u. 3) «b») ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 4, 15. — Vgl. śroṇa, ślavaṇa,

2. śrāvaṇa, śrāvaṇika.

śravaṇa m. «eine best. zum Weissfärben dienende Pflanze» SUŚR. 2, 175,

4. f. ā = muṇḍīrikāvṛkṣa (vgl. śrāvaṇā unter 1. śrāvaṇa) RATNAM. im

ŚKDR. śravaṇāhvayā f. «eine best. Pflanze» SUŚR. 1, 134, 2.

śravaṇa m. fehlerhaft für śramaṇa «Buddhist» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 87, 9 (v. l.

śramaṇa). 36. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 51, «b», 11. f. ā «eine Bettelnonne» H. 532.

R. 3, 76, 20. Hierher vielleicht śravaṇa m. als N. Viṣṇu’s H. ś. 63.

śravaṇa n. s. sravaṇa.

śravaṇa n. = śrapaṇa Randglosse im Comm. zu H. 75.

śravaṇa fehlerhaft für 2. śrāvaṇa.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

śravaṇa 1 I A son of Murāsura. Murāsura had seven sons. They were:

Tāmra, Antarīkṣa, Śravaṇa, Vasu, Vibhāvasu, Nabhasvān and Aruṇa. They

were all killed by Śrī Kṛṣṇa. (Bhāgavata, Skandha 10).

śravaṇa 2 II One of the twentyseven stars (nakṣatras). Those who

perform Śrāddha on the day of this star will attain heaven. (M.B.

Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 39, Verse 11).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śravaṇa śravaṇa, i. e. śru + ana,

I. m. and n. The ear, Hit. i. d. 193, M.M.

II. m., and f. ṇā, The twenty-third lunar asterism.

III. n.

1. Hearing, Pañc. 188, 10.

2. Study, Vedāntas. in Chr. 216, 2; learning, Mālat. 6, 5.

— Comp. ugra-, adj. dreadful to hear, Johns. Sel. 96, 79.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śravaṇa [1] n. hearing, learning; fame, (good) reputation; ear (also m.).

śravaṇa [2] a. lame; m. (& f. ā) N. of a lunar mansion.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śravaṇa 2. śrav-aṇa, a. [2. śru] lame (S., rare); m., ā, f. (rare), N. of the

twentieth or twenty-fifth lunar asterism (conceined of as representing the

figure of three footsteps): ā, f. night of full-moon in the month of

Śrāvaṇa: -karman, n. ceremony on the day of full-moon in Śrāvaṇa.

śravaṇa 3. śravaṇa, n. incorr. for sravaṇa.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śravaṇa na° śṛṇotyanena śru—varaṇe lyuṭ . 1 karṇe

śabdagrāhakendriyabhede amaraḥ . bhāve lyuṭ . 2 śrutau aśvanyādiṣu

dvāviṁśe 3 nakṣatre puṁstrī° jyo° ta° klīvatvamapi amārkapāte avaṇaṁ

yadi syāditi smṛtiḥ . 4 muṇḍarikāvṛkṣe strī ratnamā° .

श्वितान — śvitāna Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śvitāna mfn. being white, white-coloured

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śvitāna , śvitna a. Ved. White.

श्विति — śviti Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śviti (prob.) f. whiteness, a white colour
श्वित्य — śvitya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śvitya mfn. white, white-coloured

śvitya m. (cf. «śvaitya») N. of a man ()

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śvitya , śvitnya a. White.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śvitya (?) m. N. pr. eines Mannes NĪLAK. zu MBH. 7, 2183. — Vgl. śvaitya.

श्वेत — śveta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śveta mf («ā» or «śvenī») n. white, dressed, in white, bright (with

«parvata» m. «snow-mountain» ; with «kaṭākṣa» m. «a bright side-glance»

&c. &c.

śveta m. white (the colour)

śveta m. a white horse

śveta m. a small white shell, cowry

śveta m. a silver coin

śveta m. a white cloud

śveta m. the planet Venus or its regent śukra

śveta m. a partic. comet (cf. «-ketu»)

śveta m. a partic. plant (= «jīvaka»)

śveta m. cumin seed

śveta m. N. of a serpent-demon (with «vaidārva» or «vaidārvya» or

«vaidarvya»; others give «śvaita-vaidārava» as signifying «a partic. deity

connected with the sun»)

śveta m. N. of one of Skanda’s attendants

śveta m. of a Daitya (son of Vipra-citti)

śveta m. of a Muni

śveta m. of a partic. Avatāra of śiva

śveta m. of a pupil of śiva 122 n. 3

śveta m. of a manifestation of Viṣṇu in his Varāha incarnation

(worshipped in a partic. part of India)

śveta m. of a Rājarṣi

śveta m. of a son of the king Sudeva

śveta m. of a general

śveta m. of a son of Vapushmat

śveta m. of a preceptor

śveta m. of a mythical elephant

śveta m. of the sixth range of mountains dividing the known continent

(the white or «snowy» mountains separating the Varshas of Hiraṇmaya

and Ramyaka) ( 420 n. 1)

śveta m. of one of the minor Dvīpas or divisions of the world (cf. «-

dvīpa»)

śveta mf («ā» or «śvenī») n. («ā») f. one of the seven tongues of Fire

śveta m. a small white shell, cowry

śveta m. N. of various plants (accord. to the birch tree, a white

bignonia, Boerhavia Procumbens, Achyranthes Atropurpurea &c.)

śveta m. crystal

śveta m. alum

śveta m. white or candied sugar

śveta m. bamboo-manna

śveta m. a mystical term for the letter «s»

śveta m. N. of one of the Mātṛis attendant on Skanda

śveta m. of the mother of the elephant śveta (or śaṅkha)

śveta m. of a princess

śveta mf («ā» or «śvenī») n. («ī») f. N. of a river

śveta n. the white of the eye

śveta n. the growing white (of the hair)

śveta n. silver

śveta n. butter-milk and water mixed half and half

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śveta a. (śvetā or śvenī f.) [śvitac ghañ vā] White; tataḥ

śvetairhayairyukte mahati syaṁdane sthitau Bg. 1. 14. —taḥ

(1) The white colour.

(2) A conchshell.

(3) A cowrie.

(4) The planet Venus.

(5) Śukra, the regent of the planet.

(6) A white cloud.

(7) Cumin seed.

(8) N. of a range of mountains; see kulācala or kulaparvata.

(9) N. of a division of the world. —taṁ Silver.

— Comp.

—aṁbaraḥ, —vāsas m. a class of Jaina ascetics.

—ikṣuḥ a kind of sugar-cane.

—udaraḥ an epithet of Kubera.

—kamalaṁ, —padmaṁ a white lotus.

—kuṁjaraḥ an epithet of Airāvata, the elephant of Indra.

—kuṣṭhaṁ white leprosy.

—ketuḥ 1. a Bauddha or Jaina saint. —2. the descending node.

—kolaḥ a kind of fish (śaphara). —gajaḥ, —dvipaḥ 1. a white

elephant. —2. the elephant of Indra.

—garut m.,

—garutaḥ a goose.

—chadaḥ 1. a goose. —2. a kind of basil.

—dvīpaḥ N. of one of the eighteen minor divisions of the known

continent.

—dhātuḥ 1. a white mineral. —2. chalk. —3. the milkstone.

—dhāman m. 1. the moon. —2. camphor. —3. the foam of the sea.

—4. cuttle-fish bone.

—nīlaḥ a cloud.

—patraḥ a goose. -rathaḥ an epithet of Brahman.

—parṇāśaḥ white basil.

—pāṭalā the white trumpetflower.

—piṁgaḥ a lion.

—piṁgalaḥ 1. a lion. —2. an epithet of Śiva.

—bhikṣuḥ a kind of white-robed mendicant; Pt. 3. 76.

—maricaṁ white pepper.

—mālaḥ 1. a cloud. —2. smoke.

—rakta a. pale-red, rosy. (

—ktaḥ) the pink or rosy colour.

—raṁjanaṁ lead.

—rathaḥ the planet Venus.

—rocis m. the moon.

—rohitaḥ an epithet of Garuḍa.

—valkalaḥ the glomerous fig-tree.

—vājin m. 1. the moon. —2. an epithet of Arjuna. —3. camphor.

—vāsas m. an ascetic wearing white garments.

—vāh m. an epithet of Indra.

—vāhaḥ 1. an epithet of Arjuna. —2. of Indra.

—vāhanaḥ 1. an epithet of Arjuna. —2. the moon. —3. a marine

monster (makara). —vāhin m. an epithet of Arjuna.

—śuṁgaḥ, —śṛṁgaḥ barley.

—hayaḥ 1. a horse of Indra. —2. an epithet of Arjuna. —3. N. of

Indra.

—hastin m. Airāvata, Indra’s elephant.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śveta (von 1. śvit) 1) adj. f. ā P. 4, 1, 39; nach VOP. 4, 27 fälschlich auch

śvenī, eine Verwechselung mit śyeta). «weiss, licht» AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. H.

1392. an. 2, 204. MED. t. 67. fg. HALĀY. 4, 47. Ross ṚV. 1, 116, 6. 119,

10. 7, 77, 3. 8, 41, 9. 10. AIT. BR. 6, 35. ŚAT. BR. 2, 6, 3, 9. BHAG. 1, 14.

R. GORR. 2, 12, 11. HALĀY. 2, 282. ukṣaṇaḥ VĀLAKH. 7, 2. AV. 5, 17, 15.

20, 128, 6. Kuh TS. 2, 1, 8, 1. 4. śvetāyai śvetavatsāyai dugdhe TBR. 1, 7,

3, 7. KAUŚ. 120. govṛṣa R. GORR. 2, 12, 11. vṛṣabha MBH. 2, 415.

aśvatarī (vgl. śvetā aśvatarāḥ Ind. St. 3, 258) 1, 8008. R. 4, 16, 41. —

daśana 3, 36, 7. drapsa ṚV. 7, 87, 6. (agniḥ) citro yadabhrāṭ chveto na

vikṣu 1, 66, 6. 3, 1, 4. 5, 1, 4. 8, 40, 8. kalaśa des Soma 4, 27, 5. 9, 74, 7.

7, 90, 3. 91, 3. 8, 26, 19. 10, 20, 9. lakṣman AV. 1, 23, 4. parvatāḥ

«Schneeberge» ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 8, 9. carman KĀṬH. 34, 5. -pipīlikā KAUŚ.

116. — ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 8. mālyāni R. 2, 25, 26. śilāḥ 4, 9, 44. śvetaṁ

padaṁ śiroruhāṇām Spr. (II) 6599. 2104. RAGH. 1, 83. SUŚR. 1, 23, 3.

surā 189, 6. 2, 440, 5. śatapadī 290, 3. 297, 7. sarṣapa RATNAM. 113.

śvetotpala BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 10. yūkā PAÑCAT. 60, 24. -taṇḍulapiṣṭa

WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 272. śoṇita HARIV. 8445. kamaṇḍalu MBH. 1, 1149.

kuṇḍalabhūṣaṇa HARIV. 2437. 13065. fg. 13070. śvetātapatra Spr. (II)

6495. BHĀG. P. 4, 4, 5. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 21. 25. 5, 53. 34, 23. 38, 3.

anatiśveta, anatikṛṣṇa LĀṬY. 1, 1, 7. Ind. St. 1, 51. triḥśvetā śalalī GOBH.

2, 7, 8. — 2) m. a) «Schimmel (Ross») ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 22. — b)

«Otterköpfchen» H. ś. 172. H. an. «Muschel» überh. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c)

= jīvaka JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. «Kümmel» (dies wäre jīraka) WILSON nach

derselben Aut. — d) «eine weisse Wolke» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — e) «der

Planet Venus» ebend. — f) «ein best. Komet» (vgl. -ketu) VARĀH. BṚH. S.

11, 39. fg. 97, 3. — g) N. pr. a) eines Schlangendämons PĀR. GṚHY. 2,

14. ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 4, 18. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2, 3, 3. VP. 149. BHĀG. P. 5, 24, 31.

eines Wesens im Gefolge des Skanda MBH. 9, 2566. eines Daitja, eines

Sohnes des Vipracitti, HARIV. 2437. 2651. eines Muni MBH. 1, 962.

KATHĀS. 72, 334. fgg. einer Incarnation Śiva’s Verz. d. Oxf. H. 52,a,14.

53,b,4. eines Schülers dieses Śveta 52,a,15. eines Rājarṣi MBH. 1, 226

(eig. 231). 12, 5743. 13, 5668. 7130. 7681. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 59, «a», 20.

eines Sohnes des Fürsten Sudeva R. 7, 78, 4. eines Heerführers MBH. 6,

1868. 1870. śvetopākhyāna MBH. 1, 333 (viśvopākhyāna ed. Bomb.). R.

GORR. 1, 4, 140. eines Sohnes des Vapushmant MĀRK. P. 53, 27. eines

Lehrers Ind. St. 8, 222. fg. 364. — b) pl. eines Volkes VARĀH. BṚH. S. 16,

38. — g) eines Weltelephanten MBH. 1, 2630. — d) eines Berges (vgl. —

parvata, -śaila, śvetādri) H. an. MED. MBH.3,10820. 11527.

14429.6,198.9,3349. 13,7657. 14,1174. R.5,11,7. MĀRK. P. 54,9. VP. 167.

BHĀG. P.5,16,8. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 48,a,40. — e) eines Dvīpa (vgl. -dvīpa) H.

an. MED. MBH. 12, 12703. R. 7, 37, 5, 22. = śvetadvīpa bei Kāśī Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 57, «a», N. 4. — 3) f. ā a) «Otterköpfchen» MED. — b) Bez.

verschiedener Pflanzen: = kāṣṭhapāṭalī (-pāṭalā) und śaṅkhinī H. an.

MED. «Boerhavia procumbens Roxb.» RATNAM. 25. «Birke» 94.

«Achyranthes atropurpurea Lam.» 160. = aparājitā, śvetabṛhatī,

śvetakaṇṭakārī, pāṣāṇabhedī, śilāvalkalā, śvetadūrvā, chūrikāpattrī

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — SUŚR. 1, 144, 13. 2, 114, 8. 130, 21. 285, 7. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 44, 10 (= girikarṇikā Comm.). — c) Bez. verschiedener «weisser»

Stoffe: «Zucker», = vaṁśarocanā und sphaṭī (von WILSON hier durch

«Krystall» wiedergegeben) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) mystische Bez. «des

Buchstabens» sa WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 317. 319. — e) N. pr. einer der

Mütter im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 6240. der Mutter des Weltelephanten

Śveta (Śañkha R.) MBH. 1, 2625. 2630. R. 3, 20, 22. einer Fürstin RĀJA-

TAR. 8, 375. — 4) n. a) «das Weisse im Auge» SUŚR. 2, 303, 13. — b)

«das Weisswerden der Haare» CHĀND. UP. 8, 14. — c) «Silber» AK. 2, 9,

97. 3, 4, 14, 82. TRIK. 2, 9, 32. H. 1043. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 5, 5. — d)

«Buttermilch und Wasser zu gleichen Theilen gemischt» H. 409. — Vgl.

mahā-, śvaitya.

śveta 2) g) b) śvetahūṇāḥ besser als ein Name aufzufassen.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

śveta 1 I A King in ancient India. By his moral and spiritual power he was

able to restore his dead son to life. He did not eat meat. Mahābhārata,

Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 150 mentions that he was one of the few

Kings who deserve to be remembered with reverence at dawn and dusk.

(M.B. Ādi Parva, Chapter 1, Verse 233; Śānti Parva, Chapter 153, Verse

68; Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 115, Verse 66).

śveta 2 II A King. Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Dākṣiṇātya Pāṭha, Chapter

14 mentions that he was one of the prominent Kings in India.

śveta 3 III A son of the Virāṭa King. Śveta was the son of King Virāṭa by

his chief wife Surathā, who was a princess of Kosala. Śveta had attended

Yudhiṣṭhira’s Rājasūya. This distinguished warrior was killed by Bhīṣma in

Bhārata Yuddha. (M.B. Dākṣiṇātya Pāṭha, Virāṭa Parva, Chapter 16;

Sabhā Parva, Chapter 44, Verse 20; Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 48).

śveta 4 IV A warrior of Subrahmaṇya. (Mahābhārata, Śalya Parva,

Chapter 45, Verse 64).

śveta 5 V Son of the elder brother of King Sudeva. There is a story of

how Śveta, who was a sinner, attained mokṣa (salvation) by a vision of

sage Agastya. Towards the end of his life, Śveta attained Mokṣa by

performing austere tapas. But since he failed to earn God’s grace by

giving food to the hungry, even in Heaven, he was tormented by hunger

and thirst. His hunger was so severe that he began eating his own flesh.

At last as suggested by Brahmā he was born again on earth and after a

visit to Agastya re-entered Heaven.

śveta 7 VII A mountain in Uttarā Khaṇḍa. In Mahābhārata, Vana Parva,

Chapter 139, Verse 1, we find that the Pāṇḍavas crossed the Śveta

mountain during their life in the forest.

śveta 7i VIII A country situated on the northern side of the Nīla

mountain. The region known as «Hiraṇyakam» is situated to the north of

this country. (M.B. Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 6, Verse 37).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śveta śveta (i. e. śvit + a, or from śvi in śvit, śvind),

I. adj., f. tā and nī, White, Pañc. 60, 24; wearing a white dress, Pañc. iii.

d. 73.

II. m., and f. tā, A small white shell used as a coin.

III. m.

1. White (the colour).

2. A white cloud.

3. The planet venus.

4. A fabulous range of mountains.

5. One of the dvīpas, or divisions of the world.

6. A conch.

7. Cumin seed.

IV. f. tā.

1. Crystal.

2. Candied sugar.

3. The name of several plants.

V. n. Silver.

— Comp. mahā-, f. tā, 1. Sarasvatī. 2. candied sugar. 3. the name of two

plants.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śveta a. white, bright. m. white horse, N. of a serpent-demon etc.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śveta śvet-a, a. [śvit] white, bright; m. white horse (Br.); N.; n. (C.)

white (of the eye).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śveta pu° śvita—aca ghañ vā . 1 dvīpabhede 2 parvatabhede 3 kapardake

hemaca° . 4 śukragrahe 5 pubhrābhre śabdaca° . 6 śaṅkhe rājani° . 7

jīvake jaṭā° . 8 śuklavarṇe 9 tadvati tri° amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīp tasya naśca

śvenī . 10 kaliyugīyaśivāvatāraviśeṣe yathā vedadhyāsāvatārāṇi dvāpare

kathitāni tu . mahādevāvatārāṇi kalau śṛṇuta suvrata! . ādau kaliyuge

śveto devadevo mahādyutiḥ . nāmrā hitāya

viprāṇāmabhūdvaipakhate’nmare . himavacchisvare ramye chagale

parvatottame . tasya śiṣyāḥ śikhāyuktā bubhūvaramitaprabhāḥ . śvetaḥ

śvataśikhaścaiva śvetāsyaḥ śvetalohitaḥ . catvāraste mahātmāno

brāhmaṇā vedapāragāḥ . subhāvo damanaścātha suhotraḥ kaṅkaṇastathā

. lokākṣiratha yogāndro jaigīṣavyastu saptame . aṣṭame dadhibāhuḥ

syānnavame vṛṣabha prabhuḥ . bhṛgustu daśame proktastasmādugraḥ

paraḥ smṛtaḥ . dvādaśe’triḥ samākhyāto vālī cātha trayodaśe . caturdaśe

gautamastu vedaśīrṣā tataḥ param . gākaṇaścāmavattasmāt guhāvāsaḥ

śikhaṇḍyatha . jaṭāmālyaṭṭahāsaśca dāruko lāṅgalī kramāt . śvotastathā

paraḥ śūlī tiṇḍo muṇḍī ca vai kramāt . sahiṣṇuḥ somaśarmā ca

naṣkulīśo’ntime prabhuḥ . vaivasvate’ntare śambhoravatārāstriśūlanaḥ .

aṣṭāviṁśatirākhyātāhyante kaliyage prabhoḥ kaurma 50 a° .

śvetaparvatasya parimāṇādi yathā uttarottareṇelāvṛtaṁ nīlaḥ śvetaḥ

śṛṅavān iti trayo ramyakahiraṇamaya kurūṇāṁ maryādāgirayaḥ

prāgāyatāḥ ubhayataḥ kṣārodāvadhayo dvisahasnayojanapṛthava

ekaikaśaḥ pūrvasyāt pūrvasyāduttarodaśāṁśādhikāṁśena dairghya eva

hrasanti bhāga° . 5 . 16 . 11 rājabhede vahnipu° . saṁjñāyāṁ kan . rūpye

na° rājani° . kapardake pu° .

श्वेतरण्जन — śvetaraṇjana Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śvetaraṇjana «śveta-raṇjana» n. «white-coloured», lead
श्वेतवर्ण — śvetavarṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śvetavarṇa «śveta-varṇa» mfn. white-coloured
श्वेतिमन् — śvetiman Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śvetiman m. whiteness, white colour

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śvetiman m. whiteness, white colour.

सित — sita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sita mfn. (for 2. see below; for 3. p. 1214, col.2) bound, tied, fettered

&c. &c.

mfn. joined with, accompanied by (instr.)

sita see 2. «pra-sita» p.697, col.3.

sita mf («ā») n. (prob. formed fr. «a-sita» as «sura» fr. «asura»; for 1. and

2. «sita» see p.1213, col.1; for 4. see 1. «so») white, pale, bright, light

(said of a day in the light half of a month and of the waxing moon) &c.

mf («ā») n. candid, pure (see «-karman»)

sita m. white (the colour)

sita m. the light half of the month from new to full moon

sita m. the planet Venus or its regent (= «śukra»)

sita m. sugar

sita m. Bauhinia Candida

sita m. N. of one of Skanda’s attendants

sita mf («ā») n. («ā») f. white sugar, refined sugar

sita m. moonlight

sita m. a handsome woman.

sita m. spirituous liquor

sita m. N. of various plants (a species of Aparājitā; white Kaṇṭakārī;

white Dūrvā grass; Arabian jasmine &c.)

sita m. bamboo juice

sita m. N. of the Ganges (in «sitāsitā», under «sitā»)

sita m. one of the 8 Devis ()

sita n. silver

sita n. sandal

sita n. a radish

sita see s.v.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

sita a. [so-kta]

(1) White.

(2) Bound, tied, fastened, fettered.

(3) Surrounded.

(4) Ascertained, known.

(5) Finished, ended. —taḥ

(1) White colour.

(2) The bright half of a lunar month.

(3) The planet Venus.

(4) An arrow. —taṁ

(1) Silver.

(2) Sandal.

(3) Radish.

— Comp.

—aṁśu = sitakara q. v.

—agraḥ a thorn.

—aṁgaḥ the śvetarohita tree.

—ajājī white cumin.

—apāṁgaḥ a peacock.

—abhraḥ, —bhraṁ camphor.

—aṁbaraḥ an ascetic dressed in white garments.

—arjakaḥ white basil.

—aśvaḥ an epithet of Arjuna.

—asitaḥ an epithet of Balarāma. (

—tau) Venus and Saturn.

—ādiḥ molasses.

—ānanaḥ N. of Garuḍa.

—ābhaḥ camphor.

—ālikā a cockle.

—itara a. other than white; i. e. black. -gatiḥ fire.

—udaraḥ an epithet of Kubera.

—udbhavaṁ white sandal.

—upalaḥ a crystal.

—upalā candied sugar.

—upalaḥ chalk.

—karaḥ 1. the moon. —2. camphor.

—dhātuḥ a white mineral, chalk.

—raśimaḥ the moon.

—vājin m. N. of Arjuna.

—śarkarā candied sugar.

—śiṁbikaḥ wheat.

—śivaṁ rock-salt.

—śūkaḥ barley.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sita (von 3. sā) partic. «beendigt» AK. 3, 2, 48. H. an. 2, 206. MED. t. 70.

sita partic. «gebunden» s. u. 1. si.

sita (aus 2. asita, wie sura aus asura) UṆĀDIS. 3, 89. 1) adj. (f. ā) a)

«weiss, hellfarbig, hell» NIR. 9, 26. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 3, 4, 14, 83. H. 1392.

an. 2, 206. MED. t. 70. HALĀY. 4, 47. varṇairnīlapītasitāruṇaiḥ R. 2, 94,

20. Ind. St. 2, 258. 278. 8, 273. SUŚR. 1, 296, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 19.

42. 12, 5. 24, 35. 53, 96. Rinder, Pferde M. 11, 130. MBH. 3, 11898. R. 5,

11, 7. 12, 34. KATHĀS. 22, 182. BHĀG. P. 3, 2, 29. Bart, Haupthaar MBH.

1, 3471. 5330. BHĀG. P. 2, 7, 26. Zähne 3, 13, 27. 32. Augen HALĀY. 2,

283. Blüthen VARĀH. BṚH. S. 15, 1. AK. 2, 4, 2, 51. 3, 28. Senf PAÑCAT.

158, 3 (ed. orn. 57, 12). Reis Spr. (II) 2635. PAÑCAR. 3, 9, 1. kisalaya (=

śuddha Comm.) BHĀG. P. 5, 3, 6. -taṭasānukandara MBH. 3, 1663.

sitoccaśailottamaśṛṅga R. GORR. 2, 12, 38. Gewand, Tuch Spr. (II) 2426.

4102. VIKR. 53. aṅgarāga KUMĀRAS. 7, 32. Gesicht bei Kindern Spr. (II)

7423. kopastimitasitādhara («bleich») RĀJA-TAR. 3, 293. 5, 324.

Sonnenschein RAGH. 3, 70. KATHĀS. 18, 4. 403. BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 17. 11,

28. 8, 10, 13. cāmaravyajana MBH. 2, 37. RAGH. 9, 66. gṛhaṁ sudhayā

sitam R. 4, 33, 21. ṚT. 1, 9. KATHĀS. 27, 136. bhūti- (giri) «weiss wie»

oder «durch Asche» 50, 173. 123, 211. gāṅgamambu Spr. (II) 2101. tila

SUŚR. 1, 198, 18. indorbhābhirbhānoḥ sitaṁ bhavatyardham «hell»

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 1. 11, 17. 19. surānsitamukuṭaratnān 12, 1. jyotsnā-

(eine Nacht) KATHĀS. 123, 211. -cchāyā RAGH. ed. Calc. 4, 5. rātryaḥ

Spr. (II) 1700. ātapa RĀJA-TAR. 2, 167. -saptamī «der 7te Tag in der

lichten Hälfte des Monats» BHĀG. P. 7, 14, 22. RĀJA-TAR. 5, 327. pauṣa

6, 187. pakṣa 311. ahan 312. — b) «rein, lauter»: -karman adj. MBH. 1,

3641. — 2) m. a) «die lichte Hälfte eines Monats» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 21, 9.

māghasitottha 10. — b) «der Planet Venus» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 4, 22. 9, 11. 27. 34. 38. 42. 45 (sitāhvayaḥ). 17, 24. fg. 27. 27,

42. Ind. St. 2, 279. 283. fgg. — c) «Zucker»: sitaśailamustāḥ VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 77, 11. — d) «Saccharum Sara Roxb.» (śara) NĀNĀRTHADHVANIM. im

ŚKDR. «Pfeil» WILSON. — e) «Bauhinia candida» RATNAM. 158. — f) N. pr.

eines Wesens im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2571. — 3) f. ā a) «Zucker»

AK. 2, 9, 43. TRIK. 3, 3, 192. H. 403. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 1, 377, 18. —

yuktena sarpiṣā 2, 327, 1. 341, 19. 410, 20. 449, 2. kṣīraṁ sasitam 149,

5. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 76, 6. Spr. (II) 7044 (Conj.). PAÑCAR. 3, 9, 1. Vgl.

tri-. — b) «Mondlicht» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) «Branntwein» RĀJAN. ebend.

— d) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen, = parvatajātāparājitā RATNAM. im

ŚKDR. = śvetakaṇṭakārī RĀJAN. 4, 33. = vākucī 63. = vidārī, śvetadūrvā,

kuṭumbinī, piṅgā (?), trāyamāṇā, tejanī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — SUŚR. 1, 133,

19. 2, 276, 15. — e) Bez. einer der 8 Devī bei den Buddhisten

KĀLACAKRA 4, 18. — 4) n. a) «Silber» H. 1043, Schol. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

b) «Sandel» RATNAM. 137. — c) «Rettig» RĀJAN. 7, 14. — d) «Kümmel»

RATNAM. 100.

sita «geschärft, scharf» fehlerhaft für śita (s. u. 2. śā) ARJ. 7, 7 (-sita

MBH. 3, 12109). MBH. 7, 1078 (śita ed. Bomb.). Spr. (II) 3162.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

sita A warrior of Subrahmaṇya. (Mahābhārata, Śalya Parva, Chapter 45,

Verse 69).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

sita sita,

I. (cf. si and so), adj. White, Vikr. d. 53; Pañc. 158, 3.

II. m.

1. White (the colour).

2. The light half of the month from new to full moon, Rājat. 5, 327.

3. The planet Venus.

4. An arrow.

III. f. tā.

1. Candied sugar.

2. Moonlight.

3. A handsome woman.

4. Spirituous liquor.

5. The name of several plants.

IV. n.

1. Silver.

2. Sandal.

— Comp. a-, adj., f. tā and asiknī,

I. adj. 1. black, Rām. 2, 96, 19. 2. the black half of the month from full to

new moon, Pañc. ed. orn. i. d. 139.

II. m. 1. black (the colour). 2. a proper name, MBh. 1, 106.

III. f. tā, a proper name, Hariv. 120. sita-a-,

I. adj. white and black.

II. m. a name of Baladeva.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

sita [1] -> sā & si.

sita [2] a. white, bright, clear, pure.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

sita 1. si-ta, pp. (1. si) bound.

sita 2. sita, a. [fr. as-ita, black, misunderstood as a negative] white;

pale; bright, light (day or month during the moon’s increase); m. bright

half (of a lunar month): ā, f. sugar.

sita 3. sita, pp. incorr. for śita.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

sita na° so—kta . 1 raupye 2 mūlake rājani° . 3 candane ratnamā° 4 śare

5 śukragrahe 6 śuklavarṇe ca pu° amaraḥ . 7 tadvati 8 samāpte 9 baddhe

10 jñāta ca tri° viśvaḥ .

सितकमल — sitakamala Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitakamala «sita-kamala» n. a white lotus

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sitakamala n. «eine weisse Lotusblüthe»; davon adj. -maya KĀLACAKRA

2, 156.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

sitakamala n. a white lotus flower.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

sitakamala sita-kamala, a. white lotus;

-kara, m. (white-rayed), moon: -ānana, a. moon-faced;

-cchatr-ita, den. pp. turned into or representing a white umbrella;

-tara, cpv. extremely white;

-tejas, a. having as white light;

-dīdhiti, m. moon;

-dvija, m. goose;

-pakṣa, m. bright half of the month;

-puṇḍarīka, a. white lotus;

-maṇi, m. crystal: -maya, a. made of crystal;

-manas, a. pure-hearted;

-ruci, a. bright-coloured, white; m. moon;

-varman, m. N. of a minister;

-sapti, m. (having white steeds), ep. of Arjuna;

-hūṇa, m. pl. the White Huns.

सितकृष्ण — sitakṛṣṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitakṛṣṇa «sita-kṛṣṇa» mfn. white and black

sitakṛṣṇa «sita-kṛṣṇa» m. white and black colour

सितरुचि — sitaruci Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitaruci «sita-ruci» mfn. bright-coloured, white

sitaruci «sita-ruci» m. the moon

सितलोहित — sitalohita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitalohita «sita-lohita» mfn. white and red

sitalohita «sita-lohita» m. white and red colour

सितश्याम — sitaśyāma Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitaśyāma «sita-śyāma» mfn. blackish-white

sitaśyāma «sita-śyāma» m. blackish-white colour

सिति — siti Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899siti f. (for 2. see p.1214, col.3) binding, fastening (in 1. «pra-siti», p.697,

col.3).

siti mfn. (w.r. for «śiti»; for 1. see p.1213, col.1; for 3. see 1. «so») white

mfn. black

siti see s.v.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

siti a.

(1) White.

(2) Black. —tiḥ

(1) White or black colour.

(2) Binding, fastening.

— Comp.

—kaṁṭha, —vāsas see śitikaṁṭha; śitivāsas.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

siti adj. = śiti «weiss; schwarz» RAMĀN. zu AK. 3, 4, 14, 85 nach ŚKDR.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

siti pu° sī—ktic . 1 śuklavarṇe 2 kṛṣṇavarṇe ca . 2 tadvati tri° rāyamu0

सितेतर — sitetara Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitetara mfn. «other than white», black, dark, blue

mfn. white and black

sitetara m. a kind of dark-coloured rice

sitetara m. Dolichos Uniflorus

sitetara m. «-gati» m. «having a black course», fire

sitetara m. «-saroja» n. a blue lotus

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sitetara (3. sita + itara) 1) adj. a) «schwarz (dunkelfarbig») H. 17.

KUMĀRAS. 1, 38. VARĀH. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. H. 1326. HALĀY. 2, 97. — b)

«weiss und schwarz» BHĀG. P. 10, 41, 41. — 2) m. Bez. zweier Pflanzen:

= śyāmaśāli und kulattha RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

sitetara a. black, dark, blue (lit. opposite of white).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

sitetara sita+itara, a. (opposite of white), black, dark, blue;

-saroja, n. blue lotus.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

sitetara pu° sitāditaraḥ . 1 śyāmaśālau 2 kulatthe ca 3 śubhetaravarṇe 4

tadvati tri° .

सु — su Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899su cl.1.P. ā. «savati, -te», to go, move ( «sru»).

su (= 1. «sū») cl.1.2. P. ( xxii, 43 and xxiv, 32; «savati, sauti», only in 3.

sg. pr. «sauti» and 2. sg. Impv. «suhi») to urge, impel, incite ; to possess

supremacy

su cl.5.P. ā. ( xxvii, 1) «sunoti, sunute» (in 3. pl. «sunvanti, sunvire»

[with pass. sense] and «suṣvati»; p. «sunvat» or «sunvāna» [the latter

with act. and pass. sense] ; pf. «suṣāva, suṣuma» &c. ; p. in Veda

«suṣuvas» and «suṣvāṇa» [the later generally with pass. sense; accord. to

on «suṣuvāṇa» with act. sense]; aor. accord. to Gr. «asāvīt» or «asauṣīt,

asoṣṭa» or «asaviṣṭa»; in also Impv. «sotu, sutam», and p. [mostly pass.]

«suvāna» [but the spoken form is «svāna» and so written in , «suv-» in ;

and 3. pl. «asuṣavuḥ» ; fut. «sotā» ; «soṣyati» ; «saviṣyati» ; inf. «sotave,

sotos» ; «sotum» Gr.; ind. p. «-sutya» ; «-sūya» , to press out, extract

(esp. the juice from the Soma plant for libations) ; to distil, prepare

(wine, spirits &c.) on Pass. «sūyate» (in also ā. 3. sg. «sunve» and 3. pl.

«sunvire» with pass. sense; aor. «asāvi» Caus. «-sāvayati» or «-ṣāvayati»

(see «abhi-ṣu» and «pra-su»; aor. «asūṣavat» accord. to some «asīṣavat»)

Gr.: Desid. of Caus. «suṣāvayiṣati» Desid. «susūṣati, -te» Iutens.

«soṣūyate, soṣavīti, soṣoti»

su (= 2. «sū»), (only in 3. sg. «sauti» see «pra-sū») to beget, bring forth.

su ind. (opp. to «dus» and corresponding in sense to Gk. [greek];

perhaps connected with 1. «vasu», and, accord. to some, with pron. base

«sa», as «ku» with «ka»; in Veda also «sū» and liable to become «ṣu» or

«ṣū» and to lengthen a preceding vowel, while a following «na» may

become «ṇa»; it may be used as an adj. or adv.), good, excellent, right,

virtuous, beautiful, easy, well, rightly, much, greatly, very, any, easily,

willingly, quickly (in older language often with other particles; esp. with

«u», = «forthwith, immediately»; with «mo» i.e. «mā u», = «never, by no

means»; «su kam» often emphatically with an Impv. e.g. «tiṣṭhā su kam

maghavan mā parā gāḥ», «do tarry O Maghavan, go not past» ; «su»

always qualifies the meaning of a verb and is never used independently at

the beginning of a verse; in later language it is rarely a separate word,

but is mostly prefixed to substantives, adjectives, adverbs and participles,

exceptionally also to an ind. p. e.g. «su-baddhvā», «having well bound» ;

or even to a finite verb e.g. «su-nirvavau»

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following).

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following)

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following, in which the initial «ṣ» stands

for an orig. «s»):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

su I. 1 U. (suvati-te) To go, move. —II. 1. 2. P. (savati, sauti) To possess

power or supremacy. —III. 5. U. (sunoti, sunute, suta; the s of su is

changed to ṣ after any preposition ending in i or u)

(1) To press out or extract juice.

(2) To distil.

(3) To pour out, sprinkle, make a libation.

(4) To perform a sacrifice, especially the Soma sacrifice.

(5) To bathe.

(6) To churn. —Desid. (suṣūsati-te) —WITH ud to excite, agitate. —pra

to produce, beget.

su ind. A particle often used with nouns to form Karmadhāraya and

Bahuvrīhi compounds, and with adjectives and adverbs. It has the

following senses:

(1) Well, good, excellent; as in suṁgadhi.

(2) Beautiful, handsome; as in sumadhyamā, sukeśī &c.

(3) Well, perfectly, thoroughly, properly; sujīrṇamannaṁ suvicakṣaṇaḥ

sutaḥ suśāsitā strī nṛpatiḥ susevitaḥ &c … sudīrghakāle’pi na yāti vikriyāṁ

H. 1. 22.

(4) Easily, readily, as in sukara or sulabha q. v.

(5) Much, very much, exceedingly; sudāruṇa, sudīrgha &c.

(6) Worthy of respect or reverence.

(7) It is also said to have the senses of assent, prosperity, and

distress.

— Comp.

—akṣa a. 1. having good eyes. —2. having keen organs, acute.

—aṁga a. well-shaped, handsome, lovely.

—accha a. see s. v.

—aṁta a. having a happy end, ending well.

—alpa, -alpaka a. see s. v.

—asti, —astika see s. v.

—ākāra, —ākṛti a. well-formed, handsome, beautiful.

—āgata see s. v.

—ādānaṁ taking justly or properly; Ms. 8. 172.

—ābhāsa a. very splendid or illustrious; Ki. 15. 22.

—iṣṭa a. properly sacrificed. -kṛt m. a form of fire.

—ukta a. well-spoken, well-said; athavā sūktaṁ khalu kenāpi Ve. 3.

(

—ktā) a kind of bird (sārikā. (—ktaṁ) 1. a good or wise saying;

netuṁ vāṁchati yaḥ khalān pathi satāṁ sūktaiḥ sudhāsyaṁdibhiḥ Bh. 2.

6, R. 15. 97. —2. a Vedic hymn, as in puruṣasūkta &c. -darśin m. a

hymnseer, Vedic sage. -vāc f. 1. a hymn. —2. praise, a word of praise.

—uktiḥ f. 1. a good or friendly speech. —2. a good or clever saying.

—3. a correct sentence.

—uttara a. 1. very superior. —2. well towards the north.

—utthāna a. making good efforts, vigorous, active. (

—naṁ) vigorous effort or exertion.

—unmada, —unmāda a. quite mad or frantic.

—upasadana a. easy to be approached.

—upaskara a. furnished with good instruments.

—kaṁṭakā the aloe plant.

—kaṁḍuḥ itch.

—kaṁdaḥ 1. an onion. —2. a yam. —3. a sort of grass.

—kaṁdakaḥ onion.

—kara a. (rā or rī f.) 1. easy to be done, practicable, feasible;

vaktuṁ sukaraṁ kartuṁ (adhyavasātuṁ) duṣkaraṁ Ve. 3 ‘sooner said

than done.’ —2 easy to be managed. (

—rā) a tractable cow. (

—raṁ) charity, benevolence.

—karman a. 1. one whose deeds are righteous, virtuous, good. —2.

active, diligent. (—m.) N. of Viśvakarman.

—kala a. one who has acquired a great reputation for liberality in

giving and using (money &c.).

—kāṁḍaḥ the Kāravella plant.

—kāṁḍikā the Kāṇḍīra creeper.

—kāṁḍin a. 1. having beautiful stems. —2. beautifully joined. (—m.)

a bee.

—kāṣṭhaṁ firewood.

—kuṁdakaḥ an onion.

—kumāra a. 1. very delicate or soft, smooth. —2. beautifully young

or youthful. (

—raḥ) 1. a beautiful youth. —2. a kind of sugar-cane. —3. a kind of

grain (śyāmāka). —4 a kind of mustard. —5. the wild Champaka. (

—rā) 1. the double jasmine. —2. the plantain. —3. the great-

flowered jasmine.

—kumārakaḥ 1. a beautiful youth. —2. rice (śāli). (—kaṁ) the

Tamālapatra.

—kumārī the Navamallikā jasmine.

—kṛt a. 1. doing good, benevolent. —2. pious, virtuous, righteous.

—3. wise, learned. —4. fortunate, lucky. —5. making good sacrifices or

offerings (—m.) 1. a skilful worker. —2. N. of Tvaṣṭṛ.

—kṛta a. 1. done well or properly. —2. thoroughly done. —3. well-

made or constructed. —4. treated with kindness, assisted, befriended. —

5. virtuous, righteous, pious. —6. lucky, fortunate. (

—taṁ) 1. any good or virtuous act, kindness, favour, service;

nādatte kasyacitpāpaṁ kasyacitsukṛtaṁ vibhuḥ Bg. 5. 15, Me. 17. —2.

virtue, moral or religious merit; svargābhisaṁdhisukṛtaṁ vaṁcanāmiva

menire Ku. 6. 47; tacciṁtyamānaṁ sukṛtaṁ taveti R. 14. 16. —3. fortune,

auspiciousness. —4. recompense, reward.

—kṛtiḥ f. 1. well-doing, a good act. —2. kindness, virtue. —3.

practice of penance. —4. auspiciousness.

—kṛtin a. 1. acting well or kindly. —2. virtuous, pious, good,

righteous; saṁtaḥ saṁtu nirāpadaḥ sukṛtināṁ kīrtiściraṁ vardhatāṁ H. 4.

132; Bg. 7. 16. —3. wise, learned. —4. benevolent. —5. fortunate, lucky.

—kṛtyaṁ a good action; Pt. 2. 41.

—keśa(sa)raḥ the citron tree.

—kratuḥ 1. N. of Agni. —2. of Śiva. —3. of Indra. —4. of Mitra and

Varuṇa. —5. of the sun. —6. of Soma.

—gaṁ a. 1. going gracefully or well. —2. graceful, elegant. —3. easy

of access; Pt. 2. 144. —4. intelligible, easy to be understood (opp. durga).

(

—gaṁ) 1. ordure, feces. —2. happiness.

—gata a. 1. well-gone or passed. —2 well-bestowed. (

—taḥ) an epithet of Buddha.

—gaṁdhaḥ 1. fragrance, odour, perfume. —2. sulphur. —3. a trader.

(

—dhaṁ) 1. sandal. —2. small cumin seed. —3. a blue lotus. —4. a

kind of fragrant grass. (

—dhā) sacred basil.

—gaṁdhakaḥ 1. sulphur. —2. the red Tulasī1. —3. the orange. —4. a

kind of gourd.

—gaṁdhāraḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—gaṁdhi a. 1. sweet-smelling, fragrant, redolent with perfumes.

—2. virtuous, pious. (

—dhiḥ) 1. perfume, fragrance. —2. the Supreme Being. —3. a kind

of sweet-smelling mango. (

—dhi n.) 1. the root of long pepper. —2. a kind of fragrant grass. —

3. coriander seed. -triphalā 1. nutmeg. —2. areca nut. —3. cloves. -mūlaṁ

the root Uśīra. -mūṣikā the musk-rat.

—gaṁdhikaḥ 1. incense. —2. sulphur. —3. a kind of rice. (

—kaṁ) the white lotus.

—gama a. 1. easy of access, accessible. —2. easy. —3. plain,

intelligible.

—gahanā an enclosure round a place of sacrifice to exclude profane

access. -vṛttiḥ f. the same as above.

—gṛha a. (hī f.) having a beautiful house or abode, welllodged;

sugṛhī nirgṛṁhīkṛtā Pt. 1. 390.

—gṛhīta a. 1. held well or firmly, grasped. —2. used or applied

properly or auspiciously. -nāman a. 1. one whose name is auspiciously

invoked, one whose name it is auspicious to utter (as Bali, Yudhiṣṭhira), a

term used as a respectful mode of speaking; sugṛhītanāmnaḥ

bhaṭṭagopālasya pautraḥ Māl. 1.

—grāsaḥ a dainty morsel.

—grīva a. having a beautiful neck. (

—vaḥ) 1. a hero. —2. a swan. —3. a kind of weapon. —4. N. of one

of the four horses of Kṛṣṇa. —5. of Śiva. —6. of Indra. —7. N. of a

monkeychief and brother of Vāli. [By the advice of Kabandha Rāma went

to Sugrīva who told him how his brother had treated him and besought

his assistance in recovering his wife, promising at the same time that he

would assist Rāma in recovering his wife Sīta. Rāma, therefere, killed

Vāli, and installed Sugrīva on the throne. He then assisted Rāma with his

hosts of monkeys in conquering Rāvaṇa, and recovering Sīta.]. -īśaḥ N. of

Rāma.

—gla a. very weary or fatigued.

—cakṣus a. having good eyes, seeing well. (—m.) 1. a discerning or

wise man, learned man. —2. the glomerous fig-tree.

—carita, caritra a. well-conducted, well-behaved. (

—taṁ, -traṁ) 1. good conduct, virtuous deeds. —2. merit; tava

sucaritamaṁgulīya nūnaṁ pratanu S. 6. 10. (

—tā, —trā) a well-conducted, devoted, and virtuous wife.

—carman m. the Bhūrja tree.

—citrakaḥ 1. a king-fisher. —2. a kind of speckled snake.

—citrā a kind of gourd.

—ciṁtā, —ciṁtanaṁ deep thought, deep reflection or

consideration.

—ciram ind. for a very long time, very long.

—cirāyus m. a god, deity.

—cūṭī a pair of nippers or tongs.

—celakaḥ a fine cloth.

—chatraḥ N. of Śiva. (

—trā) the river Sutlej.

—jana a. 1. good, virtuous, respectable. —2. kind, benevolent. (

—naḥ) 1. a good or virtuous man, benevolent man. —2. a

gentleman. —3. N. of Indra’s charioteer.

—janatā 1. goodness, kindness, benevolence, virtue; aiśvaryasya

vibhūṣaṇaṁ sujanatā Bh. 2. 82. —2. a number of good men. —3. bravery,

—janman a. 1. of noble or respectable birth; yā kaumudī

nayanayorbhavataḥ sujanmā Māl. 1. 34. —2. legitimate, lawfully born.

—jalaṁ a lotus.

—jalpaḥ 1. a good speech. —2. a kind of speech thus described by

Ujjvalamaṇi; yatrārjavāt sagāṁbhīryaṁ sadainyaṁ sahacāpalam .

sotkaṁṭhaṁ ca hariḥ spṛṣṭaḥ sa sujalpo nigadyate … —jāta a. 1.

wellgrown, tall. —2. well made or produced. —3. of high birth. —4.

beautiful, lovely; Māl. 1. 16, R. 3. 8.

—tanu a. 1. having a beautiful body. —2. extremely delicate or

slender, very thin. —3. emaciated. (

—nuḥ, —nūḥ f.) a lovely lady; etāḥ sutanu mukha te sakhyaḥ

paśyaṁti hemakūṭagatāḥ V. 1. 10.

—taṁtrī a. 1. well-stringed. —2. (hence) melodious.

—tapas a. 1. one who practises austere penance. —2. having great

heat. (—m.) 1. an ascetic, a devotee, hermit, an anchorite. —2. the sun.

(—n.) an austere penance.

—tamāṁ ind. most excellently, best.

—tarāṁ ind. 1. better, more excellently. —2. exceedingly, very, very

much, excessively; tayā duhitrā sutarāṁ savitrī sphuratprabhāmaṁḍalayā

cakāśe Ku. 1. 24; sutarāṁ dayāluḥ R. 2. 53, 7. 21, 14. 9, 18. 24. —3. more

so, much more so; mayyapyāsthā na te cettvayi mama sutarāmeṣa rājan

gatosmi Bh. 3. 30. —4. consequently.

—tardanaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo.

—talaṁ 1. ‘immense depth’, N. of one of the seven regions below

the earth; see pātāla. —2. the foundation of a large building.

—tiktakaḥ the coral tree.

—tīkṣṇa a. 1. very sharp. —2. very pungent. —3. acutely painful. (

—kṣṇaḥ) 1. the Śigru tree. —2. N. of a sage; nāmnā

sutīkṣṇaścaritena dāṁtaḥ R. 13. 41. -daśanaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—tīrthaḥ 1. a good preceptor. —2. N. of Śiva.

—tuṁga a. very lofty or tall. (

—gaḥ) the cocoa-nut tree.

—tejas a. 1. very sharp. —2. very bright, or splendid. —3. very

mighty. (—m.) a worshipper of the sun.

—dakṣiṇa a. 1. very sincere or upright. —2. liberal or rich in

sacrificial gifts; Pt. 1. 310. (

—ṇā) N. of the wife of Dilīpa; tasya dākṣiṇyarūḍhena nāmnā

magadhavaṁśajā . patnī sudakṣiṇetyāsīt R. 1. 31, 3. 1

—daṁḍaḥ a cane, ratan.

—dat a. (tī f.) having handsome teeth.

—daṁtaḥ 1. a good tooth. —2. an actor, a dancer. (

—tī) the female elephant of the north-west quarter.

—darśana a. (nā or nī f.) 1. good-looking, beautiful, handsome. —2.

easily seen. (

—naḥ) the discus of Viṣṇu; as in kṛṣṇopyasudarśanaḥ K. —2. N. of

Śiva. —3. of mount Meru. —4. a vulture. (

—nī —naṁ) N. of Amarāvatī, Indra’s capital. (

—naṁ) N. of Jambudvīpa.

—darśanā 1. a handsome woman. —2. a woman. —3. an order, a

command. —4. a kind of drug.

—dā a. very bountiful.

—dāṁtaḥ a Buddhist.

—dāman a. one who gives liberally. (—m.) 1. a cloud. —2. a

mountain. —3. the sea. —4. N. of Indra’s elephant. —5. N. of a very poor

Brāhmaṇa who came to Dvāraka with only a small quantity of parched

rice as a present to his friend Kṛṣṇa, and was raised by him to wealth and

glory.

—dāyaḥ 1. a good or auspicious gift. —2. a special gift given on

particular solemn occasions. —3. one who offers such a gift.

—dinaṁ 1. a happy or auspicious day. —2. a fine day or weather

(opp. durdina); so sudināhaṁ in the same sense.

—dīrgha a. very long or extended. (

—rghā) a kind of cucumber.

—durlabha a. very scarce or rare.

—dvara a. very distant or remote. (sudūraṁ means 1. to a great

distance. —2. to a very high degree, very much. sudūrāt ‘from afar, from a

distance’).

—ṭṭaḍha a. very firm or hard, compact.

—dṛś a. having beautiful eyes. (—f.) a pretty woman.

—dhanvan a. having an excellent bow. (—m.) 1. a good archer or

bowman. —2. Ananta, the great serpent. —3. N. of Viśvakarman.

—dharman a. attentive to duties. (—f.) the council or assembly of

gods. (—m.) 1. the hall or palace of Indra. —2. one diligent in properly

maintaining his family.

—dharmā —rmī the council or assembly of gods (devasabhā);

yayāvudīritālokaḥ sudharmānavamāṁ sabhāṁ R. 17. 27.

—dhita a. Ved. 1. perfect, secure. —2. kind, good. —3. happy,

prosperous. —4. well-aimed or directed (as a weapon).

—dhī a. having a good understanding, wise, clever, intelligent. (

—dhīḥ) a wise or intelligent man, learned man or pandit. (—f.) a

good understanding, good sense, intelligence. -upāsyaḥ 1. a particular

kind of royal palace. —2. N. of an attendant on Kṛṣṇa. (

—syaṁ) the club of Balarama. -upāsyā 1. a woman. —2. N. of Umā,

or of one of her female companions. —3. a sort of pigment.

—dhūmravarṇā one of the seven tongues of fire.

—naṁdā N. of a woman.

—nayaḥ 1. good conduct. —2. good policy.

—nayana a. having beautiful eyes. (

—naḥ) a deer. (

—nā) 1. a woman having beautiful eyes. —2. a woman in general.

—nābha a. 1. having a beautiful navel. —2. having a good nave or

centre. (

—bhaḥ) 1. a mountain. —2. the Maināka mountain q. v.

—nibhṛta a. very lonely or private. (

—taṁ) ind. very secretly or closely, very narrowly, privately.

—niścalaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—nīta 1. well-conducted, well-behaved. —2. polite, civil. (

—taṁ) 1. good conduct or behaviour. —2. good policy or prudence.

—nītiḥ f. 1. good conduct, good manners, propriety. —2. good

policy. —3. N. of the mother of Dhruva, q. v.

—nītha a. well-disposed, well-conducted, righteous, virtuous, good.

(

—thaḥ) 1. a Brāhmaṇa. —2. N. of Śiśupāla q. v. —3. Ved. a good

leader.

—nīla a. very black or blue. (

—laḥ) the pomegranate tree. (

—lā) common flax. (—laṁ), —nīlakaḥ a blue gem.

—netra a. having good or beautiful eyes.

—nau n. water (?).

—pakva a. 1. well-cooked. —2. thoroughly matured or ripe. (

—kvaḥ) a sort of fragrant mango.

—patnī a woman having a good husband.

—pathaḥ 1. a good road. —2. a good course. —3. good conduct.

—pathin m. (nom. sing. supaṁthāḥ) a good road.

—padmā orris root.

—parṇa a. (rṇā or rṇī f.) 1. wellwinged. —2. having good or

beautiful leaves. (

—rṇaḥ) 1. a ray of the sun. —2. a class of bird-like beings of a

semi-divine character. —3. any supernatural bird. —4. an epithet of

Garuḍa. —5. a cock. -ketuḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

—parṇakaḥ = suparṇa. —parṇā, —parṇī f. 1. a number of lotuses.

—2. a pool abounding with lotuses. —3. N. of the mother of Garuḍa.

—paryāpta a. 1. very spacious. —2. well-fitted.

—parvan a. well-jointed, having many joints or knots. (—m.) 1. a

bamboo. —2. an arrow. —3. a god, deity. —4. a special lunar day (as the

day of full or new moon, and the 8th and 14th day of each fortnight). —5.

smoke. (—f.) white Dūrvā grass.

—palāyita a. 1. completely fled or run away. —2. skilfully retreated.

—pātraṁ 1. a good or suitable vessel, worthy receptacle. —2. a fit

or competent person, any one well-fitted for an office, an able person.

—pād (pād or padī f.) having good or handsome feet.

—pārśvaḥ 1. the wavedleaf fig-tree (plakṣa). —2. N. of the son of

Sampāti, elder brother of Jaṭāyu.

—pītaṁ a carrot. (

—taḥ) the fifth Muhūrta.

—puṁsī a woman having a good husband.

—puṣpa a. (ṣpā or ṣpī f.) having beautiful flowers. (

—ṣpaḥ) 1. the coral tree. —2. the Śirīṣa tree. (

—ṣpī) the plantain tree. (

—ṣpaṁ) 1. cloves. —2. the menstrual excretion.

—puṣpita a. 1. well blossomed, being in full flower. —2. having the

hair thrilling or bristling.

—pūra a. 1. easy to be filled; Pt. 1. 25. —2. well-filling. (

—raḥ) a kind of citron (bījapūra). —pūrakaḥ the Baka-pushpa tree.

—prakāśa a. 1. manifest, apparent. —2. public, notorious.

—pratarkaḥ a sound judgment

—pratibhā spirituous liquor.

—pratiṣṭha a. 1. standing well. —2. very celebrated, renowned,

glorious, famous. (

—ṣṭhā) 1. good position. —2. good re putation, fame, celebrity. —3.

establishment, erection. —4. installation, consecration.

—pratiṣṭhita a. 1. well-established. —2. consecrated —3.

celebrated. (

—taḥ) the Udumbara tree.

—pratiṣṇāta a. 1. thoroughly purified. —2. well-versed in. —3. well-

investigated, clearly ascertained or determined.

—pratīka a. 1. having a beautiful shape, lovely, handsome. —2.

having a beautiful trunk. (

—kaḥ) 1. an epithet of Kāmadeva. —2. of Śiva. —3. of the elephant

of the north-east quarter.

—prapāṇaṁ a good tank.

—prabha a. very brilliant, glorious. (

—bhā) one of the seven tongues of fire.

—prabhātaṁ 1. an auspicious dawn or day-break; diṣṭyā

suprabhātamadya yadayaṁ devo ṭṭaṣṭaḥ U. 6 —2. the earliest dawn.

—prayuktaśaraḥ a skilful archer.

—prayogaḥ 1. good management or application. —2. close contact.

—3. dexterity.

—prasannaḥ N. of Kubera.

—prasāda a. very gracious or propitious. (

—daḥ) N. of Śiva.

—priya a. very much liked, agreeable. (

—yaḥ) (in prosody) a foot of two short syllables. (

—yā) 1. a charming woman. —2. a beloved mistress.

—phala a. 1. very fruitful, very productive. —2. very fertile. (

—laḥ) 1. the pomegranate tree. —2. the jujube. —3. the Karṇikara

tree. —4. a kind of bean. (

—lā) 1. a pumpkin, gourd. —2. the plantain tree. —3. a variety of

brown grape. —4. colocynth.

—phenaḥ a cuttlefish bone.

—baṁdhaḥ sesamum.

—bala a. very powerful. (

—laḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. —2. N. of the father of Śakuni.

—bāṁdhavaḥ N. of Śiva.

—bāhu a. 1. handsome-armed. —2. strong-armed. (

—huḥ) N. of a demon, brother of Mārīcha, who had become a

demon by the curse of Agastya. He with Mārīcha began to disturb the

sacrifice of Viśvāmitra, but was defeated by Rāma and Lakṣmaṇa; see R.

11. 29.

—bodha a. 1. easily apprehended or understood. (

—dhaḥ) good information or advice.

—brahmaṇyaḥ 1. an epithet of Kārtikeya. —2. N. of one of the

sixteen priests employed at a sacrifice.

—bhaga a. 1. very fortunate or prosperous, happy, blessed. highly

favoured. —2. lovely, charming, beautiful, pretty; na tu grīṣmasyaivaṁ

subhagamaparāddhaṁ yuvatiṣu S. 3. 9; Ku. 4. 34, R. 11. 80; Māl. 9. —3.

pleasant, grateful, agreeable, sweet; śravaṇasubhaga M. 3. 4, S. 1. 3. —4.

beloved, liked, amiable, dear; sumukhi subhagaḥ paśyan sa tvāmupaitu

kṛtārthatāṁ Gīt. 5. 5. illustrious. (

—gaḥ) 1. borax. —2. the Aśoka tree. —3. the Champaka tree. —4.

red amaranth. (

—gaṁ) good fortune. -mānin, subhagaṁmanya a. —1. considering

oneself fortunate, amiable, pleasing; vācālaṁ māṁ na khalu

subhagaṁmanyabhāvaḥ karoti Me. 94. —2. vain, flattering oneself.

—bhagā a woman beloved by her husband, a favourite wife. —2. an

honoured mother —3. a kind of wild jasmine. —4 turmeric. —5. the

Priyangu creeper. —6 the holy basil. -sutaḥ the son of a favourite wife.

—bhaṁgā the cocoa-nut tree.

—bhadra a. very happy or fortunate. (

—draḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. (

—drā) N. of the sister of Balarāma and Kṛṣṇa, married to Arjuna q.

v. She bore to him a son named Abhimanyu.

—bhadrakaḥ 1. a car for carrying the image of a god. —2. the Bilva

tree.

—bhāṣita a. 1. spoken well or eloquent. (

—taṁ) 1. fine speech, eloquence, learning; jīrṇamaṁge

subhāṣitaṁ Bh. 3. 2. —2. a witty saying, an apophthegm, an apposite

saying; subhāṣitena gītena yuvatīnāṁ ca līlayā . mano na bhidyate yasya

sa vai mukto’thavā paśuḥ Subbish. —3. a good remark; bālādapi

subhāṣitaṁ (grāhyaṁ). —bhikṣaṁ 1. good alms, successful begging. —2.

abundance of food, an abundant supply of provisions, plenty of corn &c.

—bhīrakaḥ the Palāśa tree.

—bhūtikaḥ the Bilva tree.

—bhrū a. having beautiful eyebrows. (

—bhrūḥ f.) a lovely woman. (N. B. The vocative singular of this

word is strictly subhrūḥ; but subhru is used by writers like Bhaṭṭi,

Kālidāsa, and Bha vabhūti; hā pitaḥ kvāsi he subhru Bk. 6. 17; so V. 3. 22;

Ku. 5. 43; Māl. 3. 8.

—maṁgala a. 1. very auspicious. —2. abounding in sacrifices.

—mati a. very wise. (

—tiḥ f.) 1. a good mind or disposition, kindness, benevolence,

friendship. —2. a favour of the gods. —3. a gift, blessing. —4. a prayer,

hymn. —5. a wish or desire. —6. N. of the wife of Sagara and mother of

60,000 sons.

—madanaḥ the mango tree.

—madhuraṁ a very sweet or gentle speech, agreeable words.

—madhya, -madhyama a. slender-waisted.

—madhyā, -madhyamā a graceful woman.

—mana a. very charming, lovely, beautiful. (

—naḥ) 1. wheat. —2. the thorn-apple. (

—nā) the great-flowered jasmine.

—manas a. 1. good-minded, of a good disposition, benevolent. —2.

well-pleased, satisfied. (—m.) 1. a god, divinity. —2. a learned man. —3. a

student of the Vedas. —4. wheat. —5. the Nimba tree. (—f., n.; said to be

pl. only by some) a flower; ramaṇīya eṣa vaḥ sumanasāṁ saṁniveśaḥ

Māl. 1 (where the adjectival sense in 1 is also intended); kiṁ sevyate

sumanasāṁ manasāpi gaṁdhaḥ kastūrikājananaśaktibhṛtā mṛgeṇa R. G.;

Śi. 6. 66. (—f.) 1. the great-flowered jasmine. —2 the Mālatī creeper. —

phalaḥ the wood-apple. -phalaṁ nutmeg.

—maṁtu a. 1. advising well. —2. very faulty or blameable. (—m.) a

good adviser.

—maṁtraḥ N. of the charioteer of Daśaratha.

—mitrā 1. N. of one of the wives of Daśaratha and mother of

Lakṣmaṇa and Śatrughna

—mukha a. (khā or khī f.) 1. having a beautiful face, lovely. —2.

pleasing. —3. disposed to, eager for; Ki. 6. 42. (

—khaḥ) 1. a learned man. —2. an epithet of Garuḍa. —3. of Gaṇeśa.

—4. of Śiva. (

—khaṁ) the scratch of a finger-nail. (

—khā, —khī) 1. a handsome woman. —2. a mirror.

—mūlakaṁ a carrot.

—mekhalaḥ the Munja grass.

—medhas a. having a good understanding, wise, intelligent. (—m.)

a wise man. (—f.) heart-pea.

—meruḥ 1. the sacred mountain Meru, q. v. —2. N. of Śiva.

—yavasaṁ beautiful grass, good pasturage.

—yāmunaḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

—yuktaḥ N. of Śiva.

—yodhanaḥ an epithet of Duryodhana q. v.

—raktakaḥ 1. a kind of red chalk. —2 a kind of mango tree.

—raṁgaḥ 1. good colour. —2. the orange. —3. a hole cut in a house

(suraṁgā also in this sense). (

—gaṁ) 1. red sanders. —2. vermilion. -dhātuḥ red chalk. -yuj m. a

house-breaker.

—raṁgikā the Mūrvā plant.

—rajaḥphalaḥ the jackfruit tree.

—raṁjanaḥ the betel-nuttree.

—rata a. 1. much sported. —2. playful. —2. much enjoyed. —4.

compassionate, tender. (

—taṁ) 1. great delight or enjoyment. —2. copulation, sexual union

or intercourse, coition; suratamṛditā bālavanitā Bh. 2. 44. -tālī 1. a

female-messenger, a go-between. —2. a chaplet, garland for the head. —

prasaṁgaḥ addiction to amorous pleasures; Ku. 1. 19.

—ratiḥ f. great enjoyment or satisfaction.

—rasa a. 1. well-flavoured, juicy, savoury. —2. sweet. —3. elegant

(as a composition). (

—saḥ, —sā) the plant siṁdhuvāra. (—sā) N. of Durgā. (

—sā, -saṁ) the sacred basil. (

—saṁ) 1. gummyrrh. —2. fragrant grass.

—rājan a. governed by a good king; surājñi deśe rājanvān Ak. (—

m.) 1. a good king. —2. a divinity.

—rāṣṭraṁ N. of a country on the western side of India (Surat). —

jaṁ a kind of poison. -brahmaḥ a Brāhmaṇa of Surāṣṭra.

—rūpa a. 1. well-formed, handsome, lovely; surūpā kanyā. —2.

wise, learned. (

—paḥ) an epithet of Śiva.

—rebha a. finevoiced; Ki. 15. 16. (

—bhaṁ) tin.

—lakṣaṇa a. 1. having auspicious or beautiful marks. —2. fortunate.

(

—ṇaṁ) 1. observing, examining carefully, determining,

ascertaining. —2. a good or auspicious mark.

—labha a. 1. easy to be obtained, easy of attainment, attainable,

feasible; na sulabhā sakaleṁdumukhī ca sā V. 2. 9;

idamasulabhavastuprārthanādurnivāraṁ 2. 6. —2. ready for, adapted to,

fit, suitable; niṣṭhyūtaścaraṇopabhogasulabho lākṣārasaḥ kenacit S. 4. 4.

—3. natural to, proper for; mānuṣatāsulabho laghimā K. -kopa a. easily

provoked, irascible.

—locana a. fineeyed. (

—naḥ) a deer. (

—nā) 1. a beautiful woman. —2. N. of the wife of Indrajit.

—lohakaṁ brass.

—lohita a. very red. (

—tā) one of the seven tongues of fire.

—vaktraṁ 1. a good face or mouth. —2 correct utterance. (

—ktraḥ) N. of Śiva.

—vacanaṁ, —vacas n. eloquence.

—varcakaḥ, —varcikaḥ —kā, —varcin m. natron, alkali.

—varcalaṁ linseed.

—varcasaḥ N. of Śiva.

—varṇa see s. v.

—vasaṁtaḥ 1. an agreeable vernal season. —2. the day of full

moon in the month of Chaitra, or a festival celebrated in honour of

Kāmadeva in that month (also suvasaṁtakaḥ in this sense).

—vaha a. 1. bearing well. patient. —2. patient, enduring. —3. easy

to be borne. (

—hā) a lute.

—vāsaḥ 1. N. of Śiva. —2. a pleasant dwelling. —3. an agreeable

perfume or odour.

—vāsinī 1. a woman married or single who resides in her father’s

house. —2. a married woman whose husband is alive.

—vikrāṁta a. very valiant or bold, chivalrous. (

—taḥ) a hero. (

—taṁ) heroism.

—vid m. a learned man, shrewd person. (—f.) a shrewd or clever

woman.

—vidaḥ 1. an attendant on the women’s apartments. —2. a king.

—vidat m. a king.

—viditraṁ 1. a household, family —2. wealth.

—vidallaḥ an attendant on the women’s apartments (wrongly for

sauvidalla q. v). (

—llaṁ) the women’s apartments, harem.

—vidallā a married woman.

—vidha a. of a good kind.

—vidham ind. easily.

—vinīta a. well-trained, modest. (

—tā) a tractable cow.

—vihita a. 1. well-placed, well-deposited. —2. well-furnished,

wellsupplied, well-provided, well-arranged; suvihitaprayogatayā āryasya

na kimapi parihāsyate S. 1; kalahaṁsamakaraṁdapraveśāvasare

tatsuvihitaṁ Māl. 1. —3. well done or performed.

—vī (bī) ja a. having good seed. (

—jaḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. —2. the poppy. (

—jaṁ) good seed.

—vīrāmlaṁ sour rice-gruel.

—vīrya a. 1. having great vigour. —2. of heroic strength, heroic,

chivalrous. (

—ryaṁ) 1. great heroism. —2. abundance of heroes. —3. the fruit of

the jujube. (

—ryā) wild cotton.

—bṛkti f. 1. a pure offering. —2. a hymn of praise.

—vṛtta a. 1. well-behaved, virtuous, good; mayi tasya suvṛtta

vartate laghusaṁdeśapadā sarasvatī R. 8. 77. —2. well-rounded,

beautifully globular or round; mṛdunātisuvṛttena sumṛṣṭenātihāriṇā .

modakenāpi kiṁ tena niṣpattiryasya sevayā; or sumukho’pi suvṛttopi

sanmārgapatito’pi ca . mahatāṁ pādalagno’pi vyathayatyeva kaṁṭakaḥ

(where all the adjectives are used in a double sense). (

—ttaṁ) a good or virtuous conduct; Pt. 1. 69.

—vela a. 1. tranquil, still. —2. humble, quiet. (

—laḥ) N. of the Trikūṭa mountain.

—vrata a. strict in the observance of religious vows, strictly

religious or virtuous. (

—taḥ) a religious student. (

—tā) 1. a virtuous wife. —2. a tractable cow, one easily milked.

—śaṁsa a. wellspoken of, famous, glorious, commendable.

—śaka a. capable of being easily done.

—śalyaḥ the Khadira tree.

—śākaṁ undried ginger.

—śāradaḥ N. of Śiva.

—śāsita a. kept under control, well-controlled.

—śikṣita a. well-taught trained, well-disciplined.

—śikhaḥ fire. (

—khā) 1. a peacock’s crest. —2. a cock’s comb.

—śītaṁ yellow sandal-wood.

—śīma a. cold, frigid. (

—maḥ) coldness.

—śīla a. good-tempered, amiable. (

—lā) 1. N. of the wife of Yama. —2. N. of one of the eight favourite

wives of Kṛṣṇa.

—śrīkā the gum olibanum tree.

—śruta a. 1. well heard. —2. versed in the Vedaś. (

—taḥ) N. of the author of a system of medicine, whose work,

together with that of Charaka, is regarded as the olddest medical

authority, and held in great esteem in India even to this day.

—śliṣṭa 1. well-arranged or united. —2. well-fitted; Māl. 1.

—śleṣaḥ close union or embrace.

—satyā N. of the wife of Janaka.

—saṭṭaś agreeable to look at.

—sannata a. welldirected (as an arrow).

—saraṇa. N. of Śiva.

—saha a. 1. easy to be borne. —2. bearing or enduring well. (

—haḥ) an epithet of Śiva.

—sāra a. having good sap or essence. (

—raḥ) 1. good sap, essence, or substance. —2. competence. —3.

the red-flowering Khadira tree.

—sāravat n. crystal.

—sikatā 1. good sand. —2. gravel. —3. sugar.

—stha a. 1. well-suited, being in a good sense. —2. in health,

healthy, faring well. —3. in good or or prosperous circumstances,

prosperous. —4. happy, fortunate. (

—sthaṁ) a happy state, well-being; susthe ko vā na paḍitaḥ H. 3.

121. (susthita in the same sense).

—sthatā —sthitiḥ f. 1. good condition, wellbeing, welfare,

happiness. —2. health, convalescence.

—smita a. pleasantly smiling. (

—tā) a woman with a pleased or smiling countenance.

—svapanaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—svara a. 1. melodious, harmonious. —2. loud.

—hita a. 1. very fit or suitable, appropriate. —2. beneficial, salutary.

—3. friendly, affectionate. —4. satisfied. (

—tā) one of the seven tongues of fire.

—hṛda a. having a kind heart, cordial, friendly, loving, affectionate.

(—m.) 1. a friend; suhṛdaḥ paśya vasaṁta kiṁ sthitaṁ Ku. 4. 27;

maṁdāyaṁte na khalu suhṛdāmabhyupetārthakṛtyāḥ Me. 38. —2. an ally.

-bhedaḥ the separation of friends. -vākyaṁ the counsel of a friend.

—hṛdaḥ a friend.

—hṛdaya a. 1. good-hearted. —2. dear, affectionate, loving.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

su 1 sunoti DHĀTUP. 27, 1 (abhiṣave, saṁdhākledapīḍāmanthe VOP.).

sunota ṚV. 7, 32, 8. sunotana 5, 34, 1. sunuta 10, 14, 13. sunavat und

sunvat 27, 22. sunvant partic.; med. sunve 3. sg. 7, 29, 1. 9, 88, 1.

sunvire, sunudhvam, sunavai 8, 80, 1. suvāna partic.; suṣāva, suṣuma,

suṣuviva (VOP. 12, Anf.), suṣuvaṁs, suṣuvuṣas 10, 94, 14. suṣvāṇa med.

4, 29, 2. 10, 148, 1. passivisch 9, 6, 8. sota, sotana, suṣvati 3. pl. (wohl

praes.) 2, 16, 5. asāvīt, asoṣṭa und asāvīt P. 7, 2, 72. VOP. 11, 1. 12, Anf.

soṣyati und saviṣyati 8, 46. 12, Anf. soṣyant KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 6, 10. (abhi)

saviṣyant ŚAT. BR. 9, 5, 1, 66. infin. sotave (s. auch sotu) ṚV. 1, 28, 1.

pass. sūyate, asāvi; partic. suta. «auspressen, keltern» (den Soma): sunu

somam ṚV. 1, 28, 6. 101. 9. 137, 1. yaṁ te suṣāva (adriḥ) 7, 22, 1.

andhaḥ 4, 16, 1. 5, 30, 6. 7, 21, 1. athā sunudhvaṁ savanaṁ madāya 4,

35, 4. havaṁ yajamānasya sunvataḥ 6, 60, 15. AV. 6, 6, 1. 54, 3. sotā hi

somamadribhiḥ 8, 1, 17. asāvyaṁśuḥ 9, 62, 4. soma u ṣuvāṇaḥ sotṛbhiḥ

107, 8. grāvabhiḥ ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 2, 14. payasā 15. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 6, 23.

soṣyatyasoṣṭa (zugleich zu 4. su) CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5.

śaśvatsūyamānātsūryaḥ MAITRJUP. 6, 7. suṣāva ca

vahūnsomānsomasaṁsthāstatāna ca MBH. 1, 4695. sarve sunvantaḥ P. 3,

2, 132, Schol. surāṁ sunoti so v. a. «braut» ebend. — asunvan AIT. BR. 4,

17 fehlerhaft für asanvan: s. u. 1. san. — suta partic.: suto aśnaiḥ ṚV. 8, 2.

2. 2, 11, 11. 4, 18, 3. aṁśu 25, 3. soma 41, 3. 6, 40, 1. sutāsa indavaḥ 8,

6, 21. sute adhvare 10, 94, 14. ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 1, 5. pibasva somaṁ

sutamadya taṁ mayā MBH. 14, 277. sute somasahasre 1, 8042. sutam

Spr. (II) 2694 wohl fehlerhaft für hutam. masc. sg. und pl. «der Saft» d. h.

Soma NAIGH. 2, 7. suṣvāṇaḥ pavate sutaḥ ṚV. 9, 6, 8. parīto ṣiñcatā

sutam 107, 1. 2. 1, 135, 1. 2, 15, 1. 4, 32, 11. prātaḥ sutamapibaḥ 35, 7.

madhumantaḥ 7, 90, 1. 10, 27, 2. TS. 7, 3, 11, 3. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 7, 10, 13.

AV. 4, 29, 2. ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. -tejas 10, 6, 1, 8. = somayāga BHĀG.

P. 7, 15, 48. neutr. CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 1. sava, 1. savana, asuta,

adriṣuta, jambhasuta, suṣuta.

adhi dass.: adhi suvāno nahuṣyebhirinduḥ ṚV. 9, 91, 2. — Vgl.

adhiṣavaṇa.

abhi, -suṇoti, abhyaṣuṇot P. 8, 3, 63. 65. -soṣyati, abhyasoṣyat 117. 1)

«kelternd verarbeiten, pressen, mit Steinen ausschlagen u.s.w.» ŚAT. BR.

1, 1, 4, 7. 2, 2, 2, 1. 4, 4, 15. 3, 3, 2, 6. 4, 5, 10, 2. abhiṣuṇvanta āsate

AIT. BR. 4, 14. 3, 15. 7, 17. plākṣāṇi 30. rājānam 32. ṛjīṣam TS. 6, 1, 6, 4.

3, 2, 2, 1. havirdhāne carmannadhi grāvabhirabhiṣutya 6, 2, 11, 4. ghnanti

vā etatsomaṁ yadabhiṣuṇvanti 4, 4, 4. 5, 1. sa yadyabhiṣūyamāṇaḥ

kiṁcidāpadyate ŚAT. BR. 12, 6, 1, 21. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 5, 1. 10, 3, 12.

abhiṣutya R. 1, 13, 5, v. l. abhiṣūya (so ed. Bomb.) somam MBH. 14,

2624. some vṛthābhiṣūyamāṇe 13, 372. «mit Flüssigkeit ansetzen und

ausdrücken»: yāni caivābhiṣūyante puṣpamūlaphalaiḥ śubhaiḥ M. 5, 10.

kṣīreṇābhiṣutya (v. l. abhiplutya) SUŚR. 1, 317, 12. kiṇvapiṣṭam 2, 73, 17.

partic. abhiṣuta ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 4, 16. 4, 1, 1, 15. 6, 1, 9. 14, 3, 2, 30.

KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 1, 9. LĀṬY. 1, 9, 20. — 2) «bespritzen»: abhisoṣyantaṁ

raktai rakṣāṁsi BHAṬṬ. 9, 90. — caus. -ṣāvayati P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 3,

Schol. — Vgl. abhiṣava fg., -ṣuta, -ṣotar, -susūs.

ā «keltern» u. s. w.: ā sotā pari ṣiñcata ṚV. 9, 108, 7. yo asmai

tīvrānsomāṁ āsunoti 10, 42, 5. ŚAT. BR. 12, 7, 3, 6. 12. tasmāttava

sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 2.

āsava, āsāva. āsāvya (BHAṬṬ. 6, 64). 2. āsuti.

ud «aufregen»: utsunoṣīkṣamāṇānāṁ kandukakrīḍayā manaḥ BHĀG. P.

3, 20, 35. Der Bedeutung nach eher zu 2. su (wie auch utsava).

ni desid. vgl. nisusūs.

nis, niḥṣuṇoti P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 1, Schol.

pari, -ṣuṇoti, paryaṣuṇot, -soṣyati, paryasoṣyat Schol. zu P. 8, 3, 63.

65. 117. in Stellen wie ṚV. 9, 10, 4. 87, 7 ist die Präposition zum Verbum

finitum zu ziehen.

pra «fortkeltern»; partic. «fortgesetzt gepresst, der» Soma «einer nicht

bloss einmaligen, sondern andauernden Kelterung»: pūrṇamāse vai

devānāṁ sutasteṣāmetamardhamāsaṁ prasutaḥ TS. 2, 5, 5, 4. aharahaḥ

sutaḥ prasuto bhavati ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. 4, 1, 2, 6. saṁvatsaram

PAÑCAV. BR. 25, 5, 1. 2. 18, 5. KĀTY.ŚR. 6, 6, 27. 8, 10. 7, 1, 26. LĀṬY.

3, 3, 29. 7, 8. tasmāttava sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND.

UP. 5, 12, 1. medial: dvādaśāhaṁ prasuto bhūtvā AIT. BR. 4, 24. — Vgl.

1. prasava, prasut. — caus. «fortgesetzt keltern lassen»: prasāvayet

NIDĀNAS. 5, 11, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 284.

vi, vyaṣāvīt; visoṣyati und visaviṣyati VOP. 8, 45. 12, Anf. «zerkeltern»:

suṣvāṇāso vyadribhiḥ ṚV. 9, 101, 11.

sam «gleichzeitig» (Soma) «keltern»: yau dvau saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4,

6, 1. saṁsuta TS. 7, 5, 5, 1. KĀṬH. 34, 4. PAÑCAV. BR. 9, 4, 1. — Vgl.

saṁsava, saṁsutasoma.

abhisam «gleichzeitig keltern für» (acc.): ekaṁ vā etāvindramabhi

saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4, 6, 1.

su (sū), savati (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ) DHĀTUP. 22, 43. suvati 28, 115

(preraṇe, VOP. kṣepe). suvatāt; med. (in den BRĀHMAṆA): suvate 3. pl.

ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 3, 13. suvāntai 14. suvante TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. suvai, suvāvahai

P. 7, 3, 88, Schol.; später (auch ŚAT. BR.; s. u. pra) sauti DHĀTUP. 24,

32 (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ). sāviṣat (ved. P. 3, 1, 34, Vārtt., Schol.), asāvīt P.

7, 3, 96, Schol. VOP. 13, 1. sāvīs; suṣuve AV. pass.: sūyate, sūyai; partic.

suta ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 5. 4, 3, 14. sūta (= īrita, prerita H. an. 2, 208.

MED. t. 72. fg.) in nṛṣūta; s. auch unter pari und pra. («in Bewegung

setzen), veranlassen, zum Vorschein bringen; bescheeren, schicken» (von

Savitar’s Wirkung); «aufstellen, bestimmen, weihen für Etwas;

Ermächtigung geben zu Etwas»; med. «sich weihen» u. s. w. «lassen»:

savitā suvāti ṚV. 7, 40, 1. śreṣṭhaṁ savaṁ savitā sāviṣannaḥ 1, 164, 26.

AV. 6, 1, 3. devebhyo hi prathamamamṛtatvaṁ suvasi bhāgam ṚV. 4, 54,

2. fgg. 5, 42, 3. 82, 4. vāmamasmabhyaṁ sāvīḥ 6, 71, 6. yadadya sūra

udite suvati savitā bhagaḥ 7, 66, 4. AV. 7, 14, 3. 14, 1, 33. 19, 8, 4. yathā

sindhurnadīnāṁ sāmrājyaṁ suṣuve 14, 1, 43. suṣuvāṇa «in der Weihe

begriffen, geweiht» TS. 2, 1, 9, 1 (P. 3, 2, 106, Schol., wo suṣuvāṇam zu

lesen ist). 5, 6, 3, 4. 7, 5, 15, 2. TBR. 1, 8, 1, 1. ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 3, 23. 4, 8.

5, 2, 1. PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9, 1. 10, 1. pass.: yo vai somena sūyate (=

niṣpadyate Comm.) TBR. 2, 7, 5, 1. sūyate ha vā asya kṣatram AIT. BR.

8, 5. ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 1, 3. 3, 11. 15. 9, 3, 4, 6. agnisavena suto bhavati 9.

sarvaṁ vastatsutam «zu all diesem seid ihr ermächtigt» 13, 4, 2, 17.

sūyate vā eṣa yo ‘gniṁ cinute TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. yasmādeveme

candraṛkṣagrahasaṁvatsarādayaḥ sūyante (= abhiṣūyante āpyāyante

Comm.) so v. a. «in Thätigkeit gesetzt werden» MAITRJUP. 6, 16. mā na

sāvīrmahāstrāṇi so v. a. «schleudere» BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — prajāpateḥ sutaṁ

rayiṣṭham N. eines Sāman Ind. St.3,225,a. — Vgl. 2. sava, 2. savana, 1.

savitar, savīman.

anu «nach Andern antreiben» u. s. w.: paśūn ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 4, 19. anu

ṣva (vgl. unter nis) TAITT. ĀR. 2, 6, 4 falsch; vgl. AV. 6, 121, 4. 117, 3.

apa «wegschicken, vertreiben» ṚV. 10, 37, 4. apāmīvāṁ savitā sāviṣat

100, 8. yattatraino apa tatsuvāmi AV. 6, 119, 3. VS. 35, 11.

abhi, -ṣuvati, abhyaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. «weihen für» (acc.): oṣadhīḥ

ŚAT. BR. 5, 2, 3, 9. «begaben mit»: pāpmanaivainamabhiṣuvati KĀṬH. 13,

2. — desid. -susūṣati P. 8, 3, 64, Vārtt. 1, Schol.

ā «zutheilen, zusenden, schicken»: von Savitar ṚV. 1, 110, 3. a

smabhyamā suva sarvatātim 3, 54, 11. 56, 6. saubhagam 4, 54, 6. 5, 82,

5. dāśuṣe vāmam 6, 71, 4. vasūni 7, 45, 3. 10, 35, 7. vayaḥ 100, 3. AV. 2,

29, 2. 7, 14, 3. 4, 24, 5. ŚAT. BR. 13, 4, 2, 9. med. ṚV. 7, 38, 2. PAÑCAV.

BR. 21, 10, 15. ā suvorjam (agne) ṚV. 9, 66, 19. (indraḥ) ā

sāviṣadarśasānāya śarum «sende» so v. a. «werfe auf» 10, 99, 7.

«herbeischaffen, hercitiren»: ā te prāṇaṁ suvāmasi AV. 7, 53, 6. — Vgl. 1.

āsava, āsavitar und 1. āsuti.

ud «aufwärts gehen heissen»: ūrdhvāmeva varuṇamenimutsuvati

KĀṬH. 19, 5.

ni, partic. -ṣuta «hineingegeben, eingeworfen»: camase ‘ṣṭātayāni

niṣutāni bhavanti AIT. BR. 8, 5.

nis «fortscheuchen, fortgehen heissen»: duḥṣvapnyaṁ duritaṁ niḥ

ṣvāsmat (suva) AV. 6, 121, 1. 7, 83, 4. 19, 57, 2. 1, 81, 1. 2.

niritastatsuvantu ṚV. 7, 50, 3.

parā «wegscheuchen» u. s. w.: parā ṛṇā sāvīḥ ṚV. 2, 28, 9. duritāni

parā suva 5, 82, 5. 10, 137, 4. AV. 6, 127, 3. 7, 53, 6. 19, 39, 10. VS. 16.

5. TS. 1, 3, 14, 4.

pari, -ṣuvati, paryaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. partic. «geheissen, (heraus)

getrieben» (vom Grase): devānāṁ pariṣūtamasi varṣavṛddhamasi TS. 1,

1, 2, 1. TBR. 3, 2, 2, 4. iti («bei Gelegenheit dieses Spruches»)

darbhānpariṣauti ĀPAST. in TS. Comm. 1, 53, 3 v. u. so v. a.

«zusammenraffen.» — Vgl. pariṣūti.

pra «in Bewegung bringen, erregen, zur Thätigkeit rufen» (namentlich

von Savitar gesagt); «heissen, veranlassen; Jmd Etwas verstatten,

überlassen»: niveśayaṁ ca prasuvaṁ ca bhūma ṚV. 7, 45, 1. 77, 1. 4, 53,

3. 5, 82, 9. prāsāvīddevaḥ savitā jagatpṛthak 1, 157, 1. arthamityai 124,

1. bhadraṁ dvipade 5, 81, 2. matim 9, 21, 7. pra vo grāvāṇaḥ savitā

suvatu 10, 175, 1. AV. 1, 10, 2. saubhāgyāya 18, 2. yajñam TBR. 3, 1, 1,

9. dānam VS. 18, 33. jīvātave 67. ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 4, 8. adhvaryum 5, 2, 1.

8, 3, 20. 2, 5, 2, 30. omiti brahmā prasauti TAITT. UP. 1, 8. auṣṇyaṁ

prāsuvat MAITRJUP. 2, 6. sanim TS. 2, 1, 6, 3. annam ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 1.

vahvannaṁ prasuvīran «zur Verfügung stellen» ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 18, 8. puruṣān

ŚAT. BR. 13, 6, 2, 9. yamu dviṣmastamu te pra suvāmasi «hingeben» AV.

12, 2, 3. śvānaṁ prasauti «überlassen» (zum Todtschlagen) TBR. 3, 8, 4,

1. prasuhi (v. l. -sūhi, in paralleler Stelle -suva) KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 14, 19. so v.

a. «schleudere» Comm. zu BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — partic. prasūta «angetrieben,

gesandt, geheissen; verstattet, dem es verstattet ist» ṚV. 1, 113. 1.

arṣantvāpastvayeha prasūtāḥ 3, 30, 9. dūta 54, 19. janāḥ sūryeṇa

prasūtāḥ 7, 63, 4. pṛṣṭhe ninaddho jayati prasūtaḥ «entsandt» (Pfeil) 6,

75, 5. 11. prasūto bhakṣamakaram 10, 167, 4. AV. 6, 63, 1. 19, 51, 2.

savitṛ- AIT. BR. 1, 7. 2, 38. 7, 22. ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 2, 17. 5, 1, 1, 4. TS. 2, 5,

2, 6. 5, 3, 4, 4. — ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 15, 1. varuṇa- KAUŚ. 3. a- «keine

Erlaubniss habend» ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 7, 2. «nicht gestattet, nicht erlaubt»

ŚAT. BR. 4, 1, 4, 3. — AV. 3, 1, 4 ist (vgl. ṚV. 3, 30, 6) zu verstehen pra sū

te. — Vgl. 2. prasava, 1. prasavitar, 1. prasūti, indraprasūta, bṛhaspati-,

brahma-, vāja-, haryaśva-.

adhipra «wegschicken von» (abl.): prajāpatirindraṁ vajrādadhi

prasuvati KĀṬH. 14, 7.

abhipra «hintreiben zu»: yadenāmabhiprasuvanti nadyaḥ NIR. 9, 26. —

sūta «veranlasst, geheissen» 11, 12.

pratipra, partic. -sūta «wieder verstattet» Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 6, 6, 23.

vi, -ṣuvati, vyaṣāvīt VOP. 8, 45. 13, 1.

su adj. in dāvasu vielleicht auf 2. su zurückzuführen.

su (sū), sūte DHĀTUP. 24, 21 (prāṇigarbhavimocane). P. 6, 1, 186. VOP.

9, 39. suve 1. sg. ṚV. 10, 125, 7. suvai VOP. 9, 40. suvāte, suvate 3 pl.,

suvāna; asūta, sūta; später auch sūyate DHĀTUP. 26, 23 (prāṇiprasave).

savati und sauti s. u. pra. suṣuve, susāva, sasūva (P. 7, 4, 74) ṚV. 4, 18,

10. 10, 86, 23. AV. 10, 1, 23. asaviṣṭa und asoṣṭa (CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5)

VOP. 8, 40. 46.11, 5. savitā und sotā P. 7, 2, 44. soṣyate und soṣyati

(CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5); sūṣyantī und soṣyantī ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 22.

sūtave ṚV. 10, 184, 3. AV. 1, 11, 2. savitave 6, 17, 1. sūtvā KĀŚ. zu P. 7,

2, 44. TS. 2, 1, 5, 4. partic. sūta, suta (s. besonders; nur wegen suta und

suṣuti ist die Annahme von su mit kurzem u gerechtfertigt) und sūna (P.

8, 2, 45. VOP. 26, 88. fg.). «zeugen, gebären» ṚV. 1, 135, 8. 164, 17. 168,

9. nārī naryaṁ susāva 7, 20, 5. sūṣyantī 5, 78, 5. asūta pūrvo vṛṣabhaḥ

«wurde geboren» 3, 38, 5. yadīṁ suvāte uṣasā 5, 1, 1. 2, 2. starīryatsūta

10, 31, 10. suvānā putrān AV. 2, 36, 3. «brüten» (von Vögeln) ṚV. 1, 164,

22. pass. wohl hierher: asāvanyo asura sūyata dyauḥ 10, 132, 4. — In der

späteren Sprache meist in der Bed. «gebären»: āyuṣmantaṁ sutaṁ sūte

M. 3, 263. 9, 9. 10, 39. Spr. (II) 1748. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 51, 41. suvāte R.

1, 23, 14. asūta RAGH. 3, 13. 15, 13. KUMĀRAS. 1, 20. KATHĀS. 23, 64.

28, 66. 42, 70. PRAB. 11, 10. BHĀG. P. 3, 1, 30. 17, 18. 26, 19. 4, 1, 34.

38. 13, 15. 24, 8. 9, 20, 17. 24, 47. sūyate CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9, 12.

asūyata MBH. 1, 2599. BHĀG. P. 4, 1, 39. 51. suṣuve MBH. 1, 2539. 5908.

3, 8844. 16638. R. 2, 90, 11. 92, 21. R. GORR. 2, 99, 14. 5, 36, 57. RAGH.

5, 36. 7, 54. MĀRK. P. 104, 8. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 74. BHĀG. P. 3, 23, 48. 4, 13,

18. 6, 18, 11. 9, 11, 11. PAÑCAT. 238, 6 (suṣūve gedr.). suṣuvire

KATHĀS. 39, 18. suṣāva MBH. 1, 4765. R. GORR. 1, 39, 16. MĀRK. P.

104, 6. suṣuvus 49, 9. soṣyate KATHĀS. 21, 35. 34, 43. sūtvā BHĀG. P. 5,

2, 19. sūya MBH. 3, 10004. pass.: kausalyayāsāvi sukhena rāmaḥ prāk

BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. «erzeugen»: sūte M. 10, 32. 34. suṣuve (subj. Mann und

Weib) ŚĀK. 186. pass.: akrūraḥ suṣuve tasmāt HARIV. 1916. «erzeugen»

uneig.: prakṛtiḥ sūyate sacarācaram BHAG. 9, 10. phalaṁ sūte pādapaḥ

KATHĀS. 27, 99. asūta sadyaḥ kusumānyaśokaḥ KUMĀRAS. 3, 26.

khanibhiḥ suṣuve ratnaṁ kṣetraiḥ sasyaṁ vanairgajān (bhūḥ) RAGH. 17,

66. payaḥ sūte ‘dya medinī, ratnaṁ vaiḍūryabhūḥ RĀJA-TAR. 4, 300.

sūṣyant BHĀG. P. 3, 8, 13. dhūmāt — payaḥ sūte ghanasyodgamaḥ Spr.

(II) 3162. dharmaṁ sūyanti prajāḥ MBH. 3, 11298. — partic. sūta mit act.

Bed. = prasūta H. an. 2, 208. MED. t. 72. fg. sūtā «gekalbt habend» M. 8,

242. vanye sattve sūte «wenn ein wildes Thier Junge geworfen hat»

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 91, 3. — Vgl. savitrī.

nis vgl. niḥṣūti.

pra 1) «gebären»: prasūte sma sutam KATHĀS. 39, 19. 56, 287.

MĀRK. P. 51, 114. prāsūta R. 7, 35, 21. KATHĀS. 17, 65. kanyā prasūyate

MBH. 3, 13057. 4, 71. ṢAḌV. BR. 5, 11. SUŚR. 1, 367, 18. Spr. (II) 1403.

VARĀH. BṚH. 5, 8. 11. 16. PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 34. gauryā prativarṣaṁ

prasūyate Schol. zu P. 5, 2, 12. prasūyante mithunānyeva tāḥ MĀRK. P.

49, 10. prasavanti MBH. 1, 6077. prasavantī M. 4, 44. prasuṣuve BHĀG. P.

3, 17, 2. prāsoṣṭa RĀJA-TAR. 3, 106. 4, 39. BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. prasaviṣyasi R.

7, 9, 24. MĀRK. P. 51, 113. 77, 6. BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 29. prasoṣyantī 11, 1,

15. prasūya ŚĀK. 94. 95, v. l. KATHĀS. 14, 38. PRAB. 11, 10. prasotum

BHAṬṬ. 1, 13. «erzeugen»: prasūyate M. 10, 27. 30. fg. anena

prasaviṣyadhvam «Nachkommenschaft haben» BHAG. 3, 10. «erzeugen» in

uneig. Bed.: (buddhiḥ) prasūte hi phalaṁ śrīmadaraṇīva hutāśanam KĀM.

NĪTIS. 13, 2. Spr. (II) 7062. dhūmaṁ prasauti (agniḥ) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 125.

aṣṭamāsadhṛtaṁ garbham — dyauḥ prasūyate R. 4, 27, 3. prasūyate

saṁgatiḥ śriyam PRAB. 86, 18. (drumāḥ) śayanāni prasūyante

citrāstaraṇavanti R. 4, 44, 99. MĀRK. P. 49, 30. 59, 19. dīpaḥ kajjalaṁ

prasūyate Spr. (II) 2816. taravaḥ prāsūyanta «trugen Früchte» BHĀG. P.

4, 19, 8. yathā prasūyamānastu phalī dadyātphalaṁ bahu MBH. 14, 498.

(śāstraviṭapī) phalaṁ prasūya Spr. (II) 5426. — 2) «geboren werden,

entspringen, entstehen»: kārāvaro niṣādāttu carmakāraḥ prasūyate M. 10,

36. tiryagyonau prasūyate MBH. 3, 12500. asyāmeva prasūyadhvam 1,

2502. 2504. etasmācca jagatsarvaṁ prasūyeta janārdanāt HARIV. 11053.

prasūyatas 2. du. MBH. 13, 2565. prasūyāmas HARIV. 173 = VP. 1, 15,

128. sarveṇa khalu martavyaṁ martyaloke prasūyatā Spr. (II) 6949.

sindhoḥ prasūya kamalā RĀJA-TAR. 6, 317. pra keśāḥ suvate TBR. 2, 7,

17, 1. śabdaḥ u. s. w. vedādeva prasūyante M. 12, 98, v. l. — 3) partic.

prasūta a) mit act. Bed. f. ā «geboren habend, niedergekommen» (die

Ergänzung im acc.; hier und da statt des verbi finiti) AK. 2, 6, 1, 16. MED.

t. 124. HALĀY. 118. 285. 345. AV. 12, 1, 62. YĀJÑ. 2, 145. SUŚR. 2, 180,

8. devasadṛśānputrān HARIV. 4625. R. 7, 66, 3. UTTARAR. 38, 7 (52, 1).

WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 249. 282. fg. 289. KATHĀS. 21, 117. 29, 137

(śatapadī). MĀRK. P. 51, 101. Schol. zu P. 2, 1, 65. PAÑCAT. 218, 21.

HIT. 72, 14. a- Spr. (II) 2055. pratyagra- Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 24, 6, 8.

jananī prasūtatanayā «deren Tochter niedergekommen ist» Spr. (II) 6033.

prasūtamātrā «eben niedergekommen» KATHĀS. 28, 67. — b) «geboren,

erzeugt, entsprungen, entstanden» H. an. 3, 273. MED. mit gen. oder loc.

(auch abl.) P. 2, 3, 39. VOP. 5, 29. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 5, 2. KAUṢ. UP. 1, 2.

tasyām M. 3, 19. tataḥ MBH. 1, 35. mama kāyāt R. 2, 74, 21. tadanvaye

RAGH. 1, 12. nīcakule Spr. (II) 6475. yasya tasya 5369. MĀRK. P. 104, 8.

R. 1, 16, 26. ŚĀK. 178, v. l. Spr. (II) 1431. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 11. BṚH.

23, 14. MĀRK. P. 76, 17. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 266. 284. etaddeśa- M. 2, 20.

kālanemi- ŚĀK. CH. 144, 4. KATHĀS. 50, 139. BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 24. 9, 6, 3.

kula- R. 2, 82, 31 (Pferde) Spr. (II) 5970. BHĀG. P. 9, 3, 21. nandakula-

PAÑCAT. 45, 2. veda- PRAB. 86, 19. vindhyapāda- (nadī) MĀRK. P. 57,

25. BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 14. PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 40. kalpavṛkṣa- (madhu) MEGH. 67.

matprasūtaṁ bhayam MBH. 3, 2844. matprasūtena tejasā 11970.

bhīṣma- (duḥkha) 5, 7029. dharmaviśeṣa- KAṆ. 1, 1, 4. saraladrumāṇāṁ

srutakṣīratayā prasūto gandhaḥ KUMĀRAS. 1, 9. prasūtaṁ tarhi

saukhyaṁ naḥ Z. f. d. K. d. M. 2, 426. — c) n. als Synonym von avyakta

TATTVAS. 5. — 4) partic. prasūna a) = prasūta H. an. 3, 388. = jāta

MED. n. 87. — b) n. «Blüthe, Frucht»; s. u. prasūna. In der Bed. «Blüthe»

auch Spr. (II) 7411, v. l. UTTARAR. 98, 6 (129, 12). MĀLATĪM. 57, 13.

BHĀG. P. 3, 18, 8 («engendre» BURNOUF). PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 50. — Vgl. 3.

prasava, prasavana, 2. prasavitar, 2. prasavin, prasūta, 2. prasūti,

prasūna, devaprasūta (hierher oder zu 2. su).

anupra, partic. -sūta «darauf entstanden»:

sṛṣṭistathaiveyamanuprasūtā MBH. 13, 7361.

abhipra, partic. -sūta «erzeugt, geboren»: mātuḥ pituḥ

karmaṇābhiprasūtaḥ saṁvardhate vidhivadbhojanena MBH. 5, 964.

saṁpra 1) «erzeugen»: -sūte MBH. 13, 2582. -sūyate M. 10, 33. — —

sūyate MBH. 13, 5850 fehlerhaft für -ṇūyate, wie die ed. Bomb. liest. — 2)

«geboren werden»: tadāhaṁ saṁprasūyāmi gṛheṣu śubhakarmaṇām MBH.

3, 12978. — 3) partic. -sūta «erzeugt, geboren»: bahvīḥ prajāḥ puruṣāt

MUṆḌ. UP. 2, 1, 5. śarmiṣṭhayā MBH. 5, 5044. brahmāsyatas, bāhubhyām

12, 11814. 13, 4426. guṇavipuleṣu kuleṣu R. 4, 41, 79. māyā

guṇasaṁprasūtā BHĀG. P. 11, 10, 13. — Vgl. saṁprasūti.

vi «gebären»: sumatyapi garbhaṁ tumbaṁ vyasūyata R. GORR. 1, 40,

17.

sam dass.: śāradvatasya (so die neuere Ausg.) dāyādamahalyā

samasūyata HARIV. 1784. «erzeugen» in uneig. Bed.: dattaṁ śreyāṁsi

saṁsūte (Conj.) Spr.(II) 4252.

su 5 savati v. l. für sru (gatau) DHĀTUP. 22, 42. VOP. 8, 95. asāvīt,

suṣavitha, suṣuviva, savitā und sotā 96.

su adv. gaṇa cādi zu P. 1, 4, 57. VOP. 1, 8. über die euphonischen

Veränderungen des Wortes (ṣu, ṣū), über die Dehnung eines

vorangehenden Vocals und über den Wandel eines nachfolgenden na in ṇa

handeln VS. PRĀT. 4, 183. TS. PRĀT. 3, 7. 14. P. 6, 3, 134. 8, 3, 107. 4,

27. «wohl, gut»; überhaupt verstärkend oder versichernd: «gewiss,

leichtlich, völlig» u. s. w. wie «wohl» in älteren deutschen Liedern. Die

indischen Lexicographen geben dem Worte folgende Bedeutungen: pūjana

(pūjā) AK. 3, 5, 5. MED. avj. 79. nirbhara AK. 3, 5, 2. H. 1535, Schol.

MED. bhṛśa, anumati, kṛcchra, samṛddhi MED. anāyāsa BHAR. zu AK.

nach ŚKDR. 1) selbständig; nie am Versanfang; im AV. selten und meist

in Verbindung mit u. u ṣu ṚV. 1, 26, 5. 4, 6, 2. 20, 4. vidmo ṣvasya

mātaram AV. 1, 2, 1. 6, 84, 3. mo ṣu ṚV. 2, 18, 3. 3, 55, 2. AV. 5, 11, 7.

mā su VS. 11, 68. uta su ṚV. 8, 2, 42. itsu 4, 22, 10. ā su 8, 34, 12. pra su

1, 136, 1. 8, 6, 32. vi ṣū 2, 28, 7. 8, 32, 19. ni ṣu 5, 13. adhi ṣū 8, 24, 7.

paryū ṣū 9, 110, 1. asmāntsu 1, 9, 6. 17, 7. asmabhyaṁ su 3, 30, 21.

asmākaṁ su 31, 14. asmābhiḥ su 8, 70, 8. tvaṁ su VS. 4, 14. asme su 4,

32, 14. sa su 12, 1. imaṁ su 2, 35, 2. idaṁ su AV. 14, 2, 8. yaṁ svaśnaṁ

jaghāna ṚV. 2, 14, 5. sakṛtsu 16, 8. 8, 1, 14. namaḥ su te VS. 12, 63.

vasvī ṣu te ṚV. 7, 20, 10. jīvātave su 10, 59, 5. ni māmṛje pura indraḥ su

sarvāḥ ṚV. 7, 26, 3. su kam am Ende 1, 191, 6. 3, 53, 2.

nāsmāllokātsvetavyamiva «nicht wohl» TS. 6, 1, 1, 1. bodhā su ṚV. 7, 22,

3. juṣasva sū 3, 24, 2. mandasvā su 8, 6, 39. pibā su 17, 4. AV. 6, 32, 1.

jarāṁ su gaccha 19, 24, 5. na vai su viduriva manuṣyā nakṣatram KĀṬH.

8, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 296. su veda KENOP. 9. sūrmī jvalantīṁ

svāśliṣyet M. 11, 103. su virājate sma MBH. 4, 2089. svanuyāsyanti 8,

1321. su śakyante R. 2, 33, 4. su samīkṣyatām Spr. (II) 1402. su

saṁdadhīta 1961, v. l. su śobhante 4157. svanuṣṭhīyatām 6275.

svaśikṣayat RĀJA-TAR. 4, 51. — MBH. 3, 14392 und 7, 8603 hat die ed.

Bomb. tu und hi st. su. Vor einem absol. MBH. 7, 5783 (so ‘bhidrutya st.

svabhidrutya ed. Bomb.). vicintya MṚCCH. 103, 16. baddhvā 176, 1.

cintya und vicārya Spr. (II) 7100. snātvā WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 291. — 2) am

Anfange eines comp. vor Adjectiven und Substantiven (über solche

compp. handelt P. 1, 4, 94. 2, 1, 6. 5, 4, 69. 6, 2, 117. fgg, 145. 172. fgg.

195. 7, 1, 68. 8, 1, 67. fg. Vārtt. 4 zu 1, 4, 60. Vārtt. 1 der SAUNĀGA zu 2,

2, 18. VOP. 6, 88). svalaṁkṛta «schön geschmückt» MBH. 3, 2114.

surakṣita «wohl gehütet» 2144. suprīta «hocherfreut» R. 1, 1, 76.

sūcchritadhvaja 2, 43, 10. susaṁrabdhatara 6, 31, 44. susādhya «gut zu

handhaben» PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 33. sumanohara «überaus reizend» MBH. 1,

5976. sudāruṇa R. 1, 8, 12. susūkṣma VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 44. sunikhilam

«ganz vollständig» HARIV. 7034. suprākṛta «ganz gemein» R. GORR. 2,

11, 24. susita «schön weiss» PAÑCAR. 3, 11, 8. susugandha «sehr

wohlriechend» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 32. suduṣkara «sehr schwer zu

vollbringen» MBH. 1, 6118. sunistriṁśa «ein schönes Schwert» MBH. 6,

5639. subhakṣya «eine prächtige Speise» Spr. (II) 7113. susahāya «einen

guten Gefährten habend» M. 7, 31. sulalāṭa «eine schöne Stirn habend» R.

1, 1, 12. sukara (s. d.) «leicht auszuführen», sulabha (s. d.) «leicht zu

erlangen», susaṁtoṣa (s. d.) «leicht zu befriedigen.» — su verhält sich

wohl zum demonstrativen sa wie ku zum interrogativen ka. Vgl. sutarām.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

su 1. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par., and sū sū, ii. 4, suya (properly pass. refl. of

su), and ii. 2, Ātm.

1. To beget, Man. 10, 32.

2. To bear, to bring forth, Man. 10, 39; Pañc. pr. d. 5. ii. 5, sunu, Par.

Ātm. (the act of expressing the Soma juice being compared to the act of

generating, cf. Rigv. i. 28), To express the Soma juice, Chr. 294, 3 =

Rigv. i, 92, 3. Ptcple. of the pf. pass.

I. suta,

1. m. A son, Pañc. i. d. 185.

2. f. tā, A daughter, Chr. 3, 9.

3. m. pl. Cildren, Man. 2, 28. Comp. giri-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Pañc. i. d. 175.

jahnu-, f. tā, the Gaṅgā, MBh. 1, 3913. jīva-, adj. one who has living

children, Bhāg. P. 6, 19, 25. dāra-, m. wife and son, Yājñ. 2, 175. dāsī-,

m. a base man, Rājat. 5, 179. dharma-, m. (the son of the god Dharma),

epithet of Yudhiṣṭhira, Bhāg. P. 1, 7, 49. bhū- and mahī-, m. the planet

Mars. bhṛgu-, m. 1. Śukra or Venus. 2. Paraśurāma. rādhā-, m. Karṇa.

śaila-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Vikr. d. 128.

II. sūla,

1. Engendered.

2. Born. f. tā,

1. A daughter, Pañc. 181, 5.

2. A woman lying in; see s.v. Comp. sūra-, m. Aruṇa, the dawn.

III. sūna,

1. Born, produced.

2. Blown, budded (as a flower). m. A son, Pañc. 198, 2. f. nā, A

daughter. n.

1. Bringing forth, parturition.

2. A flower.

— With the prep. abhi abhi, ṣu,

1. To express the Soma juice, Rām. 1, 13, 5 (cf. Sclegel’s translation).

2. To extract juice, Man. 5, 10.

3. To sprinkle, Bhaṭṭ. 9, 90.

— With ud ud, ii. 5, To agitate, Bhāg. P. 3, 20, 35 (cf. 2. sū).

— With pra pra,

1. To beget, Man. 10, 30.

2. To bring forth, Man. 4, 44.

3. Pass. To be brought forth, Man, 10, 36; with the termination of the

Par. (i. 4, Par.), MBh. 12, 5687. prasūta,

1. Engendered, Hit. pr. d. 23, M.M.

2. Born, Pañc. 45, 2.

3. Produced, Chr. 294, 8 = Rigv. i. 92, 8.

4. Engendering, Man. 3, 19.

5. Having brought forth, delivered, Hit. 72, 14; Utt. Rāmac. 52, 1 (she

has brought forth). Comp. a-, adj. one who has not brought forth, Böhtl.

Ind. Spr. 809. kula-, adj. descended from a respectable family, Pañc. pr.

d. 6. prasūna, Born, produced. n.

1. A bud, a blossom, Utt. Rāmac. 129, 12; flower, Mālat. 57, 13.

2. Fruit. Comp. visa-, n. a lotus.

— With saṁpra sam-pra,

1. To beget, Man. 10, 33.

2. Pass. To be brought forth, MBh. 3, 12978 (with the termination of

the Par.).

— Cf. [greek] Goth. sunus; A.S. sunu (cf. sūnu).

su 2. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par. † To possess power or supremacy (cf. the

last).

su 3. su, i. 1, Par. Ātm. † To go.

su 4. su (for original vasu, cf. [greek] = Zend. vaṅhvām = Sskr.

*vasvām),

I. adv. ved. Beautifully, Chr. 296, 1 = Rigv. i. 112, 1.

II. Very seldom combined and compounded with a verbum finitum; e. g.

Pañc. i. d. 205, but cf. Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 647; but very often with nouns,

1. Good, well, Rām. 3, 53, 6; Ṛt. 6, 2; Lass. 15, 5.

2. Beautiful, beautifully, Rām. 3, 52, 35.

3. Much, very, Chr. 4, 12.

4. Easily, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 2. Comparat. sutarām,

1. Better.

2. With na, Very badly, Pañc. 199, 24; with mā, In no way, Megh. 108.

3. More, Śiś. 9, 67; Pañc. 163, 3.

4. Exceedingly, Śiś. 9, 55.

5. Consequently, of course.

— Cf. [greek]

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

su sunoti sunute v pp. suta1 (q.v.) press out, extract, esp. the Soma. —

adhi = S.

abhi press out, prepare or win by extracting.

ā & vi = S.

sam & abhisam press out together. — Cf. prasuta.

su [2] (sū) adv. well, indeed (strengthening and assevering); often °— in

adj., adv., & subst. = Gr. ‘eu (opp. dus).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

su 1. SU, V.P. suno, sunu, (sts. Ā.) press out, extract (Soma; V., rare in

E.): pr. pt. sunvāna, suvāna; pp. suta, pressed, extracted.

abhi (-ṣuṇoti), press out; ps. -ṣūyate, be extracted: pp.

abhiṣuta (V.). ā, press out, extract (V.); boil, prepare (ghee).

pra, pp. prāsuta (V.), pressed continuously; having continuously

pressed.

su 2. SU (= 1. sū), in sauti, suhi, and pp. suta, urged, instigated (ŚB.).

su 3. SU (= 2. sū), in pra-savati (rare), pra-sauti (rare), pp. suta, son,

and suṣuti.

su su (in V. also sū), ad. [perh. for vasu = Gk.[greek]: cp. uṣu, ū shu, and

u loka] good, well, indeed, right, very, thoroughly (never used

independently at the beginning of a verse; rarely as an independent ad. in

C.; very common °- with a. or N., in C. also with gd.).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

su gatau . aiśvarye . prasave . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-para°-saka

°-aniṭ .) savati . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

su ña gatau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-ubha°saka°-aniṭ .) ña, susāva

suṣuve . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

su vya, nirbharam . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 4 . 2 .. (yathā, mahābhārate . 1 . 158 .

16 .

viditvā vyavasiṣyāmi yadyapi syāt suduṣkaram ..) pūjā . ityamaraḥ . 3 .

4 . 5 .. (śobhanam . yathā, manuḥ . 7 . 31 .

praṇetuṁ śakyate daṇḍaḥ susahāyena dhīmatā ..) anumatiḥ .

kṛcchram . samṛddhiḥ . iti medinī .. anāyāsaḥ . iti

bharataikārthasaṁgrahaḥ .. upasargaviśeṣaḥ . yathā .

supūjānāyāsātiśayeṣu . iti mugdhabodhaṭīkāyāṁ durgādāsaḥ .. saptamyā

vahuvacanavibhaktiḥ . iti vyākaraṇam ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

su avya° su—ḍu . 1 pūjāyām 2 atiśaye amaraḥ . 3 kṛcche 4 anumatau 5

mamṛddhau medi° 6 anāyāse ca anekārthako° . pūjāyāmasya

nopasargatvam tena sustutamityādau na ṣatvam . atiśayādau tu suṣṭuta

ityādi . gaṇaratne’rthaviśeṣānuktakrameṇodāhṛtam yathā su

praśaṁsānumatipūjābhṛśakṛcchraśubheṣu . surūpaḥ sukṛtaṁ susādhuḥ

sutaptaḥ suduḥ karaṁ sugandhaḥ .

सेराह — serāha Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899serāha m. a horse of milk-white colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

serāha m. «ein milchweisses Pferd, Schimmel» H. 1238.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

serāha serāha, m. A horse of a milk-white colour.

सेराहः — serāhaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

serāhaḥ A horse of a milk-white colour.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

serāhaḥ puṁ, pīyūṣavarṇāśvaḥ . sa tu dugdhavacchretavarṇaḥ iti

hemacandraḥ ..

स्वच्छ — svaccha Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899svaccha «sv-accha» mf («ā») n. very transparent or clear, pellucid,

crystalline &c.

mf («ā») n. bright-coloured

mf («ā») n. clear, distinct (as speech)

mf («ā») n. pure (as the mind or heart)

mf («ā») n. healthy, sound, convalescent (in this sense perhaps Prākṛit

for «svastha»)

svaccha «sv-accha» m. rock-crystal

svaccha «sv-accha» m. the jujube tree

svaccha «sv-accha» mf («ā») n. («ā») f. white Dūrvā grass

svaccha «sv-accha» n. a pearl

svaccha «sv-accha» n. an alloy or amalgam of silver and gold

svaccha «sv-accha» n. pure chalk &c. (= «vimaloparasa»)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

svaccha a. [suṣṭhu acchaḥ prā-]

(1) Very clear or transparent, pure, bright, pellucid; svacchasphaṭika,

svacchamuktāphalaṁ &c.

(2) White.

(3) Beautiful.

(4) Healthy. —cchaḥ A crystal. —cchā White Dūrvā grass. —cchaṁ

(1) A pearl.

(2) Pure chalk.

— Comp.

—patraṁ talc.

—vālukaṁ pure chalk.

—maṇiḥ a crystal.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

svaccha 1) adj. (f. ā) a) «schön klar» (accha), — «durchsichtig, — hell»:

Wasser (Wasserbehälter) und andere Flüssigkeiten R. 2, 91, 71. Spr. (II)

4728. 4983. 6717. 6789. 7272. KATHĀS. 18, 101. 21, 8. 42, 41. RĀJA-

TAR. 1, 203. 213. 4, 212. BHĀG. P. 4, 24, 20. PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 47. Thränen

Spr. (II) 7001. sphaṭika KATHĀS. 50, 191. BHĀG. P. 3, 33, 17. Rubine

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 82, 3. Farbe 68, 83. pratisūryaka 37, 1. Mondstrahlen R.

GORR. 1, 36, 17. kānti KATHĀS. 34, 14. Spiegel und Bösewicht (durch

Bestreuung von Asche) Spr. (II) 7245. -sindūrabhās ṚT. 1, 24. tanu

BHĀG. P. 8, 6, 3. bhagavataḥ padam 3, 26, 21. puṣpa «hellfarbig»

KATHĀS. 24, 97. PAÑCAR. 1, 6, 22. ātapratra RĀJA-TAR. 4, 719.

übertragen auf Geistiges: vacas «klar, deutlich» KATHĀS. 17, 163. cetas

«rein, lauter» MBH. 9, 2345. hṛdaya Spr. (II) 2819. antarātman 367. vṛtti

1543. vṛtta KĀM. NĪTIS. 5, 79. svabhāva PAÑCAR. 1, 14, 91. guṇāḥ

RĀJA-TAR. 4, 40. vidyā NĪLAK. 253. — b) «gesund, geheilt» ŚABDAR. im

ŚKDR. aus svastha entstanden. — 2) m. a) «Bergkrystall» RĀJAN. 13, 204.

— b) «Judendorn» (badara) RĀJAN. 11, 140. — 3) f. ā «weisses» Dūrvā —

«Gras» RĀJAN. 8, 112. — 4) n. a) «Perle» RĀJAN. 13, 155. — b) «mit Silber

versetztes Gold» RĀJAN. 13, 139.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

svaccha a. very clear, transparent, bright, pure; abstr. -tā f., -tva n.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

svaccha su+accha, a. beautifully clear, transparent, or bright; clear,

distinct (speech); pure (heart, conduct, etc.): -ka, a. beautifully clear or

bright;

-tā, f., -tva, n. perfect clearness or transpareness; purity of heart.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

svaccha tri° suṣṭhu acchaḥ prā° . 1 atinirmale kāluṣyarahite 2 muktāyāṁ

3 sphaṭike ca pu° rājani° . 4 śvetadūrvāyām strī rājani° . 5 vimaloparame

na° 6 rogaviyute tri° śabdara° . 7 śukle ca .

हंस — haṁsa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haṁsa m. (ifc. f. «ā»; accord. to 1. «han», «to go?») a goose, gander,

swan, flamingo (or other aquatic bird, considered as a bird of passage;

sometimes a mere poetical or mythical bird, said in to be able to

separate Soma from water, when these two fluids are mixed, and in later

literature, milk from water when these two are mixed; also forming in

the vehicle of the Aśvins, and in later literature that of Brahmā; ifc. also

= «best or chief among») &c. &c.

m. the soul or spirit (typified by the pure white colour of a goose or

swan, and migratory like a goose; sometimes «the Universal Soul or

Supreme Spirit», identified with Virāj, Nārāyaṇa, Viṣṇu, śiva, Kāma, and

the Sun; du. «the universal and the individual Spirit»; accord. to

resolvable into «ahaṁ sa», «I am that») &c.

m. one of the vital airs

m. a kind of ascetic

m. a man of supernatural qualities born under a partic. constellation

m. an unambitious monarch

m. a horse

m. an excellent draught-ox (accord. to some, «a buffalo»)

m. a mountain

m. a temple of a partic. form

m. a kind of Mantra or mystical text

m. silver

m. envy, malice

m. N. of two metres

haṁsa m. (in music) a kind of measure

m. a mystical N. of the letter «h»

m. a spiritual preceptor

m. N. of a Deva-gandharva

m. of a Dānava

m. of a son of Brahmā

m. of a son of Vasu-deva

m. of a son of A-riṣṭā

m. of a son of Brahma-datta and general of Jarā-saṁdha

m. of various authors &c.

m. of one of the Moon’s horses

m. of a mountain

haṁsa pl. N. of the Brāhmans in Plaksha-dvīpa

haṁsa Nom. P. «-sati», to act or behave like a swan

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

haṁsa UṆĀDIS. 3, 62. Kār. aus SIDDH.K. zu P.6,3,109. 1) m. a) «Gans»

(ein Zugvogel), «Gänserich»; auch wohl «Schwan» und «andere verwandte

Wasservögel» AK. 2, 5, 23. 25. 3, 4, 30, 228. TRIK. 2, 5, 31. 3, 3, 454. H.

1325. an. 2, 594. fg. MED. s. 11. HALĀY. 2, 96. 98. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL.

ṚV. 1, 65, 5. in Reihen fliegend 163, 10. 3, 8, 9. 2, 34, 5. 4, 40, 5. 5, 78,

1. 8, 35, 8. 9, 97, 8. 10, 124, 9. ihr Schnattern 3, 53, 10. 9, 32, 3. 10,67,

3. AV. 8, 7, 24. 11, 2, 24. 12, 1, 51. TS. 5, 5, 21, 1. als Gespann der Aśvin

ṚV. 4, 45, 4. als ein in der Nacht waches Thier (vgl. den Kranich) AV. 6,

12, 1. von der Sonne (vgl. b) gesagt 10, 8, 17. fg. (vgl. TAITT. ĀR. 2, 15,

8). 11, 4, 21. 13, 3, 14. hiraṇmaya TBR. 3, 10, 9, 11. somamadbhyo

vyapibacchandasā haṁsaḥ (wie später Milch und Wasser) śuciṣat VS. 19,

74. -mukha KĀTY. ŚR. 1, 3, 37. CHĀND. UP. 4, 7, 1. 2 (= «Sonne»

ŚAṁK.). ŚIKṢĀ in Ind. St. 4, 108. -vāraṇagāminī M. 3, 10. 5, 12. 11, 135.

12, 62. MBH. 3, 2090. fgg. 2416. matta- R. 2, 112, 15. 5, 55, 2. SUŚR. 1,

205, 12. 19. 334, 4. MṚCCH. 120, 17. MEGH. 24. 58. 74. ṚT. 1, 5. RAGH.

17, 25. VIKR. 95. dhṛtiṁ na labhate haṁso ‘pi kūpodake Spr. (II) 1613.

1787. haṁsā yathā mānasaṁ smaranti 3716. na śobhate sabhāmadhye

haṁsamadhye bako yathā 4800. 5078. yena śuklīkṛtā haṁsāḥ 5537. 7357.

fgg. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 12, 4. 8. 33, 10. 44, 24. 48, 9. 68, 115. 81, 3.

KATHĀS. 69, 131. LA. (III) 5, 3. 49, 9. BHĀG. P. 1, 5, 10. 3, 10, 23. 15,

38. 5, 13, 17. 11, 4, 17. -jātīya PAÑCAT. 76,7. 8. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 93,a,1.

123,a,50. 281,b,37. haṁso hi kṣīramādatte tanmiśrā varjayatyapaḥ ŚĀK.

155. KAP. 4, 23. Spr. (II) 544. Brahman’s Gespann 4771. BHĀG. P. 4, 1,

24. haṁso bhūtvātha sauvarṇastvajo nityaḥ prajāpatiḥ. sa vai paryeti

lokāṁstrīn MBH. 12, 10993. fgg. haṁsā dhārtarāṣṭrā devalokanivāsinaḥ

HARIV. 8585. fgg Śākyamuni als «Gans» VYĀḌI beim Schol. zu H. 233. am

Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā MBH. 7, 510. 4086. 9, 442. RAGH. 16, 56. — b)

Bez. «der Sonne» (vgl. unter «a») AK. 1, 1, 2, 32. 3, 4, 30, 228. TRIK. 3, 3,

454. H. 96. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 37. VIŚVA a. a. O. MBH. 3, 191. — c)

«(die wie die Gans reine und wandernde) Seele», auch «die Weltseele»

(du. «die individuelle und die Weltseele») ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 1, 6. 3, 18. 6, 15.

hiraṇyavarṇaḥ śakuno hṛdyāditye pratiṣṭhitaḥ. madgurhaṁsastejovṛṣaḥ

MAITRJUP. 6, 34. 35 (= CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9, 10). Ind. St. 2, 63. 9, 14.

BHĀG. P. 4, 24, 7. 28, 61. 64. 29, 80. 5, 5, 10. 7, 13. 6, 16, 47 (parama-).

11,17,10. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 149,b,22. 150,a,5. mit Nārāyaṇa, Viṣṇu, Kṛṣṇa

identificirt TRIK. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. MBH. 1, 2431. 12, 12864. 13,

6970. HARIV. 11389. 14114. PAÑCAR. 4, 3, 26. 8, 88. = virāj LIÑGA-P.

bei MUIR, ST. 4, 326. = Śiva ANEKĀRTHAK. im ŚKDR. = Kāma WILSON

ohne Angabe einer Aut. — d) «ein best. Wind im Körper» H. an. MED.

VIŚVA a. a. O. Ind. St. 1, 385. — e) Bez. «einer Art von Asketen» H. an.

MED. MBH. 13,6478. HARIV. 15469. 15472. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 269,a,12. fgg.

42. fgg. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 362. BHĀG. P.3,12,43.7,9,18. 11,17,9. 29,3.

— f) Bez. «eines unter bestimmten Constellationen geborenen

Wundermenschen» (mahāpuruṣa) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 69, 2. 7. 24. 26. 35. —

g) pl. Bez. «der Brahmanen in» Plakṣadvīpa BHĀG. P. 5, 20, 4. — h) «ein

genügsamer Fürst» TRIK. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. — i) «Pferd» NAIGH.

1, 14 (wohl weil die «Gans» das «Reitthier» der Aśvin ist). H. ś. 177. «ein

best. Pferd» H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. des Mondgottes VYĀḌI beim

Schol. zu H. 104. — k) Bez. «eines vorzüglichen Zugochsen» VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 61, 17. «Büffel» schlechte v. l. H. 1283; vgl. haṁsakālītanaya. — l) Bez.

«einer best. Tempelform» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 56, 18. haṁso haṁsākāraḥ 26.

— m) «Neid, Missgunst» H. an. MED. — n) «ein best. Zauberspruch» diess.

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 236,b,16. — o) = śreṣṭha und agrataḥ sthitaḥ H. an. — p)

Bez. zweier Metra: a) metrical sequenceCOLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2, 158 (V,

1). — b) metrical sequenceebend. 162 (X, 18). — q) mystische Bez. «des

Buchstabens» ha Verz. d. Oxf. H. 97,a, No. 151. — r) N. pr. a) eines

Devagandharva HARIV. 14159. eines Dānava 9141. eines Sohnes des

Brahman BHĀG. P. 4, 8, 1. des Vasudeva 9, 24, 50. der Ariṣṭā MBH. 1,

2718. KĀD. in ZdmG.7, 584. des Citragupta Verz. d. Oxf. H. 341,b, No.

799. des Brahmadatta und Heerführers des Jarāsaṁdha MBH. 2, 576.

601. fgg. HARIV. 15404. des Arthapati HALL in der Einl. zu VĀSAVAD. 12.

— PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 59,20. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 259,a, No. 713.

HALL 165. — b) eines Berges VP. 169. BHĀG. P. 5, 16, 27. «Berg» überh.

ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 2) f. ī a) «eine weibliche Gans» VOP. 4, 15. H. 1327.

MṚCCH. 120, 17. KATHĀS. 43, 155. 69, 131. fg. CHANDOM. 114. — b)

Bez. verschiedener Metra: a) metrical sequenceŚRUT. 18. COLEBR. Misc.

Ess. 2, 159 (V, 12; hier fehlerhaft). — b) metrical sequence Journ. of the

Am. Or. S. 6, 514. — g) metrical sequenceCOLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2, 163

(XVII, 3). CHANDOM. 114. — c) N. pr. einer Tochter Bhagīratha’s und

Gattin Kautsa’s MBH. 13, 6270. einer Sängerin RĀJA-TAR. 5, 359. 386. —

Vgl. eka-, para-, parama-, bhakti-, mahā-, rakta-, rāja-.

haṁsa 1) m. a) «Gans» (ein Zugvogel), «Gänserich» ; auch wohl «Schwan»

und «andere verwandte Wasservögel.» am Ende eines adj. Comp. f. ā. b)

*am Ende eines Comp. «der Beste unter.» c) Bez. «der Sonne.» d) «die

(wie die Gans weiss und wandernde) Seele», auch «die Weltseele.» Du.

«die individuelle und die Weltseele.» Wird mit Nārāyaṇa, Viṣṇu, Kṛṣṇa,

Virāg, *Śiva und *Kāma identificirt. e) «ein best. Wind im Körper.» f) Bez.

«einer Art von Asketen» Spr.7681. g) Bez. «eines unter bestimmten

Constellationen geborenen Wundermenschen.» h) Pl. Bez. «der

Brahmanen» in Plakṣadvīpa. i) «*ein genügsamer Fürst.» k) «*Pferd.» l)

Bez. «eines vorzüglichen Zugochsen.» Angeblich auch «Büffel.» m)

«*Berg.» n) «eine best. Tempelform.» o) «ein best. Zauberspruch.» p)

«*Neid, Missgunst.» q) Bez. «zweier Metra.» r) «ein best. Tact» S.S.S.113.

s) mystische Bez. «des Lautes» ha. t) N.pr. a) eines Devagandharva. b)

eines Dānava. g) eines Sohnes des Brahman. d) eines Sohnes des

Vasudeva. e) verschiedener anderer Person. z) eines Rosses des

Mondgottes VP.2,299. h) eines Berges. 2) f. haṁsī a) «eine weibliche

Gans» 250,21. ŚIŚ.8,7. b) Bez. «verschiedener Metra.» c) N.pr.

verschiedener Frauen.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

haṁsa 1 I An incarnation of Mahā Viṣṇu in Kṛtayuga. He instructed great

sages like Sanaka on yoga in the presence of Brahmā. He is also called

yajña. (Bhāgavata 11th Skandha). Hamsa, who was a prajāpati as well

advised the Sādhyadevas about the means to attain salvation and the

advice is known as Haṁsagītā. (Śānti Parva, Chapter 288).

haṁsa 2 II A son born to Kaśyapa of his wife, Ariṣṭā. He was a

Gandharva and it is believed that Dhṛtarāṣṭra was an aṁśāvatāra of this

Gandharva. (M.B. Ādi Parva, Chapter 6, See also under Aṁśāvatāṛa).

haṁsa 3 III

haṁsa(ṁ) Swan. For story about the origin of haṁsa on earth see under

Sṛṣṭi, Para 12.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

haṁsa haṁsa,

I. m.

1. A goose, a gander, a swan, a phoenicopteros, Vikr. d. 95; Man. 3,

10; it is the vehicle of Brahman.

2. A sort of horse.

3. The sun.

4. A devotee.

5. A liberal prince.

6. One of the vital breaths.

7. Brahman, Viṣṇu, Śiva, Kāma, the god of love.

8. (In composition), Best, excellent.

II. f. sī.

1. A goose.

2. A proper name, Rājat. 5, 359.

— Comp. para-, and parama-, m. an ascetic who has subdued all his

senses, MBh. 13, 6478 (parama). rājahaṁsa, i. e. rājan-, m. 1. an

excellent king. 2. m., f. sī, a white goose with red legs and bill, Vikr. d.

19; a flamingo, Hit. 79, 7. 3. a drake.

— Cf. O. H. G. gans; A. S. gós, gandra; Lat. anser; [greek]

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

haṁsa f. ī goose, also applied to the swan, flamingo and like water-fowl;

fig. the sun, the soul, du. the individual and universal soul.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

haṁsa haṁsa, m. gander, goose (a bird of passage, vehicle of

Brahman), perh. also swan or flamingo (possessing the power of

separating Soma form water in V., and milk from water in C.); (white and

migratary like the goose), soul, sts. universal soul (U., C.): identified with

Nārāyaṇa, Viṣṇu, Kṛṣṇa, and Virāj; kind of ascetic; N.: -ka, m. (little or

poor) goose; m. or n. (?) anklet;

-gāminī, a. f. having the gait of a haṁsa, walking gracefully;

-cihna-dukūla-vat, a. clad in a garment interwoven with figures of

geese;

-tā, f. condition of a goose;

-tūla, n. swansdown;

-tva, n. condition of a goose;

-dvāra, n. Swan’s gate, N. of a pass on the way lake Mānusa;

-dvīpa, m. N. of an island;

-nāda, m. N. of a fairy;

-pada, n. goose-foot (as a mark);

-padikā, f. N. of a the first wife of Duṣyanta: -mālā, f. flight of geese

or swans;

-yāna, n. goose as a vehicle, car drawn by geese; a. (ī) riding on a

goose;

-ratha, m. N.;

-4āja, m. king of geese, large gander; m. N.;

-vat, a. containing the word haṁsa (Br.): -ī, f. N., esp. of the first wife

of Duṣyanta;

-vāhana, m. (riding on a goose), ep. of Brahman;

-vega, m. N..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

haṁsa puṁstrī° hasa—ac—paṣo° varṇāgamaḥ . svanāmakhyāte 1

pakṣibhede amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīṣ 2 nirlobhanṛpe 3 viṣṇau 4 sūrye 5

paramātmani haṁsaṁ tanau sānnahitaṁ caratama naiṣa° . 6 matsare 7

gatibhede 8 mantrabhede 9 dehasthavāyubhede 10 aśvamede medi° 11

gurau 12 parvate śabdara° . 13 śibe amaraḥ 14 agrasthite 15 śreṣṭhe

hemaca° . 16 viśuddhe amaraḥ . 17 ajapāmantrarūpe varṇe ca

haṁkāreṇa vāharyāti sakāreṇa viśet punaḥ . haseti satataṁ mantraṁ jīvo

japati sarvadā iti tantram . ajapāśabde 89 pṛ° dṛśyam . haṁsakhagasya

bhedāḥ tanmāṁsaguṇāśca yathā haṁsāḥ pittaharāḥ snigdhā madhurā

guravo himāḥ . vātaśleṣmapradāścāpi balaśukrakarā matāḥ bhāvapra°

taḍḍimbaguṇāḥ haṁsaḍimbaṁ paraṁ valya vṛṁhaṇaṁ vātanāśanam .

pāke laghutaraṁ proktaṁ sarvāmayavināśanam rājani° . asya

darśanādeḥ śubhāśubhatvaṁ vasantarājñaśākune uktaṁ yathā kāṣṭhāsu

sarvāsvapi darśanena haṁsasya śabdasya tu sarvasiddhiḥ . nāmāni

haṁsasya śṛṇoti yastu prayānti nāśaṁ duritāni tasya . cauraiḥ samaṁ

darśanamādyaśabde nidhirdvitīye’tha bhayaṁ tṛtīye . yuddhaṁ caturthe

nṛpatiprasādaḥ syāt pañcame haṁsarave narāṇām .

yatibhedahasalakṣaṇaṁ paramahaṁsaśabde 4237 pṛ° dṛśyam . prāṇasya

hasapadārthatve heturuktaḥ padārthādarśe ucchvāse caiva śvāme ca

hasa ityakṣaradvayam . tasmāt prāṇastu haṁsātmā ātmākāreṇa

saṁsthitaḥ . nābherucchāsaniśvasāt hṛdayāgnervyavasthitiḥ .

हंसांशु — haṁsāṁśu Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haṁsāṁśu mfn. «swan-rayed», swan-coloured, white
हरि — hari Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hari mfn. (for 2. see col.3) bearing, carrying (see «dṛti» and «nātha-h-«).

hari mfn. (prob. fr. a lost «hṛ», «to be yellow or green»; for 1. «hari» see

above, col.2) fawn-coloured, reddish brown, brown, tawny, pale yellow,

yellow, fallow, bay (esp. applied to horses), green, greenish &c, &c.

hari m. yellow or reddish brown or green (the colour)

hari m. a horse, steed (esp. of Indra) &c. &c.

hari m. a lion &c.

hari m. the sign of the zodiac Leo

hari m. the sun

hari m. = «hari-nakṣatra»

hari m. a monkey &c.

hari m. ( also, a ray of light; the moon; Phaseolus Mungo; a jackal; a

parrot; a peacock; the Koil or Indian cuckoo; a goose; a frog; a snake;

fire)

hari m. the wind or N. of Vāyu (god of the wind)

hari m. of Indra &c.

hari m. (esp.) N. of Viṣṇu-Kṛiṣṇa (in this sense thought by some to be

derived from «hṛ», «to take away or remove evil or sin») &c.

hari m. of Brahmā

hari m. of Yama

hari m. of śiva

hari m. of śukra

hari m. of Su-parṇa

hari m. of a son of Garuḍa

hari m. of a Rākṣasa

hari m. of a Dānava

hari m. of a son of Akampaua (or Anukampana)

hari m. of a son of Tārakākṣa

hari m. of a son of Parājit

hari m. of a son of Parāvṛit

hari m. of a worshipper of Viṣṇu

hari m. of various authors and scholars (esp. of the poet Bhartṛi-hari as

the author of the Vākya-padīya; also with «miśra, bhaṭṭa, dīkṣita» &c.)

hari m. of a mountain

hari m. of a world (cf. «hari-varṣa»)

hari m. of a metre

hari m. of a partic. high number

hari pl. men, people (= «manuṣyāḥ»)

mfn. a partic. class of gods under Manu Tāmasa

hari mfn. («ī») f. N. of the mythical mother of the monkeys ‘holus’,

‘helvus’, ‘fulvus’; Lith. ‘zalias’, ‘zelti’; Slav. ‘zelenu’; Germ. ‘gelo’, ‘gelb’;

Eng. ‘yellow’.]

hari ind. (for 1. see p.1289, col.2; for 2. an exclamation («alas!»)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

hari a. [hṛ-in]

(1) Green, greenishyellow.

(2) Tawny, bay, reddishbrown (kapila); hariyugyaṁ haristasmai

prajibāya puraṁdaraḥ R. 12. 84, 3. 43.

(3) Yellow. —riḥ

(1) N. of Viṣṇu; hariryathaikaḥ puruṣottamaḥ smṛtaḥ R. 3. 49.

(2) N. of Indra; R. 3. 55, 68, 8. 79.

(3) N. of Śiva.

(4) N. of Brahman.

(5) N. of Yama.

(6) The sun.

(7) The moon.

(8) A man.

(9) A ray of light. (10) Fire.

(11) Wind.

(12) A lion; Bv. 1. 50, 51.

(13) A horse.

(14) A horse of Indra; satyamatītya harito harīṁśca vartaṁte vājinaḥ

S. 1, 7. 7.

(15) An ape, a monkey; U. 3. 45, R. 12. 57.

(16) The cuckoo.

(17) A frog.

(18) A parrot.

(19) A snake. (20) The tawny green or yellow colour.

(21) A peacock.

(22) N. of the poet Bhartṛhari.

— Comp.

—akṣaḥ 1 a lion. 2. N. of Kubera. 3. of Śiva.

—aśvaḥ 1 Indra. —2. Śiva.

—kāṁta a. 1. dear to Indra. —2. beautiful as a lion

—kelīyaḥ the country called vaṁga q. v.

—keśaḥ N. of Śiva.

—gaṁdhaṁ a kind of sandal.

—caṁdanaḥ —naṁ 1. a kind of yellow sandal (the wood or tree);

R. 3. 59, 6. 60; S. 7. 2; Ku. 5. 69. —2. one of the five trees of paradise;

paṁcaite devataravo maṁdāraḥ pārijātakaḥ . saṁtānaḥ kalpavṛkṣaśca

puṁsi vā haricaṁdanaṁ Ak. (

—naṁ.) 1. moonlight. —2. saffron. —3. the filament of a lotus.

—tālaḥ (by some regarded as derived from harita) a kind of

yellow-coloured pigeon. (

—laṁ) yellow orpiment; H. D. 1; Śi. 4. 21; Ku. 7. 23, 33. (

—lī)

(1) the Dūrvā grass. —2. a streak or line in the sky. —3. = haritālikā

(1). —tālakaḥ a kind of yellow-coloured pigeon. (—kaṁ) 1. yellow

orpiment. —2. a theatrical de coration. —tālikā 1. the fourth day of the

bright half of Bhādrapada. —2. the Dūrvā plant. —turaṁgamaḥ N. of Indra.

—dāsaḥ a worshipper or votary of Viṣṇu. —dinaṁ a particular day sacred

to Viṣṇu. —devaḥ the asterism Śravaṇa. —dravaḥ 1. a green fluid. —2.

powder of the blossoms of the Nāgakeśara tree. —druḥ a tree. —dvāraṁ

N. of a celebrated Tīrtha or sacred bathing-place. —netraṁ 1. the eye of

Viṣṇu. —2. the white lotus. (—traḥ) an owl. —padaṁ the vernal equinox.

—parṇaṁ a radish. —priyaḥ 1. the Kadamba tree. —2. a conch-shell. —3. a

fool. —4. a madman. —5. Śiva. (—yaṁ) the root Uśīra. —2. a sort of

sandal. —priyā 1. Lakṣmī. —2. the sacred basil. —3. the earth. —4. the

twelfth day of a lunar fortnight. —bhaktaḥ a worshipper of Viṣṇu. —bhuj

m. a snake. —maṁthaḥ, —maṁthakaḥ a chick-pea. —locanaḥ 1. a crab.

—2. an owl. —vaṁśaḥ N. of a celebrated work by Vyāsa supplementary to

the Mahābhārata. —varṣaḥ N. of one of the nine divisions of Jambudvīpa.

—vallabhā 1. Lakṣmī. —2. the sacred basil. —vāsaraḥ ‘Viṣṇu’s day,’ the

eleventh day of a lunar fortnight (ekādaśī). —vāhanaḥ 1. Garuḍa. —2.

Indra. -diś f. the east. —vījaṁ yellow orpiment. —śaraḥ an epithet of Śiva

(Viṣṇu having served Śiva as the shaft which burnt down ‘the three cities’

or cities of the demon Tripura). —sakhaḥ a Gandharva. —saṁkīrtanaṁ

repeating the name of Viṣṇu. —sutaḥ, —sūnuḥ N. of Arjuna. —hayaḥ 1.

Indra; R. 9. 18. —2. the sun. —3. N. of Skanda. —4. of Gaṇeśa. —haraḥ a

particular form of deity consisting of Viṣṇu and Śiva conjoined. -ātmakaḥ

1. N. of Garuḍa. —2. of Śiva’s bull. —hetiḥ f. 1. the rain-bow;

kathamavalokayeyamadhunā harihetimatīḥ (kakubhaḥ) Māl. 9. 18. —2. the

discus of Viṣṇu. -hūtiḥ the ruddy goose; Śi. 9. 15.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hari UṆĀDIS. 4, 118. 1) adj. «fahl, blassgelb, gelblich» (namentlich als

Farbe des Rosses); «grünlich» AK. 3, 4, 25, 177. H. 1396. an. 2, 470. fg.

MED. r. 100. fg. HALĀY. 4, 50. ṚV. 4, 15, 7. 8. 5, 27, 2. Agni heisst vṛṣā

hariḥ 7, 10, 1. 8, 25, 23. VS. 13, 42. insbes. der Rosse des Indra NAIGH.

1, 15. du. ṚV. 1, 20, 2. 35, 2. 55, 7 u.s.w. 2, 18, 4. TS. 6, 5, 9, 2. pl. ṚV.

3, 44, 1. 50, 2. 4, 16, 1 u.s.w. 6, 47, 18. des Vāyu 4, 48, 5. harīṇāṁ patiḥ

8, 24, 14. als Farbe des Soma 1, 121, 8. 8, 58, 5. 9, 30, 5. 32, 2. 50, 3.

divā harirdadṛśe naktamṛjraḥ 97, 9. 10, 96, 2. 6. VS. 8, 11. der Soma —

Steine ṚV. 3, 44, 1. 5. des Indra — Keils 4. Indra’s selbst (nach Comm.) 3.

des Feuers 8, 43, 4. des suparṇa AV. 19, 65, 1. der Sonne ṚV. 10, 96, 1.

1, 95, 1. des haṁsa AV. 10, 8, 18. vṛṣā hariḥ VS. 38, 22; vgl. ŚAT. BR. 14,

3, 1, 26 und vārṣāhara. Haare ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 2. 3, 2, 1, 3. pitā hariḥ

heisst Varuṇa AV. 5, 11, 1. — Rosse (subst. s. bes.) MBH. 3, 1720. R. 3,

9, 5. 10. 5, 12, 34. RAGH. 3, 43. 12, 84. -śmaśrujaṭādhara MBH. 13, 2660.

-locana R. 4, 16, 9. candana (vgl. haricandana) MBH. 7, 2922. -madhyā

(zugleich Viṣṇu) RĀJA-TAR. 3, 416. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 34, 2. śaṣpa BHĀG.

P. 10, 20, 11. -dhūmrakeśa HARIV. 12949. -piṅga MBH. 1, 8080. -piṅgala

13, 7414. R. GORR. 1, 60, 12. 4, 20, 21. 7, 23, 4, 32. — 2) m. a) «Ross»,

insbes. Indra’s (s. auch unter 1) AK. H. 1233. TRIK. 2, 8, 41 (hariḥ

krāntaḥ zu lesen). H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 281. 5, 70. MBH. 3, 11903.

11921. 12003. 13, 4896. HARIV. 4943. RAGH. 12, 103. KATHĀS. 19, 108.

harito harīṁśca «die Rosse des Sonnengottes und» Indra’s ŚĀK. 6, 5. 166.

BHĀG. P. 8, 11, 16. — b) «Löwe» AK. 2, 5, 1. 3, 4, 25, 177. H. 1283. H. an.

MED. HALĀY. 2, 59. 5, 70. MBH. 3, 15645. 7, 7634. R. 2, 97, 5. RAGH. 2,

59. VIKR. 16. ZdmG.27, 96. SĀH. D. 237, 16. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 47. Spr.

(II) 3366. BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 44. 8, 2, 6. 10, 9. 10, 53, 56. — c) «der Löwe im

Thierkreise» VARĀH. BṚH. 18, 16. 19, 2. 24, 14. — d) «Affe» AK. 3, 4, 25,

177. H. 1292. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 76. 5, 70. MBH. 1, 2624. 2628. 3,

16275. R. 1, 16, 6. 2, 96, 22. 3, 20, 26. 78, 19. 4, 28, 28. 38, 26. 30. 7,

91, 10. UTTARAR. 65, 14 (84, 9). RAGH. 12, 57. 15, 99. WEBER, RĀMAT.

UP. 299. — e) «Schakal» (bhīru) NĀNĀRTHADHVANIM. in Verz. d. Oxf. H.

194,a, No. 445. — f) «Papagei» AK. H. an. MED. «Pfau, der indische

Kuckuck» und «Gans» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — g) «Frosch» AK. H. 1354. H.

an. MED. HALĀY. 3, 40. 5, 70. «Schlange» AK. H. an. MED. — h)

«Phaseolus Mungo» (mudga) H. 1172. — i) «die Sonne» AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 99.

H. an. MED. HĀR. 11. HALĀY. 1, 35. 5, 70. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 24, 18. — k)

«Lichtstrahl» AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 86. H. an. MED. — l) «der Mond» AK. H. an.

MED. HĀR. 13. HALĀY. 5, 70. — m) «Wind» AK. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1,

76. 5, 70. «der Gott des Windes» R. ed. Bomb. 1, 32, 23. vāyu v. l. im

Comm. — n) ein Name a) Indra’s AK. TRIK.1,1,57. H. 171. H. an. MED.

HALĀY.1,52.5,70. JAṬĀDH. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 191,a,29. Spr. (II) 207.

R.1,15,26. RAGH.3,43. 55. 68.9,57. 12,103. ŚĀK. 95,1. 156. 162.

BRAHMA-P. in LA. (III) 53,19. SĀH. D. 237,16. — b) Viṣṇu’s oder Kṛṣṇa’s

AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 28. H. 214. H. an. HALĀY. 1, 23. 5, 70. Ind. St. 1, 79. 2, 7.

92. 9, 81. BHAG. 11, 9. 18, 77. MBH. 1, 1167. 3, 15553.6, 301. HARIV. 10.

2382. 7447. R. 1, 31, 13. 45, 23. RAGH. 3, 49. KUMĀRAS. 7, 44. ŚĀK.

165. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 286. KṚṢṆAJ. 222 u.s.w. Spr. (II) 671. 3452.

6408. 6859. 7173. 7369. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 98, 5. 99, 1. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 126.

416 (zugleich adj.). 451. PRAB. 54,12. BHĀG.

P.1,2,23.4,30,24.7,10,24.8,1,30. PAÑCAT. Pr. 1. VET. in LA. (III)1,14.

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 45,b,31. SĀH. D. 237,16. HALL 126. SARVADARŚANAS.

46,3. 57. 16. 66,15. 67,9. 69,13. 17. 72,4. BURNOUF, Intr. 131. — g)

Jama’s AK. H. 184. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 72. 5, 70. — d) Brahman’s und

Śiva’s MED. hariṁ (= Brahman Comm.) harantamanuyanti devāḥ TAITT.

ĀR. 10, 49. — e) Śukra’s und Suparṇa’s (vgl. unter 1)

NĀNĀRTHADHVANIM. a. a. O. — z) «des Feuers» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.

KĀLAC. 1, 15. — o) «ein best. Metrum: metrical sequence»COLEBR. Misc.

Ess. 2, 162 (XII, 8). — p) elliptisch für -nakṣatra «das» Nakshatra Śravaṇa

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 60, 21. 98, 17; vgl. harideva. — q) pl. = apatya NAIGH.

2, 2. — r) «eine best. hohe Zahl» bei den Buddhisten VYUTP. 182. Mel.

asiat. 4, 638, N. — s) N. pr. a) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern unter Manu

Tāmasa VP. 262. MĀRK. P. 74, 57. BHĀG. P. 8, 1, 28. = jayāḥ in einer

früheren Geburt Verz. d. Oxf. H. 56,b,33. — b) eines Sohnes des Garuḍa

MBH. 5, 3598. — g) eines Rākṣasa MBH. 3, 16365. — d) eines Dānava

HARIV. 2283. 14284. — e) verschiedener Männer: ein Sohn Akampana’s

(Anukampaka’s) MBH. 7, 2030. fgg. 12, 9151. fgg. Tārakākṣa’s 8, 1417.

fgg. Parājit’s HARIV. 1980. Parāvṛt’s VP. 421, N. 12. ein Verehrer Viṣṇu’s

BHĀG. P. 5, 4, 11. = bhartṛ- TRIK.2,7,26. ZdmG.7,164. Verz. d. Oxf. H.

161,b,9. 162,b,30. 247,b,13. Verz. d. Tüb. H. 13. SARVADARŚANAS.

140,1. 144,5. 146,5. — Verz. d. B. H. No. 969. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 320,b, No.

760. 335,a, No. 787. 352,b,7 (sein Geschlecht). RĀJA-TAR. 6, 166. HALL

31. 50. 75. — z) einer Welt H. an. MED.; vgl. harivarṣa. — 3) f. harī N.

«der Urmutter der Affen» MBH. 1, 2624. 2628. R. 3, 20, 26. — Vgl. nara-,

nṛ-, bhartṛ-, vana-, śrī-, sarva-.

hari (von 1. har) adj. «tragend» u. s. w. in dṛti- und nātha- P. 3, 2, 25.

hari1 1) Adj. «fahl, blassgelb, gelblich» (namentlich als Farbe des Rosses)

; «grünlich.» 2) m. a) «Ross», insbes. Indra’s. b) «Löwe.» c) «der Löwe im

Thierkreise.» d) «Affe.» e) «Schakal.» f) «Papagei» g) Pfau ; der indische

Kuckuck. (!) h) Gans i) «Frosch.» k) «Schlange.» l) «Phaseolus Mungo.» m)

«die Sonne.» n) «Lichtstrahl.» o) «der Mond.» p) «Feuer.» q) «Wind, der

Gott des Windes.» r) Bein. a) Indra’s. b) Viṣṇu-Kṛṣṇa’s. g) Jama’s. d)

Brahman’s. e) *Śiva’s. z) Śukra’s. h) Suparṇa’s. s) «ein best. Metrum.» t)

elliptisch für harinakṣatra «das Mondhaus Śravaṇa» u) «eine best. hohe

Zahl» (buddh.). v) Pl. = apatya. w) N.pr. a) Pl. einer Klasse von Göttern

unter Manu Tāmasa und = jayās in einer früheren Geburt. b) eines

Sohnes des Garuḍa. g) eines Rākṣasa. d) eines Dānava. e) verschiedener

Männer. z) eines Berges VP.2,4,41. h) einer Welt. 3) f. harī N.pr. «der

Urmutter der Affen.»

hari2 Adj. «tragend» u.s.w. in dṛti- und nātha-.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

hari 1 I A synonym of Viṣṇu. (See under Viṣṇu).

hari 2 II A warrior of Subrahmaṇya. (Śalya Parva, Chapter 45, Verse 61).

hari 3 III A warrior who fought on the side of the Pāṇḍavas and was

killed by Karṇa.

hari 4 IV An asura, the son of Tārakākṣa, who got from Brahmā a boon

enabling him to prepare Mṛtasaṅjīvanī. (a medicine to revive dead

people). (Karṇa Parva, Chapter 33, Verse 27).

hari 5 V Son of King Akaṁpana. Though he was as powerful and

proficient in archery as Mahāviṣṇu, and equal in prowess to Indra in war

he got into the hands of his enemies and was killed. (Droṇa Parva,

Chapter 52, Verse 27).

hari 6 VI A particular sect of the attendants of Rāvaṇa. They attacked

the army of monkeys. (Vana Parva, Chapter 285).

hari 7 VII A very powerful bird born in Garuḍa’s dynasty. (Udyoga Parva,

Chapter 101, Verse 13).

hari 7i VIII A particular species of horses. They possess long hairs on the

neck and are golden in colour. (Droṇa Parva, Chapter 23, Verse 13).

hari 1x IX A daughter born to Kaśyapaprajāpati by his wife Krodhavaśā.

Lions and monkeys originated from this Hari. (Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa,

Araṇyakāṇḍa, Canto 14).

hari x X A son of Dharmadeva. Dharmadeva begot four sons, Hari, Kṛṣṇa,

Nara and Nārāyaṇa of the daughters of Dakṣa. (Devi Bhāgavata, 4th

Skandha).

hari xi XI A sect of Devas. During the Tāmasamanvantara there were

four such sects, viz. Haris, Satyas, Supāras and Sudhīs. (See

Manvantara).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

hari hari (curtailed harit),

I. adj.

1. Green.

2. Tawny.

3. Yellow, Indr. 1, 7; Arj. 4, 12.

II. m.

1. Green, tawny, yellow, the colour.

2. Viṣṇu or Kṛṣṇa, Hit. pr. d. 28, M. M.; Pañc. pr. d. 1.

3. Indra, Śāk. d. 156.

4. Śiva.

5. Yama.

6. The sun, Mālat. 149, 1.

7. The moon.

8. A ray of light.

9. Fire.

10. Wind.

11. A horse (of Indra; cf. the ved. use of harit, and Śāk. 6, 5); Arj. 4,

32.

12. A lion, Vikr. d. 16.

13. A parrot.

14. The Indian cuckoo.

15. A peacock.

16. A goose.

17. An ape, Utt. Rāmac. 84, 9.

18. A frog.

19. A snake.

20. One of the varṣas, or divisions, into which the continent is divided.

— Comp. nara-, and nṛ-, m. Viṣṇu, in his fourth avatāra, as a lionheaded

man, Bhāg. P. 5, 18, 7; 7, 8, 27.

— Cf. A. S. growan; O.H.G. groen, groni; A. S. groen, grene; also geal,

gealla; Lat. gilvus; [greek] and probably [greek] cf. harit.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

hari a. fallow, yellowish, greenish. m. horse, esp. the steeds of Indra (2,

but also 20-200), lion, ape, the sun, fire, wind, E. of Viṣṇu, Indra etc.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

hari har-i, a. [3. hṛ, be yellow] tawny, yellow (esp. of horses); greenish

(rare, C.); m. (C.) steed (sp. of Indra); lion; monkey; N. of Indra and

(more commonly) of Viṣṇu-kṛṣṇa; N. of a various men; (hari)-keśa, a.

tawny-haried;

-gaṇa, m. troop of horses; N.;

-ghoṣa, m. N.;

-candana, m. (?) Indra’s sandal tree (one of the five trees in Indra’s

paradise); kind of sandal tree; n. yellow sandal;

-candra, m. N.;

-cāpa, m. n. Indra’s bow, rainbow.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

hari pu° hṛ—in . 1 viṣṇau 2 siṁhe 3 sarpe 4 vānare 5 bheke 6 śukakhage

amaraḥ . 7 cadre 8 sūrye 9 vāyau 10 aśve 11 yame 12 hare 13 brahmaṇi

14 kiraṇe jambudvīpasya 15 varṣabhede 16 indre ca medi° 17 mayūre 18

kokile 19 haṁse 20 vahnau śabdara° . bhartṛharināmake vākyapradīya

granthakārake 21 paṇḍite trikā° . 22 piṅgalavarṇe 23 hari dvarṇe

hemaca° 24 tadvati tri° . hariṁ viditvā haribhiśca vājibhiḥ raghu . 25 pīte

anekārthako° .

हरिण — hariṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariṇa mf («ī») n. (the fem. «hariṇī» belongs to «harita») fawn-coloured,

yellowish, tawny (also said of unhealthy complexion), greenish, green

hariṇa m. yellowish (&c.) the colour

hariṇa m. a deer, antelope, fawn, stag (one of 5 kinds, others being

called «ṛṣya, ruru, pṛṣata, mṛga») &c. &c.

hariṇa m. an ichneumon

hariṇa m. a goose

hariṇa m. the sun

hariṇa m. a minor division of the world

hariṇa m. N. of Viṣṇu or śiva

hariṇa m. of a Gaṇa of śiva

hariṇa m. of a serpent. demon

hariṇa m. of an ichneumon (v.l. «harita»)

hariṇa mf («ī») n. («ī») f. see below.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

hariṇa a. (ṇī f.) [hṛ-inan]

(1) Pale, whitish.

(2) Reddish or yel lowish white. —ṇaḥ

(1) A deer, an antelope; (said to be of five kinds: —hariṇaścāpi

vijñeyaḥ paṁcabhedo’tra bhairava . ṛṣyaḥ khaḍgo ruruścaiva pṛṣataśca

mṛgastathā Kalikā P.); api prasannaṁ hariṇeṣu te manaḥ Ku. 5. 35.

(2) The white colour.

(3) A goose.

(4) The sun.

(5) Viṣṇu.

(6) Śiva.

— Comp.

—akṣa a. deer-eyed, fawn-eyed. (

—kṣaḥ) N. of Śiva. (

—kṣī) ‘deer-eyed’, a woman with beautiful eyes.

—aṁkaḥ 1. the moon. —2. camphor.

—kalaṁkaḥ, —dhāmanu m. the moon.

—nayana, —natre, —locana a. deereyed, fawn-eyed.

—nartakaḥ a Kinnara.

—hṛdaya a. deer-hearted, timid.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hariṇa UṆĀDIS. 3, 46. 1) adj. proparox. ŚĀNT. 2, 10. «fahl, gelblich» (vgl.

hari, harit, harita) AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. 1392. an. 3, 233. MED.

ṇ. 87 (lies viśade). HALĀY. 4, 47. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. die Sonne

PRAŚNOP. 1, 8 = MAITRJUP. 6, 8. ein siecher Mann MBH. 2, 1741. 5,

3742. 13, 4828. 5886. 5889. fgg. f. ī s. u. harita. — 2) m. a) «Gazelle

(Antilope cervicapra» MOLESWORTH s. v. haraṇa) AK. 2, 5, 8. 3, 4, 3, 24.

H. 1293. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 75. VIŚVA a. a. O. ṚV. 1, 163, 1. 5, 78, 2.

gehörnt AV. 3, 7, 1. 2. 6, 67, 3. yaddhariṇo yavamatti VS. 23, 30. TS. 5, 5,

19, 1. ŚAT. BR. 13, 2, 9, 8. -carman KAUŚ. 16. MBH. 3, 11342. 15629. R.

2, 34, 50. SUŚR. 1, 46, 20. 73, 6. 200, 8. 15. VĀGBH. 6, 44. RAGH. 9, 57.

KUMĀRAS. 5, 15. ad ŚĀK. 78. Spr. (II) 7368. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 104, 28.

KATHĀS. 22, 128. 96, 26 (arthahariṇāḥ «Reichthümer als Gazellen»).

BHĀG. P.3,21,44.8,2,21. PAÑCAT. 140,23. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 123,a,1. v. u. —

lolākṣī R. 5, 25, 45. -locanā 33, 17. hariṇākṣa adj. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 65.

f. hariṇākṣī Spr. (II) 637. 2509. 6519. KATHĀS. 33, 88. PRAB. 40, 12.

hariṇekṣaṇā Spr. (II) 6408. śiśuhariṇadṛś 3801. — b) «die Sonne; Gans»;

ein N. Viṣṇu’s und Śiva’s ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — c) N. pr. a) eines

Schlangendämons MBH. 1, 2152. — b) eines Gaṇa Śiva’s Journ. of the Am.

Or. S. 6, 523. — g) eines Ichneumons (nakula) MBH. 12, 4942 nach der

Lesart der ed. Bomb.; harita ed. Calc. — 2) f. ī gaṇa gaurādi zu P. 4, 1, 41.

a) «Gazellenweibchen» AK. 3, 4, 13, 53. TS. 7, 4, 19, 2 (v. l. zu VS. 23,

20). MBH. 3, 2424. 11342. HARIV. 4827. R. 3, 62, 37. RAGH. 2, 11. 9, 55.

14, 69. Spr. (II) 1456. 7370. CAURAP. 28. BHĀG. P. 5, 8, 1. 9, 23, 8.

cakitahariṇīprekṣita MEGH. 102. cakitahariṇīprekṣaṇā 80. — b) Bez.

«zweier Pflanzen»: = mañjiṣṭhā und svarṇayūthī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c)

Bez. «einer best. Schönen» H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. śukābhā HALĀY. 4,

53. — d) «eine Statue von Gold» AK. H. 1464. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O.

HALĀY. 1, 131. Spr. (II) 5497. — e) «ein best. Metrum» H. an. (vṛtta st.

vṛnta zu lesen). MED. VIŚVA. a. a. O. metrical sequenceCOLEBR. Misc.

Ess. 2, 162 (XII, 4). ŚRUT. 39. CHANDOM. 93. Ind. St. 8, 394. fg. — f)

Bez. «einer best.» Svarabhakti Comm. zu TS. PRĀT. 21, 15. WEBER,

PRATIJÑĀS. 108. — g) N. pr. a) einer Apsaras RAGH. 8, 78. — b) einer

Yakṣiṇī SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 297 (67). — g) der Mutter Hari’s (Viṣṇu’s)

BHĀG. P. 8, 1, 30. — Vgl. mandara-, vegi-, hāriṇa, hāriṇika.

hariṇa 1) Adj. (f. hariṇī) gehört zu harita «fahl, gelblich» (auch von der

Farbe siecher Männer) ; «grünlich, grün.» 2) m. a) «Gazelle», wohl

«Antilope cervicapra» ŚIŚ.6,9.13,56. b) «Ichneumon» MAITR.S.3,9,3

(116,17). Vgl. f)greek). c) die Sonne. d) «Gans.» e) Bein. Viṣṇu’s und

Śiva’s. f) N.pr. a) eines Schlangendämons. b) eines Gaṇa Śiva’s. g) eines

Ichneumons MBH.12,138,31. vgl. 20 «b).» 3) f. ī a) «Gazellenweibchen»

ŚIŚ.12,30. b) «Rubia Munjista» RĀJAN.6,192. c) «gelber Jasmin»

RĀJAN.10,99. d) Bez. «einer best. Schönen.» e) «eines Statue von Gold.»

f) Pl. Bez. «der Verse» AV.18,2,11-18 KAUŚ.80,3.5.82.83. VAITĀN.37,24.

g) «ein best. Metrum.» h) «eine best. Svarabhakti.» i) N.pr. a) einer

Apsara’s. b) einer Yskṣṇī. g) der Mutter Hari’s (Viṣṇu’s).

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

hariṇa A nāga which belonged to the Airāvata family. It was burnt to

death at the Sarpasatra of Janamejava. (Ādi Parva, Chapter 57, Verse

11).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

hariṇa (akin to harit, cf. hari),

I. adj., f. ṇī, Yellowish-white, MBh. 13, 5893; Rājat. 5, 482.

II. m.

1. Yellowish-white (the colour).

2. White.

3. A deer, an antelope, Pañc. 140, 23.

4. A goose.

5. Viṣṇu, Śiva.

6. A minor division of the world.

III. f. ṇī.

1. A doe, Megh. 80; 102.

2. Yellow jasmine.

3. A beautiful woman.

4. A golden image, Rājat. 5, 15.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

hariṇa a. fallow, pale, yellowish, green; m. a kind of antelope (f. -ṇī),

ichneumon, N. of a serpent-demon etc.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

hariṇa hariṇa, a. (ī) yellowish, tawny (also of unhealthy complexion); m.

antelope, gazelle: -ka, m. dim. gazelle;

-dhāman, m. abode of the antelope, moon;

-nayanā, f. gazelle-eyed woman;

-lakṣman, m. (marked with an antelope), moon;

-lāñchana, m. id.;

-locana, a. gazelle-eyed;

-śiśu, m. fawn;

-akṣa, a. (ī) gazelle-eyed: -ī, f. — woman.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

hariṇa puṁstrī° hṛ—inan . svanāmakhyāte 1 paśau amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 2

śive 3 viṣṇau 4 haṁse 5 śuklavarṇe 6 pāṇḍuvarṇe ca . 7 tadvati tri°

amaraḥ . hariṇaḥ śītalo vaddha° viṇmūtro dīpano lathuḥ . rase pāke ca

madhuraḥ sugandhaḥ sannipātahā rājava° tanmāṁsaguṇāḥ . hariṇaścāpi

vijñeyaḥ pañcabhedo’tra bhairava! . ṛṣyaḥ khaṅgo ruruścaiva pṛṣataśca

mṛgastathā . ete balipradāneṣu carmadāne ca kīrtitāḥ kālikāpu° 66 a° .

हरिनेत्र — harinetra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harinetra «hari-netra» n. the eye of Viṣṇu

n. a white lotus

n. an eye of a greenish colour

harinetra «hari-netra» mfn. having yellow eyes

harinetra «hari-netra» m. an owl

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

harinetra n. 1) Hari’s d. i. Viṣṇu’s «Auge» MĀRK. P. 81, 52. — 2) «eine

weisse Lotusblüthe» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

harinetra 1) adj. «gelbäugig»: Śiva MBH. 14, 194. — 2) m. «Eule» TRIK. 2,

5, 14. HĀR. 185.

harinetra1 n. 1) «Hari’s ~, d.i. Viṣṇu’s Auge.» 2) «*eine weisse

Lotusblüthe» RĀJAN.10,182.

harinetra2 1) Adj. «gelbäugig.» 2) *m. «Eule.»

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

harinetra a. yellow-eyed (Śiva).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

harinetra na° harernetramiva . 1 śvetapadme rājani° . 6 ta° . 2

viṣṇorlocane . hareḥ siṁhasyeva netramasya dīrṣatvāt . 3 pecake

puṁstrī° trikā° striyāṁ ṅīṣ .

Comments

Write a comment

*